Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Comment: | Add spell-checking for all comments in main sources. (./src/ .c .h .in) make target "misspell" tells of misspelled words for which no exceptions have been put into tool/custom.txt . |
---|---|
Downloads: | Tarball | ZIP archive | SQL archive |
Timelines: | family | ancestors | descendants | both | trunk |
Files: | files | file ages | folders |
SHA3-256: |
5332abf0ad8ef42c44e9dd7045d017bb |
User & Date: | larrybr 2023-06-07 23:10:40 |
2023-06-08
| ||
12:52 | Enhance Lemon so that it remembers which -D command-line options are actually used in the grammar and includes a list of all such options in the header of the generated output file. (check-in: c47a4dbd user: drh tags: trunk) | |
2023-06-07
| ||
23:10 | Add spell-checking for all comments in main sources. (./src/ .c .h .in) make target "misspell" tells of misspelled words for which no exceptions have been put into tool/custom.txt . (check-in: 5332abf0 user: larrybr tags: trunk) | |
17:03 | Fix straggler misspellings and tidy the custom dictionary. Also include pickups from forum post c61fb09afd. (Closed-Leaf check-in: 8c291d99 user: larrybr tags: spell-check) | |
15:00 | Remove additional traces of FTS1 and FTS2 that were missed by [2bb50d5aedef0fd2] (check-in: 9a12bac5 user: drh tags: trunk) | |
Changes to Makefile.in.
︙ | ︙ | |||
595 596 597 598 599 600 601 | SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_UNKNOWN_SQL_FUNCTION SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_STMTVTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBPAGE_VTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBSTAT_VTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC | | | 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 | SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_UNKNOWN_SQL_FUNCTION SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_STMTVTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBPAGE_VTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBSTAT_VTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC FUZZERSHELL_OPT = FUZZCHECK_OPT += -I$(TOP)/test FUZZCHECK_OPT += -I$(TOP)/ext/recover FUZZCHECK_OPT += \ -DSQLITE_OSS_FUZZ \ -DSQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB \ -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBPAGE_VTAB \ -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBSTAT_VTAB \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 | rm -f fuzzershell fuzzershell.exe rm -f fuzzcheck fuzzcheck.exe rm -f sqldiff sqldiff.exe rm -f dbhash dbhash.exe rm -f fts5.* fts5parse.* rm -f threadtest5 rm -f src-verify distclean: clean rm -f sqlite_cfg.h config.log config.status libtool Makefile sqlite3.pc \ $(TESTPROGS) # # Windows section | > | 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 | rm -f fuzzershell fuzzershell.exe rm -f fuzzcheck fuzzcheck.exe rm -f sqldiff sqldiff.exe rm -f dbhash dbhash.exe rm -f fts5.* fts5parse.* rm -f threadtest5 rm -f src-verify rm -f custom.rws distclean: clean rm -f sqlite_cfg.h config.log config.status libtool Makefile sqlite3.pc \ $(TESTPROGS) # # Windows section |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 | -Wl,"--strip-all" $(REAL_LIBOBJ) # # Fiddle app # fiddle: sqlite3.c shell.c make -C ext/wasm fiddle emcc_opt=-Os | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 | -Wl,"--strip-all" $(REAL_LIBOBJ) # # Fiddle app # fiddle: sqlite3.c shell.c make -C ext/wasm fiddle emcc_opt=-Os # # Spell-checking for source comments # The sources checked are either C sources or C source templates. # Their comments are extracted and processed through aspell using # a custom dictionary that contains scads of odd identifiers that # find their way into the comments. # # Currently, this target is setup to be "made" in-tree only. # The output is ephemeral. Redirect it to guide spelling fixups, # either to correct spelling or add words to tool/custom.txt. # ./custom.rws: ./tool/custom.txt @echo 'Updating custom dictionary from tool/custom.txt' aspell --lang=en create master ./custom.rws < $< misspell: ./custom.rws $(TCLSH_CMD) ./tool/spellsift.tcl ./src/*.c ./src/*.h ./src/*.in |
Changes to src/alter.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */ const char *zDb, /* Name of db to verify schema of */ int bTemp, /* True if this is the temp db */ const char *zWhen, /* "when" part of error message */ int bNoDQS /* Do not allow DQS in the schema */ ){ pParse->colNamesSet = 1; | | | | | | | | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */ const char *zDb, /* Name of db to verify schema of */ int bTemp, /* True if this is the temp db */ const char *zWhen, /* "when" part of error message */ int bNoDQS /* Do not allow DQS in the schema */ ){ pParse->colNamesSet = 1; sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "SELECT 1 " "FROM \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " " "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'" " AND sql NOT LIKE 'create virtual%%'" " AND sqlite_rename_test(%Q, sql, type, name, %d, %Q, %d)=NULL ", zDb, zDb, bTemp, zWhen, bNoDQS ); if( bTemp==0 ){ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "SELECT 1 " "FROM temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " " "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'" " AND sql NOT LIKE 'create virtual%%'" " AND sqlite_rename_test(%Q, sql, type, name, 1, %Q, %d)=NULL ", zDb, zWhen, bNoDQS ); } } /* ** Generate VM code to replace any double-quoted strings (but not double-quoted ** identifiers) within the "sql" column of the sqlite_schema table in ** database zDb with their single-quoted equivalents. If argument bTemp is ** not true, similarly update all SQL statements in the sqlite_schema table ** of the temp db. */ static void renameFixQuotes(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb, int bTemp){ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET sql = sqlite_rename_quotefix(%Q, sql)" "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'" " AND sql NOT LIKE 'create virtual%%'" , zDb, zDb ); if( bTemp==0 ){ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET sql = sqlite_rename_quotefix('temp', sql)" "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'" " AND sql NOT LIKE 'create virtual%%'" ); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 | sqlite3ChangeCookie(pParse, iDb); sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(pParse->pVdbe, iDb, 0, p5); if( iDb!=1 ) sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(pParse->pVdbe, 1, 0, p5); } } /* | | | | | 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 | sqlite3ChangeCookie(pParse, iDb); sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(pParse->pVdbe, iDb, 0, p5); if( iDb!=1 ) sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(pParse->pVdbe, 1, 0, p5); } } /* ** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy" ** command. */ void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( Parse *pParse, /* Parser context. */ SrcList *pSrc, /* The table to rename. */ Token *pName /* The new table name. */ ){ int iDb; /* Database that contains the table */ char *zDb; /* Name of database iDb */ Table *pTab; /* Table being renamed */ char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */ int nTabName; /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */ const char *zTabName; /* Original name of the table */ Vdbe *v; VTable *pVTab = 0; /* Non-zero if this is a v-tab with an xRename() */ if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_rename_table; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
152 153 154 155 156 157 158 | /* Check that a table or index named 'zName' does not already exist ** in database iDb. If so, this is an error. */ if( sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3IsShadowTableOf(db, pTab, zName) ){ | | | 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 | /* Check that a table or index named 'zName' does not already exist ** in database iDb. If so, this is an error. */ if( sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3IsShadowTableOf(db, pTab, zName) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName); goto exit_rename_table; } /* Make sure it is not a system table being altered, or a reserved name ** that the table is being renamed to. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
195 196 197 198 199 200 201 | pVTab = 0; } } #endif /* Begin a transaction for database iDb. Then modify the schema cookie ** (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the schema). Call sqlite3MayAbort(), | | | | | | | | | 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 | pVTab = 0; } } #endif /* Begin a transaction for database iDb. Then modify the schema cookie ** (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the schema). Call sqlite3MayAbort(), ** as the scalar functions (e.g. sqlite_rename_table()) invoked by the ** nested SQL may raise an exception. */ v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v==0 ){ goto exit_rename_table; } sqlite3MayAbort(pParse); /* figure out how many UTF-8 characters are in zName */ zTabName = pTab->zName; nTabName = sqlite3Utf8CharLen(zTabName, -1); /* Rewrite all CREATE TABLE, INDEX, TRIGGER or VIEW statements in ** the schema to use the new table name. */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET " "sql = sqlite_rename_table(%Q, type, name, sql, %Q, %Q, %d) " "WHERE (type!='index' OR tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase)" "AND name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'" , zDb, zDb, zTabName, zName, (iDb==1), zTabName ); /* Update the tbl_name and name columns of the sqlite_schema table ** as required. */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET " "tbl_name = %Q, " "name = CASE " "WHEN type='table' THEN %Q " "WHEN name LIKE 'sqliteX_autoindex%%' ESCAPE 'X' " " AND type='index' THEN " "'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) " "ELSE name END " "WHERE tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND " "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');", zDb, zName, zName, zName, nTabName, zTabName ); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update ** it with the new table name. */ if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\".sqlite_sequence set name = %Q WHERE name = %Q", zDb, zName, pTab->zName); } #endif /* If the table being renamed is not itself part of the temp database, ** edit view and trigger definitions within the temp database ** as required. */ if( iDb!=1 ){ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE sqlite_temp_schema SET " "sql = sqlite_rename_table(%Q, type, name, sql, %Q, %Q, 1), " "tbl_name = " "CASE WHEN tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND " " sqlite_rename_test(%Q, sql, type, name, 1, 'after rename', 0) " "THEN %Q ELSE tbl_name END " "WHERE type IN ('view', 'trigger')" |
︙ | ︙ | |||
357 358 359 360 361 362 363 | } if( pNew->pIndex ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Cannot add a UNIQUE column"); return; } if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)==0 ){ | | | 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 | } if( pNew->pIndex ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Cannot add a UNIQUE column"); return; } if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)==0 ){ /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a ** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking ** for an SQL NULL default below. */ assert( pDflt==0 || pDflt->op==TK_SPAN ); if( pDflt && pDflt->pLeft->op==TK_NULL ){ pDflt = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
410 411 412 413 414 415 416 | while( zEnd>zCol && (*zEnd==';' || sqlite3Isspace(*zEnd)) ){ *zEnd-- = '\0'; } /* substr() operations on characters, but addColOffset is in bytes. So we ** have to use printf() to translate between these units: */ assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pTab) ); assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pNew) ); | | | | 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 | while( zEnd>zCol && (*zEnd==';' || sqlite3Isspace(*zEnd)) ){ *zEnd-- = '\0'; } /* substr() operations on characters, but addColOffset is in bytes. So we ** have to use printf() to translate between these units: */ assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pTab) ); assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pNew) ); sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET " "sql = printf('%%.%ds, ',sql) || %Q" " || substr(sql,1+length(printf('%%.%ds',sql))) " "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q", zDb, pNew->u.tab.addColOffset, zCol, pNew->u.tab.addColOffset, zTab ); sqlite3DbFree(db, zCol); } v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
458 459 460 461 462 463 464 | ); } } } /* ** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in | | | | | 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 | ); } } } /* ** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in ** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument ** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered. ** ** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure ** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point ** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition ** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to ** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c ** after parsing is finished. ** ** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete ** coding the "ALTER TABLE ... ADD" statement. */ void sqlite3AlterBeginAddColumn(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pSrc){ Table *pNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
567 568 569 570 571 572 573 | #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ zType = "virtual table"; } #endif if( zType ){ | | | 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 | #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ zType = "virtual table"; } #endif if( zType ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot %s %s \"%s\"", (bDrop ? "drop column from" : "rename columns of"), zType, pTab->zName ); return 1; } return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
607 608 609 610 611 612 613 | pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pSrc->a[0]); if( !pTab ) goto exit_rename_column; /* Cannot alter a system table */ if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_rename_column; if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 0) ) goto exit_rename_column; | | | 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 | pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pSrc->a[0]); if( !pTab ) goto exit_rename_column; /* Cannot alter a system table */ if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_rename_column; if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 0) ) goto exit_rename_column; /* Which schema holds the table to be altered */ iSchema = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); assert( iSchema>=0 ); zDb = db->aDb[iSchema].zDbSName; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION /* Invoke the authorization callback. */ if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_ALTER_TABLE, zDb, pTab->zName, 0) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
644 645 646 647 648 649 650 | ** CREATE statement text for the sqlite_schema table. */ sqlite3MayAbort(pParse); zNew = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pNew); if( !zNew ) goto exit_rename_column; assert( pNew->n>0 ); bQuote = sqlite3Isquote(pNew->z[0]); | | | | 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 | ** CREATE statement text for the sqlite_schema table. */ sqlite3MayAbort(pParse); zNew = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pNew); if( !zNew ) goto exit_rename_column; assert( pNew->n>0 ); bQuote = sqlite3Isquote(pNew->z[0]); sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET " "sql = sqlite_rename_column(sql, type, name, %Q, %Q, %d, %Q, %d, %d) " "WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X' " " AND (type != 'index' OR tbl_name = %Q)", zDb, zDb, pTab->zName, iCol, zNew, bQuote, iSchema==1, pTab->zName ); sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET " "sql = sqlite_rename_column(sql, type, name, %Q, %Q, %d, %Q, %d, 1) " "WHERE type IN ('trigger', 'view')", zDb, pTab->zName, iCol, zNew, bQuote ); /* Drop and reload the database schema. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
704 705 706 707 708 709 710 | ** down into the Walker. */ typedef struct RenameCtx RenameCtx; struct RenameCtx { RenameToken *pList; /* List of tokens to overwrite */ int nList; /* Number of tokens in pList */ int iCol; /* Index of column being renamed */ | | | | | | 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 | ** down into the Walker. */ typedef struct RenameCtx RenameCtx; struct RenameCtx { RenameToken *pList; /* List of tokens to overwrite */ int nList; /* Number of tokens in pList */ int iCol; /* Index of column being renamed */ Table *pTab; /* Table being ALTERed */ const char *zOld; /* Old column name */ }; #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* ** This function is only for debugging. It performs two tasks: ** ** 1. Checks that pointer pPtr does not already appear in the ** rename-token list. ** ** 2. Dereferences each pointer in the rename-token list. ** ** The second is most effective when debugging under valgrind or ** address-sanitizer or similar. If any of these pointers no longer ** point to valid objects, an exception is raised by the memory-checking ** tool. ** ** The point of this is to prevent comparisons of invalid pointer values. ** Even though this always seems to work, it is undefined according to the ** C standard. Example of undefined comparison: ** ** sqlite3_free(x); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
914 915 916 917 918 919 920 | sWalker.xSelectCallback = renameUnmapSelectCb; pParse->eParseMode = PARSE_MODE_UNMAP; sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr); pParse->eParseMode = eMode; } /* | | | 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 | sWalker.xSelectCallback = renameUnmapSelectCb; pParse->eParseMode = PARSE_MODE_UNMAP; sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr); pParse->eParseMode = eMode; } /* ** Remove all nodes that are part of expression-list pEList from the ** rename list. */ void sqlite3RenameExprlistUnmap(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pEList){ if( pEList ){ int i; Walker sWalker; memset(&sWalker, 0, sizeof(Walker)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
955 956 957 958 959 960 961 | ** to it. Otherwise, return NULL. ** ** If the second argument passed to this function is not NULL and a matching ** RenameToken object is found, remove it from the Parse object and add it to ** the list maintained by the RenameCtx object. */ static RenameToken *renameTokenFind( | | | | 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 | ** to it. Otherwise, return NULL. ** ** If the second argument passed to this function is not NULL and a matching ** RenameToken object is found, remove it from the Parse object and add it to ** the list maintained by the RenameCtx object. */ static RenameToken *renameTokenFind( Parse *pParse, struct RenameCtx *pCtx, const void *pPtr ){ RenameToken **pp; if( NEVER(pPtr==0) ){ return 0; } for(pp=&pParse->pRename; (*pp); pp=&(*pp)->pNext){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 | ** if the column being references is the column being renamed by an ** ALTER TABLE statement. If it is, then attach its associated ** RenameToken object to the list of RenameToken objects being ** constructed in RenameCtx object at pWalker->u.pRename. */ static int renameColumnExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename; | | | | | 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 | ** if the column being references is the column being renamed by an ** ALTER TABLE statement. If it is, then attach its associated ** RenameToken object to the list of RenameToken objects being ** constructed in RenameCtx object at pWalker->u.pRename. */ static int renameColumnExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename; if( pExpr->op==TK_TRIGGER && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol && pWalker->pParse->pTriggerTab==p->pTab ){ renameTokenFind(pWalker->pParse, p, (void*)pExpr); }else if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol && ALWAYS(ExprUseYTab(pExpr)) && p->pTab==pExpr->y.pTab ){ renameTokenFind(pWalker->pParse, p, (void*)pExpr); } return WRC_Continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 | for(pp=&pCtx->pList; *pp!=pBest; pp=&(*pp)->pNext); *pp = pBest->pNext; return pBest; } /* | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 | for(pp=&pCtx->pList; *pp!=pBest; pp=&(*pp)->pNext); *pp = pBest->pNext; return pBest; } /* ** An error occurred while parsing or otherwise processing a database ** object (either pParse->pNewTable, pNewIndex or pNewTrigger) as part of an ** ALTER TABLE RENAME COLUMN program. The error message emitted by the ** sub-routine is currently stored in pParse->zErrMsg. This function ** adds context to the error message and then stores it in pCtx. */ static void renameColumnParseError( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const char *zWhen, sqlite3_value *pType, sqlite3_value *pObject, Parse *pParse ){ const char *zT = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(pType); const char *zN = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(pObject); char *zErr; zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(pParse->db, "error in %s %s%s%s: %s", zT, zN, (zWhen[0] ? " " : ""), zWhen, pParse->zErrMsg ); sqlite3_result_error(pCtx, zErr, -1); sqlite3DbFree(pParse->db, zErr); } /* ** For each name in the the expression-list pEList (i.e. each ** pEList->a[i].zName) that matches the string in zOld, extract the ** corresponding rename-token from Parse object pParse and add it ** to the RenameCtx pCtx. */ static void renameColumnElistNames( Parse *pParse, RenameCtx *pCtx, const ExprList *pEList, const char *zOld ){ if( pEList ){ int i; for(i=0; i<pEList->nExpr; i++){ const char *zName = pEList->a[i].zEName; if( ALWAYS(pEList->a[i].fg.eEName==ENAME_NAME) && ALWAYS(zName!=0) && 0==sqlite3_stricmp(zName, zOld) ){ renameTokenFind(pParse, pCtx, (const void*)zName); } } } } /* ** For each name in the the id-list pIdList (i.e. each pIdList->a[i].zName) ** that matches the string in zOld, extract the corresponding rename-token ** from Parse object pParse and add it to the RenameCtx pCtx. */ static void renameColumnIdlistNames( Parse *pParse, RenameCtx *pCtx, const IdList *pIdList, const char *zOld ){ if( pIdList ){ int i; for(i=0; i<pIdList->nId; i++){ const char *zName = pIdList->a[i].zName; if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(zName, zOld) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 | } db->init.iDb = bTemp ? 1 : sqlite3FindDbName(db, zDb); p->eParseMode = PARSE_MODE_RENAME; p->db = db; p->nQueryLoop = 1; rc = sqlite3RunParser(p, zSql); if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; | | | 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 | } db->init.iDb = bTemp ? 1 : sqlite3FindDbName(db, zDb); p->eParseMode = PARSE_MODE_RENAME; p->db = db; p->nQueryLoop = 1; rc = sqlite3RunParser(p, zSql); if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; if( rc==SQLITE_OK && NEVER(p->pNewTable==0 && p->pNewIndex==0 && p->pNewTrigger==0) ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Ensure that all mappings in the Parse.pRename list really do map to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 | char *zQuot = 0; char *zOut; i64 nQuot = 0; char *zBuf1 = 0; char *zBuf2 = 0; if( zNew ){ | | | | 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 | char *zQuot = 0; char *zOut; i64 nQuot = 0; char *zBuf1 = 0; char *zBuf2 = 0; if( zNew ){ /* Set zQuot to point to a buffer containing a quoted copy of the ** identifier zNew. If the corresponding identifier in the original ** ALTER TABLE statement was quoted (bQuote==1), then set zNew to ** point to zQuot so that all substitutions are made using the ** quoted version of the new column name. */ zQuot = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "\"%w\" ", zNew); if( zQuot==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 | zBuf1 = &zOut[nSql*2+1]; zBuf2 = &zOut[nSql*4+2]; } } /* At this point pRename->pList contains a list of RenameToken objects ** corresponding to all tokens in the input SQL that must be replaced | | | 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 | zBuf1 = &zOut[nSql*2+1]; zBuf2 = &zOut[nSql*4+2]; } } /* At this point pRename->pList contains a list of RenameToken objects ** corresponding to all tokens in the input SQL that must be replaced ** with the new column name, or with single-quoted versions of themselves. ** All that remains is to construct and return the edited SQL string. */ if( zOut ){ int nOut = nSql; memcpy(zOut, zSql, nSql); while( pRename->pList ){ int iOff; /* Offset of token to replace in zOut */ u32 nReplace; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 | ); zReplace = zBuf2; nReplace = sqlite3Strlen30(zReplace); } iOff = pBest->t.z - zSql; if( pBest->t.n!=nReplace ){ | | | 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 | ); zReplace = zBuf2; nReplace = sqlite3Strlen30(zReplace); } iOff = pBest->t.z - zSql; if( pBest->t.n!=nReplace ){ memmove(&zOut[iOff + nReplace], &zOut[iOff + pBest->t.n], nOut - (iOff + pBest->t.n) ); nOut += nReplace - pBest->t.n; zOut[nOut] = '\0'; } memcpy(&zOut[iOff], zReplace, nReplace); sqlite3DbFree(db, pBest); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 | pEList->a[i].fg.eEName = val; } } } /* ** Resolve all symbols in the trigger at pParse->pNewTrigger, assuming | | | | 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 | pEList->a[i].fg.eEName = val; } } } /* ** Resolve all symbols in the trigger at pParse->pNewTrigger, assuming ** it was read from the schema of database zDb. Return SQLITE_OK if ** successful. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and leave an error ** message in the Parse object. */ static int renameResolveTrigger(Parse *pParse){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Trigger *pNew = pParse->pNewTrigger; TriggerStep *pStep; NameContext sNC; int rc = SQLITE_OK; memset(&sNC, 0, sizeof(sNC)); sNC.pParse = pParse; assert( pNew->pTabSchema ); pParse->pTriggerTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, pNew->table, db->aDb[sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pNew->pTabSchema)].zDbSName ); pParse->eTriggerOp = pNew->op; /* ALWAYS() because if the table of the trigger does not exist, the ** error would have been hit before this point */ if( ALWAYS(pParse->pTriggerTab) ){ rc = sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(pParse, pParse->pTriggerTab); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 | }else{ /* A trigger */ TriggerStep *pStep; rc = renameResolveTrigger(&sParse); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto renameColumnFunc_done; for(pStep=sParse.pNewTrigger->step_list; pStep; pStep=pStep->pNext){ | | | 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 | }else{ /* A trigger */ TriggerStep *pStep; rc = renameResolveTrigger(&sParse); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto renameColumnFunc_done; for(pStep=sParse.pNewTrigger->step_list; pStep; pStep=pStep->pNext){ if( pStep->zTarget ){ Table *pTarget = sqlite3LocateTable(&sParse, 0, pStep->zTarget, zDb); if( pTarget==pTab ){ if( pStep->pUpsert ){ ExprList *pUpsertSet = pStep->pUpsert->pUpsertSet; renameColumnElistNames(&sParse, &sCtx, pUpsertSet, zOld); } renameColumnIdlistNames(&sParse, &sCtx, pStep->pIdList, zOld); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION db->xAuth = xAuth; #endif sqlite3BtreeLeaveAll(db); } /* | | | | 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION db->xAuth = xAuth; #endif sqlite3BtreeLeaveAll(db); } /* ** Walker expression callback used by "RENAME TABLE". */ static int renameTableExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename; if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN && ALWAYS(ExprUseYTab(pExpr)) && p->pTab==pExpr->y.pTab ){ renameTokenFind(pWalker->pParse, p, (void*)&pExpr->y.pTab); } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Walker select callback used by "RENAME TABLE". */ static int renameTableSelectCb(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){ int i; RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename; SrcList *pSrc = pSelect->pSrc; if( pSelect->selFlags & (SF_View|SF_CopyCte) ){ testcase( pSelect->selFlags & SF_View ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 | return WRC_Continue; } /* ** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code ** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition | | | 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 | return WRC_Continue; } /* ** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code ** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition ** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the ** parent table. It is passed three arguments: ** ** 0: The database containing the table being renamed. ** 1. type: Type of object ("table", "view" etc.) ** 2. object: Name of object ** 3: The complete text of the schema statement being modified, ** 4: The old name of the table being renamed, and |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 | } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER else{ Trigger *pTrigger = sParse.pNewTrigger; TriggerStep *pStep; | | | 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 | } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER else{ Trigger *pTrigger = sParse.pNewTrigger; TriggerStep *pStep; if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(sParse.pNewTrigger->table, zOld) && sCtx.pTab->pSchema==pTrigger->pTabSchema ){ renameTokenFind(&sParse, &sCtx, sParse.pNewTrigger->table); } if( isLegacy==0 ){ rc = renameResolveTrigger(&sParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 | ** 1: SQL statement to edit. ** ** The returned value is the modified SQL statement. For example, given ** the database schema: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(a, b, c); ** | | | | 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 | ** 1: SQL statement to edit. ** ** The returned value is the modified SQL statement. For example, given ** the database schema: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(a, b, c); ** ** SELECT sqlite_rename_quotefix('main', ** 'CREATE VIEW v1 AS SELECT "a", "string" FROM t1' ** ); ** ** returns the string: ** ** CREATE VIEW v1 AS SELECT "a", 'string' FROM t1 ** ** If there is a error in the input SQL, then raise an error, except ** if PRAGMA writable_schema=ON, then just return the input string ** unmodified following an error. */ static void renameQuotefixFunc( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 | sqlite3WalkSelect(&sWalker, pSelect); } }else{ int i; sqlite3WalkExprList(&sWalker, sParse.pNewTable->pCheck); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS for(i=0; i<sParse.pNewTable->nCol; i++){ | | | | | 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 | sqlite3WalkSelect(&sWalker, pSelect); } }else{ int i; sqlite3WalkExprList(&sWalker, sParse.pNewTable->pCheck); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS for(i=0; i<sParse.pNewTable->nCol; i++){ sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, sqlite3ColumnExpr(sParse.pNewTable, &sParse.pNewTable->aCol[i])); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS */ } }else if( sParse.pNewIndex ){ sqlite3WalkExprList(&sWalker, sParse.pNewIndex->aColExpr); sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, sParse.pNewIndex->pPartIdxWhere); }else{ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER rc = renameResolveTrigger(&sParse); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ renameWalkTrigger(&sWalker, sParse.pNewTrigger); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */ } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = renameEditSql(context, &sCtx, zInput, 0, 0); } renameTokenFree(db, sCtx.pList); } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ if( sqlite3WritableSchema(db) && rc==SQLITE_ERROR ){ sqlite3_result_value(context, argv[1]); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION db->xAuth = xAuth; #endif } /* ** The implementation of internal UDF sqlite_drop_column(). | | | 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION db->xAuth = xAuth; #endif } /* ** The implementation of internal UDF sqlite_drop_column(). ** ** Arguments: ** ** argv[0]: An integer - the index of the schema containing the table ** argv[1]: CREATE TABLE statement to modify. ** argv[2]: An integer - the index of the column to remove. ** ** The value returned is a string containing the CREATE TABLE statement |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 | db->xAuth = 0; #endif UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); rc = renameParseSql(&sParse, zDb, db, zSql, iSchema==1); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto drop_column_done; pTab = sParse.pNewTable; | | | 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 | db->xAuth = 0; #endif UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); rc = renameParseSql(&sParse, zDb, db, zSql, iSchema==1); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto drop_column_done; pTab = sParse.pNewTable; if( pTab==0 || pTab->nCol==1 || iCol>=pTab->nCol ){ /* This can happen if the sqlite_schema table is corrupt */ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto drop_column_done; } pCol = renameTokenFind(&sParse, 0, (void*)pTab->aCol[iCol].zCnName); if( iCol<pTab->nCol-1 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 | #endif if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_result_error_code(context, rc); } } /* | | | 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 | #endif if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_result_error_code(context, rc); } } /* ** This function is called by the parser upon parsing an ** ** ALTER TABLE pSrc DROP COLUMN pName ** ** statement. Argument pSrc contains the possibly qualified name of the ** table being edited, and token pName the name of the column to drop. */ void sqlite3AlterDropColumn(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pSrc, const Token *pName){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 | /* Look up the table being altered. */ assert( pParse->pNewTable==0 ); assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(db) ); if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_drop_column; pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pSrc->a[0]); if( !pTab ) goto exit_drop_column; | | | | | 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 | /* Look up the table being altered. */ assert( pParse->pNewTable==0 ); assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(db) ); if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_drop_column; pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pSrc->a[0]); if( !pTab ) goto exit_drop_column; /* Make sure this is not an attempt to ALTER a view, virtual table or ** system table. */ if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_drop_column; if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 1) ) goto exit_drop_column; /* Find the index of the column being dropped. */ zCol = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pName); if( zCol==0 ){ assert( db->mallocFailed ); goto exit_drop_column; } iCol = sqlite3ColumnIndex(pTab, zCol); if( iCol<0 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "no such column: \"%T\"", pName); goto exit_drop_column; } /* Do not allow the user to drop a PRIMARY KEY column or a column ** constrained by a UNIQUE constraint. */ if( pTab->aCol[iCol].colFlags & (COLFLAG_PRIMKEY|COLFLAG_UNIQUE) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot drop %s column: \"%s\"", (pTab->aCol[iCol].colFlags&COLFLAG_PRIMKEY) ? "PRIMARY KEY" : "UNIQUE", zCol ); goto exit_drop_column; } /* Do not allow the number of columns to go to zero */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 | /* Invoke the authorization callback. */ if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_ALTER_TABLE, zDb, pTab->zName, zCol) ){ goto exit_drop_column; } #endif renameTestSchema(pParse, zDb, iDb==1, "", 0); renameFixQuotes(pParse, zDb, iDb==1); | | | 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 | /* Invoke the authorization callback. */ if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_ALTER_TABLE, zDb, pTab->zName, zCol) ){ goto exit_drop_column; } #endif renameTestSchema(pParse, zDb, iDb==1, "", 0); renameFixQuotes(pParse, zDb, iDb==1); sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET " "sql = sqlite_drop_column(%d, sql, %d) " "WHERE (type=='table' AND tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase)" , zDb, iDb, iCol, pTab->zName ); /* Drop and reload the database schema. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/auth.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 | const char *zArg1, const char *zArg2, const char *zArg3 ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; int rc; | | | 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 | const char *zArg1, const char *zArg2, const char *zArg3 ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; int rc; /* Don't do any authorization checks if the database is initializing ** or if the parser is being invoked from within sqlite3_declare_vtab. */ assert( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT || db->xAuth==0 ); if( db->xAuth==0 || db->init.busy || IN_SPECIAL_PARSE ){ return SQLITE_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/bitvec.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | ** bitmap. Bits are numbered starting with 1. ** ** A bitmap is used to record which pages of a database file have been ** journalled during a transaction, or which pages have the "dont-write" ** property. Usually only a few pages are meet either condition. ** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality. ** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most | | | | | | | | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | ** bitmap. Bits are numbered starting with 1. ** ** A bitmap is used to record which pages of a database file have been ** journalled during a transaction, or which pages have the "dont-write" ** property. Usually only a few pages are meet either condition. ** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality. ** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most ** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases, ** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs ** to handle both cases well. ** ** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created. ** ** All bits are clear when the bitmap is created. Individual bits ** may be set or cleared one at a time. ** ** Test operations are about 100 times more common that set operations. ** Clear operations are exceedingly rare. There are usually between ** 5 and 500 set operations per Bitvec object, though the number of sets can ** sometimes grow into tens of thousands or larger. The size of the ** Bitvec object is the number of pages in the database file at the ** start of a transaction, and is thus usually less than a few thousand, ** but can be as large as 2 billion for a really big database. */ #include "sqliteInt.h" /* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */ #define BITVEC_SZ 512 /* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how ** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */ #define BITVEC_USIZE \ (((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*)) /* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation. ** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE. ** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve ** performance. */ #define BITVEC_TELEM u8 /* Size, in bits, of the bitmap element. */ #define BITVEC_SZELEM 8 /* Number of elements in a bitmap array. */ #define BITVEC_NELEM (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(BITVEC_TELEM)) /* Number of bits in the bitmap array. */ #define BITVEC_NBIT (BITVEC_NELEM*BITVEC_SZELEM) /* Number of u32 values in hash table. */ #define BITVEC_NINT (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32)) /* Maximum number of entries in hash table before ** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */ #define BITVEC_MXHASH (BITVEC_NINT/2) /* Hashing function for the aHash representation. ** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier ** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided ** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */ #define BITVEC_HASH(X) (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT) #define BITVEC_NPTR (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(Bitvec *)) /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | u32 aHash[BITVEC_NINT]; /* Hash table representation */ Bitvec *apSub[BITVEC_NPTR]; /* Recursive representation */ } u; }; /* ** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize, | | | 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | u32 aHash[BITVEC_NINT]; /* Hash table representation */ Bitvec *apSub[BITVEC_NPTR]; /* Recursive representation */ } u; }; /* ** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize, ** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if ** malloc fails. */ Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){ Bitvec *p; assert( sizeof(*p)==BITVEC_SZ ); p = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*p) ); if( p ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | if( p->iSize<=BITVEC_NBIT ){ p->u.aBitmap[i/BITVEC_SZELEM] |= 1 << (i&(BITVEC_SZELEM-1)); return SQLITE_OK; } h = BITVEC_HASH(i++); /* if there wasn't a hash collision, and this doesn't */ /* completely fill the hash, then just add it without */ | | | 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 | if( p->iSize<=BITVEC_NBIT ){ p->u.aBitmap[i/BITVEC_SZELEM] |= 1 << (i&(BITVEC_SZELEM-1)); return SQLITE_OK; } h = BITVEC_HASH(i++); /* if there wasn't a hash collision, and this doesn't */ /* completely fill the hash, then just add it without */ /* worrying about sub-dividing and re-hashing. */ if( !p->u.aHash[h] ){ if (p->nSet<(BITVEC_NINT-1)) { goto bitvec_set_end; } else { goto bitvec_set_rehash; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
361 362 363 364 365 366 367 | case 5: { nx = 4; i = aOp[pc+2] - 1; aOp[pc+2] += aOp[pc+3]; break; } case 3: | | | 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 | case 5: { nx = 4; i = aOp[pc+2] - 1; aOp[pc+2] += aOp[pc+3]; break; } case 3: case 4: default: { nx = 2; sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i); break; } } if( (--aOp[pc+1]) > 0 ) nx = 0; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/btmutex.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
174 175 176 177 178 179 180 | ** connection. This is needed (for example) prior to parsing ** a statement since we will be comparing table and column names ** against all schemas and we do not want those schemas being ** reset out from under us. ** ** There is a corresponding leave-all procedures. ** | | | 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 | ** connection. This is needed (for example) prior to parsing ** a statement since we will be comparing table and column names ** against all schemas and we do not want those schemas being ** reset out from under us. ** ** There is a corresponding leave-all procedures. ** ** Enter the mutexes in ascending order by BtShared pointer address ** to avoid the possibility of deadlock when two threads with ** two or more btrees in common both try to lock all their btrees ** at the same instant. */ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE btreeEnterAll(sqlite3 *db){ int i; int skipOk = 1; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/btree.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | /* ** 2004 April 6 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. | > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 | /* ** 2004 April 6 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | ** Values passed as the 5th argument to allocateBtreePage() */ #define BTALLOC_ANY 0 /* Allocate any page */ #define BTALLOC_EXACT 1 /* Allocate exact page if possible */ #define BTALLOC_LE 2 /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */ /* | | | | 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | ** Values passed as the 5th argument to allocateBtreePage() */ #define BTALLOC_ANY 0 /* Allocate any page */ #define BTALLOC_EXACT 1 /* Allocate exact page if possible */ #define BTALLOC_LE 2 /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */ /* ** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not ** defined, or 0 if it is. For example: ** ** bIncrVacuum = IfNotOmitAV(pBtShared->incrVacuum); */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM #define IfNotOmitAV(expr) (expr) #else #define IfNotOmitAV(expr) 0 #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation ** in shared cache. This variable has file scope during normal builds, ** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for ** test builds. ** ** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MAIN. */ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST BtShared *SQLITE_WSD sqlite3SharedCacheList = 0; #else |
︙ | ︙ | |||
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 | #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** The functions querySharedCacheTableLock(), setSharedCacheTableLock(), ** and clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks() ** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store ** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the ** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user | | | 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** The functions querySharedCacheTableLock(), setSharedCacheTableLock(), ** and clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks() ** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store ** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the ** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary. ** So define the lock related functions as no-ops. */ #define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK #define setSharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK #define clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(a) #define downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(a) #define hasSharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c,d) 1 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* **** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. *** ** | | | | | 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* **** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. *** ** ** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the ** table with root page iRoot. Return 1 if it does and 0 if not. ** ** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via ** Btree connection pBtree: ** ** assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) ); ** ** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the ** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of ** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated, ** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine ** the table corresponding to the index being written, this ** function has to search through the database schema. ** ** Instead of a lock on the table/index rooted at page iRoot, the caller may |
︙ | ︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | int eLockType /* Required lock type (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) */ ){ Schema *pSchema = (Schema *)pBtree->pBt->pSchema; Pgno iTab = 0; BtLock *pLock; /* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading | | | 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 | int eLockType /* Required lock type (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) */ ){ Schema *pSchema = (Schema *)pBtree->pBt->pSchema; Pgno iTab = 0; BtLock *pLock; /* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required. ** Return true immediately. */ if( (pBtree->sharable==0) || (eLockType==READ_LOCK && (pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommit)) ){ return 1; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
225 226 227 228 229 230 231 | bSeen = 1; } } }else{ iTab = iRoot; } | | | | | 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | bSeen = 1; } } }else{ iTab = iRoot; } /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a ** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a ** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found. */ for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){ if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree && (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1)) && pLock->eLock>=eLockType ){ return 1; } } /* Failed to find the required lock. */ return 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
264 265 266 267 268 269 270 | ** rooted at page iRoot, one should call: ** ** assert( !hasReadConflicts(pBtree, iRoot) ); */ static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){ BtCursor *p; for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){ | | | | | | | | 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 | ** rooted at page iRoot, one should call: ** ** assert( !hasReadConflicts(pBtree, iRoot) ); */ static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){ BtCursor *p; for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){ if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot && p->pBtree!=pBtree && 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommit) ){ return 1; } } return 0; } #endif /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */ /* ** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock ** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return ** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling ** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not. */ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; BtLock *pIter; assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) ); assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK ); assert( p->db!=0 ); assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 ); /* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there ** must be an open write transaction on the file itself. */ assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) ); assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE ); /* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */ if( !p->sharable ){ return SQLITE_OK; } /* If some other connection is holding an exclusive lock, the ** requested lock may not be obtained. */ if( pBt->pWriter!=p && (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_EXCLUSIVE)!=0 ){ sqlite3ConnectionBlocked(p->db, pBt->pWriter->db); return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE; } for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){ /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...) ** statement is a simplification of: ** ** (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK) ** ** since we know that if eLock==WRITE_LOCK, then no other connection ** may hold a WRITE_LOCK on any table in this file (since there can ** only be a single writer). |
︙ | ︙ | |||
338 339 340 341 342 343 344 | return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* !SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used | | | | | | 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 | return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* !SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used ** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or ** WRITE_LOCK. ** ** This function assumes the following: ** ** (a) The specified Btree object p is connected to a sharable ** database (one with the BtShared.sharable flag set), and ** ** (b) No other Btree objects hold a lock that conflicts ** with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has ** already been called and returned SQLITE_OK). ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM ** is returned if a malloc attempt fails. */ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; BtLock *pLock = 0; BtLock *pIter; assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) ); assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK ); assert( p->db!=0 ); /* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to ** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_schema ** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans(). */ assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK ); /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it ** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock. */ assert( p->sharable ); assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) ); /* First search the list for an existing lock on this table. */ for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){ if( pIter->iTable==iTable && pIter->pBtree==p ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
413 414 415 416 417 418 419 | #endif /* !SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to ** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p. ** | | | 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 | #endif /* !SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to ** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p. ** ** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write ** transaction. If it does not, then the BTS_PENDING flag ** may be incorrectly cleared. */ static void clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(Btree *p){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; BtLock **ppIter = &pBt->pLock; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
445 446 447 448 449 450 451 | } assert( (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_PENDING)==0 || pBt->pWriter ); if( pBt->pWriter==p ){ pBt->pWriter = 0; pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING); }else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){ | | | 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | } assert( (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_PENDING)==0 || pBt->pWriter ); if( pBt->pWriter==p ){ pBt->pWriter = 0; pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING); }else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){ /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its ** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not ** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other ** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case ** set the BTS_PENDING flag to 0. ** ** If there is not currently a writer, then BTS_PENDING must ** be zero already. So this next line is harmless in that case. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
491 492 493 494 495 496 497 | */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG static int cursorHoldsMutex(BtCursor *p){ return sqlite3_mutex_held(p->pBt->mutex); } /* Verify that the cursor and the BtShared agree about what is the current | | | 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 | */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG static int cursorHoldsMutex(BtCursor *p){ return sqlite3_mutex_held(p->pBt->mutex); } /* Verify that the cursor and the BtShared agree about what is the current ** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database ** connection pointers get out-of-sync, it is possible for routines like ** btreeInitPage() to reference an stale connection pointer that references a ** a connection that has already closed. This routine is used inside assert() ** statements only and for the purpose of double-checking that the btree code ** does keep the database connection pointers up-to-date. */ static int cursorOwnsBtShared(BtCursor *p){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
562 563 564 565 566 567 568 | #else /* Stub function when INCRBLOB is omitted */ #define invalidateIncrblobCursors(w,x,y,z) #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */ /* | | | | 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 | #else /* Stub function when INCRBLOB is omitted */ #define invalidateIncrblobCursors(w,x,y,z) #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */ /* ** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called ** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf ** page. ** ** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure ** bug caused by the interaction of two useful IO optimizations surrounding ** free-list leaf pages: ** ** 1) When all data is deleted from a page and the page becomes |
︙ | ︙ | |||
589 590 591 592 593 594 595 | ** a page is moved to the free-list and then reused within the same ** transaction, a problem comes up. If the page is not journalled when ** it is moved to the free-list and it is also not journalled when it ** is extracted from the free-list and reused, then the original data ** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible ** to restore the database to its original configuration. ** | | | 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | ** a page is moved to the free-list and then reused within the same ** transaction, a problem comes up. If the page is not journalled when ** it is moved to the free-list and it is also not journalled when it ** is extracted from the free-list and reused, then the original data ** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible ** to restore the database to its original configuration. ** ** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is ** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is ** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list, ** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already ** set in BtShared.pHasContent. The contents of the bitvec are cleared ** at the end of every transaction. */ static int btreeSetHasContent(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
650 651 652 653 654 655 656 | } } /* ** The cursor passed as the only argument must point to a valid entry ** when this function is called (i.e. have eState==CURSOR_VALID). This ** function saves the current cursor key in variables pCur->nKey and | | | | | | | 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 | } } /* ** The cursor passed as the only argument must point to a valid entry ** when this function is called (i.e. have eState==CURSOR_VALID). This ** function saves the current cursor key in variables pCur->nKey and ** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error ** code otherwise. ** ** If the cursor is open on an intkey table, then the integer key ** (the rowid) is stored in pCur->nKey and pCur->pKey is left set to ** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is ** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing ** the key. */ static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState ); assert( 0==pCur->pKey ); assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) ); if( pCur->curIntKey ){ /* Only the rowid is required for a table btree */ pCur->nKey = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pCur); }else{ /* For an index btree, save the complete key content. It is possible ** that the current key is corrupt. In that case, it is possible that ** the sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack() function may overread the buffer by ** up to the size of 1 varint plus 1 8-byte value when the cursor ** position is restored. Hence the 17 bytes of padding allocated ** below. */ void *pKey; pCur->nKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur); pKey = sqlite3Malloc( pCur->nKey + 9 + 8 ); if( pKey ){ rc = sqlite3BtreePayload(pCur, 0, (int)pCur->nKey, pKey); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
695 696 697 698 699 700 701 | } } assert( !pCur->curIntKey || !pCur->pKey ); return rc; } /* | | | | 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 | } } assert( !pCur->curIntKey || !pCur->pKey ); return rc; } /* ** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey ** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK. ** ** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID) ** prior to calling this routine. */ static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){ int rc; assert( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState || CURSOR_SKIPNEXT==pCur->eState ); assert( 0==pCur->pKey ); assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
738 739 740 741 742 743 744 | ** Save the positions of all cursors (except pExcept) that are open on ** the table with root-page iRoot. "Saving the cursor position" means that ** the location in the btree is remembered in such a way that it can be ** moved back to the same spot after the btree has been modified. This ** routine is called just before cursor pExcept is used to modify the ** table, for example in BtreeDelete() or BtreeInsert(). ** | | | 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 | ** Save the positions of all cursors (except pExcept) that are open on ** the table with root-page iRoot. "Saving the cursor position" means that ** the location in the btree is remembered in such a way that it can be ** moved back to the same spot after the btree has been modified. This ** routine is called just before cursor pExcept is used to modify the ** table, for example in BtreeDelete() or BtreeInsert(). ** ** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such ** cursors should have their BTCF_Multiple flag set. The btreeCursor() ** routine enforces that rule. This routine only needs to be called in ** the uncommon case when pExpect has the BTCF_Multiple flag set. ** ** If pExpect!=NULL and if no other cursors are found on the same root-page, ** then the BTCF_Multiple flag on pExpect is cleared, to avoid another ** pointless call to this routine. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
836 837 838 839 840 841 842 | rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, nKey, bias, pRes); } return rc; } /* ** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible) | | | | 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 | rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, nKey, bias, pRes); } return rc; } /* ** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible) ** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the ** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be ** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each ** saveCursorPosition(). */ static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){ int rc; int skipNext = 0; assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); assert( pCur->eState>=CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
906 907 908 909 910 911 912 | assert( offsetof(BtCursor, eState)==0 ); return (BtCursor*)&fakeCursor; } /* ** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it ** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or | | | 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 | assert( offsetof(BtCursor, eState)==0 ); return (BtCursor*)&fakeCursor; } /* ** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it ** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or ** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor). ** ** On success, the *pDifferentRow parameter is false if the cursor is left ** pointing at exactly the same row. *pDifferntRow is the row the cursor ** was pointing to has been deleted, forcing the cursor to point to some ** nearby row. ** ** This routine should only be called for a cursor that just returned |
︙ | ︙ | |||
988 989 990 991 992 993 994 | static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){ int nPagesPerMapPage; Pgno iPtrMap, ret; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); if( pgno<2 ) return 0; nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1; iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage; | | | 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 | static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){ int nPagesPerMapPage; Pgno iPtrMap, ret; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); if( pgno<2 ) return 0; nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1; iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage; ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2; if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){ ret++; } return ret; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 | pEnd = &pIter[8]; nSize &= 0x7f; do{ nSize = (nSize<<7) | (*++pIter & 0x7f); }while( *(pIter)>=0x80 && pIter<pEnd ); } pIter++; | | | 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 | pEnd = &pIter[8]; nSize &= 0x7f; do{ nSize = (nSize<<7) | (*++pIter & 0x7f); }while( *(pIter)>=0x80 && pIter<pEnd ); } pIter++; /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length ** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte ** past the end of the key value. */ if( (*pIter++)&0x80 && (*pIter++)&0x80 && (*pIter++)&0x80 && (*pIter++)&0x80 && (*pIter++)&0x80 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 | assert( nCell==get2byte(&data[hdr+3]) || CORRUPT_DB ); iCellFirst = cellOffset + 2*nCell; usableSize = pPage->pBt->usableSize; /* This block handles pages with two or fewer free blocks and nMaxFrag ** or fewer fragmented bytes. In this case it is faster to move the ** two (or one) blocks of cells using memmove() and add the required | | | 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 | assert( nCell==get2byte(&data[hdr+3]) || CORRUPT_DB ); iCellFirst = cellOffset + 2*nCell; usableSize = pPage->pBt->usableSize; /* This block handles pages with two or fewer free blocks and nMaxFrag ** or fewer fragmented bytes. In this case it is faster to move the ** two (or one) blocks of cells using memmove() and add the required ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to ** reconstruct the entire page. */ if( (int)data[hdr+7]<=nMaxFrag ){ int iFree = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]); if( iFree>usableSize-4 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); if( iFree ){ int iFree2 = get2byte(&data[iFree]); if( iFree2>usableSize-4 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 | static SQLITE_INLINE int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){ const int hdr = pPage->hdrOffset; /* Local cache of pPage->hdrOffset */ u8 * const data = pPage->aData; /* Local cache of pPage->aData */ int top; /* First byte of cell content area */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Integer return code */ u8 *pTmp; /* Temp ptr into data[] */ int gap; /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */ | | | 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 | static SQLITE_INLINE int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){ const int hdr = pPage->hdrOffset; /* Local cache of pPage->hdrOffset */ u8 * const data = pPage->aData; /* Local cache of pPage->aData */ int top; /* First byte of cell content area */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Integer return code */ u8 *pTmp; /* Temp ptr into data[] */ int gap; /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */ assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) ); assert( pPage->pBt ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) ); assert( nByte>=0 ); /* Minimum cell size is 4 */ assert( pPage->nFree>=nByte ); assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 ); assert( nByte < (int)(pPage->pBt->usableSize-8) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 | ** The first byte of the new free block is pPage->aData[iStart] ** and the size of the block is iSize bytes. ** ** Adjacent freeblocks are coalesced. ** ** Even though the freeblock list was checked by btreeComputeFreeSpace(), ** that routine will not detect overlap between cells or freeblocks. Nor | | | 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 | ** The first byte of the new free block is pPage->aData[iStart] ** and the size of the block is iSize bytes. ** ** Adjacent freeblocks are coalesced. ** ** Even though the freeblock list was checked by btreeComputeFreeSpace(), ** that routine will not detect overlap between cells or freeblocks. Nor ** does it detect cells or freeblocks that encroach into the reserved bytes ** at the end of the page. So do additional corruption checks inside this ** routine and return SQLITE_CORRUPT if any problems are found. */ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){ u16 iPtr; /* Address of ptr to next freeblock */ u16 iFreeBlk; /* Address of the next freeblock */ u8 hdr; /* Page header size. 0 or 100 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 | assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) ); assert( CORRUPT_DB || iStart>=pPage->hdrOffset+6+pPage->childPtrSize ); assert( CORRUPT_DB || iEnd <= pPage->pBt->usableSize ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) ); assert( iSize>=4 ); /* Minimum cell size is 4 */ assert( CORRUPT_DB || iStart<=pPage->pBt->usableSize-4 ); | | | | | 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 | assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) ); assert( CORRUPT_DB || iStart>=pPage->hdrOffset+6+pPage->childPtrSize ); assert( CORRUPT_DB || iEnd <= pPage->pBt->usableSize ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) ); assert( iSize>=4 ); /* Minimum cell size is 4 */ assert( CORRUPT_DB || iStart<=pPage->pBt->usableSize-4 ); /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the ** spot on the list where iStart should be inserted. */ hdr = pPage->hdrOffset; iPtr = hdr + 1; if( data[iPtr+1]==0 && data[iPtr]==0 ){ iFreeBlk = 0; /* Shortcut for the case when the freelist is empty */ }else{ while( (iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iPtr]))<iStart ){ if( iFreeBlk<=iPtr ){ if( iFreeBlk==0 ) break; /* TH3: corrupt082.100 */ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } iPtr = iFreeBlk; } if( iFreeBlk>pPage->pBt->usableSize-4 ){ /* TH3: corrupt081.100 */ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } assert( iFreeBlk>iPtr || iFreeBlk==0 || CORRUPT_DB ); /* At this point: ** iFreeBlk: First freeblock after iStart, or zero if none ** iPtr: The address of a pointer to iFreeBlk ** ** Check to see if iFreeBlk should be coalesced onto the end of iStart. */ if( iFreeBlk && iEnd+3>=iFreeBlk ){ nFrag = iFreeBlk - iEnd; if( iEnd>iFreeBlk ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); iEnd = iFreeBlk + get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk+2]); if( iEnd > pPage->pBt->usableSize ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } iSize = iEnd - iStart; iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk]); } /* If iPtr is another freeblock (that is, if iPtr is not the freelist ** pointer in the page header) then check to see if iStart should be ** coalesced onto the end of iPtr. */ if( iPtr>hdr+1 ){ int iPtrEnd = iPtr + get2byte(&data[iPtr+2]); if( iPtrEnd+3>=iStart ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 | nFree = data[hdr+7] + top; /* Init nFree to non-freeblock free space */ if( pc>0 ){ u32 next, size; if( pc<top ){ /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-55530-52930 In a well-formed b-tree page, there will ** always be at least one cell before the first freeblock. */ | | | 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 | nFree = data[hdr+7] + top; /* Init nFree to non-freeblock free space */ if( pc>0 ){ u32 next, size; if( pc<top ){ /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-55530-52930 In a well-formed b-tree page, there will ** always be at least one cell before the first freeblock. */ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } while( 1 ){ if( pc>iCellLast ){ /* Freeblock off the end of the page */ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } next = get2byte(&data[pc]); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 | } pPage->nFree = (u16)(nFree - iCellFirst); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Do additional sanity check after btreeInitPage() if | | | 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 | } pPage->nFree = (u16)(nFree - iCellFirst); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Do additional sanity check after btreeInitPage() if ** PRAGMA cell_size_check=ON */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeCellSizeCheck(MemPage *pPage){ int iCellFirst; /* First allowable cell or freeblock offset */ int iCellLast; /* Last possible cell or freeblock offset */ int i; /* Index into the cell pointer array */ int sz; /* Size of a cell */ int pc; /* Address of a freeblock within pPage->aData[] */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 | return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does | | | 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 | return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does ** not contain a well-formed database page, then return ** SQLITE_CORRUPT. Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not ** guarantee that the page is well-formed. It only shows that ** we failed to detect any corruption. */ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){ u8 *data; /* Equal to pPage->aData */ BtShared *pBt; /* The main btree structure */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 | pPage->aData = sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage); pPage->pDbPage = pDbPage; pPage->pBt = pBt; pPage->pgno = pgno; pPage->hdrOffset = pgno==1 ? 100 : 0; } assert( pPage->aData==sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage) ); | | | 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 | pPage->aData = sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage); pPage->pDbPage = pDbPage; pPage->pBt = pBt; pPage->pgno = pgno; pPage->hdrOffset = pgno==1 ? 100 : 0; } assert( pPage->aData==sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage) ); return pPage; } /* ** Get a page from the pager. Initialize the MemPage.pBt and ** MemPage.aData elements if needed. See also: btreeGetUnusedPage(). ** ** If the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT flag is set, it means that we do not care |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 | pPage->isInit = 0; if( sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pData)>1 ){ /* pPage might not be a btree page; it might be an overflow page ** or ptrmap page or a free page. In those cases, the following ** call to btreeInitPage() will likely return SQLITE_CORRUPT. ** But no harm is done by this. And it is very important that ** btreeInitPage() be called on every btree page so we make | | | | | 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 | pPage->isInit = 0; if( sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pData)>1 ){ /* pPage might not be a btree page; it might be an overflow page ** or ptrmap page or a free page. In those cases, the following ** call to btreeInitPage() will likely return SQLITE_CORRUPT. ** But no harm is done by this. And it is very important that ** btreeInitPage() be called on every btree page so we make ** the call for every page that comes in for re-initializing. */ btreeInitPage(pPage); } } } /* ** Invoke the busy handler for a btree. */ static int btreeInvokeBusyHandler(void *pArg){ BtShared *pBt = (BtShared*)pArg; assert( pBt->db ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->db->mutex) ); return sqlite3InvokeBusyHandler(&pBt->db->busyHandler); } /* ** Open a database file. ** ** zFilename is the name of the database file. If zFilename is NULL ** then an ephemeral database is created. The ephemeral database might ** be exclusively in memory, or it might use a disk-based memory cache. ** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted ** when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called. ** ** If zFilename is ":memory:" then an in-memory database is created ** that is automatically destroyed when it is closed. ** ** The "flags" parameter is a bitmask that might contain bits like ** BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL and/or BTREE_MEMORY. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 | int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Result code from this function */ u8 nReserve; /* Byte of unused space on each page */ unsigned char zDbHeader[100]; /* Database header content */ /* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */ const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0; | | | 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 | int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Result code from this function */ u8 nReserve; /* Byte of unused space on each page */ unsigned char zDbHeader[100]; /* Database header content */ /* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */ const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0; /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or ** false for a file-based database. */ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB const int isMemdb = 0; #else const int isMemdb = (zFilename && strcmp(zFilename, ":memory:")==0) || (isTempDb && sqlite3TempInMemory(db)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 | ** when compiling on a different architecture. */ assert( sizeof(i64)==8 ); assert( sizeof(u64)==8 ); assert( sizeof(u32)==4 ); assert( sizeof(u16)==2 ); assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 ); | | | | 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 | ** when compiling on a different architecture. */ assert( sizeof(i64)==8 ); assert( sizeof(u64)==8 ); assert( sizeof(u32)==4 ); assert( sizeof(u16)==2 ); assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 ); pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) ); if( pBt==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; goto btree_open_out; } rc = sqlite3PagerOpen(pVfs, &pBt->pPager, zFilename, sizeof(MemPage), flags, vfsFlags, pageReinit); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3PagerSetMmapLimit(pBt->pPager, db->szMmap); rc = sqlite3PagerReadFileheader(pBt->pPager,sizeof(zDbHeader),zDbHeader); } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto btree_open_out; } pBt->openFlags = (u8)flags; pBt->db = db; sqlite3PagerSetBusyHandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt); p->pBt = pBt; pBt->pCursor = 0; pBt->pPage1 = 0; if( sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager) ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY; #if defined(SQLITE_SECURE_DELETE) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_SECURE_DELETE; #elif defined(SQLITE_FAST_SECURE_DELETE) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_OVERWRITE; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 | pBt->incrVacuum = (get4byte(&zDbHeader[36 + 7*4])?1:0); #endif } rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pBt->pPager, &pBt->pageSize, nReserve); if( rc ) goto btree_open_out; pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve; assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */ | | | 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 | pBt->incrVacuum = (get4byte(&zDbHeader[36 + 7*4])?1:0); #endif } rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pBt->pPager, &pBt->pageSize, nReserve); if( rc ) goto btree_open_out; pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve; assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO) /* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds. */ pBt->nRef = 1; if( p->sharable ){ MUTEX_LOGIC( sqlite3_mutex *mutexShared; ) MUTEX_LOGIC( mutexShared = sqlite3MutexAlloc(SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MAIN);) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 | return removed; #else return 1; #endif } /* | | | 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 | return removed; #else return 1; #endif } /* ** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of ** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes with a 4-byte prefix for a left-child ** pointer. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int allocateTempSpace(BtShared *pBt){ assert( pBt!=0 ); assert( pBt->pTmpSpace==0 ); /* This routine is called only by btreeCursor() when allocating the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 | /* One of the uses of pBt->pTmpSpace is to format cells before ** inserting them into a leaf page (function fillInCell()). If ** a cell is less than 4 bytes in size, it is rounded up to 4 bytes ** by the various routines that manipulate binary cells. Which ** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3 ** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from ** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it | | | 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 | /* One of the uses of pBt->pTmpSpace is to format cells before ** inserting them into a leaf page (function fillInCell()). If ** a cell is less than 4 bytes in size, it is rounded up to 4 bytes ** by the various routines that manipulate binary cells. Which ** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3 ** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from ** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of uninitialized ** data is passed to system call write(). So to avoid this error, ** zero the first 4 bytes of temp space here. ** ** Also: Provide four bytes of initialized space before the ** beginning of pTmpSpace as an area available to prepend the ** left-child pointer to the beginning of a cell. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 | ** The call to sqlite3BtreeRollback() drops any table-locks held by ** this handle. */ sqlite3BtreeRollback(p, SQLITE_OK, 0); sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); /* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree | | | 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 | ** The call to sqlite3BtreeRollback() drops any table-locks held by ** this handle. */ sqlite3BtreeRollback(p, SQLITE_OK, 0); sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); /* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans ** up the shared-btree. */ assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 ); if( !p->sharable || removeFromSharingList(pBt) ){ /* The pBt is no longer on the sharing list, so we can access ** it without having to hold the mutex. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 | sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* ** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page. | | | 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 | sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* ** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page. ** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY ** without changing anything. ** ** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536. If the page ** size supplied does not meet this constraint then the page size is not ** changed. ** ** Page sizes are constrained to be a power of two so that the region |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 | /* ** This function is similar to sqlite3BtreeGetReserve(), except that it ** may only be called if it is guaranteed that the b-tree mutex is already ** held. ** ** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is | | | | 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 | /* ** This function is similar to sqlite3BtreeGetReserve(), except that it ** may only be called if it is guaranteed that the b-tree mutex is already ** held. ** ** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is ** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the ** database handle that owns *p is not. In this case if sqlite3BtreeEnter() ** were to be called, it might collide with some other operation on the ** database handle that owns *p, causing undefined behavior. */ int sqlite3BtreeGetReserveNoMutex(Btree *p){ int n; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->pBt->mutex) ); n = p->pBt->pageSize - p->pBt->usableSize; return n; } /* ** Return the number of bytes of space at the end of every page that ** are intentionally left unused. This is the "reserved" space that is ** sometimes used by extensions. ** ** The value returned is the larger of the current reserve size and ** the latest reserve size requested by SQLITE_FILECTRL_RESERVE_BYTES. ** The amount of reserve can only grow - never shrink. */ int sqlite3BtreeGetRequestedReserve(Btree *p){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 | sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return b; } /* ** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum' ** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it | | | 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 | sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return b; } /* ** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum' ** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it ** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is ** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro. */ int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM return SQLITE_READONLY; #else BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 | } sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; #endif } /* | | | 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 | } sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; #endif } /* ** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is ** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0. */ int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM return BTREE_AUTOVACUUM_NONE; #else int rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 | #if SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS!=SQLITE_DEFAULT_WAL_SYNCHRONOUS \ && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WAL) static void setDefaultSyncFlag(BtShared *pBt, u8 safety_level){ sqlite3 *db; Db *pDb; if( (db=pBt->db)!=0 && (pDb=db->aDb)!=0 ){ while( pDb->pBt==0 || pDb->pBt->pBt!=pBt ){ pDb++; } | | | | | 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 | #if SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS!=SQLITE_DEFAULT_WAL_SYNCHRONOUS \ && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WAL) static void setDefaultSyncFlag(BtShared *pBt, u8 safety_level){ sqlite3 *db; Db *pDb; if( (db=pBt->db)!=0 && (pDb=db->aDb)!=0 ){ while( pDb->pBt==0 || pDb->pBt->pBt!=pBt ){ pDb++; } if( pDb->bSyncSet==0 && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level && pDb!=&db->aDb[1] ){ pDb->safety_level = safety_level; sqlite3PagerSetFlags(pBt->pPager, pDb->safety_level | (db->flags & PAGER_FLAGS_MASK)); } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 | /* ** Get a reference to pPage1 of the database file. This will ** also acquire a readlock on that file. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. If the file is not a ** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned. ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked. SQLITE_NOMEM | | | | 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 | /* ** Get a reference to pPage1 of the database file. This will ** also acquire a readlock on that file. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. If the file is not a ** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned. ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked. SQLITE_NOMEM ** is returned if we run out of memory. */ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){ int rc; /* Result code from subfunctions */ MemPage *pPage1; /* Page 1 of the database file */ u32 nPage; /* Number of pages in the database */ u32 nPageFile = 0; /* Number of pages in the database file */ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( pBt->pPage1==0 ); rc = sqlite3PagerSharedLock(pBt->pPager); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; rc = btreeGetPage(pBt, 1, &pPage1, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; /* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is ** a valid database file. */ nPage = get4byte(28+(u8*)pPage1->aData); sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, (int*)&nPageFile); if( nPage==0 || memcmp(24+(u8*)pPage1->aData, 92+(u8*)pPage1->aData,4)!=0 ){ nPage = nPageFile; } if( (pBt->db->flags & SQLITE_ResetDatabase)!=0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 | pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY; } if( page1[19]>2 ){ goto page1_init_failed; } /* If the read version is set to 2, this database should be accessed | | | 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 | pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY; } if( page1[19]>2 ){ goto page1_init_failed; } /* If the read version is set to 2, this database should be accessed ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then ** return SQLITE_OK and return without populating BtShared.pPage1. ** The caller detects this and calls this function again. This is ** required as the version of page 1 currently in the page1 buffer ** may not be the latest version - there may be a newer one in the log ** file. */ if( page1[19]==2 && (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_NO_WAL)==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 | /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-51873-39618 The page size for a database file is ** determined by the 2-byte integer located at an offset of 16 bytes from ** the beginning of the database file. */ pageSize = (page1[16]<<8) | (page1[17]<<16); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-25008-21688 The size of a page is a power of two ** between 512 and 65536 inclusive. */ if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0 | | | | | 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 | /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-51873-39618 The page size for a database file is ** determined by the 2-byte integer located at an offset of 16 bytes from ** the beginning of the database file. */ pageSize = (page1[16]<<8) | (page1[17]<<16); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-25008-21688 The size of a page is a power of two ** between 512 and 65536 inclusive. */ if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0 || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || pageSize<=256 ){ goto page1_init_failed; } pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_PAGESIZE_FIXED; assert( (pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-59310-51205 The "reserved space" size in the 1-byte ** integer at offset 20 is the number of bytes of space at the end of ** each page to reserve for extensions. ** ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-37497-42412 The size of the reserved region is ** determined by the one-byte unsigned integer found at an offset of 20 ** into the database file header. */ usableSize = pageSize - page1[20]; if( (u32)pageSize!=pBt->pageSize ){ /* After reading the first page of the database assuming a page size |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 | ** have been tripped into the CURSOR_FAULT state are not counted. */ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){ BtCursor *pCur; int r = 0; for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){ if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0) | | | | 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 | ** have been tripped into the CURSOR_FAULT state are not counted. */ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){ BtCursor *pCur; int r = 0; for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){ if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0) && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++; } return r; } #endif /* ** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle ** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then ** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which ** has the effect of releasing the read lock. ** ** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op. */ static void unlockBtreeIfUnused(BtShared *pBt){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( countValidCursors(pBt,0)==0 || pBt->inTransaction>TRANS_NONE ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 | ** is started if the second argument is nonzero, otherwise a read- ** transaction. If the second argument is 2 or more and exclusive ** transaction is started, meaning that no other process is allowed ** to access the database. A preexisting transaction may not be ** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the ** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction. ** | | | | | | | | | 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 | ** is started if the second argument is nonzero, otherwise a read- ** transaction. If the second argument is 2 or more and exclusive ** transaction is started, meaning that no other process is allowed ** to access the database. A preexisting transaction may not be ** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the ** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction. ** ** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any ** changes to the database. None of the following routines ** will work unless a transaction is started first: ** ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() ** sqlite3BtreeCreateIndex() ** sqlite3BtreeClearTable() ** sqlite3BtreeDropTable() ** sqlite3BtreeInsert() ** sqlite3BtreeDelete() ** sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta() ** ** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention ** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler ** if there is one. But if there was previously a read-lock, do not ** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is ** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock. ** ** Suppose there are two processes A and B. A has a read lock and B has ** a reserved lock. B tries to promote to exclusive but is blocked because ** of A's read lock. A tries to promote to reserved but is blocked by B. ** One or the other of the two processes must give way or there can be ** no progress. By returning SQLITE_BUSY and not invoking the busy callback ** when A already has a read lock, we encourage A to give up and let B ** proceed. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans( Btree *p, /* The btree in which to start the transaction */ int wrflag, /* True to start a write transaction */ int *pSchemaVersion /* Put schema version number here, if not NULL */ ){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager; int rc = SQLITE_OK; sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); btreeIntegrity(p); /* If the btree is already in a write-transaction, or it ** is already in a read-transaction and a read-transaction ** is requested, this is a no-op. */ if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE || (p->inTrans==TRANS_READ && !wrflag) ){ goto trans_begun; } assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE || IfNotOmitAV(pBt->bDoTruncate)==0 ); if( (p->db->flags & SQLITE_ResetDatabase) && sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pPager)==0 ){ pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_READ_ONLY; } /* Write transactions are not possible on a read-only database */ if( (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_READ_ONLY)!=0 && wrflag ){ rc = SQLITE_READONLY; goto trans_begun; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE { sqlite3 *pBlock = 0; /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction ** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is ** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED. */ if( (wrflag && pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE) || (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_PENDING)!=0 ){ pBlock = pBt->pWriter->db; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 | sqlite3ConnectionBlocked(p->db, pBlock); rc = SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE; goto trans_begun; } } #endif | | | | 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 | sqlite3ConnectionBlocked(p->db, pBlock); rc = SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE; goto trans_begun; } } #endif /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock ** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */ rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, SCHEMA_ROOT, READ_LOCK); if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun; pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_INITIALLY_EMPTY; if( pBt->nPage==0 ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_INITIALLY_EMPTY; do { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 | if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY && rc!=SQLITE_OK ) break; } #endif /* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or ** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree() ** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after | | | | 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 | if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY && rc!=SQLITE_OK ) break; } #endif /* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or ** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree() ** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database ** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update ** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk. */ while( pBt->pPage1==0 && SQLITE_OK==(rc = lockBtree(pBt)) ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && wrflag ){ if( (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_READ_ONLY)!=0 ){ rc = SQLITE_READONLY; }else{ rc = sqlite3PagerBegin(pPager, wrflag>1, sqlite3TempInMemory(p->db)); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = newDatabase(pBt); }else if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_SNAPSHOT && pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_NONE ){ /* if there was no transaction opened when this function was ** called and SQLITE_BUSY_SNAPSHOT is returned, change the error ** code to SQLITE_BUSY. */ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; } } } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ (void)sqlite3PagerWalWriteLock(pPager, 0); unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt); } }while( (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_BUSY && pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_NONE && btreeInvokeBusyHandler(pBt) ); sqlite3PagerWalDb(pPager, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 | pBt->pWriter = p; pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_EXCLUSIVE; if( wrflag>1 ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_EXCLUSIVE; #endif /* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old ** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing | | | 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 | pBt->pWriter = p; pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_EXCLUSIVE; if( wrflag>1 ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_EXCLUSIVE; #endif /* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old ** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely ** re-read the database size from page 1 if a savepoint or transaction ** rollback occurs within the transaction. */ if( pBt->nPage!=get4byte(&pPage1->aData[28]) ){ rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPage1->pDbPage); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ put4byte(&pPage1->aData[28], pBt->nPage); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 | } /* ** Somewhere on pPage is a pointer to page iFrom. Modify this pointer so ** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to ** be modified, as follows: ** | | | 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 | } /* ** Somewhere on pPage is a pointer to page iFrom. Modify this pointer so ** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to ** be modified, as follows: ** ** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child ** page of pPage. ** ** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow ** page pointed to by one of the cells on pPage. ** ** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2: pPage is an overflow-page. The pointer points at the next ** overflow page in the list. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 | } if( get4byte(pCell)==iFrom ){ put4byte(pCell, iTo); break; } } } | | | | | | | | 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 | } if( get4byte(pCell)==iFrom ){ put4byte(pCell, iTo); break; } } } if( i==nCell ){ if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE || get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } put4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8], iTo); } } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the ** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid. ** ** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that ** page. */ static int relocatePage( BtShared *pBt, /* Btree */ MemPage *pDbPage, /* Open page to move */ u8 eType, /* Pointer map 'type' entry for pDbPage */ Pgno iPtrPage, /* Pointer map 'page-no' entry for pDbPage */ Pgno iFreePage, /* The location to move pDbPage to */ int isCommit /* isCommit flag passed to sqlite3PagerMovepage */ ){ MemPage *pPtrPage; /* The page that contains a pointer to pDbPage */ Pgno iDbPage = pDbPage->pgno; Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager; int rc; assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 || eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt ); if( iDbPage<3 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; /* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */ TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %u to free page %u (ptr page %u type %u)\n", iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType)); rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ return rc; } pDbPage->pgno = iFreePage; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 | } /* Forward declaration required by incrVacuumStep(). */ static int allocateBtreePage(BtShared *, MemPage **, Pgno *, Pgno, u8); /* ** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return | | | | | | | | 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 | } /* Forward declaration required by incrVacuumStep(). */ static int allocateBtreePage(BtShared *, MemPage **, Pgno *, Pgno, u8); /* ** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return ** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in ** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error ** occurs, return some other error code. ** ** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so ** that the last page of the file currently in use is no longer in use. ** ** Parameter nFin is the number of pages that this database would contain ** were this function called until it returns SQLITE_DONE. ** ** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the ** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE ** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit ** operation, or false for an incremental vacuum. */ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){ Pgno nFreeList; /* Number of pages still on the free-list */ int rc; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 | return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } if( eType==PTRMAP_FREEPAGE ){ if( bCommit==0 ){ /* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required ** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be | | | 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 | return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } if( eType==PTRMAP_FREEPAGE ){ if( bCommit==0 ){ /* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required ** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't ** matter if it still contains some garbage entries. */ Pgno iFreePg; MemPage *pFreePg; rc = allocateBtreePage(pBt, &pFreePg, &iFreePg, iLastPg, BTALLOC_EXACT); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ return rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 | releasePage(pFreePg); if( iFreePg>dbSize ){ releasePage(pLastPg); return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } }while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin ); assert( iFreePg<iLastPg ); | | | | 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 | releasePage(pFreePg); if( iFreePg>dbSize ){ releasePage(pLastPg); return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } }while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin ); assert( iFreePg<iLastPg ); rc = relocatePage(pBt, pLastPg, eType, iPtrPage, iFreePg, bCommit); releasePage(pLastPg); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ return rc; } } } if( bCommit==0 ){ do { iLastPg--; }while( iLastPg==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) || PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, iLastPg) ); pBt->bDoTruncate = 1; pBt->nPage = iLastPg; } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** The database opened by the first argument is an auto-vacuum database ** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected ** size of the database in pages following an auto-vacuum operation. */ static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){ int nEntry; /* Number of entries on one ptrmap page */ Pgno nPtrmap; /* Number of PtrMap pages to be freed */ Pgno nFin; /* Return value */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 | /* ** A write-transaction must be opened before calling this function. ** It performs a single unit of work towards an incremental vacuum. ** ** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run, ** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred, | | | 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 | /* ** A write-transaction must be opened before calling this function. ** It performs a single unit of work towards an incremental vacuum. ** ** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run, ** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred, ** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code. */ int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){ int rc; BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 | int rc = SQLITE_OK; Pager *pPager; BtShared *pBt; sqlite3 *db; VVA_ONLY( int nRef ); assert( p!=0 ); | | | 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 | int rc = SQLITE_OK; Pager *pPager; BtShared *pBt; sqlite3 *db; VVA_ONLY( int nRef ); assert( p!=0 ); pBt = p->pBt; pPager = pBt->pPager; VVA_ONLY( nRef = sqlite3PagerRefcount(pPager); ) assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); invalidateAllOverflowCache(pBt); assert(pBt->autoVacuum); if( !pBt->incrVacuum ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 | ** committed. See sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo() for the second phase of the ** commit process. ** ** This call is a no-op if no write-transaction is currently active on pBt. ** ** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zSuperJrnl points to ** the name of a super-journal file that should be written into the | | | 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 | ** committed. See sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo() for the second phase of the ** commit process. ** ** This call is a no-op if no write-transaction is currently active on pBt. ** ** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zSuperJrnl points to ** the name of a super-journal file that should be written into the ** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no super-journal file ** (single database transaction). ** ** When this is called, the super-journal should already have been ** created, populated with this journal pointer and synced to disk. ** ** Once this is routine has returned, the only thing required to commit ** the write-transaction for this database file is to delete the journal. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 | if( p->inTrans>TRANS_NONE && db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ /* If there are other active statements that belong to this database ** handle, downgrade to a read-only transaction. The other statements ** may still be reading from the database. */ downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p); p->inTrans = TRANS_READ; }else{ | | | | | | | | | | 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 | if( p->inTrans>TRANS_NONE && db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ /* If there are other active statements that belong to this database ** handle, downgrade to a read-only transaction. The other statements ** may still be reading from the database. */ downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p); p->inTrans = TRANS_READ; }else{ /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count ** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused() ** call below will unlock the pager. */ if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){ clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p); pBt->nTransaction--; if( 0==pBt->nTransaction ){ pBt->inTransaction = TRANS_NONE; } } /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the ** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction. */ p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE; unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt); } btreeIntegrity(p); } /* ** Commit the transaction currently in progress. ** ** This routine implements the second phase of a 2-phase commit. The ** sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne() routine does the first phase and should ** be invoked prior to calling this routine. The sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne() ** routine did all the work of writing information out to disk and flushing the ** contents so that they are written onto the disk platter. All this ** routine has to do is delete or truncate or zero the header in the ** the rollback journal (which causes the transaction to commit) and ** drop locks. ** ** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to ** finalize the underlying journal file, this function returns an error and ** the upper layer will attempt a rollback. However, if the second argument ** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file ** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed ** (by deleting a super-journal file) and the caller will ignore this ** functions return code. So, even if an error occurs in the pager layer, ** reset the b-tree objects internal state to indicate that the write ** transaction has been closed. This is quite safe, as the pager will have ** transitioned to the error state. ** ** This will release the write lock on the database file. If there ** are no active cursors, it also releases the read lock. */ int sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(Btree *p, int bCleanup){ if( p->inTrans==TRANS_NONE ) return SQLITE_OK; sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); btreeIntegrity(p); /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees ** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ. */ if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){ int rc; BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE ); assert( pBt->nTransaction>0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 | ** ** Every cursor is a candidate to be tripped, including cursors ** that belong to other database connections that happen to be ** sharing the cache with pBtree. ** ** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly ** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only | | | | | | 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 | ** ** Every cursor is a candidate to be tripped, including cursors ** that belong to other database connections that happen to be ** sharing the cache with pBtree. ** ** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly ** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only ** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue ** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are ** tripped. In general, writeOnly is false if the transaction being ** rolled back modified the database schema. In this case b-tree root ** pages may be moved or deleted from the database altogether, making ** it unsafe for read cursors to continue. ** ** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while ** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors, ** including all read-cursors are tripped. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or if an error occurs while ** saving a cursor position, an SQLite error code. */ int sqlite3BtreeTripAllCursors(Btree *pBtree, int errCode, int writeOnly){ BtCursor *p; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 | btreeEndTransaction(p); sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; } /* ** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled | | | | 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 | btreeEndTransaction(p); sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; } /* ** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled ** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction ** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically ** if the main transaction commits or rolls back. ** ** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements ** that are contained within a BEGIN...COMMIT block. If a constraint ** error occurs within the statement, the effect of that one statement ** can be rolled back without having to rollback the entire transaction. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 | sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; } /* ** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the | | | | 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 | sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; } /* ** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the ** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value ** of op. ** ** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is ** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the ** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different ** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the ** transaction remains open. */ int sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(Btree *p, int op, int iSavepoint){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( p && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ if( iSavepoint<0 && (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_INITIALLY_EMPTY)!=0 ){ pBt->nPage = 0; } rc = newDatabase(pBt); btreeSetNPage(pBt, pBt->pPage1); | | | 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ if( iSavepoint<0 && (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_INITIALLY_EMPTY)!=0 ){ pBt->nPage = 0; } rc = newDatabase(pBt); btreeSetNPage(pBt, pBt->pPage1); /* pBt->nPage might be zero if the database was corrupt when ** the transaction was started. Otherwise, it must be at least 1. */ assert( CORRUPT_DB || pBt->nPage>0 ); } sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); } return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 | ** ** 4: There must be an active transaction. ** ** The BTREE_FORDELETE bit of wrFlag may optionally be set if BTREE_WRCSR ** is set. If FORDELETE is set, that is a hint to the implementation that ** this cursor will only be used to seek to and delete entries of an index ** as part of a larger DELETE statement. The FORDELETE hint is not used by | | | | | | | | | | 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 | ** ** 4: There must be an active transaction. ** ** The BTREE_FORDELETE bit of wrFlag may optionally be set if BTREE_WRCSR ** is set. If FORDELETE is set, that is a hint to the implementation that ** this cursor will only be used to seek to and delete entries of an index ** as part of a larger DELETE statement. The FORDELETE hint is not used by ** this implementation. But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine ** in which index entries are automatically deleted when corresponding table ** rows are deleted, the FORDELETE flag is a hint that all SEEK and DELETE ** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can ** return a null row (2-bytes: 0x01 0x00). ** ** No checking is done to make sure that page iTable really is the ** root page of a b-tree. If it is not, then the cursor acquired ** will not work correctly. ** ** It is assumed that the sqlite3BtreeCursorZero() has been called ** on pCur to initialize the memory space prior to invoking this routine. */ static int btreeCursor( Btree *p, /* The btree */ Pgno iTable, /* Root page of table to open */ int wrFlag, /* 1 to write. 0 read-only */ struct KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, /* First arg to comparison function */ BtCursor *pCur /* Space for new cursor */ ){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; /* Shared b-tree handle */ BtCursor *pX; /* Looping over other all cursors */ assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) ); assert( wrFlag==0 || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE) ); /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks, ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with ** this lock. The iTable<1 term disables the check for corrupt schemas. */ assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, (wrFlag?2:1)) || iTable<1 ); assert( wrFlag==0 || !hasReadConflicts(p, iTable) ); /* Assert that the caller has opened the required transaction. */ assert( p->inTrans>TRANS_NONE ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 | ** Return an upper bound on the size of any record for the table ** that the cursor is pointing into. ** ** This is an optimization. Everything will still work if this ** routine always returns 2147483647 (which is the largest record ** that SQLite can handle) or more. But returning a smaller value might ** prevent large memory allocations when trying to interpret a | | | | | | | | 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 | ** Return an upper bound on the size of any record for the table ** that the cursor is pointing into. ** ** This is an optimization. Everything will still work if this ** routine always returns 2147483647 (which is the largest record ** that SQLite can handle) or more. But returning a smaller value might ** prevent large memory allocations when trying to interpret a ** corrupt database. ** ** The current implementation merely returns the size of the underlying ** database file. */ sqlite3_int64 sqlite3BtreeMaxRecordSize(BtCursor *pCur){ assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) ); assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID ); return pCur->pBt->pageSize * (sqlite3_int64)pCur->pBt->nPage; } /* ** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter ** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the ** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum ** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so. ** ** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise: ** ** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is ** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked ** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero. ** ** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding ** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that ** reference. It is the responsibility of the caller to call releasePage() ** on *ppPage to free the reference. In no reference was obtained (because ** the pointer-map was used to obtain the value for *pPgnoNext), then ** *ppPage is set to zero. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 | int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert(pPgnoNext); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the | | | | | 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 | int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert(pPgnoNext); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page ** number ovfl to determine the next page number. */ if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ Pgno pgno; Pgno iGuess = ovfl+1; u8 eType; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 | ** Data is read to or from the buffer pBuf. ** ** The content being read or written might appear on the main page ** or be scattered out on multiple overflow pages. ** ** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages ** this function may allocate space for and lazily populate | | | | | 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 | ** Data is read to or from the buffer pBuf. ** ** The content being read or written might appear on the main page ** or be scattered out on multiple overflow pages. ** ** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages ** this function may allocate space for and lazily populate ** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow). ** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset ** more efficient. ** ** Once an overflow page-list cache has been allocated, it must be ** invalidated if some other cursor writes to the same table, or if ** the cursor is moved to a different row. Additionally, in auto-vacuum ** mode, the following events may invalidate an overflow page-list cache. ** ** * An incremental vacuum, ** * A commit in auto_vacuum="full" mode, ** * Creating a table (may require moving an overflow page). */ static int accessPayload( BtCursor *pCur, /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */ u32 offset, /* Begin reading this far into payload */ u32 amt, /* Read this many bytes */ unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */ int eOp /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */ ){ unsigned char *aPayload; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int iIdx = 0; MemPage *pPage = pCur->pPage; /* Btree page of current entry */ BtShared *pBt = pCur->pBt; /* Btree this cursor belongs to */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK && amt>0 ){ const u32 ovflSize = pBt->usableSize - 4; /* Bytes content per ovfl page */ Pgno nextPage; nextPage = get4byte(&aPayload[pCur->info.nLocal]); | | | 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK && amt>0 ){ const u32 ovflSize = pBt->usableSize - 4; /* Bytes content per ovfl page */ Pgno nextPage; nextPage = get4byte(&aPayload[pCur->info.nLocal]); /* If the BtCursor.aOverflow[] has not been allocated, allocate it now. ** ** The aOverflow[] array is sized at one entry for each overflow page ** in the overflow chain. The page number of the first overflow page is ** stored in aOverflow[0], etc. A value of 0 in the aOverflow[] array ** means "not yet known" (the cache is lazily populated). */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 | if( a + offset > ovflSize ){ a = ovflSize - offset; } #ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ /* If all the following are true: ** | | | | 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 | if( a + offset > ovflSize ){ a = ovflSize - offset; } #ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ /* If all the following are true: ** ** 1) this is a read operation, and ** 2) data is required from the start of this overflow page, and ** 3) there are no dirty pages in the page-cache ** 4) the database is file-backed, and ** 5) the page is not in the WAL file ** 6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer ** ** then data can be read directly from the database file into the ** output buffer, bypassing the page-cache altogether. This speeds ** up loading large records that span many overflow pages. */ if( eOp==0 /* (1) */ && offset==0 /* (2) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 | }else{ return accessPayloadChecked(pCur, offset, amt, pBuf); } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */ /* | | | 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 5286 5287 | }else{ return accessPayloadChecked(pCur, offset, amt, pBuf); } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */ /* ** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the ** pCur cursor is pointing to. The pointer is to the beginning of ** the key if index btrees (pPage->intKey==0) and is the data for ** table btrees (pPage->intKey==1). The number of bytes of available ** key/data is written into *pAmt. If *pAmt==0, then the value ** returned will not be a valid pointer. ** ** This routine is an optimization. It is common for the entire key |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 | pCur->iPage++; return getAndInitPage(pCur->pBt, newPgno, &pCur->pPage, pCur, pCur->curPagerFlags); } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* | | | | | | | | | | 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 5433 5434 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 | pCur->iPage++; return getAndInitPage(pCur->pBt, newPgno, &pCur->pPage, pCur, pCur->curPagerFlags); } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* ** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function ** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th ** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of ** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of ** the page. */ static void assertParentIndex(MemPage *pParent, int iIdx, Pgno iChild){ if( CORRUPT_DB ) return; /* The conditions tested below might not be true ** in a corrupt database */ assert( iIdx<=pParent->nCell ); if( iIdx==pParent->nCell ){ assert( get4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8])==iChild ); }else{ assert( get4byte(findCell(pParent, iIdx))==iChild ); } } #else # define assertParentIndex(x,y,z) #endif /* ** Move the cursor up to the parent page. ** ** pCur->idx is set to the cell index that contains the pointer ** to the page we are coming from. If we are coming from the ** right-most child page then pCur->idx is set to one more than ** the largest cell index. */ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){ MemPage *pLeaf; assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID ); assert( pCur->iPage>0 ); assert( pCur->pPage ); assertParentIndex( pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1], pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1], pCur->pPage->pgno ); testcase( pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1] > pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1]->nCell ); pCur->info.nSize = 0; pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_ValidNKey|BTCF_ValidOvfl); pCur->ix = pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1]; pLeaf = pCur->pPage; pCur->pPage = pCur->apPage[--pCur->iPage]; releasePageNotNull(pLeaf); } /* ** Move the cursor to point to the root page of its b-tree structure. ** ** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point ** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a ** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a ** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1. ** ** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to ** CURSOR_INVALID and this routine returns SQLITE_EMPTY. Otherwise, ** the cursor is set to point to the first cell located on the root ** (or virtual root) page and the cursor state is set to CURSOR_VALID. ** ** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the ** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected ** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not ** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D, ** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo ** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index ** b-tree). */ static int moveToRoot(BtCursor *pCur){ MemPage *pRoot; int rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 | } pRoot = pCur->pPage; assert( pRoot->pgno==pCur->pgnoRoot || CORRUPT_DB ); /* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor ** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is ** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case, | | | | | | 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 5487 5488 5489 5490 5491 5492 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 | } pRoot = pCur->pPage; assert( pRoot->pgno==pCur->pgnoRoot || CORRUPT_DB ); /* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor ** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is ** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case, ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. ** ** Earlier versions of SQLite assumed that this test could not fail ** if the root page was already loaded when this function was called (i.e. ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table ** (or the freelist). */ assert( pRoot->intKey==1 || pRoot->intKey==0 ); if( pRoot->isInit==0 || (pCur->pKeyInfo==0)!=pRoot->intKey ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pCur->pPage); } skip_init: pCur->ix = 0; pCur->info.nSize = 0; pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_AtLast|BTCF_ValidNKey|BTCF_ValidOvfl); if( pRoot->nCell>0 ){ pCur->eState = CURSOR_VALID; }else if( !pRoot->leaf ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 | int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) ); /* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */ if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG | | | 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 | int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) ); /* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */ if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point ** to the last entry in the b-tree. */ int ii; for(ii=0; ii<pCur->iPage; ii++){ assert( pCur->aiIdx[ii]==pCur->apPage[ii]->nCell ); } assert( pCur->ix==pCur->pPage->nCell-1 || CORRUPT_DB ); testcase( pCur->ix!=pCur->pPage->nCell-1 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5639 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 | ** ** If an exact match is not found, then the cursor is always ** left pointing at a leaf page which would hold the entry if it ** were present. The cursor might point to an entry that comes ** before or after the key. ** ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of | | | 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647 5648 5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 | ** ** If an exact match is not found, then the cursor is always ** left pointing at a leaf page which would hold the entry if it ** were present. The cursor might point to an entry that comes ** before or after the key. ** ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of ** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is ** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into ** *pRes is as follows: ** ** *pRes<0 The cursor is left pointing at an entry that ** is smaller than intKey or if the table is empty ** and the cursor is therefore left point to nothing. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5682 5683 5684 5685 5686 5687 5688 | if( (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){ *pRes = -1; return SQLITE_OK; } /* If the requested key is one more than the previous key, then ** try to get there using sqlite3BtreeNext() rather than a full ** binary search. This is an optimization only. The correct answer | | | 5683 5684 5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692 5693 5694 5695 5696 5697 | if( (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){ *pRes = -1; return SQLITE_OK; } /* If the requested key is one more than the previous key, then ** try to get there using sqlite3BtreeNext() rather than a full ** binary search. This is an optimization only. The correct answer ** is still obtained without this case, only a little more slowly. */ if( pCur->info.nKey+1==intKey ){ *pRes = 0; rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pCur, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ getCellInfo(pCur); if( pCur->info.nKey==intKey ){ return SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 | nCell = pCell[0]; if( nCell<=pPage->max1bytePayload ){ /* This branch runs if the record-size field of the cell is a ** single byte varint and the record fits entirely on the main ** b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey); | | | | 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 | nCell = pCell[0]; if( nCell<=pPage->max1bytePayload ){ /* This branch runs if the record-size field of the cell is a ** single byte varint and the record fits entirely on the main ** b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey); }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) && (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal ){ /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record ** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey); }else{ /* If the record extends into overflow pages, do not attempt ** the optimization. */ c = 99; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873 | ** ** If an exact match is not found, then the cursor is always ** left pointing at a leaf page which would hold the entry if it ** were present. The cursor might point to an entry that comes ** before or after the key. ** ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of | | | | | | 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919 | ** ** If an exact match is not found, then the cursor is always ** left pointing at a leaf page which would hold the entry if it ** were present. The cursor might point to an entry that comes ** before or after the key. ** ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of ** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is ** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into ** *pRes is as follows: ** ** *pRes<0 The cursor is left pointing at an entry that ** is smaller than pIdxKey or if the table is empty ** and the cursor is therefore left point to nothing. ** ** *pRes==0 The cursor is left pointing at an entry that ** exactly matches pIdxKey. ** ** *pRes>0 The cursor is left pointing at an entry that ** is larger than pIdxKey. ** ** The pIdxKey->eqSeen field is set to 1 if there ** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey. */ int sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto( BtCursor *pCur, /* The cursor to be moved */ UnpackedRecord *pIdxKey, /* Unpacked index key */ int *pRes /* Write search results here */ ){ int rc; RecordCompare xRecordCompare; assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) ); assert( pRes ); assert( pCur->pKeyInfo!=0 ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG pCur->pBtree->nSeek++; /* Performance measurement during testing */ #endif xRecordCompare = sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(pIdxKey); pIdxKey->errCode = 0; assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1 || pIdxKey->default_rc==0 || pIdxKey->default_rc==-1 ); /* Check to see if we can skip a lot of work. Two cases: ** ** (1) If the cursor is already pointing to the very last cell |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 | if( pCur->ix==pCur->pPage->nCell-1 && (c = indexCellCompare(pCur, pCur->ix, pIdxKey, xRecordCompare))<=0 && pIdxKey->errCode==SQLITE_OK ){ *pRes = c; return SQLITE_OK; /* Cursor already pointing at the correct spot */ } | | | 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 | if( pCur->ix==pCur->pPage->nCell-1 && (c = indexCellCompare(pCur, pCur->ix, pIdxKey, xRecordCompare))<=0 && pIdxKey->errCode==SQLITE_OK ){ *pRes = c; return SQLITE_OK; /* Cursor already pointing at the correct spot */ } if( pCur->iPage>0 && indexCellCompare(pCur, 0, pIdxKey, xRecordCompare)<=0 && pIdxKey->errCode==SQLITE_OK ){ pCur->curFlags &= ~BTCF_ValidOvfl; if( !pCur->pPage->isInit ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 | for(;;){ int nCell; /* Size of the pCell cell in bytes */ pCell = findCellPastPtr(pPage, idx); /* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that ** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree ** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte | | | | | | | | | 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 | for(;;){ int nCell; /* Size of the pCell cell in bytes */ pCell = findCellPastPtr(pPage, idx); /* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that ** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree ** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first ** 2 bytes of the cell. */ nCell = pCell[0]; if( nCell<=pPage->max1bytePayload ){ /* This branch runs if the record-size field of the cell is a ** single byte varint and the record fits entirely on the main ** b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey); }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) && (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal ){ /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record ** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey); }else{ /* The record flows over onto one or more overflow pages. In ** this case the whole cell needs to be parsed, a buffer allocated ** and accessPayload() used to retrieve the record into the ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called. ** ** If the record is corrupt, the xRecordCompare routine may read ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18 ** bytes of padding is allocated at the end of the buffer in ** case this happens. */ void *pCellKey; u8 * const pCellBody = pCell - pPage->childPtrSize; const int nOverrun = 18; /* Size of the overrun padding */ pPage->xParseCell(pPage, pCellBody, &pCur->info); nCell = (int)pCur->info.nKey; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6044 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 | if( rc ){ sqlite3_free(pCellKey); goto moveto_index_finish; } c = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey); sqlite3_free(pCellKey); } | | | 6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 | if( rc ){ sqlite3_free(pCellKey); goto moveto_index_finish; } c = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey); sqlite3_free(pCellKey); } assert( (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_CORRUPT || c==0) && (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_NOMEM || pCur->pBtree->db->mallocFailed) ); if( c<0 ){ lwr = idx+1; }else if( c>0 ){ upr = idx-1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 | ** as well as the boolean result value. */ return (CURSOR_VALID!=pCur->eState); } /* ** Return an estimate for the number of rows in the table that pCur is | | | 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 | ** as well as the boolean result value. */ return (CURSOR_VALID!=pCur->eState); } /* ** Return an estimate for the number of rows in the table that pCur is ** pointing to. Return a negative number if no estimate is currently ** available. */ i64 sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(BtCursor *pCur){ i64 n; u8 i; assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 | for(i=0; i<pCur->iPage; i++){ n *= pCur->apPage[i]->nCell; } return n; } /* | | | 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 | for(i=0; i<pCur->iPage; i++){ n *= pCur->apPage[i]->nCell; } return n; } /* ** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database. ** Return value: ** ** SQLITE_OK success ** SQLITE_DONE cursor is already pointing at the last element ** otherwise some kind of error occurred ** ** The main entry point is sqlite3BtreeNext(). That routine is optimized |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6319 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 | ** has already been called on the new page.) The new page has also ** been referenced and the calling routine is responsible for calling ** sqlite3PagerUnref() on the new page when it is done. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. Any other return value indicates ** an error. *ppPage is set to NULL in the event of an error. ** | | | 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328 6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 | ** has already been called on the new page.) The new page has also ** been referenced and the calling routine is responsible for calling ** sqlite3PagerUnref() on the new page when it is done. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. Any other return value indicates ** an error. *ppPage is set to NULL in the event of an error. ** ** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to ** locate a page close to the page number "nearby". This can be used in an ** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file, ** which in turn can make database access faster. ** ** If the eMode parameter is BTALLOC_EXACT and the nearby page exists ** anywhere on the free-list, then it is guaranteed to be returned. If ** eMode is BTALLOC_LT then the page returned will be less than or equal |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 | return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } if( n>0 ){ /* There are pages on the freelist. Reuse one of those pages. */ Pgno iTrunk; u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */ u32 nSearch = 0; /* Count of the number of search attempts */ | | | 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 | return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } if( n>0 ){ /* There are pages on the freelist. Reuse one of those pages. */ Pgno iTrunk; u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */ u32 nSearch = 0; /* Count of the number of search attempts */ /* If eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT and a query of the pointer-map ** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then ** the entire-list will be searched for that page. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM if( eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT ){ if( nearby<=mxPage ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 | } assert( pTrunk!=0 ); assert( pTrunk->aData!=0 ); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-13523-04394 The second integer on a freelist trunk page ** is the number of leaf page pointers to follow. */ k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]); if( k==0 && !searchList ){ | | | | | | 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 | } assert( pTrunk!=0 ); assert( pTrunk->aData!=0 ); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-13523-04394 The second integer on a freelist trunk page ** is the number of leaf page pointers to follow. */ k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]); if( k==0 && !searchList ){ /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched. ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly ** allocated page */ assert( pPrevTrunk==0 ); rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage); if( rc ){ goto end_allocate_page; } *pPgno = iTrunk; memcpy(&pPage1->aData[32], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4); *ppPage = pTrunk; pTrunk = 0; TRACE(("ALLOCATE: %u trunk - %u free pages left\n", *pPgno, n-1)); }else if( k>(u32)(pBt->usableSize/4 - 2) ){ /* Value of k is out of range. Database corruption */ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk); goto end_allocate_page; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM }else if( searchList && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) ){ /* The list is being searched and this trunk page is the page ** to allocate, regardless of whether it has leaves. */ *pPgno = iTrunk; *ppPage = pTrunk; searchList = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 | rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPrevTrunk->pDbPage); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto end_allocate_page; } memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4); } }else{ | | | | 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486 6487 | rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPrevTrunk->pDbPage); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto end_allocate_page; } memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4); } }else{ /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains ** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk ** page in this case. */ MemPage *pNewTrunk; Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]); if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk); goto end_allocate_page; } testcase( iNewTrunk==mxPage ); rc = btreeGetUnusedPage(pBt, iNewTrunk, &pNewTrunk, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto end_allocate_page; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 | iPage = get4byte(&aData[8+closest*4]); testcase( iPage==mxPage ); if( iPage>mxPage || iPage<2 ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk); goto end_allocate_page; } testcase( iPage==mxPage ); | | | | 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 | iPage = get4byte(&aData[8+closest*4]); testcase( iPage==mxPage ); if( iPage>mxPage || iPage<2 ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk); goto end_allocate_page; } testcase( iPage==mxPage ); if( !searchList || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) ){ int noContent; *pPgno = iPage; TRACE(("ALLOCATE: %u was leaf %u of %u on trunk %u" ": %u more free pages\n", *pPgno, closest+1, k, pTrunk->pgno, n-1)); rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6584 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 | ** from trying to read the pages content from disk. However, if the ** current transaction has already run one or more incremental-vacuum ** steps, then the page we are about to allocate may contain content ** that is required in the event of a rollback. In this case, do ** not set the no-content flag. This causes the pager to load and journal ** the current page content before overwriting it. ** | | | 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 | ** from trying to read the pages content from disk. However, if the ** current transaction has already run one or more incremental-vacuum ** steps, then the page we are about to allocate may contain content ** that is required in the event of a rollback. In this case, do ** not set the no-content flag. This causes the pager to load and journal ** the current page content before overwriting it. ** ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal ** content for any page that really does lie past the end of the database ** file on disk. So the effects of disabling the no-content optimization ** here are confined to those pages that lie between the end of the ** database image and the end of the database file. */ int bNoContent = (0==IfNotOmitAV(pBt->bDoTruncate))? PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT:0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6641 6642 6643 6644 6645 6646 6647 | releasePage(pPrevTrunk); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || sqlite3PagerPageRefcount((*ppPage)->pDbPage)<=1 ); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (*ppPage)->isInit==0 ); return rc; } /* | | | | | | 6642 6643 6644 6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 6650 6651 6652 6653 6654 6655 6656 6657 6658 6659 6660 6661 6662 6663 6664 6665 6666 6667 6668 6669 | releasePage(pPrevTrunk); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || sqlite3PagerPageRefcount((*ppPage)->pDbPage)<=1 ); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (*ppPage)->isInit==0 ); return rc; } /* ** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list. ** It is assumed that the page is not already a part of the free-list. ** ** The value passed as the second argument to this function is optional. ** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object ** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value. ** Otherwise, it may pass NULL. ** ** If a pointer to a MemPage object is passed as the second argument, ** its reference count is not altered by this function. */ static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){ MemPage *pTrunk = 0; /* Free-list trunk page */ Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */ MemPage *pPage1 = pBt->pPage1; /* Local reference to page 1 */ MemPage *pPage; /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */ int rc; /* Return Code */ u32 nFree; /* Initial number of pages on free-list */ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( CORRUPT_DB || iPage>1 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6762 6763 6764 6765 6766 6767 6768 | TRACE(("FREE-PAGE: %u leaf on trunk page %u\n",pPage->pgno,pTrunk->pgno)); goto freepage_out; } } /* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the ** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list. | | | 6763 6764 6765 6766 6767 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774 6775 6776 6777 | TRACE(("FREE-PAGE: %u leaf on trunk page %u\n",pPage->pgno,pTrunk->pgno)); goto freepage_out; } } /* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the ** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list. ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the ** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed ** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list. */ if( pPage==0 && SQLITE_OK!=(rc = btreeGetPage(pBt, iPage, &pPage, 0)) ){ goto freepage_out; } rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPage->pDbPage); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6819 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824 6825 | return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } ovflPgno = get4byte(pCell + pInfo->nSize - 4); pBt = pPage->pBt; assert( pBt->usableSize > 4 ); ovflPageSize = pBt->usableSize - 4; nOvfl = (pInfo->nPayload - pInfo->nLocal + ovflPageSize - 1)/ovflPageSize; | | | | | | | | | 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824 6825 6826 6827 6828 6829 6830 6831 6832 6833 6834 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839 6840 6841 6842 6843 6844 6845 6846 6847 6848 6849 6850 6851 6852 6853 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 | return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage); } ovflPgno = get4byte(pCell + pInfo->nSize - 4); pBt = pPage->pBt; assert( pBt->usableSize > 4 ); ovflPageSize = pBt->usableSize - 4; nOvfl = (pInfo->nPayload - pInfo->nLocal + ovflPageSize - 1)/ovflPageSize; assert( nOvfl>0 || (CORRUPT_DB && (pInfo->nPayload + ovflPageSize)<ovflPageSize) ); while( nOvfl-- ){ Pgno iNext = 0; MemPage *pOvfl = 0; if( ovflPgno<2 || ovflPgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){ /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the ** file the database must be corrupt. */ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } if( nOvfl ){ rc = getOverflowPage(pBt, ovflPgno, &pOvfl, &iNext); if( rc ) return rc; } if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) ) && sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1 ){ /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference ** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated. ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt. ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as ** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is ** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the ** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this ** can be problematic. */ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6865 6866 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 | ovflPgno = iNext; } return SQLITE_OK; } /* Call xParseCell to compute the size of a cell. If the cell contains ** overflow, then invoke cellClearOverflow to clear out that overflow. | | | 6866 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 6873 6874 6875 6876 6877 6878 6879 6880 | ovflPgno = iNext; } return SQLITE_OK; } /* Call xParseCell to compute the size of a cell. If the cell contains ** overflow, then invoke cellClearOverflow to clear out that overflow. ** Store the result code (SQLITE_OK or some error code) in rc. ** ** Implemented as macro to force inlining for performance. */ #define BTREE_CLEAR_CELL(rc, pPage, pCell, sInfo) \ pPage->xParseCell(pPage, pCell, &sInfo); \ if( sInfo.nLocal!=sInfo.nPayload ){ \ rc = clearCellOverflow(pPage, pCell, &sInfo); \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6929 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 | nHeader += putVarint(&pCell[nHeader], *(u64*)&pX->nKey); }else{ assert( pX->nKey<=0x7fffffff && pX->pKey!=0 ); nSrc = nPayload = (int)pX->nKey; pSrc = pX->pKey; nHeader += putVarint32(&pCell[nHeader], nPayload); } | | | 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6939 6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 | nHeader += putVarint(&pCell[nHeader], *(u64*)&pX->nKey); }else{ assert( pX->nKey<=0x7fffffff && pX->pKey!=0 ); nSrc = nPayload = (int)pX->nKey; pSrc = pX->pKey; nHeader += putVarint32(&pCell[nHeader], nPayload); } /* Fill in the payload */ pPayload = &pCell[nHeader]; if( nPayload<=pPage->maxLocal ){ /* This is the common case where everything fits on the btree page ** and no overflow pages are required. */ n = nHeader + nPayload; testcase( n==3 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7020 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 | if( spaceLeft==0 ){ MemPage *pOvfl = 0; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM Pgno pgnoPtrmap = pgnoOvfl; /* Overflow page pointer-map entry page */ if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ do{ pgnoOvfl++; | | | | | | 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 | if( spaceLeft==0 ){ MemPage *pOvfl = 0; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM Pgno pgnoPtrmap = pgnoOvfl; /* Overflow page pointer-map entry page */ if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ do{ pgnoOvfl++; } while( PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ); } #endif rc = allocateBtreePage(pBt, &pOvfl, &pgnoOvfl, pgnoOvfl, 0); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent ** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map ** for that page now. ** ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry ** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot, ** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell() ** may misinterpret the uninitialized values and delete the ** wrong pages from the database. */ if( pBt->autoVacuum && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ u8 eType = (pgnoPtrmap?PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2:PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 | ** Insert a new cell on pPage at cell index "i". pCell points to the ** content of the cell. ** ** If the cell content will fit on the page, then put it there. If it ** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if ** pTemp is not null. Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry ** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either | | | | 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 | ** Insert a new cell on pPage at cell index "i". pCell points to the ** content of the cell. ** ** If the cell content will fit on the page, then put it there. If it ** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if ** pTemp is not null. Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry ** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either ** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index. ** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that ** pPage->nOverflow is incremented. ** ** The insertCellFast() routine below works exactly the same as ** insertCell() except that it lacks the pTemp and iChild parameters ** which are assumed zero. Other than that, the two routines are the ** same. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7445 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 | static u16 cachedCellSize(CellArray *p, int N){ assert( N>=0 && N<p->nCell ); if( p->szCell[N] ) return p->szCell[N]; return computeCellSize(p, N); } /* | | | | | 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 | static u16 cachedCellSize(CellArray *p, int N){ assert( N>=0 && N<p->nCell ); if( p->szCell[N] ) return p->szCell[N]; return computeCellSize(p, N); } /* ** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The ** szCell[] array contains the size in bytes of each cell. This function ** replaces the current contents of page pPg with the contents of the cell ** array. ** ** Some of the cells in apCell[] may currently be stored in pPg. This ** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any ** such cells before overwriting the page data. ** ** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the ** responsibility of the caller to set it correctly. */ static int rebuildPage( CellArray *pCArray, /* Content to be added to page pPg */ int iFirst, /* First cell in pCArray to use */ int nCell, /* Final number of cells on page */ MemPage *pPg /* The page to be reconstructed */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7536 7537 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 | ** ** Argument pCellptr points to the first entry in the cell-pointer array ** (part of page pPg) to populate. After cell apCell[0] is written to the ** page body, a 16-bit offset is written to pCellptr. And so on, for each ** cell in the array. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure ** that it is safe to overwrite this part of the cell-pointer array. ** | | | | 7537 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7557 7558 7559 | ** ** Argument pCellptr points to the first entry in the cell-pointer array ** (part of page pPg) to populate. After cell apCell[0] is written to the ** page body, a 16-bit offset is written to pCellptr. And so on, for each ** cell in the array. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure ** that it is safe to overwrite this part of the cell-pointer array. ** ** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the ** content area on page pPg. If the size of the content area is extended, ** *ppData is updated to point to the new start of the content area ** before returning. ** ** Finally, argument pBegin points to the byte immediately following the ** end of the space required by this page for the cell-pointer area (for ** all cells - not just those inserted by the current call). If the content ** area must be extended to before this point in order to accommodate all ** cells in apCell[], then the cells do not fit and non-zero is returned. */ static int pageInsertArray( MemPage *pPg, /* Page to add cells to */ u8 *pBegin, /* End of cell-pointer array */ u8 **ppData, /* IN/OUT: Page content-area pointer */ u8 *pCellptr, /* Pointer to cell-pointer area */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7820 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 | MemPage *pNew; /* Newly allocated page */ int rc; /* Return Code */ Pgno pgnoNew; /* Page number of pNew */ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) ); assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) ); assert( pPage->nOverflow==1 ); | | | | 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 7840 | MemPage *pNew; /* Newly allocated page */ int rc; /* Return Code */ Pgno pgnoNew; /* Page number of pNew */ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) ); assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) ); assert( pPage->nOverflow==1 ); if( pPage->nCell==0 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; /* dbfuzz001.test */ assert( pPage->nFree>=0 ); assert( pParent->nFree>=0 ); /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of ** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell ** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed. */ rc = allocateBtreePage(pBt, &pNew, &pgnoNew, 0, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7856 7857 7858 7859 7860 7861 7862 | if( NEVER(rc) ){ releasePage(pNew); return rc; } pNew->nFree = pBt->usableSize - pNew->cellOffset - 2 - szCell; /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map | | | | | | | | | | 7857 7858 7859 7860 7861 7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7867 7868 7869 7870 7871 7872 7873 7874 7875 7876 7877 7878 7879 7880 7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 7888 7889 7890 7891 7892 7893 7894 7895 7896 7897 7898 7899 7900 7901 7902 7903 7904 7905 7906 7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7914 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 7923 7924 7925 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 7931 7932 7933 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 7940 | if( NEVER(rc) ){ releasePage(pNew); return rc; } pNew->nFree = pBt->usableSize - pNew->cellOffset - 2 - szCell; /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the ** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these ** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents ** of the parent page are still manipulated by the code below. ** That is Ok, at this point the parent page is guaranteed to ** be marked as dirty. Returning an error code will cause a ** rollback, undoing any changes made to the parent page. */ if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) ){ ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoNew, PTRMAP_BTREE, pParent->pgno, &rc); if( szCell>pNew->minLocal ){ ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pNew, pCell, &rc); } } /* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell ** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and ** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the ** largest key on pPage). ** ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the ** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size) ** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value). ** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length ** field. The second while(...) loop copies the key value from the ** cell on pPage into the pSpace buffer. */ pCell = findCell(pPage, pPage->nCell-1); pStop = &pCell[9]; while( (*(pCell++)&0x80) && pCell<pStop ); pStop = &pCell[9]; while( ((*(pOut++) = *(pCell++))&0x80) && pCell<pStop ); /* Insert the new divider cell into pParent. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = insertCell(pParent, pParent->nCell, pSpace, (int)(pOut-pSpace), 0, pPage->pgno); } /* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */ put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew); /* Release the reference to the new page. */ releasePage(pNew); } return rc; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_QUICKBALANCE */ #if 0 /* ** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite. ** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible ** for setting pointer-map entries. */ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){ int i, j; for(i=0; i<nPage; i++){ Pgno n; u8 e; MemPage *pPage = apPage[i]; BtShared *pBt = pPage->pBt; assert( pPage->isInit ); for(j=0; j<pPage->nCell; j++){ CellInfo info; u8 *z; z = findCell(pPage, j); pPage->xParseCell(pPage, z, &info); if( info.nLocal<info.nPayload ){ Pgno ovfl = get4byte(&z[info.nSize-4]); ptrmapGet(pBt, ovfl, &e, &n); assert( n==pPage->pgno && e==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7950 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 | } } return 1; } #endif /* | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 7962 7963 7964 7965 7966 7967 7968 7969 7970 7971 7972 7973 7974 7975 7976 7977 7978 7979 7980 7981 7982 7983 7984 7985 7986 7987 7988 7989 7990 7991 7992 7993 7994 7995 7996 7997 7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 8011 8012 8013 8014 8015 8016 8017 8018 8019 8020 8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 8038 8039 8040 8041 8042 8043 8044 8045 8046 8047 8048 8049 8050 8051 8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 8059 8060 | } } return 1; } #endif /* ** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored ** on page pFrom to page pTo. If page pFrom was not a leaf page, then ** the pointer-map entries for each child page are updated so that the ** parent page stored in the pointer map is page pTo. If pFrom contained ** any cells with overflow page pointers, then the corresponding pointer ** map entries are also updated so that the parent page is page pTo. ** ** If pFrom is currently carrying any overflow cells (entries in the ** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo. ** ** Before returning, page pTo is reinitialized using btreeInitPage(). ** ** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by ** the balance_shallower() and balance_deeper() procedures, neither of ** which are called often under normal circumstances. */ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){ if( (*pRC)==SQLITE_OK ){ BtShared * const pBt = pFrom->pBt; u8 * const aFrom = pFrom->aData; u8 * const aTo = pTo->aData; int const iFromHdr = pFrom->hdrOffset; int const iToHdr = ((pTo->pgno==1) ? 100 : 0); int rc; int iData; assert( pFrom->isInit ); assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr ); assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]) <= (int)pBt->usableSize ); /* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */ iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]); memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData); memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell); /* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure ** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized ** page pFrom. */ pTo->isInit = 0; rc = btreeInitPage(pTo); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = btreeComputeFreeSpace(pTo); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ *pRC = rc; return; } /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries ** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to. */ if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) ){ *pRC = setChildPtrmaps(pTo); } } } /* ** This routine redistributes cells on the iParentIdx'th child of pParent ** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the ** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the ** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one ** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page ** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page ** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings ** participate in the balancing. ** ** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by ** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full. ** ** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page ** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen ** if the page is overfull. This routine ensures that all cells allocated ** to the page and its siblings fit into MemPage.aData[] before returning. ** ** In the course of balancing the page and its siblings, cells may be ** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so ** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this ** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct ** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine). ** ** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database ** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should ** be rolled back. ** ** The third argument to this function, aOvflSpace, is a pointer to a ** buffer big enough to hold one page. If while inserting cells into the parent ** page (pParent) the parent page becomes overfull, this buffer is ** used to store the parent's overflow cells. Because this function inserts ** a maximum of four divider cells into the parent page, and the maximum ** size of a cell stored within an internal node is always less than 1/4 ** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large ** enough for all overflow cells. ** ** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns ** SQLITE_NOMEM. */ static int balance_nonroot( MemPage *pParent, /* Parent page of siblings being balanced */ int iParentIdx, /* Index of "the page" in pParent */ u8 *aOvflSpace, /* page-size bytes of space for parent ovfl */ int isRoot, /* True if pParent is a root-page */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8089 8090 8091 8092 8093 8094 8095 | memset(abDone, 0, sizeof(abDone)); memset(&b, 0, sizeof(b)); pBt = pParent->pBt; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) ); /* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if | | | | | | | | 8090 8091 8092 8093 8094 8095 8096 8097 8098 8099 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 8109 8110 8111 8112 8113 8114 8115 8116 8117 8118 8119 8120 8121 8122 8123 8124 8125 8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 8131 8132 | memset(abDone, 0, sizeof(abDone)); memset(&b, 0, sizeof(b)); pBt = pParent->pBt; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) ); /* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with ** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function ** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete(). */ assert( pParent->nOverflow==0 || pParent->nOverflow==1 ); assert( pParent->nOverflow==0 || pParent->aiOvfl[0]==iParentIdx ); if( !aOvflSpace ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } assert( pParent->nFree>=0 ); /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however, ** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken. ** ** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This ** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any ** overflow cells in the parent page, since if any existed they will ** have already been removed. */ i = pParent->nOverflow + pParent->nCell; if( i<2 ){ nxDiv = 0; }else{ assert( bBulk==0 || bBulk==1 ); if( iParentIdx==0 ){ nxDiv = 0; }else if( iParentIdx==i ){ nxDiv = i-2+bBulk; }else{ nxDiv = iParentIdx-1; } i = 2-bBulk; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8166 8167 8168 8169 8170 8171 8172 | szNew[i] = pParent->xCellSize(pParent, apDiv[i]); /* Drop the cell from the parent page. apDiv[i] still points to ** the cell within the parent, even though it has been dropped. ** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first ** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first ** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use | | | 8167 8168 8169 8170 8171 8172 8173 8174 8175 8176 8177 8178 8179 8180 8181 | szNew[i] = pParent->xCellSize(pParent, apDiv[i]); /* Drop the cell from the parent page. apDiv[i] still points to ** the cell within the parent, even though it has been dropped. ** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first ** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first ** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use ** later on. ** ** But not if we are in secure-delete mode. In secure-delete mode, ** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes. ** In this case, temporarily copy the cell into the aOvflSpace[] ** buffer. It will be copied out again as soon as the aSpace[] buffer ** is allocated. */ if( pBt->btsFlags & BTS_FAST_SECURE ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8329 8330 8331 8332 8333 8334 8335 | } } /* ** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all b.nCell cells. ** Store this number in "k". Also compute szNew[] which is the total ** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index | | | | 8330 8331 8332 8333 8334 8335 8336 8337 8338 8339 8340 8341 8342 8343 8344 8345 8346 8347 8348 8349 8350 8351 8352 8353 8354 | } } /* ** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all b.nCell cells. ** Store this number in "k". Also compute szNew[] which is the total ** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1. ** cntNew[k] should equal b.nCell. ** ** Values computed by this block: ** ** k: The total number of sibling pages ** szNew[i]: Spaced used on the i-th sibling page. ** cntNew[i]: Index in b.apCell[] and b.szCell[] for the first cell to ** the right of the i-th sibling page. ** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling. ** */ usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection; for(i=k=0; i<nOld; i++, k++){ MemPage *p = apOld[i]; b.apEnd[k] = p->aDataEnd; b.ixNx[k] = cntOld[i]; if( k && b.ixNx[k]==b.ixNx[k-1] ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8449 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 8455 | szNew[i-1] = szLeft; if( cntNew[i-1] <= (i>1 ? cntNew[i-2] : 0) ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto balance_cleanup; } } | | | 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 8455 8456 8457 8458 8459 8460 8461 8462 8463 8464 | szNew[i-1] = szLeft; if( cntNew[i-1] <= (i>1 ? cntNew[i-2] : 0) ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto balance_cleanup; } } /* Sanity check: For a non-corrupt database file one of the following ** must be true: ** (1) We found one or more cells (cntNew[0])>0), or ** (2) pPage is a virtual root page. A virtual root page is when ** the real root page is page 1 and we are the only child of ** that page. */ assert( cntNew[0]>0 || (pParent->pgno==1 && pParent->nCell==0) || CORRUPT_DB); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8500 8501 8502 8503 8504 8505 8506 | goto balance_cleanup; } } } } /* | | | | | 8501 8502 8503 8504 8505 8506 8507 8508 8509 8510 8511 8512 8513 8514 8515 8516 8517 8518 8519 8520 8521 8522 8523 | goto balance_cleanup; } } } } /* ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order. ** This helps to keep entries in the disk file in order so that a scan ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn ** helps the operating system to deliver pages from the disk more rapidly. ** ** An O(N*N) sort algorithm is used, but since N is never more than NB+2 ** (5), that is not a performance concern. ** ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster ** for large insertions and deletions. */ for(i=0; i<nNew; i++){ aPgno[i] = apNew[i]->pgno; assert( apNew[i]->pDbPage->flags & PGHDR_WRITEABLE ); assert( apNew[i]->pDbPage->flags & PGHDR_DIRTY ); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8560 8561 8562 8563 8564 8565 8566 | assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) ); assert( nNew>=1 && nNew<=ArraySize(apNew) ); assert( apNew[nNew-1]!=0 ); put4byte(pRight, apNew[nNew-1]->pgno); /* If the sibling pages are not leaves, ensure that the right-child pointer | | | | | | | 8561 8562 8563 8564 8565 8566 8567 8568 8569 8570 8571 8572 8573 8574 8575 8576 8577 8578 8579 8580 8581 8582 8583 8584 8585 8586 8587 8588 8589 8590 8591 8592 8593 8594 8595 | assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) ); assert( nNew>=1 && nNew<=ArraySize(apNew) ); assert( apNew[nNew-1]!=0 ); put4byte(pRight, apNew[nNew-1]->pgno); /* If the sibling pages are not leaves, ensure that the right-child pointer ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was ** originally in the same field of the right-most old sibling page. */ if( (pageFlags & PTF_LEAF)==0 && nOld!=nNew ){ MemPage *pOld = (nNew>nOld ? apNew : apOld)[nOld-1]; memcpy(&apNew[nNew-1]->aData[8], &pOld->aData[8], 4); } /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with ** cells stored on sibling pages following the balance operation. Pointer ** map entries associated with divider cells are set by the insertCell() ** routine. The associated pointer map entries are: ** ** a) if the cell contains a reference to an overflow chain, the ** entry associated with the first page in the overflow chain, and ** ** b) if the sibling pages are not leaves, the child page associated ** with the cell. ** ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been ** populated, not here. */ if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) ){ MemPage *pOld; MemPage *pNew = pOld = apNew[0]; int cntOldNext = pNew->nCell + pNew->nOverflow; int iNew = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8605 8606 8607 8608 8609 8610 8611 | } if( i==cntNew[iNew] ){ pNew = apNew[++iNew]; if( !leafData ) continue; } /* Cell pCell is destined for new sibling page pNew. Originally, it | | | 8606 8607 8608 8609 8610 8611 8612 8613 8614 8615 8616 8617 8618 8619 8620 | } if( i==cntNew[iNew] ){ pNew = apNew[++iNew]; if( !leafData ) continue; } /* Cell pCell is destined for new sibling page pNew. Originally, it ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell), ** or else the divider cell to the left of sibling page iOld. So, ** if sibling page iOld had the same page number as pNew, and if ** pCell really was a part of sibling page iOld (not a divider or ** overflow cell), we can skip updating the pointer map entries. */ if( iOld>=nNew || pNew->pgno!=aPgno[iOld] || !SQLITE_WITHIN(pCell,pOld->aData,pOld->aDataEnd) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8642 8643 8644 8645 8646 8647 8648 | assert( b.apCell[j]!=0 ); pCell = b.apCell[j]; sz = b.szCell[j] + leafCorrection; pTemp = &aOvflSpace[iOvflSpace]; if( !pNew->leaf ){ memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4); }else if( leafData ){ | | | | | | | 8643 8644 8645 8646 8647 8648 8649 8650 8651 8652 8653 8654 8655 8656 8657 8658 8659 8660 8661 8662 8663 8664 8665 8666 8667 8668 8669 8670 8671 8672 8673 8674 | assert( b.apCell[j]!=0 ); pCell = b.apCell[j]; sz = b.szCell[j] + leafCorrection; pTemp = &aOvflSpace[iOvflSpace]; if( !pNew->leaf ){ memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4); }else if( leafData ){ /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves, ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of ** the sibling-page assembled above only. */ CellInfo info; j--; pNew->xParseCell(pNew, b.apCell[j], &info); pCell = pTemp; sz = 4 + putVarint(&pCell[4], info.nKey); pTemp = 0; }else{ pCell -= 4; /* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was ** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4 ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this ** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to ** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now. ** ** This can only happen for b-trees used to evaluate "IN (SELECT ...)" ** and WITHOUT ROWID tables with exactly one column which is the ** primary key. */ if( b.szCell[j]==4 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8757 8758 8759 8760 8761 8762 8763 | if( isRoot && pParent->nCell==0 && pParent->hdrOffset<=apNew[0]->nFree ){ /* The root page of the b-tree now contains no cells. The only sibling ** page is the right-child of the parent. Copy the contents of the ** child page into the parent, decreasing the overall height of the ** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower" ** sub-algorithm in some documentation. ** | | | | | 8758 8759 8760 8761 8762 8763 8764 8765 8766 8767 8768 8769 8770 8771 8772 8773 8774 8775 8776 8777 8778 8779 8780 8781 8782 8783 8784 | if( isRoot && pParent->nCell==0 && pParent->hdrOffset<=apNew[0]->nFree ){ /* The root page of the b-tree now contains no cells. The only sibling ** page is the right-child of the parent. Copy the contents of the ** child page into the parent, decreasing the overall height of the ** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower" ** sub-algorithm in some documentation. ** ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent() ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages ** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied. ** ** It is critical that the child page be defragmented before being ** copied into the parent, because if the parent is page 1 then it will ** by smaller than the child due to the database header, and so all the ** free space needs to be up front. */ assert( nNew==1 || CORRUPT_DB ); rc = defragmentPage(apNew[0], -1); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); assert( apNew[0]->nFree == (get2byteNotZero(&apNew[0]->aData[5]) - apNew[0]->cellOffset - apNew[0]->nCell*2) || rc!=SQLITE_OK ); copyNodeContent(apNew[0], pParent, &rc); freePage(apNew[0], &rc); }else if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) && !leafCorrection ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8799 8800 8801 8802 8803 8804 8805 | for(i=nNew; i<nOld; i++){ freePage(apOld[i], &rc); } #if 0 if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) && rc==SQLITE_OK && apNew[0]->isInit ){ /* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that | | | 8800 8801 8802 8803 8804 8805 8806 8807 8808 8809 8810 8811 8812 8813 8814 | for(i=nNew; i<nOld; i++){ freePage(apOld[i], &rc); } #if 0 if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) && rc==SQLITE_OK && apNew[0]->isInit ){ /* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while ** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may ** cause an assert() statement to fail. */ ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew); ptrmapCheckPages(&pParent, 1); } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8829 8830 8831 8832 8833 8834 8835 | /* ** This function is called when the root page of a b-tree structure is ** overfull (has one or more overflow pages). ** ** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root ** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root | | | | | | 8830 8831 8832 8833 8834 8835 8836 8837 8838 8839 8840 8841 8842 8843 8844 8845 8846 8847 8848 8849 8850 8851 8852 8853 8854 8855 8856 8857 8858 8859 8860 8861 8862 8863 8864 8865 8866 | /* ** This function is called when the root page of a b-tree structure is ** overfull (has one or more overflow pages). ** ** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root ** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root ** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child ** pointer pointing to the new page. ** ** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages ** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The ** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root ** page is also updated. ** ** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child ** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required ** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs, ** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0. */ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){ int rc; /* Return value from subprocedures */ MemPage *pChild = 0; /* Pointer to a new child page */ Pgno pgnoChild = 0; /* Page number of the new child page */ BtShared *pBt = pRoot->pBt; /* The BTree */ assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new ** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents ** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page. */ rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pRoot->pDbPage); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = allocateBtreePage(pBt,&pChild,&pgnoChild,pRoot->pgno,0); copyNodeContent(pRoot, pChild, &rc); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8916 8917 8918 8919 8920 8921 8922 | } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in ** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the | | | 8917 8918 8919 8920 8921 8922 8923 8924 8925 8926 8927 8928 8929 8930 8931 | } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in ** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the ** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing ** routine. Balancing routines are: ** ** balance_quick() ** balance_deeper() ** balance_nonroot() */ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8948 8949 8950 8951 8952 8953 8954 | break; }else if( (iPage = pCur->iPage)==0 ){ if( pPage->nOverflow && (rc = anotherValidCursor(pCur))==SQLITE_OK ){ /* The root page of the b-tree is overfull. In this case call the ** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page ** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The ** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page. | | | | 8949 8950 8951 8952 8953 8954 8955 8956 8957 8958 8959 8960 8961 8962 8963 8964 8965 8966 8967 8968 8969 8970 8971 8972 8973 8974 8975 8976 8977 8978 8979 8980 | break; }else if( (iPage = pCur->iPage)==0 ){ if( pPage->nOverflow && (rc = anotherValidCursor(pCur))==SQLITE_OK ){ /* The root page of the b-tree is overfull. In this case call the ** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page ** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The ** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page. */ assert( balance_deeper_called==0 ); VVA_ONLY( balance_deeper_called++ ); rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pCur->iPage = 1; pCur->ix = 0; pCur->aiIdx[0] = 0; pCur->apPage[0] = pPage; pCur->pPage = pCur->apPage[1]; assert( pCur->pPage->nOverflow ); } }else{ break; } }else if( sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pPage->pDbPage)>1 ){ /* The page being written is not a root page, and there is currently ** more than one reference to it. This only happens if the page is one ** of its own ancestor pages. Corruption. */ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; }else{ MemPage * const pParent = pCur->apPage[iPage-1]; int const iIdx = pCur->aiIdx[iPage-1]; rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pParent->pDbPage); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8987 8988 8989 8990 8991 8992 8993 | && pPage->aiOvfl[0]==pPage->nCell && pParent->pgno!=1 && pParent->nCell==iIdx ){ /* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which ** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell ** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this | | | | | | | | | | | 8988 8989 8990 8991 8992 8993 8994 8995 8996 8997 8998 8999 9000 9001 9002 9003 9004 9005 9006 9007 9008 9009 9010 9011 9012 9013 9014 9015 9016 9017 9018 9019 9020 9021 9022 9023 9024 9025 9026 9027 9028 9029 9030 9031 9032 9033 9034 9035 9036 9037 9038 9039 9040 9041 | && pPage->aiOvfl[0]==pPage->nCell && pParent->pgno!=1 && pParent->nCell==iIdx ){ /* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which ** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell ** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent ** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this ** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[] ** buffer. ** ** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a ** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this ** function. If this were not verified, a subtle bug involving reuse ** of the aBalanceQuickSpace[] might sneak in. */ assert( balance_quick_called==0 ); VVA_ONLY( balance_quick_called++ ); rc = balance_quick(pParent, pPage, aBalanceQuickSpace); }else #endif { /* In this case, call balance_nonroot() to redistribute cells ** between pPage and up to 2 of its sibling pages. This involves ** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to ** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop ** will balance the parent page to correct this. ** ** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below. ** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by ** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first, ** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot() ** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been ** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new ** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot(). */ u8 *pSpace = sqlite3PageMalloc(pCur->pBt->pageSize); rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1, pCur->hints&BTREE_BULKLOAD); if( pFree ){ /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used ** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are ** now stored either on real database pages or within the ** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */ sqlite3PageFree(pFree); } /* The pSpace buffer will be freed after the next call to ** balance_nonroot(), or just before this function returns, whichever ** comes first. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9066 9067 9068 9069 9070 9071 9072 | u8 *pDest, /* Pointer to the place to start writing */ const BtreePayload *pX, /* Source of data to write */ int iOffset, /* Offset of first byte to write */ int iAmt /* Number of bytes to be written */ ){ int nData = pX->nData - iOffset; if( nData<=0 ){ | | | 9067 9068 9069 9070 9071 9072 9073 9074 9075 9076 9077 9078 9079 9080 9081 | u8 *pDest, /* Pointer to the place to start writing */ const BtreePayload *pX, /* Source of data to write */ int iOffset, /* Offset of first byte to write */ int iAmt /* Number of bytes to be written */ ){ int nData = pX->nData - iOffset; if( nData<=0 ){ /* Overwriting with zeros */ int i; for(i=0; i<iAmt && pDest[i]==0; i++){} if( i<iAmt ){ int rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPage->pDbPage); if( rc ) return rc; memset(pDest + i, 0, iAmt - i); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9102 9103 9104 9105 9106 9107 9108 | /* ** Overwrite the cell that cursor pCur is pointing to with fresh content ** contained in pX. In this variant, pCur is pointing to an overflow ** cell. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeOverwriteOverflowCell( | | | 9103 9104 9105 9106 9107 9108 9109 9110 9111 9112 9113 9114 9115 9116 9117 | /* ** Overwrite the cell that cursor pCur is pointing to with fresh content ** contained in pX. In this variant, pCur is pointing to an overflow ** cell. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeOverwriteOverflowCell( BtCursor *pCur, /* Cursor pointing to cell to overwrite */ const BtreePayload *pX /* Content to write into the cell */ ){ int iOffset; /* Next byte of pX->pData to write */ int nTotal = pX->nData + pX->nZero; /* Total bytes of to write */ int rc; /* Return code */ MemPage *pPage = pCur->pPage; /* Page being written */ BtShared *pBt; /* Btree */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9145 9146 9147 9148 9149 9150 9151 | rc = btreeOverwriteContent(pPage, pPage->aData+4, pX, iOffset, ovflPageSize); } sqlite3PagerUnref(pPage->pDbPage); if( rc ) return rc; iOffset += ovflPageSize; }while( iOffset<nTotal ); | | | 9146 9147 9148 9149 9150 9151 9152 9153 9154 9155 9156 9157 9158 9159 9160 | rc = btreeOverwriteContent(pPage, pPage->aData+4, pX, iOffset, ovflPageSize); } sqlite3PagerUnref(pPage->pDbPage); if( rc ) return rc; iOffset += ovflPageSize; }while( iOffset<nTotal ); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Overwrite the cell that cursor pCur is pointing to with fresh content ** contained in pX. */ static int btreeOverwriteCell(BtCursor *pCur, const BtreePayload *pX){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9184 9185 9186 9187 9188 9189 9190 | ** ** For a table btree (used for rowid tables), only the pX.nKey value of ** the key is used. The pX.pKey value must be NULL. The pX.nKey is the ** rowid or INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of the row. The pX.nData,pData,nZero fields ** hold the content of the row. ** ** For an index btree (used for indexes and WITHOUT ROWID tables), the | | | 9185 9186 9187 9188 9189 9190 9191 9192 9193 9194 9195 9196 9197 9198 9199 | ** ** For a table btree (used for rowid tables), only the pX.nKey value of ** the key is used. The pX.pKey value must be NULL. The pX.nKey is the ** rowid or INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of the row. The pX.nData,pData,nZero fields ** hold the content of the row. ** ** For an index btree (used for indexes and WITHOUT ROWID tables), the ** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey. The ** pX.pData,nData,nZero fields must be zero. ** ** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then a successful call to ** sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto() to seek cursor pCur to (pKey,nKey) has already ** been performed. In other words, if seekResult!=0 then the cursor ** is currently pointing to a cell that will be adjacent to the cell ** to be inserted. If seekResult<0 then pCur points to a cell that is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9224 9225 9226 9227 9228 9229 9230 | assert( (flags & (BTREE_SAVEPOSITION|BTREE_APPEND|BTREE_PREFORMAT))==flags ); assert( (flags & BTREE_PREFORMAT)==0 || seekResult || pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ); /* Save the positions of any other cursors open on this table. ** ** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For ** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer | | | | 9225 9226 9227 9228 9229 9230 9231 9232 9233 9234 9235 9236 9237 9238 9239 9240 | assert( (flags & (BTREE_SAVEPOSITION|BTREE_APPEND|BTREE_PREFORMAT))==flags ); assert( (flags & BTREE_PREFORMAT)==0 || seekResult || pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ); /* Save the positions of any other cursors open on this table. ** ** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For ** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the ** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes ** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without ** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important ** not to clear the cursor here. */ if( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_Multiple ){ rc = saveAllCursors(p->pBt, pCur->pgnoRoot, pCur); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9269 9270 9271 9272 9273 9274 9275 | ** keys with no associated data. If the cursor was opened expecting an ** intkey table, the caller should be inserting integer keys with a ** blob of associated data. */ assert( (flags & BTREE_PREFORMAT) || (pX->pKey==0)==(pCur->pKeyInfo==0) ); if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){ assert( pX->pKey==0 ); | | | | 9270 9271 9272 9273 9274 9275 9276 9277 9278 9279 9280 9281 9282 9283 9284 9285 9286 9287 9288 9289 9290 | ** keys with no associated data. If the cursor was opened expecting an ** intkey table, the caller should be inserting integer keys with a ** blob of associated data. */ assert( (flags & BTREE_PREFORMAT) || (pX->pKey==0)==(pCur->pKeyInfo==0) ); if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){ assert( pX->pKey==0 ); /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob ** cursors open on the row being replaced */ if( p->hasIncrblobCur ){ invalidateIncrblobCursors(p, pCur->pgnoRoot, pX->nKey, 0); } /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing ** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted. */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION ){ assert( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_ValidNKey ); assert( pX->nKey==pCur->info.nKey ); assert( loc==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9306 9307 9308 9309 9310 9311 9312 | } assert( loc==0 ); }else if( loc==0 ){ /* The cursor is *not* pointing to the cell to be overwritten, nor ** to an adjacent cell. Move the cursor so that it is pointing either ** to the cell to be overwritten or an adjacent cell. */ | | | | | | 9307 9308 9309 9310 9311 9312 9313 9314 9315 9316 9317 9318 9319 9320 9321 9322 9323 9324 9325 9326 9327 9328 9329 9330 9331 9332 9333 9334 9335 9336 9337 9338 9339 9340 9341 9342 9343 9344 9345 9346 9347 9348 9349 9350 9351 9352 9353 9354 9355 9356 9357 9358 9359 9360 9361 9362 9363 9364 9365 9366 9367 9368 9369 | } assert( loc==0 ); }else if( loc==0 ){ /* The cursor is *not* pointing to the cell to be overwritten, nor ** to an adjacent cell. Move the cursor so that it is pointing either ** to the cell to be overwritten or an adjacent cell. */ rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, pX->nKey, (flags & BTREE_APPEND)!=0, &loc); if( rc ) return rc; } }else{ /* This is an index or a WITHOUT ROWID table */ /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing ** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted. */ assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 || loc==0 ); /* If the cursor is not already pointing either to the cell to be ** overwritten, or if a new cell is being inserted, if the cursor is ** not pointing to an immediately adjacent cell, then move the cursor ** so that it does. */ if( loc==0 && (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 ){ if( pX->nMem ){ UnpackedRecord r; r.pKeyInfo = pCur->pKeyInfo; r.aMem = pX->aMem; r.nField = pX->nMem; r.default_rc = 0; r.eqSeen = 0; rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pCur, &r, &loc); }else{ rc = btreeMoveto(pCur, pX->pKey, pX->nKey, (flags & BTREE_APPEND)!=0, &loc); } if( rc ) return rc; } /* If the cursor is currently pointing to an entry to be overwritten ** and the new content is the same as as the old, then use the ** overwrite optimization. */ if( loc==0 ){ getCellInfo(pCur); if( pCur->info.nKey==pX->nKey ){ BtreePayload x2; x2.pData = pX->pKey; x2.nData = pX->nKey; x2.nZero = 0; return btreeOverwriteCell(pCur, &x2); } } } assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID || (pCur->eState==CURSOR_INVALID && loc) || CORRUPT_DB ); pPage = pCur->pPage; assert( pPage->intKey || pX->nKey>=0 || (flags & BTREE_PREFORMAT) ); assert( pPage->leaf || !pPage->intKey ); if( pPage->nFree<0 ){ if( NEVER(pCur->eState>CURSOR_INVALID) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9415 9416 9417 9418 9419 9420 9421 | oldCell = findCell(pPage, idx); if( !pPage->leaf ){ memcpy(newCell, oldCell, 4); } BTREE_CLEAR_CELL(rc, pPage, oldCell, info); testcase( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_ValidOvfl ); invalidateOverflowCache(pCur); | | | | 9416 9417 9418 9419 9420 9421 9422 9423 9424 9425 9426 9427 9428 9429 9430 9431 9432 9433 9434 9435 9436 9437 | oldCell = findCell(pPage, idx); if( !pPage->leaf ){ memcpy(newCell, oldCell, 4); } BTREE_CLEAR_CELL(rc, pPage, oldCell, info); testcase( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_ValidOvfl ); invalidateOverflowCache(pCur); if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload && (!ISAUTOVACUUM(p->pBt) || szNew<pPage->minLocal) ){ /* Overwrite the old cell with the new if they are the same size. ** We could also try to do this if the old cell is smaller, then add ** the leftover space to the free list. But experiments show that ** doing that is no faster then skipping this optimization and just ** calling dropCell() and insertCell(). ** ** This optimization cannot be used on an autovacuum database if the ** new entry uses overflow pages, as the insertCell() call below is ** necessary to add the PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 pointer-map entry. */ assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* clearCell never fails when nLocal==nPayload */ if( oldCell < pPage->aData+pPage->hdrOffset+10 ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9450 9451 9452 9453 9454 9455 9456 | }else{ assert( pPage->leaf ); } rc = insertCellFast(pPage, idx, newCell, szNew); assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK ); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 ); | | | 9451 9452 9453 9454 9455 9456 9457 9458 9459 9460 9461 9462 9463 9464 9465 | }else{ assert( pPage->leaf ); } rc = insertCellFast(pPage, idx, newCell, szNew); assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK ); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 ); /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance() ** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move ** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BTCF_ValidNKey ** variables. ** ** Previous versions of SQLite called moveToRoot() to move the cursor ** back to the root page as balance() used to invalidate the contents ** of BtCursor.apPage[] and BtCursor.aiIdx[]. Instead of doing that, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 9482 | */ if( pPage->nOverflow ){ assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_ValidNKey); rc = balance(pCur); /* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance() | | | 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 9488 9489 9490 9491 | */ if( pPage->nOverflow ){ assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_ValidNKey); rc = balance(pCur); /* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance() ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise. ** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition() ** from trying to save the current position of the cursor. */ pCur->pPage->nOverflow = 0; pCur->eState = CURSOR_INVALID; if( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ btreeReleaseAllCursorPages(pCur); if( pCur->pKeyInfo ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9556 9557 9558 9559 9560 9561 9562 | nOut = btreePayloadToLocal(pDest->pPage, pSrc->info.nPayload); pBt->nPreformatSize = nOut + (aOut - pBt->pTmpSpace); if( nOut<pSrc->info.nPayload ){ pPgnoOut = &aOut[nOut]; pBt->nPreformatSize += 4; } | | | | 9557 9558 9559 9560 9561 9562 9563 9564 9565 9566 9567 9568 9569 9570 9571 9572 9573 9574 9575 9576 9577 9578 | nOut = btreePayloadToLocal(pDest->pPage, pSrc->info.nPayload); pBt->nPreformatSize = nOut + (aOut - pBt->pTmpSpace); if( nOut<pSrc->info.nPayload ){ pPgnoOut = &aOut[nOut]; pBt->nPreformatSize += 4; } if( nRem>nIn ){ if( aIn+nIn+4>pSrc->pPage->aDataEnd ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } ovflIn = get4byte(&pSrc->info.pPayload[nIn]); } do { nRem -= nOut; do{ assert( nOut>0 ); if( nIn>0 ){ int nCopy = MIN(nOut, nIn); memcpy(aOut, aIn, nCopy); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9588 9589 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 | aIn = (const u8*)sqlite3PagerGetData(pPageIn); ovflIn = get4byte(aIn); aIn += 4; nIn = pSrc->pBt->usableSize - 4; } } }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && nOut>0 ); | | | | | | | 9589 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 9595 9596 9597 9598 9599 9600 9601 9602 9603 9604 9605 9606 9607 9608 9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616 9617 9618 9619 9620 9621 9622 9623 9624 9625 9626 9627 9628 9629 9630 9631 9632 9633 9634 9635 9636 9637 9638 9639 9640 9641 9642 9643 9644 9645 9646 9647 9648 9649 9650 9651 9652 9653 | aIn = (const u8*)sqlite3PagerGetData(pPageIn); ovflIn = get4byte(aIn); aIn += 4; nIn = pSrc->pBt->usableSize - 4; } } }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && nOut>0 ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && nRem>0 && ALWAYS(pPgnoOut) ){ Pgno pgnoNew; MemPage *pNew = 0; rc = allocateBtreePage(pBt, &pNew, &pgnoNew, 0, 0); put4byte(pPgnoOut, pgnoNew); if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) && pPageOut ){ ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoNew, PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2, pPageOut->pgno, &rc); } releasePage(pPageOut); pPageOut = pNew; if( pPageOut ){ pPgnoOut = pPageOut->aData; put4byte(pPgnoOut, 0); aOut = &pPgnoOut[4]; nOut = MIN(pBt->usableSize - 4, nRem); } } }while( nRem>0 && rc==SQLITE_OK ); releasePage(pPageOut); sqlite3PagerUnref(pPageIn); return rc; } } /* ** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to. ** ** If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit of the flags parameter is zero, then ** the cursor is left pointing at an arbitrary location after the delete. ** But if that bit is set, then the cursor is left in a state such that ** the next call to BtreeNext() or BtreePrev() moves it to the same row ** as it would have been on if the call to BtreeDelete() had been omitted. ** ** The BTREE_AUXDELETE bit of flags indicates that is one of several deletes ** associated with a single table entry and its indexes. Only one of those ** deletes is considered the "primary" delete. The primary delete occurs ** on a cursor that is not a BTREE_FORDELETE cursor. All but one delete ** operation on non-FORDELETE cursors is tagged with the AUXDELETE flag. ** The BTREE_AUXDELETE bit is a hint that is not used by this implementation, ** but which might be used by alternative storage engines. */ int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){ Btree *p = pCur->pBtree; BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; int rc; /* Return code */ MemPage *pPage; /* Page to delete cell from */ unsigned char *pCell; /* Pointer to cell to delete */ int iCellIdx; /* Index of cell to delete */ int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */ CellInfo info; /* Size of the cell being deleted */ u8 bPreserve; /* Keep cursor valid. 2 for CURSOR_SKIPNEXT */ assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) ); assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE ); assert( (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_READ_ONLY)==0 ); assert( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9677 9678 9679 9680 9681 9682 9683 | if( pCell<&pPage->aCellIdx[pPage->nCell] ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } /* If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit is on, then the cursor position must ** be preserved following this delete operation. If the current delete ** will cause a b-tree rebalance, then this is done by saving the cursor | | | | | 9678 9679 9680 9681 9682 9683 9684 9685 9686 9687 9688 9689 9690 9691 9692 9693 9694 9695 9696 9697 9698 9699 9700 9701 9702 9703 9704 9705 9706 9707 | if( pCell<&pPage->aCellIdx[pPage->nCell] ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } /* If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit is on, then the cursor position must ** be preserved following this delete operation. If the current delete ** will cause a b-tree rebalance, then this is done by saving the cursor ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before ** returning. ** ** If the current delete will not cause a rebalance, then the cursor ** will be left in CURSOR_SKIPNEXT state pointing to the entry immediately ** before or after the deleted entry. ** ** The bPreserve value records which path is required: ** ** bPreserve==0 Not necessary to save the cursor position ** bPreserve==1 Use CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK to save the cursor position ** bPreserve==2 Cursor won't move. Set CURSOR_SKIPNEXT. */ bPreserve = (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)!=0; if( bPreserve ){ if( !pPage->leaf || (pPage->nFree+pPage->xCellSize(pPage,pCell)+2) > (int)(pBt->usableSize*2/3) || pPage->nCell==1 /* See dbfuzz001.test for a test case */ ){ /* A b-tree rebalance will be required after deleting this entry. ** Save the cursor key. */ rc = saveCursorKey(pCur); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9788 9789 9790 9791 9792 9793 9794 | ** pCur is pointing to the leaf page from which a cell was removed to ** replace the cell deleted from the internal node. This is slightly ** tricky as the leaf node may be underfull, and the internal node may ** be either under or overfull. In this case run the balancing algorithm ** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the ** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has ** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node, | | | 9789 9790 9791 9792 9793 9794 9795 9796 9797 9798 9799 9800 9801 9802 9803 | ** pCur is pointing to the leaf page from which a cell was removed to ** replace the cell deleted from the internal node. This is slightly ** tricky as the leaf node may be underfull, and the internal node may ** be either under or overfull. In this case run the balancing algorithm ** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the ** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has ** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node, ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as ** well. */ assert( pCur->pPage->nOverflow==0 ); assert( pCur->pPage->nFree>=0 ); if( pCur->pPage->nFree*3<=(int)pCur->pBt->usableSize*2 ){ /* Optimization: If the free space is less than 2/3rds of the page, ** then balance() will always be a no-op. No need to invoke it. */ rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9849 9850 9851 9852 9853 9854 9855 | ** BTREE_ZERODATA Used for SQL indices */ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, Pgno *piTable, int createTabFlags){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; MemPage *pRoot; Pgno pgnoRoot; int rc; | | | 9850 9851 9852 9853 9854 9855 9856 9857 9858 9859 9860 9861 9862 9863 9864 | ** BTREE_ZERODATA Used for SQL indices */ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, Pgno *piTable, int createTabFlags){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; MemPage *pRoot; Pgno pgnoRoot; int rc; int ptfFlags; /* Page-type flags for the root page of new table */ assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) ); assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE ); assert( (pBt->btsFlags & BTS_READ_ONLY)==0 ); #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM rc = allocateBtreePage(pBt, &pRoot, &pgnoRoot, 1, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9952 9953 9954 9955 9956 9957 9958 | rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pRoot->pDbPage); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ releasePage(pRoot); return rc; } }else{ pRoot = pPageMove; | | | 9953 9954 9955 9956 9957 9958 9959 9960 9961 9962 9963 9964 9965 9966 9967 | rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pRoot->pDbPage); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ releasePage(pRoot); return rc; } }else{ pRoot = pPageMove; } /* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */ ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc); if( rc ){ releasePage(pRoot); return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10020 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 | assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); if( pgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } rc = getAndInitPage(pBt, pgno, &pPage, 0, 0); if( rc ) return rc; | | | 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035 | assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); if( pgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } rc = getAndInitPage(pBt, pgno, &pPage, 0, 0); if( rc ) return rc; if( (pBt->openFlags & BTREE_SINGLE)==0 && sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pPage->pDbPage) != (1 + (pgno==1)) ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto cleardatabasepage_out; } hdr = pPage->hdrOffset; for(i=0; i<pPage->nCell; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10107 10108 10109 10110 10111 10112 10113 | ** the freelist. Except, the root of the principle table (the one on ** page 1) is never added to the freelist. ** ** This routine will fail with SQLITE_LOCKED if there are any open ** cursors on the table. ** ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last | | | | 10108 10109 10110 10111 10112 10113 10114 10115 10116 10117 10118 10119 10120 10121 10122 10123 10124 10125 10126 10127 | ** the freelist. Except, the root of the principle table (the one on ** page 1) is never added to the freelist. ** ** This routine will fail with SQLITE_LOCKED if there are any open ** cursors on the table. ** ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last ** root page in the database file, then the last root page ** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by ** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page ** is added to the freelist instead of iTable. In this say, all ** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which ** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the ** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before ** the move. If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0. ** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of ** meta[3] is updated by this procedure. */ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){ int rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10150 10151 10152 10153 10154 10155 10156 | #else if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ Pgno maxRootPgno; sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(p, BTREE_LARGEST_ROOT_PAGE, &maxRootPgno); if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){ /* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page | | | | 10151 10152 10153 10154 10155 10156 10157 10158 10159 10160 10161 10162 10163 10164 10165 10166 10167 10168 10169 10170 10171 10172 10173 10174 | #else if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ Pgno maxRootPgno; sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(p, BTREE_LARGEST_ROOT_PAGE, &maxRootPgno); if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){ /* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list. */ freePage(pPage, &rc); releasePage(pPage); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ return rc; } }else{ /* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the ** gap left by the deleted root-page. */ MemPage *pMove; releasePage(pPage); rc = btreeGetPage(pBt, maxRootPgno, &pMove, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ return rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 | rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(p, 4, maxRootPgno); }else{ freePage(pPage, &rc); releasePage(pPage); } #endif | | | | 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10211 10212 10213 10214 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228 10229 10230 10231 10232 10233 10234 10235 | rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(p, 4, maxRootPgno); }else{ freePage(pPage, &rc); releasePage(pPage); } #endif return rc; } int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){ int rc; sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); rc = btreeDropTable(p, iTable, piMoved); sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return rc; } /* ** This function may only be called if the b-tree connection already ** has a read or write transaction open on the database. ** ** Read the meta-information out of a database file. Meta[0] ** is the number of free pages currently in the database. Meta[1] ** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers. Meta[0] ** is read-only, the others are read/write. ** ** The schema layer numbers meta values differently. At the schema ** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of ** free pages is not visible. So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1]. ** ** This routine treats Meta[BTREE_DATA_VERSION] as a special case. Instead ** of reading the value out of the header, it instead loads the "DataVersion" ** from the pager. The BTREE_DATA_VERSION value is not actually stored in the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 | return rc; } /* ** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the ** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry. ** | | | | | | 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 10297 10298 10299 10300 10301 10302 10303 10304 10305 10306 10307 10308 10309 10310 10311 10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 10317 10318 10319 10320 10321 10322 10323 10324 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329 10330 10331 10332 10333 10334 10335 | return rc; } /* ** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the ** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed. ** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database ** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned. */ int sqlite3BtreeCount(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){ i64 nEntry = 0; /* Value to return in *pnEntry */ int rc; /* Return code */ rc = moveToRoot(pCur); if( rc==SQLITE_EMPTY ){ *pnEntry = 0; return SQLITE_OK; } /* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages). */ while( rc==SQLITE_OK && !AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted) ){ int iIdx; /* Index of child node in parent */ MemPage *pPage; /* Current page of the b-tree */ /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then ** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter ** accordingly. */ pPage = pCur->pPage; if( pPage->leaf || !pPage->intKey ){ nEntry += pPage->nCell; } /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it ** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of ** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The ** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell ** of the page, or to the number of cells in the page if the next page ** to visit is the right-child of its parent. ** ** If all pages in the tree have been visited, return SQLITE_OK to the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10344 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 10350 | moveToParent(pCur); }while ( pCur->ix>=pCur->pPage->nCell ); pCur->ix++; pPage = pCur->pPage; } | | | 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 10350 10351 10352 10353 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359 | moveToParent(pCur); }while ( pCur->ix>=pCur->pPage->nCell ); pCur->ix++; pPage = pCur->pPage; } /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently ** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell). */ iIdx = pCur->ix; if( iIdx==pPage->nCell ){ rc = moveToChild(pCur, get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])); }else{ rc = moveToChild(pCur, get4byte(findCell(pPage, iIdx))); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10475 10476 10477 10478 10479 10480 10481 | } setPageReferenced(pCheck, iPage); return 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* | | | 10476 10477 10478 10479 10480 10481 10482 10483 10484 10485 10486 10487 10488 10489 10490 | } setPageReferenced(pCheck, iPage); return 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* ** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to ** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message ** to pCheck. */ static void checkPtrmap( IntegrityCk *pCheck, /* Integrity check context */ Pgno iChild, /* Child page number */ u8 eType, /* Expected pointer map type */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10498 10499 10500 10501 10502 10503 10504 | if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) checkOom(pCheck); checkAppendMsg(pCheck, "Failed to read ptrmap key=%u", iChild); return; } if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, | | | 10499 10500 10501 10502 10503 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 | if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) checkOom(pCheck); checkAppendMsg(pCheck, "Failed to read ptrmap key=%u", iChild); return; } if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, "Bad ptr map entry key=%u expected=(%u,%u) got=(%u,%u)", iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent); } } #endif /* ** Check the integrity of the freelist or of an overflow page list. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10593 10594 10595 10596 10597 10598 10599 | ** The btreeHeapInsert() routine inserts an unsigned 32-bit number onto ** the heap, preserving the heap property. The btreeHeapPull() routine ** removes the root element from the heap (the minimum value in the heap) ** and then moves other nodes around as necessary to preserve the heap ** property. ** ** This heap is used for cell overlap and coverage testing. Each u32 | | | 10594 10595 10596 10597 10598 10599 10600 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10606 10607 10608 | ** The btreeHeapInsert() routine inserts an unsigned 32-bit number onto ** the heap, preserving the heap property. The btreeHeapPull() routine ** removes the root element from the heap (the minimum value in the heap) ** and then moves other nodes around as necessary to preserve the heap ** property. ** ** This heap is used for cell overlap and coverage testing. Each u32 ** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page. ** The upper 16 bits are the index of the first byte of a range and the ** lower 16 bits are the index of the last byte of that range. */ static void btreeHeapInsert(u32 *aHeap, u32 x){ u32 j, i; assert( aHeap!=0 ); i = ++aHeap[0]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10625 10626 10627 10628 10629 10630 10631 | if( aHeap[j]>aHeap[j+1] ) j++; if( aHeap[i]<aHeap[j] ) break; x = aHeap[i]; aHeap[i] = aHeap[j]; aHeap[j] = x; i = j; } | | | | 10626 10627 10628 10629 10630 10631 10632 10633 10634 10635 10636 10637 10638 10639 10640 10641 10642 10643 10644 10645 10646 10647 10648 | if( aHeap[j]>aHeap[j+1] ) j++; if( aHeap[i]<aHeap[j] ) break; x = aHeap[i]; aHeap[i] = aHeap[j]; aHeap[j] = x; i = j; } return 1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK /* ** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree. Return ** the tree depth. Root pages return 0. Parents of root pages ** return 1, and so forth. ** ** These checks are done: ** ** 1. Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap ** but combine to completely cover the page. ** 2. Make sure integer cell keys are in order. ** 3. Check the integrity of overflow pages. ** 4. Recursively call checkTreePage on all children. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10833 10834 10835 10836 10837 10838 10839 | btreeHeapInsert(heap, (pc<<16)|(pc+size-1)); } } /* Add the freeblocks to the min-heap ** ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-20690-50594 The second field of the b-tree page header ** is the offset of the first freeblock, or zero if there are no | | | | | | 10834 10835 10836 10837 10838 10839 10840 10841 10842 10843 10844 10845 10846 10847 10848 10849 10850 10851 10852 10853 10854 10855 10856 10857 10858 10859 10860 10861 10862 10863 10864 10865 10866 10867 10868 10869 10870 10871 10872 10873 10874 | btreeHeapInsert(heap, (pc<<16)|(pc+size-1)); } } /* Add the freeblocks to the min-heap ** ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-20690-50594 The second field of the b-tree page header ** is the offset of the first freeblock, or zero if there are no ** freeblocks on the page. */ i = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]); while( i>0 ){ int size, j; assert( (u32)i<=usableSize-4 ); /* Enforced by btreeComputeFreeSpace() */ size = get2byte(&data[i+2]); assert( (u32)(i+size)<=usableSize ); /* due to btreeComputeFreeSpace() */ btreeHeapInsert(heap, (((u32)i)<<16)|(i+size-1)); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-58208-19414 The first 2 bytes of a freeblock are a ** big-endian integer which is the offset in the b-tree page of the next ** freeblock in the chain, or zero if the freeblock is the last on the ** chain. */ j = get2byte(&data[i]); /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-06866-39125 Freeblocks are always connected in order of ** increasing offset. */ assert( j==0 || j>i+size ); /* Enforced by btreeComputeFreeSpace() */ assert( (u32)j<=usableSize-4 ); /* Enforced by btreeComputeFreeSpace() */ i = j; } /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or ** freeblocks, and counting the number of untracked bytes in nFrag. ** ** Each min-heap entry is of the form: (start_address<<16)|end_address. ** There is an implied first entry the covers the page header, the cell ** pointer index, and the gap between the cell pointer index and the start ** of cell content. ** ** The loop below pulls entries from the min-heap in order and compares ** the start_address against the previous end_address. If there is an ** overlap, that means bytes are used multiple times. If there is a gap, ** that gap is added to the fragmentation count. */ nFrag = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
11038 11039 11040 11041 11042 11043 11044 | if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 ){ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: never used", i); } #else /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain ** references to pointer-map pages. */ | | | | 11039 11040 11041 11042 11043 11044 11045 11046 11047 11048 11049 11050 11051 11052 11053 11054 11055 11056 11057 | if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 ){ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: never used", i); } #else /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain ** references to pointer-map pages. */ if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 && (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: never used", i); } if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 && (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: pointer map referenced", i); } #endif } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
11107 11108 11109 11110 11111 11112 11113 | return p ? p->inTrans : 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument. ** | | | 11108 11109 11110 11111 11112 11113 11114 11115 11116 11117 11118 11119 11120 11121 11122 | return p ? p->inTrans : 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument. ** ** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open ** transaction on the shared-cache the argument Btree is connected to. ** ** Parameter eMode is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL or RESTART. */ int sqlite3BtreeCheckpoint(Btree *p, int eMode, int *pnLog, int *pnCkpt){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( p ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
11140 11141 11142 11143 11144 11145 11146 | assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) ); return p->nBackup!=0; } /* ** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with ** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own | | | | | | | | | 11141 11142 11143 11144 11145 11146 11147 11148 11149 11150 11151 11152 11153 11154 11155 11156 11157 11158 11159 11160 11161 11162 11163 11164 11165 11166 11167 11168 11169 11170 11171 11172 11173 11174 11175 11176 11177 11178 11179 11180 11181 11182 11183 11184 11185 | assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) ); return p->nBackup!=0; } /* ** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with ** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own ** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with ** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues. ** ** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory ** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent ** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob ** of memory returned. ** ** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been ** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been ** allocated, it is returned as normal. ** ** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the ** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the ** blob of allocated memory. The xFree function should not call sqlite3_free() ** on the memory, the btree layer does that. */ void *sqlite3BtreeSchema(Btree *p, int nBytes, void(*xFree)(void *)){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); if( !pBt->pSchema && nBytes ){ pBt->pSchema = sqlite3DbMallocZero(0, nBytes); pBt->xFreeSchema = xFree; } sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return pBt->pSchema; } /* ** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared ** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the ** sqlite_schema table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK. */ int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){ int rc; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) ); sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, SCHEMA_ROOT, READ_LOCK); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
11211 11212 11213 11214 11215 11216 11217 | } return rc; } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB /* | | | | | 11212 11213 11214 11215 11216 11217 11218 11219 11220 11221 11222 11223 11224 11225 11226 11227 11228 11229 11230 | } return rc; } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB /* ** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an ** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry. ** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry. ** ** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to ** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with ** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data, ** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned. */ int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void *z){ int rc; assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCsr) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
11246 11247 11248 11249 11250 11251 11252 | ** Note that pCsr must be open on a INTKEY table and saveCursorPosition() ** and hence saveAllCursors() cannot fail on a BTREE_INTKEY table, hence ** saveAllCursors can only return SQLITE_OK. */ VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); | | | | | | 11247 11248 11249 11250 11251 11252 11253 11254 11255 11256 11257 11258 11259 11260 11261 11262 11263 11264 11265 11266 11267 11268 11269 11270 11271 11272 11273 11274 11275 11276 11277 11278 11279 11280 11281 11282 11283 11284 11285 11286 11287 11288 11289 11290 11291 11292 11293 11294 11295 11296 11297 | ** Note that pCsr must be open on a INTKEY table and saveCursorPosition() ** and hence saveAllCursors() cannot fail on a BTREE_INTKEY table, hence ** saveAllCursors can only return SQLITE_OK. */ VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* Check some assumptions: ** (a) the cursor is open for writing, ** (b) there is a read/write transaction open, ** (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required), ** (d) there are no conflicting read-locks, and ** (e) the cursor points at a valid row of an intKey table. */ if( (pCsr->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)==0 ){ return SQLITE_READONLY; } assert( (pCsr->pBt->btsFlags & BTS_READ_ONLY)==0 && pCsr->pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE ); assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pCsr->pBtree, pCsr->pgnoRoot, 0, 2) ); assert( !hasReadConflicts(pCsr->pBtree, pCsr->pgnoRoot) ); assert( pCsr->pPage->intKey ); return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1); } /* ** Mark this cursor as an incremental blob cursor. */ void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){ pCur->curFlags |= BTCF_Incrblob; pCur->pBtree->hasIncrblobCur = 1; } #endif /* ** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and ** "write version" (single byte at byte offset 19) fields in the database ** header to iVersion. */ int sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(Btree *pBtree, int iVersion){ BtShared *pBt = pBtree->pBt; int rc; /* Return code */ assert( iVersion==1 || iVersion==2 ); /* If setting the version fields to 1, do not automatically open the ** WAL connection, even if the version fields are currently set to 2. */ pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_NO_WAL; if( iVersion==1 ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_NO_WAL; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
11351 11352 11353 11354 11355 11356 11357 | */ int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree *p){ return p->sharable; } /* ** Return the number of connections to the BtShared object accessed by | | | 11352 11353 11354 11355 11356 11357 11358 11359 11360 11361 11362 11363 11364 11365 11366 | */ int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree *p){ return p->sharable; } /* ** Return the number of connections to the BtShared object accessed by ** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches ** this is always 1. For shared caches it may be 1 or greater. */ int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){ testcase( p->sharable ); return p->pBt->nRef; } #endif |
Changes to src/btreeInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 | #define PTF_LEAF 0x08 /* ** An instance of this object stores information about each a single database ** page that has been loaded into memory. The information in this object ** is derived from the raw on-disk page content. ** | | | 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 | #define PTF_LEAF 0x08 /* ** An instance of this object stores information about each a single database ** page that has been loaded into memory. The information in this object ** is derived from the raw on-disk page content. ** ** As each database page is loaded into memory, the pager allocates an ** instance of this object and zeros the first 8 bytes. (This is the ** "extra" information associated with each page of the pager.) ** ** Access to all fields of this structure is controlled by the mutex ** stored in MemPage.pBt->mutex. */ struct MemPage { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
715 716 717 718 719 720 721 | #define get2byte(x) ((x)[0]<<8 | (x)[1]) #define put2byte(p,v) ((p)[0] = (u8)((v)>>8), (p)[1] = (u8)(v)) #define get4byte sqlite3Get4byte #define put4byte sqlite3Put4byte /* ** get2byteAligned(), unlike get2byte(), requires that its argument point to a | | | 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 | #define get2byte(x) ((x)[0]<<8 | (x)[1]) #define put2byte(p,v) ((p)[0] = (u8)((v)>>8), (p)[1] = (u8)(v)) #define get4byte sqlite3Get4byte #define put4byte sqlite3Put4byte /* ** get2byteAligned(), unlike get2byte(), requires that its argument point to a ** two-byte aligned address. get2byteAligned() is only used for accessing the ** cell addresses in a btree header. */ #if SQLITE_BYTEORDER==4321 # define get2byteAligned(x) (*(u16*)(x)) #elif SQLITE_BYTEORDER==1234 && GCC_VERSION>=4008000 # define get2byteAligned(x) __builtin_bswap16(*(u16*)(x)) #elif SQLITE_BYTEORDER==1234 && MSVC_VERSION>=1300 # define get2byteAligned(x) _byteswap_ushort(*(u16*)(x)) #else # define get2byteAligned(x) ((x)[0]<<8 | (x)[1]) #endif |
Changes to src/build.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | int iDb; /* The database containing the table to be locked */ Pgno iTab; /* The root page of the table to be locked */ u8 isWriteLock; /* True for write lock. False for a read lock */ const char *zLockName; /* Name of the table */ }; /* | | | 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | int iDb; /* The database containing the table to be locked */ Pgno iTab; /* The root page of the table to be locked */ u8 isWriteLock; /* True for write lock. False for a read lock */ const char *zLockName; /* Name of the table */ }; /* ** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time. ** ** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb. ** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock. ** ** This routine just records the fact that the lock is desired. The ** code to make the lock occur is generated by a later call to ** codeTableLocks() which occurs during sqlite3FinishCoding(). |
︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | /* ** Code an OP_TableLock instruction for each table locked by the ** statement (configured by calls to sqlite3TableLock()). */ static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){ int i; | | | 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | /* ** Code an OP_TableLock instruction for each table locked by the ** statement (configured by calls to sqlite3TableLock()). */ static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){ int i; Vdbe *pVdbe = pParse->pVdbe; assert( pVdbe!=0 ); for(i=0; i<pParse->nTableLock; i++){ TableLock *p = &pParse->aTableLock[i]; int p1 = p->iDb; sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(pVdbe, OP_TableLock, p1, p->iTab, p->isWriteLock, p->zLockName, P4_STATIC); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 | if( db->init.busy ){ pParse->rc = SQLITE_DONE; return; } v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v==0 ) pParse->rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } | | | 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 | if( db->init.busy ){ pParse->rc = SQLITE_DONE; return; } v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v==0 ) pParse->rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite || sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort)); if( v ){ if( pParse->bReturning ){ Returning *pReturning = pParse->u1.pReturning; int addrRewind; int reg; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | for(i=0; i<pParse->nVtabLock; i++){ char *vtab = (char *)sqlite3GetVTable(db, pParse->apVtabLock[i]); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VBegin, 0, 0, 0, vtab, P4_VTAB); } pParse->nVtabLock = 0; #endif | | | | 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | for(i=0; i<pParse->nVtabLock; i++){ char *vtab = (char *)sqlite3GetVTable(db, pParse->apVtabLock[i]); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VBegin, 0, 0, 0, vtab, P4_VTAB); } pParse->nVtabLock = 0; #endif /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened, ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the ** shared-cache feature is enabled. */ codeTableLocks(pParse); /* Initialize any AUTOINCREMENT data structures required. */ sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
382 383 384 385 386 387 388 | p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[i].pSchema->tblHash, zName); if( p==0 && sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 ){ if( i==1 ){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 || sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 || sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ | | | 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 | p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[i].pSchema->tblHash, zName); if( p==0 && sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 ){ if( i==1 ){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 || sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 || sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE); } }else{ if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[i].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
409 410 411 412 413 414 415 | p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[i].pSchema->tblHash, zName); if( p ) break; } if( p==0 && sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 ){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[0].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE); }else if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ | | | 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 | p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[i].pSchema->tblHash, zName); if( p ) break; } if( p==0 && sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 ){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[0].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE); }else if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE); } } } return p; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
438 439 440 441 442 443 444 | const char *zDbase /* Name of the database. Might be NULL */ ){ Table *p; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Read the database schema. If an error occurs, leave an error message ** and code in pParse and return NULL. */ | | | 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 | const char *zDbase /* Name of the database. Might be NULL */ ){ Table *p; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Read the database schema. If an error occurs, leave an error message ** and code in pParse and return NULL. */ if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaKnownOk)==0 && SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3ReadSchema(pParse) ){ return 0; } p = sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDbase); if( p==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
491 492 493 494 495 496 497 | ** This is a wrapper around sqlite3LocateTable(). The difference between ** sqlite3LocateTable() and this function is that this function restricts ** the search to schema (p->pSchema) if it is not NULL. p->pSchema may be ** non-NULL if it is part of a view or trigger program definition. See ** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details. */ Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem( | | | 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 | ** This is a wrapper around sqlite3LocateTable(). The difference between ** sqlite3LocateTable() and this function is that this function restricts ** the search to schema (p->pSchema) if it is not NULL. p->pSchema may be ** non-NULL if it is part of a view or trigger program definition. See ** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details. */ Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem( Parse *pParse, u32 flags, SrcItem *p ){ const char *zDb; assert( p->pSchema==0 || p->zDatabase==0 ); if( p->pSchema ){ int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(pParse->db, p->pSchema); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
523 524 525 526 527 528 529 | return PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE; } } return zName; } /* | | | 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 | return PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE; } } return zName; } /* ** Locate the in-memory structure that describes ** a particular index given the name of that index ** and the name of the database that contains the index. ** Return NULL if not found. ** ** If zDatabase is 0, all databases are searched for the ** table and the first matching index is returned. (No checking ** for duplicate index names is done.) The search order is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
751 752 753 754 755 756 757 | pCol->zCnName = zNew; memcpy(pCol->zCnName + n, zColl, nColl); pCol->colFlags |= COLFLAG_HASCOLL; } } /* | | | 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 | pCol->zCnName = zNew; memcpy(pCol->zCnName + n, zColl, nColl); pCol->colFlags |= COLFLAG_HASCOLL; } } /* ** Return the collating sequence name for a column */ const char *sqlite3ColumnColl(Column *pCol){ const char *z; if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_HASCOLL)==0 ) return 0; z = pCol->zCnName; while( *z ){ z++; } if( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_HASTYPE ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
798 799 800 801 802 803 804 | /* ** Remove the memory data structures associated with the given ** Table. No changes are made to disk by this routine. ** ** This routine just deletes the data structure. It does not unlink ** the table data structure from the hash table. But it does destroy | | | | | | 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 | /* ** Remove the memory data structures associated with the given ** Table. No changes are made to disk by this routine. ** ** This routine just deletes the data structure. It does not unlink ** the table data structure from the hash table. But it does destroy ** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with ** the table. ** ** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object ** contains lookaside memory. (Table objects in the schema do not use ** lookaside memory, but some ephemeral Table objects do.) Or the ** db parameter can be used with db->pnBytesFreed to measure the memory ** used by the Table object. */ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE deleteTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){ Index *pIndex, *pNext; #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Record the number of outstanding lookaside allocations in schema Tables ** prior to doing any free() operations. Since schema Tables do not use ** lookaside, this number should not change. ** ** If malloc has already failed, it may be that it failed while allocating ** a Table object that was going to be marked ephemeral. So do not check ** that no lookaside memory is used in this case either. */ int nLookaside = 0; assert( db!=0 ); if( !db->mallocFailed && (pTable->tabFlags & TF_Ephemeral)==0 ){ nLookaside = sqlite3LookasideUsed(db, 0); } #endif /* Delete all indices associated with this table. */ for(pIndex = pTable->pIndex; pIndex; pIndex=pNext){ pNext = pIndex->pNext; assert( pIndex->pSchema==pTable->pSchema || (IsVirtual(pTable) && pIndex->idxType!=SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF) ); if( db->pnBytesFreed==0 && !IsVirtual(pTable) ){ char *zName = pIndex->zName; TESTONLY ( Index *pOld = ) sqlite3HashInsert( &pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, zName, 0 ); assert( db==0 || sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, pIndex->pSchema) ); assert( pOld==pIndex || pOld==0 ); } sqlite3FreeIndex(db, pIndex); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
953 954 955 956 957 958 959 | } return i; } /* ** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or ** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the | | | | 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 | } return i; } /* ** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or ** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the ** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db ** does not exist. */ int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){ int i; /* Database number */ char *zName; /* Name we are searching for */ zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pName); i = sqlite3FindDbName(db, zName); sqlite3DbFree(db, zName); return i; } /* The table or view or trigger name is passed to this routine via tokens ** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example: ** ** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...); ** ** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if ** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.: ** ** CREATE TABLE yyy(...); ** ** Then pName1 is set to "yyy" and pName2 is "". ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS /* Convert a table column number into a storage column number. ** ** The storage column number (0,1,2,....) is the index of the value ** as it appears in the record on disk. Or, if the input column is ** the N-th virtual column (zero-based) then the storage number is | | | 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS /* Convert a table column number into a storage column number. ** ** The storage column number (0,1,2,....) is the index of the value ** as it appears in the record on disk. Or, if the input column is ** the N-th virtual column (zero-based) then the storage number is ** the number of non-virtual columns in the table plus N. ** ** The true column number is the index (0,1,2,...) of the column in ** the CREATE TABLE statement. ** ** If the input column is a VIRTUAL column, then it should not appear ** in storage. But the value sometimes is cached in registers that ** follow the range of registers used to construct storage. This |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 | zName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb)); pName = pName1; }else{ /* The common case */ iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName); if( iDb<0 ) return; if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){ | | | 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 | zName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb)); pName = pName1; }else{ /* The common case */ iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName); if( iDb<0 ) return; if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){ /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless ** the database name is "temp" anyway. */ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "temporary table name must be unqualified"); return; } if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp ) iDb = 1; zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pName); if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 | assert( pParse->pNewTable==0 ); pParse->pNewTable = pTable; /* Begin generating the code that will insert the table record into ** the schema table. Note in particular that we must go ahead ** and allocate the record number for the table entry now. Before any ** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed. Those keywords will cause | | | | 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 | assert( pParse->pNewTable==0 ); pParse->pNewTable = pTable; /* Begin generating the code that will insert the table record into ** the schema table. Note in particular that we must go ahead ** and allocate the record number for the table entry now. Before any ** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed. Those keywords will cause ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the ** indices. Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated ** now. */ if( !db->init.busy && (v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse))!=0 ){ int addr1; int fileFormat; int reg1, reg2, reg3; /* nullRow[] is an OP_Record encoding of a row containing 5 NULLs */ static const char nullRow[] = { 6, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 }; sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE if( isVirtual ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_VBegin); } #endif /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set, ** set them now. */ reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem; reg2 = pParse->regRoot = ++pParse->nMem; reg3 = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_ReadCookie, iDb, reg3, BTREE_FILE_FORMAT); sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 | if( (p = pParse->pNewTable)==0 ) return; if( p->nCol+1>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_COLUMN] ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "too many columns on %s", p->zName); return; } if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ) sqlite3DequoteToken(&sName); | | | 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 | if( (p = pParse->pNewTable)==0 ) return; if( p->nCol+1>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_COLUMN] ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "too many columns on %s", p->zName); return; } if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ) sqlite3DequoteToken(&sName); /* Because keywords GENERATE ALWAYS can be converted into identifiers ** by the parser, we can sometimes end up with a typename that ends ** with "generated always". Check for this case and omit the surplus ** text. */ if( sType.n>=16 && sqlite3_strnicmp(sType.z+(sType.n-6),"always",6)==0 ){ sType.n -= 6; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 | } p->aCol = aNew; pCol = &p->aCol[p->nCol]; memset(pCol, 0, sizeof(p->aCol[0])); pCol->zCnName = z; pCol->hName = hName; sqlite3ColumnPropertiesFromName(p, pCol); | | | 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 | } p->aCol = aNew; pCol = &p->aCol[p->nCol]; memset(pCol, 0, sizeof(p->aCol[0])); pCol->zCnName = z; pCol->hName = hName; sqlite3ColumnPropertiesFromName(p, pCol); if( sType.n==0 ){ /* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity ** 'BLOB' with a default size of 4 bytes. */ pCol->affinity = affinity; pCol->eCType = eType; pCol->szEst = szEst; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 | } } /* ** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the ** associated affinity type. ** | | | | | 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 | } } /* ** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the ** associated affinity type. ** ** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the ** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is ** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains ** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of ** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT', ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned. ** ** Substring | Affinity ** -------------------------------- ** 'INT' | SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ** 'CHAR' | SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ** 'CLOB' | SQLITE_AFF_TEXT |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 | ** This routine is called by the parser while in the middle of ** parsing a CREATE TABLE statement. */ void sqlite3AddDefaultValue( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ Expr *pExpr, /* The parsed expression of the default value */ const char *zStart, /* Start of the default value text */ | | | 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 | ** This routine is called by the parser while in the middle of ** parsing a CREATE TABLE statement. */ void sqlite3AddDefaultValue( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ Expr *pExpr, /* The parsed expression of the default value */ const char *zStart, /* Start of the default value text */ const char *zEnd /* First character past end of default value text */ ){ Table *p; Column *pCol; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; p = pParse->pNewTable; if( p!=0 ){ int isInit = db->init.busy && db->init.iDb!=1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 | sqlite3RenameExprUnmap(pParse, pExpr); } sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr); } /* ** Backwards Compatibility Hack: | | | 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 | sqlite3RenameExprUnmap(pParse, pExpr); } sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr); } /* ** Backwards Compatibility Hack: ** ** Historical versions of SQLite accepted strings as column names in ** indexes and PRIMARY KEY constraints and in UNIQUE constraints. Example: ** ** CREATE TABLE xyz(a,b,c,d,e,PRIMARY KEY('a'),UNIQUE('b','c' COLLATE trim) ** CREATE INDEX abc ON xyz('c','d' DESC,'e' COLLATE nocase DESC); ** ** This is goofy. But to preserve backwards compatibility we continue to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS if( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED ){ testcase( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL ); testcase( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_STORED ); sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "generated columns cannot be part of the PRIMARY KEY"); } | | | | 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS if( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED ){ testcase( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL ); testcase( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_STORED ); sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "generated columns cannot be part of the PRIMARY KEY"); } #endif } /* ** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names ** of columns that form the primary key. If pList is NULL, then the ** most recently added column of the table is the primary key. ** ** A table can have at most one primary key. If the table already has ** a primary key (and this is the second primary key) then create an ** error. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 | ){ Table *pTab = pParse->pNewTable; Column *pCol = 0; int iCol = -1, i; int nTerm; if( pTab==0 ) goto primary_key_exit; if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){ | | | 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 | ){ Table *pTab = pParse->pNewTable; Column *pCol = 0; int iCol = -1, i; int nTerm; if( pTab==0 ) goto primary_key_exit; if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName); goto primary_key_exit; } pTab->tabFlags |= TF_HasPrimaryKey; if( pList==0 ){ iCol = pTab->nCol - 1; pCol = &pTab->aCol[iCol]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 | sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &pParse->constraintName, 1); }else{ Token t; for(zStart++; sqlite3Isspace(zStart[0]); zStart++){} while( sqlite3Isspace(zEnd[-1]) ){ zEnd--; } t.z = zStart; t.n = (int)(zEnd - t.z); | | | 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 | sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &pParse->constraintName, 1); }else{ Token t; for(zStart++; sqlite3Isspace(zStart[0]); zStart++){} while( sqlite3Isspace(zEnd[-1]) ){ zEnd--; } t.z = zStart; t.n = (int)(zEnd - t.z); sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &t, 1); } }else #endif { sqlite3ExprDelete(pParse->db, pCheckExpr); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 | db = pParse->db; zColl = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pToken); if( !zColl ) return; if( sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, zColl) ){ Index *pIdx; sqlite3ColumnSetColl(db, &p->aCol[i], zColl); | | | 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 | db = pParse->db; zColl = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pToken); if( !zColl ) return; if( sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, zColl) ){ Index *pIdx; sqlite3ColumnSetColl(db, &p->aCol[i], zColl); /* If the column is declared as "<name> PRIMARY KEY COLLATE <type>", ** then an index may have been created on this column before the ** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case. */ for(pIdx=p->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ assert( pIdx->nKeyCol==1 ); if( pIdx->aiColumn[0]==i ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 | ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-34230-56049 SQLite automatically increments ** the schema-version whenever the schema changes. */ void sqlite3ChangeCookie(Parse *pParse, int iDb){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) ); | | | | | | 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 | ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-34230-56049 SQLite automatically increments ** the schema-version whenever the schema changes. */ void sqlite3ChangeCookie(Parse *pParse, int iDb){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (int)(1+(unsigned)db->aDb[iDb].pSchema->schema_cookie)); } /* ** Measure the number of characters needed to output the given ** identifier. The number returned includes any quotes used ** but does not include the null terminator. ** ** The estimate is conservative. It might be larger that what is ** really needed. */ static int identLength(const char *z){ int n; for(n=0; *z; n++, z++){ if( *z=='"' ){ n++; } } return n + 2; } /* ** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second ** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at ** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the ** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent, ** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer ** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning. ** ** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alphanumeric ** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword, ** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise, ** it is quoted using double-quotes. */ static void identPut(char *z, int *pIdx, char *zSignedIdent){ unsigned char *zIdent = (unsigned char*)zSignedIdent; int i, j, needQuote; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 | char *zSep, *zSep2, *zEnd; Column *pCol; n = 0; for(pCol = p->aCol, i=0; i<p->nCol; i++, pCol++){ n += identLength(pCol->zCnName) + 5; } n += identLength(p->zName); | | | 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 | char *zSep, *zSep2, *zEnd; Column *pCol; n = 0; for(pCol = p->aCol, i=0; i<p->nCol; i++, pCol++){ n += identLength(pCol->zCnName) + 5; } n += identLength(p->zName); if( n<50 ){ zSep = ""; zSep2 = ","; zEnd = ")"; }else{ zSep = "\n "; zSep2 = ",\n "; zEnd = "\n)"; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 | assert( pCol->affinity-SQLITE_AFF_BLOB < ArraySize(azType) ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_FLEXNUM ); | | | 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 | assert( pCol->affinity-SQLITE_AFF_BLOB < ArraySize(azType) ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_FLEXNUM ); zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_BLOB]; len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType); assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB || pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_FLEXNUM || pCol->affinity==sqlite3AffinityType(zType, 0) ); memcpy(&zStmt[k], zType, len); k += len; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 | assert( pPk->pTable->tabFlags & TF_WithoutRowid ); assert( pPk->pTable==pIdx->pTable ); testcase( pPk==pIdx ); j = pPk->aiColumn[iCol]; assert( j!=XN_ROWID && j!=XN_EXPR ); for(i=0; i<nKey; i++){ assert( pIdx->aiColumn[i]>=0 || j>=0 ); | | | 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 | assert( pPk->pTable->tabFlags & TF_WithoutRowid ); assert( pPk->pTable==pIdx->pTable ); testcase( pPk==pIdx ); j = pPk->aiColumn[iCol]; assert( j!=XN_ROWID && j!=XN_EXPR ); for(i=0; i<nKey; i++){ assert( pIdx->aiColumn[i]>=0 || j>=0 ); if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]==j && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->azColl[i], pPk->azColl[iCol])==0 ){ return 1; } } return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 | ** This routine runs at the end of parsing a CREATE TABLE statement that ** has a WITHOUT ROWID clause. The job of this routine is to convert both ** internal schema data structures and the generated VDBE code so that they ** are appropriate for a WITHOUT ROWID table instead of a rowid table. ** Changes include: ** ** (1) Set all columns of the PRIMARY KEY schema object to be NOT NULL. | | | 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 | ** This routine runs at the end of parsing a CREATE TABLE statement that ** has a WITHOUT ROWID clause. The job of this routine is to convert both ** internal schema data structures and the generated VDBE code so that they ** are appropriate for a WITHOUT ROWID table instead of a rowid table. ** Changes include: ** ** (1) Set all columns of the PRIMARY KEY schema object to be NOT NULL. ** (2) Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY ** into BTREE_BLOBKEY. ** (3) Bypass the creation of the sqlite_schema table entry ** for the PRIMARY KEY as the primary key index is now ** identified by the sqlite_schema table entry of the table itself. ** (4) Set the Index.tnum of the PRIMARY KEY Index object in the ** schema to the rootpage from the main table. ** (5) Add all table columns to the PRIMARY KEY Index object |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 | assert( !pParse->bReturning ); if( pParse->u1.addrCrTab ){ assert( v ); sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, pParse->u1.addrCrTab, BTREE_BLOBKEY); } /* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index. Or, if this table was originally | | | | 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 | assert( !pParse->bReturning ); if( pParse->u1.addrCrTab ){ assert( v ); sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, pParse->u1.addrCrTab, BTREE_BLOBKEY); } /* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index. Or, if this table was originally ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index. */ if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){ ExprList *pList; Token ipkToken; sqlite3TokenInit(&ipkToken, pTab->aCol[pTab->iPKey].zCnName); pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &ipkToken, 0)); if( pList==0 ){ pTab->tabFlags &= ~TF_WithoutRowid; return; } if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ sqlite3RenameTokenRemap(pParse, pList->a[0].pExpr, &pTab->iPKey); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 | ** this is a temporary table or db->init.busy==1. When db->init.busy==1 ** it means we are reading the sqlite_schema table because we just ** connected to the database or because the sqlite_schema table has ** recently changed, so the entry for this table already exists in ** the sqlite_schema table. We do not want to create it again. ** ** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine | | | 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 | ** this is a temporary table or db->init.busy==1. When db->init.busy==1 ** it means we are reading the sqlite_schema table because we just ** connected to the database or because the sqlite_schema table has ** recently changed, so the entry for this table already exists in ** the sqlite_schema table. We do not want to create it again. ** ** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine ** was called to create a table generated from a ** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement. The column names of ** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT. */ void sqlite3EndTable( Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */ Token *pCons, /* The ',' token after the last column defn. */ Token *pEnd, /* The ')' before options in the CREATE TABLE */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 | if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_PRIMKEY)!=0 && p->iPKey!=ii && pCol->notNull == OE_None ){ pCol->notNull = OE_Abort; p->tabFlags |= TF_HasNotNull; } | | | 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 | if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_PRIMKEY)!=0 && p->iPKey!=ii && pCol->notNull == OE_None ){ pCol->notNull = OE_Abort; p->tabFlags |= TF_HasNotNull; } } } assert( (p->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey)==0 || p->iPKey>=0 || sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(p)!=0 ); assert( (p->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey)!=0 || (p->iPKey<0 && sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(p)==0) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 | if( sqlite3ResolveSelfReference(pParse, p, NC_GenCol, pX, 0) ){ /* If there are errors in resolving the expression, change the ** expression to a NULL. This prevents code generators that operate ** on the expression from inserting extra parts into the expression ** tree that have been allocated from lookaside memory, which is ** illegal in a schema and will lead to errors or heap corruption ** when the database connection closes. */ | | | 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 | if( sqlite3ResolveSelfReference(pParse, p, NC_GenCol, pX, 0) ){ /* If there are errors in resolving the expression, change the ** expression to a NULL. This prevents code generators that operate ** on the expression from inserting extra parts into the expression ** tree that have been allocated from lookaside memory, which is ** illegal in a schema and will lead to errors or heap corruption ** when the database connection closes. */ sqlite3ColumnSetExpr(pParse, p, &p->aCol[ii], sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_NULL, 0, 0)); } }else{ nNG++; } } if( nNG==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 | char *zStmt; /* Text of the CREATE TABLE or CREATE VIEW statement */ v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( NEVER(v==0) ) return; sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0); | | | 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 | char *zStmt; /* Text of the CREATE TABLE or CREATE VIEW statement */ v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( NEVER(v==0) ) return; sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0); /* ** Initialize zType for the new view or table. */ if( IsOrdinaryTable(p) ){ /* A regular table */ zType = "table"; zType2 = "TABLE"; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 | /* Compute the complete text of the CREATE statement */ if( pSelect ){ zStmt = createTableStmt(db, p); }else{ Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd; n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z); if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n; | | | | 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 | /* Compute the complete text of the CREATE statement */ if( pSelect ){ zStmt = createTableStmt(db, p); }else{ Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd; n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z); if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n; zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z ); } /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the ** schema table. We just need to update that slot with all ** the information we've collected. */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET type='%s', name=%Q, tbl_name=%Q, rootpage=#%d, sql=%Q" " WHERE rowid=#%d", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 | ** ** CREATE VIEW one AS SELECT * FROM two; ** CREATE VIEW two AS SELECT * FROM one; ** ** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point. ** But the following test is still important as it does come up ** in the following: | | | 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 | ** ** CREATE VIEW one AS SELECT * FROM two; ** CREATE VIEW two AS SELECT * FROM one; ** ** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point. ** But the following test is still important as it does come up ** in the following: ** ** CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a); ** CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1; ** SELECT * FROM temp.ex1; */ if( pTable->nCol<0 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "view %s is circularly defined", pTable->zName); return 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 | }else if( pTable->pCheck ){ /* CREATE VIEW name(arglist) AS ... ** The names of the columns in the table are taken from ** arglist which is stored in pTable->pCheck. The pCheck field ** normally holds CHECK constraints on an ordinary table, but for ** a VIEW it holds the list of column names. */ | | | 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 | }else if( pTable->pCheck ){ /* CREATE VIEW name(arglist) AS ... ** The names of the columns in the table are taken from ** arglist which is stored in pTable->pCheck. The pCheck field ** normally holds CHECK constraints on an ordinary table, but for ** a VIEW it holds the list of column names. */ sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck, &pTable->nCol, &pTable->aCol); if( pParse->nErr==0 && pTable->nCol==pSel->pEList->nExpr ){ assert( db->mallocFailed==0 ); sqlite3SubqueryColumnTypes(pParse, pTable, pSel, SQLITE_AFF_NONE); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 | nErr++; } pTable->pSchema->schemaFlags |= DB_UnresetViews; if( db->mallocFailed ){ sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(db, pTable); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */ | | | 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 | nErr++; } pTable->pSchema->schemaFlags |= DB_UnresetViews; if( db->mallocFailed ){ sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(db, pTable); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */ return nErr; } int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){ assert( pTable!=0 ); if( !IsVirtual(pTable) && pTable->nCol>0 ) return 0; return viewGetColumnNames(pParse, pTable); } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 | ** root-page of a table or index in database iDb has changed from iFrom ** to iTo. ** ** Ticket #1728: The symbol table might still contain information ** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted. ** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might ** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is | | | 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 | ** root-page of a table or index in database iDb has changed from iFrom ** to iTo. ** ** Ticket #1728: The symbol table might still contain information ** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted. ** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might ** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is ** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match ** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices ** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved. ** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with ** rootpage==iFrom have been converted to have a rootpage of iTo ** in order to be certain that we got the right one. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 | #endif /* ** Write code to erase the table with root-page iTable from database iDb. ** Also write code to modify the sqlite_schema table and internal schema ** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst ** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database). | | | | | | 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 | #endif /* ** Write code to erase the table with root-page iTable from database iDb. ** Also write code to modify the sqlite_schema table and internal schema ** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst ** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database). */ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); if( iTable<2 ) sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "corrupt schema"); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Destroy, iTable, r1, iDb); sqlite3MayAbort(pParse); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* OP_Destroy stores an in integer r1. If this integer ** is non-zero, then it is the root page number of a table moved to ** location iTable. The following code modifies the sqlite_schema table to ** reflect this. ** ** The "#NNN" in the SQL is a special constant that means whatever value ** is in register NNN. See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER ** token for additional information. */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d", pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, iTable, r1, r1); #endif sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r1); } /* ** Write VDBE code to erase table pTab and all associated indices on disk. ** Code to update the sqlite_schema tables and internal schema definitions ** in case a root-page belonging to another table is moved by the btree layer ** is also added (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database). */ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ /* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM ** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically ** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages ** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the ** following were coded: ** ** OP_Destroy 4 0 ** ... ** OP_Destroy 5 0 ** ** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the ** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit ** a free-list page. */ Pgno iTab = pTab->tnum; Pgno iDestroyed = 0; while( 1 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 | /* Drop all triggers associated with the table being dropped. Code ** is generated to remove entries from sqlite_schema and/or ** sqlite_temp_schema if required. */ pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab); while( pTrigger ){ | | | 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 | /* Drop all triggers associated with the table being dropped. Code ** is generated to remove entries from sqlite_schema and/or ** sqlite_temp_schema if required. */ pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab); while( pTrigger ){ assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema || pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema ); sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger); pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT /* Remove any entries of the sqlite_sequence table associated with |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 | /* Drop all entries in the schema table that refer to the ** table. The program name loops through the schema table and deletes ** every row that refers to a table of the same name as the one being ** dropped. Triggers are handled separately because a trigger can be ** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another ** database. */ | | | 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 | /* Drop all entries in the schema table that refer to the ** table. The program name loops through the schema table and deletes ** every row that refers to a table of the same name as the one being ** dropped. Triggers are handled separately because a trigger can be ** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another ** database. */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "DELETE FROM %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'", pDb->zDbSName, pTab->zName); if( !isView && !IsVirtual(pTab) ){ destroyTable(pParse, pTab); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 | for(j=0; j<p->nCol; j++){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(p->aCol[j].zCnName, pFromCol->a[i].zEName)==0 ){ pFKey->aCol[i].iFrom = j; break; } } if( j>=p->nCol ){ | | | | 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 | for(j=0; j<p->nCol; j++){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(p->aCol[j].zCnName, pFromCol->a[i].zEName)==0 ){ pFKey->aCol[i].iFrom = j; break; } } if( j>=p->nCol ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition", pFromCol->a[i].zEName); goto fk_end; } if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ sqlite3RenameTokenRemap(pParse, &pFKey->aCol[i], pFromCol->a[i].zEName); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 | } } pFKey->isDeferred = 0; pFKey->aAction[0] = (u8)(flags & 0xff); /* ON DELETE action */ pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff); /* ON UPDATE action */ assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) ); | | | 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 | } } pFKey->isDeferred = 0; pFKey->aAction[0] = (u8)(flags & 0xff); /* ON DELETE action */ pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff); /* ON UPDATE action */ assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) ); pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash, pFKey->zTo, (void *)pFKey ); if( pNextTo==pFKey ){ sqlite3OomFault(db); goto fk_end; } if( pNextTo ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 | sqlite3GenerateIndexKey(pParse,pIndex,iTab,regRecord,0,&iPartIdxLabel,0,0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SorterInsert, iSorter, regRecord); sqlite3ResolvePartIdxLabel(pParse, iPartIdxLabel); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb); | | | | 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 | sqlite3GenerateIndexKey(pParse,pIndex,iTab,regRecord,0,&iPartIdxLabel,0,0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SorterInsert, iSorter, regRecord); sqlite3ResolvePartIdxLabel(pParse, iPartIdxLabel); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, (int)tnum, iDb, (char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR|((memRootPage>=0)?OPFLAG_P2ISREG:0)); addr1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SorterSort, iSorter, 0); VdbeCoverage(v); if( IsUniqueIndex(pIndex) ){ int j2 = sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, 1); addr2 = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); sqlite3VdbeVerifyAbortable(v, OE_Abort); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_SorterCompare, iSorter, j2, regRecord, pIndex->nKeyCol); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3UniqueConstraint(pParse, OE_Abort, pIndex); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, j2); }else{ /* Most CREATE INDEX and REINDEX statements that are not UNIQUE can not ** abort. The exception is if one of the indexed expressions contains a ** user function that throws an exception when it is evaluated. But the ** overhead of adding a statement journal to a CREATE INDEX statement is ** very small (since most of the pages written do not contain content that ** needs to be restored if the statement aborts), so we call ** sqlite3MayAbort() for all CREATE INDEX statements. */ sqlite3MayAbort(pParse); addr2 = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SorterData, iSorter, regRecord, iIdx); if( !pIndex->bAscKeyBug ){ /* This OP_SeekEnd opcode makes index insert for a REINDEX go much |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 | */ int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList){ if( pList ){ int i; for(i=0; i<pList->nExpr; i++){ if( pList->a[i].fg.bNulls ){ u8 sf = pList->a[i].fg.sortFlags; | | | | | | 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 | */ int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList){ if( pList ){ int i; for(i=0; i<pList->nExpr; i++){ if( pList->a[i].fg.bNulls ){ u8 sf = pList->a[i].fg.sortFlags; sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsupported use of NULLS %s", (sf==0 || sf==3) ? "FIRST" : "LAST" ); return 1; } } } return 0; } /* ** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index ** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will ** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a ** UNIQUE constraint. If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable ** as the table to be indexed. pParse->pNewTable is a table that is ** currently being constructed by a CREATE TABLE statement. ** ** pList is a list of columns to be indexed. pList will be NULL if this ** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added ** to the table currently under construction. */ void sqlite3CreateIndex( Parse *pParse, /* All information about this parse */ Token *pName1, /* First part of index name. May be NULL */ Token *pName2, /* Second part of index name. May be NULL */ SrcList *pTblName, /* Table to index. Use pParse->pNewTable if 0 */ ExprList *pList, /* A list of columns to be indexed */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 | } /* ** Find the table that is to be indexed. Return early if not found. */ if( pTblName!=0 ){ | | | | | | 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 | } /* ** Find the table that is to be indexed. Return early if not found. */ if( pTblName!=0 ){ /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database ** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db ** before looking up the table. */ assert( pName1 && pName2 ); iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName); if( iDb<0 ) goto exit_create_index; assert( pName && pName->z ); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB /* If the index name was unqualified, check if the table ** is a temp table. If so, set the database to 1. Do not do this ** if initializing a database schema. */ if( !db->init.busy ){ pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTblName); if( pName2->n==0 && pTab && pTab->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema ){ iDb = 1; } } #endif sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "index", pName); if( sqlite3FixSrcList(&sFix, pTblName) ){ /* Because the parser constructs pTblName from a single identifier, ** sqlite3FixSrcList can never fail. */ assert(0); } pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pTblName->a[0]); assert( db->mallocFailed==0 || pTab==0 ); if( pTab==0 ) goto exit_create_index; if( iDb==1 && db->aDb[iDb].pSchema!=pTab->pSchema ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create a TEMP index on non-TEMP table \"%s\"", pTab->zName); goto exit_create_index; } if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pPk = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); }else{ assert( pName==0 ); assert( pStart==0 ); pTab = pParse->pNewTable; if( !pTab ) goto exit_create_index; iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); } pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; assert( pTab!=0 ); if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 && db->init.busy==0 && pTblName!=0 #if SQLITE_USER_AUTHENTICATION && sqlite3UserAuthTable(pTab->zName)==0 #endif ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be indexed", pTab->zName); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 | sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "virtual tables may not be indexed"); goto exit_create_index; } #endif /* ** Find the name of the index. Make sure there is not already another | | | 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 | sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "virtual tables may not be indexed"); goto exit_create_index; } #endif /* ** Find the name of the index. Make sure there is not already another ** index or table with the same name. ** ** Exception: If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the ** sqlite_schema table (because some other process changed the schema) and ** one of the index names collides with the name of a temporary table or ** index, then we will continue to process this index. ** ** If pName==0 it means that we are |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 | assert( pExpr!=0 ); if( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE ){ assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_IntValue) ); nExtra += (1 + sqlite3Strlen30(pExpr->u.zToken)); } } | | | | 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 | assert( pExpr!=0 ); if( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE ){ assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_IntValue) ); nExtra += (1 + sqlite3Strlen30(pExpr->u.zToken)); } } /* ** Allocate the index structure. */ nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); nExtraCol = pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : 1; assert( pList->nExpr + nExtraCol <= 32767 /* Fits in i16 */ ); pIndex = sqlite3AllocateIndexObject(db, pList->nExpr + nExtraCol, nName + nExtra + 1, &zExtra); if( db->mallocFailed ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 | ** normal tables (when pPk==0) this will be the rowid. */ if( pPk ){ for(j=0; j<pPk->nKeyCol; j++){ int x = pPk->aiColumn[j]; assert( x>=0 ); if( isDupColumn(pIndex, pIndex->nKeyCol, pPk, j) ){ | | | | 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 | ** normal tables (when pPk==0) this will be the rowid. */ if( pPk ){ for(j=0; j<pPk->nKeyCol; j++){ int x = pPk->aiColumn[j]; assert( x>=0 ); if( isDupColumn(pIndex, pIndex->nKeyCol, pPk, j) ){ pIndex->nColumn--; }else{ testcase( hasColumn(pIndex->aiColumn,pIndex->nKeyCol,x) ); pIndex->aiColumn[i] = x; pIndex->azColl[i] = pPk->azColl[j]; pIndex->aSortOrder[i] = pPk->aSortOrder[j]; i++; } } assert( i==pIndex->nColumn ); }else{ pIndex->aiColumn[i] = XN_ROWID; pIndex->azColl[i] = sqlite3StrBINARY; } sqlite3DefaultRowEst(pIndex); if( pParse->pNewTable==0 ) estimateIndexWidth(pIndex); /* If this index contains every column of its table, then mark ** it as a covering index */ assert( HasRowid(pTab) || pTab->iPKey<0 || sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pIndex, pTab->iPKey)>=0 ); recomputeColumnsNotIndexed(pIndex); if( pTblName!=0 && pIndex->nColumn>=pTab->nCol ){ pIndex->isCovering = 1; for(j=0; j<pTab->nCol; j++){ if( j==pTab->iPKey ) continue; if( sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pIndex,j)>=0 ) continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 | z2 = pIndex->azColl[k]; if( sqlite3StrICmp(z1, z2) ) break; } if( k==pIdx->nKeyCol ){ if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){ /* This constraint creates the same index as a previous ** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement. | | | | | | 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 | z2 = pIndex->azColl[k]; if( sqlite3StrICmp(z1, z2) ) break; } if( k==pIdx->nKeyCol ){ if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){ /* This constraint creates the same index as a previous ** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement. ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this ** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit ** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the ** explicitly specified behavior for the index. */ if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0); } if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){ pIdx->onError = pIndex->onError; } } if( idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_PRIMARYKEY ) pIdx->idxType = idxType; if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ pIndex->pNext = pParse->pNewIndex; pParse->pNewIndex = pIndex; pIndex = 0; } goto exit_create_index; } } } if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ /* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other ** in-memory database structures. */ assert( pParse->nErr==0 ); if( db->init.busy ){ Index *p; assert( !IN_SPECIAL_PARSE ); assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, pIndex->pSchema) ); if( pTblName!=0 ){ pIndex->tnum = db->init.newTnum; if( sqlite3IndexHasDuplicateRootPage(pIndex) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "invalid rootpage"); pParse->rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto exit_create_index; } } p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, pIndex->zName, pIndex); if( p ){ assert( p==pIndex ); /* Malloc must have failed */ sqlite3OomFault(db); goto exit_create_index; } db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 | v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v==0 ) goto exit_create_index; sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb); /* Create the rootpage for the index using CreateIndex. But before | | | | | 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 | v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v==0 ) goto exit_create_index; sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb); /* Create the rootpage for the index using CreateIndex. But before ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In ** that case the convertToWithoutRowidTable() routine will replace ** the Noop with a Goto to jump over the VDBE code generated below. */ pIndex->tnum = (Pgno)sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Noop); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_CreateBtree, iDb, iMem, BTREE_BLOBKEY); /* Gather the complete text of the CREATE INDEX statement into ** the zStmt variable |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 | /* An automatic index created by a PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE constraint */ /* zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(""); */ zStmt = 0; } /* Add an entry in sqlite_schema for this index */ | | | 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 | /* An automatic index created by a PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE constraint */ /* zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(""); */ zStmt = 0; } /* Add an entry in sqlite_schema for this index */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "INSERT INTO %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);", db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, pIndex->zName, pTab->zName, iMem, zStmt ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 | LogEst x; int nCopy = MIN(ArraySize(aVal), pIdx->nKeyCol); int i; /* Indexes with default row estimates should not have stat1 data */ assert( !pIdx->hasStat1 ); | | | 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 | LogEst x; int nCopy = MIN(ArraySize(aVal), pIdx->nKeyCol); int i; /* Indexes with default row estimates should not have stat1 data */ assert( !pIdx->hasStat1 ); /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated ** number of rows in the table, or half the number of rows in the table ** for a partial index. ** ** 2020-05-27: If some of the stat data is coming from the sqlite_stat1 ** table but other parts we are having to guess at, then do not let the ** estimated number of rows in the table be less than 1000 (LogEst 99). ** Failure to do this can cause the indexes for which we do not have |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 | ** a new one. If an OOM error does occurs, then the prior value of pList ** that is input to this routine is automatically freed. ** ** If pDatabase is not null, it means that the table has an optional ** database name prefix. Like this: "database.table". The pDatabase ** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name. ** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might | | | 4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 | ** a new one. If an OOM error does occurs, then the prior value of pList ** that is input to this routine is automatically freed. ** ** If pDatabase is not null, it means that the table has an optional ** database name prefix. Like this: "database.table". The pDatabase ** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name. ** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might ** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase. ** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable, ** or with NULL if no database is specified. ** ** In other words, if call like this: ** ** sqlite3SrcListAppend(D,A,B,0); ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 | Token *pAlias, /* The right-hand side of the AS subexpression */ Select *pSubquery, /* A subquery used in place of a table name */ OnOrUsing *pOnUsing /* Either the ON clause or the USING clause */ ){ SrcItem *pItem; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( !p && pOnUsing!=0 && (pOnUsing->pOn || pOnUsing->pUsing) ){ | | | 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 | Token *pAlias, /* The right-hand side of the AS subexpression */ Select *pSubquery, /* A subquery used in place of a table name */ OnOrUsing *pOnUsing /* Either the ON clause or the USING clause */ ){ SrcItem *pItem; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( !p && pOnUsing!=0 && (pOnUsing->pOn || pOnUsing->pUsing) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s", (pOnUsing->pOn ? "ON" : "USING") ); goto append_from_error; } p = sqlite3SrcListAppend(pParse, p, pTable, pDatabase); if( p==0 ){ goto append_from_error; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 | assert( p==0 ); sqlite3ClearOnOrUsing(db, pOnUsing); sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSubquery); return 0; } /* | | | | | 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 | assert( p==0 ); sqlite3ClearOnOrUsing(db, pOnUsing); sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSubquery); return 0; } /* ** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added ** element of the source-list passed as the second argument. */ void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){ assert( pIndexedBy!=0 ); if( p && pIndexedBy->n>0 ){ SrcItem *pItem; assert( p->nSrc>0 ); pItem = &p->a[p->nSrc-1]; assert( pItem->fg.notIndexed==0 ); assert( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy==0 ); assert( pItem->fg.isTabFunc==0 ); if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){ /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y ** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */ pItem->fg.notIndexed = 1; }else{ pItem->u1.zIndexedBy = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pIndexedBy); pItem->fg.isIndexedBy = 1; assert( pItem->fg.isCte==0 ); /* No collision on union u2 */ } } } /* ** Append the contents of SrcList p2 to SrcList p1 and return the resulting ** SrcList. Or, if an error occurs, return NULL. In all cases, p1 and p2 ** are deleted by this function. */ SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendList(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p1, SrcList *p2){ assert( p1 && p1->nSrc==1 ); if( p2 ){ SrcList *pNew = sqlite3SrcListEnlarge(pParse, p1, p2->nSrc, 1); if( pNew==0 ){ sqlite3SrcListDelete(pParse->db, p2); }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 | Vdbe *v; int isRollback; assert( pParse!=0 ); assert( pParse->db!=0 ); assert( eType==TK_COMMIT || eType==TK_END || eType==TK_ROLLBACK ); isRollback = eType==TK_ROLLBACK; | | | | 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 | Vdbe *v; int isRollback; assert( pParse!=0 ); assert( pParse->db!=0 ); assert( eType==TK_COMMIT || eType==TK_END || eType==TK_ROLLBACK ); isRollback = eType==TK_ROLLBACK; if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION, isRollback ? "ROLLBACK" : "COMMIT", 0, 0) ){ return; } v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AutoCommit, 1, isRollback); } } /* ** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create, ** release or rollback an SQL savepoint. */ void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){ char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName); if( zName ){ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION static const char * const az[] = { "BEGIN", "RELEASE", "ROLLBACK" }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 | ** the number of errors. Leave any error messages in the pParse structure. */ int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){ int rc; Btree *pBt; | | | 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 | ** the number of errors. Leave any error messages in the pParse structure. */ int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){ int rc; Btree *pBt; static const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB; rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pBt, 0, flags); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 | } void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){ sqlite3CodeVerifySchemaAtToplevel(sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse), iDb); } /* | | | 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 | } void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){ sqlite3CodeVerifySchemaAtToplevel(sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse), iDb); } /* ** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each ** attached database. Otherwise, invoke it for the database named zDb only. */ void sqlite3CodeVerifyNamedSchema(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; int i; for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ Db *pDb = &db->aDb[i]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 | ** be necessary to undo the completed writes. */ void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){ Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse); pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1; } | | | | | 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 | ** be necessary to undo the completed writes. */ void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){ Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse); pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1; } /* ** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is ** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to ** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make ** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction. ** ** Technically, we only need to set the mayAbort flag if the ** isMultiWrite flag was previously set. There is a time dependency ** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite. This makes ** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm ** go a little faster. But taking advantage of this time dependency ** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in ** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective ** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen ** to take the safe route and skip the optimization. */ void sqlite3MayAbort(Parse *pParse){ Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse); pToplevel->mayAbort = 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 | Index *pIdx /* The index that triggers the constraint */ ){ char *zErr; int j; StrAccum errMsg; Table *pTab = pIdx->pTable; | | | | | | 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 | Index *pIdx /* The index that triggers the constraint */ ){ char *zErr; int j; StrAccum errMsg; Table *pTab = pIdx->pTable; sqlite3StrAccumInit(&errMsg, pParse->db, 0, 0, pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]); if( pIdx->aColExpr ){ sqlite3_str_appendf(&errMsg, "index '%q'", pIdx->zName); }else{ for(j=0; j<pIdx->nKeyCol; j++){ char *zCol; assert( pIdx->aiColumn[j]>=0 ); zCol = pTab->aCol[pIdx->aiColumn[j]].zCnName; if( j ) sqlite3_str_append(&errMsg, ", ", 2); sqlite3_str_appendall(&errMsg, pTab->zName); sqlite3_str_append(&errMsg, ".", 1); sqlite3_str_appendall(&errMsg, zCol); } } zErr = sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&errMsg); sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse, IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY : SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_UNIQUE, onError, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC, P5_ConstraintUnique); } /* ** Code an OP_Halt due to non-unique rowid. */ void sqlite3RowidConstraint( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ int onError, /* Conflict resolution algorithm */ Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */ ){ char *zMsg; int rc; if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){ zMsg = sqlite3MPrintf(pParse->db, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pTab->aCol[pTab->iPKey].zCnName); rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 | */ void sqlite3CteDelete(sqlite3 *db, Cte *pCte){ assert( pCte!=0 ); cteClear(db, pCte); sqlite3DbFree(db, pCte); } | | | | | 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 | */ void sqlite3CteDelete(sqlite3 *db, Cte *pCte){ assert( pCte!=0 ); cteClear(db, pCte); sqlite3DbFree(db, pCte); } /* ** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a ** WITH clause. The CTE described by the third argument is added to ** the WITH clause of the second argument. If the second argument is ** NULL, then a new WITH argument is created. */ With *sqlite3WithAdd( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ With *pWith, /* Existing WITH clause, or NULL */ Cte *pCte /* CTE to add to the WITH clause */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/date.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 | ** %H hour 00-24 ** %j day of year 000-366 ** %J ** julian day number ** %m month 01-12 ** %M minute 00-59 ** %s seconds since 1970-01-01 ** %S seconds 00-59 | | | 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 | ** %H hour 00-24 ** %j day of year 000-366 ** %J ** julian day number ** %m month 01-12 ** %M minute 00-59 ** %s seconds since 1970-01-01 ** %S seconds 00-59 ** %w day of week 0-6 Sunday==0 ** %W week of year 00-53 ** %Y year 0000-9999 ** %% % */ static void strftimeFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int argc, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/delete.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | #include "sqliteInt.h" /* ** While a SrcList can in general represent multiple tables and subqueries ** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains ** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE, ** or UPDATE statement. Look up that table in the symbol table and | | | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | #include "sqliteInt.h" /* ** While a SrcList can in general represent multiple tables and subqueries ** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains ** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE, ** or UPDATE statement. Look up that table in the symbol table and ** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table ** name is not found or if any other error occurs. ** ** The following fields are initialized appropriate in pSrc: ** ** pSrc->a[0].pTab Pointer to the Table object ** pSrc->a[0].pIndex Pointer to the INDEXED BY index, if there is one ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | if( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy && sqlite3IndexedByLookup(pParse, pItem) ){ pTab = 0; } } return pTab; } | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | if( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy && sqlite3IndexedByLookup(pParse, pItem) ){ pTab = 0; } } return pTab; } /* Generate byte-code that will report the number of rows modified ** by a DELETE, INSERT, or UPDATE statement. */ void sqlite3CodeChangeCount(Vdbe *v, int regCounter, const char *zColName){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_FkCheck); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, regCounter, 1); sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1); sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, zColName, SQLITE_STATIC); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 | ** has been provided ** ** 2) A trigger is currently being coded and the table is a virtual table ** that is SQLITE_VTAB_DIRECTONLY or if PRAGMA trusted_schema=OFF and ** the table is not SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS. ** ** 3) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_schema), this call is not | | | | 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 | ** has been provided ** ** 2) A trigger is currently being coded and the table is a virtual table ** that is SQLITE_VTAB_DIRECTONLY or if PRAGMA trusted_schema=OFF and ** the table is not SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS. ** ** 3) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_schema), this call is not ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not ** been specified ** ** 4) The table is a shadow table, the database connection is in ** defensive mode, and the current sqlite3_prepare() ** is for a top-level SQL statement. */ static int vtabIsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ if( sqlite3GetVTable(pParse->db, pTab)->pMod->pModule->xUpdate==0 ){ return 1; } /* Within triggers: ** * Do not allow DELETE, INSERT, or UPDATE of SQLITE_VTAB_DIRECTONLY ** virtual tables ** * Only allow DELETE, INSERT, or UPDATE of non-SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS ** virtual tables if PRAGMA trusted_schema=ON. */ if( pParse->pToplevel!=0 && pTab->u.vtab.p->eVtabRisk > ((pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_TrustedSchema)!=0) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsafe use of virtual table \"%s\"", pTab->zName); } return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | return sqlite3WritableSchema(db)==0 && pParse->nested==0; } assert( pTab->tabFlags & TF_Shadow ); return sqlite3ReadOnlyShadowTables(db); } /* | | | | 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | return sqlite3WritableSchema(db)==0 && pParse->nested==0; } assert( pTab->tabFlags & TF_Shadow ); return sqlite3ReadOnlyShadowTables(db); } /* ** Check to make sure the given table is writable. ** ** If pTab is not writable -> generate an error message and return 1. ** If pTab is writable but other errors have occurred -> return 1. ** If pTab is writable and no prior errors -> return 0; */ int sqlite3IsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, Trigger *pTrigger){ if( tabIsReadOnly(pParse, pTab) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be modified", pTab->zName); return 1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW if( IsView(pTab) && (pTrigger==0 || (pTrigger->bReturning && pTrigger->pNext==0)) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,"cannot modify %s because it is a view",pTab->zName); return 1; } #endif return 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
156 157 158 159 160 161 162 | if( pFrom ){ assert( pFrom->nSrc==1 ); pFrom->a[0].zName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pView->zName); pFrom->a[0].zDatabase = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName); assert( pFrom->a[0].fg.isUsing==0 ); assert( pFrom->a[0].u3.pOn==0 ); } | | | 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | if( pFrom ){ assert( pFrom->nSrc==1 ); pFrom->a[0].zName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pView->zName); pFrom->a[0].zDatabase = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName); assert( pFrom->a[0].fg.isUsing==0 ); assert( pFrom->a[0].u3.pOn==0 ); } pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, pOrderBy, SF_IncludeHidden, pLimit); sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_EphemTab, iCur); sqlite3Select(pParse, pSel, &dest); sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSel); } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
184 185 186 187 188 189 190 | ExprList *pOrderBy, /* The ORDER BY clause. May be null */ Expr *pLimit, /* The LIMIT clause. May be null */ char *zStmtType /* Either DELETE or UPDATE. For err msgs. */ ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Expr *pLhs = NULL; /* LHS of IN(SELECT...) operator */ Expr *pInClause = NULL; /* WHERE rowid IN ( select ) */ | | | | | 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 | ExprList *pOrderBy, /* The ORDER BY clause. May be null */ Expr *pLimit, /* The LIMIT clause. May be null */ char *zStmtType /* Either DELETE or UPDATE. For err msgs. */ ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Expr *pLhs = NULL; /* LHS of IN(SELECT...) operator */ Expr *pInClause = NULL; /* WHERE rowid IN ( select ) */ ExprList *pEList = NULL; /* Expression list containing only pSelectRowid*/ SrcList *pSelectSrc = NULL; /* SELECT rowid FROM x ... (dup of pSrc) */ Select *pSelect = NULL; /* Complete SELECT tree */ Table *pTab; /* Check that there isn't an ORDER BY without a LIMIT clause. */ if( pOrderBy && pLimit==0 ) { sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "ORDER BY without LIMIT on %s", zStmtType); sqlite3ExprDelete(pParse->db, pWhere); sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pOrderBy); return 0; } /* We only need to generate a select expression if there ** is a limit/offset term to enforce. */ if( pLimit == 0 ) { return pWhere; } /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset ** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement. For example: ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1 ** becomes: ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN ( ** SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1 ** ); */ pTab = pSrc->a[0].pTab; if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ pLhs = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ROW, 0, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
260 261 262 263 264 265 266 | pSrc->a[0].fg.isIndexedBy = 0; sqlite3DbFree(db, pSrc->a[0].u1.zIndexedBy); }else if( pSrc->a[0].fg.isCte ){ pSrc->a[0].u2.pCteUse->nUse++; } /* generate the SELECT expression tree. */ | | | | 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 | pSrc->a[0].fg.isIndexedBy = 0; sqlite3DbFree(db, pSrc->a[0].u1.zIndexedBy); }else if( pSrc->a[0].fg.isCte ){ pSrc->a[0].u2.pCteUse->nUse++; } /* generate the SELECT expression tree. */ pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSelectSrc, pWhere, 0 ,0, pOrderBy,0,pLimit ); /* now generate the new WHERE rowid IN clause for the DELETE/UPDATE */ pInClause = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_IN, pLhs, 0); sqlite3PExprAddSelect(pParse, pInClause, pSelect); return pInClause; } #endif /* defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT) */ /* && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
316 317 318 319 320 321 322 | int iEphCur = 0; /* Ephemeral table holding all primary key values */ int iRowSet = 0; /* Register for rowset of rows to delete */ int addrBypass = 0; /* Address of jump over the delete logic */ int addrLoop = 0; /* Top of the delete loop */ int addrEphOpen = 0; /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */ int bComplex; /* True if there are triggers or FKs or ** subqueries in the WHERE clause */ | | | 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 | int iEphCur = 0; /* Ephemeral table holding all primary key values */ int iRowSet = 0; /* Register for rowset of rows to delete */ int addrBypass = 0; /* Address of jump over the delete logic */ int addrLoop = 0; /* Top of the delete loop */ int addrEphOpen = 0; /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */ int bComplex; /* True if there are triggers or FKs or ** subqueries in the WHERE clause */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER int isView; /* True if attempting to delete from a view */ Trigger *pTrigger; /* List of table triggers, if required */ #endif memset(&sContext, 0, sizeof(sContext)); db = pParse->db; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
384 385 386 387 388 389 390 | } if( sqlite3IsReadOnly(pParse, pTab, pTrigger) ){ goto delete_from_cleanup; } iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); assert( iDb<db->nDb ); | | | 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 | } if( sqlite3IsReadOnly(pParse, pTab, pTrigger) ){ goto delete_from_cleanup; } iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); assert( iDb<db->nDb ); rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0, db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName); assert( rcauth==SQLITE_OK || rcauth==SQLITE_DENY || rcauth==SQLITE_IGNORE ); if( rcauth==SQLITE_DENY ){ goto delete_from_cleanup; } assert(!isView || pTrigger); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
420 421 422 423 424 425 426 | sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, bComplex, iDb); /* If we are trying to delete from a view, realize that view into ** an ephemeral table. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) if( isView ){ | | | 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 | sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, bComplex, iDb); /* If we are trying to delete from a view, realize that view into ** an ephemeral table. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) if( isView ){ sqlite3MaterializeView(pParse, pTab, pWhere, pOrderBy, pLimit, iTabCur ); iDataCur = iIdxCur = iTabCur; pOrderBy = 0; pLimit = 0; } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
453 454 455 456 457 458 459 | memCnt = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, memCnt); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION /* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything. ** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5, | | | 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 | memCnt = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, memCnt); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION /* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything. ** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5, ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by ** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly. ** ** The "rcauth==SQLITE_OK" terms is the ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-17228-37124 If the action code is SQLITE_DELETE and ** the callback returns SQLITE_IGNORE then the DELETE operation proceeds but ** the truncate optimization is disabled and all rows are deleted ** individually. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
508 509 510 511 512 513 514 | nPk = pPk->nKeyCol; iPk = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nPk; iEphCur = pParse->nTab++; addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk); } | | | | | | 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | nPk = pPk->nKeyCol; iPk = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nPk; iEphCur = pParse->nTab++; addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk); } /* Construct a query to find the rowid or primary key for every row ** to be deleted, based on the WHERE clause. Set variable eOnePass ** to indicate the strategy used to implement this delete: ** ** ONEPASS_OFF: Two-pass approach - use a FIFO for rowids/PK values. ** ONEPASS_SINGLE: One-pass approach - at most one row deleted. ** ONEPASS_MULTI: One-pass approach - any number of rows may be deleted. */ pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, 0, 0,0,wcf,iTabCur+1); if( pWInfo==0 ) goto delete_from_cleanup; eOnePass = sqlite3WhereOkOnePass(pWInfo, aiCurOnePass); assert( IsVirtual(pTab)==0 || eOnePass!=ONEPASS_MULTI ); assert( IsVirtual(pTab) || bComplex || eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ); if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_SINGLE ) sqlite3MultiWrite(pParse); if( sqlite3WhereUsesDeferredSeek(pWInfo) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_FinishSeek, iTabCur); } /* Keep track of the number of rows to be deleted */ if( memCnt ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, memCnt, 1); } /* Extract the rowid or primary key for the current row */ if( pPk ){ for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){ assert( pPk->aiColumn[i]>=0 ); sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTabCur, pPk->aiColumn[i], iPk+i); } iKey = iPk; }else{ iKey = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTabCur, -1, iKey); } if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){ /* For ONEPASS, no need to store the rowid/primary-key. There is only ** one, so just keep it in its register(s) and fall through to the ** delete code. */ nKey = nPk; /* OP_Found will use an unpacked key */ aToOpen = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, nIdx+2); if( aToOpen==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
576 577 578 579 580 581 582 | }else{ /* Add the rowid of the row to be deleted to the RowSet */ nKey = 1; /* OP_DeferredSeek always uses a single rowid */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowSetAdd, iRowSet, iKey); } sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); } | | | | | | 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 | }else{ /* Add the rowid of the row to be deleted to the RowSet */ nKey = 1; /* OP_DeferredSeek always uses a single rowid */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowSetAdd, iRowSet, iKey); } sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); } /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are ** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF ** triggers. */ if( !isView ){ int iAddrOnce = 0; if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ){ iAddrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); } testcase( IsVirtual(pTab) ); sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenWrite, OPFLAG_FORDELETE, iTabCur, aToOpen, &iDataCur, &iIdxCur); assert( pPk || IsVirtual(pTab) || iDataCur==iTabCur ); assert( pPk || IsVirtual(pTab) || iIdxCur==iDataCur+1 ); if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ){ sqlite3VdbeJumpHereOrPopInst(v, iAddrOnce); } } /* Set up a loop over the rowids/primary-keys that were found in the ** where-clause loop above. */ if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){ assert( nKey==nPk ); /* OP_Found will use an unpacked key */ if( !IsVirtual(pTab) && aToOpen[iDataCur-iTabCur] ){ assert( pPk!=0 || IsView(pTab) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
619 620 621 622 623 624 625 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowData, iEphCur, iKey); } assert( nKey==0 ); /* OP_Found will use a composite key */ }else{ addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey); VdbeCoverage(v); assert( nKey==1 ); | | | | 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowData, iEphCur, iKey); } assert( nKey==0 ); /* OP_Found will use a composite key */ }else{ addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey); VdbeCoverage(v); assert( nKey==1 ); } /* Delete the row */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ const char *pVTab = (const char *)sqlite3GetVTable(db, pTab); sqlite3VtabMakeWritable(pParse, pTab); assert( eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF || eOnePass==ONEPASS_SINGLE ); sqlite3MayAbort(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
643 644 645 646 647 648 649 | }else #endif { int count = (pParse->nested==0); /* True to count changes */ sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur, iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, eOnePass, aiCurOnePass[1]); } | | | | | | 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 | }else #endif { int count = (pParse->nested==0); /* True to count changes */ sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur, iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, eOnePass, aiCurOnePass[1]); } /* End of the loop over all rowids/primary-keys. */ if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrBypass); sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); }else if( pPk ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iEphCur, addrLoop+1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop); }else{ sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrLoop); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop); } } /* End non-truncate path */ /* Update the sqlite_sequence table by storing the content of the ** maximum rowid counter values recorded while inserting into ** autoincrement tables. */ if( pParse->nested==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab==0 ){ sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse); } /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not ** invoke the callback function. */ if( memCnt ){ sqlite3CodeChangeCount(v, memCnt, "rows deleted"); } delete_from_cleanup: sqlite3AuthContextPop(&sContext); sqlite3SrcListDelete(db, pTabList); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWhere); #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT) sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pOrderBy); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pLimit); #endif if( aToOpen ) sqlite3DbNNFreeNN(db, aToOpen); return; } /* Make sure "isView" and other macros defined above are undefined. Otherwise |
︙ | ︙ | |||
722 723 724 725 726 727 728 | ** Parameter eMode may be passed either ONEPASS_OFF (0), ONEPASS_SINGLE, or ** ONEPASS_MULTI. If eMode is not ONEPASS_OFF, then the cursor ** iDataCur already points to the row to delete. If eMode is ONEPASS_OFF ** then this function must seek iDataCur to the entry identified by iPk ** and nPk before reading from it. ** ** If eMode is ONEPASS_MULTI, then this call is being made as part | | | 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 | ** Parameter eMode may be passed either ONEPASS_OFF (0), ONEPASS_SINGLE, or ** ONEPASS_MULTI. If eMode is not ONEPASS_OFF, then the cursor ** iDataCur already points to the row to delete. If eMode is ONEPASS_OFF ** then this function must seek iDataCur to the entry identified by iPk ** and nPk before reading from it. ** ** If eMode is ONEPASS_MULTI, then this call is being made as part ** of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if ** iIdxNoSeek is a valid cursor number (>=0) and is not the same as ** iDataCur, then its position should be preserved following the delete ** operation. Or, if iIdxNoSeek is not a valid cursor number, the ** position of iDataCur should be preserved instead. ** ** iIdxNoSeek: ** If iIdxNoSeek is a valid cursor number (>=0) not equal to iDataCur, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
758 759 760 761 762 763 764 | u8 opSeek; /* Seek opcode */ /* Vdbe is guaranteed to have been allocated by this stage. */ assert( v ); VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)", iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk)); | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 | u8 opSeek; /* Seek opcode */ /* Vdbe is guaranteed to have been allocated by this stage. */ assert( v ); VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)", iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk)); /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists ** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do ** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers. */ iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); opSeek = HasRowid(pTab) ? OP_NotExists : OP_NotFound; if( eMode==ONEPASS_OFF ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opSeek, iDataCur, iLabel, iPk, nPk); VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists); VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound); } /* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to ** use for the old.* references in the triggers. */ if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){ u32 mask; /* Mask of OLD.* columns in use */ int iCol; /* Iterator used while populating OLD.* */ int addrStart; /* Start of BEFORE trigger programs */ /* TODO: Could use temporary registers here. Also could attempt to ** avoid copying the contents of the rowid register. */ mask = sqlite3TriggerColmask( pParse, pTrigger, 0, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE|TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, onconf ); mask |= sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab); iOld = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol); /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be ** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iPk, iOld); for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){ testcase( mask!=0xffffffff && iCol==31 ); testcase( mask!=0xffffffff && iCol==32 ); if( mask==0xffffffff || (iCol<=31 && (mask & MASKBIT32(iCol))!=0) ){ int kk = sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, iCol); sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iDataCur, iCol, iOld+kk+1); } } /* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */ addrStart = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel ); /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the ** row to be deleted again. It may be that the BEFORE triggers moved ** the cursor or already deleted the row that the cursor was ** pointing to. ** ** Also disable the iIdxNoSeek optimization since the BEFORE trigger ** may have moved that cursor. */ if( addrStart<sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opSeek, iDataCur, iLabel, iPk, nPk); VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists); VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound); testcase( iIdxNoSeek>=0 ); iIdxNoSeek = -1; } /* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables) ** are not violated by deleting this row. */ sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0, 0, 0); } /* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really ** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers). ** ** If variable 'count' is non-zero, then this OP_Delete instruction should ** invoke the update-hook. The pre-update-hook, on the other hand should ** be invoked unless table pTab is a system table. The difference is that ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the ** pre-update-hook is. */ if( !IsView(pTab) ){ u8 p5 = 0; sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur,0,iIdxNoSeek); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iDataCur, (count?OPFLAG_NCHANGE:0)); if( pParse->nested==0 || 0==sqlite3_stricmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_stat1") ){ sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, (char*)pTab, P4_TABLE); } if( eMode!=ONEPASS_OFF ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_AUXDELETE); } if( iIdxNoSeek>=0 && iIdxNoSeek!=iDataCur ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Delete, iIdxNoSeek); } if( eMode==ONEPASS_MULTI ) p5 |= OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION; sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, p5); } /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key ** to the row just deleted. */ sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld, 0, 0); /* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel ); /* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a ** RAISE(IGNORE) exception. */ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel); VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenRowDel()")); } /* ** This routine generates VDBE code that causes the deletion of all |
︙ | ︙ | |||
948 949 950 951 952 953 954 | ** The pPrior and regPrior parameters are used to implement a cache to ** avoid unnecessary register loads. If pPrior is not NULL, then it is ** a pointer to a different index for which an index key has just been ** computed into register regPrior. If the current pIdx index is generating ** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share ** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already ** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped. | | | 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 | ** The pPrior and regPrior parameters are used to implement a cache to ** avoid unnecessary register loads. If pPrior is not NULL, then it is ** a pointer to a different index for which an index key has just been ** computed into register regPrior. If the current pIdx index is generating ** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share ** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already ** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped. ** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK ** on a table with multiple indices, and especially with the ROWID or ** PRIMARY KEY columns of the index. */ int sqlite3GenerateIndexKey( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ Index *pIdx, /* The index for which to generate a key */ int iDataCur, /* Cursor number from which to take column data */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
971 972 973 974 975 976 977 | int regBase; int nCol; if( piPartIdxLabel ){ if( pIdx->pPartIdxWhere ){ *piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1; | | | 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 | int regBase; int nCol; if( piPartIdxLabel ){ if( pIdx->pPartIdxWhere ){ *piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1; sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); pParse->iSelfTab = 0; pPrior = 0; /* Ticket a9efb42811fa41ee 2019-11-02; ** pPartIdxWhere may have corrupted regPrior registers */ }else{ *piPartIdxLabel = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/expr.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | return pTab->aCol[iCol].affinity; } /* ** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any. ** ** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias, | | | 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | return pTab->aCol[iCol].affinity; } /* ** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any. ** ** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias, ** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the ** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned, ** indicating no affinity for the expression. ** ** i.e. the WHERE clause expressions in the following statements all ** have an affinity: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(a); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | /* ** Skip over any TK_COLLATE operators. */ Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollate(Expr *pExpr){ while( pExpr && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Skip) ){ assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE ); pExpr = pExpr->pLeft; | | | | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | /* ** Skip over any TK_COLLATE operators. */ Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollate(Expr *pExpr){ while( pExpr && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Skip) ){ assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE ); pExpr = pExpr->pLeft; } return pExpr; } /* ** Skip over any TK_COLLATE operators and/or any unlikely() ** or likelihood() or likely() functions at the root of an ** expression. */ Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollateAndLikely(Expr *pExpr){ while( pExpr && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Skip|EP_Unlikely) ){ if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Unlikely) ){ assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); assert( pExpr->x.pList->nExpr>0 ); assert( pExpr->op==TK_FUNCTION ); pExpr = pExpr->x.pList->a[0].pExpr; }else{ assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE ); pExpr = pExpr->pLeft; } } return pExpr; } /* ** Return the collation sequence for the expression pExpr. If ** there is no defined collating sequence, return NULL. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
243 244 245 246 247 248 249 | CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; CollSeq *pColl = 0; const Expr *p = pExpr; while( p ){ int op = p->op; if( op==TK_REGISTER ) op = p->op2; | | | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 | CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; CollSeq *pColl = 0; const Expr *p = pExpr; while( p ){ int op = p->op; if( op==TK_REGISTER ) op = p->op2; if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && p->y.pTab!=0) || op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_TRIGGER ){ int j; assert( ExprUseYTab(p) ); assert( p->y.pTab!=0 ); if( (j = p->iColumn)>=0 ){ const char *zColl = sqlite3ColumnColl(&p->y.pTab->aCol[j]); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
291 292 293 294 295 296 297 | } p = pNext; } }else{ break; } } | | | | 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 | } p = pNext; } }else{ break; } } if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){ pColl = 0; } return pColl; } /* ** Return the collation sequence for the expression pExpr. If ** there is no defined collating sequence, return a pointer to the ** default collation sequence. ** ** See also: sqlite3ExprCollSeq() ** ** The sqlite3ExprCollSeq() routine works the same except that it ** returns NULL if there is no defined collation. */ CollSeq *sqlite3ExprNNCollSeq(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
411 412 413 414 415 416 417 | ** is used, or the default (BINARY) if neither expression has a collating ** type. ** ** Argument pRight (but not pLeft) may be a null pointer. In this case, ** it is not considered. */ CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq( | | | | | 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 | ** is used, or the default (BINARY) if neither expression has a collating ** type. ** ** Argument pRight (but not pLeft) may be a null pointer. In this case, ** it is not considered. */ CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq( Parse *pParse, const Expr *pLeft, const Expr *pRight ){ CollSeq *pColl; assert( pLeft ); if( pLeft->flags & EP_Collate ){ pColl = sqlite3ExprCollSeq(pParse, pLeft); }else if( pRight && (pRight->flags & EP_Collate)!=0 ){ pColl = sqlite3ExprCollSeq(pParse, pRight); }else{ pColl = sqlite3ExprCollSeq(pParse, pLeft); if( !pColl ){ pColl = sqlite3ExprCollSeq(pParse, pRight); } } return pColl; } /* Expression p is a comparison operator. Return a collation sequence ** appropriate for the comparison operator. ** ** This is normally just a wrapper around sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(). ** However, if the OP_Commuted flag is set, then the order of the operands ** is reversed in the sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq() call so that the ** correct collating sequence is found. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
490 491 492 493 494 495 496 | ** considered a vector if it has two or more result columns. */ int sqlite3ExprIsVector(const Expr *pExpr){ return sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr)>1; } /* | | | 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 | ** considered a vector if it has two or more result columns. */ int sqlite3ExprIsVector(const Expr *pExpr){ return sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr)>1; } /* ** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR ** return the number of expressions in the vector. Or, if the expression ** is a sub-select, return the number of columns in the sub-select. For ** any other type of expression, return 1. */ int sqlite3ExprVectorSize(const Expr *pExpr){ u8 op = pExpr->op; if( op==TK_REGISTER ) op = pExpr->op2; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
544 545 546 547 548 549 550 | } /* ** Compute and return a new Expr object which when passed to ** sqlite3ExprCode() will generate all necessary code to compute ** the iField-th column of the vector expression pVector. ** | | | 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | } /* ** Compute and return a new Expr object which when passed to ** sqlite3ExprCode() will generate all necessary code to compute ** the iField-th column of the vector expression pVector. ** ** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0). ** In that case, this routine works like sqlite3ExprDup(). ** ** The caller owns the returned Expr object and is responsible for ** ensuring that the returned value eventually gets freed. ** ** The caller retains ownership of pVector. If pVector is a TK_SELECT, ** then the returned object will reference pVector and so pVector must remain |
︙ | ︙ | |||
610 611 612 613 614 615 616 | pRet = sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, pVector, 0); } return pRet; } /* ** If expression pExpr is of type TK_SELECT, generate code to evaluate | | | 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 | pRet = sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, pVector, 0); } return pRet; } /* ** If expression pExpr is of type TK_SELECT, generate code to evaluate ** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the ** sub-select returns more than one column, the first in an array ** of registers in which the result is stored). ** ** If pExpr is not a TK_SELECT expression, return 0. */ static int exprCodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ int reg = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
632 633 634 635 636 637 638 | /* ** Argument pVector points to a vector expression - either a TK_VECTOR ** or TK_SELECT that returns more than one column. This function returns ** the register number of a register that contains the value of ** element iField of the vector. ** | | | | 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 | /* ** Argument pVector points to a vector expression - either a TK_VECTOR ** or TK_SELECT that returns more than one column. This function returns ** the register number of a register that contains the value of ** element iField of the vector. ** ** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have ** already been generated using the exprCodeSubselect() routine. In this ** case parameter regSelect should be the first in an array of registers ** containing the results of the sub-select. ** ** If pVector is of type TK_VECTOR, then code for the requested field ** is generated. In this case (*pRegFree) may be set to the number of ** a temporary register to be freed by the caller before returning. ** ** Before returning, output parameter (*ppExpr) is set to point to the ** Expr object corresponding to element iElem of the vector. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
707 708 709 710 711 712 713 | assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(pExpr,EP_Immutable) ); if( pParse->nErr ) return; if( nLeft!=sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pRight) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused"); return; } | | | | | | | 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 | assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(pExpr,EP_Immutable) ); if( pParse->nErr ) return; if( nLeft!=sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pRight) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused"); return; } assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE ); assert( pExpr->op==op || (pExpr->op==TK_IS && op==TK_EQ) || (pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT && op==TK_NE) ); assert( p5==0 || pExpr->op!=op ); assert( p5==SQLITE_NULLEQ || pExpr->op==op ); if( op==TK_LE ) opx = TK_LT; if( op==TK_GE ) opx = TK_GT; if( op==TK_NE ) opx = TK_EQ; regLeft = exprCodeSubselect(pParse, pLeft); regRight = exprCodeSubselect(pParse, pRight); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, dest); for(i=0; 1 /*Loop exits by "break"*/; i++){ int regFree1 = 0, regFree2 = 0; Expr *pL = 0, *pR = 0; int r1, r2; assert( i>=0 && i<nLeft ); if( addrCmp ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrCmp); r1 = exprVectorRegister(pParse, pLeft, i, regLeft, &pL, ®Free1); r2 = exprVectorRegister(pParse, pRight, i, regRight, &pR, ®Free2); addrCmp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); codeCompare(pParse, pL, pR, opx, r1, r2, addrDone, p5, isCommuted); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
781 782 783 784 785 786 787 | ** expression depth allowed. If it is not, leave an error message in ** pParse. */ int sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(Parse *pParse, int nHeight){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH]; if( nHeight>mxHeight ){ | | | 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 | ** expression depth allowed. If it is not, leave an error message in ** pParse. */ int sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(Parse *pParse, int nHeight){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH]; if( nHeight>mxHeight ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight ); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
826 827 828 829 830 831 832 | heightOfExprList(p->pEList, pnHeight); heightOfExprList(p->pGroupBy, pnHeight); heightOfExprList(p->pOrderBy, pnHeight); } } /* | | | | | 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 | heightOfExprList(p->pEList, pnHeight); heightOfExprList(p->pGroupBy, pnHeight); heightOfExprList(p->pOrderBy, pnHeight); } } /* ** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an ** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or ** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression ** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other ** referenced Expr plus one. ** ** Also propagate EP_Propagate flags up from Expr.x.pList to Expr.flags, ** if appropriate. */ static void exprSetHeight(Expr *p){ int nHeight = p->pLeft ? p->pLeft->nHeight : 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
855 856 857 858 859 860 861 | /* ** Set the Expr.nHeight variable using the exprSetHeight() function. If ** the height is greater than the maximum allowed expression depth, ** leave an error in pParse. ** ** Also propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into | | | | 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 | /* ** Set the Expr.nHeight variable using the exprSetHeight() function. If ** the height is greater than the maximum allowed expression depth, ** leave an error in pParse. ** ** Also propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into ** Expr.flags. */ void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){ if( pParse->nErr ) return; exprSetHeight(p); sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(pParse, p->nHeight); } /* ** Return the maximum height of any expression tree referenced ** by the select statement passed as an argument. */ int sqlite3SelectExprHeight(const Select *p){ int nHeight = 0; heightOfSelect(p, &nHeight); return nHeight; } #else /* ABOVE: Height enforcement enabled. BELOW: Height enforcement off */ /* ** Propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into ** Expr.flags. */ void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){ if( pParse->nErr ) return; if( p && ExprUseXList(p) && p->x.pList ){ p->flags |= EP_Propagate & sqlite3ExprListFlags(p->x.pList); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
945 946 947 948 949 950 951 | if( dequote && sqlite3Isquote(pNew->u.zToken[0]) ){ sqlite3DequoteExpr(pNew); } } } #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0 pNew->nHeight = 1; | | | 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 | if( dequote && sqlite3Isquote(pNew->u.zToken[0]) ){ sqlite3DequoteExpr(pNew); } } } #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0 pNew->nHeight = 1; #endif } return pNew; } /* ** Allocate a new expression node from a zero-terminated token that has ** already been dequoted. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 | sqlite3SelectDelete(pParse->db, pSelect); } } /* ** Expression list pEList is a list of vector values. This function ** converts the contents of pEList to a VALUES(...) Select statement | | | 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 | sqlite3SelectDelete(pParse->db, pSelect); } } /* ** Expression list pEList is a list of vector values. This function ** converts the contents of pEList to a VALUES(...) Select statement ** returning 1 row for each element of the list. For example, the ** expression list: ** ** ( (1,2), (3,4) (5,6) ) ** ** is translated to the equivalent of: ** ** VALUES(1,2), (3,4), (5,6) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 | if( pExpr->op==TK_VECTOR ){ assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); nExprElem = pExpr->x.pList->nExpr; }else{ nExprElem = 1; } if( nExprElem!=nElem ){ | | | 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 | if( pExpr->op==TK_VECTOR ){ assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); nExprElem = pExpr->x.pList->nExpr; }else{ nExprElem = 1; } if( nExprElem!=nElem ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "IN(...) element has %d term%s - expected %d", nExprElem, nExprElem>1?"s":"", nElem ); break; } assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pExpr->x.pList, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, SF_Values,0); pExpr->x.pList = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 | sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( pLeft==0 ){ return pRight; }else if( pRight==0 ){ return pLeft; }else{ u32 f = pLeft->flags | pRight->flags; | | | 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 | sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( pLeft==0 ){ return pRight; }else if( pRight==0 ){ return pLeft; }else{ u32 f = pLeft->flags | pRight->flags; if( (f&(EP_OuterON|EP_InnerON|EP_IsFalse))==EP_IsFalse && !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ sqlite3ExprDeferredDelete(pParse, pLeft); sqlite3ExprDeferredDelete(pParse, pRight); return sqlite3Expr(db, TK_INTEGER, "0"); }else{ return sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_AND, pLeft, pRight); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 | pNew = sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_FUNCTION, pToken, 1); if( pNew==0 ){ sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList); /* Avoid memory leak when malloc fails */ return 0; } assert( !ExprHasProperty(pNew, EP_InnerON|EP_OuterON) ); pNew->w.iOfst = (int)(pToken->z - pParse->zTail); | | | 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 | pNew = sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_FUNCTION, pToken, 1); if( pNew==0 ){ sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList); /* Avoid memory leak when malloc fails */ return 0; } assert( !ExprHasProperty(pNew, EP_InnerON|EP_OuterON) ); pNew->w.iOfst = (int)(pToken->z - pParse->zTail); if( pList && pList->nExpr > pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_FUNCTION_ARG] && !pParse->nested ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "too many arguments on function %T", pToken); } pNew->x.pList = pList; ExprSetProperty(pNew, EP_HasFunc); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 | if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromDDL) ){ if( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_DIRECT)!=0 || (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_TrustedSchema)==0 ){ /* Functions prohibited in triggers and views if: ** (1) tagged with SQLITE_DIRECTONLY ** (2) not tagged with SQLITE_INNOCUOUS (which means it | | | | 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 | if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromDDL) ){ if( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_DIRECT)!=0 || (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_TrustedSchema)==0 ){ /* Functions prohibited in triggers and views if: ** (1) tagged with SQLITE_DIRECTONLY ** (2) not tagged with SQLITE_INNOCUOUS (which means it ** is tagged with SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE) and ** SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA is off (meaning ** that the schema is possibly tainted). */ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsafe use of %#T()", pExpr); } } } /* ** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard ** in the original SQL statement. ** ** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential ** variable number. ** ** Wildcards of the form "?nnn" are assigned the number "nnn". We make ** sure "nnn" is not too big to avoid a denial of service attack when ** the SQL statement comes from an external source. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 | sqlite3IdListDelete(db, p->pUsing); } } /* ** Arrange to cause pExpr to be deleted when the pParse is deleted. ** This is similar to sqlite3ExprDelete() except that the delete is | | | 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 | sqlite3IdListDelete(db, p->pUsing); } } /* ** Arrange to cause pExpr to be deleted when the pParse is deleted. ** This is similar to sqlite3ExprDelete() except that the delete is ** deferred until the pParse is deleted. ** ** The pExpr might be deleted immediately on an OOM error. ** ** The deferred delete is (currently) implemented by adding the ** pExpr to the pParse->pConstExpr list with a register number of 0. */ void sqlite3ExprDeferredDelete(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 | sqlite3RenameExprUnmap(pParse, p); } sqlite3ExprDeleteNN(pParse->db, p); } } /* | | | | | | 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 | sqlite3RenameExprUnmap(pParse, p); } sqlite3ExprDeleteNN(pParse->db, p); } } /* ** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure ** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE, ** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE. */ static int exprStructSize(const Expr *p){ if( ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly) ) return EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE; if( ExprHasProperty(p, EP_Reduced) ) return EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE; return EXPR_FULLSIZE; } /* ** The dupedExpr*Size() routines each return the number of bytes required ** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree. They differ in ** how much of the tree is measured. ** ** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure ** dupedExprNodeSize() Size of Expr + space for token ** dupedExprSize() Expr + token + subtree components ** *************************************************************************** ** ** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together: ** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and ** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be. ** The return values is always one of: ** ** EXPR_FULLSIZE ** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE | EP_Reduced ** EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE | EP_TokenOnly ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 | ** to enforce this constraint. */ static int dupedExprStructSize(const Expr *p, int flags){ int nSize; assert( flags==EXPRDUP_REDUCE || flags==0 ); /* Only one flag value allowed */ assert( EXPR_FULLSIZE<=0xfff ); assert( (0xfff & (EP_Reduced|EP_TokenOnly))==0 ); | | | | | | | | | | | 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 | ** to enforce this constraint. */ static int dupedExprStructSize(const Expr *p, int flags){ int nSize; assert( flags==EXPRDUP_REDUCE || flags==0 ); /* Only one flag value allowed */ assert( EXPR_FULLSIZE<=0xfff ); assert( (0xfff & (EP_Reduced|EP_TokenOnly))==0 ); if( 0==flags || p->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC || ExprHasProperty(p, EP_WinFunc) #endif ){ nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE; }else{ assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) ); assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_OuterON) ); assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(p, EP_NoReduce) ); if( p->pLeft || p->x.pList ){ nSize = EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE | EP_Reduced; }else{ assert( p->pRight==0 ); nSize = EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE | EP_TokenOnly; } } return nSize; } /* ** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy ** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that ** string is defined.) */ static int dupedExprNodeSize(const Expr *p, int flags){ int nByte = dupedExprStructSize(p, flags) & 0xfff; if( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_IntValue) && p->u.zToken ){ nByte += sqlite3Strlen30NN(p->u.zToken)+1; } return ROUND8(nByte); } /* ** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the ** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a ** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags. ** ** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct ** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any. ** ** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes ** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft ** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or ** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables). */ static int dupedExprSize(const Expr *p, int flags){ int nByte = 0; if( p ){ nByte = dupedExprNodeSize(p, flags); if( flags&EXPRDUP_REDUCE ){ nByte += dupedExprSize(p->pLeft, flags) + dupedExprSize(p->pRight, flags); } } return nByte; } /* ** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer ** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough ** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken ** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions, ** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte past the ** portion of the buffer copied into by this function. */ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, const Expr *p, int dupFlags, u8 **pzBuffer){ Expr *pNew; /* Value to return */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 | } if( dupFlags ){ assert( ExprHasProperty(p, EP_Reduced)==0 ); memcpy(zAlloc, p, nNewSize); }else{ u32 nSize = (u32)exprStructSize(p); memcpy(zAlloc, p, nSize); | | | 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 | } if( dupFlags ){ assert( ExprHasProperty(p, EP_Reduced)==0 ); memcpy(zAlloc, p, nNewSize); }else{ u32 nSize = (u32)exprStructSize(p); memcpy(zAlloc, p, nSize); if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){ memset(&zAlloc[nSize], 0, EXPR_FULLSIZE-nSize); } } /* Set the EP_Reduced, EP_TokenOnly, and EP_Static flags appropriately. */ pNew->flags &= ~(EP_Reduced|EP_TokenOnly|EP_Static); pNew->flags |= nStructSize & (EP_Reduced|EP_TokenOnly); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 | } } } return pNew; } /* | | | 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 | } } } return pNew; } /* ** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second ** argument. If an OOM condition is encountered, NULL is returned ** and the db->mallocFailed flag set. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE With *sqlite3WithDup(sqlite3 *db, With *p){ With *pRet = 0; if( p ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 | /* ** The following group of routines make deep copies of expressions, ** expression lists, ID lists, and select statements. The copies can ** be deleted (by being passed to their respective ...Delete() routines) ** without effecting the originals. ** ** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(), | | | 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 | /* ** The following group of routines make deep copies of expressions, ** expression lists, ID lists, and select statements. The copies can ** be deleted (by being passed to their respective ...Delete() routines) ** without effecting the originals. ** ** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(), ** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded ** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines. ** ** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated. ** ** The flags parameter contains a combination of the EXPRDUP_XXX flags. ** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the structure returned is a ** truncated version of the usual Expr structure that will be stored as |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 | pNew->nAlloc = p->nAlloc; pItem = pNew->a; pOldItem = p->a; for(i=0; i<p->nExpr; i++, pItem++, pOldItem++){ Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr; Expr *pNewExpr; pItem->pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pOldExpr, flags); | | | | 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 | pNew->nAlloc = p->nAlloc; pItem = pNew->a; pOldItem = p->a; for(i=0; i<p->nExpr; i++, pItem++, pOldItem++){ Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr; Expr *pNewExpr; pItem->pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pOldExpr, flags); if( pOldExpr && pOldExpr->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0 ){ if( pNewExpr->pRight ){ pPriorSelectColOld = pOldExpr->pRight; pPriorSelectColNew = pNewExpr->pRight; pNewExpr->pLeft = pNewExpr->pRight; }else{ if( pOldExpr->pLeft!=pPriorSelectColOld ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 | pItem->u = pOldItem->u; } return pNew; } /* ** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from | | | 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 | pItem->u = pOldItem->u; } return pNew; } /* ** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from ** the build, then none of the following routines, except for ** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes ** called with a NULL argument. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) \ || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) SrcList *sqlite3SrcListDup(sqlite3 *db, const SrcList *p, int flags){ SrcList *pNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 | pNewItem->u1.zIndexedBy = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pOldItem->u1.zIndexedBy); } pNewItem->u2 = pOldItem->u2; if( pNewItem->fg.isCte ){ pNewItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse++; } if( pNewItem->fg.isTabFunc ){ | | | 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 | pNewItem->u1.zIndexedBy = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pOldItem->u1.zIndexedBy); } pNewItem->u2 = pOldItem->u2; if( pNewItem->fg.isCte ){ pNewItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse++; } if( pNewItem->fg.isTabFunc ){ pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pOldItem->u1.pFuncArg, flags); } pTab = pNewItem->pTab = pOldItem->pTab; if( pTab ){ pTab->nTabRef++; } pNewItem->pSelect = sqlite3SelectDup(db, pOldItem->pSelect, flags); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 | sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. Used for memory allocation */ ExprList *pList, /* List to which to append. Might be NULL */ Expr *pExpr /* Expression to be appended. Might be NULL */ ){ struct ExprList_item *pItem; ExprList *pNew; pList->nAlloc *= 2; | | | 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 | sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. Used for memory allocation */ ExprList *pList, /* List to which to append. Might be NULL */ Expr *pExpr /* Expression to be appended. Might be NULL */ ){ struct ExprList_item *pItem; ExprList *pNew; pList->nAlloc *= 2; pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList, sizeof(*pList)+(pList->nAlloc-1)*sizeof(pList->a[0])); if( pNew==0 ){ sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr); return 0; }else{ pList = pNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 | int i; int iFirst = pList ? pList->nExpr : 0; /* pColumns can only be NULL due to an OOM but an OOM will cause an ** exit prior to this routine being invoked */ if( NEVER(pColumns==0) ) goto vector_append_error; if( pExpr==0 ) goto vector_append_error; | | | | 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 | int i; int iFirst = pList ? pList->nExpr : 0; /* pColumns can only be NULL due to an OOM but an OOM will cause an ** exit prior to this routine being invoked */ if( NEVER(pColumns==0) ) goto vector_append_error; if( pExpr==0 ) goto vector_append_error; /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that ** the size of the RHS and LHS match. But if the RHS is a SELECT, ** wildcards ("*") in the result set of the SELECT must be expanded before ** we can do the size check, so defer the size check until code generation. */ if( pExpr->op!=TK_SELECT && pColumns->nId!=(n=sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr)) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d columns assigned %d values", pColumns->nId, n); goto vector_append_error; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 | } } if( !db->mallocFailed && pExpr->op==TK_SELECT && ALWAYS(pList!=0) ){ Expr *pFirst = pList->a[iFirst].pExpr; assert( pFirst!=0 ); assert( pFirst->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN ); | | | 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 | } } if( !db->mallocFailed && pExpr->op==TK_SELECT && ALWAYS(pList!=0) ){ Expr *pFirst = pList->a[iFirst].pExpr; assert( pFirst!=0 ); assert( pFirst->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN ); /* Store the SELECT statement in pRight so it will be deleted when ** sqlite3ExprListDelete() is called */ pFirst->pRight = pExpr; pExpr = 0; /* Remember the size of the LHS in iTable so that we can check that ** the RHS and LHS sizes match during code generation. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 | */ void sqlite3ExprListSetSortOrder(ExprList *p, int iSortOrder, int eNulls){ struct ExprList_item *pItem; if( p==0 ) return; assert( p->nExpr>0 ); assert( SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED<0 && SQLITE_SO_ASC==0 && SQLITE_SO_DESC>0 ); | | | | | | | | 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 | */ void sqlite3ExprListSetSortOrder(ExprList *p, int iSortOrder, int eNulls){ struct ExprList_item *pItem; if( p==0 ) return; assert( p->nExpr>0 ); assert( SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED<0 && SQLITE_SO_ASC==0 && SQLITE_SO_DESC>0 ); assert( iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_ASC || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_DESC ); assert( eNulls==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_ASC || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_DESC ); pItem = &p->a[p->nExpr-1]; assert( pItem->fg.bNulls==0 ); if( iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED ){ iSortOrder = SQLITE_SO_ASC; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 | ** is found to not be a constant. ** ** The sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrFunction() is used for evaluating DEFAULT ** expressions in a CREATE TABLE statement. The Walker.eCode value is 5 ** when parsing an existing schema out of the sqlite_schema table and 4 ** when processing a new CREATE TABLE statement. A bound parameter raises ** an error for new statements, but is silently converted | | | 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 | ** is found to not be a constant. ** ** The sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrFunction() is used for evaluating DEFAULT ** expressions in a CREATE TABLE statement. The Walker.eCode value is 5 ** when parsing an existing schema out of the sqlite_schema table and 4 ** when processing a new CREATE TABLE statement. A bound parameter raises ** an error for new statements, but is silently converted ** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_schema tables that ** contain a bound parameter because they were generated by older versions ** of SQLite to be parsed by newer versions of SQLite without raising a ** malformed schema error. */ static int exprNodeIsConstant(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ /* If pWalker->eCode is 2 then any term of the expression that comes from |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 | } return exprNodeIsConstant(pWalker, pExpr); } /* ** Walk the expression tree passed as the first argument. Return non-zero | | | 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 | } return exprNodeIsConstant(pWalker, pExpr); } /* ** Walk the expression tree passed as the first argument. Return non-zero ** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms ** in pGroupBy that sort with the BINARY collation sequence. ** ** This routine is used to determine if a term of the HAVING clause can ** be promoted into the WHERE clause. In order for such a promotion to work, ** the value of the HAVING clause term must be the same for all members of ** a "group". The requirement that the GROUP BY term must be BINARY ** assumes that no other collating sequence will have a finer-grained |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 | w.pParse = pParse; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, p); return w.eCode; } /* ** Walk an expression tree for the DEFAULT field of a column definition | | | 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 | w.pParse = pParse; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, p); return w.eCode; } /* ** Walk an expression tree for the DEFAULT field of a column definition ** in a CREATE TABLE statement. Return non-zero if the expression is ** acceptable for use as a DEFAULT. That is to say, return non-zero if ** the expression is constant or a function call with constant arguments. ** Return and 0 if there are any variables. ** ** isInit is true when parsing from sqlite_schema. isInit is false when ** processing a new CREATE TABLE statement. When isInit is true, parameters ** (such as ? or $abc) in the expression are converted into NULL. When |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 | return rc; } /* ** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL. ** ** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex | | | 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 | return rc; } /* ** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL. ** ** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex ** to tell return TRUE. ** ** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes ** when we know that a value cannot be NULL. Hence, a false positive ** (returning TRUE when in fact the expression can never be NULL) might ** be a small performance hit but is otherwise harmless. On the other ** hand, a false negative (returning FALSE when the result could be NULL) ** will likely result in an incorrect answer. So when in doubt, return |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 | if( sqlite3StrICmp(z, "_ROWID_")==0 ) return 1; if( sqlite3StrICmp(z, "ROWID")==0 ) return 1; if( sqlite3StrICmp(z, "OID")==0 ) return 1; return 0; } /* | | | 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 | if( sqlite3StrICmp(z, "_ROWID_")==0 ) return 1; if( sqlite3StrICmp(z, "ROWID")==0 ) return 1; if( sqlite3StrICmp(z, "OID")==0 ) return 1; return 0; } /* ** pX is the RHS of an IN operator. If pX is a SELECT statement ** that can be simplified to a direct table access, then return ** a pointer to the SELECT statement. If pX is not a SELECT statement, ** or if the SELECT statement needs to be materialized into a transient ** table, then return NULL. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY static Select *isCandidateForInOpt(const Expr *pX){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 | sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* | | | 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 | sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* ** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the ** right-hand side. Return TRUE if that list is constant. */ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){ Expr *pLHS; int res; assert( !ExprHasProperty(pIn, EP_xIsSelect) ); pLHS = pIn->pLeft; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 | ** ** The returned value of this function indicates the b-tree type, as follows: ** ** IN_INDEX_ROWID - The cursor was opened on a database table. ** IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC - The cursor was opened on an ascending index. ** IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC - The cursor was opened on a descending index. ** IN_INDEX_EPH - The cursor was opened on a specially created and | | | | | | | | | 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 | ** ** The returned value of this function indicates the b-tree type, as follows: ** ** IN_INDEX_ROWID - The cursor was opened on a database table. ** IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC - The cursor was opened on an ascending index. ** IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC - The cursor was opened on a descending index. ** IN_INDEX_EPH - The cursor was opened on a specially created and ** populated ephemeral table. ** IN_INDEX_NOOP - No cursor was allocated. The IN operator must be ** implemented as a sequence of comparisons. ** ** An existing b-tree might be used if the RHS expression pX is a simple ** subquery such as: ** ** SELECT <column1>, <column2>... FROM <table> ** ** If the RHS of the IN operator is a list or a more complex subquery, then ** an ephemeral table might need to be generated from the RHS and then ** pX->iTable made to point to the ephemeral table instead of an ** existing table. In this case, the creation and initialization of the ** ephemeral table might be put inside of a subroutine, the EP_Subrtn flag ** will be set on pX and the pX->y.sub fields will be set to show where ** the subroutine is coded. ** ** The inFlags parameter must contain, at a minimum, one of the bits ** IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP or IN_INDEX_LOOP but not both. If inFlags contains ** IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP, then the generated table will be used for a fast ** membership test. When the IN_INDEX_LOOP bit is set, the IN index will ** be used to loop over all values of the RHS of the IN operator. ** ** When IN_INDEX_LOOP is used (and the b-tree will be used to iterate ** through the set members) then the b-tree must not contain duplicates. ** An ephemeral table will be created unless the selected columns are guaranteed ** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or due to ** a UNIQUE constraint or index. ** ** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used ** for fast set membership tests) then an ephemeral table must ** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an ** index can be found with the specified <columns> as its left-most. ** ** If the IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK and IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP are both set and ** if the RHS of the IN operator is a list (not a subquery) then this ** routine might decide that creating an ephemeral b-tree for membership ** testing is too expensive and return IN_INDEX_NOOP. In that case, the ** calling routine should implement the IN operator using a sequence ** of Eq or Ne comparison operations. ** ** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function ** might need to know whether or not the RHS side of the IN operator ** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and ** if there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at ** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written ** to *prRhsHasNull. If there is no chance that the (...) contains a ** NULL value, then *prRhsHasNull is left unchanged. ** ** If a register is allocated and its location stored in *prRhsHasNull, then ** the value in that register will be NULL if the b-tree contains one or more |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 | int mustBeUnique; /* True if RHS must be unique */ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); /* Virtual machine being coded */ assert( pX->op==TK_IN ); mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0; iTab = pParse->nTab++; | | | | | 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 | int mustBeUnique; /* True if RHS must be unique */ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); /* Virtual machine being coded */ assert( pX->op==TK_IN ); mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0; iTab = pParse->nTab++; /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters ** whether or not the SELECT result contains NULL values, check whether ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due ** to NOT NULL constraints in the schema). If no NULL values are possible, ** set prRhsHasNull to 0 before continuing. */ if( prRhsHasNull && ExprUseXSelect(pX) ){ int i; ExprList *pEList = pX->x.pSelect->pEList; for(i=0; i<pEList->nExpr; i++){ if( sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pEList->a[i].pExpr) ) break; } if( i==pEList->nExpr ){ prRhsHasNull = 0; } } /* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new ** ephemeral table. */ if( pParse->nErr==0 && (p = isCandidateForInOpt(pX))!=0 ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */ Table *pTab; /* Table <table>. */ int iDb; /* Database idx for pTab */ ExprList *pEList = p->pEList; int nExpr = pEList->nExpr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 | "USING ROWID SEARCH ON TABLE %s FOR IN-OPERATOR",pTab->zName)); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, iAddr); }else{ Index *pIdx; /* Iterator variable */ int affinity_ok = 1; int i; | | | 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 | "USING ROWID SEARCH ON TABLE %s FOR IN-OPERATOR",pTab->zName)); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, iAddr); }else{ Index *pIdx; /* Iterator variable */ int affinity_ok = 1; int i; /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each ** comparison is the same as the affinity of each column in table ** on the RHS of the IN operator. If it not, it is not possible to ** use any index of the RHS table. */ for(i=0; i<nExpr && affinity_ok; i++){ Expr *pLhs = sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(pX->pLeft, i); int iCol = pEList->a[i].pExpr->iColumn; char idxaff = sqlite3TableColumnAffinity(pTab,iCol); /* RHS table */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 | if( mustBeUnique ){ if( pIdx->nKeyCol>nExpr ||(pIdx->nColumn>nExpr && !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx)) ){ continue; /* This index is not unique over the IN RHS columns */ } } | | | | | | | 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 | if( mustBeUnique ){ if( pIdx->nKeyCol>nExpr ||(pIdx->nColumn>nExpr && !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx)) ){ continue; /* This index is not unique over the IN RHS columns */ } } colUsed = 0; /* Columns of index used so far */ for(i=0; i<nExpr; i++){ Expr *pLhs = sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(pX->pLeft, i); Expr *pRhs = pEList->a[i].pExpr; CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pLhs, pRhs); int j; for(j=0; j<nExpr; j++){ if( pIdx->aiColumn[j]!=pRhs->iColumn ) continue; assert( pIdx->azColl[j] ); if( pReq!=0 && sqlite3StrICmp(pReq->zName, pIdx->azColl[j])!=0 ){ continue; } break; } if( j==nExpr ) break; mCol = MASKBIT(j); if( mCol & colUsed ) break; /* Each column used only once */ colUsed |= mCol; if( aiMap ) aiMap[i] = j; } assert( i==nExpr || colUsed!=(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) ); if( colUsed==(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) ){ /* If we reach this point, that means the index pIdx is usable */ int iAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 0, "USING INDEX %s FOR IN-OPERATOR",pIdx->zName)); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenRead, iTab, pIdx->tnum, iDb); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pIdx); VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName)); assert( IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC == IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC+1 ); eType = IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC + pIdx->aSortOrder[0]; if( prRhsHasNull ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK i64 mask = (1<<nExpr)-1; sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed, iTab, 0, 0, (u8*)&mask, P4_INT64); #endif *prRhsHasNull = ++pParse->nMem; if( nExpr==1 ){ sqlite3SetHasNullFlag(v, iTab, *prRhsHasNull); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 | *piTab = iTab; return eType; } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* | | | | 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 | *piTab = iTab; return eType; } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* ** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This ** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing ** the affinities to be used for each column of the comparison. ** ** It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure that the returned ** string is eventually freed using sqlite3DbFree(). */ static char *exprINAffinity(Parse *pParse, const Expr *pExpr){ Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 | } return zRet; } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* | | | | | | 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 | } return zRet; } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* ** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error ** message of the form: ** ** "sub-select returns N columns - expected M" */ void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){ if( pParse->nErr==0 ){ const char *zFmt = "sub-select returns %d columns - expected %d"; sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, zFmt, nActual, nExpect); } } #endif /* ** Expression pExpr is a vector that has been used in a context where ** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine ** loads the Parse object with a message of the form: ** ** "sub-select returns N columns - expected 1" ** ** Or, if it is a regular scalar vector: ** ** "row value misused" */ void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY if( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ){ sqlite3SubselectError(pParse, pExpr->x.pSelect->pEList->nExpr, 1); }else #endif { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 | ** in the RHS of an IN operator. The IN operator can be in either of two ** forms: ** ** x IN (4,5,11) -- IN operator with list on right-hand side ** x IN (SELECT a FROM b) -- IN operator with subquery on the right ** ** The pExpr parameter is the IN operator. The cursor number for the | | | 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 | ** in the RHS of an IN operator. The IN operator can be in either of two ** forms: ** ** x IN (4,5,11) -- IN operator with list on right-hand side ** x IN (SELECT a FROM b) -- IN operator with subquery on the right ** ** The pExpr parameter is the IN operator. The cursor number for the ** constructed ephemeral table is returned. The first time the ephemeral ** table is computed, the cursor number is also stored in pExpr->iTable, ** however the cursor number returned might not be the same, as it might ** have been duplicated using OP_OpenDup. ** ** If the LHS expression ("x" in the examples) is a column value, or ** the SELECT statement returns a column value, then the affinity of that ** column is used to build the index keys. If both 'x' and the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 | ** ** If all of the above are false, then we can compute the RHS just once ** and reuse it many names. */ if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) && pParse->iSelfTab==0 ){ /* Reuse of the RHS is allowed */ /* If this routine has already been coded, but the previous code | | | 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 | ** ** If all of the above are false, then we can compute the RHS just once ** and reuse it many names. */ if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) && pParse->iSelfTab==0 ){ /* Reuse of the RHS is allowed */ /* If this routine has already been coded, but the previous code ** might not have been invoked yet, so invoke it now as a subroutine. */ if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Subrtn) ){ addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); if( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ){ ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 0, "REUSE LIST SUBQUERY %d", pExpr->x.pSelect->selId)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 | pCopy = sqlite3SelectDup(pParse->db, pSelect, 0); rc = pParse->db->mallocFailed ? 1 :sqlite3Select(pParse, pCopy, &dest); sqlite3SelectDelete(pParse->db, pCopy); sqlite3DbFree(pParse->db, dest.zAffSdst); if( rc ){ sqlite3KeyInfoUnref(pKeyInfo); return; | | | 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 | pCopy = sqlite3SelectDup(pParse->db, pSelect, 0); rc = pParse->db->mallocFailed ? 1 :sqlite3Select(pParse, pCopy, &dest); sqlite3SelectDelete(pParse->db, pCopy); sqlite3DbFree(pParse->db, dest.zAffSdst); if( rc ){ sqlite3KeyInfoUnref(pKeyInfo); return; } assert( pKeyInfo!=0 ); /* OOM will cause exit after sqlite3Select() */ assert( pEList!=0 ); assert( pEList->nExpr>0 ); assert( sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(pKeyInfo) ); for(i=0; i<nVal; i++){ Expr *p = sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(pLeft, i); pKeyInfo->aColl[i] = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 | ** or EXISTS operator: ** ** (SELECT a FROM b) -- subquery ** EXISTS (SELECT a FROM b) -- EXISTS subquery ** ** The pExpr parameter is the SELECT or EXISTS operator to be coded. ** | | | 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 | ** or EXISTS operator: ** ** (SELECT a FROM b) -- subquery ** EXISTS (SELECT a FROM b) -- EXISTS subquery ** ** The pExpr parameter is the SELECT or EXISTS operator to be coded. ** ** Return the register that holds the result. For a multi-column SELECT, ** the result is stored in a contiguous array of registers and the ** return value is the register of the left-most result column. ** Return 0 if an error occurs. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY int sqlite3CodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ int addrOnce = 0; /* Address of OP_Once at top of subroutine */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 | ** ** If all of the above are false, then we can run this code just once ** save the results, and reuse the same result on subsequent invocations. */ if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) ){ addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); } | | | | 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 | ** ** If all of the above are false, then we can run this code just once ** save the results, and reuse the same result on subsequent invocations. */ if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) ){ addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); } /* For a SELECT, generate code to put the values for all columns of ** the first row into an array of registers and return the index of ** the first register. ** ** If this is an EXISTS, write an integer 0 (not exists) or 1 (exists) ** into a register and return that register number. ** ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1". Any ** preexisting limit is discarded in place of the new LIMIT 1. */ ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 1, "%sSCALAR SUBQUERY %d", addrOnce?"":"CORRELATED ", pSel->selId)); sqlite3VdbeScanStatusCounters(v, addrExplain, addrExplain, -1); nReg = pExpr->op==TK_SELECT ? pSel->pEList->nExpr : 1; sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, 0, pParse->nMem+1); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 | sqlite3ClearTempRegCache(pParse); return rReg; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* | | | | | 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 | sqlite3ClearTempRegCache(pParse); return rReg; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* ** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the ** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of ** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not ** a sub-query, that the LHS is a vector of size 1. */ int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){ int nVector = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pIn->pLeft); if( ExprUseXSelect(pIn) && !pParse->db->mallocFailed ){ if( nVector!=pIn->x.pSelect->pEList->nExpr ){ sqlite3SubselectError(pParse, pIn->x.pSelect->pEList->nExpr, nVector); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* ** Generate code for an IN expression. ** ** x IN (SELECT ...) ** x IN (value, value, ...) ** | | | | | | | 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* ** Generate code for an IN expression. ** ** x IN (SELECT ...) ** x IN (value, value, ...) ** ** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression. The ** right-hand side (RHS) is an array of zero or more scalar values, or a ** subquery. If the RHS is a subquery, the number of result columns must ** match the number of columns in the vector on the LHS. If the RHS is ** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar. ** ** The IN operator is true if the LHS value is contained within the RHS. ** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS. The ** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be ** determined due to NULLs. ** ** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not ** contained within the RHS. If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS ** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull. If the LHS is contained ** within the RHS then fall through. ** ** See the separate in-operator.md documentation file in the canonical ** SQLite source tree for additional information. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 | int iDummy; /* Dummy parameter to exprCodeVector() */ Expr *pLeft; /* The LHS of the IN operator */ int i; /* loop counter */ int destStep2; /* Where to jump when NULLs seen in step 2 */ int destStep6 = 0; /* Start of code for Step 6 */ int addrTruthOp; /* Address of opcode that determines the IN is true */ int destNotNull; /* Jump here if a comparison is not true in step 6 */ | | | 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 | int iDummy; /* Dummy parameter to exprCodeVector() */ Expr *pLeft; /* The LHS of the IN operator */ int i; /* loop counter */ int destStep2; /* Where to jump when NULLs seen in step 2 */ int destStep6 = 0; /* Start of code for Step 6 */ int addrTruthOp; /* Address of opcode that determines the IN is true */ int destNotNull; /* Jump here if a comparison is not true in step 6 */ int addrTop; /* Top of the step-6 loop */ int iTab = 0; /* Index to use */ u8 okConstFactor = pParse->okConstFactor; assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(pExpr,EP_Immutable) ); pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; if( sqlite3ExprCheckIN(pParse, pExpr) ) return; zAff = exprINAffinity(pParse, pExpr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 | VdbeNoopComment((v, "begin IN expr")); eType = sqlite3FindInIndex(pParse, pExpr, IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP | IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK, destIfFalse==destIfNull ? 0 : &rRhsHasNull, aiMap, &iTab); assert( pParse->nErr || nVector==1 || eType==IN_INDEX_EPH | | | | | 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 | VdbeNoopComment((v, "begin IN expr")); eType = sqlite3FindInIndex(pParse, pExpr, IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP | IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK, destIfFalse==destIfNull ? 0 : &rRhsHasNull, aiMap, &iTab); assert( pParse->nErr || nVector==1 || eType==IN_INDEX_EPH || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Confirm that aiMap[] contains nVector integer values between 0 and ** nVector-1. */ for(i=0; i<nVector; i++){ int j, cnt; for(cnt=j=0; j<nVector; j++) if( aiMap[j]==i ) cnt++; assert( cnt==1 ); } #endif /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting ** at r1. ** ** sqlite3FindInIndex() might have reordered the fields of the LHS vector ** so that the fields are in the same order as an existing index. The ** aiMap[] array contains a mapping from the original LHS field order to ** the field order that matches the RHS index. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 | */ if( rRhsHasNull && nVector==1 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, rRhsHasNull, destIfFalse); VdbeCoverage(v); } /* Step 5. If we do not care about the difference between NULL and | | | 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 | */ if( rRhsHasNull && nVector==1 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, rRhsHasNull, destIfFalse); VdbeCoverage(v); } /* Step 5. If we do not care about the difference between NULL and ** FALSE, then just return false. */ if( destIfFalse==destIfNull ) sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, destIfFalse); /* Step 6: Loop through rows of the RHS. Compare each row to the LHS. ** If any comparison is NULL, then the result is NULL. If all ** comparisons are FALSE then the final result is FALSE. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT /* ** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point ** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem. ** | | | 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT /* ** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point ** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem. ** ** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the ** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look ** like the continuation of the number. */ static void codeReal(Vdbe *v, const char *z, int negateFlag, int iMem){ if( ALWAYS(z!=0) ){ double value; sqlite3AtoF(z, &value, sqlite3Strlen30(z), SQLITE_UTF8); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, op, iTabCur, x, regOut); sqlite3ColumnDefault(v, pTab, iCol, regOut); } } /* ** Generate code that will extract the iColumn-th column from | | | 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, op, iTabCur, x, regOut); sqlite3ColumnDefault(v, pTab, iCol, regOut); } } /* ** Generate code that will extract the iColumn-th column from ** table pTab and store the column value in register iReg. ** ** There must be an open cursor to pTab in iTable when this routine ** is called. If iColumn<0 then code is generated that extracts the rowid. */ int sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing and code generating context */ Table *pTab, /* Description of the table we are reading from */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 | p->op = TK_REGISTER; p->iTable = iReg; ExprClearProperty(p, EP_Skip); } /* ** Evaluate an expression (either a vector or a scalar expression) and store | | | 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 | p->op = TK_REGISTER; p->iTable = iReg; ExprClearProperty(p, EP_Skip); } /* ** Evaluate an expression (either a vector or a scalar expression) and store ** the result in contiguous temporary registers. Return the index of ** the first register used to store the result. ** ** If the returned result register is a temporary scalar, then also write ** that register number into *piFreeable. If the returned result register ** is not a temporary or if the expression is a vector set *piFreeable ** to 0. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 | /* ** If the last opcode is a OP_Copy, then set the do-not-merge flag (p5) ** so that a subsequent copy will not be merged into this one. */ static void setDoNotMergeFlagOnCopy(Vdbe *v){ if( sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v)->opcode==OP_Copy ){ | | | 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 | /* ** If the last opcode is a OP_Copy, then set the do-not-merge flag (p5) ** so that a subsequent copy will not be merged into this one. */ static void setDoNotMergeFlagOnCopy(Vdbe *v){ if( sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v)->opcode==OP_Copy ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1); /* Tag trailing OP_Copy as not mergeable */ } } /* ** Generate code to implement special SQL functions that are implemented ** in-line rather than by using the usual callbacks. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Offset, pArg->iTable, pArg->iColumn, target); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target); } break; } #endif | | | | | | | 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Offset, pArg->iTable, pArg->iColumn, target); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target); } break; } #endif default: { /* The UNLIKELY() function is a no-op. The result is the value ** of the first argument. */ assert( nFarg==1 || nFarg==2 ); target = sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pFarg->a[0].pExpr, target); break; } /*********************************************************************** ** Test-only SQL functions that are only usable if enabled ** via SQLITE_TESTCTRL_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS */ #if !defined(SQLITE_UNTESTABLE) case INLINEFUNC_expr_compare: { /* Compare two expressions using sqlite3ExprCompare() */ assert( nFarg==2 ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, sqlite3ExprCompare(0,pFarg->a[0].pExpr, pFarg->a[1].pExpr,-1), target); break; } case INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr: { /* Compare two expressions using sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr() */ assert( nFarg==2 ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pParse,pFarg->a[0].pExpr, pFarg->a[1].pExpr,-1), target); break; } case INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row: { /* Result of sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow() */ Expr *pA1; assert( nFarg==2 ); pA1 = pFarg->a[1].pExpr; if( pA1->op==TK_COLUMN ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow(pFarg->a[0].pExpr,pA1->iTable,1), target); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target); } break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 | assert( target>0 && target<=pParse->nMem ); assert( v!=0 ); expr_code_doover: if( pExpr==0 ){ op = TK_NULL; | | | 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 | assert( target>0 && target<=pParse->nMem ); assert( v!=0 ); expr_code_doover: if( pExpr==0 ){ op = TK_NULL; }else if( pParse->pIdxEpr!=0 && !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Leaf) && (r1 = sqlite3IndexedExprLookup(pParse, pExpr, target))>=0 ){ return r1; }else{ assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(pExpr,EP_Immutable) ); op = pExpr->op; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, pAggInfo->sortingIdxPTab, pCol->iSorterColumn, target); if( pTab==0 ){ /* No comment added */ }else if( pCol->iColumn<0 ){ VdbeComment((v,"%s.rowid",pTab->zName)); }else{ | | | 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, pAggInfo->sortingIdxPTab, pCol->iSorterColumn, target); if( pTab==0 ){ /* No comment added */ }else if( pCol->iColumn<0 ){ VdbeComment((v,"%s.rowid",pTab->zName)); }else{ VdbeComment((v,"%s.%s", pTab->zName, pTab->aCol[pCol->iColumn].zCnName)); if( pTab->aCol[pCol->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target); } } return target; }else if( pExpr->y.pTab==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 | } case TK_COLUMN: { int iTab = pExpr->iTable; int iReg; if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FixedCol) ){ /* This COLUMN expression is really a constant due to WHERE clause ** constraints, and that constant is coded by the pExpr->pLeft | | | 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 | } case TK_COLUMN: { int iTab = pExpr->iTable; int iReg; if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FixedCol) ){ /* This COLUMN expression is really a constant due to WHERE clause ** constraints, and that constant is coded by the pExpr->pLeft ** expression. However, make sure the constant has the correct ** datatype by applying the Affinity of the table column to the ** constant. */ int aff; iReg = sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pExpr->pLeft,target); assert( ExprUseYTab(pExpr) ); assert( pExpr->y.pTab!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 | case TK_STAR: case TK_MINUS: case TK_REM: case TK_BITAND: case TK_BITOR: case TK_SLASH: case TK_LSHIFT: | | | 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 | case TK_STAR: case TK_MINUS: case TK_REM: case TK_BITAND: case TK_BITOR: case TK_SLASH: case TK_LSHIFT: case TK_RSHIFT: case TK_CONCAT: { assert( TK_AND==OP_And ); testcase( op==TK_AND ); assert( TK_OR==OP_Or ); testcase( op==TK_OR ); assert( TK_PLUS==OP_Add ); testcase( op==TK_PLUS ); assert( TK_MINUS==OP_Subtract ); testcase( op==TK_MINUS ); assert( TK_REM==OP_Remainder ); testcase( op==TK_REM ); assert( TK_BITAND==OP_BitAnd ); testcase( op==TK_BITAND ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 | assert( nFarg==1 ); assert( pFarg->a[0].pExpr!=0 ); exprOp = pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op; if( exprOp==TK_COLUMN || exprOp==TK_AGG_COLUMN ){ assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG ); assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG ); testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG ); | | | | | 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 | assert( nFarg==1 ); assert( pFarg->a[0].pExpr!=0 ); exprOp = pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op; if( exprOp==TK_COLUMN || exprOp==TK_AGG_COLUMN ){ assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG ); assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG ); testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG ); pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 = pDef->funcFlags & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG); } } sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(pParse, pFarg, r1, 0, SQLITE_ECEL_DUP|SQLITE_ECEL_FACTOR); }else{ r1 = 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* Possibly overload the function if the first argument is ** a virtual table column. ** ** For infix functions (LIKE, GLOB, REGEXP, and MATCH) use the ** second argument, not the first, as the argument to test to ** see if it is a column in a virtual table. This is done because ** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to ** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to ** "glob(B,A). We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test ** for function overloading. But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)". */ if( nFarg>=2 && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_InfixFunc) ){ pDef = sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction(db, pDef, nFarg, pFarg->a[1].pExpr); }else if( nFarg>0 ){ pDef = sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction(db, pDef, nFarg, pFarg->a[0].pExpr); } #endif if( pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){ if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl; sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ); } sqlite3VdbeAddFunctionCall(pParse, constMask, r1, target, nFarg, pDef, pExpr->op2); if( nFarg ){ if( constMask==0 ){ sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r1, nFarg); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 | ** trigger programs. In this case Expr.iTable is set to 1 for the ** new.* pseudo-table, or 0 for the old.* pseudo-table. Expr.iColumn ** is set to the column of the pseudo-table to read, or to -1 to ** read the rowid field. ** ** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1 ** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1) | | | | | 4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816 4817 4818 4819 4820 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 | ** trigger programs. In this case Expr.iTable is set to 1 for the ** new.* pseudo-table, or 0 for the old.* pseudo-table. Expr.iColumn ** is set to the column of the pseudo-table to read, or to -1 to ** read the rowid field. ** ** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1 ** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1) ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where ** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is ** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table. ** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1 ** is set to (n+2+i), where n and i are as defined previously. For ** example, if the table on which triggers are being fired is ** declared as: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(a, b); ** ** Then p1 is interpreted as follows: ** ** p1==0 -> old.rowid p1==3 -> new.rowid ** p1==1 -> old.a p1==4 -> new.a ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b */ Table *pTab; int iCol; int p1; assert( ExprUseYTab(pExpr) ); pTab = pExpr->y.pTab; iCol = pExpr->iColumn; p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1 + sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, iCol); assert( pExpr->iTable==0 || pExpr->iTable==1 ); assert( iCol>=-1 && iCol<pTab->nCol ); assert( pTab->iPKey<0 || iCol!=pTab->iPKey ); assert( p1>=0 && p1<(pTab->nCol*2+2) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 | sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pDel); setDoNotMergeFlagOnCopy(v); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endLabel); break; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER case TK_RAISE: { | | | 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 | sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pDel); setDoNotMergeFlagOnCopy(v); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endLabel); break; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER case TK_RAISE: { assert( pExpr->affExpr==OE_Rollback || pExpr->affExpr==OE_Abort || pExpr->affExpr==OE_Fail || pExpr->affExpr==OE_Ignore ); if( !pParse->pTriggerTab && !pParse->nested ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "RAISE() may only be used within a trigger-program"); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 | ** ** If the expression uses functions (that might throw an exception) then ** guard them with an OP_Once opcode to ensure that the code is only executed ** once. If no functions are involved, then factor the code out and put it at ** the end of the prepared statement in the initialization section. ** ** If regDest>=0 then the result is always stored in that register and the | | | | 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 | ** ** If the expression uses functions (that might throw an exception) then ** guard them with an OP_Once opcode to ensure that the code is only executed ** once. If no functions are involved, then factor the code out and put it at ** the end of the prepared statement in the initialization section. ** ** If regDest>=0 then the result is always stored in that register and the ** result is not reusable. If regDest<0 then this routine is free to ** store the value wherever it wants. The register where the expression ** is stored is returned. When regDest<0, two identical expressions might ** code to the same register, if they do not contain function calls and hence ** are factored out into the initialization section at the end of the ** prepared statement. */ int sqlite3ExprCodeRunJustOnce( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 | } /* ** Generate code for a BETWEEN operator. ** ** x BETWEEN y AND z ** | | | 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 | } /* ** Generate code for a BETWEEN operator. ** ** x BETWEEN y AND z ** ** The above is equivalent to ** ** x>=y AND x<=z ** ** Code it as such, taking care to do the common subexpression ** elimination of x. ** ** The xJumpIf parameter determines details: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5470 5471 5472 5473 5474 5475 5476 | testcase( regFree1==0 ); testcase( jumpIfNull==0 ); } break; } } sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1); | | | 5470 5471 5472 5473 5474 5475 5476 5477 5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 | testcase( regFree1==0 ); testcase( jumpIfNull==0 ); } break; } } sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2); } /* ** Generate code for a boolean expression such that a jump is made ** to the label "dest" if the expression is false but execution ** continues straight thru if the expression is true. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 | sqlite3ExprCodeIN(pParse, pExpr, dest, destIfNull); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, destIfNull); } break; } #endif default: { | | | 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 | sqlite3ExprCodeIN(pParse, pExpr, dest, destIfNull); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, destIfNull); } break; } #endif default: { default_expr: if( ExprAlwaysFalse(pExpr) ){ sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, dest); }else if( ExprAlwaysTrue(pExpr) ){ /* no-op */ }else{ r1 = sqlite3ExprCodeTemp(pParse, pExpr, ®Free1); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfNot, r1, dest, jumpIfNull!=0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 | const Parse *pParse, const Expr *pVar, const Expr *pExpr ){ int res = 0; int iVar; sqlite3_value *pL, *pR = 0; | | | 5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692 5693 5694 5695 5696 5697 5698 5699 | const Parse *pParse, const Expr *pVar, const Expr *pExpr ){ int res = 0; int iVar; sqlite3_value *pL, *pR = 0; sqlite3ValueFromExpr(pParse->db, pExpr, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB, &pR); if( pR ){ iVar = pVar->iColumn; sqlite3VdbeSetVarmask(pParse->pVdbe, iVar); pL = sqlite3VdbeGetBoundValue(pParse->pReprepare, iVar, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB); if( pL ){ if( sqlite3_value_type(pL)==SQLITE_TEXT ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5727 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 | ** expressions are the same. But if you get a 0 or 1 return, then you ** can be sure the expressions are the same. In the places where ** this routine is used, it does not hurt to get an extra 2 - that ** just might result in some slightly slower code. But returning ** an incorrect 0 or 1 could lead to a malfunction. ** ** If pParse is not NULL then TK_VARIABLE terms in pA with bindings in | | | | 5727 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 | ** expressions are the same. But if you get a 0 or 1 return, then you ** can be sure the expressions are the same. In the places where ** this routine is used, it does not hurt to get an extra 2 - that ** just might result in some slightly slower code. But returning ** an incorrect 0 or 1 could lead to a malfunction. ** ** If pParse is not NULL then TK_VARIABLE terms in pA with bindings in ** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB. The ** pParse->pVdbe->expmask bitmask is updated for each variable referenced. ** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in ** Argument pParse should normally be NULL. If it is not NULL and pA or ** pB causes a return value of 2. */ int sqlite3ExprCompare( const Parse *pParse, const Expr *pA, const Expr *pB, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 | if( pA->op!=pB->op || pA->op==TK_RAISE ){ if( pA->op==TK_COLLATE && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pA->pLeft,pB,iTab)<2 ){ return 1; } if( pB->op==TK_COLLATE && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pA,pB->pLeft,iTab)<2 ){ return 1; } | | | 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 | if( pA->op!=pB->op || pA->op==TK_RAISE ){ if( pA->op==TK_COLLATE && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pA->pLeft,pB,iTab)<2 ){ return 1; } if( pB->op==TK_COLLATE && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pA,pB->pLeft,iTab)<2 ){ return 1; } if( pA->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && pB->op==TK_COLUMN && pB->iTable<0 && pA->iTable==iTab ){ /* fall through */ }else{ return 2; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 | } } #endif }else if( pA->op==TK_NULL ){ return 0; }else if( pA->op==TK_COLLATE ){ if( sqlite3_stricmp(pA->u.zToken,pB->u.zToken)!=0 ) return 2; | | | 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 | } } #endif }else if( pA->op==TK_NULL ){ return 0; }else if( pA->op==TK_COLLATE ){ if( sqlite3_stricmp(pA->u.zToken,pB->u.zToken)!=0 ) return 2; }else if( pB->u.zToken!=0 && pA->op!=TK_COLUMN && pA->op!=TK_AGG_COLUMN && strcmp(pA->u.zToken,pB->u.zToken)!=0 ){ return 2; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 | } } return 0; } /* ** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical, 1 | | | 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 | } } return 0; } /* ** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical, 1 ** if they are certainly different, or 2 if it is not possible to ** determine if they are identical or not. ** ** If any subelement of pB has Expr.iTable==(-1) then it is allowed ** to compare equal to an equivalent element in pA with Expr.iTable==iTab. ** ** This routine might return non-zero for equivalent ExprLists. The ** only consequence will be disabled optimizations. But this routine |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 | case TK_LE: case TK_GT: case TK_GE: case TK_PLUS: case TK_MINUS: case TK_BITOR: case TK_LSHIFT: | | | | 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919 5920 5921 5922 5923 5924 | case TK_LE: case TK_GT: case TK_GE: case TK_PLUS: case TK_MINUS: case TK_BITOR: case TK_LSHIFT: case TK_RSHIFT: case TK_CONCAT: seenNot = 1; /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through case TK_STAR: case TK_REM: case TK_BITAND: case TK_SLASH: { if( exprImpliesNotNull(pParse, p->pRight, pNN, iTab, seenNot) ) return 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 | ** ** pE1: x==5 pE2: x==5 Result: true ** pE1: x>0 pE2: x==5 Result: false ** pE1: x=21 pE2: x=21 OR y=43 Result: true ** pE1: x!=123 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: true ** pE1: x!=?1 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: true ** pE1: x IS NULL pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: false | | | | | 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 | ** ** pE1: x==5 pE2: x==5 Result: true ** pE1: x>0 pE2: x==5 Result: false ** pE1: x=21 pE2: x=21 OR y=43 Result: true ** pE1: x!=123 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: true ** pE1: x!=?1 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: true ** pE1: x IS NULL pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: false ** pE1: x IS ?2 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: false ** ** When comparing TK_COLUMN nodes between pE1 and pE2, if pE2 has ** Expr.iTable<0 then assume a table number given by iTab. ** ** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are ** compared against literal values in pE2 and pParse->pVdbe->expmask is ** modified to record which bound variables are referenced. If pParse ** is NULL, then false will be returned if pE1 contains any bound variables. ** ** When in doubt, return false. Returning true might give a performance ** improvement. Returning false might cause a performance reduction, but ** it will always give the correct answer and is hence always safe. */ int sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 | && exprImpliesNotNull(pParse, pE1, pE2->pLeft, iTab, 0) ){ return 1; } return 0; } | | | | 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 | && exprImpliesNotNull(pParse, pE1, pE2->pLeft, iTab, 0) ){ return 1; } return 0; } /* This is a helper function to impliesNotNullRow(). In this routine, ** set pWalker->eCode to one only if *both* of the input expressions ** separately have the implies-not-null-row property. */ static void bothImplyNotNullRow(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pE1, Expr *pE2){ if( pWalker->eCode==0 ){ sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pE1); if( pWalker->eCode ){ pWalker->eCode = 0; sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pE2); } } } /* ** This is the Expr node callback for sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow(). ** If the expression node requires that the table at pWalker->iCur ** have one or more non-NULL column, then set pWalker->eCode to 1 and abort. ** ** pWalker->mWFlags is non-zero if this inquiry is being undertaking on ** behalf of a RIGHT JOIN (or FULL JOIN). That makes a difference when ** evaluating terms in the ON clause of an inner join. ** ** This routine controls an optimization. False positives (setting ** pWalker->eCode to 1 when it should not be) are deadly, but false-negatives ** (never setting pWalker->eCode) is a harmless missed optimization. */ static int impliesNotNullRow(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ testcase( pExpr->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 | ** If only one of x or y is non-null-row, then the overall expression ** can be true if the other arm is false (case 1) or true (case 2). */ testcase( pExpr->op==TK_OR ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_AND ); bothImplyNotNullRow(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft, pExpr->pRight); return WRC_Prune; | | | 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 | ** If only one of x or y is non-null-row, then the overall expression ** can be true if the other arm is false (case 1) or true (case 2). */ testcase( pExpr->op==TK_OR ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_AND ); bothImplyNotNullRow(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft, pExpr->pRight); return WRC_Prune; case TK_IN: /* Beware of "x NOT IN ()" and "x NOT IN (SELECT 1 WHERE false)", ** both of which can be true. But apart from these cases, if ** the left-hand side of the IN is NULL then the IN itself will be ** NULL. */ if( ExprUseXList(pExpr) && ALWAYS(pExpr->x.pList->nExpr>0) ){ sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 | */ struct IdxCover { Index *pIdx; /* The index to be tested for coverage */ int iCur; /* Cursor number for the table corresponding to the index */ }; /* | | | 6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 | */ struct IdxCover { Index *pIdx; /* The index to be tested for coverage */ int iCur; /* Cursor number for the table corresponding to the index */ }; /* ** Check to see if there are references to columns in table ** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->iCur can be satisfied using the index ** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->pIdx. */ static int exprIdxCover(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN && pExpr->iTable==pWalker->u.pIdxCover->iCur && sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pWalker->u.pIdxCover->pIdx, pExpr->iColumn)<0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 | w.xExprCallback = exprIdxCover; w.u.pIdxCover = &xcov; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, pExpr); return !w.eCode; } | | | 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 | w.xExprCallback = exprIdxCover; w.u.pIdxCover = &xcov; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, pExpr); return !w.eCode; } /* Structure used to pass information throughout the Walker in order to ** implement sqlite3ReferencesSrcList(). */ struct RefSrcList { sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection used for sqlite3DbRealloc() */ SrcList *pRef; /* Looking for references to these tables */ i64 nExclude; /* Number of tables to exclude from the search */ int *aiExclude; /* Cursor IDs for tables to exclude from the search */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 | if( p->nExclude ){ assert( p->nExclude>=pSrc->nSrc ); p->nExclude -= pSrc->nSrc; } } /* This is the Walker EXPR callback for sqlite3ReferencesSrcList(). | | | 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 | if( p->nExclude ){ assert( p->nExclude>=pSrc->nSrc ); p->nExclude -= pSrc->nSrc; } } /* This is the Walker EXPR callback for sqlite3ReferencesSrcList(). ** ** Set the 0x01 bit of pWalker->eCode if there is a reference to any ** of the tables shown in RefSrcList.pRef. ** ** Set the 0x02 bit of pWalker->eCode if there is a reference to a ** table is in neither RefSrcList.pRef nor RefSrcList.aiExclude. */ static int exprRefToSrcList(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 | db, pInfo->aCol, sizeof(pInfo->aCol[0]), &pInfo->nColumn, &i ); return i; | | | | | | 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 | db, pInfo->aCol, sizeof(pInfo->aCol[0]), &pInfo->nColumn, &i ); return i; } /* ** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array. Return the index of ** the new element. Return a negative number if malloc fails. */ static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){ int i; pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate( db, pInfo->aFunc, sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]), &pInfo->nFunc, &i ); return i; } /* ** Search the AggInfo object for an aCol[] entry that has iTable and iColumn. ** Return the index in aCol[] of the entry that describes that column. ** ** If no prior entry is found, create a new one and return -1. The ** new column will have an index of pAggInfo->nColumn-1. */ static void findOrCreateAggInfoColumn( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ AggInfo *pAggInfo, /* The AggInfo object to search and/or modify */ Expr *pExpr /* Expr describing the column to find or insert */ ){ struct AggInfo_col *pCol; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6577 6578 6579 6580 6581 6582 6583 | } return WRC_Continue; } case TK_AGG_FUNCTION: { if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0 && pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2 ){ | | | | 6577 6578 6579 6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 | } return WRC_Continue; } case TK_AGG_FUNCTION: { if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0 && pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2 ){ /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate ** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure */ struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc; for(i=0; i<pAggInfo->nFunc; i++, pItem++){ if( pItem->pFExpr==pExpr ) break; if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0, pItem->pFExpr, pExpr, -1)==0 ){ break; } } if( i>=pAggInfo->nFunc ){ /* pExpr is original. Make a new entry in pAggInfo->aFunc[] */ u8 enc = ENC(pParse->db); i = addAggInfoFunc(pParse->db, pAggInfo); if( i>=0 ){ assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_xIsSelect) ); pItem = &pAggInfo->aFunc[i]; pItem->pFExpr = pExpr; assert( ExprUseUToken(pExpr) ); pItem->pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(pParse->db, pExpr->u.zToken, pExpr->x.pList ? pExpr->x.pList->nExpr : 0, enc, 0); if( pExpr->flags & EP_Distinct ){ pItem->iDistinct = pParse->nTab++; }else{ pItem->iDistinct = -1; } } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/func.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | } } /* ** Implementation of the abs() function. ** ** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of | | | | 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 | } } /* ** Implementation of the abs() function. ** ** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of ** the numeric argument X. */ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ assert( argc==1 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(argc); switch( sqlite3_value_type(argv[0]) ){ case SQLITE_INTEGER: { i64 iVal = sqlite3_value_int64(argv[0]); if( iVal<0 ){ if( iVal==SMALLEST_INT64 ){ /* IMP: R-31676-45509 If X is the integer -9223372036854775808 ** then abs(X) throws an integer overflow error since there is no ** equivalent positive 64-bit two complement value. */ sqlite3_result_error(context, "integer overflow", -1); return; } iVal = -iVal; } sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal); break; } case SQLITE_NULL: { /* IMP: R-37434-19929 Abs(X) returns NULL if X is NULL. */ sqlite3_result_null(context); break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
418 419 420 421 422 423 424 | r = sqlite3_value_double(argv[0]); /* If Y==0 and X will fit in a 64-bit int, ** handle the rounding directly, ** otherwise use printf. */ if( r<-4503599627370496.0 || r>+4503599627370496.0 ){ /* The value has no fractional part so there is nothing to round */ | | | 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 | r = sqlite3_value_double(argv[0]); /* If Y==0 and X will fit in a 64-bit int, ** handle the rounding directly, ** otherwise use printf. */ if( r<-4503599627370496.0 || r>+4503599627370496.0 ){ /* The value has no fractional part so there is nothing to round */ }else if( n==0 ){ r = (double)((sqlite_int64)(r+(r<0?-0.5:+0.5))); }else{ zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%.*f",n,r); if( zBuf==0 ){ sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context); return; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
511 512 513 514 515 516 517 | ** routines in the function table. The noopFunc macro provides this. ** noopFunc will never be called so it doesn't matter what the implementation ** is. We might as well use the "version()" function as a substitute. */ #define noopFunc versionFunc /* Substitute function - never called */ /* | | | | | 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 | ** routines in the function table. The noopFunc macro provides this. ** noopFunc will never be called so it doesn't matter what the implementation ** is. We might as well use the "version()" function as a substitute. */ #define noopFunc versionFunc /* Substitute function - never called */ /* ** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer. */ static void randomFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int NotUsed, sqlite3_value **NotUsed2 ){ sqlite_int64 r; UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2); sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r); if( r<0 ){ /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000 ** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that ** number of you get the same value back again. To do this ** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the ** 2s complement of that positive value. The end result can ** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807. */ r = -(r & LARGEST_INT64); } sqlite3_result_int64(context, r); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
564 565 566 567 568 569 570 | } /* ** Implementation of the last_insert_rowid() SQL function. The return ** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function. */ static void last_insert_rowid( | | | | 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 | } /* ** Implementation of the last_insert_rowid() SQL function. The return ** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function. */ static void last_insert_rowid( sqlite3_context *context, int NotUsed, sqlite3_value **NotUsed2 ){ sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context); UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2); /* IMP: R-51513-12026 The last_insert_rowid() SQL function is a ** wrapper around the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() C/C++ interface ** function. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
621 622 623 624 625 626 627 | u8 matchOne; /* "?" or "_" */ u8 matchSet; /* "[" or 0 */ u8 noCase; /* true to ignore case differences */ }; /* ** For LIKE and GLOB matching on EBCDIC machines, assume that every | | | 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 | u8 matchOne; /* "?" or "_" */ u8 matchSet; /* "[" or 0 */ u8 noCase; /* true to ignore case differences */ }; /* ** For LIKE and GLOB matching on EBCDIC machines, assume that every ** character is exactly one byte in size. Also, provide the Utf8Read() ** macro for fast reading of the next character in the common case where ** the next character is ASCII. */ #if defined(SQLITE_EBCDIC) # define sqlite3Utf8Read(A) (*((*A)++)) # define Utf8Read(A) (*(A++)) #else |
︙ | ︙ | |||
673 674 675 676 677 678 679 | ** With the [...] and [^...] matching, a ']' character can be included ** in the list by making it the first character after '[' or '^'. A ** range of characters can be specified using '-'. Example: ** "[a-z]" matches any single lower-case letter. To match a '-', make ** it the last character in the list. ** ** Like matching rules: | | | 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 | ** With the [...] and [^...] matching, a ']' character can be included ** in the list by making it the first character after '[' or '^'. A ** range of characters can be specified using '-'. Example: ** "[a-z]" matches any single lower-case letter. To match a '-', make ** it the last character in the list. ** ** Like matching rules: ** ** '%' Matches any sequence of zero or more characters ** *** '_' Matches any one character ** ** Ec Where E is the "esc" character and c is any other ** character, including '%', '_', and esc, match exactly c. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
696 697 698 699 700 701 702 | u32 matchOther /* The escape char (LIKE) or '[' (GLOB) */ ){ u32 c, c2; /* Next pattern and input string chars */ u32 matchOne = pInfo->matchOne; /* "?" or "_" */ u32 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll; /* "*" or "%" */ u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase; /* True if uppercase==lowercase */ const u8 *zEscaped = 0; /* One past the last escaped input char */ | | | | 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | u32 matchOther /* The escape char (LIKE) or '[' (GLOB) */ ){ u32 c, c2; /* Next pattern and input string chars */ u32 matchOne = pInfo->matchOne; /* "?" or "_" */ u32 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll; /* "*" or "%" */ u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase; /* True if uppercase==lowercase */ const u8 *zEscaped = 0; /* One past the last escaped input char */ while( (c = Utf8Read(zPattern))!=0 ){ if( c==matchAll ){ /* Match "*" */ /* Skip over multiple "*" characters in the pattern. If there ** are also "?" characters, skip those as well, but consume a ** single character of the input string for each "?" skipped */ while( (c=Utf8Read(zPattern)) == matchAll || (c == matchOne && matchOne!=0) ){ if( c==matchOne && sqlite3Utf8Read(&zString)==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOWILDCARDMATCH; } } if( c==0 ){ return SQLITE_MATCH; /* "*" at the end of the pattern matches */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
854 855 856 857 858 859 860 | #ifdef SQLITE_TEST int sqlite3_like_count = 0; #endif /* ** Implementation of the like() SQL function. This function implements | | | | | 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 | #ifdef SQLITE_TEST int sqlite3_like_count = 0; #endif /* ** Implementation of the like() SQL function. This function implements ** the built-in LIKE operator. The first argument to the function is the ** pattern and the second argument is the string. So, the SQL statements: ** ** A LIKE B ** ** is implemented as like(B,A). ** ** This same function (with a different compareInfo structure) computes ** the GLOB operator. */ static void likeFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ const unsigned char *zA, *zB; u32 escape; int nPat; sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context); struct compareInfo *pInfo = sqlite3_user_data(context); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
905 906 907 908 909 910 911 | if( argc==3 ){ /* The escape character string must consist of a single UTF-8 character. ** Otherwise, return an error. */ const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]); if( zEsc==0 ) return; if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){ | | | 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | if( argc==3 ){ /* The escape character string must consist of a single UTF-8 character. ** Otherwise, return an error. */ const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]); if( zEsc==0 ) return; if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){ sqlite3_result_error(context, "ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1); return; } escape = sqlite3Utf8Read(&zEsc); if( escape==pInfo->matchAll || escape==pInfo->matchOne ){ memcpy(&backupInfo, pInfo, sizeof(backupInfo)); pInfo = &backupInfo; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 | if( (zOptName = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]))!=0 ){ sqlite3_result_int(context, sqlite3_compileoption_used(zOptName)); } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */ /* | | | | 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 | if( (zOptName = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]))!=0 ){ sqlite3_result_int(context, sqlite3_compileoption_used(zOptName)); } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */ /* ** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function. ** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options ** used to build SQLite. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS static void compileoptiongetFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 | } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */ /* Array for converting from half-bytes (nybbles) into ASCII hex ** digits. */ static const char hexdigits[] = { '0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', | | | 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 | } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */ /* Array for converting from half-bytes (nybbles) into ASCII hex ** digits. */ static const char hexdigits[] = { '0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F' }; /* ** Append to pStr text that is the SQL literal representation of the ** value contained in pValue. */ void sqlite3QuoteValue(StrAccum *pStr, sqlite3_value *pValue){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 | sqlite3_str_append(pStr, "NULL", 4); break; } } } /* | | | 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 | sqlite3_str_append(pStr, "NULL", 4); break; } } } /* ** Implementation of the QUOTE() function. ** ** The quote(X) function returns the text of an SQL literal which is the ** value of its argument suitable for inclusion into an SQL statement. ** Strings are surrounded by single-quotes with escapes on interior quotes ** as needed. BLOBs are encoded as hexadecimal literals. Strings with ** embedded NUL characters cannot be represented as string literals in SQL ** and hence the returned string literal is truncated prior to the first NUL. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 | sqlite3_result_null(context); sqlite3_result_error_code(context, str.accError); } } /* ** The unicode() function. Return the integer unicode code-point value | | | 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 | sqlite3_result_null(context); sqlite3_result_error_code(context, str.accError); } } /* ** The unicode() function. Return the integer unicode code-point value ** for the first character of the input string. */ static void unicodeFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ const unsigned char *z = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 | /* ** The unhex() function. This function may be invoked with either one or ** two arguments. In both cases the first argument is interpreted as text ** a text value containing a set of pairs of hexadecimal digits which are ** decoded and returned as a blob. ** ** If there is only a single argument, then it must consist only of an | | | | 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 | /* ** The unhex() function. This function may be invoked with either one or ** two arguments. In both cases the first argument is interpreted as text ** a text value containing a set of pairs of hexadecimal digits which are ** decoded and returned as a blob. ** ** If there is only a single argument, then it must consist only of an ** even number of hexadecimal digits. Otherwise, return NULL. ** ** Or, if there is a second argument, then any character that appears in ** the second argument is also allowed to appear between pairs of hexadecimal ** digits in the first argument. If any other character appears in the ** first argument, or if one of the allowed characters appears between ** two hexadecimal digits that make up a single byte, NULL is returned. ** ** The following expressions are all true: ** ** unhex('ABCD') IS x'ABCD' ** unhex('AB CD') IS NULL ** unhex('AB CD', ' ') IS x'ABCD' |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 | assert( zRep==sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]) ); nOut = nStr + 1; assert( nOut<SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); zOut = contextMalloc(context, (i64)nOut); if( zOut==0 ){ return; } | | | 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 | assert( zRep==sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]) ); nOut = nStr + 1; assert( nOut<SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); zOut = contextMalloc(context, (i64)nOut); if( zOut==0 ){ return; } loopLimit = nStr - nPattern; cntExpand = 0; for(i=j=0; i<=loopLimit; i++){ if( zStr[i]!=zPattern[0] || memcmp(&zStr[i], zPattern, nPattern) ){ zOut[j++] = zStr[i]; }else{ if( nRep>nPattern ){ nOut += nRep - nPattern; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 | return; }else{ const unsigned char *z; for(z=zCharSet, nChar=0; *z; nChar++){ SQLITE_SKIP_UTF8(z); } if( nChar>0 ){ | | | 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 | return; }else{ const unsigned char *z; for(z=zCharSet, nChar=0; *z; nChar++){ SQLITE_SKIP_UTF8(z); } if( nChar>0 ){ azChar = contextMalloc(context, ((i64)nChar)*(sizeof(char*)+sizeof(unsigned))); if( azChar==0 ){ return; } aLen = (unsigned*)&azChar[nChar]; for(z=zCharSet, nChar=0; *z; nChar++){ azChar[nChar] = (unsigned char *)z; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 | ** when SQLite is built. */ #ifdef SQLITE_SOUNDEX /* ** Compute the soundex encoding of a word. ** ** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the | | | 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 | ** when SQLite is built. */ #ifdef SQLITE_SOUNDEX /* ** Compute the soundex encoding of a word. ** ** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the ** soundex encoding of the string X. */ static void soundexFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ char zResult[8]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 | /* ** An instance of the following structure holds the context of a ** sum() or avg() aggregate computation. */ typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx; struct SumCtx { double rSum; /* Floating point sum */ | | | 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 | /* ** An instance of the following structure holds the context of a ** sum() or avg() aggregate computation. */ typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx; struct SumCtx { double rSum; /* Floating point sum */ i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */ i64 cnt; /* Number of elements summed */ u8 overflow; /* True if integer overflow seen */ u8 approx; /* True if non-integer value was input to the sum */ }; /* ** Routines used to compute the sum, average, and total. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 | p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*p)); if( (argc==0 || SQLITE_NULL!=sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])) && p ){ p->n++; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated. But just to make | | | | | | | 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 | p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*p)); if( (argc==0 || SQLITE_NULL!=sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])) && p ){ p->n++; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated. But just to make ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our ** internal count when using count(*) and when the total count can be ** expressed as a 32-bit integer. */ assert( argc==1 || p==0 || p->n>0x7fffffff || p->bInverse || p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) ); #endif } static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){ CountCtx *p; p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0); sqlite3_result_int64(context, p ? p->n : 0); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC static void countInverse(sqlite3_context *ctx, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ CountCtx *p; p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(ctx, sizeof(*p)); /* p is always non-NULL since countStep() will have been called first */ if( (argc==0 || SQLITE_NULL!=sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])) && ALWAYS(p) ){ p->n--; #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG p->bInverse = 1; #endif } } #else # define countInverse 0 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC */ /* ** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions. */ static void minmaxStep( sqlite3_context *context, int NotUsed, sqlite3_value **argv ){ Mem *pArg = (Mem *)argv[0]; Mem *pBest; UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); pBest = (Mem *)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*pBest)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 | ){ GroupConcatCtx *pGCC; assert( argc==1 || argc==2 ); (void)argc; /* Suppress unused parameter warning */ if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])==SQLITE_NULL ) return; pGCC = (GroupConcatCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*pGCC)); /* pGCC is always non-NULL since groupConcatStep() will have always | | | 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 | ){ GroupConcatCtx *pGCC; assert( argc==1 || argc==2 ); (void)argc; /* Suppress unused parameter warning */ if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])==SQLITE_NULL ) return; pGCC = (GroupConcatCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*pGCC)); /* pGCC is always non-NULL since groupConcatStep() will have always ** run first to initialize it */ if( ALWAYS(pGCC) ){ int nVS; /* Must call sqlite3_value_text() to convert the argument into text prior ** to invoking sqlite3_value_bytes(), in case the text encoding is UTF16 */ (void)sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]); nVS = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]); pGCC->nAccum -= 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 | = (GroupConcatCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0); if( pGCC ){ StrAccum *pAccum = &pGCC->str; if( pAccum->accError==SQLITE_TOOBIG ){ sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context); }else if( pAccum->accError==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context); | | | 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 | = (GroupConcatCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0); if( pGCC ){ StrAccum *pAccum = &pGCC->str; if( pAccum->accError==SQLITE_TOOBIG ){ sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context); }else if( pAccum->accError==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context); }else{ const char *zText = sqlite3_str_value(pAccum); sqlite3_result_text(context, zText, pAccum->nChar, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); } } } #else # define groupConcatValue 0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 | sqlite3FindFunction(db, "like", 3, SQLITE_UTF8, 0)->funcFlags |= flags; } /* ** pExpr points to an expression which implements a function. If ** it is appropriate to apply the LIKE optimization to that function ** then set aWc[0] through aWc[2] to the wildcard characters and the | | | 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 | sqlite3FindFunction(db, "like", 3, SQLITE_UTF8, 0)->funcFlags |= flags; } /* ** pExpr points to an expression which implements a function. If ** it is appropriate to apply the LIKE optimization to that function ** then set aWc[0] through aWc[2] to the wildcard characters and the ** escape character and then return TRUE. If the function is not a ** LIKE-style function then return FALSE. ** ** The expression "a LIKE b ESCAPE c" is only considered a valid LIKE ** operator if c is a string literal that is exactly one byte in length. ** That one byte is stored in aWc[3]. aWc[3] is set to zero if there is ** no ESCAPE clause. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 | FUNCTION(substr, 2, 0, 0, substrFunc ), FUNCTION(substr, 3, 0, 0, substrFunc ), FUNCTION(substring, 2, 0, 0, substrFunc ), FUNCTION(substring, 3, 0, 0, substrFunc ), WAGGREGATE(sum, 1,0,0, sumStep, sumFinalize, sumFinalize, sumInverse, 0), WAGGREGATE(total, 1,0,0, sumStep,totalFinalize,totalFinalize,sumInverse, 0), WAGGREGATE(avg, 1,0,0, sumStep, avgFinalize, avgFinalize, sumInverse, 0), | | | | | | | 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 | FUNCTION(substr, 2, 0, 0, substrFunc ), FUNCTION(substr, 3, 0, 0, substrFunc ), FUNCTION(substring, 2, 0, 0, substrFunc ), FUNCTION(substring, 3, 0, 0, substrFunc ), WAGGREGATE(sum, 1,0,0, sumStep, sumFinalize, sumFinalize, sumInverse, 0), WAGGREGATE(total, 1,0,0, sumStep,totalFinalize,totalFinalize,sumInverse, 0), WAGGREGATE(avg, 1,0,0, sumStep, avgFinalize, avgFinalize, sumInverse, 0), WAGGREGATE(count, 0,0,0, countStep, countFinalize, countFinalize, countInverse, SQLITE_FUNC_COUNT|SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER ), WAGGREGATE(count, 1,0,0, countStep, countFinalize, countFinalize, countInverse, SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER ), WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize, groupConcatValue, groupConcatInverse, 0), WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize, groupConcatValue, groupConcatInverse, 0), LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE), #ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE), LIKEFUNC(like, 3, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE), #else LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoNorm, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE), LIKEFUNC(like, 3, &likeInfoNorm, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE), |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/hash.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
93 94 95 96 97 98 99 | if( pH->first ){ pH->first->prev = pNew; } pNew->prev = 0; pH->first = pNew; } } | | | 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 | if( pH->first ){ pH->first->prev = pNew; } pNew->prev = 0; pH->first = pNew; } } /* Resize the hash table so that it contains "new_size" buckets. ** ** The hash table might fail to resize if sqlite3_malloc() fails or ** if the new size is the same as the prior size. ** Return TRUE if the resize occurs and false if not. */ static int rehash(Hash *pH, unsigned int new_size){ struct _ht *new_ht; /* The new hash table */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/hwtime.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | ** This file contains inline asm code for retrieving "high-performance" ** counters for x86 and x86_64 class CPUs. */ #ifndef SQLITE_HWTIME_H #define SQLITE_HWTIME_H /* | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | ** This file contains inline asm code for retrieving "high-performance" ** counters for x86 and x86_64 class CPUs. */ #ifndef SQLITE_HWTIME_H #define SQLITE_HWTIME_H /* ** The following routine only works on Pentium-class (or newer) processors. ** It uses the RDTSC opcode to read the cycle count value out of the ** processor and returns that value. This can be used for high-res ** profiling. */ #if !defined(__STRICT_ANSI__) && \ (defined(__GNUC__) || defined(_MSC_VER)) && \ (defined(i386) || defined(__i386__) || defined(_M_IX86)) |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/insert.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | ************************************************************************* ** This file contains C code routines that are called by the parser ** to handle INSERT statements in SQLite. */ #include "sqliteInt.h" /* | | | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 | ************************************************************************* ** This file contains C code routines that are called by the parser ** to handle INSERT statements in SQLite. */ #include "sqliteInt.h" /* ** Generate code that will ** ** (1) acquire a lock for table pTab then ** (2) open pTab as cursor iCur. ** ** If pTab is a WITHOUT ROWID table, then it is the PRIMARY KEY index ** for that table that is actually opened. */ void sqlite3OpenTable( Parse *pParse, /* Generate code into this VDBE */ int iCur, /* The cursor number of the table */ int iDb, /* The database index in sqlite3.aDb[] */ Table *pTab, /* The table to be opened */ int opcode /* OP_OpenRead or OP_OpenWrite */ ){ Vdbe *v; assert( !IsVirtual(pTab) ); assert( pParse->pVdbe!=0 ); v = pParse->pVdbe; assert( opcode==OP_OpenWrite || opcode==OP_OpenRead ); sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum, (opcode==OP_OpenWrite)?1:0, pTab->zName); if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opcode, iCur, pTab->tnum, iDb, pTab->nNVCol); VdbeComment((v, "%s", pTab->zName)); }else{ Index *pPk = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); assert( pPk!=0 ); assert( pPk->tnum==pTab->tnum || CORRUPT_DB ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, opcode, iCur, pPk->tnum, iDb); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk); VdbeComment((v, "%s", pTab->zName)); } } /* ** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index ** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in ** the table, according to the affinity of the column: ** ** Character Column affinity ** ------------------------------ ** 'A' BLOB ** 'B' TEXT ** 'C' NUMERIC |
︙ | ︙ | |||
127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | zColAff[j++] = pTab->aCol[i].affinity; } } do{ zColAff[j--] = 0; }while( j>=0 && zColAff[j]<=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); } | | | 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 | zColAff[j++] = pTab->aCol[i].affinity; } } do{ zColAff[j--] = 0; }while( j>=0 && zColAff[j]<=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); } return zColAff; } /* ** Make changes to the evolving bytecode to do affinity transformations ** of values that are about to be gathered into a row for table pTab. ** ** For ordinary (legacy, non-strict) tables: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
161 162 163 164 165 166 167 | ** 'C' NUMERIC ** 'D' INTEGER ** 'E' REAL ** ** For STRICT tables: ** ------------------ ** | | | 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 | ** 'C' NUMERIC ** 'D' INTEGER ** 'E' REAL ** ** For STRICT tables: ** ------------------ ** ** Generate an appropriate OP_TypeCheck opcode that will verify the ** datatypes against the column definitions in pTab. If iReg==0, that ** means an OP_MakeRecord opcode has already been generated and should be ** the last opcode generated. The new OP_TypeCheck needs to be inserted ** before the OP_MakeRecord. The new OP_TypeCheck should use the same ** register set as the OP_MakeRecord. If iReg>0 then register iReg is ** the first of a series of registers that will form the new record. ** Apply the type checking to that array of registers. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 | sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, zColAff, i); } } } /* ** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices | | | | | 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, zColAff, i); } } } /* ** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices ** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if ** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can ** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT. */ static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iDb, Table *pTab){ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p); int i; int iEnd = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE VTable *pVTab = IsVirtual(pTab) ? sqlite3GetVTable(p->db, pTab) : 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
446 447 448 449 450 451 452 | memId = pInfo->regCtr; } return memId; } /* ** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the | | | 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 | memId = pInfo->regCtr; } return memId; } /* ** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the ** register used by the autoincrement tracker. */ void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){ AutoincInfo *p; /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* The database connection */ Db *pDb; /* Database only autoinc table */ int memId; /* Register holding max rowid */ Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; /* VDBE under construction */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
475 476 477 478 479 480 481 | /* 4 */ {OP_Rowid, 0, 0, 0}, /* 5 */ {OP_Column, 0, 1, 0}, /* 6 */ {OP_AddImm, 0, 0, 0}, /* 7 */ {OP_Copy, 0, 0, 0}, /* 8 */ {OP_Goto, 0, 11, 0}, /* 9 */ {OP_Next, 0, 2, 0}, /* 10 */ {OP_Integer, 0, 0, 0}, | | | 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 | /* 4 */ {OP_Rowid, 0, 0, 0}, /* 5 */ {OP_Column, 0, 1, 0}, /* 6 */ {OP_AddImm, 0, 0, 0}, /* 7 */ {OP_Copy, 0, 0, 0}, /* 8 */ {OP_Goto, 0, 11, 0}, /* 9 */ {OP_Next, 0, 2, 0}, /* 10 */ {OP_Integer, 0, 0, 0}, /* 11 */ {OP_Close, 0, 0, 0} }; VdbeOp *aOp; pDb = &db->aDb[p->iDb]; memId = p->regCtr; assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, pDb->pSchema) ); sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, 0, p->iDb, pDb->pSchema->pSeqTab, OP_OpenRead); sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, memId-1, p->pTab->zName); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
813 814 815 816 817 818 819 | ** INSERT INTO <table1> SELECT * FROM <table2>; ** ** Then special optimizations can be applied that make the transfer ** very fast and which reduce fragmentation of indices. ** ** This is the 2nd template. */ | | | 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 | ** INSERT INTO <table1> SELECT * FROM <table2>; ** ** Then special optimizations can be applied that make the transfer ** very fast and which reduce fragmentation of indices. ** ** This is the 2nd template. */ if( pColumn==0 && pSelect!=0 && pTrigger==0 && xferOptimization(pParse, pTab, pSelect, onError, iDb) ){ assert( !pTrigger ); assert( pList==0 ); goto insert_end; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
841 842 843 844 845 846 847 | if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ regRowid++; pParse->nMem++; } regData = regRowid+1; /* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure | | | 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 | if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ regRowid++; pParse->nMem++; } regData = regRowid+1; /* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and ** remember the column indices. ** ** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column ** is named in the IDLIST, then record in the ipkColumn variable ** the index into IDLIST of the primary key column. ipkColumn is ** the index of the primary key as it appears in IDLIST, not as ** is appears in the original table. (The index of the INTEGER |
︙ | ︙ | |||
876 877 878 879 880 881 882 | pColumn->a[i].u4.idx = j; if( i!=j ) bIdListInOrder = 0; if( j==pTab->iPKey ){ ipkColumn = i; assert( !withoutRowid ); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS if( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & (COLFLAG_STORED|COLFLAG_VIRTUAL) ){ | | | 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 | pColumn->a[i].u4.idx = j; if( i!=j ) bIdListInOrder = 0; if( j==pTab->iPKey ){ ipkColumn = i; assert( !withoutRowid ); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS if( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & (COLFLAG_STORED|COLFLAG_VIRTUAL) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot INSERT into generated column \"%s\"", pTab->aCol[j].zCnName); goto insert_cleanup; } #endif break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
933 934 935 936 937 938 939 | /* Set useTempTable to TRUE if the result of the SELECT statement ** should be written into a temporary table (template 4). Set to ** FALSE if each output row of the SELECT can be written directly into ** the destination table (template 3). ** ** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one | | | 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 | /* Set useTempTable to TRUE if the result of the SELECT statement ** should be written into a temporary table (template 4). Set to ** FALSE if each output row of the SELECT can be written directly into ** the destination table (template 3). ** ** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a ** temp table in the case of row triggers. */ if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, iDb, pTab) ){ useTempTable = 1; } if( useTempTable ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
969 970 971 972 973 974 975 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Insert, srcTab, regRec, regTempRowid); sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrL); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrL); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRec); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTempRowid); } }else{ | | | | 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Insert, srcTab, regRec, regTempRowid); sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrL); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrL); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRec); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTempRowid); } }else{ /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a ** single-row VALUES clause */ NameContext sNC; memset(&sNC, 0, sizeof(sNC)); sNC.pParse = pParse; srcTab = -1; assert( useTempTable==0 ); if( pList ){ nColumn = pList->nExpr; if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pList) ){ goto insert_cleanup; } }else{ nColumn = 0; } } /* If there is no IDLIST term but the table has an integer primary ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key ** column index in the original table definition. */ if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){ ipkColumn = pTab->iPKey; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS if( ipkColumn>=0 && (pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated)!=0 ){ testcase( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasVirtual ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 | assert( COLFLAG_NOINSERT==(COLFLAG_GENERATED|COLFLAG_HIDDEN) ); if( (pTab->tabFlags & (TF_HasGenerated|TF_HasHidden))!=0 ){ for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){ if( pTab->aCol[i].colFlags & COLFLAG_NOINSERT ) nHidden++; } } if( nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){ | | | | 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 | assert( COLFLAG_NOINSERT==(COLFLAG_GENERATED|COLFLAG_HIDDEN) ); if( (pTab->tabFlags & (TF_HasGenerated|TF_HasHidden))!=0 ){ for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){ if( pTab->aCol[i].colFlags & COLFLAG_NOINSERT ) nHidden++; } } if( nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied", pTabList->a, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn); goto insert_cleanup; } } if( pColumn!=0 && nColumn!=pColumn->nId ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d values for %d columns", nColumn, pColumn->nId); goto insert_cleanup; } /* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted */ if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows)!=0 && !pParse->nested && !pParse->pTriggerTab && !pParse->bReturning ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 | if( tmask & TRIGGER_BEFORE ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SoftNull, iRegStore); } continue; }else if( pColumn==0 ){ /* Hidden columns that are not explicitly named in the INSERT ** get there default value */ | | | | | | 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 | if( tmask & TRIGGER_BEFORE ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SoftNull, iRegStore); } continue; }else if( pColumn==0 ){ /* Hidden columns that are not explicitly named in the INSERT ** get there default value */ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]), iRegStore); continue; } } if( pColumn ){ assert( pColumn->eU4==EU4_IDX ); for(j=0; j<pColumn->nId && pColumn->a[j].u4.idx!=i; j++){} if( j>=pColumn->nId ){ /* A column not named in the insert column list gets its ** default value */ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]), iRegStore); continue; } k = j; }else if( nColumn==0 ){ /* This is INSERT INTO ... DEFAULT VALUES. Load the default value. */ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]), iRegStore); continue; }else{ k = i - nHidden; } if( useTempTable ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, k, iRegStore); }else if( pSelect ){ if( regFromSelect!=regData ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+k, iRegStore); } }else{ Expr *pX = pList->a[k].pExpr; int y = sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pX, iRegStore); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 | ** table column affinities. */ if( !isView ){ sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regCols+1); } /* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */ | | | 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 | ** table column affinities. */ if( !isView ){ sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regCols+1); } /* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop); sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1); } if( !isView ){ if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 | sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regIns, 0, 0); } /* Set the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag if either (a) there are no REPLACE ** constraints or (b) there are no triggers and this table is not a ** parent table in a foreign key constraint. It is safe to set the ** flag in the second case as if any REPLACE constraint is hit, an | | | 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 | sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regIns, 0, 0); } /* Set the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag if either (a) there are no REPLACE ** constraints or (b) there are no triggers and this table is not a ** parent table in a foreign key constraint. It is safe to set the ** flag in the second case as if any REPLACE constraint is hit, an ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each ** cursor that is disturbed. And these instructions both clear the ** VdbeCursor.seekResult variable, disabling the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT ** functionality. */ bUseSeek = (isReplace==0 || !sqlite3VdbeHasSubProgram(v)); sqlite3CompleteInsertion(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regIns, aRegIdx, 0, appendFlag, bUseSeek ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 | */ if( regRowCount ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1); } if( pTrigger ){ /* Code AFTER triggers */ | | | 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 | */ if( regRowCount ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1); } if( pTrigger ){ /* Code AFTER triggers */ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop); } /* The bottom of the main insertion loop, if the data source ** is a SELECT statement. */ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endOfLoop); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 | ** autoincrement tables. */ if( pParse->nested==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab==0 ){ sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse); } /* | | | 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 | ** autoincrement tables. */ if( pParse->nested==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab==0 ){ sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse); } /* ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not ** invoke the callback function. */ if( regRowCount ){ sqlite3CodeChangeCount(v, regRowCount, "rows inserted"); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 | #undef pTrigger #endif #ifdef tmask #undef tmask #endif /* | | | | 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 | #undef pTrigger #endif #ifdef tmask #undef tmask #endif /* ** Meanings of bits in of pWalker->eCode for ** sqlite3ExprReferencesUpdatedColumn() */ #define CKCNSTRNT_COLUMN 0x01 /* CHECK constraint uses a changing column */ #define CKCNSTRNT_ROWID 0x02 /* CHECK constraint references the ROWID */ /* This is the Walker callback from sqlite3ExprReferencesUpdatedColumn(). * Set bit 0x01 of pWalker->eCode if pWalker->eCode to 0 and if this ** expression node references any of the ** columns that are being modified by an UPDATE statement. */ static int checkConstraintExprNode(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN ){ assert( pExpr->iColumn>=0 || pExpr->iColumn==-1 ); if( pExpr->iColumn>=0 ){ if( pWalker->u.aiCol[pExpr->iColumn]>=0 ){ pWalker->eCode |= CKCNSTRNT_COLUMN; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 | typedef struct IndexIterator IndexIterator; struct IndexIterator { int eType; /* 0 for Index.pNext list. 1 for an array of IndexListTerm */ int i; /* Index of the current item from the list */ union { struct { /* Use this object for eType==0: A Index.pNext list */ Index *pIdx; /* The current Index */ | | | 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 | typedef struct IndexIterator IndexIterator; struct IndexIterator { int eType; /* 0 for Index.pNext list. 1 for an array of IndexListTerm */ int i; /* Index of the current item from the list */ union { struct { /* Use this object for eType==0: A Index.pNext list */ Index *pIdx; /* The current Index */ } lx; struct { /* Use this object for eType==1; Array of IndexListTerm */ int nIdx; /* Size of the array */ IndexListTerm *aIdx; /* Array of IndexListTerms */ } ax; } u; }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 | return pIter->u.ax.aIdx[i].p; }else{ ++(*pIx); pIter->u.lx.pIdx = pIter->u.lx.pIdx->pNext; return pIter->u.lx.pIdx; } } | | | 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 | return pIter->u.ax.aIdx[i].p; }else{ ++(*pIx); pIter->u.lx.pIdx = pIter->u.lx.pIdx->pNext; return pIter->u.lx.pIdx; } } /* ** Generate code to do constraint checks prior to an INSERT or an UPDATE ** on table pTab. ** ** The regNewData parameter is the first register in a range that contains ** the data to be inserted or the data after the update. There will be ** pTab->nCol+1 registers in this range. The first register (the one |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 | u8 pkChng, /* Non-zero if the rowid or PRIMARY KEY changed */ u8 overrideError, /* Override onError to this if not OE_Default */ int ignoreDest, /* Jump to this label on an OE_Ignore resolution */ int *pbMayReplace, /* OUT: Set to true if constraint may cause a replace */ int *aiChng, /* column i is unchanged if aiChng[i]<0 */ Upsert *pUpsert /* ON CONFLICT clauses, if any. NULL otherwise */ ){ | | | 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 | u8 pkChng, /* Non-zero if the rowid or PRIMARY KEY changed */ u8 overrideError, /* Override onError to this if not OE_Default */ int ignoreDest, /* Jump to this label on an OE_Ignore resolution */ int *pbMayReplace, /* OUT: Set to true if constraint may cause a replace */ int *aiChng, /* column i is unchanged if aiChng[i]<0 */ Upsert *pUpsert /* ON CONFLICT clauses, if any. NULL otherwise */ ){ Vdbe *v; /* VDBE under construction */ Index *pIdx; /* Pointer to one of the indices */ Index *pPk = 0; /* The PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ int i; /* loop counter */ int ix; /* Index loop counter */ int nCol; /* Number of columns */ int onError; /* Conflict resolution strategy */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 | isUpdate = regOldData!=0; db = pParse->db; v = pParse->pVdbe; assert( v!=0 ); assert( !IsView(pTab) ); /* This table is not a VIEW */ nCol = pTab->nCol; | | | | 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 | isUpdate = regOldData!=0; db = pParse->db; v = pParse->pVdbe; assert( v!=0 ); assert( !IsView(pTab) ); /* This table is not a VIEW */ nCol = pTab->nCol; /* pPk is the PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables and NULL for ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the ** pPk index or 1 for a rowid table. In other words, nPkField is the ** number of fields in the true primary key of the table. */ if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ pPk = 0; nPkField = 1; }else{ pPk = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 | case OE_Replace: { /* If there are DELETE triggers on this table and the ** recursive-triggers flag is set, call GenerateRowDelete() to ** remove the conflicting row from the table. This will fire ** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries. ** ** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers | | | | | | 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 | case OE_Replace: { /* If there are DELETE triggers on this table and the ** recursive-triggers flag is set, call GenerateRowDelete() to ** remove the conflicting row from the table. This will fire ** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries. ** ** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry ** when it is inserted. ** ** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called, ** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require ** statement rollback (if the statement is aborted after the delete ** takes place). Earlier versions called sqlite3MultiWrite() regardless, ** but being more selective here allows statements like: ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 | ** This loop also handles the case of the PRIMARY KEY index for a ** WITHOUT ROWID table. */ for(pIdx = indexIteratorFirst(&sIdxIter, &ix); pIdx; pIdx = indexIteratorNext(&sIdxIter, &ix) ){ | | | 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 | ** This loop also handles the case of the PRIMARY KEY index for a ** WITHOUT ROWID table. */ for(pIdx = indexIteratorFirst(&sIdxIter, &ix); pIdx; pIdx = indexIteratorNext(&sIdxIter, &ix) ){ int regIdx; /* Range of registers holding content for pIdx */ int regR; /* Range of registers holding conflicting PK */ int iThisCur; /* Cursor for this UNIQUE index */ int addrUniqueOk; /* Jump here if the UNIQUE constraint is satisfied */ int addrConflictCk; /* First opcode in the conflict check logic */ if( aRegIdx[ix]==0 ) continue; /* Skip indices that do not change */ if( pUpsert ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM if( pIdx->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_PRIMARYKEY ){ sqlite3SetMakeRecordP5(v, pIdx->pTable); } #endif sqlite3VdbeReleaseRegisters(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn, 0, 0); | | | | 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM if( pIdx->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_PRIMARYKEY ){ sqlite3SetMakeRecordP5(v, pIdx->pTable); } #endif sqlite3VdbeReleaseRegisters(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn, 0, 0); /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index ** of a WITHOUT ROWID table and there has been no change the ** primary key, then no collision is possible. The collision detection ** logic below can all be skipped. */ if( isUpdate && pPk==pIdx && pkChng==0 ){ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); continue; } /* Find out what action to take in case there is a uniqueness conflict */ onError = pIdx->onError; if( onError==OE_None ){ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); continue; /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */ } if( overrideError!=OE_Default ){ onError = overrideError; }else if( onError==OE_Default ){ onError = OE_Abort; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 | sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); continue; } #endif /* ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK */ /* Check to see if the new index entry will be unique */ sqlite3VdbeVerifyAbortable(v, onError); | | | 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 | sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); continue; } #endif /* ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK */ /* Check to see if the new index entry will be unique */ sqlite3VdbeVerifyAbortable(v, onError); addrConflictCk = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_NoConflict, iThisCur, addrUniqueOk, regIdx, pIdx->nKeyCol); VdbeCoverage(v); /* Generate code to handle collisions */ regR = pIdx==pPk ? regIdx : sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nPkField); if( isUpdate || onError==OE_Replace ){ if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 | x = sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pIdx, pPk->aiColumn[i]); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iThisCur, x, regR+i); VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pTab->aCol[pPk->aiColumn[i]].zCnName)); } } if( isUpdate ){ | | | | | 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 | x = sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pIdx, pPk->aiColumn[i]); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iThisCur, x, regR+i); VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pTab->aCol[pPk->aiColumn[i]].zCnName)); } } if( isUpdate ){ /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID ** table, only conflict if the new PRIMARY KEY values are actually ** different from the old. See TH3 withoutrowid04.test. ** ** For a UNIQUE index, only conflict if the PRIMARY KEY values ** of the matched index row are different from the original PRIMARY ** KEY values of this row before the update. */ int addrJump = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+pPk->nKeyCol; int op = OP_Ne; int regCmp = (IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? regIdx : regR); for(i=0; i<pPk->nKeyCol; i++){ char *p4 = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pPk->azColl[i]); x = pPk->aiColumn[i]; assert( x>=0 ); if( i==(pPk->nKeyCol-1) ){ addrJump = addrUniqueOk; op = OP_Eq; } x = sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, x); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op, regOldData+1+x, addrJump, regCmp+i, p4, P4_COLLSEQ ); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL); VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_Eq); VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_Ne); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 | } seenReplace = 1; break; } } sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); if( regR!=regIdx ) sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regR, nPkField); | | | 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 | } seenReplace = 1; break; } } sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); if( regR!=regIdx ) sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regR, nPkField); if( pUpsertClause && upsertIpkReturn && sqlite3UpsertNextIsIPK(pUpsertClause) ){ sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, upsertIpkDelay+1); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, upsertIpkReturn); upsertIpkReturn = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 | } /* ** Attempt the transfer optimization on INSERTs of the form ** ** INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2; ** | | | 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 | } /* ** Attempt the transfer optimization on INSERTs of the form ** ** INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2; ** ** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1. ** Columns are not decoded and reassembled, which greatly improves ** performance. Raw index records are transferred in the same way. ** ** The xfer optimization is only attempted if tab1 and tab2 are compatible. ** There are lots of rules for determining compatibility - see comments ** embedded in the code for details. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 | if( (pDest->tabFlags & TF_Strict)!=0 && (pSrc->tabFlags & TF_Strict)==0 ){ return 0; /* Cannot feed from a non-strict into a strict table */ } for(i=0; i<pDest->nCol; i++){ Column *pDestCol = &pDest->aCol[i]; Column *pSrcCol = &pSrc->aCol[i]; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_HIDDEN_COLUMNS | | | | | 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 | if( (pDest->tabFlags & TF_Strict)!=0 && (pSrc->tabFlags & TF_Strict)==0 ){ return 0; /* Cannot feed from a non-strict into a strict table */ } for(i=0; i<pDest->nCol; i++){ Column *pDestCol = &pDest->aCol[i]; Column *pSrcCol = &pSrc->aCol[i]; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_HIDDEN_COLUMNS if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0 && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN ){ return 0; /* Neither table may have __hidden__ columns */ } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS /* Even if tables t1 and t2 have identical schemas, if they contain ** generated columns, then this statement is semantically incorrect: ** ** INSERT INTO t2 SELECT * FROM t1; ** ** The reason is that generated column values are returned by the ** the SELECT statement on the right but the INSERT statement on the ** left wants them to be omitted. ** ** Nevertheless, this is a useful notational shorthand to tell SQLite ** to do a bulk transfer all of the content from t1 over to t2. ** ** We could, in theory, disable this (except for internal use by the ** VACUUM command where it is actually needed). But why do that? It ** seems harmless enough, and provides a useful service. */ if( (pDestCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED) != (pSrcCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED) ){ return 0; /* Both columns have the same generated-column type */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 | return 0; /* Different generator expressions */ } } #endif if( pDestCol->affinity!=pSrcCol->affinity ){ return 0; /* Affinity must be the same on all columns */ } | | | | 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 | return 0; /* Different generator expressions */ } } #endif if( pDestCol->affinity!=pSrcCol->affinity ){ return 0; /* Affinity must be the same on all columns */ } if( sqlite3_stricmp(sqlite3ColumnColl(pDestCol), sqlite3ColumnColl(pSrcCol))!=0 ){ return 0; /* Collating sequence must be the same on all columns */ } if( pDestCol->notNull && !pSrcCol->notNull ){ return 0; /* tab2 must be NOT NULL if tab1 is */ } /* Default values for second and subsequent columns need to match. */ if( (pDestCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)==0 && i>0 ){ Expr *pDestExpr = sqlite3ColumnExpr(pDest, pDestCol); Expr *pSrcExpr = sqlite3ColumnExpr(pSrc, pSrcCol); assert( pDestExpr==0 || pDestExpr->op==TK_SPAN ); assert( pDestExpr==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pDestExpr, EP_IntValue) ); assert( pSrcExpr==0 || pSrcExpr->op==TK_SPAN ); assert( pSrcExpr==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pSrcExpr, EP_IntValue) ); if( (pDestExpr==0)!=(pSrcExpr==0) || (pDestExpr!=0 && strcmp(pDestExpr->u.zToken, pSrcExpr->u.zToken)!=0) ){ return 0; /* Default values must be the same for all columns */ } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CHECK if( pDest->pCheck && sqlite3ExprListCompare(pSrc->pCheck,pDest->pCheck,-1) ){ return 0; /* Tables have different CHECK constraints. Ticket #2252 */ } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY | | | | 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CHECK if( pDest->pCheck && sqlite3ExprListCompare(pSrc->pCheck,pDest->pCheck,-1) ){ return 0; /* Tables have different CHECK constraints. Ticket #2252 */ } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table contains ** any foreign key constraints. This is more restrictive than necessary. ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM ** command, and the VACUUM command disables foreign key constraints. So ** the extra complication to make this rule less restrictive is probably ** not worth the effort. Ticket [6284df89debdfa61db8073e062908af0c9b6118e] */ assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pDest) ); if( (db->flags & SQLITE_ForeignKeys)!=0 && pDest->u.tab.pFKey!=0 ){ return 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 | ** ** Conditions under which the destination must be empty: ** ** (1) There is no INTEGER PRIMARY KEY but there are indices. ** (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields ** of index entries might need to change.) ** | | | 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 | ** ** Conditions under which the destination must be empty: ** ** (1) There is no INTEGER PRIMARY KEY but there are indices. ** (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields ** of index entries might need to change.) ** ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization ** is unable to test uniqueness.) ** ** (3) onError is something other than OE_Abort and OE_Rollback. */ addr1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rewind, iDest, 0); VdbeCoverage(v); emptyDestTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Goto); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 | sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR); VdbeComment((v, "%s", pDestIdx->zName)); addr1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rewind, iSrc, 0); VdbeCoverage(v); if( db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum ){ /* This INSERT command is part of a VACUUM operation, which guarantees ** that the destination table is empty. If all indexed columns use ** collation sequence BINARY, then it can also be assumed that the | | | | | | | | 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 | sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR); VdbeComment((v, "%s", pDestIdx->zName)); addr1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rewind, iSrc, 0); VdbeCoverage(v); if( db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum ){ /* This INSERT command is part of a VACUUM operation, which guarantees ** that the destination table is empty. If all indexed columns use ** collation sequence BINARY, then it can also be assumed that the ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted ** order. In this case, instead of seeking within the b-tree as part ** of every OP_IdxInsert opcode, an OP_SeekEnd is added before the ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key ** should be inserted. This is faster. ** ** If any of the indexed columns use a collation sequence other than ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user ** might change the definition of a collation sequence and then run ** a VACUUM command. In that case keys may not be written in strictly ** sorted order. */ for(i=0; i<pSrcIdx->nColumn; i++){ const char *zColl = pSrcIdx->azColl[i]; if( sqlite3_stricmp(sqlite3StrBINARY, zColl) ) break; } if( i==pSrcIdx->nColumn ){ idxInsFlags = OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT; sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SeekEnd, iDest); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowCell, iDest, iSrc); } }else if( !HasRowid(pSrc) && pDestIdx->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_PRIMARYKEY ){ idxInsFlags |= OPFLAG_NCHANGE; } if( idxInsFlags!=(OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowData, iSrc, regData, 1); if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0 && !HasRowid(pDest) && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pDestIdx) ){ codeWithoutRowidPreupdate(pParse, pDest, iDest, regData); } } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IdxInsert, iDest, regData); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, idxInsFlags|OPFLAG_APPEND); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iSrc, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/json.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
624 625 626 627 628 629 630 | jsonAppendChar(pOut, '}'); break; } } } /* | | | 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 | jsonAppendChar(pOut, '}'); break; } } } /* ** Return a JsonNode and all its descendants as a JSON string. */ static void jsonReturnJson( JsonNode *pNode, /* Node to return */ sqlite3_context *pCtx, /* Return value for this function */ sqlite3_value **aReplace /* Array of replacement values */ ){ JsonString s; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 | char c; JsonString *pStr; UNUSED_PARAMETER(argc); UNUSED_PARAMETER(argv); pStr = (JsonString*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(ctx, 0); #ifdef NEVER /* pStr is always non-NULL since jsonArrayStep() or jsonObjectStep() will | | | 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 | char c; JsonString *pStr; UNUSED_PARAMETER(argc); UNUSED_PARAMETER(argv); pStr = (JsonString*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(ctx, 0); #ifdef NEVER /* pStr is always non-NULL since jsonArrayStep() or jsonObjectStep() will ** always have been called to initialize it */ if( NEVER(!pStr) ) return; #endif z = pStr->zBuf; for(i=1; i<pStr->nUsed && ((c = z[i])!=',' || inStr || nNest); i++){ if( c=='"' ){ inStr = !inStr; }else if( c=='\\' ){ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/main.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-46656-45156 The sqlite3_version[] string constant ** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro. */ const char sqlite3_version[] = SQLITE_VERSION; #endif /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns | | | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-46656-45156 The sqlite3_version[] string constant ** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro. */ const char sqlite3_version[] = SQLITE_VERSION; #endif /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns ** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant. */ const char *sqlite3_libversion(void){ return sqlite3_version; } /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-25063-23286 The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns a ** pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the ** SQLITE_SOURCE_ID C preprocessor macro. Except if SQLite is built using ** an edited copy of the amalgamation, then the last four characters of |
︙ | ︙ | |||
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 | ** all database files specified with a relative pathname. ** ** See also the "PRAGMA data_store_directory" SQL command. */ char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0; /* | | | | 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | ** all database files specified with a relative pathname. ** ** See also the "PRAGMA data_store_directory" SQL command. */ char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0; /* ** Initialize SQLite. ** ** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation, ** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with ** SQLite. But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT ** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as ** sqlite3_open(). ** ** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process, ** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown. ** ** The first thread to call this routine runs the initialization to ** completion. If subsequent threads call this routine before the first ** thread has finished the initialization process, then the subsequent |
︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 | ** of this routine. */ if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit ){ sqlite3MemoryBarrier(); return SQLITE_OK; } | | | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 | ** of this routine. */ if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit ){ sqlite3MemoryBarrier(); return SQLITE_OK; } /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to ** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error. ** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex, ** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do. ** ** The mutex subsystem must take care of serializing its own ** initialization. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
292 293 294 295 296 297 298 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DESERIALIZE if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3MemdbInit(); } #endif if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ | | | 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DESERIALIZE if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3MemdbInit(); } #endif if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage); sqlite3MemoryBarrier(); sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1; #ifdef SQLITE_EXTRA_INIT bRunExtraInit = 1; #endif } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
523 524 525 526 527 528 529 | break; } case SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE_HDRSZ: { /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-39100-27317 The SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE_HDRSZ option takes ** a single parameter which is a pointer to an integer and writes into ** that integer the number of extra bytes per page required for each page ** in SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. */ | | | 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 | break; } case SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE_HDRSZ: { /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-39100-27317 The SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE_HDRSZ option takes ** a single parameter which is a pointer to an integer and writes into ** that integer the number of extra bytes per page required for each page ** in SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. */ *va_arg(ap, int*) = sqlite3HeaderSizeBtree() + sqlite3HeaderSizePcache() + sqlite3HeaderSizePcache1(); break; } case SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE: { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
610 611 612 613 614 615 616 | #endif case SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE: { sqlite3GlobalConfig.szLookaside = va_arg(ap, int); sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int); break; } | | | 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 | #endif case SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE: { sqlite3GlobalConfig.szLookaside = va_arg(ap, int); sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int); break; } /* Record a pointer to the logger function and its first argument. ** The default is NULL. Logging is disabled if the function pointer is ** NULL. */ case SQLITE_CONFIG_LOG: { /* MSVC is picky about pulling func ptrs from va lists. ** http://support.microsoft.com/kb/47961 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
735 736 737 738 739 740 741 | } va_end(ap); return rc; } /* ** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection. | | | | | 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 | } va_end(ap); return rc; } /* ** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection. ** Return SQLITE_OK on success. ** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY. ** ** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot. ** The cnt parameter is the number of slots. If pStart is NULL the ** space for the lookaside memory is obtained from sqlite3_malloc(). ** If pStart is not NULL then it is sz*cnt bytes of memory to use for ** the lookaside memory. */ static int setupLookaside(sqlite3 *db, void *pBuf, int sz, int cnt){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_LOOKASIDE void *pStart; sqlite3_int64 szAlloc = sz*(sqlite3_int64)cnt; int nBig; /* Number of full-size slots */ int nSm; /* Number smaller LOOKASIDE_SMALL-byte slots */ if( sqlite3LookasideUsed(db,0)>0 ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } /* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for ** both at the same time. */ if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){ sqlite3_free(db->lookaside.pStart); } /* The size of a lookaside slot after ROUNDDOWN8 needs to be larger ** than a pointer to be useful. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 | */ int sqlite3IsBinary(const CollSeq *p){ assert( p==0 || p->xCmp!=binCollFunc || strcmp(p->zName,"BINARY")==0 ); return p==0 || p->xCmp==binCollFunc; } /* | | | 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 | */ int sqlite3IsBinary(const CollSeq *p){ assert( p==0 || p->xCmp!=binCollFunc || strcmp(p->zName,"BINARY")==0 ); return p==0 || p->xCmp==binCollFunc; } /* ** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE. ** ** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independent ** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents ** extends only to the 26 characters used in the English language. ** ** At the moment there is only a UTF-8 implementation. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 | #else UNUSED_PARAMETER(db); #endif } /* ** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared | | | 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 | #else UNUSED_PARAMETER(db); #endif } /* ** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared ** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects. */ static int connectionIsBusy(sqlite3 *db){ int j; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); if( db->pVdbe ) return 1; for(j=0; j<db->nDb; j++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[j].pBt; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 | #endif db->eOpenState = SQLITE_STATE_ERROR; /* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema ** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()). ** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into | | | 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 | #endif db->eOpenState = SQLITE_STATE_ERROR; /* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema ** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()). ** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database ** structure? */ sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema); if( db->xAutovacDestr ){ db->xAutovacDestr(db->pAutovacPagesArg); } sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 | void sqlite3RollbackAll(sqlite3 *db, int tripCode){ int i; int inTrans = 0; int schemaChange; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); | | | 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 | void sqlite3RollbackAll(sqlite3 *db, int tripCode){ int i; int inTrans = 0; int schemaChange; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback(). ** This is important in case the transaction being rolled back has ** modified the database schema. If the b-tree mutexes are not taken ** here, then another shared-cache connection might sneak in between ** the database rollback and schema reset, which can cause false ** corruption reports in some cases. */ sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(db); schemaChange = (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaChange)!=0 && db->init.busy==0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 | if( p->xBusyHandler==0 || p->nBusy<0 ) return 0; rc = p->xBusyHandler(p->pBusyArg, p->nBusy); if( rc==0 ){ p->nBusy = -1; }else{ p->nBusy++; } | | | 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 | if( p->xBusyHandler==0 || p->nBusy<0 ) return 0; rc = p->xBusyHandler(p->pBusyArg, p->nBusy); if( rc==0 ){ p->nBusy = -1; }else{ p->nBusy++; } return rc; } /* ** This routine sets the busy callback for an Sqlite database to the ** given callback function with the given argument. */ int sqlite3_busy_handler( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK /* ** This routine sets the progress callback for an Sqlite database to the ** given callback function with the given argument. The progress callback will ** be invoked every nOps opcodes. */ void sqlite3_progress_handler( | | | | 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK /* ** This routine sets the progress callback for an Sqlite database to the ** given callback function with the given argument. The progress callback will ** be invoked every nOps opcodes. */ void sqlite3_progress_handler( sqlite3 *db, int nOps, int (*xProgress)(void*), void *pArg ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ){ (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; return; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 | return AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted)!=0; } /* ** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except ** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is ** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code | | | 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 | return AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted)!=0; } /* ** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except ** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is ** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code ** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared. */ int sqlite3CreateFunc( sqlite3 *db, const char *zFunctionName, int nArg, int enc, void *pUserData, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 | enc &= (SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK|SQLITE_ANY); /* The SQLITE_INNOCUOUS flag is the same bit as SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE. But ** the meaning is inverted. So flip the bit. */ assert( SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE==SQLITE_INNOCUOUS ); extraFlags ^= SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE; /* tag-20230109-1 */ | | | 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 | enc &= (SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK|SQLITE_ANY); /* The SQLITE_INNOCUOUS flag is the same bit as SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE. But ** the meaning is inverted. So flip the bit. */ assert( SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE==SQLITE_INNOCUOUS ); extraFlags ^= SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE; /* tag-20230109-1 */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this ** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the ** SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE macro. SQLITE_UTF16 is not used internally. ** ** If SQLITE_ANY is specified, add three versions of the function ** to the hash table. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 | default: enc = SQLITE_UTF8; break; } #else enc = SQLITE_UTF8; #endif | | | | 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 | default: enc = SQLITE_UTF8; break; } #else enc = SQLITE_UTF8; #endif /* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so, ** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function ** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the ** operation to continue but invalidate all precompiled statements. */ p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0); if( p && (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK)==(u32)enc && p->nArg==nArg ){ if( db->nVdbeActive ){ sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, "unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements"); assert( !db->mallocFailed ); return SQLITE_BUSY; }else{ sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, 0); } }else if( xSFunc==0 && xFinal==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 | xDestroy(p); goto out; } pArg->nRef = 0; pArg->xDestroy = xDestroy; pArg->pUserData = p; } | | | 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 | xDestroy(p); goto out; } pArg->nRef = 0; pArg->xDestroy = xDestroy; pArg->pUserData = p; } rc = sqlite3CreateFunc(db, zFunc, nArg, enc, p, xSFunc, xStep, xFinal, xValue, xInverse, pArg ); if( pArg && pArg->nRef==0 ){ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (xStep==0 && xFinal==0) ); xDestroy(p); sqlite3_free(pArg); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 | } /* ** Declare that a function has been overloaded by a virtual table. ** ** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then ** this routine is a no-op. If the function does not exist, then create | | | 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 | } /* ** Declare that a function has been overloaded by a virtual table. ** ** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then ** this routine is a no-op. If the function does not exist, then create ** a new one that always throws a run-time error. ** ** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they ** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists. ** A global function must exist in order for name resolution to work ** properly. */ int sqlite3_overload_function( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 | return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zName, nArg, SQLITE_UTF8, zCopy, sqlite3InvalidFunction, 0, 0, sqlite3_free); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE /* ** Register a trace function. The pArg from the previously registered trace | | | 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 | return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zName, nArg, SQLITE_UTF8, zCopy, sqlite3InvalidFunction, 0, 0, sqlite3_free); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE /* ** Register a trace function. The pArg from the previously registered trace ** is returned. ** ** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes. A non-NULL ** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each ** SQL statement. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED void *sqlite3_trace(sqlite3 *db, void(*xTrace)(void*,const char*), void *pArg){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 | db->pTraceArg = pArg; sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); return SQLITE_OK; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* | | | | 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 | db->pTraceArg = pArg; sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); return SQLITE_OK; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* ** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered ** profile function is returned. ** ** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes. A non-NULL ** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of ** each SQL statement that is run. */ void *sqlite3_profile( sqlite3 *db, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 | /* ** Register a function to be invoked prior to each autovacuum that ** determines the number of pages to vacuum. */ int sqlite3_autovacuum_pages( sqlite3 *db, /* Attach the hook to this database */ | | | 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 | /* ** Register a function to be invoked prior to each autovacuum that ** determines the number of pages to vacuum. */ int sqlite3_autovacuum_pages( sqlite3 *db, /* Attach the hook to this database */ unsigned int (*xCallback)(void*,const char*,u32,u32,u32), void *pArg, /* Argument to the function */ void (*xDestructor)(void*) /* Destructor for pArg */ ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ){ if( xDestructor ) xDestructor(pArg); return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** The sqlite3_wal_hook() callback registered by sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(). ** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file ** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by ** wal_autocheckpoint()). | | | 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** The sqlite3_wal_hook() callback registered by sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(). ** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file ** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by ** wal_autocheckpoint()). */ int sqlite3WalDefaultHook( void *pClientData, /* Argument */ sqlite3 *db, /* Connection */ const char *zDb, /* Database */ int nFrame /* Size of WAL */ ){ if( nFrame>=SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(pClientData) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 | return rc; #endif } /* ** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points | | | | | | 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 | return rc; #endif } /* ** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points ** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are ** checkpointed. */ int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-41613-20553 The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) is equivalent to ** sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(D,X,SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE,0,0). */ return sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(db,zDb,SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE,0,0); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** Run a checkpoint on database iDb. This is a no-op if database iDb is ** not currently open in WAL mode. ** ** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this ** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If ** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is ** returned (i.e. SQLITE_IOERR). Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. ** ** The mutex on database handle db should be held by the caller. The mutex ** associated with the specific b-tree being checkpointed is taken by ** this function while the checkpoint is running. ** ** If iDb is passed SQLITE_MAX_DB then all attached databases are |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 | if( !db || db->mallocFailed ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } return db->errCode; } int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3 *db){ return db ? db->iSysErrno : 0; | | | | | | | | 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 | if( !db || db->mallocFailed ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } return db->errCode; } int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3 *db){ return db ? db->iSysErrno : 0; } /* ** Return a string that describes the kind of error specified in the ** argument. For now, this simply calls the internal sqlite3ErrStr() ** function. */ const char *sqlite3_errstr(int rc){ return sqlite3ErrStr(rc); } /* ** Create a new collating function for database "db". The name is zName ** and the encoding is enc. */ static int createCollation( sqlite3* db, const char *zName, u8 enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*), void(*xDel)(void*) ){ CollSeq *pColl; int enc2; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this ** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the ** SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE macro. SQLITE_UTF16 is not used internally. */ enc2 = enc; testcase( enc2==SQLITE_UTF16 ); testcase( enc2==SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED ); if( enc2==SQLITE_UTF16 || enc2==SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED ){ enc2 = SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE; } if( enc2<SQLITE_UTF8 || enc2>SQLITE_UTF16BE ){ return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; } /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation ** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there ** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements. */ pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0); if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){ if( db->nVdbeActive ){ sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, "unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements"); return SQLITE_BUSY; } sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, 0); /* If collation sequence pColl was created directly by a call to ** sqlite3_create_collation, and not generated by synthCollSeq(), ** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated. ** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need ** to be called. */ if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){ CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName); int j; for(j=0; j<3; j++){ CollSeq *p = &aColl[j]; if( p->enc==pColl->enc ){ if( p->xDel ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 | ** URIs specified as part of ATTACH statements. ** ** The first argument to this function is the name of the VFS to use (or ** a NULL to signify the default VFS) if the URI does not contain a "vfs=xxx" ** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename) ** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain ** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in | | | | | 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 | ** URIs specified as part of ATTACH statements. ** ** The first argument to this function is the name of the VFS to use (or ** a NULL to signify the default VFS) if the URI does not contain a "vfs=xxx" ** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename) ** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain ** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in ** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains ** "cache=xxx" or "mode=xxx" query parameters. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case *ppVfs is set to point to ** the VFS that should be used to open the database file. *pzFile is set to ** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. The value ** stored in *pzFile is a database name acceptable to sqlite3_uri_parameter() ** and is in the same format as names created using sqlite3_create_filename(). ** The caller must invoke sqlite3_free_filename() (not sqlite3_free()!) on ** the value returned in *pzFile to avoid a memory leak. ** ** If an error occurs, then an SQLite error code is returned and *pzErrMsg ** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error ** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually release ** this buffer by calling sqlite3_free(). */ int sqlite3ParseUri( const char *zDefaultVfs, /* VFS to use if no "vfs=xxx" query option */ const char *zUri, /* Nul-terminated URI to parse */ unsigned int *pFlags, /* IN/OUT: SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags */ sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */ char **pzFile, /* OUT: Filename component of URI */ char **pzErrMsg /* OUT: Error message (if rc!=SQLITE_OK) */ ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; unsigned int flags = *pFlags; const char *zVfs = zDefaultVfs; char *zFile; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 | ){ char *zOpt; int eState; /* Parser state when parsing URI */ int iIn; /* Input character index */ int iOut = 0; /* Output character index */ u64 nByte = nUri+8; /* Bytes of space to allocate */ | | | | | | | | | | | 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 | ){ char *zOpt; int eState; /* Parser state when parsing URI */ int iIn; /* Input character index */ int iOut = 0; /* Output character index */ u64 nByte = nUri+8; /* Bytes of space to allocate */ /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen ** method that there may be extra parameters following the file-name. */ flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI; for(iIn=0; iIn<nUri; iIn++) nByte += (zUri[iIn]=='&'); zFile = sqlite3_malloc64(nByte); if( !zFile ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; memset(zFile, 0, 4); /* 4-byte of 0x00 is the start of DB name marker */ zFile += 4; iIn = 5; #ifdef SQLITE_ALLOW_URI_AUTHORITY if( strncmp(zUri+5, "///", 3)==0 ){ iIn = 7; /* The following condition causes URIs with five leading / characters ** like file://///host/path to be converted into UNCs like //host/path. ** The correct URI for that UNC has only two or four leading / characters ** file://host/path or file:////host/path. But 5 leading slashes is a ** common error, we are told, so we handle it as a special case. */ if( strncmp(zUri+7, "///", 3)==0 ){ iIn++; } }else if( strncmp(zUri+5, "//localhost/", 12)==0 ){ iIn = 16; } #else /* Discard the scheme and authority segments of the URI. */ if( zUri[5]=='/' && zUri[6]=='/' ){ iIn = 7; while( zUri[iIn] && zUri[iIn]!='/' ) iIn++; if( iIn!=7 && (iIn!=16 || memcmp("localhost", &zUri[7], 9)) ){ *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s", iIn-7, &zUri[7]); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; goto parse_uri_out; } } #endif /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer. ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way. ** ** Within this loop, variable eState may be set to 0, 1 or 2, depending ** on the parsing context. As follows: ** ** 0: Parsing file-name. ** 1: Parsing name section of a name=value query parameter. ** 2: Parsing value section of a name=value query parameter. */ eState = 0; while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' ){ iIn++; if( c=='%' && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn]) && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1]) ){ int octet = (sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]) << 4); octet += sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]); assert( octet>=0 && octet<256 ); if( octet==0 ){ #ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_URI_00_ERROR /* This branch is taken when "%00" appears within the URI. In this ** case we ignore all text in the remainder of the path, name or ** value currently being parsed. So ignore the current character ** and skip to the next "?", "=" or "&", as appropriate. */ while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' && (eState!=0 || c!='?') && (eState!=1 || (c!='=' && c!='&')) && (eState!=2 || c!='&') ){ iIn++; } continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 | eState = 1; } zFile[iOut++] = c; } if( eState==1 ) zFile[iOut++] = '\0'; memset(zFile+iOut, 0, 4); /* end-of-options + empty journal filenames */ | | | 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 | eState = 1; } zFile[iOut++] = c; } if( eState==1 ) zFile[iOut++] = '\0'; memset(zFile+iOut, 0, 4); /* end-of-options + empty journal filenames */ /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted ** here. Options that are interpreted here include "vfs" and those that ** correspond to flags that may be passed to the sqlite3_open_v2() ** method. */ zOpt = &zFile[sqlite3Strlen30(zFile)+1]; while( zOpt[0] ){ int nOpt = sqlite3Strlen30(zOpt); char *zVal = &zOpt[nOpt+1]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 | aMode = aCacheMode; limit = mask; zModeType = "cache"; } if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){ static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = { { "ro", SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY }, | | | 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 | aMode = aCacheMode; limit = mask; zModeType = "cache"; } if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){ static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = { { "ro", SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY }, { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE }, { "rwc", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE }, { "memory", SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY }, { 0, 0 } }; mask = SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 | return 0; } /* ** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of | | | 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 | return 0; } /* ** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of ** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename" ** is UTF-8 encoded. */ static int openDatabase( const char *zFilename, /* Database filename UTF-8 encoded */ sqlite3 **ppDb, /* OUT: Returned database handle */ unsigned int flags, /* Operational flags */ const char *zVfs /* Name of the VFS to use */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 | ** SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE, SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE, ** SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE, SQLITE_OPEN_EXRESCODE, and some reserved ** bits. Silently mask off all other flags. */ flags &= ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB | | | | | | | | | 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 | ** SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE, SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE, ** SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE, SQLITE_OPEN_EXRESCODE, and some reserved ** bits. Silently mask off all other flags. */ flags &= ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB | SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB | SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB | SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX | SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX | SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ); /* Allocate the sqlite data structure */ db = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(sqlite3) ); if( db==0 ) goto opendb_out; if( isThreadsafe #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MULTITHREADED_CHECKS || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex #endif ){ db->mutex = sqlite3MutexAlloc(SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE); if( db->mutex==0 ){ sqlite3_free(db); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 | db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_WORKER_THREADS] = SQLITE_DEFAULT_WORKER_THREADS; db->autoCommit = 1; db->nextAutovac = -1; db->szMmap = sqlite3GlobalConfig.szMmap; db->nextPagesize = 0; db->init.azInit = sqlite3StdType; /* Any array of string ptrs will do */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP | | | | | 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 | db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_WORKER_THREADS] = SQLITE_DEFAULT_WORKER_THREADS; db->autoCommit = 1; db->nextAutovac = -1; db->szMmap = sqlite3GlobalConfig.szMmap; db->nextPagesize = 0; db->init.azInit = sqlite3StdType; /* Any array of string ptrs will do */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP /* Beginning with version 3.37.0, using the VFS xFetch() API to memory-map ** the temporary files used to do external sorts (see code in vdbesort.c) ** is disabled. It can still be used either by defining ** SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP at compile time or by using the ** SQLITE_TESTCTRL_SORTER_MMAP test-control at runtime. */ db->nMaxSorterMmap = 0x7FFFFFFF; #endif db->flags |= SQLITE_ShortColNames | SQLITE_EnableTrigger | SQLITE_EnableView | SQLITE_CacheSpill #if !defined(SQLITE_TRUSTED_SCHEMA) || SQLITE_TRUSTED_SCHEMA+0!=0 | SQLITE_TrustedSchema #endif /* The SQLITE_DQS compile-time option determines the default settings ** for SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DDL and SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DML. ** ** SQLITE_DQS SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DDL SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DML ** ---------- ----------------------- ----------------------- ** undefined on on ** 3 on on ** 2 on off ** 1 off on ** 0 off off ** ** Legacy behavior is 3 (double-quoted string literals are allowed anywhere) ** and so that is the default. But developers are encouraged to use ** -DSQLITE_DQS=0 (best) or -DSQLITE_DQS=1 (second choice) if possible. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_DQS) # define SQLITE_DQS 3 #endif #if (SQLITE_DQS&1)==1 | SQLITE_DqsDML |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 | flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI; } } #endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX && defined(SQLITE_OS_KV_OPTIONAL) */ /* Parse the filename/URI argument ** | | | 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 | flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI; } } #endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX && defined(SQLITE_OS_KV_OPTIONAL) */ /* Parse the filename/URI argument ** ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument. ** Throw an error if any non-sense combination is used. If we ** do not block illegal combinations here, it could trigger ** assert() statements in deeper layers. Sensible combinations ** are: ** ** 1: SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY ** 2: SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 | if( !db->mallocFailed ){ sqlite3SetTextEncoding(db, SCHEMA_ENC(db)); } sqlite3BtreeLeave(db->aDb[0].pBt); db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0); /* The default safety_level for the main database is FULL; for the temp | | | 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 | if( !db->mallocFailed ){ sqlite3SetTextEncoding(db, SCHEMA_ENC(db)); } sqlite3BtreeLeave(db->aDb[0].pBt); db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0); /* The default safety_level for the main database is FULL; for the temp ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults. */ db->aDb[0].zDbSName = "main"; db->aDb[0].safety_level = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS+1; db->aDb[1].zDbSName = "temp"; db->aDb[1].safety_level = PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_OFF; db->eOpenState = SQLITE_STATE_OPEN; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto opendb_out; } } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS /* Testing use only!!! The -DSQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS=1 compile-time | | | 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto opendb_out; } } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS /* Testing use only!!! The -DSQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS=1 compile-time ** option gives access to internal functions by default. ** Testing use only!!! */ db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_InternalFunc; #endif /* -DSQLITE_DEFAULT_LOCKING_MODE=1 makes EXCLUSIVE the default locking ** mode. -DSQLITE_DEFAULT_LOCKING_MODE=0 make NORMAL the default locking ** mode. Doing nothing at all also makes NORMAL the default. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 | } /* ** Open a new database handle. */ int sqlite3_open( | | | | | 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 | } /* ** Open a new database handle. */ int sqlite3_open( const char *zFilename, sqlite3 **ppDb ){ return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb, SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0); } int sqlite3_open_v2( const char *filename, /* Database filename (UTF-8) */ sqlite3 **ppDb, /* OUT: SQLite db handle */ int flags, /* Flags */ const char *zVfs /* Name of VFS module to use */ ){ return openDatabase(filename, ppDb, (unsigned int)flags, zVfs); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 /* ** Open a new database handle. */ int sqlite3_open16( const void *zFilename, sqlite3 **ppDb ){ char const *zFilename8; /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */ sqlite3_value *pVal; int rc; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 | } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ /* ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ int sqlite3_create_collation( | | | | | | | | 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 | } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ /* ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ int sqlite3_create_collation( sqlite3* db, const char *zName, int enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ){ return sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, enc, pCtx, xCompare, 0); } /* ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ int sqlite3_create_collation_v2( sqlite3* db, const char *zName, int enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*), void(*xDel)(void*) ){ int rc; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 /* ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ int sqlite3_create_collation16( | | | | 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 /* ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ int sqlite3_create_collation16( sqlite3* db, const void *zName, int enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; char *zName8; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ /* ** Register a collation sequence factory callback with the database handle ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory. */ int sqlite3_collation_needed( | | | | | | 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ /* ** Register a collation sequence factory callback with the database handle ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory. */ int sqlite3_collation_needed( sqlite3 *db, void *pCollNeededArg, void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*) ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; #endif sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); db->xCollNeeded = xCollNeeded; db->xCollNeeded16 = 0; db->pCollNeededArg = pCollNeededArg; sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); return SQLITE_OK; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 /* ** Register a collation sequence factory callback with the database handle ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory. */ int sqlite3_collation_needed16( sqlite3 *db, void *pCollNeededArg, void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*) ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; #endif sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); db->xCollNeeded = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842 | if( !pTab || IsView(pTab) ){ pTab = 0; goto error_out; } /* Find the column for which info is requested */ if( zColumnName==0 ){ | | | 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 | if( !pTab || IsView(pTab) ){ pTab = 0; goto error_out; } /* Find the column for which info is requested */ if( zColumnName==0 ){ /* Query for existence of table only */ }else{ for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){ pCol = &pTab->aCol[iCol]; if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pCol->zCnName, zColumnName) ){ break; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 | } } } /* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned ** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey ** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities: | | | | | | | 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 | } } } /* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned ** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey ** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities: ** ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column. ** ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an ** explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol. */ if( pCol ){ zDataType = sqlite3ColumnType(pCol,0); zCollSeq = sqlite3ColumnColl(pCol); notnull = pCol->notNull!=0; primarykey = (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_PRIMKEY)!=0; autoinc = pTab->iPKey==iCol && (pTab->tabFlags & TF_Autoincrement)!=0; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 | */ int sqlite3_sleep(int ms){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs; int rc; pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0); if( pVfs==0 ) return 0; | | | 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 | */ int sqlite3_sleep(int ms){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs; int rc; pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0); if( pVfs==0 ) return 0; /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep() ** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's. */ rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, ms<0 ? 0 : 1000*ms)/1000); return rc; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 | rc = sqlite3FaultSim(0); break; } /* ** sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd) ** | | | 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 | rc = sqlite3FaultSim(0); break; } /* ** sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd) ** ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures ** are benign. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: { typedef void (*void_function)(void); void_function xBenignBegin; void_function xBenignEnd; xBenignBegin = va_arg(ap, void_function); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 | ** The integer returned reveals the byte-order of the computer on which ** SQLite is running: ** ** 1 big-endian, determined at run-time ** 10 little-endian, determined at run-time ** 432101 big-endian, determined at compile-time ** 123410 little-endian, determined at compile-time | | | | 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 | ** The integer returned reveals the byte-order of the computer on which ** SQLite is running: ** ** 1 big-endian, determined at run-time ** 10 little-endian, determined at run-time ** 432101 big-endian, determined at compile-time ** 123410 little-endian, determined at compile-time */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BYTEORDER: { rc = SQLITE_BYTEORDER*100 + SQLITE_LITTLEENDIAN*10 + SQLITE_BIGENDIAN; break; } /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N) ** ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The ** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled. For normal ** operation N should be 0. The idea is that a test program (like the ** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times ** with various optimizations disabled to verify that the same answer ** is obtained in every case. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS: { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 | /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_NEVER_CORRUPT, int); ** ** Set or clear a flag that indicates that the database file is always well- ** formed and never corrupt. This flag is clear by default, indicating that ** database files might have arbitrary corruption. Setting the flag during ** testing causes certain assert() statements in the code to be activated | | | 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 | /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_NEVER_CORRUPT, int); ** ** Set or clear a flag that indicates that the database file is always well- ** formed and never corrupt. This flag is clear by default, indicating that ** database files might have arbitrary corruption. Setting the flag during ** testing causes certain assert() statements in the code to be activated ** that demonstrate invariants on well-formed database files. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_NEVER_CORRUPT: { sqlite3GlobalConfig.neverCorrupt = va_arg(ap, int); break; } /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_EXTRA_SCHEMA_CHECKS, int); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 | case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_ONCE_RESET_THRESHOLD: { sqlite3GlobalConfig.iOnceResetThreshold = va_arg(ap, int); break; } /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr); ** | | | 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 | case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_ONCE_RESET_THRESHOLD: { sqlite3GlobalConfig.iOnceResetThreshold = va_arg(ap, int); break; } /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr); ** ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context ** pointer ptr. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE: { #ifdef SQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE typedef void (*branch_callback)(void*,unsigned int, unsigned char,unsigned char); sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch = va_arg(ap,branch_callback); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 | *pn = sqlite3BtreeSeekCount(db->aDb->pBt); (void)db; /* Silence harmless unused variable warning */ break; } /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TRACEFLAGS, op, ptr) ** | | | 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 | *pn = sqlite3BtreeSeekCount(db->aDb->pBt); (void)db; /* Silence harmless unused variable warning */ break; } /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TRACEFLAGS, op, ptr) ** ** "ptr" is a pointer to a u32. ** ** op==0 Store the current sqlite3TreeTrace in *ptr ** op==1 Set sqlite3TreeTrace to the value *ptr ** op==2 Store the current sqlite3WhereTrace in *ptr ** op==3 Set sqlite3WhereTrace to the value *ptr */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TRACEFLAGS: { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 | u64 *pU64 = va_arg(ap,u64*); int *pI2 = va_arg(ap,int*); *pI1 = rLogEst; *pU64 = sqlite3LogEstToInt(rLogEst); *pI2 = sqlite3LogEst(*pU64); break; } | | | 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 | u64 *pU64 = va_arg(ap,u64*); int *pI2 = va_arg(ap,int*); *pI1 = rLogEst; *pU64 = sqlite3LogEstToInt(rLogEst); *pI2 = sqlite3LogEst(*pU64); break; } #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WSD) /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE, id, *piValue) ** ** If "id" is an integer between 1 and SQLITE_NTUNE then set the value ** of the id-th tuning parameter to *piValue. If "id" is between -1 ** and -SQLITE_NTUNE, then write the current value of the (-id)-th |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 | p = databaseName(p); sqlite3_free((char*)p - 4); } /* ** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks | | | 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 | p = databaseName(p); sqlite3_free((char*)p - 4); } /* ** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks ** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of the query parameter. ** ** The zFilename argument is the filename pointer passed into the xOpen() ** method of a VFS implementation. The zParam argument is the name of the ** query parameter we seek. This routine returns the value of the zParam ** parameter if it exists. If the parameter does not exist, this routine ** returns a NULL pointer. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 | #endif pBt = sqlite3DbNameToBtree(db, zDbName); return pBt ? sqlite3BtreeIsReadonly(pBt) : -1; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT /* | | | | 4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 4741 4742 4743 4744 4745 4746 4747 | #endif pBt = sqlite3DbNameToBtree(db, zDbName); return pBt ? sqlite3BtreeIsReadonly(pBt) : -1; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT /* ** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently ** being read by handle db. */ int sqlite3_snapshot_get( sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb, sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot ){ int rc = SQLITE_ERROR; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 | sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_WAL */ return rc; } /* | | | | | 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 | sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_WAL */ return rc; } /* ** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot identified by pSnapshot. */ int sqlite3_snapshot_open( sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot ){ int rc = SQLITE_ERROR; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 | ** The name can optionally begin with "SQLITE_" but the "SQLITE_" prefix ** is not required for a match. */ int sqlite3_compileoption_used(const char *zOptName){ int i, n; int nOpt; const char **azCompileOpt; | | | | 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 | ** The name can optionally begin with "SQLITE_" but the "SQLITE_" prefix ** is not required for a match. */ int sqlite3_compileoption_used(const char *zOptName){ int i, n; int nOpt; const char **azCompileOpt; #if SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( zOptName==0 ){ (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; return 0; } #endif azCompileOpt = sqlite3CompileOptions(&nOpt); if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, "SQLITE_", 7)==0 ) zOptName += 7; n = sqlite3Strlen30(zOptName); /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is ** adequate. No need for a binary search. */ for(i=0; i<nOpt; i++){ if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, azCompileOpt[i], n)==0 && sqlite3IsIdChar((unsigned char)azCompileOpt[i][n])==0 ){ return 1; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/mem1.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
152 153 154 155 156 157 158 | } /* ** Like free() but works for allocations obtained from sqlite3MemMalloc() ** or sqlite3MemRealloc(). ** ** For this low-level routine, we already know that pPrior!=0 since | | | 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 | } /* ** Like free() but works for allocations obtained from sqlite3MemMalloc() ** or sqlite3MemRealloc(). ** ** For this low-level routine, we already know that pPrior!=0 since ** cases where pPrior==0 will have been intercepted and dealt with ** by higher-level routines. */ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){ #ifdef SQLITE_MALLOCSIZE SQLITE_FREE(pPrior); #else sqlite3_int64 *p = (sqlite3_int64*)pPrior; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | #if defined(__APPLE__) && !defined(SQLITE_WITHOUT_ZONEMALLOC) int cpuCount; size_t len; if( _sqliteZone_ ){ return SQLITE_OK; } len = sizeof(cpuCount); | | | | 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 | #if defined(__APPLE__) && !defined(SQLITE_WITHOUT_ZONEMALLOC) int cpuCount; size_t len; if( _sqliteZone_ ){ return SQLITE_OK; } len = sizeof(cpuCount); /* One usually wants to use hw.activecpu for MT decisions, but not here */ sysctlbyname("hw.ncpu", &cpuCount, &len, NULL, 0); if( cpuCount>1 ){ /* defer MT decisions to system malloc */ _sqliteZone_ = malloc_default_zone(); }else{ /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks, ** e.g. we have our own dedicated locks */ _sqliteZone_ = malloc_create_zone(4096, 0); malloc_set_zone_name(_sqliteZone_, "Sqlite_Heap"); } #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && !defined(SQLITE_WITHOUT_ZONEMALLOC) */ UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); return SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/mutex_unix.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | */ #ifdef SQLITE_MUTEX_PTHREADS #include <pthread.h> /* ** The sqlite3_mutex.id, sqlite3_mutex.nRef, and sqlite3_mutex.owner fields | | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | */ #ifdef SQLITE_MUTEX_PTHREADS #include <pthread.h> /* ** The sqlite3_mutex.id, sqlite3_mutex.nRef, and sqlite3_mutex.owner fields ** are necessary under two conditions: (1) Debug builds and (2) using ** home-grown mutexes. Encapsulate these conditions into a single #define. */ #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX) # define SQLITE_MUTEX_NREF 1 #else # define SQLITE_MUTEX_NREF 0 #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 | /* ** The sqlite3_mutex_held() and sqlite3_mutex_notheld() routine are ** intended for use only inside assert() statements. On some platforms, ** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to ** deliver incorrect results. In particular, if pthread_equal() is ** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery | | | 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | /* ** The sqlite3_mutex_held() and sqlite3_mutex_notheld() routine are ** intended for use only inside assert() statements. On some platforms, ** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to ** deliver incorrect results. In particular, if pthread_equal() is ** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery ** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a ** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic. But we are ** told that HPUX is not such a platform. If so, then these routines ** will not always work correctly on HPUX. ** ** On those platforms where pthread_equal() is not atomic, SQLite ** should be compiled without -DSQLITE_DEBUG and with -DNDEBUG to ** make sure no assert() statements are evaluated and hence these |
︙ | ︙ | |||
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | ** may add additional static mutexes. Static mutexes are for internal ** use by SQLite only. Applications that use SQLite mutexes should ** use only the dynamic mutexes returned by SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST or ** SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE. ** ** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST ** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc() | | | 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 | ** may add additional static mutexes. Static mutexes are for internal ** use by SQLite only. Applications that use SQLite mutexes should ** use only the dynamic mutexes returned by SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST or ** SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE. ** ** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST ** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc() ** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static ** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has ** the same type number. */ static sqlite3_mutex *pthreadMutexAlloc(int iType){ static sqlite3_mutex staticMutexes[] = { SQLITE3_MUTEX_INITIALIZER(2), SQLITE3_MUTEX_INITIALIZER(3), |
︙ | ︙ | |||
253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | #ifdef SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX /* If recursive mutexes are not available, then we have to grow ** our own. This implementation assumes that pthread_equal() ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place. | | | 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 | #ifdef SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX /* If recursive mutexes are not available, then we have to grow ** our own. This implementation assumes that pthread_equal() ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place. ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same ** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result. */ { pthread_t self = pthread_self(); if( p->nRef>0 && pthread_equal(p->owner, self) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
296 297 298 299 300 301 302 | #ifdef SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX /* If recursive mutexes are not available, then we have to grow ** our own. This implementation assumes that pthread_equal() ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place. | | | 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 | #ifdef SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX /* If recursive mutexes are not available, then we have to grow ** our own. This implementation assumes that pthread_equal() ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place. ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same ** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result. */ { pthread_t self = pthread_self(); if( p->nRef>0 && pthread_equal(p->owner, self) ){ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/mutex_w32.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | /* ** Each recursive mutex is an instance of the following structure. */ struct sqlite3_mutex { CRITICAL_SECTION mutex; /* Mutex controlling the lock */ int id; /* Mutex type */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | /* ** Each recursive mutex is an instance of the following structure. */ struct sqlite3_mutex { CRITICAL_SECTION mutex; /* Mutex controlling the lock */ int id; /* Mutex type */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG volatile int nRef; /* Number of entrances */ volatile DWORD owner; /* Thread holding this mutex */ volatile LONG trace; /* True to trace changes */ #endif }; /* ** These are the initializer values used when declaring a "static" mutex |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/os.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
133 134 135 136 137 138 139 | && op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCK_TIMEOUT && op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_DONE && op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_START ){ /* Faults are not injected into COMMIT_PHASETWO because, assuming SQLite ** is using a regular VFS, it is called after the corresponding ** transaction has been committed. Injecting a fault at this point | | | 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 | && op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCK_TIMEOUT && op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_DONE && op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_START ){ /* Faults are not injected into COMMIT_PHASETWO because, assuming SQLite ** is using a regular VFS, it is called after the corresponding ** transaction has been committed. Injecting a fault at this point ** confuses the test scripts - the COMMIT command returns SQLITE_NOMEM ** but the transaction is committed anyway. ** ** The core must call OsFileControl() though, not OsFileControlHint(), ** as if a custom VFS (e.g. zipvfs) returns an error here, it probably ** means the commit really has failed and an error should be returned ** to the user. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | memset(zBufOut, 0, nByte); if( ALWAYS(nByte>(signed)sizeof(unsigned)) ) nByte = sizeof(unsigned int); memcpy(zBufOut, &sqlite3Config.iPrngSeed, nByte); return SQLITE_OK; }else{ return pVfs->xRandomness(pVfs, nByte, zBufOut); } | | | 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 | memset(zBufOut, 0, nByte); if( ALWAYS(nByte>(signed)sizeof(unsigned)) ) nByte = sizeof(unsigned int); memcpy(zBufOut, &sqlite3Config.iPrngSeed, nByte); return SQLITE_OK; }else{ return pVfs->xRandomness(pVfs, nByte, zBufOut); } } int sqlite3OsSleep(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nMicro){ return pVfs->xSleep(pVfs, nMicro); } int sqlite3OsGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs){ return pVfs->xGetLastError ? pVfs->xGetLastError(pVfs, 0, 0) : 0; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/os_unix.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | ** implementation uses Posix Advisory Locks. Alternative implementations ** use flock(), dot-files, various proprietary locking schemas, or simply ** skip locking all together. ** ** This source file is organized into divisions where the logic for various ** subfunctions is contained within the appropriate division. PLEASE ** KEEP THE STRUCTURE OF THIS FILE INTACT. New code should be placed | | | 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | ** implementation uses Posix Advisory Locks. Alternative implementations ** use flock(), dot-files, various proprietary locking schemas, or simply ** skip locking all together. ** ** This source file is organized into divisions where the logic for various ** subfunctions is contained within the appropriate division. PLEASE ** KEEP THE STRUCTURE OF THIS FILE INTACT. New code should be placed ** in the correct division and should be clearly labelled. ** ** The layout of divisions is as follows: ** ** * General-purpose declarations and utility functions. ** * Unique file ID logic used by VxWorks. ** * Various locking primitive implementations (all except proxy locking): ** + for Posix Advisory Locks |
︙ | ︙ | |||
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 | ** 5. AFP locking (OSX only), ** 6. Named POSIX semaphores (VXWorks only), ** 7. proxy locking. (OSX only) ** ** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE ** is defined to 1. The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic ** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem | | | 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | ** 5. AFP locking (OSX only), ** 6. Named POSIX semaphores (VXWorks only), ** 7. proxy locking. (OSX only) ** ** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE ** is defined to 1. The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic ** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem ** where the database is located. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE) # if defined(__APPLE__) # define SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE 1 # else # define SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE 0 # endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
222 223 224 225 226 227 228 | #else /* Always cast the getpid() return type for compatibility with ** kernel modules in VxWorks. */ # define osGetpid(X) (pid_t)getpid() #endif /* | | | 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 | #else /* Always cast the getpid() return type for compatibility with ** kernel modules in VxWorks. */ # define osGetpid(X) (pid_t)getpid() #endif /* ** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not ** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK */ #define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x) ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY)) /* Forward references */ typedef struct unixShm unixShm; /* Connection shared memory */ typedef struct unixShmNode unixShmNode; /* Shared memory instance */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
290 291 292 293 294 295 296 | #endif #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* The next group of variables are used to track whether or not the ** transaction counter in bytes 24-27 of database files are updated ** whenever any part of the database changes. An assertion fault will ** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction ** counter. This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the | | | | 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 | #endif #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* The next group of variables are used to track whether or not the ** transaction counter in bytes 24-27 of database files are updated ** whenever any part of the database changes. An assertion fault will ** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction ** counter. This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the ** one described by ticket #3584. */ unsigned char transCntrChng; /* True if the transaction counter changed */ unsigned char dbUpdate; /* True if any part of database file changed */ unsigned char inNormalWrite; /* True if in a normal write operation */ #endif #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that ** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c. */ char aPadding[32]; #endif }; /* This variable holds the process id (pid) from when the xRandomness() |
︙ | ︙ | |||
444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | ** lacks the fcntl() system call. So redefine fcntl() to be something ** that always succeeds. This means that locking does not occur under ** DJGPP. But it is DOS - what did you expect? */ #ifdef __DJGPP__ { "fstat", 0, 0 }, #define osFstat(a,b,c) 0 | | | 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | ** lacks the fcntl() system call. So redefine fcntl() to be something ** that always succeeds. This means that locking does not occur under ** DJGPP. But it is DOS - what did you expect? */ #ifdef __DJGPP__ { "fstat", 0, 0 }, #define osFstat(a,b,c) 0 #else { "fstat", (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)fstat, 0 }, #define osFstat ((int(*)(int,struct stat*))aSyscall[5].pCurrent) #endif { "ftruncate", (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)ftruncate, 0 }, #define osFtruncate ((int(*)(int,off_t))aSyscall[6].pCurrent) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
605 606 607 608 609 610 611 | #else return 0; #endif } /* ** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the | | | 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 | #else return 0; #endif } /* ** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the ** "unix" VFSes. Return SQLITE_OK upon successfully updating the ** system call pointer, or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if there is no configurable ** system call named zName. */ static int unixSetSystemCall( sqlite3_vfs *pNotUsed, /* The VFS pointer. Not used */ const char *zName, /* Name of system call to override */ sqlite3_syscall_ptr pNewFunc /* Pointer to new system call value */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
688 689 690 691 692 693 694 | if( aSyscall[i].pCurrent!=0 ) return aSyscall[i].zName; } return 0; } /* ** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid | | | 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 | if( aSyscall[i].pCurrent!=0 ) return aSyscall[i].zName; } return 0; } /* ** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid ** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for ** standard input, output, and error. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR # define SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR 3 #endif /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
730 731 732 733 734 735 736 | break; } if( fd>=SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR ) break; if( (f & (O_EXCL|O_CREAT))==(O_EXCL|O_CREAT) ){ (void)osUnlink(z); } osClose(fd); | | | | | | | | 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 | break; } if( fd>=SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR ) break; if( (f & (O_EXCL|O_CREAT))==(O_EXCL|O_CREAT) ){ (void)osUnlink(z); } osClose(fd); sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING, "attempt to open \"%s\" as file descriptor %d", z, fd); fd = -1; if( osOpen("/dev/null", O_RDONLY, m)<0 ) break; } if( fd>=0 ){ if( m!=0 ){ struct stat statbuf; if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0 && statbuf.st_size==0 && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m ){ osFchmod(fd, m); } } #if defined(FD_CLOEXEC) && (!defined(O_CLOEXEC) || O_CLOEXEC==0) osFcntl(fd, F_SETFD, osFcntl(fd, F_GETFD, 0) | FD_CLOEXEC); #endif } return fd; } /* ** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The ** global mutex is used to protect the unixInodeInfo and ** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be ** shared by multiple threads. ** ** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex ** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert() ** statements. e.g. ** ** unixEnterMutex() ** assert( unixMutexHeld() ); ** unixEnterLeave() ** ** To prevent deadlock, the global unixBigLock must must be acquired |
︙ | ︙ | |||
881 882 883 884 885 886 887 | ** All calls to ftruncate() within this file should be made through ** this wrapper. On the Android platform, bypassing the logic below ** could lead to a corrupt database. */ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){ int rc; #ifdef __ANDROID__ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 | ** All calls to ftruncate() within this file should be made through ** this wrapper. On the Android platform, bypassing the logic below ** could lead to a corrupt database. */ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){ int rc; #ifdef __ANDROID__ /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if ** _FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 is defined. This means it is unsafe to attempt to ** truncate a file to any size larger than 2GiB. Silently ignore any ** such attempts. */ if( sz>(sqlite3_int64)0x7FFFFFFF ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; }else #endif do{ rc = osFtruncate(h,sz); }while( rc<0 && errno==EINTR ); return rc; } /* ** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something ** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions. Specifically, it is ** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY ** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into ** SQLITE_IOERR ** ** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks, ** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately. */ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) { assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) || (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) || (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) || (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) ); switch (posixError) { case EACCES: case EAGAIN: case ETIMEDOUT: case EBUSY: case EINTR: case ENOLCK: /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support * introspection, in which it actually means what it says */ return SQLITE_BUSY; case EPERM: return SQLITE_PERM; default: return sqliteIOErr; } } /****************************************************************************** ****************** Begin Unique File ID Utility Used By VxWorks *************** ** ** On most versions of unix, we can get a unique ID for a file by concatenating ** the device number and the inode number. But this does not work on VxWorks. ** On VxWorks, a unique file id must be based on the canonical filename. ** ** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a ** unique file ID in VxWorks. Each instance of this structure contains ** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count. ** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to ** zero. ** ** There are never very many files open at one time and lookups are not ** a performance-critical path, so it is sufficient to put these ** structures on a linked list. */ struct vxworksFileId { struct vxworksFileId *pNext; /* Next in a list of them all */ int nRef; /* Number of references to this one */ int nName; /* Length of the zCanonicalName[] string */ char *zCanonicalName; /* Canonical filename */ }; #if OS_VXWORKS /* ** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this ** variable: */ static struct vxworksFileId *vxworksFileList = 0; /* ** Simplify a filename into its canonical form |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 | /* Search for an existing entry that matching the canonical name. ** If found, increment the reference count and return a pointer to ** the existing file ID. */ unixEnterMutex(); for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){ | | | 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 | /* Search for an existing entry that matching the canonical name. ** If found, increment the reference count and return a pointer to ** the existing file ID. */ unixEnterMutex(); for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){ if( pCandidate->nName==n && memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0 ){ sqlite3_free(pNew); pCandidate->nRef++; unixLeaveMutex(); return pCandidate; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 | ** point to the same locking structure. The locking structure keeps ** a reference count (so we will know when to delete it) and a "cnt" ** field that tells us its internal lock status. cnt==0 means the ** file is unlocked. cnt==-1 means the file has an exclusive lock. ** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file. ** ** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking | | | | | | | 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 | ** point to the same locking structure. The locking structure keeps ** a reference count (so we will know when to delete it) and a "cnt" ** field that tells us its internal lock status. cnt==0 means the ** file is unlocked. cnt==-1 means the file has an exclusive lock. ** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file. ** ** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking ** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a ** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between ** a locked and an unlocked state. ** ** But wait: there are yet more problems with POSIX advisory locks. ** ** If you close a file descriptor that points to a file that has locks, ** all locks on that file that are owned by the current process are ** released. To work around this problem, each unixInodeInfo object ** maintains a count of the number of pending locks on the inode. ** When an attempt is made to close an unixFile, if there are ** other unixFile open on the same inode that are holding locks, the call ** to close() the file descriptor is deferred until all of the locks clear. ** The unixInodeInfo structure keeps a list of file descriptors that need to ** be closed and that list is walked (and cleared) when the last lock ** clears. ** ** Yet another problem: LinuxThreads do not play well with posix locks. ** ** Many older versions of linux use the LinuxThreads library which is ** not posix compliant. Under LinuxThreads, a lock created by thread ** A cannot be modified or overridden by a different thread B. ** Only thread A can modify the lock. Locking behavior is correct ** if the application uses the newer Native Posix Thread Library (NPTL) ** on linux - with NPTL a lock created by thread A can override locks ** in thread B. But there is no way to know at compile-time which ** threading library is being used. So there is no way to know at ** compile-time whether or not thread A can override locks on thread B. ** One has to do a run-time check to discover the behavior of the ** current process. ** ** SQLite used to support LinuxThreads. But support for LinuxThreads ** was dropped beginning with version 3.7.0. SQLite will still work with ** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection ** per database file in the same process and (2) database connections ** do not move across threads. */ /* ** An instance of the following structure serves as the key used ** to locate a particular unixInodeInfo object. */ struct unixFileId { dev_t dev; /* Device number */ #if OS_VXWORKS struct vxworksFileId *pId; /* Unique file ID for vxworks. */ #else /* We are told that some versions of Android contain a bug that ** sizes ino_t at only 32-bits instead of 64-bits. (See ** https://android-review.googlesource.com/#/c/115351/3/dist/sqlite3.c) ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number. ** On small machines that only have 32-bit inodes, this wastes 4 bytes, ** but that should not be a big deal. */ /* WAS: ino_t ino; */ u64 ino; /* Inode number */ #endif }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 | ** ** It is invoked after an error occurs in an OS function and errno has been ** set. It logs a message using sqlite3_log() containing the current value of ** errno and, if possible, the human-readable equivalent from strerror() or ** strerror_r(). ** ** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that | | | | | | | | | 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 | ** ** It is invoked after an error occurs in an OS function and errno has been ** set. It logs a message using sqlite3_log() containing the current value of ** errno and, if possible, the human-readable equivalent from strerror() or ** strerror_r(). ** ** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that ** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN). ** The two subsequent arguments should be the name of the OS function that ** failed (e.g. "unlink", "open") and the associated file-system path, ** if any. */ #define unixLogError(a,b,c) unixLogErrorAtLine(a,b,c,__LINE__) static int unixLogErrorAtLine( int errcode, /* SQLite error code */ const char *zFunc, /* Name of OS function that failed */ const char *zPath, /* File path associated with error */ int iLine /* Source line number where error occurred */ ){ char *zErr; /* Message from strerror() or equivalent */ int iErrno = errno; /* Saved syscall error number */ /* If this is not a threadsafe build (SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0), then use ** the strerror() function to obtain the human-readable error message ** equivalent to errno. Otherwise, use strerror_r(). */ #if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(HAVE_STRERROR_R) char aErr[80]; memset(aErr, 0, sizeof(aErr)); zErr = aErr; /* If STRERROR_R_CHAR_P (set by autoconf scripts) or __USE_GNU is defined, ** assume that the system provides the GNU version of strerror_r() that ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere. ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of ** strerror_r(), which always writes an error message into aErr[]. ** ** If the code incorrectly assumes that it is the POSIX version that is ** available, the error message will often be an empty string. Not a ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available ** could lead to a segfault though. */ #if defined(STRERROR_R_CHAR_P) || defined(__USE_GNU) zErr = # endif strerror_r(iErrno, aErr, sizeof(aErr)-1); #elif SQLITE_THREADSAFE /* This is a threadsafe build, but strerror_r() is not available. */ zErr = ""; #else |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 | ** a convenient place to set a breakpoint. */ static void storeLastErrno(unixFile *pFile, int error){ pFile->lastErrno = error; } /* | | | | 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 | ** a convenient place to set a breakpoint. */ static void storeLastErrno(unixFile *pFile, int error){ pFile->lastErrno = error; } /* ** Close all file descriptors accumulated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list. */ static void closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){ unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode; UnixUnusedFd *p; UnixUnusedFd *pNext; assert( unixFileMutexHeld(pFile) ); for(p=pInode->pUnused; p; p=pNext){ pNext = p->pNext; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 | */ static int fileHasMoved(unixFile *pFile){ #if OS_VXWORKS return pFile->pInode!=0 && pFile->pId!=pFile->pInode->fileId.pId; #else struct stat buf; return pFile->pInode!=0 && | | | 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 | */ static int fileHasMoved(unixFile *pFile){ #if OS_VXWORKS return pFile->pInode!=0 && pFile->pId!=pFile->pInode->fileId.pId; #else struct stat buf; return pFile->pInode!=0 && (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0 || (u64)buf.st_ino!=pFile->pInode->fileId.ino); #endif } /* ** Check a unixFile that is a database. Verify the following: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 | rc = SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; storeLastErrno(pFile, errno); } else if( lock.l_type!=F_UNLCK ){ reserved = 1; } } #endif | | | 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 | rc = SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; storeLastErrno(pFile, errno); } else if( lock.l_type!=F_UNLCK ){ reserved = 1; } } #endif sqlite3_mutex_leave(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex); OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved)); *pResOut = reserved; return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 | } return rc; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT */ /* | | | 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 | } return rc; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT */ /* ** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is ** described by pLock. ** ** If the pFile was opened read/write from unix-excl, then the only lock ** ever obtained is an exclusive lock, and it is obtained exactly once ** the first time any lock is attempted. All subsequent system locking ** operations become no-ops. Locking operations still happen internally, ** in order to coordinate access between separate database connections |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 | /* The following describes the implementation of the various locks and ** lock transitions in terms of the POSIX advisory shared and exclusive ** lock primitives (called read-locks and write-locks below, to avoid ** confusion with SQLite lock names). The algorithms are complicated ** slightly in order to be compatible with Windows95 systems simultaneously ** accessing the same database file, in case that is ever required. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 | /* The following describes the implementation of the various locks and ** lock transitions in terms of the POSIX advisory shared and exclusive ** lock primitives (called read-locks and write-locks below, to avoid ** confusion with SQLite lock names). The algorithms are complicated ** slightly in order to be compatible with Windows95 systems simultaneously ** accessing the same database file, in case that is ever required. ** ** Symbols defined in os.h identify the 'pending byte' and the 'reserved ** byte', each single bytes at well known offsets, and the 'shared byte ** range', a range of 510 bytes at a well known offset. ** ** To obtain a SHARED lock, a read-lock is obtained on the 'pending ** byte'. If this is successful, 'shared byte range' is read-locked ** and the lock on the 'pending byte' released. (Legacy note: When ** SQLite was first developed, Windows95 systems were still very common, ** and Windows95 lacks a shared-lock capability. So on Windows95, a ** single randomly selected by from the 'shared byte range' is locked. ** Windows95 is now pretty much extinct, but this work-around for the ** lack of shared-locks on Windows95 lives on, for backwards ** compatibility.) ** ** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock. ** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the ** 'reserved byte'. ** ** An EXCLUSIVE lock may only be requested after either a SHARED or ** RESERVED lock is held. An EXCLUSIVE lock is implemented by obtaining ** a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte range'. Since all other locks ** require a read-lock on one of the bytes within this range, this ensures ** that no other locks are held on the database. ** ** If a process that holds a RESERVED lock requests an EXCLUSIVE, then ** a PENDING lock is obtained first. A PENDING lock is implemented by ** obtaining a write-lock on the 'pending byte'. This ensures that no new ** SHARED locks can be obtained, but existing SHARED locks are allowed to ** persist. If the call to this function fails to obtain the EXCLUSIVE ** lock in this case, it holds the PENDING lock instead. The client may ** then re-attempt the EXCLUSIVE lock later on, after existing SHARED ** locks have cleared. */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; unixInodeInfo *pInode; struct flock lock; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 | OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s ok (already held) (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock))); return SQLITE_OK; } /* Make sure the locking sequence is correct. ** (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock. | | | | | | 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 | OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s ok (already held) (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock))); return SQLITE_OK; } /* Make sure the locking sequence is correct. ** (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock. ** (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pending lock. ** (3) A shared lock is always held when a reserve lock is requested. */ assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK ); assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); /* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads */ pInode = pFile->pInode; sqlite3_mutex_enter(pInode->pLockMutex); /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile* ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY. */ if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK)) ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto end_lock; } /* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and ** return SQLITE_OK. */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){ assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 ); assert( pInode->nShared>0 ); pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK; pInode->nShared++; pInode->nLock++; goto end_lock; } /* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before ** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock. For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will ** be released. */ lock.l_len = 1L; lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET; if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){ lock.l_type = (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK?F_RDLCK:F_WRLCK); lock.l_start = PENDING_BYTE; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){ tErrno = errno; rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 | /* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */ lock.l_start = PENDING_BYTE; lock.l_len = 1L; lock.l_type = F_UNLCK; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* This could happen with a network mount */ tErrno = errno; | | | 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 | /* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */ lock.l_start = PENDING_BYTE; lock.l_len = 1L; lock.l_type = F_UNLCK; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* This could happen with a network mount */ tErrno = errno; rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; } if( rc ){ if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } goto end_lock; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 | tErrno = errno; rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } } } | | | 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 | tErrno = errno; rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } } } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Set up the transaction-counter change checking flags when ** transitioning from a SHARED to a RESERVED lock. The change ** from SHARED to RESERVED marks the beginning of a normal ** write operation (not a hot journal rollback). */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock; } end_lock: sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex); | | | 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock; } end_lock: sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex); OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed")); return rc; } /* ** Add the file descriptor used by file handle pFile to the corresponding ** pUnused list. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 | /* ** Lower the locking level on file descriptor pFile to eFileLock. eFileLock ** must be either NO_LOCK or SHARED_LOCK. ** ** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below ** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op. | | | | | 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 | /* ** Lower the locking level on file descriptor pFile to eFileLock. eFileLock ** must be either NO_LOCK or SHARED_LOCK. ** ** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below ** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op. ** ** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED ** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then ** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works ** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to ** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set. */ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; unixInodeInfo *pInode; struct flock lock; int rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 | ** cache. The use of a stale cache can lead to database corruption. */ pFile->inNormalWrite = 0; #endif /* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock ** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade | | | | 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 | ** cache. The use of a stale cache can lead to database corruption. */ pFile->inNormalWrite = 0; #endif /* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock ** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a ** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock: ** 1: [WWWWW] ** 2: [....W] ** 3: [RRRRW] ** 4: [RRRR.] */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){ #if !defined(__APPLE__) || !SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE (void)handleNFSUnlock; assert( handleNFSUnlock==0 ); #endif #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE if( handleNFSUnlock ){ int tErrno; /* Error code from system call errors */ off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1; lock.l_type = F_UNLCK; lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET; lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST; lock.l_len = divSize; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock)==(-1) ){ tErrno = errno; rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 | { lock.l_type = F_RDLCK; lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET; lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST; lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){ /* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another | | | | | 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 | { lock.l_type = F_RDLCK; lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET; lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST; lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){ /* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this ** indicates that the other process is not following the locking ** protocol. If this happens, return SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK. Returning ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes ** an assert to fail). */ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK; storeLastErrno(pFile, errno); goto end_unlock; } } } lock.l_type = F_UNLCK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 | #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nByte); static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd); #endif /* | | | 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 | #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nByte); static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd); #endif /* ** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation ** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file ** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile ** structure to 0. ** ** It is *not* necessary to hold the mutex when this routine is called, ** even on VxWorks. A mutex will be acquired on VxWorks by the ** vxworksReleaseFileId() routine. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 | ** routine (e.g. nolockClose()) would be called instead. */ assert( pFile->pInode->nLock>0 || pFile->pInode->bProcessLock==0 ); sqlite3_mutex_enter(pInode->pLockMutex); if( pInode->nLock ){ /* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just ** yet because that would clear those locks. Instead, add the file | | | 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 | ** routine (e.g. nolockClose()) would be called instead. */ assert( pFile->pInode->nLock>0 || pFile->pInode->bProcessLock==0 ); sqlite3_mutex_enter(pInode->pLockMutex); if( pInode->nLock ){ /* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just ** yet because that would clear those locks. Instead, add the file ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed ** when the last lock is cleared. */ setPendingFd(pFile); } sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex); releaseInodeInfo(pFile); assert( pFile->pShm==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 | */ static int dotlockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); | | | 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 | */ static int dotlockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); assert( pFile ); reserved = osAccess((const char*)pFile->lockingContext, 0)==0; OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved)); *pResOut = reserved; return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 | #ifdef HAVE_UTIME utime(zLockFile, NULL); #else utimes(zLockFile, NULL); #endif return SQLITE_OK; } | | | | | 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 | #ifdef HAVE_UTIME utime(zLockFile, NULL); #else utimes(zLockFile, NULL); #endif return SQLITE_OK; } /* grab an exclusive lock */ rc = osMkdir(zLockFile, 0777); if( rc<0 ){ /* failed to open/create the lock directory */ int tErrno = errno; if( EEXIST == tErrno ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; } else { rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } } return rc; } /* got it, set the type and return ok */ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return rc; } /* ** Lower the locking level on file descriptor pFile to eFileLock. eFileLock |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 | char *zLockFile = (char *)pFile->lockingContext; int rc; assert( pFile ); OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0))); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); | | | | | 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 | char *zLockFile = (char *)pFile->lockingContext; int rc; assert( pFile ); OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0))); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); /* no-op if possible */ if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){ return SQLITE_OK; } /* To downgrade to shared, simply update our internal notion of the ** lock state. No need to mess with the file on disk. */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){ pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK; return SQLITE_OK; } /* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */ assert( eFileLock==NO_LOCK ); rc = osRmdir(zLockFile); if( rc<0 ){ int tErrno = errno; if( tErrno==ENOENT ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; }else{ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } return rc; } pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Close a file. Make sure the lock has been released before closing. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 | int rc; do{ rc = flock(fd,op); }while( rc<0 && errno==EINTR ); return rc; } #else # define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b) #endif | | | | | | | | | 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 | int rc; do{ rc = flock(fd,op); }while( rc<0 && errno==EINTR ); return rc; } #else # define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b) #endif /* ** This routine checks if there is a RESERVED lock held on the specified ** file by this or any other process. If such a lock is held, set *pResOut ** to a non-zero value otherwise *pResOut is set to zero. The return value ** is set to SQLITE_OK unless an I/O error occurs during lock checking. */ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); assert( pFile ); /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ reserved = 1; } /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */ if( !reserved ){ /* attempt to get the lock */ int lrc = robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB); if( !lrc ){ /* got the lock, unlock it */ lrc = robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN); if ( lrc ) { int tErrno = errno; /* unlock failed with an error */ lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); rc = lrc; } } else { int tErrno = errno; reserved = 1; /* someone else might have it reserved */ lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); rc = lrc; } } } OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (flock)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 | */ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; assert( pFile ); | | | | | | | | | | 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 | */ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; assert( pFile ); /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive. ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */ if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return SQLITE_OK; } /* grab an exclusive lock */ if (robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) { int tErrno = errno; /* didn't get, must be busy */ rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } } else { /* got it, set the type and return ok */ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; } OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed")); #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS if( (rc & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; } #endif /* SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS */ return rc; } /* ** Lower the locking level on file descriptor pFile to eFileLock. eFileLock ** must be either NO_LOCK or SHARED_LOCK. ** ** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below ** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op. */ static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; assert( pFile ); OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0))); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); /* no-op if possible */ if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){ return SQLITE_OK; } /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */ if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return SQLITE_OK; } /* no, really, unlock. */ if( robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN) ){ #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS return SQLITE_OK; #endif /* SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS */ return SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 | */ static int semXCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); | | | | 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 | */ static int semXCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); assert( pFile ); /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ reserved = 1; } /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */ if( !reserved ){ sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){ int tErrno = errno; if( EAGAIN != tErrno ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 | ** routine to lower a locking level. */ static int semXLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; int rc = SQLITE_OK; | | | | 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 | ** routine to lower a locking level. */ static int semXLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive. ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */ if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; rc = SQLITE_OK; goto sem_end_lock; } /* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */ if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto sem_end_lock; } /* got it, set the type and return ok */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 | sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; assert( pFile ); assert( pSem ); OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0))); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); | | | | | | 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 | sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; assert( pFile ); assert( pSem ); OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0))); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); /* no-op if possible */ if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){ return SQLITE_OK; } /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */ if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return SQLITE_OK; } /* no, really unlock. */ if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) { int rc, tErrno = errno; rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno); } return rc; } pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Close a file. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 | }; #define afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL _IOWR('z', 23, struct ByteRangeLockPB2) /* ** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an ** AFP filesystem. | | | | | | | 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 | }; #define afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL _IOWR('z', 23, struct ByteRangeLockPB2) /* ** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an ** AFP filesystem. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure. */ static int afpSetLock( const char *path, /* Name of the file to be locked or unlocked */ unixFile *pFile, /* Open file descriptor on path */ unsigned long long offset, /* First byte to be locked */ unsigned long long length, /* Number of bytes to lock */ int setLockFlag /* True to set lock. False to clear lock */ ){ struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb; int err; pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1; pb.startEndFlag = 0; pb.offset = offset; pb.length = length; pb.fd = pFile->h; OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n", (setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""), offset, length)); err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0); if ( err==-1 ) { int rc; int tErrno = errno; OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK failed to fsctl() '%s' %d %s\n", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 | ** is set to SQLITE_OK unless an I/O error occurs during lock checking. */ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; afpLockingContext *context; | | | | | | | | 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 | ** is set to SQLITE_OK unless an I/O error occurs during lock checking. */ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; afpLockingContext *context; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); assert( pFile ); context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext; if( context->reserved ){ *pResOut = 1; return SQLITE_OK; } sqlite3_mutex_enter(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex); /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ if( pFile->pInode->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ reserved = 1; } /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */ if( !reserved ){ /* lock the RESERVED byte */ int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1); if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){ /* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore ** the original state */ lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0); } else { /* if we failed to get the lock then someone else must have it */ reserved = 1; } if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){ rc=lrc; } } sqlite3_mutex_leave(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex); OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved)); *pResOut = reserved; return rc; } /* ** Lock the file with the lock specified by parameter eFileLock - one ** of the following: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 | ** routine to lower a locking level. */ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode; afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext; | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 | ** routine to lower a locking level. */ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode; afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext; assert( pFile ); OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), azFileLock(pFile->eFileLock), azFileLock(pInode->eFileLock), pInode->nShared , osGetpid(0))); /* If there is already a lock of this type or more restrictive on the ** unixFile, do nothing. Don't use the afp_end_lock: exit path, as ** unixEnterMutex() hasn't been called yet. */ if( pFile->eFileLock>=eFileLock ){ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s ok (already held) (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock))); return SQLITE_OK; } /* Make sure the locking sequence is correct ** (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock. ** (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pending lock. ** (3) A shared lock is always held when a reserve lock is requested. */ assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK ); assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); /* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads */ pInode = pFile->pInode; sqlite3_mutex_enter(pInode->pLockMutex); /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile* ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY. */ if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK)) ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto afp_end_lock; } /* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and ** return SQLITE_OK. */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){ assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 ); assert( pInode->nShared>0 ); pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK; pInode->nShared++; pInode->nLock++; goto afp_end_lock; } /* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before ** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock. For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will ** be released. */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK) ){ int failed; failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 1); if (failed) { rc = failed; goto afp_end_lock; } } /* If control gets to this point, then actually go ahead and make ** operating system calls for the specified lock. */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){ int lrc1, lrc2, lrc1Errno = 0; long lk, mask; assert( pInode->nShared==0 ); assert( pInode->eFileLock==0 ); mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff; /* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */ /* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */ lk = random(); pInode->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1); lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){ lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno; } /* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */ lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) { storeLastErrno(pFile, lrc1Errno); rc = lrc1; goto afp_end_lock; } else if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc2) ){ rc = lrc2; goto afp_end_lock; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 | failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1); if( !failed ){ context->reserved = 1; } } if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) { /* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */ | | | | | | | | | | | | | 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 | failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1); if( !failed ){ context->reserved = 1; } } if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) { /* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */ /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to ** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the afpUnlock */ if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){ int failed2 = SQLITE_OK; /* now attempt to get the exclusive lock range */ failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 1); if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){ /* Can't reestablish the shared lock. Sqlite can't deal, this is ** a critical I/O error */ rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 : SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; goto afp_end_lock; } }else{ rc = failed; } } if( failed ){ rc = failed; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock; }else if( eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){ pFile->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK; pInode->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK; } afp_end_lock: sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex); OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed")); return rc; } /* ** Lower the locking level on file descriptor pFile to eFileLock. eFileLock ** must be either NO_LOCK or SHARED_LOCK. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 | sqlite3_mutex_enter(pInode->pLockMutex); assert( pInode->nShared!=0 ); if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ assert( pInode->eFileLock==pFile->eFileLock ); SimulateIOErrorBenign(1); SimulateIOError( h=(-1) ) SimulateIOErrorBenign(0); | | | | | | | 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 | sqlite3_mutex_enter(pInode->pLockMutex); assert( pInode->nShared!=0 ); if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ assert( pInode->eFileLock==pFile->eFileLock ); SimulateIOErrorBenign(1); SimulateIOError( h=(-1) ) SimulateIOErrorBenign(0); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start ** reading the database file again, make sure that the ** transaction counter was updated if any part of the database ** file changed. If the transaction counter is not updated, ** other connections to the same file might not realize that ** the file has changed and hence might not know to flush their ** cache. The use of a stale cache can lead to database corruption. */ assert( pFile->inNormalWrite==0 || pFile->dbUpdate==0 || pFile->transCntrChng==1 ); pFile->inNormalWrite = 0; #endif if( pFile->eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){ rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1) ){ /* only re-establish the shared lock if necessary */ int sharedLockByte = SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte; rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, sharedLockByte, 1, 1); } else { skipShared = 1; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK ){ rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){ rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0); if( !rc ){ context->reserved = 0; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1)){ pInode->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eFileLock==NO_LOCK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 | } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pInode->nLock--; assert( pInode->nLock>=0 ); if( pInode->nLock==0 ) closePendingFds(pFile); } } | | | | 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 | } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pInode->nLock--; assert( pInode->nLock>=0 ); if( pInode->nLock==0 ) closePendingFds(pFile); } } sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; } return rc; } /* ** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context */ static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; assert( id!=0 ); afpUnlock(id, NO_LOCK); assert( unixFileMutexNotheld(pFile) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 | return posixUnlock(id, eFileLock, 1); } #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ /* ** The code above is the NFS lock implementation. The code is specific ** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms. No alternative | | | | | 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 | return posixUnlock(id, eFileLock, 1); } #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ /* ** The code above is the NFS lock implementation. The code is specific ** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms. No alternative ** is available. ** ********************* End of the NFS lock implementation ********************** ******************************************************************************/ /****************************************************************************** **************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods ***************************** ** ** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the ** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods. The locking ** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per ** division). Those methods that are common to all locking modes ** are gather together into this division. */ /* ** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt ** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read. ** ** To avoid stomping the errno value on a failed read the lastErrno value ** is set before returning. */ static int seekAndRead(unixFile *id, sqlite3_int64 offset, void *pBuf, int cnt){ int got; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 | /* ** Read data from a file into a buffer. Return SQLITE_OK if all ** bytes were read successfully and SQLITE_IOERR if anything goes ** wrong. */ static int unixRead( | | | | | | 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 | /* ** Read data from a file into a buffer. Return SQLITE_OK if all ** bytes were read successfully and SQLITE_IOERR if anything goes ** wrong. */ static int unixRead( sqlite3_file *id, void *pBuf, int amt, sqlite3_int64 offset ){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile *)id; int got; assert( id ); assert( offset>=0 ); assert( amt>0 ); /* If this is a database file (not a journal, super-journal or temp ** file), the bytes in the locking range should never be read or written. */ #if 0 assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0 || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512 || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE ); #endif #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transferring ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */ if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){ if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){ memcpy(pBuf, &((u8 *)(pFile->pMapRegion))[offset], amt); return SQLITE_OK; }else{ int nCopy = pFile->mmapSize - offset; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 | return SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ; } } /* ** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to ** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from | | | 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 | return SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ; } } /* ** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to ** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from ** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise, ** return the actual number of bytes written (which may be less than ** nBuf). */ static int seekAndWriteFd( int fd, /* File descriptor to write to */ i64 iOff, /* File offset to begin writing at */ const void *pBuf, /* Copy data from this buffer to the file */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 | /* ** Write data from a buffer into a file. Return SQLITE_OK on success ** or some other error code on failure. */ static int unixWrite( | | | | | | 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 | /* ** Write data from a buffer into a file. Return SQLITE_OK on success ** or some other error code on failure. */ static int unixWrite( sqlite3_file *id, const void *pBuf, int amt, sqlite3_int64 offset ){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; int wrote = 0; assert( id ); assert( amt>0 ); /* If this is a database file (not a journal, super-journal or temp ** file), the bytes in the locking range should never be read or written. */ #if 0 assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0 || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512 || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE ); #endif #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* If we are doing a normal write to a database file (as opposed to ** doing a hot-journal rollback or a write to some file other than a ** normal database file) then record the fact that the database |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 | pFile->transCntrChng = 1; /* The transaction counter has changed */ } } } #endif #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 | | | | 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 | pFile->transCntrChng = 1; /* The transaction counter has changed */ } } } #endif #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transferring ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */ if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){ if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){ memcpy(&((u8 *)(pFile->pMapRegion))[offset], pBuf, amt); return SQLITE_OK; }else{ int nCopy = pFile->mmapSize - offset; memcpy(&((u8 *)(pFile->pMapRegion))[offset], pBuf, nCopy); pBuf = &((u8 *)pBuf)[nCopy]; amt -= nCopy; offset += nCopy; } } #endif while( (wrote = seekAndWrite(pFile, offset, pBuf, amt))<amt && wrote>0 ){ amt -= wrote; offset += wrote; pBuf = &((char*)pBuf)[wrote]; } SimulateIOError(( wrote=(-1), amt=1 )); SimulateDiskfullError(( wrote=0, amt=1 )); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 | ** for testing when we want to run through the test suite quickly. ** You are strongly advised *not* to deploy with SQLITE_NO_SYNC ** enabled, however, since with SQLITE_NO_SYNC enabled, an OS crash ** or power failure will likely corrupt the database file. ** ** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged. ** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content | | | | | | | | | | | | 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 | ** for testing when we want to run through the test suite quickly. ** You are strongly advised *not* to deploy with SQLITE_NO_SYNC ** enabled, however, since with SQLITE_NO_SYNC enabled, an OS crash ** or power failure will likely corrupt the database file. ** ** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged. ** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content ** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is ** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However, ** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the ** file size has changed. The only real difference between fdatasync() ** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the ** inode if the mtime or owner or other inode attributes have changed. ** We only care about the file size, not the other file attributes, so ** as far as SQLite is concerned, an fdatasync() is always adequate. ** So, we always use fdatasync() if it is available, regardless of ** the value of the dataOnly flag. */ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){ int rc; /* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering ** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros. */ #ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC UNUSED_PARAMETER(fd); UNUSED_PARAMETER(fullSync); UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly); #elif HAVE_FULLFSYNC UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly); #else UNUSED_PARAMETER(fullSync); UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly); #endif /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and ** FULLSYNC. This is used during testing to verify that this procedure ** gets called with the correct arguments. */ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST if( fullSync ) sqlite3_fullsync_count++; sqlite3_sync_count++; #endif /* If we compiled with the SQLITE_NO_SYNC flag, then syncing is a ** no-op. But go ahead and call fstat() to validate the file ** descriptor as we need a method to provoke a failure during ** coverage testing. */ #ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC { struct stat buf; rc = osFstat(fd, &buf); } #elif HAVE_FULLFSYNC if( fullSync ){ rc = osFcntl(fd, F_FULLFSYNC, 0); }else{ rc = 1; } /* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync(). ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local ** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call. ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid ** the fcntl call every time sync is called. */ if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd); #elif defined(__APPLE__) /* fdatasync() on HFS+ doesn't yet flush the file size if it changed correctly ** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync */ rc = fsync(fd); #else rc = fdatasync(fd); #if OS_VXWORKS if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){ rc = fsync(fd); } #endif /* OS_VXWORKS */ #endif /* ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC elif HAVE_FULLFSYNC */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 | pFile->transCntrChng = 1; } #endif #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently ** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will | | | 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 | pFile->transCntrChng = 1; } #endif #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently ** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on. */ if( nByte<pFile->mmapSize ){ pFile->mmapSize = nByte; } #endif return SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 | /* ** Handler for proxy-locking file-control verbs. Defined below in the ** proxying locking division. */ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*); #endif | | | | | | | | 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 | /* ** Handler for proxy-locking file-control verbs. Defined below in the ** proxying locking division. */ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*); #endif /* ** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT ** file-control operation. Enlarge the database to nBytes in size ** (rounded up to the next chunk-size). If the database is already ** nBytes or larger, this routine is a no-op. */ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){ if( pFile->szChunk>0 ){ i64 nSize; /* Required file size */ struct stat buf; /* Used to hold return values of fstat() */ if( osFstat(pFile->h, &buf) ){ return SQLITE_IOERR_FSTAT; } nSize = ((nByte+pFile->szChunk-1) / pFile->szChunk) * pFile->szChunk; if( nSize>(i64)buf.st_size ){ #if defined(HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE) && HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate() ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success, ** or an error number on failure". See the manpage for details. */ int err; do{ err = osFallocate(pFile->h, buf.st_size, nSize-buf.st_size); }while( err==EINTR ); if( err && err!=EINVAL ) return SQLITE_IOERR_WRITE; #else /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a ** single byte to the last byte in each block that falls entirely ** within the extended region. Then, if required, a single byte ** at offset (nSize-1), to set the size of the file correctly. ** This is a similar technique to that used by glibc on systems ** that do not have a real fallocate() call. */ int nBlk = buf.st_blksize; /* File-system block size */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 | } } return SQLITE_NOTFOUND; } /* ** If pFd->sectorSize is non-zero when this function is called, it is a | | | | | 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 | } } return SQLITE_NOTFOUND; } /* ** If pFd->sectorSize is non-zero when this function is called, it is a ** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and ** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system ** characteristics. ** ** There are two versions of this function. One for QNX and one for all ** other systems. */ #ifndef __QNXNTO__ static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFd){ assert( pFd->deviceCharacteristics==0 || pFd->sectorSize!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 | } #else #include <sys/dcmd_blk.h> #include <sys/statvfs.h> static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFile){ if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){ struct statvfs fsInfo; | | | 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 | } #else #include <sys/dcmd_blk.h> #include <sys/statvfs.h> static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFile){ if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){ struct statvfs fsInfo; /* Set defaults for non-supported filesystems */ pFile->sectorSize = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE; pFile->deviceCharacteristics = 0; if( fstatvfs(pFile->h, &fsInfo) == -1 ) { return; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 | } #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WAL) || SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* ** Return the system page size. ** | | | | | 4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 | } #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WAL) || SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* ** Return the system page size. ** ** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file. ** Instead, it should be called via macro osGetpagesize(). */ static int unixGetpagesize(void){ #if OS_VXWORKS return 1024; #elif defined(_BSD_SOURCE) return getpagesize(); #else return (int)sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE); #endif } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WAL) || SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer. ** ** When multiple threads all reference the same wal-index, each thread ** has its own unixShm object, but they all point to a single instance ** of this unixShmNode object. In other words, each wal-index is opened ** only once per process. ** ** Each unixShmNode object is connected to a single unixInodeInfo object. ** We could coalesce this object into unixInodeInfo, but that would mean ** every open file that does not use shared memory (in other words, most ** open files) would have to carry around this extra information. So ** the unixInodeInfo object contains a pointer to this unixShmNode object ** and the unixShmNode object is created only when needed. ** ** unixMutexHeld() must be true when creating or destroying ** this object or while reading or writing the following fields: ** ** nRef ** ** The following fields are read-only after the object is created: ** ** hShm ** zFilename ** ** Either unixShmNode.pShmMutex must be held or unixShmNode.nRef==0 and ** unixMutexHeld() is true when reading or writing any other field ** in this structure. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 | */ #define UNIX_SHM_BASE ((22+SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK)*4) /* first lock byte */ #define UNIX_SHM_DMS (UNIX_SHM_BASE+SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK) /* deadman switch */ /* ** Use F_GETLK to check whether or not there are any readers with open ** wal-mode transactions in other processes on database file pFile. If | | | 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 | */ #define UNIX_SHM_BASE ((22+SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK)*4) /* first lock byte */ #define UNIX_SHM_DMS (UNIX_SHM_BASE+SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK) /* deadman switch */ /* ** Use F_GETLK to check whether or not there are any readers with open ** wal-mode transactions in other processes on database file pFile. If ** no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK and set (*piOut) to 1 if there are ** such transactions, or 0 otherwise. If an error occurs, return an ** SQLite error code. The final value of *piOut is undefined in this ** case. */ static int unixFcntlExternalReader(unixFile *pFile, int *piOut){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; *piOut = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 | } } OSTRACE((" - afterwards %03x,%03x\n", pShmNode->sharedMask, pShmNode->exclMask)); } #endif | | | 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 | } } OSTRACE((" - afterwards %03x,%03x\n", pShmNode->sharedMask, pShmNode->exclMask)); } #endif return rc; } /* ** Return the minimum number of 32KB shm regions that should be mapped at ** a time, assuming that each mapping must be an integer multiple of the ** current system page-size. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 | } /* ** The DMS lock has not yet been taken on shm file pShmNode. Attempt to ** take it now. Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error ** code otherwise. ** | | | | 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 | } /* ** The DMS lock has not yet been taken on shm file pShmNode. Attempt to ** take it now. Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error ** code otherwise. ** ** If the DMS cannot be locked because this is a readonly_shm=1 ** connection and no other process already holds a lock, return ** SQLITE_READONLY_CANTINIT and set pShmNode->isUnlocked=1. */ static int unixLockSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd, unixShmNode *pShmNode){ struct flock lock; int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Use F_GETLK to determine the locks other processes are holding ** on the DMS byte. If it indicates that another process is holding ** a SHARED lock, then this process may also take a SHARED lock ** and proceed with opening the *-shm file. ** ** Or, if no other process is holding any lock, then this process ** is the first to open it. In this case take an EXCLUSIVE lock on the ** DMS byte and truncate the *-shm file to zero bytes in size. Then ** downgrade to a SHARED lock on the DMS byte. ** ** If another process is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock on the DMS byte, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 | assert( lock.l_type==F_UNLCK || lock.l_type==F_RDLCK ); rc = unixShmSystemLock(pDbFd, F_RDLCK, UNIX_SHM_DMS, 1); } return rc; } /* | | | | | 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 | assert( lock.l_type==F_UNLCK || lock.l_type==F_RDLCK ); rc = unixShmSystemLock(pDbFd, F_RDLCK, UNIX_SHM_DMS, 1); } return rc; } /* ** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd. ** This particular implementation uses mmapped files. ** ** The file used to implement shared-memory is in the same directory ** as the open database file and has the same name as the open database ** file with the "-shm" suffix added. For example, if the database file ** is "/home/user1/config.db" then the file that is created and mmapped ** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm". ** ** Another approach to is to use files in /dev/shm or /dev/tmp or an ** some other tmpfs mount. But if a file in a different directory ** from the database file is used, then differing access permissions ** or a chroot() might cause two different processes on the same ** database to end up using different files for shared memory - ** meaning that their memory would not really be shared - resulting ** in database corruption. Nevertheless, this tmpfs file usage ** can be enabled at compile-time using -DSQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY="/dev/shm" ** or the equivalent. The use of the SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY compile-time ** option results in an incompatible build of SQLite; builds of SQLite ** that with differing SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY settings attempt to use the ** same database file at the same time, database corruption will likely |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 | if( pShmNode==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; goto shm_open_err; } memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename); zShm = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1]; #ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY | | | 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 | if( pShmNode==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; goto shm_open_err; } memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename); zShm = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1]; #ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShm, SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY "/sqlite-shm-%x-%x", (u32)sStat.st_ino, (u32)sStat.st_dev); #else sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShm, "%s-shm", zBasePath); sqlite3FileSuffix3(pDbFd->zPath, zShm); #endif pShmNode->hShm = -1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4747 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 | unixShmPurge(pDbFd); /* This call frees pShmNode if required */ sqlite3_free(p); unixLeaveMutex(); return rc; } /* | | | | | | | | | 4747 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 | unixShmPurge(pDbFd); /* This call frees pShmNode if required */ sqlite3_free(p); unixLeaveMutex(); return rc; } /* ** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the ** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions ** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion ** bytes in size. ** ** If an error occurs, an error code is returned and *pp is set to NULL. ** ** Otherwise, if the bExtend parameter is 0 and the requested shared-memory ** region has not been allocated (by any client, including one running in a ** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If ** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet ** been allocated, it is allocated by this function. ** ** If the shared-memory region has already been allocated or is allocated by ** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes ** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped ** memory and SQLITE_OK returned. */ static int unixShmMap( sqlite3_file *fd, /* Handle open on database file */ int iRegion, /* Region to retrieve */ int szRegion, /* Size of regions */ int bExtend, /* True to extend file if necessary */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4817 4818 4819 4820 4821 4822 4823 | ** Check to see if it has been allocated (i.e. if the wal-index file is ** large enough to contain the requested region). */ if( osFstat(pShmNode->hShm, &sStat) ){ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE; goto shmpage_out; } | | | 4817 4818 4819 4820 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 | ** Check to see if it has been allocated (i.e. if the wal-index file is ** large enough to contain the requested region). */ if( osFstat(pShmNode->hShm, &sStat) ){ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE; goto shmpage_out; } if( sStat.st_size<nByte ){ /* The requested memory region does not exist. If bExtend is set to ** false, exit early. *pp will be set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. */ if( !bExtend ){ goto shmpage_out; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 | pShmNode->apRegion = apNew; while( pShmNode->nRegion<nReqRegion ){ int nMap = szRegion*nShmPerMap; int i; void *pMem; if( pShmNode->hShm>=0 ){ pMem = osMmap(0, nMap, | | | 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 | pShmNode->apRegion = apNew; while( pShmNode->nRegion<nReqRegion ){ int nMap = szRegion*nShmPerMap; int i; void *pMem; if( pShmNode->hShm>=0 ){ pMem = osMmap(0, nMap, pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, pShmNode->hShm, szRegion*(i64)pShmNode->nRegion ); if( pMem==MAP_FAILED ){ rc = unixLogError(SQLITE_IOERR_SHMMAP, "mmap", pShmNode->zFilename); goto shmpage_out; } }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 | ** ** 1. Checkpointer lock (ofst==1). ** 2. Write lock (ofst==0). ** 3. Read locks (ofst>=3 && ofst<SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK). ** ** In other words, if this is a blocking lock, none of the locks that ** occur later in the above list than the lock being obtained may be | | | 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 | ** ** 1. Checkpointer lock (ofst==1). ** 2. Write lock (ofst==0). ** 3. Read locks (ofst>=3 && ofst<SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK). ** ** In other words, if this is a blocking lock, none of the locks that ** occur later in the above list than the lock being obtained may be ** held. ** ** It is not permitted to block on the RECOVER lock. */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT assert( (flags & SQLITE_SHM_UNLOCK) || pDbFd->iBusyTimeout==0 || ( (ofst!=2) /* not RECOVER */ && (ofst!=1 || (p->exclMask|p->sharedMask)==0) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 | aLock[ofst]--; } /* Undo the local locks */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ p->exclMask &= ~mask; p->sharedMask &= ~mask; | | | 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 | aLock[ofst]--; } /* Undo the local locks */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ p->exclMask &= ~mask; p->sharedMask &= ~mask; } } }else if( flags & SQLITE_SHM_SHARED ){ assert( n==1 ); assert( (p->exclMask & (1<<ofst))==0 ); if( (p->sharedMask & mask)==0 ){ if( aLock[ofst]<0 ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5073 5074 5075 5076 5077 5078 5079 | sqlite3_mutex_leave(pShmNode->pShmMutex); OSTRACE(("SHM-LOCK shmid-%d, pid-%d got %03x,%03x\n", p->id, osGetpid(0), p->sharedMask, p->exclMask)); return rc; } /* | | | | | | 5073 5074 5075 5076 5077 5078 5079 5080 5081 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 | sqlite3_mutex_leave(pShmNode->pShmMutex); OSTRACE(("SHM-LOCK shmid-%d, pid-%d got %03x,%03x\n", p->id, osGetpid(0), p->sharedMask, p->exclMask)); return rc; } /* ** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory. ** ** All loads and stores begun before the barrier must complete before ** any load or store begun after the barrier. */ static void unixShmBarrier( sqlite3_file *fd /* Database file holding the shared memory */ ){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(fd); sqlite3MemoryBarrier(); /* compiler-defined memory barrier */ assert( fd->pMethods->xLock==nolockLock || unixFileMutexNotheld((unixFile*)fd) ); unixEnterMutex(); /* Also mutex, for redundancy */ unixLeaveMutex(); } /* ** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying ** storage if deleteFlag is true. ** ** If there is no shared memory associated with the connection then this ** routine is a harmless no-op. */ static int unixShmUnmap( sqlite3_file *fd, /* The underlying database file */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 | pFd->pMapRegion = 0; pFd->mmapSize = 0; pFd->mmapSizeActual = 0; } } /* | | | 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 | pFd->pMapRegion = 0; pFd->mmapSize = 0; pFd->mmapSizeActual = 0; } } /* ** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file ** descriptor pFd to nNew bytes. Any existing mapping is discarded. ** ** If successful, this function sets the following variables: ** ** unixFile.pMapRegion ** unixFile.mmapSize ** unixFile.mmapSizeActual |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 | } pFd->pMapRegion = (void *)pNew; pFd->mmapSize = pFd->mmapSizeActual = nNew; } /* ** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file | | | | | | | 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 | } pFd->pMapRegion = (void *)pNew; pFd->mmapSize = pFd->mmapSizeActual = nNew; } /* ** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file ** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if ** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still ** outstanding xFetch() references to it, this function is a no-op. ** ** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of ** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the ** requested size is the size of the file on disk. The actual size of the ** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured ** using SQLITE_FCNTL_MMAP_LIMIT, whichever is smaller. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs (even if the mapping is not ** recreated as a result of outstanding references) or an SQLite error ** code otherwise. */ static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nMap){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 | ** iOff. The mapping must be valid for at least nAmt bytes. ** ** If such a pointer can be obtained, store it in *pp and return SQLITE_OK. ** Or, if one cannot but no error occurs, set *pp to 0 and return SQLITE_OK. ** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final ** value of *pp is undefined in this case. ** | | | 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 | ** iOff. The mapping must be valid for at least nAmt bytes. ** ** If such a pointer can be obtained, store it in *pp and return SQLITE_OK. ** Or, if one cannot but no error occurs, set *pp to 0 and return SQLITE_OK. ** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final ** value of *pp is undefined in this case. ** ** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually ** release the reference by calling unixUnfetch(). */ static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){ #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd; /* The underlying database file */ #endif *pp = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 | } } #endif return SQLITE_OK; } /* | | | | | | | 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 | } } #endif return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a ** reference obtained by an earlier call to unixFetch(). The second ** argument passed to this function must be the same as the corresponding ** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation. ** ** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called ** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping ** may now be invalid and should be unmapped. */ static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){ #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd; /* The underlying database file */ UNUSED_PARAMETER(iOff); /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding ** xFetch references. Or, if p!=0 (meaning it is an xFetch reference), ** then there must be at least one outstanding. */ assert( (p==0)==(pFd->nFetchOut==0) ); /* If p!=0, it must match the iOff value. */ assert( p==0 || p==&((u8 *)pFd->pMapRegion)[iOff] ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 | nfsUnlock, /* xUnlock method */ unixCheckReservedLock, /* xCheckReservedLock method */ 0 /* xShmMap method */ ) #endif #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE | | | | 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 5566 5567 | nfsUnlock, /* xUnlock method */ unixCheckReservedLock, /* xCheckReservedLock method */ 0 /* xShmMap method */ ) #endif #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE /* ** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy ** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods ** object that implements that strategy. ** ** This is for MacOSX only. */ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl( const char *filePath, /* name of the database file */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5595 5596 5597 5598 5599 5600 5601 | if( strcmp(fsInfo.f_fstypename, aMap[i].zFilesystem)==0 ){ return aMap[i].pMethods; } } } /* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs". | | | | | 5595 5596 5597 5598 5599 5600 5601 5602 5603 5604 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 | if( strcmp(fsInfo.f_fstypename, aMap[i].zFilesystem)==0 ){ return aMap[i].pMethods; } } } /* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs". ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds, ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks. */ lockInfo.l_len = 1; lockInfo.l_start = 0; lockInfo.l_whence = SEEK_SET; lockInfo.l_type = F_RDLCK; if( osFcntl(pNew->h, F_GETLK, &lockInfo)!=-1 ) { if( strcmp(fsInfo.f_fstypename, "nfs")==0 ){ return &nfsIoMethods; } else { return &posixIoMethods; } }else{ return &dotlockIoMethods; } } static const sqlite3_io_methods *(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl; #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ #if OS_VXWORKS /* ** This "finder" function for VxWorks checks to see if posix advisory |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5648 5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 | lockInfo.l_type = F_RDLCK; if( osFcntl(pNew->h, F_GETLK, &lockInfo)!=-1 ) { return &posixIoMethods; }else{ return &semIoMethods; } } | | | 5648 5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 | lockInfo.l_type = F_RDLCK; if( osFcntl(pNew->h, F_GETLK, &lockInfo)!=-1 ) { return &posixIoMethods; }else{ return &semIoMethods; } } static const sqlite3_io_methods *(*const vxworksIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = vxworksIoFinderImpl; #endif /* OS_VXWORKS */ /* ** An abstract type for a pointer to an IO method finder function: */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 | unixEnterMutex(); rc = findInodeInfo(pNew, &pNew->pInode); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_free(pNew->lockingContext); robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__); h = -1; } | | | | 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783 5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 | unixEnterMutex(); rc = findInodeInfo(pNew, &pNew->pInode); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_free(pNew->lockingContext); robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__); h = -1; } unixLeaveMutex(); } } #endif else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){ /* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in ** the dotlockLockingContext */ char *zLockFile; int nFilename; assert( zFilename!=0 ); nFilename = (int)strlen(zFilename) + 6; zLockFile = (char *)sqlite3_malloc64(nFilename); if( zLockFile==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 | rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; pNew->pInode->aSemName[0] = '\0'; } } unixLeaveMutex(); } #endif | | | 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 | rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; pNew->pInode->aSemName[0] = '\0'; } } unixLeaveMutex(); } #endif storeLastErrno(pNew, 0); #if OS_VXWORKS if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ if( h>=0 ) robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__); h = -1; osUnlink(zFilename); pNew->ctrlFlags |= UNIXFILE_DELETE; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 | static int unixGetTempname(int nBuf, char *zBuf){ const char *zDir; int iLimit = 0; int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just ** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this | | | 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 | static int unixGetTempname(int nBuf, char *zBuf){ const char *zDir; int iLimit = 0; int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just ** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this ** function failing. */ zBuf[0] = 0; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR ); sqlite3_mutex_enter(sqlite3MutexAlloc(SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_TEMPDIR)); zDir = unixTempFileDir(); if( zDir==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 | ** Implementation in the proxy-lock division, but used by unixOpen() ** if SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING is defined. */ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*); #endif /* | | | | | | 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 | ** Implementation in the proxy-lock division, but used by unixOpen() ** if SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING is defined. */ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*); #endif /* ** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database ** file (not a journal or super-journal file) identified by pathname ** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second ** argument to this function. ** ** Such a file descriptor may exist if a database connection was closed ** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some ** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock. ** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment ** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for ** further details. Also, ticket #4018. ** ** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no ** such file descriptor is located, -1 is returned. */ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){ UnixUnusedFd *pUnused = 0; /* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because ** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure), ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure ** feature. */ #if !OS_VXWORKS struct stat sStat; /* Results of stat() call */ unixEnterMutex(); /* A stat() call may fail for various reasons. If this happens, it is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 | } unixLeaveMutex(); #endif /* if !OS_VXWORKS */ return pUnused; } /* | | | 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 | } unixLeaveMutex(); #endif /* if !OS_VXWORKS */ return pUnused; } /* ** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile. */ static int getFileMode( const char *zFile, /* File name */ mode_t *pMode, /* OUT: Permissions of zFile */ uid_t *pUid, /* OUT: uid of zFile. */ gid_t *pGid /* OUT: gid of zFile. */ ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 | return rc; } /* ** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions ** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned ** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is | | | | | | | 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 | return rc; } /* ** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions ** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned ** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is ** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is ** returned and the value of *pMode is not modified. ** ** In most cases, this routine sets *pMode to 0, which will become ** an indication to robust_open() to create the file using ** SQLITE_DEFAULT_FILE_PERMISSIONS adjusted by the umask. ** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then ** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the ** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever ** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions ** as the associated database file. ** ** If the SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES option is enabled, then the ** original filename is unavailable. But 8_3_NAMES is only used for ** FAT filesystems and permissions do not matter there, so just use ** the default permissions. In 8_3_NAMES mode, leave *pMode set to zero. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 | ** the following naming conventions: ** ** "<path to db>-journal" ** "<path to db>-wal" ** "<path to db>-journalNN" ** "<path to db>-walNN" ** | | | 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 | ** the following naming conventions: ** ** "<path to db>-journal" ** "<path to db>-wal" ** "<path to db>-journalNN" ** "<path to db>-walNN" ** ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are ** used by the test_multiplex.c module. ** ** In normal operation, the journal file name will always contain ** a '-' character. However in 8+3 filename mode, or if a corrupt ** rollback journal specifies a super-journal with a goofy name, then ** the '-' might be missing or the '-' might be the first character in ** the filename. In that case, just return SQLITE_OK with *pMode==0. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 | } } return rc; } /* ** Open the file zPath. | | | | | | 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 6127 6128 | } } return rc; } /* ** Open the file zPath. ** ** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this ** one: ** ** sqlite3OsOpenReadWrite(); ** sqlite3OsOpenReadOnly(); ** sqlite3OsOpenExclusive(); ** ** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags: ** ** ReadWrite() -> (READWRITE | CREATE) ** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY) ** OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE) ** ** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If ** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the ** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new ** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for ** OpenExclusive(). */ static int unixOpen( sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, /* The VFS for which this is the xOpen method */ const char *zPath, /* Pathname of file to be opened */ sqlite3_file *pFile, /* The file descriptor to be filled in */ int flags, /* Input flags to control the opening */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 | #endif /* If creating a super- or main-file journal, this function will open ** a file-descriptor on the directory too. The first time unixSync() ** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d. */ int isNewJrnl = (isCreate && ( | | | | | | | | | | 6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 6157 6158 6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196 | #endif /* If creating a super- or main-file journal, this function will open ** a file-descriptor on the directory too. The first time unixSync() ** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d. */ int isNewJrnl = (isCreate && ( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL )); /* If argument zPath is a NULL pointer, this function is required to open ** a temporary file. Use this buffer to store the file name in. */ char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+2]; const char *zName = zPath; /* Check the following statements are true: ** ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and ** (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and ** (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set. ** (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set. */ assert((isReadonly==0 || isReadWrite==0) && (isReadWrite || isReadonly)); assert(isCreate==0 || isReadWrite); assert(isExclusive==0 || isCreate); assert(isDelete==0 || isCreate); /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and super-journal are never ** automatically deleted. Nor are they ever temporary files. */ assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB ); assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ); assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL ); assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ); /* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */ assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ); /* Detect a pid change and reset the PRNG. There is a race condition ** here such that two or more threads all trying to open databases at ** the same instant might all reset the PRNG. But multiple resets ** are harmless. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 | /* Generated temporary filenames are always double-zero terminated ** for use by sqlite3_uri_parameter(). */ assert( zName[strlen(zName)+1]==0 ); } /* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function ** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as | | | 6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 | /* Generated temporary filenames are always double-zero terminated ** for use by sqlite3_uri_parameter(). */ assert( zName[strlen(zName)+1]==0 ); } /* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function ** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the ** 'conch file' locking functions later on. */ if( isReadonly ) openFlags |= O_RDONLY; if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR; if( isCreate ) openFlags |= O_CREAT; if( isExclusive ) openFlags |= (O_EXCL|O_NOFOLLOW); openFlags |= (O_LARGEFILE|O_BINARY|O_NOFOLLOW); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 | assert( fd>=0 ); if( pOutFlags ){ *pOutFlags = flags; } if( p->pPreallocatedUnused ){ p->pPreallocatedUnused->fd = fd; | | | 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 | assert( fd>=0 ); if( pOutFlags ){ *pOutFlags = flags; } if( p->pPreallocatedUnused ){ p->pPreallocatedUnused->fd = fd; p->pPreallocatedUnused->flags = flags & (SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY|SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE); } if( isDelete ){ #if OS_VXWORKS zPath = zName; #elif defined(SQLITE_UNLINK_AFTER_CLOSE) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328 6329 | #endif } #if SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE else{ p->openFlags = openFlags; } #endif | | | 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328 6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 6337 | #endif } #if SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE else{ p->openFlags = openFlags; } #endif #if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){ storeLastErrno(p, errno); robust_close(p, fd, __LINE__); return SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS; } if (0 == strncmp("msdos", fsInfo.f_fstypename, 5)) { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 | #if SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING isAutoProxy = 1; #endif if( isAutoProxy && (zPath!=NULL) && (!noLock) && pVfs->xOpen ){ char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING"); int useProxy = 0; | | | | | | | | | 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389 6390 6391 6392 6393 6394 | #if SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING isAutoProxy = 1; #endif if( isAutoProxy && (zPath!=NULL) && (!noLock) && pVfs->xOpen ){ char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING"); int useProxy = 0; /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means ** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only. */ if( envforce!=NULL ){ useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0; }else{ useProxy = !(fsInfo.f_flags&MNT_LOCAL); } if( useProxy ){ rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:"); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically, ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op */ unixClose(pFile); return rc; } } goto open_finished; } } #endif assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/' || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ); rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags); open_finished: if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_free(p->pPreallocatedUnused); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 | j = i+1; }while( zPath[i++] ); } /* ** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path ** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by | | | | 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577 6578 6579 6580 6581 | j = i+1; }while( zPath[i++] ); } /* ** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path ** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by ** zPath. ** ** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes ** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to ** this buffer before returning. */ static int unixFullPathname( sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, /* Pointer to vfs object */ const char *zPath, /* Possibly relative input path */ int nOut, /* Size of output buffer in bytes */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6627 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 | zErr = dlerror(); if( zErr ){ sqlite3_snprintf(nBuf, zBufOut, "%s", zErr); } unixLeaveMutex(); } static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){ | | | | 6627 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 6635 6636 6637 6638 6639 6640 6641 6642 6643 6644 6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 6650 6651 | zErr = dlerror(); if( zErr ){ sqlite3_snprintf(nBuf, zBufOut, "%s", zErr); } unixLeaveMutex(); } static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){ /* ** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be ** cast into a pointer to a function. And yet the library dlsym() routine ** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function. So how do we ** use dlsym() with -pedantic-errors? ** ** Variable x below is defined to be a pointer to a function taking ** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function. ** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function. ** (That assignment requires a cast.) Then we call the function that ** x points to. ** ** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where ** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*. But then, on the ** other hand, dlsym() will not work on such a system either, so we have ** not really lost anything. */ void (*(*x)(void*,const char*))(void); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 | ** in the random seed. ** ** When testing, initializing zBuf[] to zero is all we do. That means ** that we always use the same random number sequence. This makes the ** tests repeatable. */ memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf); | | | 6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 6687 6688 6689 6690 6691 6692 6693 6694 | ** in the random seed. ** ** When testing, initializing zBuf[] to zero is all we do. That means ** that we always use the same random number sequence. This makes the ** tests repeatable. */ memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf); randomnessPid = osGetpid(0); #if !defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_RANDOMNESS) { int fd, got; fd = robust_open("/dev/urandom", O_RDONLY, 0); if( fd<0 ){ time_t t; time(&t); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 | /* ** Find the current time (in Universal Coordinated Time). Write into *piNow ** the current time and date as a Julian Day number times 86_400_000. In ** other words, write into *piNow the number of milliseconds since the Julian ** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the ** proleptic Gregorian calendar. ** | | | 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 6758 6759 6760 6761 6762 | /* ** Find the current time (in Universal Coordinated Time). Write into *piNow ** the current time and date as a Julian Day number times 86_400_000. In ** other words, write into *piNow the number of milliseconds since the Julian ** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the ** proleptic Gregorian calendar. ** ** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date ** cannot be found. */ static int unixCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 *piNow){ static const sqlite3_int64 unixEpoch = 24405875*(sqlite3_int64)8640000; int rc = SQLITE_OK; #if defined(NO_GETTOD) time_t t; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6860 6861 | ** address the requirements for concurrent database access by multiple ** readers and writers ** [http://www.nabble.com/SQLite-on-NFS-cache-coherency-td15655701.html]. ** ** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking ** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a ** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file | | | 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6860 6861 6862 6863 6864 6865 6866 6867 6868 6869 | ** address the requirements for concurrent database access by multiple ** readers and writers ** [http://www.nabble.com/SQLite-on-NFS-cache-coherency-td15655701.html]. ** ** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking ** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a ** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file ** and onto a proxy file on the local file system. ** ** ** Using proxy locks ** ----------------- ** ** C APIs ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 | ** Specifying ":auto:" means that if there is a conch file with a matching ** host ID in it, the proxy path in the conch file will be used, otherwise ** a proxy path based on the user's temp dir ** (via confstr(_CS_DARWIN_USER_TEMP_DIR,...)) will be used and the ** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the ** database file. For example: ** | | | | | 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 6905 6906 6907 | ** Specifying ":auto:" means that if there is a conch file with a matching ** host ID in it, the proxy path in the conch file will be used, otherwise ** a proxy path based on the user's temp dir ** (via confstr(_CS_DARWIN_USER_TEMP_DIR,...)) will be used and the ** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the ** database file. For example: ** ** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db" ** The lock path will be "<tmpdir>/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:") ** ** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not ** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via ** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another ** connection or process). ** ** ** How proxy locking works ** ----------------------- ** ** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files: ** ** * conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host ** at a time ** ** * proxy file to act as a proxy for the advisory locks normally ** taken on the database ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6920 6921 6922 6923 6924 6925 6926 | ** ** The proxy file - a single-byte file used for all advisory file locks ** normally taken on the database file. This allows for safe sharing ** of the database file for multiple readers and writers on the same ** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file). ** ** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 6920 6921 6922 6923 6924 6925 6926 6927 6928 6929 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6939 6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946 6947 6948 6949 6950 6951 6952 6953 6954 6955 6956 6957 6958 6959 6960 6961 6962 6963 6964 6965 6966 6967 6968 6969 6970 6971 6972 6973 6974 6975 6976 6977 6978 6979 6980 6981 6982 6983 6984 6985 6986 6987 6988 6989 6990 6991 6992 6993 6994 6995 6996 6997 6998 6999 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7050 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055 7056 7057 | ** ** The proxy file - a single-byte file used for all advisory file locks ** normally taken on the database file. This allows for safe sharing ** of the database file for multiple readers and writers on the same ** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file). ** ** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is ** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made. ** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where ** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it. ** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until ** the connection to the database is closed. ** ** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need ** to be created the first time they are used. ** ** Configuration options ** --------------------- ** ** SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING ** ** Database files accessed on non-local file systems are ** automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are ** named automatically using the same logic as ** PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:" ** ** SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG ** ** Enables the logging of error messages during host id file ** retrieval and creation ** ** LOCKPROXYDIR ** ** Overrides the default directory used for lock proxy files that ** are named automatically via the ":auto:" setting ** ** SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS ** ** Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the ** lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set. ** ** ** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING, ** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will ** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0 ** will force automatic proxy locking to be disabled for all database ** files (explicitly calling the SQLITE_FCNTL_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE pragma or ** sqlite_file_control API is not affected by SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING). */ /* ** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX */ #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE /* ** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote ** and local proxy files in it */ typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext; struct proxyLockingContext { unixFile *conchFile; /* Open conch file */ char *conchFilePath; /* Name of the conch file */ unixFile *lockProxy; /* Open proxy lock file */ char *lockProxyPath; /* Name of the proxy lock file */ char *dbPath; /* Name of the open file */ int conchHeld; /* 1 if the conch is held, -1 if lockless */ int nFails; /* Number of conch taking failures */ void *oldLockingContext; /* Original lockingcontext to restore on close */ sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod; /* Original I/O methods for close */ }; /* ** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath, ** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length ** file path. */ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){ int len; int dbLen; int i; #ifdef LOCKPROXYDIR len = strlcpy(lPath, LOCKPROXYDIR, maxLen); #else # ifdef _CS_DARWIN_USER_TEMP_DIR { if( !confstr(_CS_DARWIN_USER_TEMP_DIR, lPath, maxLen) ){ OSTRACE(("GETLOCKPATH failed %s errno=%d pid=%d\n", lPath, errno, osGetpid(0))); return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; } len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen); } # else len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen); # endif #endif if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){ len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen); } /* transform the db path to a unique cache name */ dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath); for( i=0; i<dbLen && (i+len+7)<(int)maxLen; i++){ char c = dbPath[i]; lPath[i+len] = (c=='/')?'_':c; } lPath[i+len]='\0'; strlcat(lPath, ":auto:", maxLen); OSTRACE(("GETLOCKPATH proxy lock path=%s pid=%d\n", lPath, osGetpid(0))); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Creates the lock file and any missing directories in lockPath */ static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){ int i, len; char buf[MAXPATHLEN]; int start = 0; assert(lockPath!=NULL); /* try to create all the intermediate directories */ len = (int)strlen(lockPath); buf[0] = lockPath[0]; for( i=1; i<len; i++ ){ if( lockPath[i] == '/' && (i - start > 0) ){ /* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */ if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/') || (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){ buf[i]='\0'; if( osMkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){ int err=errno; if( err!=EEXIST ) { OSTRACE(("CREATELOCKPATH FAILED creating %s, " "'%s' proxy lock path=%s pid=%d\n", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 | if( fd<0 ){ if( islockfile ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } switch (terrno) { case EACCES: return SQLITE_PERM; | | | | | | | 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 7156 7157 7158 7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7166 7167 7168 7169 7170 7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 | if( fd<0 ){ if( islockfile ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } switch (terrno) { case EACCES: return SQLITE_PERM; case EIO: return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */ default: return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT; } } pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc64(sizeof(*pNew)); if( pNew==NULL ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; goto end_create_proxy; } memset(pNew, 0, sizeof(unixFile)); pNew->openFlags = openFlags; memset(&dummyVfs, 0, sizeof(dummyVfs)); dummyVfs.pAppData = (void*)&autolockIoFinder; dummyVfs.zName = "dummy"; pUnused->fd = fd; pUnused->flags = openFlags; pNew->pPreallocatedUnused = pUnused; rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ *ppFile = pNew; return SQLITE_OK; } end_create_proxy: robust_close(pNew, fd, __LINE__); sqlite3_free(pNew); sqlite3_free(pUnused); return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* simulate multiple hosts by creating unique hostid file paths */ int sqlite3_hostid_num = 0; #endif #define PROXY_HOSTIDLEN 16 /* conch file host id length */ #if HAVE_GETHOSTUUID /* Not always defined in the headers as it ought to be */ extern int gethostuuid(uuid_t id, const struct timespec *wait); #endif /* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN ** bytes of writable memory. */ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){ assert(PROXY_HOSTIDLEN == sizeof(uuid_t)); memset(pHostID, 0, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN); #if HAVE_GETHOSTUUID { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 7197 | #endif #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* simulate multiple hosts by creating unique hostid file paths */ if( sqlite3_hostid_num != 0){ pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF)); } #endif | | | | | | | | 7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 7197 7198 7199 7200 7201 7202 7203 7204 7205 7206 7207 7208 7209 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 7218 7219 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 7226 7227 7228 7229 7230 7231 7232 7233 7234 7235 7236 7237 | #endif #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* simulate multiple hosts by creating unique hostid file paths */ if( sqlite3_hostid_num != 0){ pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF)); } #endif return SQLITE_OK; } /* The conch file contains the header, host id and lock file path */ #define PROXY_CONCHVERSION 2 /* 1-byte header, 16-byte host id, path */ #define PROXY_HEADERLEN 1 /* conch file header length */ #define PROXY_PATHINDEX (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) #define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN) /* ** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves ** it back. The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the ** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is ** closed. Returns zero if successful. */ static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; char tPath[MAXPATHLEN]; char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; char *cPath = pCtx->conchFilePath; size_t readLen = 0; size_t pathLen = 0; char errmsg[64] = ""; int fd = -1; int rc = -1; UNUSED_PARAMETER(myHostID); /* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */ pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN); if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 || (strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(errmsg),errmsg,"path error (len %d)",(int)pathLen); goto end_breaklock; } /* read the conch content */ readLen = osPread(conchFile->h, buf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0); if( readLen<PROXY_PATHINDEX ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7265 7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 7271 | robust_close(pFile, fd, __LINE__); } fprintf(stderr, "failed to break stale lock on %s, %s\n", cPath, errmsg); } return rc; } | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 7265 7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 7277 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284 7285 7286 7287 7288 7289 7290 7291 7292 7293 7294 7295 7296 7297 7298 7299 7300 7301 7302 7303 7304 7305 7306 7307 7308 7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 7334 7335 7336 7337 7338 7339 7340 7341 7342 7343 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7360 7361 7362 7363 7364 7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 7375 7376 7377 7378 7379 7380 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 7390 7391 7392 7393 7394 7395 7396 7397 7398 7399 7400 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 7409 7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 7426 7427 7428 7429 7430 7431 7432 7433 7434 7435 7436 7437 7438 7439 7440 7441 7442 7443 7444 7445 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 7487 7488 | robust_close(pFile, fd, __LINE__); } fprintf(stderr, "failed to break stale lock on %s, %s\n", cPath, errmsg); } return rc; } /* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the ** host id matches. */ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int nTries = 0; struct timespec conchModTime; memset(&conchModTime, 0, sizeof(conchModTime)); do { rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType); nTries ++; if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ /* If the lock failed (busy): * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again. * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait * 10 sec and try again * 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed. */ struct stat buf; if( osFstat(conchFile->h, &buf) ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, errno); return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; } if( nTries==1 ){ conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec; unixSleep(0,500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/ continue; } assert( nTries>1 ); if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec || conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } if( nTries==2 ){ char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; int len = osPread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0); if( len<0 ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, errno); return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; } if( len>PROXY_PATHINDEX && tBuf[0]==(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION){ /* don't break the lock if the host id doesn't match */ if( 0!=memcmp(&tBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } }else{ /* don't break the lock on short read or a version mismatch */ return SQLITE_BUSY; } unixSleep(0,10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */ continue; } assert( nTries==3 ); if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; if( lockType==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){ rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK); } if( !rc ){ rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType); } } } } while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 ); return rc; } /* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if ** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL ** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the ** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically ** and written to the conch file. */ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){ return SQLITE_OK; }else{ unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; uuid_t myHostID; int pError = 0; char readBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; char lockPath[MAXPATHLEN]; char *tempLockPath = NULL; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int createConch = 0; int hostIdMatch = 0; int readLen = 0; int tryOldLockPath = 0; int forceNewLockPath = 0; OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h, (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0))); rc = proxyGetHostID(myHostID, &pError); if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_IOERR ){ storeLastErrno(pFile, pError); goto end_takeconch; } rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, SHARED_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto end_takeconch; } /* read the existing conch file */ readLen = seekAndRead((unixFile*)conchFile, 0, readBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN); if( readLen<0 ){ /* I/O error: lastErrno set by seekAndRead */ storeLastErrno(pFile, conchFile->lastErrno); rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ; goto end_takeconch; }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) || readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){ /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new ** conch file. */ createConch = 1; } /* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll ** retry with a new auto-generated path */ do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */ if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){ hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN); /* if the conch has data compare the contents */ if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){ /* for auto-named local lock file, just check the host ID and we'll ** use the local lock file path that's already in there */ if( hostIdMatch ){ size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX); if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){ pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1; } memcpy(lockPath, &readBuf[PROXY_PATHINDEX], pathLen); lockPath[pathLen] = 0; tempLockPath = lockPath; tryOldLockPath = 1; /* create a copy of the lock path if the conch is taken */ goto end_takeconch; } }else if( hostIdMatch && !strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, &readBuf[PROXY_PATHINDEX], readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX) ){ /* conch host and lock path match */ goto end_takeconch; } } /* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */ if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto end_takeconch; } /* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */ if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){ proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN); tempLockPath = lockPath; /* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */ } /* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process ** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big ** stick. */ futimes(conchFile->h, NULL); if( hostIdMatch && !createConch ){ if( conchFile->pInode && conchFile->pInode->nShared>1 ){ /* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this ** same process is still holding a shared lock. */ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; } else { rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); } }else{ rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; int writeSize = 0; writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION; memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN); if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){ strlcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_PATHINDEX], pCtx->lockProxyPath, MAXPATHLEN); }else{ strlcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_PATHINDEX], tempLockPath, MAXPATHLEN); } writeSize = PROXY_PATHINDEX + strlen(&writeBuffer[PROXY_PATHINDEX]); robust_ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize); rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0); full_fsync(conchFile->h,0,0); /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){ struct stat buf; int err = osFstat(pFile->h, &buf); if( err==0 ){ mode_t cmode = buf.st_mode&(S_IRUSR|S_IWUSR | S_IRGRP|S_IWGRP | S_IROTH|S_IWOTH); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 | fprintf(stderr, "fchmod %o FAILED with %d %s\n", cmode, code, strerror(code)); } else { fprintf(stderr, "fchmod %o SUCCEDED\n",cmode); } }else{ int code = errno; | | | | 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517 7518 7519 | fprintf(stderr, "fchmod %o FAILED with %d %s\n", cmode, code, strerror(code)); } else { fprintf(stderr, "fchmod %o SUCCEDED\n",cmode); } }else{ int code = errno; fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n", err, code, strerror(code)); #endif } } } conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK); end_takeconch: OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE %d\n", pFile->h)); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){ int fd; if( pFile->h>=0 ){ robust_close(pFile, pFile->h, __LINE__); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 7533 7534 | } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && !pCtx->lockProxy ){ char *path = tempLockPath ? tempLockPath : pCtx->lockProxyPath; rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){ /* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path | | | | | | 7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 7533 7534 7535 7536 7537 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7557 7558 7559 7560 7561 7562 7563 7564 7565 7566 7567 7568 7569 7570 7571 7572 7573 7574 7575 7576 7577 7578 7579 7580 7581 7582 7583 7584 7585 7586 7587 7588 7589 7590 | } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && !pCtx->lockProxy ){ char *path = tempLockPath ? tempLockPath : pCtx->lockProxyPath; rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){ /* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path ** so try again via auto-naming */ forceNewLockPath = 1; tryOldLockPath = 0; continue; /* go back to the do {} while start point, try again */ } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* Need to make a copy of path if we extracted the value ** from the conch file or the path was allocated on the stack */ if( tempLockPath ){ pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, tempLockPath); if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pCtx->conchHeld = 1; if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){ afpLockingContext *afpCtx; afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext; afpCtx->dbPath = pCtx->lockProxyPath; } } else { conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK); } OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d %s\n", conchFile->h, rc==SQLITE_OK?"ok":"failed")); return rc; } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file - ** we should never get here except via the 'continue' call. */ } } /* ** If pFile holds a lock on a conch file, then release that lock. */ static int proxyReleaseConch(unixFile *pFile){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Subroutine return code */ proxyLockingContext *pCtx; /* The locking context for the proxy lock */ unixFile *conchFile; /* Name of the conch file */ pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h, (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0))); if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){ rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK); } pCtx->conchHeld = 0; OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH %d %s\n", conchFile->h, (rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"))); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 | */ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){ int i; /* Loop counter */ int len = (int)strlen(dbPath); /* Length of database filename - dbPath */ char *conchPath; /* buffer in which to construct conch name */ /* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to | | | | 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 | */ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){ int i; /* Loop counter */ int len = (int)strlen(dbPath); /* Length of database filename - dbPath */ char *conchPath; /* buffer in which to construct conch name */ /* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to ** the name of the original database file. */ *pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc64(len + 8); if( conchPath==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1); /* now insert a "." before the last / character */ for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){ if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){ i++; break; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 | assert( (int)strlen(conchPath) == len+7 ); return SQLITE_OK; } /* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches | | | | | | | | | | 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 7642 7643 7644 7645 7646 7647 7648 7649 7650 7651 7652 7653 7654 7655 7656 7657 7658 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 7689 7690 7691 7692 7693 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 | assert( (int)strlen(conchPath) == len+7 ); return SQLITE_OK; } /* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches ** the local lock file path */ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext; char *oldPath = pCtx->lockProxyPath; int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } /* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */ if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") || (oldPath && !strncmp(oldPath, path, MAXPATHLEN)) ){ return SQLITE_OK; }else{ unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy; pCtx->lockProxy=NULL; pCtx->conchHeld = 0; if( lockProxy!=NULL ){ rc=lockProxy->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)lockProxy); if( rc ) return rc; sqlite3_free(lockProxy); } sqlite3_free(oldPath); pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path); } return rc; } /* ** pFile is a file that has been opened by a prior xOpen call. dbPath ** is a string buffer at least MAXPATHLEN+1 characters in size. ** ** This routine find the filename associated with pFile and writes it ** int dbPath. */ static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){ #if defined(__APPLE__) if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){ /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field ** of the struct */ assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN ); strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath, MAXPATHLEN); } else #endif if( pFile->pMethod == &dotlockIoMethods ){ /* dot lock style uses the locking context to store the dot lock ** file path */ int len = strlen((char *)pFile->lockingContext) - strlen(DOTLOCK_SUFFIX); memcpy(dbPath, (char *)pFile->lockingContext, len + 1); }else{ /* all other styles use the locking context to store the db file path */ assert( strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN ); strlcpy(dbPath, (char *)pFile->lockingContext, MAXPATHLEN); } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking ** will be performed on the local proxy lock file. The following fields ** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and ** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time: ** ->lockingContext ** ->pMethod */ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { proxyLockingContext *pCtx; char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1]; /* Name of the database file */ char *lockPath=NULL; int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(pFile, dbPath); if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") ){ lockPath=NULL; }else{ lockPath=(char *)path; } OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h, (lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0))); pCtx = sqlite3_malloc64( sizeof(*pCtx) ); if( pCtx==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 | } } if( goLockless ){ pCtx->conchHeld = -1; /* read only FS/ lockless */ rc = SQLITE_OK; } } | | | | | | 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7764 7765 7766 7767 7768 7769 7770 7771 7772 7773 7774 7775 7776 7777 7778 7779 7780 7781 7782 7783 7784 7785 7786 7787 7788 7789 7790 | } } if( goLockless ){ pCtx->conchHeld = -1; /* read only FS/ lockless */ rc = SQLITE_OK; } } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){ pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pCtx->dbPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, dbPath); if( pCtx->dbPath==NULL ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned, ** switch the locking context and pMethod then return. */ pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext; pFile->lockingContext = pCtx; pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod; pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods; }else{ if( pCtx->conchFile ){ pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile); sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile); } sqlite3DbFree(0, pCtx->lockProxyPath); sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath); sqlite3_free(pCtx); } OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d %s\n", pFile->h, (rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"))); return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7814 7815 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 | unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int isProxyStyle = (pFile->pMethod == &proxyIoMethods); if( pArg==NULL || (const char *)pArg==0 ){ if( isProxyStyle ){ /* turn off proxy locking - not supported. If support is added for ** switching proxy locking mode off then it will need to fail if | | | | | 7814 7815 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 7840 | unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int isProxyStyle = (pFile->pMethod == &proxyIoMethods); if( pArg==NULL || (const char *)pArg==0 ){ if( isProxyStyle ){ /* turn off proxy locking - not supported. If support is added for ** switching proxy locking mode off then it will need to fail if ** the journal mode is WAL mode. */ rc = SQLITE_ERROR /*SQLITE_PROTOCOL? SQLITE_MISUSE?*/; }else{ /* turn off proxy locking - already off - NOOP */ rc = SQLITE_OK; } }else{ const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg; if( isProxyStyle ){ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext; if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:") || (pCtx->lockProxyPath && !strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN)) ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; }else{ rc = switchLockProxyPath(pFile, proxyPath); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 | static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) { if( ALWAYS(id) ){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; int rc = SQLITE_OK; | | | 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 7962 7963 7964 7965 | static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) { if( ALWAYS(id) ){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( lockProxy ){ rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK); if( rc ) return rc; rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy); if( rc ) return rc; sqlite3_free(lockProxy); pCtx->lockProxy = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7988 7989 7990 7991 7992 7993 7994 | #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ /* ** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems. ** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also ** restricted to MacOSX. | | | | | | 7988 7989 7990 7991 7992 7993 7994 7995 7996 7997 7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 8011 8012 8013 8014 8015 8016 8017 8018 8019 8020 8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 | #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ /* ** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems. ** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also ** restricted to MacOSX. ** ** ******************* End of the proxy lock implementation ********************** ******************************************************************************/ /* ** Initialize the operating system interface. ** ** This routine registers all VFS implementations for unix-like operating ** systems. This routine, and the sqlite3_os_end() routine that follows, ** should be the only routines in this file that are visible from other ** files. ** ** This routine is called once during SQLite initialization and by a ** single thread. The memory allocation and mutex subsystems have not ** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they ** should not be used. */ int sqlite3_os_init(void){ /* ** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object. ** The name of the VFS is NAME. The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer ** to the "finder" function. (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because ** silly C90 rules prohibit a void* from being cast to a function pointer ** and so we have to go through the intermediate pointer to avoid problems ** when compiling with -pedantic-errors on GCC.) ** ** The FINDER parameter to this macro is the name of the pointer to the ** finder-function. The finder-function returns a pointer to the ** sqlite_io_methods object that implements the desired locking ** behaviors. See the division above that contains the IOMETHODS ** macro for addition information on finder-functions. ** ** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods ** object. But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the ** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for ** that filesystem time. */ #define UNIXVFS(VFSNAME, FINDER) { \ 3, /* iVersion */ \ sizeof(unixFile), /* szOsFile */ \ MAX_PATHNAME, /* mxPathname */ \ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 8131 8132 | */ assert( UNIX_SHM_DMS==128 ); /* Byte offset of the deadman-switch */ #endif /* Initialize temp file dir array. */ unixTempFileInit(); | | | | | | 8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 8131 8132 8133 8134 8135 8136 8137 8138 8139 8140 8141 8142 8143 8144 8145 8146 8147 8148 | */ assert( UNIX_SHM_DMS==128 ); /* Byte offset of the deadman-switch */ #endif /* Initialize temp file dir array. */ unixTempFileInit(); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Shutdown the operating system interface. ** ** Some operating systems might need to do some cleanup in this routine, ** to release dynamically allocated objects. But not on unix. ** This routine is a no-op for unix. */ int sqlite3_os_end(void){ unixBigLock = 0; return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */ |
Changes to src/os_win.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 | #define osFlushViewOfFile \ ((BOOL(WINAPI*)(LPCVOID,SIZE_T))aSyscall[79].pCurrent) }; /* End of the overrideable system calls */ /* ** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the | | | 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 | #define osFlushViewOfFile \ ((BOOL(WINAPI*)(LPCVOID,SIZE_T))aSyscall[79].pCurrent) }; /* End of the overrideable system calls */ /* ** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the ** "win32" VFSes. Return SQLITE_OK upon successfully updating the ** system call pointer, or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if there is no configurable ** system call named zName. */ static int winSetSystemCall( sqlite3_vfs *pNotUsed, /* The VFS pointer. Not used */ const char *zName, /* Name of system call to override */ sqlite3_syscall_ptr pNewFunc /* Pointer to new system call value */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 | assert( offset>=0 ); SimulateIOError(return SQLITE_IOERR_READ); OSTRACE(("READ pid=%lu, pFile=%p, file=%p, buffer=%p, amount=%d, " "offset=%lld, lock=%d\n", osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype)); #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 | | | 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 | assert( offset>=0 ); SimulateIOError(return SQLITE_IOERR_READ); OSTRACE(("READ pid=%lu, pFile=%p, file=%p, buffer=%p, amount=%d, " "offset=%lld, lock=%d\n", osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype)); #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transferring ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */ if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){ if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){ memcpy(pBuf, &((u8 *)(pFile->pMapRegion))[offset], amt); OSTRACE(("READ-MMAP pid=%lu, pFile=%p, file=%p, rc=SQLITE_OK\n", osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h)); return SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 | SimulateDiskfullError(return SQLITE_FULL); OSTRACE(("WRITE pid=%lu, pFile=%p, file=%p, buffer=%p, amount=%d, " "offset=%lld, lock=%d\n", osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype)); #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 | | | 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 | SimulateDiskfullError(return SQLITE_FULL); OSTRACE(("WRITE pid=%lu, pFile=%p, file=%p, buffer=%p, amount=%d, " "offset=%lld, lock=%d\n", osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype)); #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transferring ** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */ if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){ if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){ memcpy(&((u8 *)(pFile->pMapRegion))[offset], pBuf, amt); OSTRACE(("WRITE-MMAP pid=%lu, pFile=%p, file=%p, rc=SQLITE_OK\n", osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h)); return SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 | ** though some folks might complain that the file is bigger than it ** needs to be. ** ** The only feasible work-around is to defer the truncation until after ** all references to memory-mapped content are closed. That is doable, ** but involves adding a few branches in the common write code path which ** could slow down normal operations slightly. Hence, we have decided for | | | 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 | ** though some folks might complain that the file is bigger than it ** needs to be. ** ** The only feasible work-around is to defer the truncation until after ** all references to memory-mapped content are closed. That is doable, ** but involves adding a few branches in the common write code path which ** could slow down normal operations slightly. Hence, we have decided for ** now to simply make transactions a no-op if there are pending reads. We ** can maybe revisit this decision in the future. */ return SQLITE_OK; } #endif assert( pFile ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 | osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h, sqlite3ErrName(rc))); return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* ** Count the number of fullsyncs and normal syncs. This is used to test | | | 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 | osGetCurrentProcessId(), pFile, pFile->h, sqlite3ErrName(rc))); return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* ** Count the number of fullsyncs and normal syncs. This is used to test ** that syncs and fullsyncs are occurring at the right times. */ int sqlite3_sync_count = 0; int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0; #endif /* ** Make sure all writes to a particular file are committed to disk. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/pager.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | /* ** 2001 September 15 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager". | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | /* ** 2001 September 15 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager". ** ** The pager is used to access a database disk file. It implements ** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that ** is separate from the database file. The pager also implements file ** locking to prevent two processes from writing the same database ** file simultaneously, or one process from reading the database while ** another is writing. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | ** Within this comment block, a page is deemed to have been synced ** automatically as soon as it is written when PRAGMA synchronous=OFF. ** Otherwise, the page is not synced until the xSync method of the VFS ** is called successfully on the file containing the page. ** ** Definition: A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if ** one or more of the following are true about the page: | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 | ** Within this comment block, a page is deemed to have been synced ** automatically as soon as it is written when PRAGMA synchronous=OFF. ** Otherwise, the page is not synced until the xSync method of the VFS ** is called successfully on the file containing the page. ** ** Definition: A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if ** one or more of the following are true about the page: ** ** (a) The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of ** the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and ** synced. ** ** (b) The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction. ** ** (c) The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in ** the database file at the start of the transaction. ** ** (1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the ** following are true: ** ** (a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable. ** ** (b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire ** transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence ** number consists of a single page change. ** ** (2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches ** both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written ** and the content in the database at the beginning of the current ** transaction. ** ** (3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size ** in length and are aligned on a page boundary. ** ** (4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and ** an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the ** first 100 bytes of the database file. ** ** (5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal ** being deleted, truncated, or zeroed. ** ** (6) If a super-journal file is used, then all writes to the database file ** are synced prior to the super-journal being deleted. ** ** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time) ** are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to ** all queries. Note in particular the content of freelist leaf ** pages can be changed arbitrarily without affecting the logical equivalence ** of the database. ** ** (7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set, ** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the ** journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logically ** equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction. ** ** (8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS ** is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at ** the beginning of the transaction. (In some VFSes, the xTruncate ** method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will ** invoke it.) ** ** (9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range ** of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing ** the EXCLUSIVE lock, thus signaling other connections on the same ** database to flush their caches. ** ** (10) The pattern of bits in bytes 24 through 39 shall not repeat in less ** than one billion transactions. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | #define PAGERTRACE(X) if( sqlite3PagerTrace ){ sqlite3DebugPrintf X; } #else #define PAGERTRACE(X) #endif /* ** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 | #define PAGERTRACE(X) if( sqlite3PagerTrace ){ sqlite3DebugPrintf X; } #else #define PAGERTRACE(X) #endif /* ** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above ** to print out file-descriptors. ** ** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The ** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file ** struct as its argument. */ #define PAGERID(p) (SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(p->fd)) #define FILEHANDLEID(fd) (SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(fd)) /* ** The Pager.eState variable stores the current 'state' of a pager. A ** pager may be in any one of the seven states shown in the following ** state diagram. ** ** OPEN <------+------+ ** | | | ** V | | ** +---------> READER-------+ | ** | | | ** | V | ** |<-------WRITER_LOCKED------> ERROR ** | | ^ ** | V | ** |<------WRITER_CACHEMOD-------->| ** | | | ** | V | ** |<-------WRITER_DBMOD---------->| ** | | | ** | V | ** +<------WRITER_FINISHED-------->+ ** ** ** List of state transitions and the C [function] that performs each: ** ** OPEN -> READER [sqlite3PagerSharedLock] ** READER -> OPEN [pager_unlock] ** ** READER -> WRITER_LOCKED [sqlite3PagerBegin] ** WRITER_LOCKED -> WRITER_CACHEMOD [pager_open_journal] ** WRITER_CACHEMOD -> WRITER_DBMOD [syncJournal] ** WRITER_DBMOD -> WRITER_FINISHED [sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne] ** WRITER_*** -> READER [pager_end_transaction] ** ** WRITER_*** -> ERROR [pager_error] ** ERROR -> OPEN [pager_unlock] ** ** ** OPEN: ** ** The pager starts up in this state. Nothing is guaranteed in this ** state - the file may or may not be locked and the database size is ** unknown. The database may not be read or written. ** ** * No read or write transaction is active. ** * Any lock, or no lock at all, may be held on the database file. ** * The dbSize, dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables may not be trusted. ** ** READER: ** ** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in ** rollback (non-WAL) mode are met. Unless the pager is (or recently ** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is ** open. The database size is known in this state. ** ** A connection running with locking_mode=normal enters this state when ** it opens a read-transaction on the database and returns to state ** OPEN after the read-transaction is completed. However a connection ** running in locking_mode=exclusive (including temp databases) remains in ** this state even after the read-transaction is closed. The only way ** a locking_mode=exclusive connection can transition from READER to OPEN ** is via the ERROR state (see below). ** ** * A read transaction may be active (but a write-transaction cannot). ** * A SHARED or greater lock is held on the database file. ** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read ** transaction is not active). The dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables ** may not be trusted at this point. ** * If the database is a WAL database, then the WAL connection is open. ** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that ** there is no hot-journal in the file-system. ** ** WRITER_LOCKED: ** ** The pager moves to this state from READER when a write-transaction ** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks ** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual ** modifications to the cache or database have taken place. ** ** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with ** BEGIN EXCLUSIVE) EXCLUSIVE lock is obtained on the database file when ** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened ** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while ** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database ** file. ** ** IN WAL mode, WalBeginWriteTransaction() is called to lock the log file. ** If the connection is running with locking_mode=exclusive, an attempt ** is made to obtain an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. ** ** * A write transaction is active. ** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater ** lock is held on the database file. ** * If the connection is open in WAL-mode, a WAL write transaction ** is open (i.e. sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction() has been successfully ** called). ** * The dbSize, dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables are all valid. ** * The contents of the pager cache have not been modified. ** * The journal file may or may not be open. ** * Nothing (not even the first header) has been written to the journal. ** ** WRITER_CACHEMOD: ** ** A pager moves from WRITER_LOCKED state to this state when a page is ** first modified by the upper layer. In rollback mode the journal file ** is opened (if it is not already open) and a header written to the ** start of it. The database file on disk has not been modified. ** ** * A write transaction is active. ** * A RESERVED or greater lock is held on the database file. ** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written ** to it, but the header has not been synced to disk. ** * The contents of the page cache have been modified. ** ** WRITER_DBMOD: ** ** The pager transitions from WRITER_CACHEMOD into WRITER_DBMOD state ** when it modifies the contents of the database file. WAL connections ** never enter this state (since they do not modify the database file, ** just the log file). ** ** * A write transaction is active. ** * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file. ** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written ** and synced to disk. ** * The contents of the page cache have been modified (and possibly ** written to disk). ** ** WRITER_FINISHED: ** ** It is not possible for a WAL connection to enter this state. ** ** A rollback-mode pager changes to WRITER_FINISHED state from WRITER_DBMOD ** state after the entire transaction has been successfully written into the ** database file. In this state the transaction may be committed simply ** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is ** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper ** layer must either commit or rollback the transaction. ** ** * A write transaction is active. ** * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file. ** * All writing and syncing of journal and database data has finished. ** If no error occurred, all that remains is to finalize the journal to ** commit the transaction. If an error did occur, the caller will need ** to rollback the transaction. ** ** ERROR: ** ** The ERROR state is entered when an IO or disk-full error (including ** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it ** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents, ** db size etc.) are consistent with the contents of the file-system. ** ** Temporary pager files may enter the ERROR state, but in-memory pagers ** cannot. ** ** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback, ** the contents of the page-cache may be left in an inconsistent state. ** At this point it would be dangerous to change back to READER state ** (as usually happens after a rollback). Any subsequent readers might ** report database corruption (due to the inconsistent cache), and if ** they upgrade to writers, they may inadvertently corrupt the database ** file. To avoid this hazard, the pager switches into the ERROR state ** instead of READER following such an error. ** ** Once it has entered the ERROR state, any attempt to use the pager ** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all ** outstanding transactions have been abandoned, the pager is able to ** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the ** page-cache and any other in-memory state at the same time. Everything ** is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback performed) ** when a read-transaction is next opened on the pager (transitioning ** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered ** from the error. ** ** Specifically, the pager jumps into the ERROR state if: ** ** 1. An error occurs while attempting a rollback. This happens in ** function sqlite3PagerRollback(). ** ** 2. An error occurs while attempting to finalize a journal file ** following a commit in function sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(). ** ** 3. An error occurs while attempting to write to the journal or ** database file in function pagerStress() in order to free up ** memory. ** ** In other cases, the error is returned to the b-tree layer. The b-tree ** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition ** persists, the pager enters the ERROR state via condition (1) above. ** ** Condition (3) is necessary because it can be triggered by a read-only ** statement executed within a transaction. In this case, if the error ** code were simply returned to the user, the b-tree layer would not ** automatically attempt a rollback, as it assumes that an error in a ** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent ** state. ** ** * The Pager.errCode variable is set to something other than SQLITE_OK. ** * There are one or more outstanding references to pages (after the ** last reference is dropped the pager should move back to OPEN state). ** * The pager is not an in-memory pager. ** ** ** Notes: ** ** * A pager is never in WRITER_DBMOD or WRITER_FINISHED state if the ** connection is open in WAL mode. A WAL connection is always in one ** of the first four states. ** ** * Normally, a connection open in exclusive mode is never in PAGER_OPEN ** state. There are two exceptions: immediately after exclusive-mode has ** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are ** executed), and when the pager is leaving the "error state". ** ** * See also: assert_pager_state(). */ #define PAGER_OPEN 0 #define PAGER_READER 1 #define PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED 2 #define PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD 3 #define PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD 4 #define PAGER_WRITER_FINISHED 5 #define PAGER_ERROR 6 /* ** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the ** following locking-states, according to the lock currently held on ** the database file: NO_LOCK, SHARED_LOCK, RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. ** This variable is kept up to date as locks are taken and released by ** the pagerLockDb() and pagerUnlockDb() wrappers. ** ** If the VFS xLock() or xUnlock() returns an error other than SQLITE_BUSY ** (i.e. one of the SQLITE_IOERR subtypes), it is not clear whether or not ** the operation was successful. In these circumstances pagerLockDb() and ** pagerUnlockDb() take a conservative approach - eLock is always updated ** when unlocking the file, and only updated when locking the file if the ** VFS call is successful. This way, the Pager.eLock variable may be set ** to a less exclusive (lower) value than the lock that is actually held ** at the system level, but it is never set to a more exclusive value. ** ** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may ** be a few redundant xLock() calls or a lock may be held for longer than ** required, but nothing really goes wrong. ** ** The exception is when the database file is unlocked as the pager moves ** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file ** in the file-system that needs to be rolled back (as part of an OPEN->SHARED ** transition, by the same pager or any other). If the call to xUnlock() ** fails at this point and the pager is left holding an EXCLUSIVE lock, this ** can confuse the call to xCheckReservedLock() call made later as part ** of hot-journal detection. ** ** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED ** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may ** return true because the caller itself is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock (but ** doesn't know it because of a previous error in xUnlock). If this happens ** a hot-journal may be mistaken for a journal being created by an active ** transaction in another process, causing SQLite to read from the database ** without rolling it back. ** ** To work around this, if a call to xUnlock() fails when unlocking the ** database in the ERROR state, Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK. It ** is only changed back to a real locking state after a successful call ** to xLock(EXCLUSIVE). Also, the code to do the OPEN->SHARED state transition ** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK ** lock. Instead, it assumes a hot-journal exists and obtains an EXCLUSIVE ** lock on the database file before attempting to roll it back. See function ** PagerSharedLock() for more detail. ** ** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in ** PAGER_OPEN state. */ #define UNKNOWN_LOCK (EXCLUSIVE_LOCK+1) /* ** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method ** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead. ** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on ** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit. */ #define MAX_SECTOR_SIZE 0x10000 /* ** An instance of the following structure is allocated for each active ** savepoint and statement transaction in the system. All such structures ** are stored in the Pager.aSavepoint[] array, which is allocated and ** resized using sqlite3Realloc(). ** ** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is ** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while ** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset ** immediately following the last journal record written into the main ** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint ** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()). */ typedef struct PagerSavepoint PagerSavepoint; struct PagerSavepoint { i64 iOffset; /* Starting offset in main journal */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
470 471 472 473 474 475 476 | ** ** In some (obscure) circumstances, this variable may also be set to ** UNKNOWN_LOCK. See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for ** details. ** ** changeCountDone ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 | ** ** In some (obscure) circumstances, this variable may also be set to ** UNKNOWN_LOCK. See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for ** details. ** ** changeCountDone ** ** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter ** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is ** not updated more often than necessary. ** ** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which ** can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file. ** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is ** relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed, ** The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of ** updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction. ** ** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection ** need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction ** committed. ** ** setSuper ** ** When PagerCommitPhaseOne() is called to commit a transaction, it may ** (or may not) specify a super-journal name to be written into the ** journal file before it is synced to disk. ** ** Whether or not a journal file contains a super-journal pointer affects ** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is ** committed or rolled back when running in "journal_mode=PERSIST" mode. ** If a journal file does not contain a super-journal pointer, it is ** finalized by overwriting the first journal header with zeroes. If ** it does contain a super-journal pointer the journal file is finalized ** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were ** running in "journal_mode=truncate" mode. ** ** Journal files that contain super-journal pointers cannot be finalized ** simply by overwriting the first journal-header with zeroes, as the ** super-journal pointer could interfere with hot-journal rollback of any ** subsequently interrupted transaction that reuses the journal file. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
523 524 525 526 527 528 529 | ** When bits SPILLFLAG_OFF or SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK of doNotSpill are set, ** writing to the database from pagerStress() is disabled altogether. ** The SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK case is done in a very obscure case that ** comes up during savepoint rollback that requires the pcache module ** to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written ** while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback(). The SPILLFLAG_OFF ** case is a user preference. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 | ** When bits SPILLFLAG_OFF or SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK of doNotSpill are set, ** writing to the database from pagerStress() is disabled altogether. ** The SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK case is done in a very obscure case that ** comes up during savepoint rollback that requires the pcache module ** to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written ** while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback(). The SPILLFLAG_OFF ** case is a user preference. ** ** If the SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC bit is set, writing to the database from ** pagerStress() is permitted, but syncing the journal file is not. ** This flag is set by sqlite3PagerWrite() when the file-system sector-size ** is larger than the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync ** from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector. ** ** subjInMemory ** ** This is a boolean variable. If true, then any required sub-journal ** is opened as an in-memory journal file. If false, then in-memory ** sub-journals are only used for in-memory pager files. ** ** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new ** write-transaction is opened. ** ** dbSize, dbOrigSize, dbFileSize ** ** Variable dbSize is set to the number of pages in the database file. ** It is valid in PAGER_READER and higher states (all states except for ** OPEN and ERROR). ** ** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be ** larger than the size of the database (the value stored at offset ** 28 of the database header by the btree). If the size of the file ** is not an integer multiple of the page-size, the value stored in ** dbSize is rounded down (i.e. a 5KB file with 2K page-size has dbSize==2). ** Except, any file that is greater than 0 bytes in size is considered ** to have at least one page. (i.e. a 1KB file with 2K page-size leads ** to dbSize==1). ** ** During a write-transaction, if pages with page-numbers greater than ** dbSize are modified in the cache, dbSize is updated accordingly. ** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(), ** dbSize is updated. ** ** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states ** PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED and higher. dbOrigSize is a copy of the dbSize ** variable at the start of the transaction. It is used during rollback, ** and to determine whether or not pages need to be journalled before ** being modified. ** ** Throughout a write-transaction, dbFileSize contains the size of ** the file on disk in pages. It is set to a copy of dbSize when the ** write-transaction is first opened, and updated when VFS calls are made ** to write or truncate the database file on disk. ** ** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress ** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If, ** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates ** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize), ** pager_truncate() is called. The pager_truncate() call uses xFilesize() ** to measure the database file on disk, and then truncates it if required. ** dbFileSize is not used when rolling back a transaction. In this case ** pager_truncate() is called unconditionally (which means there may be ** a call to xFilesize() that is not strictly required). In either case, ** pager_truncate() may cause the file to become smaller or larger. ** ** dbHintSize ** ** The dbHintSize variable is used to limit the number of calls made to ** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method. ** ** dbHintSize is set to a copy of the dbSize variable when a ** write-transaction is opened (at the same time as dbFileSize and ** dbOrigSize). If the xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method is called, ** dbHintSize is increased to the number of pages that correspond to the ** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for ** details. ** ** errCode ** ** The Pager.errCode variable is only ever used in PAGER_ERROR state. It ** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode ** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX ** sub-codes. ** ** syncFlags, walSyncFlags ** ** syncFlags is either SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL (0x02) or SQLITE_SYNC_FULL (0x03). ** syncFlags is used for rollback mode. walSyncFlags is used for WAL mode ** and contains the flags used to sync the checkpoint operations in the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
700 701 702 703 704 705 706 | Wal *pWal; /* Write-ahead log used by "journal_mode=wal" */ char *zWal; /* File name for write-ahead log */ #endif }; /* ** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains | | | 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 | Wal *pWal; /* Write-ahead log used by "journal_mode=wal" */ char *zWal; /* File name for write-ahead log */ #endif }; /* ** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains ** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS ** or CACHE_WRITE to sqlite3_db_status(). */ #define PAGER_STAT_HIT 0 #define PAGER_STAT_MISS 1 #define PAGER_STAT_WRITE 2 #define PAGER_STAT_SPILL 3 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
758 759 760 761 762 763 764 | /* ** The size of the of each page record in the journal is given by ** the following macro. */ #define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager) ((pPager->pageSize) + 8) /* | | | 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 | /* ** The size of the of each page record in the journal is given by ** the following macro. */ #define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager) ((pPager->pageSize) + 8) /* ** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same ** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize(). */ #define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize) /* ** The macro MEMDB is true if we are dealing with an in-memory database. ** We do this as a macro so that if the SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB macro is set, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
833 834 835 836 837 838 839 | # define pagerUseWal(x) 0 # define pagerRollbackWal(x) 0 # define pagerWalFrames(v,w,x,y) 0 # define pagerOpenWalIfPresent(z) SQLITE_OK # define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK #endif | | | 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 | # define pagerUseWal(x) 0 # define pagerRollbackWal(x) 0 # define pagerWalFrames(v,w,x,y) 0 # define pagerOpenWalIfPresent(z) SQLITE_OK # define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK #endif #ifndef NDEBUG /* ** Usage: ** ** assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); ** ** This function runs many asserts to try to find inconsistencies in ** the internal state of the Pager object. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
862 863 864 865 866 867 868 | /* Regardless of the current state, a temp-file connection always behaves ** as if it has an exclusive lock on the database file. It never updates ** the change-counter field, so the changeCountDone flag is always set. */ assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone ); | | | | | | | | | | | 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 | /* Regardless of the current state, a temp-file connection always behaves ** as if it has an exclusive lock on the database file. It never updates ** the change-counter field, so the changeCountDone flag is always set. */ assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone ); /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF". ** And if the journal-mode is "OFF", the journal file must not be open. */ assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->useJournal ); assert( p->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || !isOpen(p->jfd) ); /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR ** state. */ if( MEMDB ){ assert( !isOpen(p->fd) ); assert( p->noSync ); assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ); assert( p->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && p->eState!=PAGER_OPEN ); assert( pagerUseWal(p)==0 ); } /* If changeCountDone is set, a RESERVED lock or greater must be held ** on the file. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
927 928 929 930 931 932 933 | if( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ /* It is possible that if journal_mode=wal here that neither the ** journal file nor the WAL file are open. This happens during ** a rollback transaction that switches from journal_mode=off ** to journal_mode=wal. */ assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK ); | | | | | | | | | | | | 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 | if( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ /* It is possible that if journal_mode=wal here that neither the ** journal file nor the WAL file are open. This happens during ** a rollback transaction that switches from journal_mode=off ** to journal_mode=wal. */ assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK ); assert( isOpen(p->jfd) || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); } assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbFileSize ); assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbHintSize ); break; case PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD: assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK ); assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); assert( p->eLock>=EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( isOpen(p->jfd) || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC) ); assert( pPager->dbOrigSize<=pPager->dbHintSize ); break; case PAGER_WRITER_FINISHED: assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK ); assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); assert( isOpen(p->jfd) || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC) ); break; case PAGER_ERROR: /* There must be at least one outstanding reference to the pager if ** in ERROR state. Otherwise the pager should have already dropped ** back to OPEN state. */ assert( pPager->errCode!=SQLITE_OK ); assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)>0 || pPager->tempFile ); break; } return 1; } #endif /* ifndef NDEBUG */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* ** Return a pointer to a human readable string in a static buffer ** containing the state of the Pager object passed as an argument. This ** is intended to be used within debuggers. For example, as an alternative ** to "print *pPager" in gdb: ** ** (gdb) printf "%s", print_pager_state(pPager) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 | /* ** Unlock the database file to level eLock, which must be either NO_LOCK ** or SHARED_LOCK. Regardless of whether or not the call to xUnlock() ** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock. ** ** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is | | | 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 | /* ** Unlock the database file to level eLock, which must be either NO_LOCK ** or SHARED_LOCK. Regardless of whether or not the call to xUnlock() ** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock. ** ** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is ** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of ** UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation of this. */ static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( !pPager->exclusiveMode || pPager->eLock==eLock ); assert( eLock==NO_LOCK || eLock==SHARED_LOCK ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 | pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile; /* ticket fb3b3024ea238d5c */ return rc; } /* ** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK, ** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the | | | | | | 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 | pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile; /* ticket fb3b3024ea238d5c */ return rc; } /* ** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK, ** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the ** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state. ** ** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is ** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. ** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation ** of this. */ static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( eLock==SHARED_LOCK || eLock==RESERVED_LOCK || eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); if( pPager->eLock<eLock || pPager->eLock==UNKNOWN_LOCK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 | ** atomic-write optimization can be used if: ** ** (a) the value returned by OsDeviceCharacteristics() indicates that ** a database page may be written atomically, and ** (b) the value returned by OsSectorSize() is less than or equal ** to the page size. ** | | | 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 | ** atomic-write optimization can be used if: ** ** (a) the value returned by OsDeviceCharacteristics() indicates that ** a database page may be written atomically, and ** (b) the value returned by OsSectorSize() is less than or equal ** to the page size. ** ** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal ** file when it contains rollback data for exactly one page. ** ** The atomic-batch-write optimization can be used if OsDeviceCharacteristics() ** returns a value with the SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC bit set. -1 is ** returned in this case. ** ** If neither optimization can be used, 0 is returned. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 | #define pager_pagehash(X) 0 #define pager_set_pagehash(X) #define CHECK_PAGE(x) #endif /* SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES */ /* ** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open. | | | | | | | 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 | #define pager_pagehash(X) 0 #define pager_set_pagehash(X) #define CHECK_PAGE(x) #endif /* SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES */ /* ** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open. ** This function attempts to read a super-journal file name from the ** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied ** by the caller. See comments above writeSuperJournal() for the format ** used to store a super-journal file name at the end of a journal file. ** ** zSuper must point to a buffer of at least nSuper bytes allocated by ** the caller. This should be sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname+1 (to ensure there is ** enough space to write the super-journal name). If the super-journal ** name in the journal is longer than nSuper bytes (including a ** nul-terminator), then this is handled as if no super-journal name ** were present in the journal. ** ** If a super-journal file name is present at the end of the journal ** file, then it is copied into the buffer pointed to by zSuper. A ** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the ** super-journal file name. ** ** If it is determined that no super-journal file name is present ** zSuper[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. ** ** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite ** error code is returned. */ static int readSuperJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zSuper, u32 nSuper){ int rc; /* Return code */ u32 len; /* Length in bytes of super-journal name */ i64 szJ; /* Total size in bytes of journal file pJrnl */ u32 cksum; /* MJ checksum value read from journal */ u32 u; /* Unsigned loop counter */ unsigned char aMagic[8]; /* A buffer to hold the magic header */ zSuper[0] = '\0'; if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ)) || szJ<16 || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len)) || len>=nSuper || len>szJ-16 || len==0 || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum)) || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8)) || memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8) || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, zSuper, len, szJ-16-len)) ){ return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 | ** definitely roll back, so just return SQLITE_OK and report a (nul) ** super-journal filename. */ len = 0; } zSuper[len] = '\0'; zSuper[len+1] = '\0'; | | | | | | 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 | ** definitely roll back, so just return SQLITE_OK and report a (nul) ** super-journal filename. */ len = 0; } zSuper[len] = '\0'; zSuper[len+1] = '\0'; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately ** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector ** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes. ** ** i.e for a sector size of 512: ** ** Pager.journalOff Return value ** --------------------------------------- ** 0 0 ** 512 512 ** 100 512 ** 2000 2048 ** */ static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){ i64 offset = 0; i64 c = pPager->journalOff; if( c ){ offset = ((c-1)/JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) + 1) * JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 | ** The journal file must be open when this function is called. ** ** This function is a no-op if the journal file has not been written to ** within the current transaction (i.e. if Pager.journalOff==0). ** ** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is ** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise, | | | | | 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 | ** The journal file must be open when this function is called. ** ** This function is a no-op if the journal file has not been written to ** within the current transaction (i.e. if Pager.journalOff==0). ** ** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is ** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise, ** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case, ** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately ** after writing or truncating it. ** ** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and ** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the ** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the ** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does ** not need to be synced following this operation. ** ** If an IO error occurs, abandon processing and return the IO error code. ** Otherwise, return SQLITE_OK. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 | static const char zeroHdr[28] = {0}; rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zeroHdr, sizeof(zeroHdr), 0); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && !pPager->noSync ){ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags); } | | | | 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 | static const char zeroHdr[28] = {0}; rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zeroHdr, sizeof(zeroHdr), 0); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && !pPager->noSync ){ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags); } /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for ** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more ** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need ** to sync the file following this operation. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && iLimit>0 ){ i64 sz; rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &sz); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 | ** The format for the journal header is as follows: ** - 8 bytes: Magic identifying journal format. ** - 4 bytes: Number of records in journal, or -1 no-sync mode is on. ** - 4 bytes: Random number used for page hash. ** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count. ** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal. ** - 4 bytes: Database page size. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 | ** The format for the journal header is as follows: ** - 8 bytes: Magic identifying journal format. ** - 4 bytes: Number of records in journal, or -1 no-sync mode is on. ** - 4 bytes: Random number used for page hash. ** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count. ** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal. ** - 4 bytes: Database page size. ** ** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space. */ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ char *zHeader = pPager->pTmpSpace; /* Temporary space used to build header */ u32 nHeader = (u32)pPager->pageSize;/* Size of buffer pointed to by zHeader */ u32 nWrite; /* Bytes of header sector written */ int ii; /* Loop counter */ assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) ); /* Journal file must be open. */ if( nHeader>JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) ){ nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); } /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now. */ for(ii=0; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){ if( pPager->aSavepoint[ii].iHdrOffset==0 ){ pPager->aSavepoint[ii].iHdrOffset = pPager->journalOff; } } pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager); /* ** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this ** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time. ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced, ** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number ** of records (see syncJournal()). ** ** A faster alternative is to write 0xFFFFFFFF to the nRec field. When ** reading the journal this value tells SQLite to assume that the ** rest of the journal file contains valid page records. This assumption ** is dangerous, as if a failure occurred whilst writing to the journal ** file it may contain some garbage data. There are two scenarios ** where this risk can be ignored: ** ** * When the pager is in no-sync mode. Corruption can follow a ** power failure in this case anyway. ** ** * When the SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND flag is set. This guarantees ** that garbage data is never appended to the journal file. */ assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync ); if( pPager->noSync || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY) || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) ){ memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic)); put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff); }else{ memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4); } /* The random check-hash initializer */ sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit); put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit); /* The initial database size */ put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+8], pPager->dbOrigSize); /* The assumed sector size for this process */ put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+12], pPager->sectorSize); /* The page size */ put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+16], pPager->pageSize); /* Initializing the tail of the buffer is not necessary. Everything ** works find if the following memset() is omitted. But initializing ** the memory prevents valgrind from complaining, so we are willing to ** take the performance hit. */ memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0, nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20)); /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next ** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file ** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS). ** ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can ** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file, ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of ** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what ** is done. ** ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the ** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize ** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required ** to populate the entire journal header sector. */ for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWrite<JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); nWrite+=nHeader){ IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld %d\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr, nHeader)) rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff); assert( pPager->journalHdr <= pPager->journalOff ); pPager->journalOff += nHeader; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 | */ if( iPageSize==0 ){ iPageSize = pPager->pageSize; } /* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields ** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power | | | | | | | | | | 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 | */ if( iPageSize==0 ){ iPageSize = pPager->pageSize; } /* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields ** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their ** respective compile time maximum limits. */ if( iPageSize<512 || iSectorSize<32 || iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0 ){ /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading ** the journal file here. */ return SQLITE_DONE; } /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal. ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within ** PagerSetPagesize() is tested. */ rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &iPageSize, -1); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by ** the process that created this journal. If this journal was ** created by a process other than this one, then this routine ** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value ** of Pager.sectorSize is restored at the end of that routine. */ pPager->sectorSize = iSectorSize; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 | ** ** + 4 bytes: PAGER_SJ_PGNO. ** + N bytes: super-journal filename in utf-8. ** + 4 bytes: N (length of super-journal name in bytes, no nul-terminator). ** + 4 bytes: super-journal name checksum. ** + 8 bytes: aJournalMagic[]. ** | | | | | | 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 | ** ** + 4 bytes: PAGER_SJ_PGNO. ** + N bytes: super-journal filename in utf-8. ** + 4 bytes: N (length of super-journal name in bytes, no nul-terminator). ** + 4 bytes: super-journal name checksum. ** + 8 bytes: aJournalMagic[]. ** ** The super-journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the super-journal ** name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer. ** ** If zSuper is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction), ** this call is a no-op. */ static int writeSuperJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){ int rc; /* Return code */ int nSuper; /* Length of string zSuper */ i64 iHdrOff; /* Offset of header in journal file */ i64 jrnlSize; /* Size of journal file on disk */ u32 cksum = 0; /* Checksum of string zSuper */ assert( pPager->setSuper==0 ); assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); if( !zSuper || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ return SQLITE_OK; } pPager->setSuper = 1; assert( pPager->journalHdr <= pPager->journalOff ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 | || (0 != (rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, aJournalMagic, 8, iHdrOff+4+nSuper+8))) ){ return rc; } pPager->journalOff += (nSuper+20); | | | | | | | | 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 | || (0 != (rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, aJournalMagic, 8, iHdrOff+4+nSuper+8))) ){ return rc; } pPager->journalOff += (nSuper+20); /* If the pager is in persistent-journal mode, then the physical ** journal-file may extend past the end of the super-journal name ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is ** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file ** will not be able to find the super-journal name to determine ** whether or not the journal is hot. ** ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal ** file to the required size. */ if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize)) && jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff ){ rc = sqlite3OsTruncate(pPager->jfd, pPager->journalOff); } return rc; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 | sqlite3_free(pPager->aSavepoint); pPager->aSavepoint = 0; pPager->nSavepoint = 0; pPager->nSubRec = 0; } /* | | | 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 | sqlite3_free(pPager->aSavepoint); pPager->aSavepoint = 0; pPager->nSavepoint = 0; pPager->nSubRec = 0; } /* ** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint ** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful ** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs. */ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){ int ii; /* Loop counter */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Result code */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 | ** state. ** ** If the pager is not in exclusive-access mode, the database file is ** completely unlocked. If the file is unlocked and the file-system does ** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is ** closed (if it is open). ** | | | | | | | 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 | ** state. ** ** If the pager is not in exclusive-access mode, the database file is ** completely unlocked. If the file is unlocked and the file-system does ** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is ** closed (if it is open). ** ** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the ** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to ** the OPEN state. Regardless of whether the pager is in exclusive-mode ** or not, any journal file left in the file-system will be treated ** as a hot-journal and rolled back the next time a read-transaction ** is opened (by this or by any other connection). */ static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR ); sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->pInJournal); pPager->pInJournal = 0; releaseAllSavepoints(pPager); if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 | pPager->journalOff = 0; pPager->journalHdr = 0; pPager->setSuper = 0; } /* ** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires | | | | | | | | 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 | pPager->journalOff = 0; pPager->journalHdr = 0; pPager->setSuper = 0; } /* ** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires ** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may have occurred. ** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second ** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The ** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function. ** ** If the second argument is SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the ** IOERR sub-codes, the pager enters the ERROR state and the error code ** is stored in Pager.errCode. While the pager remains in the ERROR state, ** all major API calls on the Pager will immediately return Pager.errCode. ** ** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache ** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding ** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when ** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need ** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if ** it were a hot-journal). */ static int pager_error(Pager *pPager, int rc){ int rc2 = rc & 0xff; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 | if( pPager->tempFile==0 ) return 1; if( !bCommit ) return 0; if( !isOpen(pPager->fd) ) return 0; return (sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(pPager->pPCache)>=25); } /* | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 | if( pPager->tempFile==0 ) return 1; if( !bCommit ) return 0; if( !isOpen(pPager->fd) ) return 0; return (sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(pPager->pPCache)>=25); } /* ** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by ** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called ** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening ** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a ** database transaction. ** ** This routine is never called in PAGER_ERROR state. If it is called ** in PAGER_NONE or PAGER_SHARED state and the lock held is less ** exclusive than a RESERVED lock, it is a no-op. ** ** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released. ** ** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal ** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a ** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this ** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized ** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and ** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows: ** ** journalMode==MEMORY ** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an ** in-memory journal. ** ** journalMode==TRUNCATE ** Journal file is truncated to zero bytes in size. ** ** journalMode==PERSIST ** The first 28 bytes of the journal file are zeroed. This invalidates ** the first journal header in the file, and hence the entire journal ** file. An invalid journal file cannot be rolled back. ** ** journalMode==DELETE ** The journal file is closed and deleted using sqlite3OsDelete(). ** ** If the pager is running in exclusive mode, this method of finalizing ** the journal file is never used. Instead, if the journalMode is ** DELETE and the pager is in exclusive mode, the method described under ** journalMode==PERSIST is used instead. ** ** After the journal is finalized, the pager moves to PAGER_READER state. ** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is ** downgraded to a SHARED_LOCK. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during ** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the ** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the ** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still ** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the ** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related ** to the first error encountered (the journal finalization one) is ** returned. */ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasSuper, int bCommit){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Error code from journal finalization operation */ int rc2 = SQLITE_OK; /* Error code from db file unlock operation */ /* Do nothing if the pager does not have an open write transaction ** or at least a RESERVED lock. This function may be called when there ** is no write-transaction active but a RESERVED or greater lock is ** held under two circumstances: ** ** 1. After a successful hot-journal rollback, it is called with ** eState==PAGER_NONE and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. ** ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE ** lock switches back to locking_mode=normal and then executes a ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER ** and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK when the read-transaction is closed. */ assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR ); if( pPager->eState<PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED && pPager->eLock<RESERVED_LOCK ){ return SQLITE_OK; } releaseAllSavepoints(pPager); assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0 || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC) ); if( isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); /* Finalize the journal file. */ if( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 | /* This branch may be executed with Pager.journalMode==MEMORY if ** a hot-journal was just rolled back. In this case the journal ** file should be closed and deleted. If this connection writes to ** the database file, it will do so using an in-memory journal. */ int bDelete = !pPager->tempFile; assert( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd)==0 ); | | | | | 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 | /* This branch may be executed with Pager.journalMode==MEMORY if ** a hot-journal was just rolled back. In this case the journal ** file should be closed and deleted. If this connection writes to ** the database file, it will do so using an in-memory journal. */ int bDelete = !pPager->tempFile; assert( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd)==0 ); assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd); if( bDelete ){ rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pPager->pVfs, pPager->zJournal, pPager->extraSync); } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 | }else{ sqlite3PcacheClearWritable(pPager->pPCache); } sqlite3PcacheTruncate(pPager->pPCache, pPager->dbSize); } if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 | }else{ sqlite3PcacheClearWritable(pPager->pPCache); } sqlite3PcacheTruncate(pPager->pPCache, pPager->dbSize); } if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE ** lock held on the database file. */ rc2 = sqlite3WalEndWriteTransaction(pPager->pWal); assert( rc2==SQLITE_OK ); }else if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit && pPager->dbFileSize>pPager->dbSize ){ /* This branch is taken when committing a transaction in rollback-journal ** mode if the database file on disk is larger than the database image. ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction ** successfully committed, but the EXCLUSIVE lock is still held on the ** file. So it is safe to truncate the database file to its minimum ** required size. */ assert( pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); rc = pager_truncate(pPager, pPager->dbSize); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit ){ rc = sqlite3OsFileControl(pPager->fd, SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_PHASETWO, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_NOTFOUND ) rc = SQLITE_OK; } if( !pPager->exclusiveMode && (!pagerUseWal(pPager) || sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(pPager->pWal, 0)) ){ rc2 = pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK); } pPager->eState = PAGER_READER; pPager->setSuper = 0; return (rc==SQLITE_OK?rc2:rc); } /* ** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the ** database file. ** ** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt ** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The ** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock ** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this ** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next ** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one) ** will roll it back. ** ** If the pager has not already entered the ERROR state, but an IO or ** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause ** the pager to enter the ERROR state. Which will be cleared by the ** call to pager_unlock(), as described above. */ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){ if( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && pPager->eState!=PAGER_OPEN ){ assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); if( pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){ sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); sqlite3PagerRollback(pPager); sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); }else if( !pPager->exclusiveMode ){ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER ); pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0); } } pager_unlock(pPager); } /* ** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes ** of data. Compute and return a checksum based on the contents of the ** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit. ** ** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the ** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte ** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200). ** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer. ** ** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an ** incompatible journal file format. ** ** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely ** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed. ** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be ** correct and the middle be corrupt. Thus, this "checksum" scheme, ** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption. */ static u32 pager_cksum(Pager *pPager, const u8 *aData){ u32 cksum = pPager->cksumInit; /* Checksum value to return */ int i = pPager->pageSize-200; /* Loop counter */ while( i>0 ){ cksum += aData[i]; i -= 200; } return cksum; } /* ** Read a single page from either the journal file (if isMainJrnl==1) or ** from the sub-journal (if isMainJrnl==0) and playback that page. ** The page begins at offset *pOffset into the file. The *pOffset ** value is increased to the start of the next page in the journal. ** ** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does ** not. ** ** If the page number of the page record read from the (sub-)journal file ** is greater than the current value of Pager.dbSize, then playback is ** skipped and SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** If pDone is not NULL, then it is a record of pages that have already ** been played back. If the page at *pOffset has already been played back ** (if the corresponding pDone bit is set) then skip the playback. ** Make sure the pDone bit corresponding to the *pOffset page is set ** prior to returning. ** ** If the page record is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file ** and played back, then SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error occurs ** while reading the record from the (sub-)journal file or while writing ** to the database file, then the IO error code is returned. If data ** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be ** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in ** two circumstances: ** ** * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_SJ_PGNO), or ** * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file ** and the checksum field does not match the record content. ** ** Neither of these two scenarios are possible during a savepoint rollback. ** ** If this is a savepoint rollback, then memory may have to be dynamically |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 | assert( isMainJrnl || pDone ); /* pDone always used on sub-journals */ assert( isSavepnt || pDone==0 ); /* pDone never used on non-savepoint */ aData = pPager->pTmpSpace; assert( aData ); /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */ assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) ); | | | 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 | assert( isMainJrnl || pDone ); /* pDone always used on sub-journals */ assert( isSavepnt || pDone==0 ); /* pDone never used on non-savepoint */ aData = pPager->pTmpSpace; assert( aData ); /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */ assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) ); /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction ** or savepoint rollback done at the request of the caller) or this is ** a hot-journal rollback. If it is a hot-journal rollback, the pager ** is in state OPEN and holds an EXCLUSIVE lock. Hot-journal rollback ** only reads from the main journal, not the sub-journal. */ assert( pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD || (pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN && pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 | ** and a page is moved during an incremental vacuum then the page may ** not be in the pager cache. Later: if a malloc() or IO error occurs ** during a Movepage() call, then the page may not be in the cache ** either. So the condition described in the above paragraph is not ** assert()able. ** ** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the | | | 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 | ** and a page is moved during an incremental vacuum then the page may ** not be in the pager cache. Later: if a malloc() or IO error occurs ** during a Movepage() call, then the page may not be in the cache ** either. So the condition described in the above paragraph is not ** assert()able. ** ** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked ** not dirty. Since this code is only executed in PAGER_OPEN state for ** a hot-journal rollback, it is guaranteed that the page-cache is empty ** if the pager is in OPEN state. ** ** Ticket #1171: The statement journal might contain page content that is ** different from the page content at the start of the transaction. ** This occurs when a page is changed prior to the start of a statement |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 | } if( pPager->pBackup ){ sqlite3BackupUpdate(pPager->pBackup, pgno, (u8*)aData); } }else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){ /* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to ** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential | | | | | | | | 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 | } if( pPager->pBackup ){ sqlite3BackupUpdate(pPager->pBackup, pgno, (u8*)aData); } }else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){ /* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to ** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be ** current. ** ** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen ** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then ** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage(). ** ** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as ** requiring a journal-sync before it is written. */ assert( isSavepnt ); assert( (pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK)==0 ); pPager->doNotSpill |= SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK; rc = sqlite3PagerGet(pPager, pgno, &pPg, 1); assert( (pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK)!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 | /* ** Parameter zSuper is the name of a super-journal file. A single journal ** file that referred to the super-journal file has just been rolled back. ** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the super-journal file, ** and does so if it is. ** | | | | | | | | | | | 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 | /* ** Parameter zSuper is the name of a super-journal file. A single journal ** file that referred to the super-journal file has just been rolled back. ** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the super-journal file, ** and does so if it is. ** ** Argument zSuper may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not ** available for use within this function. ** ** When a super-journal file is created, it is populated with the names ** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8 ** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a ** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a super-journal ** file for a transaction involving two databases might be: ** ** "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00" ** ** A super-journal file may only be deleted once all of its child ** journals have been rolled back. ** ** This function reads the contents of the super-journal file into ** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For ** each child journal, it checks if: ** ** * if the child journal exists, and if so ** * if the child journal contains a reference to super-journal ** file zSuper ** ** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria ** above, this function returns without doing anything. Otherwise, if ** no such child journal can be found, file zSuper is deleted from ** the file-system using sqlite3OsDelete(). ** ** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This ** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation ** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors ** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load ** the entire contents of the super-journal file. This could be ** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page ** size. */ static int pager_delsuper(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = pPager->pVfs; int rc; /* Return code */ sqlite3_file *pSuper; /* Malloc'd super-journal file descriptor */ sqlite3_file *pJournal; /* Malloc'd child-journal file descriptor */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto delsuper_out; } if( exists ){ /* One of the journals pointed to by the super-journal exists. ** Open it and check if it points at the super-journal. If ** so, return without deleting the super-journal file. | | | 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto delsuper_out; } if( exists ){ /* One of the journals pointed to by the super-journal exists. ** Open it and check if it points at the super-journal. If ** so, return without deleting the super-journal file. ** NB: zJournal is really a MAIN_JOURNAL. But call it a ** SUPER_JOURNAL here so that the VFS will not send the zJournal ** name into sqlite3_database_file_object(). */ int c; int flags = (SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY|SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL); rc = sqlite3OsOpen(pVfs, zJournal, pJournal, flags, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 | if( c ){ /* We have a match. Do not delete the super-journal file. */ goto delsuper_out; } } zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1); } | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 | if( c ){ /* We have a match. Do not delete the super-journal file. */ goto delsuper_out; } } zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1); } sqlite3OsClose(pSuper); rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zSuper, 0); delsuper_out: sqlite3_free(zFree); if( pSuper ){ sqlite3OsClose(pSuper); assert( !isOpen(pJournal) ); sqlite3_free(pSuper); } return rc; } /* ** This function is used to change the actual size of the database ** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction, ** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal). ** ** If the main database file is not open, or the pager is not in either ** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size ** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes). ** If the file on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS ** xTruncate() method to truncate it. ** ** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than ** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if ** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it ** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to ** the end of the new file instead. ** ** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying ** the database file, return the error code to the caller. */ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR ); assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_READER ); PAGERTRACE(("Truncate %d npage %u\n", PAGERID(pPager), nPage)); if( isOpen(pPager->fd) && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN) ){ i64 currentSize, newSize; int szPage = pPager->pageSize; assert( pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); /* TODO: Is it safe to use Pager.dbFileSize here? */ rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->fd, ¤tSize); newSize = szPage*(i64)nPage; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 | } return iRet; } /* ** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given ** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method | | | | 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 | } return iRet; } /* ** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given ** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method ** of the open database file. The sector size will be used ** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and ** super-journal pointers within created journal files. ** ** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes. ** ** Otherwise, for non-temporary files, the effective sector size is ** the value returned by the xSectorSize() method rounded up to 32 if ** it is less than 32, or rounded down to MAX_SECTOR_SIZE if it |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 | ** size. For backwards compatibility of the rollback journal file format, ** we cannot reduce the effective sector size below 512. */ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){ assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile ); if( pPager->tempFile | | | | | | 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 | ** size. For backwards compatibility of the rollback journal file format, ** we cannot reduce the effective sector size below 512. */ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){ assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile ); if( pPager->tempFile || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) & SQLITE_IOCAP_POWERSAFE_OVERWRITE)!=0 ){ /* Sector size doesn't matter for temporary files. Also, the file ** may not have been opened yet, in which case the OsSectorSize() ** call will segfault. */ pPager->sectorSize = 512; }else{ pPager->sectorSize = sqlite3SectorSize(pPager->fd); } } /* ** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to ** the state it was in before we started making changes. ** ** The journal file format is as follows: ** ** (1) 8 byte prefix. A copy of aJournalMagic[]. ** (2) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records ** in the journal. If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the ** number of page records from the journal size. ** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the ** sanity checksum. ** (4) 4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the ** database to during a rollback. ** (5) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the sector size. The header ** is this many bytes in size. ** (6) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the page size. ** (7) zero padding out to the next sector size. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 | ** the value of nRec computed from the file size would be too large. For ** that reason, we always use the nRec value in the header. ** ** If the nRec value is 0xffffffff it means that nRec should be computed ** from the file size. This value is used when the user selects the ** no-sync option for the journal. A power failure could lead to corruption ** in this case. But for things like temporary table (which will be | | | | 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 | ** the value of nRec computed from the file size would be too large. For ** that reason, we always use the nRec value in the header. ** ** If the nRec value is 0xffffffff it means that nRec should be computed ** from the file size. This value is used when the user selects the ** no-sync option for the journal. A power failure could lead to corruption ** in this case. But for things like temporary table (which will be ** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care. ** ** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed ** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled ** back (or no pages if the journal header is corrupted). The journal file ** is then deleted and SQLITE_OK returned, just as if no corruption had ** been encountered. ** ** If an I/O or malloc() error occurs, the journal-file is not deleted ** and an error code is returned. ** ** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal ** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is ** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE. ** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling ** back any content. If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is ** needed. */ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = pPager->pVfs; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 | zSuper = 0; if( rc!=SQLITE_OK || !res ){ goto end_playback; } pPager->journalOff = 0; needPagerReset = isHot; | | | | | | 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 | zSuper = 0; if( rc!=SQLITE_OK || !res ){ goto end_playback; } pPager->journalOff = 0; needPagerReset = isHot; /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error ** occurs. */ while( 1 ){ /* Read the next journal header from the journal file. If there are ** not enough bytes left in the journal file for a complete header, or ** it is corrupted, then a process must have failed while writing it. ** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back. */ rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; } goto end_playback; } /* If nRec is 0xffffffff, then this journal was created by a process |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 | ** size of the file. ** ** The third term of the test was added to fix ticket #2565. ** When rolling back a hot journal, nRec==0 always means that the next ** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back. But ** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in ** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional | | | 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 | ** size of the file. ** ** The third term of the test was added to fix ticket #2565. ** When rolling back a hot journal, nRec==0 always means that the next ** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back. But ** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in ** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages ** should be computed based on the journal file size. */ if( nRec==0 && !isHot && pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff ){ nRec = (int)((szJ - pPager->journalOff) / JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 | } pPager->dbSize = mxPg; if( pPager->mxPgno<mxPg ){ pPager->mxPgno = mxPg; } } | | | 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 | } pPager->dbSize = mxPg; if( pPager->mxPgno<mxPg ){ pPager->mxPgno = mxPg; } } /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the ** database file and/or page cache. */ for(u=0; u<nRec; u++){ if( needPagerReset ){ pager_reset(pPager); needPagerReset = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 | ** SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED file-control method to disable the ** assertion that the transaction counter was modified. */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pPager->fd,SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED,0); #endif | | | | | | 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 | ** SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED file-control method to disable the ** assertion that the transaction counter was modified. */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pPager->fd,SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED,0); #endif /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive ** mode, then subsequent transactions performed by the connection will not ** update the change-counter at all. This may lead to cache inconsistency ** problems for other processes at some point in the future. So, just ** in case this has happened, clear the changeCountDone flag now. */ pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 | setSectorSize(pPager); return rc; } /* ** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file (or out of | | | 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 | setSectorSize(pPager); return rc; } /* ** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file (or out of ** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into ** pPg->pData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database ** file before this function is called. ** ** If page 1 is read, then the value of Pager.dbFileVers[] is set to ** the value read from the database file. ** ** If an IO error occurs, then the IO error is returned to the caller. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 | ** is valid. */ put32bits(((char*)pPg->pData)+92, change_counter); put32bits(((char*)pPg->pData)+96, SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* | | | | | 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 | ** is valid. */ put32bits(((char*)pPg->pData)+92, change_counter); put32bits(((char*)pPg->pData)+96, SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been ** written into the log file when a WAL transaction is rolled back. ** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument ** is actually a pointer to the Pager structure. ** ** If page iPg is present in the cache, and has no outstanding references, ** it is discarded. Otherwise, if there are one or more outstanding ** references, the page content is reloaded from the database. If the ** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails, ** return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. */ static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; Pager *pPager = (Pager *)pCtx; PgHdr *pPg; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 | } } /* Normally, if a transaction is rolled back, any backup processes are ** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the ** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as ** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one | | | | 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 | } } /* Normally, if a transaction is rolled back, any backup processes are ** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the ** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as ** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore ** also copied into the backup databases) as part of this transaction, ** the backups must be restarted. */ sqlite3BackupRestart(pPager->pBackup); return rc; } /* ** This function is called to rollback a transaction on a WAL database. */ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){ int rc; /* Return Code */ PgHdr *pList; /* List of dirty pages to revert */ /* For all pages in the cache that are currently dirty or have already ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the ** following: ** ** + Discard the cached page (if refcount==0), or ** + Reload page content from the database (if refcount>0). */ pPager->dbSize = pPager->dbOrigSize; rc = sqlite3WalUndo(pPager->pWal, pagerUndoCallback, (void *)pPager); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 | return rc; } /* ** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging ** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty), ** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have | | | | | 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 | return rc; } /* ** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging ** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty), ** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have ** changed. ** ** The list of pages passed into this routine is always sorted by page number. ** Hence, if page 1 appears anywhere on the list, it will be the first page. */ static int pagerWalFrames( Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */ PgHdr *pList, /* List of frames to log */ Pgno nTruncate, /* Database size after this commit */ int isCommit /* True if this is a commit */ ){ int rc; /* Return code */ int nList; /* Number of pages in pList */ PgHdr *p; /* For looping over pages */ assert( pPager->pWal ); assert( pList ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Verify that the page list is in ascending order */ for(p=pList; p && p->pDirty; p=p->pDirty){ assert( p->pgno < p->pDirty->pgno ); } #endif assert( pList->pDirty==0 || isCommit ); if( isCommit ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 | assert( pList ); }else{ nList = 1; } pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList; if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList); | | | 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 | assert( pList ); }else{ nList = 1; } pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList; if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList); rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal, pPager->pageSize, pList, nTruncate, isCommit, pPager->walSyncFlags ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pBackup ){ for(p=pList; p; p=p->pDirty){ sqlite3BackupUpdate(pPager->pBackup, p->pgno, (u8 *)p->pData); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 | *pnPage = nPage; return SQLITE_OK; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** Check if the *-wal file that corresponds to the database opened by pPager | | | | | | 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 | *pnPage = nPage; return SQLITE_OK; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* ** Check if the *-wal file that corresponds to the database opened by pPager ** exists if the database is not empty, or verify that the *-wal file does ** not exist (by deleting it) if the database file is empty. ** ** If the database is not empty and the *-wal file exists, open the pager ** in WAL mode. If the database is empty or if no *-wal file exists and ** if no error occurs, make sure Pager.journalMode is not set to ** PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK or an error code. ** ** The caller must hold a SHARED lock on the database file to call this ** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete ** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition ** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some ** other connection. */ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN ); assert( pPager->eLock>=SHARED_LOCK ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 | } return rc; } #endif /* ** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback | | | | | | | | | 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 | } return rc; } #endif /* ** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback ** the entire super-journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when ** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction ** savepoint. ** ** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is ** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages, ** performed in the order specified: ** ** * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte ** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal ** file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero. ** ** * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played ** back starting from the journal header immediately following ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file. ** ** * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting ** with the PagerSavepoint.iSubRec and continuing to the end of ** the journal file. ** ** Throughout the rollback process, each time a page is rolled back, the ** corresponding bit is set in a bitvec structure (variable pDone in the ** implementation below). This is used to ensure that a page is only ** rolled back the first time it is encountered in either journal. ** ** If pSavepoint is NULL, then pages are only played back from the main ** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case. ** ** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable ** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint ** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value ** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped. */ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){ i64 szJ; /* Effective size of the main journal */ i64 iHdrOff; /* End of first segment of main-journal records */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ Bitvec *pDone = 0; /* Bitvec to ensure pages played back only once */ assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR ); assert( pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ); /* Allocate a bitvec to use to store the set of pages rolled back */ if( pSavepoint ){ pDone = sqlite3BitvecCreate(pSavepoint->nOrig); if( !pDone ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } } /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint ** being reverted was opened. */ pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize; pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile; if( !pSavepoint && pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ return pagerRollbackWal(pPager); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 | assert( rc!=SQLITE_DONE ); /* ** The "pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff" ** test is related to ticket #2565. See the discussion in the ** pager_playback() function for additional information. */ | | | 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 | assert( rc!=SQLITE_DONE ); /* ** The "pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff" ** test is related to ticket #2565. See the discussion in the ** pager_playback() function for additional information. */ if( nJRec==0 && pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff ){ nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager)); } for(ii=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && ii<nJRec && pPager->journalOff<szJ; ii++){ rc = pager_playback_one_page(pPager, &pPager->journalOff, pDone, 1, 1); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 | pPager->doNotSpill |= SPILLFLAG_OFF; } } /* ** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library ** attempts to open a temporary file. This information is used for | | | | | 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 | pPager->doNotSpill |= SPILLFLAG_OFF; } } /* ** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library ** attempts to open a temporary file. This information is used for ** testing and analysis only. */ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0; #endif /* ** Open a temporary file. ** ** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success ** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically ** delete the temporary file when it is closed. ** ** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified ** by parameter vfsFlags ORed with the following: ** ** SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE ** SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 | assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pFile) ); return rc; } /* ** Set the busy handler function. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 | assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pFile) ); return rc; } /* ** Set the busy handler function. ** ** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns ** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock, ** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE ** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from ** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE ** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary: ** ** Transition | Invokes xBusyHandler ** -------------------------------------------------------- ** NO_LOCK -> SHARED_LOCK | Yes ** SHARED_LOCK -> RESERVED_LOCK | No ** SHARED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | No ** RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | Yes ** ** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is ** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is ** returned to the caller of the pager API function. */ void sqlite3PagerSetBusyHandler( Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */ int (*xBusyHandler)(void *), /* Pointer to busy-handler function */ void *pBusyHandlerArg /* Argument to pass to xBusyHandler */ ){ void **ap; pPager->xBusyHandler = xBusyHandler; pPager->pBusyHandlerArg = pBusyHandlerArg; ap = (void **)&pPager->xBusyHandler; assert( ((int(*)(void *))(ap[0]))==xBusyHandler ); assert( ap[1]==pBusyHandlerArg ); sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pPager->fd, SQLITE_FCNTL_BUSYHANDLER, (void *)ap); } /* ** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size ** is passed in *pPageSize. ** ** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it ** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e. ** one of SQLITE_IOERR, an SQLITE_IOERR_xxx sub-code or SQLITE_FULL). ** ** Otherwise, if all of the following are true: ** ** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power ** of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and ** ** * there are no outstanding page references, and ** ** * the database is either not an in-memory database or it is ** an in-memory database that currently consists of zero pages. ** ** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize. ** ** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc() ** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt ** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged. ** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated ** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this ** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed, ** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning. */ int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* It is not possible to do a full assert_pager_state() here, as this ** function may be called from within PagerOpen(), before the state ** of the Pager object is internally consistent. ** ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in ** PAGER_ERROR state. But since PAGER_ERROR state guarantees that ** there is at least one outstanding page reference, this function ** is a no-op for that case anyhow. */ u32 pageSize = *pPageSize; assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) ); if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0) && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize ){ char *pNew = NULL; /* New temp space */ i64 nByte = 0; if( pPager->eState>PAGER_OPEN && isOpen(pPager->fd) ){ rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->fd, &nByte); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 | ** no rollbacks are happening. */ void *sqlite3PagerTempSpace(Pager *pPager){ return pPager->pTmpSpace; } /* | | | 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 | ** no rollbacks are happening. */ void *sqlite3PagerTempSpace(Pager *pPager){ return pPager->pTmpSpace; } /* ** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive. ** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative. And never reduce the ** maximum page count below the current size of the database. ** ** Regardless of mxPage, return the current maximum page count. */ Pgno sqlite3PagerMaxPageCount(Pager *pPager, Pgno mxPage){ if( mxPage>0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 | #else # define disable_simulated_io_errors() # define enable_simulated_io_errors() #endif /* ** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory | | | | 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 | #else # define disable_simulated_io_errors() # define enable_simulated_io_errors() #endif /* ** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory ** that pDest points to. ** ** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or ** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is ** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this ** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or ** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes. ** ** If any IO error apart from SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ is encountered, ** the error code is returned to the caller and the contents of the ** output buffer undefined. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 | return rc; } /* ** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on ** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 | return rc; } /* ** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on ** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database. ** ** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then ** this is considered a 1 page file. */ void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){ assert( pPager->eState>=PAGER_READER ); assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_WRITER_FINISHED ); *pnPage = (int)pPager->dbSize; } /* ** Try to obtain a lock of type locktype on the database file. If ** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op ** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately). ** ** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke ** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat ** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to ** obtain the lock succeeds. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain ** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state ** variable to locktype before returning. */ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){ int rc; /* Return code */ /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is ** already held), or one of the transitions that the busy-handler ** may be invoked during, according to the comment above ** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(). */ assert( (pPager->eLock>=locktype) || (pPager->eLock==NO_LOCK && locktype==SHARED_LOCK) || (pPager->eLock==RESERVED_LOCK && locktype==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) ); do { rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, locktype); }while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && pPager->xBusyHandler(pPager->pBusyHandlerArg) ); return rc; } /* ** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the ** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache: ** ** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the ** current database image, in pages, OR ** ** b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not ** be necessary to write the current content out to the sub-journal. ** ** If the condition asserted by this function were not true, and the ** dirty page were to be discarded from the cache via the pagerStress() ** routine, pagerStress() would not write the current page content to ** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after ** this happened, the correct behavior would be to restore the current ** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either ** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and ** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the ** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that ** this circumstance cannot arise. */ #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) static void assertTruncateConstraintCb(PgHdr *pPg){ Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager; assert( pPg->flags&PGHDR_DIRTY ); if( pPg->pgno>pPager->dbSize ){ /* if (a) is false */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 | sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(pPager->pPCache, assertTruncateConstraintCb); } #else # define assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) #endif /* | | | | | | | | | | | | 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 | sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(pPager->pPCache, assertTruncateConstraintCb); } #else # define assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) #endif /* ** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This ** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It ** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the ** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed. ** ** This function is only called right before committing a transaction. ** Once this function has been called, the transaction must either be ** rolled back or committed. It is not safe to call this function and ** then continue writing to the database. */ void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){ assert( pPager->dbSize>=nPage || CORRUPT_DB ); assert( pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD ); pPager->dbSize = nPage; /* At one point the code here called assertTruncateConstraint() to ** ensure that all pages being truncated away by this operation are, ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint ** journal so that they can be restored if the savepoint is rolled ** back. This is no longer necessary as this function is now only ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0), ** they cannot be rolled back. So the assertTruncateConstraint() call ** is no longer correct. */ } /* ** This function is called before attempting a hot-journal rollback. It ** syncs the journal file to disk, then sets pPager->journalHdr to the ** size of the journal file so that the pager_playback() routine knows ** that the entire journal file has been synced. ** ** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures ** that if a power-failure occurs during the rollback, the process that ** attempts rollback following system recovery sees the same journal ** content as this process. ** ** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, ** an SQLite error code. */ static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( !pPager->noSync ){ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &pPager->journalHdr); } return rc; } #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* ** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno. ** The new object will use the pointer pData, obtained from xFetch(). ** If successful, set *ppPage to point to the new page reference ** and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and set ** *ppPage to zero. ** ** Page references obtained by calling this function should be released ** by calling pagerReleaseMapPage(). */ static int pagerAcquireMapPage( Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */ Pgno pgno, /* Page number */ void *pData, /* xFetch()'d data for this page */ PgHdr **ppPage /* OUT: Acquired page object */ ){ PgHdr *p; /* Memory mapped page to return */ if( pPager->pMmapFreelist ){ *ppPage = p = pPager->pMmapFreelist; pPager->pMmapFreelist = p->pDirty; p->pDirty = 0; assert( pPager->nExtra>=8 ); memset(p->pExtra, 0, 8); }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 | pPager->nMmapOut++; return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* | | | 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 | pPager->nMmapOut++; return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* ** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an ** earlier call to pagerAcquireMapPage(). */ static void pagerReleaseMapPage(PgHdr *pPg){ Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager; pPager->nMmapOut--; pPg->pDirty = pPager->pMmapFreelist; pPager->pMmapFreelist = pPg; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 | ** If a transaction was in progress when this routine is called, that ** transaction is rolled back. All outstanding pages are invalidated ** and their memory is freed. Any attempt to use a page associated ** with this page cache after this function returns will likely ** result in a coredump. ** ** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt | | | | | | 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 | ** If a transaction was in progress when this routine is called, that ** transaction is rolled back. All outstanding pages are invalidated ** and their memory is freed. Any attempt to use a page associated ** with this page cache after this function returns will likely ** result in a coredump. ** ** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt ** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback ** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned ** to the caller. */ int sqlite3PagerClose(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){ u8 *pTmp = (u8*)pPager->pTmpSpace; assert( db || pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); disable_simulated_io_errors(); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); pagerFreeMapHdrs(pPager); /* pPager->errCode = 0; */ pPager->exclusiveMode = 0; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL { u8 *a = 0; assert( db || pPager->pWal==0 ); if( db && 0==(db->flags & SQLITE_NoCkptOnClose) && SQLITE_OK==databaseIsUnmoved(pPager) ){ a = pTmp; } sqlite3WalClose(pPager->pWal, db, pPager->walSyncFlags, pPager->pageSize,a); pPager->pWal = 0; } #endif pager_reset(pPager); if( MEMDB ){ pager_unlock(pPager); }else{ /* If it is open, sync the journal file before calling UnlockAndRollback. ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs ** while this is happening, the database could become corrupt. ** ** If an error occurs while trying to sync the journal, shift the pager ** into the ERROR state. This causes UnlockAndRollback to unlock the ** database and close the journal file without attempting to roll it ** back or finalize it. The next database user will have to do hot-journal ** rollback before accessing the database file. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 | /* ** Sync the journal. In other words, make sure all the pages that have ** been written to the journal have actually reached the surface of the ** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback. ** ** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op. | | | | | | 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 | /* ** Sync the journal. In other words, make sure all the pages that have ** been written to the journal have actually reached the surface of the ** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback. ** ** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op. ** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the ** device characteristics of the file-system, as follows: ** ** * If the journal file is an in-memory journal file, no action need ** be taken. ** ** * Otherwise, if the device does not support the SAFE_APPEND property, ** then the nRec field of the most recently written journal header ** is updated to contain the number of journal records that have ** been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync ** mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated. ** ** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then ** journal file is synced. ** ** Or, in pseudo-code: ** ** if( NOT <in-memory journal> ){ ** if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){ ** if( <full-sync mode> ) xSync(<journal file>); ** <update nRec field> ** } ** if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync(<journal file>); ** } ** ** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every ** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO ** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller. */ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ int rc; /* Return code */ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 | if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) ){ /* This block deals with an obscure problem. If the last connection ** that wrote to this database was operating in persistent-journal ** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger ** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal ** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the | | | | | | | 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 | if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) ){ /* This block deals with an obscure problem. If the last connection ** that wrote to this database was operating in persistent-journal ** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger ** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal ** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the ** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all ** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old, ** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption. ** ** To work around this, if the journal file does appear to contain ** a valid header following Pager.journalOff, then write a 0x00 ** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized. ** ** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used ** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of ** the potential journal header. */ i64 iNextHdrOffset; u8 aMagic[8]; u8 zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 | /* Write the nRec value into the journal file header. If in ** full-synchronous mode, sync the journal first. This ensures that ** all data has really hit the disk before nRec is updated to mark ** it as a candidate for rollback. ** ** This is not required if the persistent media supports the | | | | | | | | | 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 | /* Write the nRec value into the journal file header. If in ** full-synchronous mode, sync the journal first. This ensures that ** all data has really hit the disk before nRec is updated to mark ** it as a candidate for rollback. ** ** This is not required if the persistent media supports the ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible ** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field ** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written ** and never needs to be updated. */ if( pPager->fullSync && 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){ PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager))); IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager)) rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr)); rc = sqlite3OsWrite( pPager->jfd, zHeader, sizeof(zHeader), pPager->journalHdr ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){ PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager))); IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager)) rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags| (pPager->syncFlags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0) ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff; if( newHdr && 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) ){ pPager->nRec = 0; rc = writeJournalHdr(pPager); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } }else{ pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff; } } /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on ** all pages. */ sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(pPager->pPCache); pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD; assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** The argument is the first in a linked list of dirty pages connected ** by the PgHdr.pDirty pointer. This function writes each one of the ** in-memory pages in the list to the database file. The argument may ** be NULL, representing an empty list. In this case this function is ** a no-op. ** ** The pager must hold at least a RESERVED lock when this function ** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock ** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained, ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file. ** ** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file ** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is ** written out. ** ** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened, ** the pages are written out to the database file in list order. Writing ** a page is skipped if it meets either of the following criteria: ** ** * The page number is greater than Pager.dbSize, or ** * The PGHDR_DONT_WRITE flag is set on the page. ** ** If writing out a page causes the database file to grow, Pager.dbFileSize ** is updated accordingly. If page 1 is written out, then the value cached ** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in ** the database file. ** ** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error ** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot ** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned. */ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ /* This function is only called for rollback pagers in WRITER_DBMOD state. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 | rc = pagerOpentemp(pPager, pPager->fd, pPager->vfsFlags); } /* Before the first write, give the VFS a hint of what the final ** file size will be. */ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) ); | | | 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 | rc = pagerOpentemp(pPager, pPager->fd, pPager->vfsFlags); } /* Before the first write, give the VFS a hint of what the final ** file size will be. */ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->dbHintSize<pPager->dbSize && (pList->pDirty || pList->pgno>pPager->dbHintSize) ){ sqlite3_int64 szFile = pPager->pageSize * (sqlite3_int64)pPager->dbSize; sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pPager->fd, SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT, &szFile); pPager->dbHintSize = pPager->dbSize; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 | ** any such pages to the file. ** ** Also, do not write out any page that has the PGHDR_DONT_WRITE flag ** set (set by sqlite3PagerDontWrite()). */ if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){ i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize; /* Offset to write */ | | | | | 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425 | ** any such pages to the file. ** ** Also, do not write out any page that has the PGHDR_DONT_WRITE flag ** set (set by sqlite3PagerDontWrite()). */ if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){ i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize; /* Offset to write */ char *pData; /* Data to write */ assert( (pList->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 ); if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList); pData = pList->pData; /* Write out the page data. */ rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset); /* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize. */ if( pgno==1 ){ memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers)); } if( pgno>pPager->dbFileSize ){ pPager->dbFileSize = pgno; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 | pList = pList->pDirty; } return rc; } /* | | | | | | | | | | | | 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 | pList = pList->pDirty; } return rc; } /* ** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this ** function is a no-op. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An ** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen() ** fails. */ static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( !isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){ const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE; int nStmtSpill = sqlite3Config.nStmtSpill; if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || pPager->subjInMemory ){ nStmtSpill = -1; } rc = sqlite3JournalOpen(pPager->pVfs, 0, pPager->sjfd, flags, nStmtSpill); } return rc; } /* ** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal. ** ** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs ** for all open savepoints before returning. ** ** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO ** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or ** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint ** bitvec. */ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager; if( pPager->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF ){ /* Open the sub-journal, if it has not already been opened */ assert( pPager->useJournal ); assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pagerUseWal(pPager) ); assert( isOpen(pPager->sjfd) || pPager->nSubRec==0 ); assert( pagerUseWal(pPager) || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg) || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize ); rc = openSubJournal(pPager); /* If the sub-journal was opened successfully (or was already open), ** write the journal record into the file. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ void *pData = pPg->pData; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 | } } /* ** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some ** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object ** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory | | | | | 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 | } } /* ** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some ** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object ** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory ** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is ** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page ** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first ** argument. ** ** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents ** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the ** journal file. ** ** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and ** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the ** page clean, the IO error code is returned. If the page cannot be ** made clean for some other reason, but no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK ** is returned by sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is not called. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 | ** pages belonging to the same sector. ** ** The doNotSpill ROLLBACK and OFF bits inhibits all cache spilling ** regardless of whether or not a sync is required. This is set during ** a rollback or by user request, respectively. ** ** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could | | | | | | | | | 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 | ** pages belonging to the same sector. ** ** The doNotSpill ROLLBACK and OFF bits inhibits all cache spilling ** regardless of whether or not a sync is required. This is set during ** a rollback or by user request, respectively. ** ** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it ** is impossible for sqlite3PcacheFetch() to be called with createFlag==3 ** while in the error state, hence it is impossible for this routine to ** be called in the error state. Nevertheless, we include a NEVER() ** test for the error state as a safeguard against future changes. */ if( NEVER(pPager->errCode) ) return SQLITE_OK; testcase( pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK ); testcase( pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_OFF ); testcase( pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC ); if( pPager->doNotSpill && ((pPager->doNotSpill & (SPILLFLAG_ROLLBACK|SPILLFLAG_OFF))!=0 || (pPg->flags & PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)!=0) ){ return SQLITE_OK; } pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_SPILL]++; pPg->pDirty = 0; if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ /* Write a single frame for this page to the log. */ rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = pagerWalFrames(pPager, pPg, 0, 0); } }else{ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE if( pPager->tempFile==0 ){ rc = sqlite3JournalCreate(pPager->jfd); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return pager_error(pPager, rc); } #endif /* Sync the journal file if required. */ if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD ){ rc = syncJournal(pPager, 1); } /* Write the contents of the page out to the database file. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ assert( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 ); rc = pager_write_pagelist(pPager, pPg); } } /* Mark the page as clean. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ PAGERTRACE(("STRESS %d page %d\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno)); sqlite3PcacheMakeClean(pPg); } return pager_error(pPager, rc); } /* ** Flush all unreferenced dirty pages to disk. */ int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){ int rc = pPager->errCode; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 | ** Allocate and initialize a new Pager object and put a pointer to it ** in *ppPager. The pager should eventually be freed by passing it ** to sqlite3PagerClose(). ** ** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open. ** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created ** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted | | | | | | | 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 | ** Allocate and initialize a new Pager object and put a pointer to it ** in *ppPager. The pager should eventually be freed by passing it ** to sqlite3PagerClose(). ** ** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open. ** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created ** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted ** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then ** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk. ** This can be used to implement an in-memory database. ** ** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated ** along with each page reference. This space is available to the user ** via the sqlite3PagerGetExtra() API. When a new page is allocated, the ** first 8 bytes of this space are zeroed but the remainder is uninitialized. ** (The extra space is used by btree as the MemPage object.) ** ** The flags argument is used to specify properties that affect the ** operation of the pager. It should be passed some bitwise combination ** of the PAGER_* flags. ** ** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter ** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files. ** ** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened ** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to ** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL ** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM ** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or ** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors. */ int sqlite3PagerOpen( sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, /* The virtual file system to use */ Pager **ppPager, /* OUT: Return the Pager structure here */ const char *zFilename, /* Name of the database file to open */ int nExtra, /* Extra bytes append to each in-memory page */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3DbFree(0, zPathname); return rc; } } /* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the | | | 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3DbFree(0, zPathname); return rc; } } /* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal ** file name. The layout in memory is as follows: ** ** Pager object (sizeof(Pager) bytes) ** PCache object (sqlite3PcacheSize() bytes) ** Database file handle (pVfs->szOsFile bytes) ** Sub-journal file handle (journalFileSize bytes) ** Main journal file handle (journalFileSize bytes) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 | ** opening the file until the first call to OsWrite(). ** ** This branch is also run for an in-memory database. An in-memory ** database is the same as a temp-file that is never written out to ** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal. ** ** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable. | | | | 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946 4947 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 | ** opening the file until the first call to OsWrite(). ** ** This branch is also run for an in-memory database. An in-memory ** database is the same as a temp-file that is never written out to ** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal. ** ** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable. */ act_like_temp_file: tempFile = 1; pPager->eState = PAGER_READER; /* Pretend we already have a lock */ pPager->eLock = EXCLUSIVE_LOCK; /* Pretend we are in EXCLUSIVE mode */ pPager->noLock = 1; /* Do no locking */ readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY); } /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of ** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ assert( pPager->memDb==0 ); rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &szPageDflt, -1); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 | /* pPager->stmtSize = 0; */ /* pPager->stmtJSize = 0; */ /* pPager->nPage = 0; */ pPager->mxPgno = SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_COUNT; /* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */ /* pPager->errMask = 0; */ pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile; | | | | 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 | /* pPager->stmtSize = 0; */ /* pPager->stmtJSize = 0; */ /* pPager->nPage = 0; */ pPager->mxPgno = SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_COUNT; /* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */ /* pPager->errMask = 0; */ pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile; assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL || tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE ); assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 ); pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile; pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile; pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb; pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly; assert( useJournal || pPager->tempFile ); sqlite3PagerSetFlags(pPager, (SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS+1)|PAGER_CACHESPILL); /* pPager->pFirst = 0; */ /* pPager->pFirstSynced = 0; */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 | *ppPager = pPager; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Return the sqlite3_file for the main database given the name | | | | | | | 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068 5069 | *ppPager = pPager; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Return the sqlite3_file for the main database given the name ** of the corresponding WAL or Journal name as passed into ** xOpen. */ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char *zName){ Pager *pPager; while( zName[-1]!=0 || zName[-2]!=0 || zName[-3]!=0 || zName[-4]!=0 ){ zName--; } pPager = *(Pager**)(zName - 4 - sizeof(Pager*)); return pPager->fd; } /* ** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to ** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in ** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that ** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal ** file exists if the following criteria are met: ** ** * The journal file exists in the file system, and ** * No process holds a RESERVED or greater lock on the database file, and ** * The database file itself is greater than 0 bytes in size, and ** * The first byte of the journal file exists and is not 0x00. ** ** If the current size of the database file is 0 but a journal file ** exists, that is probably an old journal left over from a prior ** database with the same name. In this case the journal file is ** just deleted using OsDelete, *pExists is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK ** is returned. ** ** This routine does not check if there is a super-journal filename ** at the end of the file. If there is, and that super-journal file ** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this ** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback() ** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and ** will not roll it back. ** ** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and ** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is ** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying ** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error ** code is returned and the value of *pExists is undefined. */ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){ sqlite3_vfs * const pVfs = pPager->pVfs; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 | if( !jrnlOpen ){ rc = sqlite3OsAccess(pVfs, pPager->zJournal, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &exists); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && exists ){ int locked = 0; /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */ /* Race condition here: Another process might have been holding the | | | 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 | if( !jrnlOpen ){ rc = sqlite3OsAccess(pVfs, pPager->zJournal, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &exists); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && exists ){ int locked = 0; /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */ /* Race condition here: Another process might have been holding the ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess() ** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before ** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call. If that ** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when ** in fact there is none. This results in a false-positive which will ** be dealt with by the playback routine. Ticket #3883. */ rc = sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock(pPager->fd, &locked); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 | if( !pPager->exclusiveMode ) pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK); } sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); }else{ /* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved ** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is ** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file. | | | 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 5129 5130 | if( !pPager->exclusiveMode ) pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK); } sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); }else{ /* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved ** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is ** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file. ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not, ** it can be ignored. */ if( !jrnlOpen ){ int f = SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY|SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL; rc = sqlite3OsOpen(pVfs, pPager->zJournal, pPager->jfd, f, &f); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 | ** ** The following operations are also performed by this function. ** ** 1) If the pager is currently in PAGER_OPEN state (no lock held ** on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a ** SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining ** the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal, | | | | | | 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 | ** ** The following operations are also performed by this function. ** ** 1) If the pager is currently in PAGER_OPEN state (no lock held ** on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a ** SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining ** the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal, ** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal ** rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking ** the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and ** discarded if they are found to be invalid. ** ** 2) If the pager is running in exclusive-mode, and there are currently ** no outstanding references to any pages, and is in the error state, ** then an attempt is made to clear the error state by discarding ** the contents of the page cache and rolling back any open journal ** file. ** ** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error ** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or ** rolling back a journal file, the IO error code is returned. */ int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ /* This routine is only called from b-tree and only when there are no ** outstanding pages. This implies that the pager state should either ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in ** exclusive access mode. */ assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN || pPager->eState==PAGER_READER ); assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK ); if( !pagerUseWal(pPager) && pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 | goto failed; } /* Get an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. At this point it is ** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the ** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the ** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 | goto failed; } /* Get an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. At this point it is ** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the ** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the ** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the ** hot-journal back. ** ** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock ** on the database file. ** ** Unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, the lock is ** downgraded to SHARED_LOCK before this function returns. */ rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto failed; } /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist ** mode (and also for journal_mode=truncate on some systems). ** ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it ** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this ** function was called and the journal file does not exist. */ if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) && pPager->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF ){ sqlite3_vfs * const pVfs = pPager->pVfs; int bExists; /* True if journal file exists */ rc = sqlite3OsAccess( pVfs, pPager->zJournal, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists ){ int fout = 0; int f = SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL; assert( !pPager->tempFile ); rc = sqlite3OsOpen(pVfs, pPager->zJournal, pPager->jfd, f, &fout); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && fout&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY ){ rc = SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT; sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd); } } } /* Playback and delete the journal. Drop the database write ** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before ** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with ** an inconsistent cache. Sync the hot journal before playing ** it back since the process that crashed and left the hot journal ** probably did not sync it and we are required to always sync ** the journal before playing it back. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 | } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ /* This branch is taken if an error occurs while trying to open ** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The ** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock ** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be | | | | | 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 | } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ /* This branch is taken if an error occurs while trying to open ** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The ** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock ** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation). ** ** In order to get pager_unlock() to do this, set Pager.eState to ** PAGER_ERROR now. This is not actually counted as a transition ** to ERROR state in the state diagram at the top of this file, ** since we know that the same call to pager_unlock() will very ** shortly transition the pager object to the OPEN state. Calling ** assert_pager_state() would fail now, as it should not be possible ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page ** references. */ pager_error(pPager, rc); goto failed; } assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 | ** single unnecessary sqlite3OsRead() call at the start-up. ** ** Database changes are detected by looking at 15 bytes beginning ** at offset 24 into the file. The first 4 of these 16 bytes are ** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change. The ** other bytes change randomly with each file change when ** a codec is in use. | | | | 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 | ** single unnecessary sqlite3OsRead() call at the start-up. ** ** Database changes are detected by looking at 15 bytes beginning ** at offset 24 into the file. The first 4 of these 16 bytes are ** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change. The ** other bytes change randomly with each file change when ** a codec is in use. ** ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be ** detected. The chance of an undetected change is so small that ** it can be neglected. */ char dbFileVers[sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers)]; IOTRACE(("CKVERS %p %d\n", pPager, sizeof(dbFileVers))); rc = sqlite3OsRead(pPager->fd, &dbFileVers, sizeof(dbFileVers), 24); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 | /* ** If the reference count has reached zero, rollback any active ** transaction and unlock the pager. ** ** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in ** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is ** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op. | | | | | | | | | | | | 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 5433 5434 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 | /* ** If the reference count has reached zero, rollback any active ** transaction and unlock the pager. ** ** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in ** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is ** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op. */ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){ if( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 ){ assert( pPager->nMmapOut==0 ); /* because page1 is never memory mapped */ pagerUnlockAndRollback(pPager); } } /* ** The page getter methods each try to acquire a reference to a ** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is ** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned. ** ** There are different implementations of the getter method depending ** on the current state of the pager. ** ** getPageNormal() -- The normal getter ** getPageError() -- Used if the pager is in an error state ** getPageMmap() -- Used if memory-mapped I/O is enabled ** ** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned. ** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data ** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may ** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing ** object with no outstanding references. ** ** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the ** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is ** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra ** data is left as it was when the page object was last used. ** ** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if ** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the ** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no ** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the ** page is initialized to all zeros. ** ** If PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT is true, it means that we do not care about ** the contents of the page. This occurs in two scenarios: ** ** a) When reading a free-list leaf page from the database, and ** ** b) When a savepoint is being rolled back and we need to load |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 | /* In this case the pcache already contains an initialized copy of ** the page. Return without further ado. */ assert( pgno!=PAGER_SJ_PGNO(pPager) ); pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_HIT]++; return SQLITE_OK; }else{ | | | 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514 5515 5516 5517 | /* In this case the pcache already contains an initialized copy of ** the page. Return without further ado. */ assert( pgno!=PAGER_SJ_PGNO(pPager) ); pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_HIT]++; return SQLITE_OK; }else{ /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to ** be initialized. But first some error checks: ** ** (*) obsolete. Was: maximum page number is 2^31 ** (2) Never try to fetch the locking page */ if( pgno==PAGER_SJ_PGNO(pPager) ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 5533 5534 | sqlite3PcacheRelease(pPg); pPg = 0; } goto pager_acquire_err; } if( noContent ){ /* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign. | | | | | 5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540 5541 5542 5543 5544 | sqlite3PcacheRelease(pPg); pPg = 0; } goto pager_acquire_err; } if( noContent ){ /* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign. ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set ** a bit in a bit vector. */ sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); if( pgno<=pPager->dbOrigSize ){ TESTONLY( rc = ) sqlite3BitvecSet(pPager->pInJournal, pgno); testcase( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 5586 | ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; PgHdr *pPg = 0; u32 iFrame = 0; /* Frame to read from WAL file */ /* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except ** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY | | | 5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 5586 5587 5588 5589 5590 5591 5592 5593 5594 | ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; PgHdr *pPg = 0; u32 iFrame = 0; /* Frame to read from WAL file */ /* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except ** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a ** temporary or in-memory database. */ const int bMmapOk = (pgno>1 && (pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || (flags & PAGER_GET_READONLY)) ); assert( USEFETCH(pPager) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ *ppPage = 0; return rc; } } if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){ void *pData = 0; | | | 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ *ppPage = 0; return rc; } } if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){ void *pData = 0; rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd, (i64)(pgno-1) * pPager->pageSize, pPager->pageSize, &pData ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pData ){ if( pPager->eState>PAGER_READER || pPager->tempFile ){ pPg = sqlite3PagerLookup(pPager, pgno); } if( pPg==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 | /* printf("PAGE %u\n", pgno); fflush(stdout); */ return pPager->xGet(pPager, pgno, ppPage, flags); } /* ** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache. Do ** not read the page from disk. Return a pointer to the page, | | | | 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 5681 5682 5683 5684 5685 | /* printf("PAGE %u\n", pgno); fflush(stdout); */ return pPager->xGet(pPager, pgno, ppPage, flags); } /* ** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache. Do ** not read the page from disk. Return a pointer to the page, ** or 0 if the page is not in cache. ** ** See also sqlite3PagerGet(). The difference between this routine ** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read ** in the page if the page is not already in cache. This routine ** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error ** has ever happened. */ DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){ sqlite3_pcache_page *pPage; assert( pPager!=0 ); assert( pgno!=0 ); assert( pPager->pPCache!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5726 5727 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732 | pPager = pPg->pPager; sqlite3PcacheRelease(pPg); pagerUnlockIfUnused(pPager); } /* ** This function is called at the start of every write transaction. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 5726 5727 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751 5752 5753 5754 5755 5756 5757 5758 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783 5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 | pPager = pPg->pPager; sqlite3PcacheRelease(pPg); pagerUnlockIfUnused(pPager); } /* ** This function is called at the start of every write transaction. ** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database ** file when this routine is called. ** ** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header ** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal ** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being ** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used ** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back. ** ** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode), ** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the ** already open file. ** ** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return ** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or ** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails. */ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ sqlite3_vfs * const pVfs = pPager->pVfs; /* Local cache of vfs pointer */ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 ); /* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op. But on ** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in ** an error state. */ if( NEVER(pPager->errCode) ) return pPager->errCode; if( !pagerUseWal(pPager) && pPager->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF ){ pPager->pInJournal = sqlite3BitvecCreate(pPager->dbSize); if( pPager->pInJournal==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } /* Open the journal file if it is not already open. */ if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){ sqlite3MemJournalOpen(pPager->jfd); }else{ int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE; int nSpill; if( pPager->tempFile ){ flags |= (SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE|SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL); flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE; nSpill = sqlite3Config.nStmtSpill; }else{ flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL; nSpill = jrnlBufferSize(pPager); } /* Verify that the database still has the same name as it did when ** it was originally opened. */ rc = databaseIsUnmoved(pPager); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3JournalOpen ( pVfs, pPager->zJournal, pPager->jfd, flags, nSpill ); } } assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) ); } /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open ** the sub-journal if necessary. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* TODO: Check if all of these are really required. */ pPager->nRec = 0; pPager->journalOff = 0; pPager->setSuper = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 | pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD; } return rc; } /* | | | | | 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 | pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD; } return rc; } /* ** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a ** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op. ** ** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED ** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least ** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking ** functions need be called. ** ** If the subjInMemory argument is non-zero, then any sub-journal opened ** within this transaction will be opened as an in-memory file. This ** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when ** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a ** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required ** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database, ** or using a temporary file otherwise. */ int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pPager->errCode ) return pPager->errCode; assert( pPager->eState>=PAGER_READER && pPager->eState<PAGER_ERROR ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 | } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* Change to WRITER_LOCKED state. ** ** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD ** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED. | | | | | 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 | } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* Change to WRITER_LOCKED state. ** ** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD ** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED. ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in ** WAL mode. */ pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED; pPager->dbHintSize = pPager->dbSize; pPager->dbFileSize = pPager->dbSize; pPager->dbOrigSize = pPager->dbSize; pPager->journalOff = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 | rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff, pPg->pgno); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, pData2, pPager->pageSize, iOff+4); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; | | | | | | | | 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 | rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff, pPg->pgno); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, pData2, pPager->pageSize, iOff+4); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize)); PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count); PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, ((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg))); pPager->journalOff += 8 + pPager->pageSize; pPager->nRec++; assert( pPager->pInJournal!=0 ); rc = sqlite3BitvecSet(pPager->pInJournal, pPg->pgno); testcase( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ); rc |= addToSavepointBitvecs(pPager, pPg->pgno); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ); return rc; } /* ** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the ** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into ** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs ** of any open savepoints as appropriate. */ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){ Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager; int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already ** been started. The journal file may or may not be open at this point. ** It is never called in the ERROR state. */ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); assert( pPager->errCode==0 ); assert( pPager->readOnly==0 ); CHECK_PAGE(pPg); /* The journal file needs to be opened. Higher level routines have already ** obtained the necessary locks to begin the write-transaction, but the ** rollback journal might not yet be open. Open it now if this is the case. ** ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page. ** Otherwise, if it were done after calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty(), then ** an error might occur and the pager would end up in WRITER_LOCKED state ** with pages marked as dirty in the cache. */ if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){ rc = pager_open_journal(pPager); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 | /* The PGHDR_DIRTY bit is set above when the page was added to the dirty-list ** and before writing the page into the rollback journal. Wait until now, ** after the page has been successfully journalled, before setting the ** PGHDR_WRITEABLE bit that indicates that the page can be safely modified. */ pPg->flags |= PGHDR_WRITEABLE; | | | 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043 | /* The PGHDR_DIRTY bit is set above when the page was added to the dirty-list ** and before writing the page into the rollback journal. Wait until now, ** after the page has been successfully journalled, before setting the ** PGHDR_WRITEABLE bit that indicates that the page can be safely modified. */ pPg->flags |= PGHDR_WRITEABLE; /* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it, ** then write the page into the statement journal. */ if( pPager->nSavepoint>0 ){ rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 | if( pPage->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC ){ needSync = 1; } sqlite3PagerUnrefNotNull(pPage); } } | | | 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 6127 | if( pPage->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC ){ needSync = 1; } sqlite3PagerUnrefNotNull(pPage); } } /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages ** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because ** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the ** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them ** before any of them can be written out to the database file. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && needSync ){ assert( !MEMDB ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 | assert( (pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC)!=0 ); pPager->doNotSpill &= ~SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC; return rc; } /* | | | | | 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 6152 | assert( (pPager->doNotSpill & SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC)!=0 ); pPager->doNotSpill &= ~SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC; return rc; } /* ** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before ** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value ** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless ** this routine returns SQLITE_OK. ** ** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this ** function also deals with the special case where 2 or more pages ** fit on a single disk sector. In this case all co-resident pages ** must have been written to the journal file before returning. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 | ** the page has been added as a leaf of the freelist and so its ** content no longer matters. ** ** The overlying software layer calls this routine when all of the data ** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so ** that it does not get written to disk. ** | | | | | | | | | | 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196 6197 6198 6199 6200 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 | ** the page has been added as a leaf of the freelist and so its ** content no longer matters. ** ** The overlying software layer calls this routine when all of the data ** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so ** that it does not get written to disk. ** ** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large ** DELETE operations. ** ** This optimization cannot be used with a temp-file, as the page may ** have been dirty at the start of the transaction. In that case, if ** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need ** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the ** current transaction is rolled back. */ void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){ Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager; if( !pPager->tempFile && (pPg->flags&PGHDR_DIRTY) && pPager->nSavepoint==0 ){ PAGERTRACE(("DONT_WRITE page %d of %d\n", pPg->pgno, PAGERID(pPager))); IOTRACE(("CLEAN %p %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno)) pPg->flags |= PGHDR_DONT_WRITE; pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_WRITEABLE; testcase( pPg->flags & PGHDR_NEED_SYNC ); pager_set_pagehash(pPg); } } /* ** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file ** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at ** byte offset 24 of the pager file. The secondary change counter at ** 92 is also updated, as is the SQLite version number at offset 96. ** ** But this only happens if the pPager->changeCountDone flag is false. ** To avoid excess churning of page 1, the update only happens once. ** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an ** unconditional update of the change counters. ** ** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling ** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the ** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current ** transaction is committed. ** ** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled ** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case, ** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly ** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the ** sqlite3OsWrite() function. */ static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 | assert( !pPager->tempFile && isOpen(pPager->fd) ); /* Open page 1 of the file for writing. */ rc = sqlite3PagerGet(pPager, 1, &pPgHdr, 0); assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not | | | 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 | assert( !pPager->tempFile && isOpen(pPager->fd) ); /* Open page 1 of the file for writing. */ rc = sqlite3PagerGet(pPager, 1, &pPgHdr, 0); assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in ** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet() ** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK. */ if( !DIRECT_MODE && ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) ){ rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPgHdr); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 | rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->fd, pPager->syncFlags); } return rc; } /* ** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in | | | | | | | | | | | | | 6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 6350 6351 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383 | rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->fd, pPager->syncFlags); } return rc; } /* ** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in ** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op. ** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on ** the database file, an attempt is made to obtain one. ** ** If the EXCLUSIVE lock is already held or the attempt to obtain it is ** successful, or the connection is in WAL mode, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is ** returned. */ int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){ int rc = pPager->errCode; assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); if( 0==pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ rc = pager_wait_on_lock(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); } } return rc; } /* ** Sync the database file for the pager pPager. zSuper points to the name ** of a super-journal file that should be written into the individual ** journal file. zSuper may be NULL, which is interpreted as no ** super-journal (a single database transaction). ** ** This routine ensures that: ** ** * The database file change-counter is updated, ** * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used), ** * all dirty pages are written to the database file, ** * the database file is truncated (if required), and ** * the database file synced. ** ** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize ** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or ** delete the super-journal file if specified). ** ** Note that if zSuper==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value ** passed to an sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne() call. ** ** If the final parameter - noSync - is true, then the database file itself ** is not synced. The caller must call sqlite3PagerSync() directly to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 | /* If a prior error occurred, report that error again. */ if( NEVER(pPager->errCode) ) return pPager->errCode; /* Provide the ability to easily simulate an I/O error during testing */ if( sqlite3FaultSim(400) ) return SQLITE_IOERR; | | | 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 6412 6413 6414 | /* If a prior error occurred, report that error again. */ if( NEVER(pPager->errCode) ) return pPager->errCode; /* Provide the ability to easily simulate an I/O error during testing */ if( sqlite3FaultSim(400) ) return SQLITE_IOERR; PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zSuper=%s nSize=%d\n", pPager->zFilename, zSuper, pPager->dbSize)); /* If no database changes have been made, return early. */ if( pPager->eState<PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD ) return SQLITE_OK; assert( MEMDB==0 || pPager->tempFile ); assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 | #else # define bBatch 0 #endif #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE /* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it ** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 6499 6500 | #else # define bBatch 0 #endif #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE /* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it ** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the ** runtime criteria to use the operation: ** ** * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for ** blocks of size page-size, and ** * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and ** * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file. ** ** If the optimization was not enabled at compile time, then the ** pager_incr_changecounter() function is called to update the change ** counter in 'indirect-mode'. If the optimization is compiled in but ** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate() ** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call ** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect ** mode. ** ** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable, ** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter ** in 'direct' mode. In this case the journal file will never be ** created for this transaction. */ if( bBatch==0 ){ PgHdr *pPg; assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); if( !zSuper && isOpen(pPager->jfd) && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager) && pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbOrigSize && (!(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty) ){ /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1 ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1 ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write ** property of the host file-system, this is safe. */ rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1); }else{ rc = sqlite3JournalCreate(pPager->jfd); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; assert( bBatch==0 ); } #endif rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0); #endif /* !SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE */ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; | | | | | | | | 6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 6515 6516 6517 6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 | if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; assert( bBatch==0 ); } #endif rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0); #endif /* !SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE */ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; /* Write the super-journal name into the journal file. If a ** super-journal file name has already been written to the journal file, ** or if zSuper is NULL (no super-journal), then this call is a no-op. */ rc = writeSuperJournal(pPager, zSuper); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; /* Sync the journal file and write all dirty pages to the database. ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not ** create the journal file or perform any real IO. ** ** Because the change-counter page was just modified, unless the ** atomic-update optimization is used it is almost certain that the ** journal requires a sync here. However, in locking_mode=exclusive ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is ** not the case. In this case it is likely enough that the redundant ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow. */ rc = syncJournal(pPager, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; pList = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE if( bBatch ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 | } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_BLOCKED ); goto commit_phase_one_exit; } sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache); | | | | | | | 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577 6578 6579 6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 | } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_BLOCKED ); goto commit_phase_one_exit; } sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache); /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use ** pager_truncate to grow the file here. This can happen if the database ** image was extended as part of the current transaction and then the ** last page in the db image moved to the free-list. In this case the ** last page is never written out to disk, leaving the database file ** undersized. Fix this now if it is the case. */ if( pPager->dbSize>pPager->dbFileSize ){ Pgno nNew = pPager->dbSize - (pPager->dbSize==PAGER_SJ_PGNO(pPager)); assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD ); rc = pager_truncate(pPager, nNew); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; } /* Finally, sync the database file. */ if( !noSync ){ rc = sqlite3PagerSync(pPager, zSuper); } IOTRACE(("DBSYNC %p\n", pPager)) } } commit_phase_one_exit: if( rc==SQLITE_OK && !pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_FINISHED; } return rc; } /* ** When this function is called, the database file has been completely ** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and ** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system ** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually ** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back. ** ** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting, ** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used ** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is ** irrevocably committed. ** ** If an error occurs, an IO error code is returned and the pager ** moves into the error state. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK is returned. */ int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 6635 | ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); /* An optimization. If the database was not actually modified during ** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is ** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 6635 6636 6637 6638 6639 6640 6641 6642 6643 6644 6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 6650 6651 6652 6653 6654 6655 6656 6657 6658 6659 6660 6661 6662 6663 6664 6665 6666 6667 6668 6669 6670 6671 6672 6673 6674 6675 6676 6677 6678 6679 6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 6687 6688 6689 6690 6691 6692 6693 6694 6695 6696 6697 6698 6699 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 6706 6707 6708 6709 6710 6711 6712 6713 6714 6715 6716 6717 6718 6719 6720 6721 6722 6723 6724 6725 6726 | ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); /* An optimization. If the database was not actually modified during ** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is ** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op. ** ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal ** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as ** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal ** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need ** to drop any locks either. */ if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED && pPager->exclusiveMode && pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST ){ assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) || !pPager->journalOff ); pPager->eState = PAGER_READER; return SQLITE_OK; } PAGERTRACE(("COMMIT %d\n", PAGERID(pPager))); rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, pPager->setSuper, 1); return pager_error(pPager, rc); } /* ** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the ** transaction are reverted and the current write-transaction is closed. ** The pager falls back to PAGER_READER state if successful, or PAGER_ERROR ** state if an error occurs. ** ** If the pager is already in PAGER_ERROR state when this function is called, ** it returns Pager.errCode immediately. No work is performed in this case. ** ** Otherwise, in rollback mode, this function performs two functions: ** ** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and ** in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction ** was opened, and ** ** 2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot ** rollback at any point in the future. ** ** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the ** rollback is successful. ** ** In WAL mode, all cache-entries containing data modified within the ** current transaction are either expelled from the cache or reverted to ** their pre-transaction state by re-reading data from the database or ** WAL files. The WAL transaction is then closed. */ int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ PAGERTRACE(("ROLLBACK %d\n", PAGERID(pPager))); /* PagerRollback() is a no-op if called in READER or OPEN state. If ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not ** attempted here. Instead, the error code is returned to the caller. */ assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); if( pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR ) return pPager->errCode; if( pPager->eState<=PAGER_READER ) return SQLITE_OK; if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ int rc2; rc = sqlite3PagerSavepoint(pPager, SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, -1); rc2 = pager_end_transaction(pPager, pPager->setSuper, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = rc2; }else if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){ int eState = pPager->eState; rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0); if( !MEMDB && eState>PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){ /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error ** state to indicate that the contents of the cache may not be trusted. ** Any active readers will get SQLITE_ABORT. */ pPager->errCode = SQLITE_ABORT; pPager->eState = PAGER_ERROR; setGetterMethod(pPager); return rc; } }else{ rc = pager_playback(pPager, 0); } assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || rc!=SQLITE_OK ); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_FULL || rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR || rc==SQLITE_CANTOPEN ); /* If an error occurs during a ROLLBACK, we can no longer trust the pager ** cache. So call pager_error() on the way out to make any error persistent. */ return pager_error(pPager, rc); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6786 6787 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 | /* ** Parameter eStat must be one of SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, _MISS, _WRITE, ** or _WRITE+1. The SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_WRITE+1 case is a translation ** of SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_SPILL. The _SPILL case is not contiguous because ** it was added later. ** ** Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the | | | | 6786 6787 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 6793 6794 6795 6796 6797 6798 6799 6800 6801 | /* ** Parameter eStat must be one of SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, _MISS, _WRITE, ** or _WRITE+1. The SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_WRITE+1 case is a translation ** of SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_SPILL. The _SPILL case is not contiguous because ** it was added later. ** ** Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the ** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the ** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before ** returning. */ void sqlite3PagerCacheStat(Pager *pPager, int eStat, int reset, int *pnVal){ assert( eStat==SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT || eStat==SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS || eStat==SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_WRITE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6823 6824 6825 6826 6827 6828 6829 | /* ** Check that there are at least nSavepoint savepoints open. If there are ** currently less than nSavepoints open, then open one or more savepoints ** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already ** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op. ** | | | | 6823 6824 6825 6826 6827 6828 6829 6830 6831 6832 6833 6834 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839 6840 6841 6842 6843 6844 6845 6846 6847 6848 6849 6850 6851 6852 | /* ** Check that there are at least nSavepoint savepoints open. If there are ** currently less than nSavepoints open, then open one or more savepoints ** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already ** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op. ** ** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error ** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is ** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ int nCurrent = pPager->nSavepoint; /* Current number of savepoints */ int ii; /* Iterator variable */ PagerSavepoint *aNew; /* New Pager.aSavepoint array */ assert( pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); assert( nSavepoint>nCurrent && pPager->useJournal ); /* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a ** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below. */ aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc( pPager->aSavepoint, sizeof(PagerSavepoint)*nSavepoint ); if( !aNew ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 6893 | return SQLITE_OK; } } /* ** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint. | | | | | | | | | | | | 6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 6905 6906 6907 6908 6909 6910 6911 6912 6913 6914 6915 6916 6917 6918 6919 6920 6921 6922 6923 6924 6925 6926 6927 6928 6929 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6939 6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 | return SQLITE_OK; } } /* ** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint. ** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently ** created savepoint. ** ** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. ** If it is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then release and destroy the savepoint with ** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes ** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created. ** ** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter ** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint ** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate ** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than ** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op. ** ** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current ** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling ** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate ** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the ** contents of the database to its original state. ** ** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint ** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE), ** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed. ** ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails, ** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a ** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned. */ int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){ int rc = pPager->errCode; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) rc = SQLITE_OK; #endif assert( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE || op==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); assert( iSavepoint>=0 || op==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && iSavepoint<pPager->nSavepoint ){ int ii; /* Iterator variable */ int nNew; /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */ /* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated ** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation. */ nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1); for(ii=nNew; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){ sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->aSavepoint[ii].pInSavepoint); } pPager->nSavepoint = nNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6963 6964 6965 6966 6967 6968 6969 | ** the database file, so the playback operation can be skipped. */ else if( pagerUseWal(pPager) || isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint = (nNew==0)?0:&pPager->aSavepoint[nNew-1]; rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint); assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE); } | | | | | | 6963 6964 6965 6966 6967 6968 6969 6970 6971 6972 6973 6974 6975 6976 6977 6978 6979 6980 6981 6982 6983 6984 | ** the database file, so the playback operation can be skipped. */ else if( pagerUseWal(pPager) || isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint = (nNew==0)?0:&pPager->aSavepoint[nNew-1]; rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint); assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE); } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled ** back journal_mode=off, put the pager in the error state. This way, ** if the VFS used by this pager includes ZipVFS, the entire transaction ** can be rolled back at the ZipVFS level. */ else if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF && pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD ){ pPager->errCode = SQLITE_ABORT; pPager->eState = PAGER_ERROR; setGetterMethod(pPager); } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7059 7060 7061 7062 7063 7064 7065 | ** ** A transaction must be active when this routine is called. It used to be ** required that a statement transaction was not active, but this restriction ** has been removed (CREATE INDEX needs to move a page when a statement ** transaction is active). ** ** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being | | | | 7059 7060 7061 7062 7063 7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 | ** ** A transaction must be active when this routine is called. It used to be ** required that a statement transaction was not active, but this restriction ** has been removed (CREATE INDEX needs to move a page when a statement ** transaction is active). ** ** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being ** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction ** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page ** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction. ** ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error ** occurs. Otherwise, it returns SQLITE_OK. */ int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, int isCommit){ PgHdr *pPgOld; /* The page being overwritten. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 | assert( pPager->tempFile || !MEMDB ); if( pPager->tempFile ){ rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPg); if( rc ) return rc; } /* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest | | | 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 7096 7097 7098 7099 7100 7101 7102 | assert( pPager->tempFile || !MEMDB ); if( pPager->tempFile ){ rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pPg); if( rc ) return rc; } /* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the ** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario: ** ** BEGIN; ** <journal page X, then modify it in memory> ** SAVEPOINT one; ** <Move page X to location Y> ** ROLLBACK TO one; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 | */ if( (pPg->flags & PGHDR_DIRTY)!=0 && SQLITE_OK!=(rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg)) ){ return rc; } | | | | | | 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7118 7119 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 | */ if( (pPg->flags & PGHDR_DIRTY)!=0 && SQLITE_OK!=(rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg)) ){ return rc; } PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno)); IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno)) /* If the journal needs to be sync()ed before page pPg->pgno can ** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno. ** ** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it. */ if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){ needSyncPgno = pPg->pgno; assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg) || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize ); assert( pPg->flags&PGHDR_DIRTY ); } /* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained ** for the page moved there. */ pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC; pPgOld = sqlite3PagerLookup(pPager, pgno); assert( !pPgOld || pPgOld->nRef==1 || CORRUPT_DB ); if( pPgOld ){ if( NEVER(pPgOld->nRef>1) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7166 7167 7168 7169 7170 7171 7172 | */ if( pPager->tempFile && pPgOld ){ sqlite3PcacheMove(pPgOld, origPgno); sqlite3PagerUnrefNotNull(pPgOld); } if( needSyncPgno ){ | | | | 7166 7167 7168 7169 7170 7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 | */ if( pPager->tempFile && pPgOld ){ sqlite3PcacheMove(pPgOld, origPgno); sqlite3PagerUnrefNotNull(pPgOld); } if( needSyncPgno ){ /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be ** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno. ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the ** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by ** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC ** flag. ** ** If the attempt to load the page into the page-cache fails, (due ** to a malloc() or IO failure), clear the bit in the pInJournal[] ** array. Otherwise, if the page is loaded and written again in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7199 7200 7201 7202 7203 7204 7205 | } return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* | | | | | | | 7199 7200 7201 7202 7203 7204 7205 7206 7207 7208 7209 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 7218 7219 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 7226 7227 7228 7229 7230 7231 7232 7233 7234 7235 7236 7237 7238 7239 7240 7241 7242 | } return SQLITE_OK; } #endif /* ** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page ** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's ** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to ** the value passed as the third parameter. */ void sqlite3PagerRekey(DbPage *pPg, Pgno iNew, u16 flags){ assert( pPg->pgno!=iNew ); pPg->flags = flags; sqlite3PcacheMove(pPg, iNew); } /* ** Return a pointer to the data for the specified page. */ void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *pPg){ assert( pPg->nRef>0 || pPg->pPager->memDb ); return pPg->pData; } /* ** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space ** allocated along with the specified page. */ void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){ return pPg->pExtra; } /* ** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one ** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or ** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then ** the locking-mode is set to the value specified. ** ** The returned value is either PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or ** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE, indicating the current (possibly updated) ** locking-mode. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7302 7303 7304 7305 7306 7307 7308 | if( eMode!=eOld ){ /* Change the journal mode. */ assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR ); pPager->journalMode = (u8)eMode; | | | 7302 7303 7304 7305 7306 7307 7308 7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 | if( eMode!=eOld ){ /* Change the journal mode. */ assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR ); pPager->journalMode = (u8)eMode; /* When transitioning from TRUNCATE or PERSIST to any other journal ** mode except WAL, unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, ** delete the journal file. */ assert( (PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE & 5)==1 ); assert( (PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST & 5)==1 ); assert( (PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE & 5)==0 ); assert( (PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY & 5)==4 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 | int rc; /* Return code */ u8 eOrigLock; /* Original lock */ assert( pPager->eLock>=SHARED_LOCK ); eOrigLock = pPager->eLock; rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ | | | | | | | 7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 7487 7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517 7518 | int rc; /* Return code */ u8 eOrigLock; /* Original lock */ assert( pPager->eLock>=SHARED_LOCK ); eOrigLock = pPager->eLock; rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the ** pending lock that may have been obtained instead. */ pagerUnlockDb(pPager, eOrigLock); } return rc; } /* ** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in ** exclusive-locking mode when this function is called, take an EXCLUSIVE ** lock on the database file and use heap-memory to store the wal-index ** in. Otherwise, use the normal shared-memory. */ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( pPager->pWal==0 && pPager->tempFile==0 ); assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory ** implementation. Take the exclusive lock now, before opening the WAL ** file, to make sure this is safe. */ if( pPager->exclusiveMode ){ rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager); } /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails, ** (e.g. due to malloc() failure), return an error code. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3WalOpen(pPager->pVfs, pPager->fd, pPager->zWal, pPager->exclusiveMode, pPager->journalSizeLimit, &pPager->pWal ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7526 7527 7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 | /* ** The caller must be holding a SHARED lock on the database file to call ** this function. ** ** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database ** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file ** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful, | | | 7526 7527 7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 7533 7534 7535 7536 7537 7538 7539 7540 | /* ** The caller must be holding a SHARED lock on the database file to call ** this function. ** ** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database ** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file ** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful, ** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does ** not support the xShmXXX() methods, return an error code. *pbOpen is ** not modified in either case. ** ** If the pager is open on a temp-file (or in-memory database), or if ** the WAL file is already open, set *pbOpen to 1 and return SQLITE_OK ** without doing anything. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7568 7569 7570 7571 7572 7573 7574 | return rc; } /* ** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior ** to switching from WAL to rollback mode. ** | | | 7568 7569 7570 7571 7572 7573 7574 7575 7576 7577 7578 7579 7580 7581 7582 | return rc; } /* ** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior ** to switching from WAL to rollback mode. ** ** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an ** EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. If this cannot be obtained, an ** error (SQLITE_BUSY) is returned and the log connection is not closed. ** If successful, the EXCLUSIVE lock is not released before returning. */ int sqlite3PagerCloseWal(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7594 7595 7596 7597 7598 7599 7600 | pPager->pVfs, pPager->zWal, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &logexists ); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && logexists ){ rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager); } } | | | | | 7594 7595 7596 7597 7598 7599 7600 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 7628 7629 7630 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641 | pPager->pVfs, pPager->zWal, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &logexists ); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && logexists ){ rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager); } } /* Checkpoint and close the log. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock is held on ** the database file, the log and log-summary files will be deleted. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pWal ){ rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3WalClose(pPager->pWal, db, pPager->walSyncFlags, pPager->pageSize, (u8*)pPager->pTmpSpace); pPager->pWal = 0; pagerFixMaplimit(pPager); if( rc && !pPager->exclusiveMode ) pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK); } } return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT /* ** If pager pPager is a wal-mode database not in exclusive locking mode, ** invoke the sqlite3WalWriteLock() function on the associated Wal object ** with the same db and bLock parameters as were passed to this function. ** Return an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise. */ int sqlite3PagerWalWriteLock(Pager *pPager, int bLock){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pagerUseWal(pPager) && pPager->exclusiveMode==0 ){ rc = sqlite3WalWriteLock(pPager->pWal, bLock); } return rc; } /* ** Set the database handle used by the wal layer to determine if ** blocking locks are required. */ void sqlite3PagerWalDb(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){ if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ sqlite3WalDb(pPager->pWal, db); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7652 7653 7654 7655 7656 7657 7658 | rc = sqlite3WalSnapshotGet(pPager->pWal, ppSnapshot); } return rc; } /* ** If this is a WAL database, store a pointer to pSnapshot. Next time a | | | | | | 7652 7653 7654 7655 7656 7657 7658 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 7689 7690 7691 7692 7693 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 | rc = sqlite3WalSnapshotGet(pPager->pWal, ppSnapshot); } return rc; } /* ** If this is a WAL database, store a pointer to pSnapshot. Next time a ** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it ** identifies. If this is not a WAL database, return an error. */ int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen( Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pPager->pWal ){ sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen(pPager->pWal, pSnapshot); }else{ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } return rc; } /* ** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this ** is not a WAL database, return an error. */ int sqlite3PagerSnapshotRecover(Pager *pPager){ int rc; if( pPager->pWal ){ rc = sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(pPager->pWal); }else{ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } return rc; } /* ** The caller currently has a read transaction open on the database. ** If this is not a WAL database, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Otherwise, ** this function takes a SHARED lock on the CHECKPOINTER slot and then ** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still ** available. If so, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** If the snapshot is not available, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Or, if ** the CHECKPOINTER lock cannot be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY. If any error ** occurs (any value other than SQLITE_OK is returned), the CHECKPOINTER ** lock is released before returning. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/parse.y.
︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains SQLite's SQL parser. ** ** The canonical source code to this file ("parse.y") is a Lemon grammar ** file that specifies the input grammar and actions to take while parsing. ** That input file is processed by Lemon to generate a C-language | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains SQLite's SQL parser. ** ** The canonical source code to this file ("parse.y") is a Lemon grammar ** file that specifies the input grammar and actions to take while parsing. ** That input file is processed by Lemon to generate a C-language ** implementation of a parser for the given grammar. You might be reading ** this comment as part of the translated C-code. Edits should be made ** to the original parse.y sources. */ } // All token codes are small integers with #defines that begin with "TK_" %token_prefix TK_ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
263 264 265 266 267 268 269 | %endif MATERIALIZED REINDEX RENAME CTIME_KW IF . %wildcard ANY. // Define operator precedence early so that this is the first occurrence | | | 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 | %endif MATERIALIZED REINDEX RENAME CTIME_KW IF . %wildcard ANY. // Define operator precedence early so that this is the first occurrence // of the operator tokens in the grammar. Keeping the operators together // causes them to be assigned integer values that are close together, // which keeps parser tables smaller. // // The token values assigned to these symbols is determined by the order // in which lemon first sees them. It must be the case that ISNULL/NOTNULL, // NE/EQ, GT/LE, and GE/LT are separated by only a single value. See // the sqlite3ExprIfFalse() routine for additional information on this |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/pcache.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
267 268 269 270 271 272 273 | static int numberOfCachePages(PCache *p){ if( p->szCache>=0 ){ /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-42059-47211 If the argument N is positive then the ** suggested cache size is set to N. */ return p->szCache; }else{ i64 n; | | | 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | static int numberOfCachePages(PCache *p){ if( p->szCache>=0 ){ /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-42059-47211 If the argument N is positive then the ** suggested cache size is set to N. */ return p->szCache; }else{ i64 n; /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-59858-46238 If the argument N is negative, then the ** number of cache pages is adjusted to be a number of pages that would ** use approximately abs(N*1024) bytes of memory based on the current ** page size. */ n = ((-1024*(i64)p->szCache)/(p->szPage+p->szExtra)); if( n>1000000000 ) n = 1000000000; return (int)n; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
755 756 757 758 759 760 761 | } } } return result.pDirty; } /* | | | 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 | } } } return result.pDirty; } /* ** Sort the list of pages in ascending order by pgno. Pages are ** connected by pDirty pointers. The pDirtyPrev pointers are ** corrupted by this sort. ** ** Since there cannot be more than 2^31 distinct pages in a database, ** there cannot be more than 31 buckets required by the merge sorter. ** One extra bucket is added to catch overflow in case something ** ever changes to make the previous sentence incorrect. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/pcache1.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 | ** (1) The general-purpose memory allocator - sqlite3Malloc() ** (2) Global page-cache memory provided using sqlite3_config() with ** SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. ** (3) PCache-local bulk allocation. ** ** The third case is a chunk of heap memory (defaulting to 100 pages worth) ** that is allocated when the page cache is created. The size of the local | | | | | | | | 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 | ** (1) The general-purpose memory allocator - sqlite3Malloc() ** (2) Global page-cache memory provided using sqlite3_config() with ** SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. ** (3) PCache-local bulk allocation. ** ** The third case is a chunk of heap memory (defaulting to 100 pages worth) ** that is allocated when the page cache is created. The size of the local ** bulk allocation can be adjusted using ** ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, (void*)0, 0, N). ** ** If N is positive, then N pages worth of memory are allocated using a single ** sqlite3Malloc() call and that memory is used for the first N pages allocated. ** Or if N is negative, then -1024*N bytes of memory are allocated and used ** for as many pages as can be accommodated. ** ** Only one of (2) or (3) can be used. Once the memory available to (2) or ** (3) is exhausted, subsequent allocations fail over to the general-purpose ** memory allocator (1). ** ** Earlier versions of SQLite used only methods (1) and (2). But experiments ** show that method (3) with N==100 provides about a 5% performance boost for ** common workloads. */ #include "sqliteInt.h" typedef struct PCache1 PCache1; typedef struct PgHdr1 PgHdr1; typedef struct PgFreeslot PgFreeslot; typedef struct PGroup PGroup; /* ** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following ** structure. A buffer of PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated ** directly before this structure and is used to cache the page content. ** ** When reading a corrupt database file, it is possible that SQLite might ** read a few bytes (no more than 16 bytes) past the end of the page buffer. ** It will only read past the end of the page buffer, never write. This ** object is positioned immediately after the page buffer to serve as an ** overrun area, so that overreads are harmless. ** ** Variables isBulkLocal and isAnchor were once type "u8". That works, ** but causes a 2-byte gap in the structure for most architectures (since ** pointers must be either 4 or 8-byte aligned). As this structure is located ** in memory directly after the associated page data, if the database is ** corrupt, code at the b-tree layer may overread the page buffer and ** read part of this structure before the corruption is detected. This ** can cause a valgrind error if the uninitialized gap is accessed. Using u16 ** ensures there is no such gap, and therefore no bytes of uninitialized ** memory in the structure. ** ** The pLruNext and pLruPrev pointers form a double-linked circular list ** of all pages that are unpinned. The PGroup.lru element (which should be ** the only element on the list with PgHdr1.isAnchor set to 1) forms the ** beginning and the end of the list. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | /* ** A page is pinned if it is not on the LRU list. To be "pinned" means ** that the page is in active use and must not be deallocated. */ #define PAGE_IS_PINNED(p) ((p)->pLruNext==0) #define PAGE_IS_UNPINNED(p) ((p)->pLruNext!=0) | | | 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | /* ** A page is pinned if it is not on the LRU list. To be "pinned" means ** that the page is in active use and must not be deallocated. */ #define PAGE_IS_PINNED(p) ((p)->pLruNext==0) #define PAGE_IS_UNPINNED(p) ((p)->pLruNext!=0) /* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set ** of one or more PCaches that are able to recycle each other's unpinned ** pages when they are under memory pressure. A PGroup is an instance of ** the following object. ** ** This page cache implementation works in one of two modes: ** ** (1) Every PCache is the sole member of its own PGroup. There is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | }; /* Each page cache is an instance of the following object. Every ** open database file (including each in-memory database and each ** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which ** is an instance of this object. ** | | | | 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 | }; /* Each page cache is an instance of the following object. Every ** open database file (including each in-memory database and each ** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which ** is an instance of this object. ** ** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as ** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles. */ struct PCache1 { /* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable ** flag (bPurgeable) and the pnPurgeable pointer are all set when the ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be ** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1Cachesize() method. ** The PGroup mutex must be held when accessing nMax. */ PGroup *pGroup; /* PGroup this cache belongs to */ unsigned int *pnPurgeable; /* Pointer to pGroup->nPurgeable */ int szPage; /* Size of database content section */ int szExtra; /* sizeof(MemPage)+sizeof(PgHdr) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | /* Variables related to SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE settings. The ** szSlot, nSlot, pStart, pEnd, nReserve, and isInit values are all ** fixed at sqlite3_initialize() time and do not require mutex protection. ** The nFreeSlot and pFree values do require mutex protection. */ int isInit; /* True if initialized */ int separateCache; /* Use a new PGroup for each PCache */ | | | 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 | /* Variables related to SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE settings. The ** szSlot, nSlot, pStart, pEnd, nReserve, and isInit values are all ** fixed at sqlite3_initialize() time and do not require mutex protection. ** The nFreeSlot and pFree values do require mutex protection. */ int isInit; /* True if initialized */ int separateCache; /* Use a new PGroup for each PCache */ int nInitPage; /* Initial bulk allocation size */ int szSlot; /* Size of each free slot */ int nSlot; /* The number of pcache slots */ int nReserve; /* Try to keep nFreeSlot above this */ void *pStart, *pEnd; /* Bounds of global page cache memory */ /* Above requires no mutex. Use mutex below for variable that follow. */ sqlite3_mutex *mutex; /* Mutex for accessing the following: */ PgFreeslot *pFree; /* Free page blocks */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
260 261 262 263 264 265 266 | #endif /******************************************************************************/ /******** Page Allocation/SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE Related Functions **************/ /* | | | 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 | #endif /******************************************************************************/ /******** Page Allocation/SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE Related Functions **************/ /* ** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is ** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE ** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large ** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each. ** ** This routine is called from sqlite3_initialize() and so it is guaranteed ** to be serialized already. There is no need for further mutexing. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
330 331 332 333 334 335 336 | }while( --nBulk ); } return pCache->pFree!=0; } /* ** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer | | | | 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 | }while( --nBulk ); } return pCache->pFree!=0; } /* ** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer ** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no ** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls ** back to sqlite3Malloc(). ** ** Multiple threads can run this routine at the same time. Global variables ** in pcache1 need to be protected via mutex. */ static void *pcache1Alloc(int nByte){ void *p = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
438 439 440 441 442 443 444 | assert( pCache->pFree!=0 ); p = pCache->pFree; pCache->pFree = p->pNext; p->pNext = 0; }else{ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT /* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This | | | 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 | assert( pCache->pFree!=0 ); p = pCache->pFree; pCache->pFree = p->pNext; p->pNext = 0; }else{ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT /* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that ** this mutex is not held. */ assert( pcache1.separateCache==0 ); assert( pCache->pGroup==&pcache1.grp ); pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); #endif if( benignMalloc ){ sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); } pPg = pcache1Alloc(pCache->szAlloc); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
565 566 567 568 569 570 571 | sqlite3_free(p->apHash); p->apHash = apNew; p->nHash = nNew; } } /* | | | 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 | sqlite3_free(p->apHash); p->apHash = apNew; p->nHash = nNew; } } /* ** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the ** PGroup LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the PGroup ** LRU list, then this function is a no-op. ** ** The PGroup mutex must be held when this function is called. */ static PgHdr1 *pcache1PinPage(PgHdr1 *pPage){ assert( pPage!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
590 591 592 593 594 595 596 | assert( pPage->pCache->pGroup->lru.isAnchor==1 ); pPage->pCache->nRecyclable--; return pPage; } /* | | | 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | assert( pPage->pCache->pGroup->lru.isAnchor==1 ); pPage->pCache->nRecyclable--; return pPage; } /* ** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table ** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in. ** Also free the page if freePage is true. ** ** The PGroup mutex must be held when this function is called. */ static void pcache1RemoveFromHash(PgHdr1 *pPage, int freeFlag){ unsigned int h; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
633 634 635 636 637 638 639 | if( pCache->nPage==0 && pCache->pBulk ){ sqlite3_free(pCache->pBulk); pCache->pBulk = pCache->pFree = 0; } } /* | | | | 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 | if( pCache->nPage==0 && pCache->pBulk ){ sqlite3_free(pCache->pBulk); pCache->pBulk = pCache->pFree = 0; } } /* ** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value) ** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this ** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded. ** ** The PCache mutex must be held when this function is called. */ static void pcache1TruncateUnsafe( PCache1 *pCache, /* The cache to truncate */ unsigned int iLimit /* Drop pages with this pgno or larger */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
666 667 668 669 670 671 672 | h = pCache->nHash/2; iStop = h - 1; } for(;;){ PgHdr1 **pp; PgHdr1 *pPage; assert( h<pCache->nHash ); | | | 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 | h = pCache->nHash/2; iStop = h - 1; } for(;;){ PgHdr1 **pp; PgHdr1 *pPage; assert( h<pCache->nHash ); pp = &pCache->apHash[h]; while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){ if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){ pCache->nPage--; *pp = pPage->pNext; if( PAGE_IS_UNPINNED(pPage) ) pcache1PinPage(pPage); pcache1FreePage(pPage); }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
705 706 707 708 709 710 711 | ** private PGroup (mode-1). pcache1.separateCache is false if the single ** PGroup in pcache1.grp is used for all page caches (mode-2). ** ** * Always use a unified cache (mode-2) if ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT ** ** * Use a unified cache in single-threaded applications that have ** configured a start-time buffer for use as page-cache memory using | | | 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 | ** private PGroup (mode-1). pcache1.separateCache is false if the single ** PGroup in pcache1.grp is used for all page caches (mode-2). ** ** * Always use a unified cache (mode-2) if ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT ** ** * Use a unified cache in single-threaded applications that have ** configured a start-time buffer for use as page-cache memory using ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL ** pBuf argument. ** ** * Otherwise use separate caches (mode-1) */ #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT) pcache1.separateCache = 0; #elif SQLITE_THREADSAFE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
740 741 742 743 744 745 746 | pcache1.grp.mxPinned = 10; pcache1.isInit = 1; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method. | | | 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 | pcache1.grp.mxPinned = 10; pcache1.isInit = 1; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method. ** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does ** not need to be freed. */ static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); assert( pcache1.isInit!=0 ); memset(&pcache1, 0, sizeof(pcache1)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
803 804 805 806 807 808 809 | pCache = 0; } } return (sqlite3_pcache *)pCache; } /* | | | 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 | pCache = 0; } } return (sqlite3_pcache *)pCache; } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method. ** ** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache. */ static void pcache1Cachesize(sqlite3_pcache *p, int nMax){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; u32 n; assert( nMax>=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
828 829 830 831 832 833 834 | pCache->n90pct = pCache->nMax*9/10; pcache1EnforceMaxPage(pCache); pcache1LeaveMutex(pGroup); } } /* | | | | | | 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 | pCache->n90pct = pCache->nMax*9/10; pcache1EnforceMaxPage(pCache); pcache1LeaveMutex(pGroup); } } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method. ** ** Free up as much memory as possible. */ static void pcache1Shrink(sqlite3_pcache *p){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1*)p; if( pCache->bPurgeable ){ PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup; unsigned int savedMaxPage; pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup); savedMaxPage = pGroup->nMaxPage; pGroup->nMaxPage = 0; pcache1EnforceMaxPage(pCache); pGroup->nMaxPage = savedMaxPage; pcache1LeaveMutex(pGroup); } } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method. */ static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){ int n; PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1*)p; pcache1EnterMutex(pCache->pGroup); n = pCache->nPage; pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); return n; } /* ** Implement steps 3, 4, and 5 of the pcache1Fetch() algorithm described ** in the header of the pcache1Fetch() procedure. ** ** This steps are broken out into a separate procedure because they are ** usually not needed, and by avoiding the stack initialization required ** for these steps, the main pcache1Fetch() procedure can run faster. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( PCache1 *pCache, unsigned int iKey, int createFlag ){ unsigned int nPinned; PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup; PgHdr1 *pPage = 0; /* Step 3: Abort if createFlag is 1 but the cache is nearly full */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
911 912 913 914 915 916 917 | pcache1FreePage(pPage); pPage = 0; }else{ pGroup->nPurgeable -= (pOther->bPurgeable - pCache->bPurgeable); } } | | | | 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 | pcache1FreePage(pPage); pPage = 0; }else{ pGroup->nPurgeable -= (pOther->bPurgeable - pCache->bPurgeable); } } /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found, ** attempt to allocate a new one. */ if( !pPage ){ pPage = pcache1AllocPage(pCache, createFlag==1); } if( pPage ){ unsigned int h = iKey % pCache->nHash; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
937 938 939 940 941 942 943 | pCache->iMaxKey = iKey; } } return pPage; } /* | | | | | | | | | | 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 | pCache->iMaxKey = iKey; } } return pPage; } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method. ** ** Fetch a page by key value. ** ** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on ** the value of the createFlag argument. 0 means do not allocate a new ** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2 ** means to try really hard to allocate a new page. ** ** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory ** database) there is really no difference between createFlag 1 and 2. So ** the calling function (pcache.c) will never have a createFlag of 1 on ** a non-purgeable cache. ** ** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page, ** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2). ** ** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a ** copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned. ** ** 2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is ** returned. ** ** 3. If createFlag is 1, and the page is not already in the cache, then ** return NULL (do not allocate a new page) if any of the following ** conditions are true: ** ** (a) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than ** PCache1.nMax, or ** ** (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than ** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of ** nMin for all other purgeable caches, or ** ** 4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked ** as purgeable, and if one of the following is true: ** ** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already ** PCache1.nMax, or ** ** (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is ** already equal to or greater than the sum of nMax for all ** purgeable caches, ** ** (c) The system is under memory pressure and wants to avoid ** unnecessary pages cache entry allocations ** ** then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right ** size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and ** proceed to step 5. ** ** 5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer. ** ** There are two versions of this routine. pcache1FetchWithMutex() is ** the general case. pcache1FetchNoMutex() is a faster implementation for ** the common case where pGroup->mutex is NULL. The pcache1Fetch() wrapper ** invokes the appropriate routine. */ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex( sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iKey, int createFlag ){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PgHdr1 *pPage = 0; /* Step 1: Search the hash table for an existing entry. */ pPage = pCache->apHash[iKey % pCache->nHash]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 | return pcache1FetchStage2(pCache, iKey, createFlag); }else{ return 0; } } #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex( | | | | | | 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 | return pcache1FetchStage2(pCache, iKey, createFlag); }else{ return 0; } } #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex( sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iKey, int createFlag ){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PgHdr1 *pPage; pcache1EnterMutex(pCache->pGroup); pPage = pcache1FetchNoMutex(p, iKey, createFlag); assert( pPage==0 || pCache->iMaxKey>=iKey ); pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); return pPage; } #endif static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch( sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iKey, int createFlag ){ #if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; #endif assert( offsetof(PgHdr1,page)==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 | /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xUnpin method. ** ** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling). */ static void pcache1Unpin( | | | | | | | | 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 | /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xUnpin method. ** ** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling). */ static void pcache1Unpin( sqlite3_pcache *p, sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg, int reuseUnlikely ){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg; PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup; assert( pPage->pCache==pCache ); pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup); /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already ** part of the PGroup LRU list. */ assert( pPage->pLruNext==0 ); assert( PAGE_IS_PINNED(pPage) ); if( reuseUnlikely || pGroup->nPurgeable>pGroup->nMaxPage ){ pcache1RemoveFromHash(pPage, 1); }else{ /* Add the page to the PGroup LRU list. */ PgHdr1 **ppFirst = &pGroup->lru.pLruNext; pPage->pLruPrev = &pGroup->lru; (pPage->pLruNext = *ppFirst)->pLruPrev = pPage; *ppFirst = pPage; pCache->nRecyclable++; } pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method. */ static void pcache1Rekey( sqlite3_pcache *p, sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg, unsigned int iOld, unsigned int iNew ){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg; PgHdr1 **pp; unsigned int hOld, hNew; assert( pPage->iKey==iOld ); assert( pPage->pCache==pCache ); assert( iOld!=iNew ); /* The page number really is changing */ pcache1EnterMutex(pCache->pGroup); assert( pcache1FetchNoMutex(p, iOld, 0)==pPage ); /* pPg really is iOld */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 | pCache->iMaxKey = iNew; } pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); } /* | | | | 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 | pCache->iMaxKey = iNew; } pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method. ** ** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to ** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number ** equal to or greater than iLimit are implicitly unpinned. */ static void pcache1Truncate(sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iLimit){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; pcache1EnterMutex(pCache->pGroup); if( iLimit<=pCache->iMaxKey ){ pcache1TruncateUnsafe(pCache, iLimit); pCache->iMaxKey = iLimit-1; } pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); } /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method. ** ** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create(). */ static void pcache1Destroy(sqlite3_pcache *p){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup; assert( pCache->bPurgeable || (pCache->nMax==0 && pCache->nMin==0) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT /* ** This function is called to free superfluous dynamically allocated memory ** held by the pager system. Memory in use by any SQLite pager allocated ** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed. ** ** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has | | | 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT /* ** This function is called to free superfluous dynamically allocated memory ** held by the pager system. Memory in use by any SQLite pager allocated ** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed. ** ** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has ** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number ** of bytes of memory released. */ int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){ int nFree = 0; assert( sqlite3_mutex_notheld(pcache1.grp.mutex) ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_notheld(pcache1.mutex) ); if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/pragma.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | #endif /*************************************************************************** ** The "pragma.h" include file is an automatically generated file that ** that includes the PragType_XXXX macro definitions and the aPragmaName[] ** object. This ensures that the aPragmaName[] table is arranged in ** lexicographical order to facility a binary search of the pragma name. | | | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 | #endif /*************************************************************************** ** The "pragma.h" include file is an automatically generated file that ** that includes the PragType_XXXX macro definitions and the aPragmaName[] ** object. This ensures that the aPragmaName[] table is arranged in ** lexicographical order to facility a binary search of the pragma name. ** Do not edit pragma.h directly. Edit and rerun the script in at ** ../tool/mkpragmatab.tcl. */ #include "pragma.h" /* ** Interpret the given string as a safety level. Return 0 for OFF, ** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA. Return 1 for an empty or ** unrecognized string argument. The FULL and EXTRA option is disallowed ** if the omitFull parameter it 1. ** ** Note that the values returned are one less that the values that ** should be passed into sqlite3BtreeSetSafetyLevel(). The is done ** to support legacy SQL code. The safety level used to be boolean ** and older scripts may have used numbers 0 for OFF and 1 for ON. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | return PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* ** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value. ** | | | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | return PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* ** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value. ** ** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are ** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively. */ static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){ int i; if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(z, "none") ) return BTREE_AUTOVACUUM_NONE; if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(z, "full") ) return BTREE_AUTOVACUUM_FULL; if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(z, "incremental") ) return BTREE_AUTOVACUUM_INCR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | static const char *actionName(u8 action){ const char *zName; switch( action ){ case OE_SetNull: zName = "SET NULL"; break; case OE_SetDflt: zName = "SET DEFAULT"; break; case OE_Cascade: zName = "CASCADE"; break; case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT"; break; | | | 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 | static const char *actionName(u8 action){ const char *zName; switch( action ){ case OE_SetNull: zName = "SET NULL"; break; case OE_SetDflt: zName = "SET DEFAULT"; break; case OE_Cascade: zName = "CASCADE"; break; case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT"; break; default: zName = "NO ACTION"; assert( action==OE_None ); break; } return zName; } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
303 304 305 306 307 308 309 | */ static void pragmaFunclistLine( Vdbe *v, /* The prepared statement being created */ FuncDef *p, /* A particular function definition */ int isBuiltin, /* True if this is a built-in function */ int showInternFuncs /* True if showing internal functions */ ){ | | | 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 | */ static void pragmaFunclistLine( Vdbe *v, /* The prepared statement being created */ FuncDef *p, /* A particular function definition */ int isBuiltin, /* True if this is a built-in function */ int showInternFuncs /* True if showing internal functions */ ){ u32 mask = SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC | SQLITE_DIRECTONLY | SQLITE_SUBTYPE | SQLITE_INNOCUOUS | SQLITE_FUNC_INTERNAL ; if( showInternFuncs ) mask = 0xffffffff; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
325 326 327 328 329 330 331 | assert( strcmp(azEnc[SQLITE_UTF16BE],"utf16be")==0 ); if( p->xSFunc==0 ) continue; if( (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_INTERNAL)!=0 && showInternFuncs==0 ){ continue; | | | 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 | assert( strcmp(azEnc[SQLITE_UTF16BE],"utf16be")==0 ); if( p->xSFunc==0 ) continue; if( (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_INTERNAL)!=0 && showInternFuncs==0 ){ continue; } if( p->xValue!=0 ){ zType = "w"; }else if( p->xFinalize!=0 ){ zType = "a"; }else{ zType = "s"; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfPos, 1, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2, 1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Halt); return addr; } /* | | | | 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 | addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfPos, 1, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2, 1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Halt); return addr; } /* ** Process a pragma statement. ** ** Pragmas are of this form: ** ** PRAGMA [schema.]id [= value] ** ** The identifier might also be a string. The value is a string, and ** identifier, or a number. If minusFlag is true, then the value is ** a number that was preceded by a minus sign. ** ** If the left side is "database.id" then pId1 is the database name ** and pId2 is the id. If the left side is just "id" then pId1 is the ** id and pId2 is any empty string. */ void sqlite3Pragma( Parse *pParse, Token *pId1, /* First part of [schema.]id field */ Token *pId2, /* Second part of [schema.]id field, or NULL */ Token *pValue, /* Token for <value>, or NULL */ int minusFlag /* True if a '-' sign preceded <value> */ ){ char *zLeft = 0; /* Nul-terminated UTF-8 string <id> */ char *zRight = 0; /* Nul-terminated UTF-8 string <value>, or NULL */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
403 404 405 406 407 408 409 | /* Interpret the [schema.] part of the pragma statement. iDb is the ** index of the database this pragma is being applied to in db.aDb[]. */ iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pId1, pId2, &pId); if( iDb<0 ) return; pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; | | | | 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 | /* Interpret the [schema.] part of the pragma statement. iDb is the ** index of the database this pragma is being applied to in db.aDb[]. */ iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pId1, pId2, &pId); if( iDb<0 ) return; pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the ** pragma, make sure it is open. */ if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){ return; } zLeft = sqlite3NameFromToken(db, pId); if( !zLeft ) return; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
476 477 478 479 480 481 482 | /* Make sure the database schema is loaded if the pragma requires that */ if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NeedSchema)!=0 ){ if( sqlite3ReadSchema(pParse) ) goto pragma_out; } /* Register the result column names for pragmas that return results */ | | | | 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 | /* Make sure the database schema is loaded if the pragma requires that */ if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NeedSchema)!=0 ){ if( sqlite3ReadSchema(pParse) ) goto pragma_out; } /* Register the result column names for pragmas that return results */ if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0 && ((pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1)==0 || zRight==0) ){ setPragmaResultColumnNames(v, pPragma); } /* Jump to the appropriate pragma handler */ switch( pPragma->ePragTyp ){ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED) /* ** PRAGMA [schema.]default_cache_size ** PRAGMA [schema.]default_cache_size=N ** ** The first form reports the current persistent setting for the ** page cache size. The value returned is the maximum number of |
︙ | ︙ | |||
600 601 602 603 604 605 606 | } /* ** PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count ** PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count=N ** ** The first form reports the current setting for the | | | 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 | } /* ** PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count ** PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count=N ** ** The first form reports the current setting for the ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The ** second form attempts to change this setting. Both ** forms return the current setting. ** ** The absolute value of N is used. This is undocumented and might ** change. The only purpose is to provide an easy way to test ** the sqlite3AbsInt32() function. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
767 768 769 770 771 772 773 | /* Call SetAutoVacuum() to set initialize the internal auto and ** incr-vacuum flags. This is required in case this connection ** creates the database file. It is important that it is created ** as an auto-vacuum capable db. */ rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){ | | | 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 | /* Call SetAutoVacuum() to set initialize the internal auto and ** incr-vacuum flags. This is required in case this connection ** creates the database file. It is important that it is created ** as an auto-vacuum capable db. */ rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){ /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or ** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database ** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates ** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database. */ static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2); static const VdbeOpList setMeta6[] = { { OP_Transaction, 0, 1, 0}, /* 0 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
850 851 852 853 854 855 856 | /* ** PRAGMA [schema.]cache_spill ** PRAGMA cache_spill=BOOLEAN ** PRAGMA [schema.]cache_spill=N ** ** The first form reports the current local setting for the ** page cache spill size. The second form turns cache spill on | | | | 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 | /* ** PRAGMA [schema.]cache_spill ** PRAGMA cache_spill=BOOLEAN ** PRAGMA [schema.]cache_spill=N ** ** The first form reports the current local setting for the ** page cache spill size. The second form turns cache spill on ** or off. When turning cache spill on, the size is set to the ** current cache_size. The third form sets a spill size that ** may be different form the cache size. ** If N is positive then that is the ** number of pages in the cache. If N is negative, then the ** number of pages is adjusted so that the cache uses -N kibibytes ** of memory. ** ** If the number of cache_spill pages is less then the number of ** cache_size pages, no spilling occurs until the page count exceeds ** the number of cache_size pages. ** ** The cache_spill=BOOLEAN setting applies to all attached schemas, ** not just the schema specified. */ case PragTyp_CACHE_SPILL: { assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) ); if( !zRight ){ returnSingleInt(v, (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 : sqlite3BtreeSetSpillSize(pDb->pBt,0)); }else{ int size = 1; if( sqlite3GetInt32(zRight, &size) ){ sqlite3BtreeSetSpillSize(pDb->pBt, size); } if( sqlite3GetBoolean(zRight, size!=0) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 | ** */ case PragTyp_LOCK_PROXY_FILE: { if( !zRight ){ Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt); char *proxy_file_path = NULL; sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager); | | | | | | | | 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 | ** */ case PragTyp_LOCK_PROXY_FILE: { if( !zRight ){ Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt); char *proxy_file_path = NULL; sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager); sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE, &proxy_file_path); returnSingleText(v, proxy_file_path); }else{ Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt); sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager); int res; if( zRight[0] ){ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, zRight); } else { res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, NULL); } if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "failed to set lock proxy file"); goto pragma_out; } } break; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ /* ** PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous ** PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL|EXTRA ** ** Return or set the local value of the synchronous flag. Changing ** the local value does not make changes to the disk file and the ** default value will be restored the next time the database is ** opened. */ case PragTyp_SYNCHRONOUS: { if( !zRight ){ returnSingleInt(v, pDb->safety_level-1); }else{ if( !db->autoCommit ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction"); }else if( iDb!=1 ){ int iLevel = (getSafetyLevel(zRight,0,1)+1) & PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_MASK; if( iLevel==0 ) iLevel = 1; pDb->safety_level = iLevel; pDb->bSyncSet = 1; setAllPagerFlags(db); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 | /* IMP: R-60817-01178 If the argument is "RESET" then schema ** writing is disabled (as with "PRAGMA writable_schema=OFF") and, ** in addition, the schema is reloaded. */ sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); } } | | | 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 | /* IMP: R-60817-01178 If the argument is "RESET" then schema ** writing is disabled (as with "PRAGMA writable_schema=OFF") and, ** in addition, the schema is reloaded. */ sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); } } /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL ** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all ** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Expire); setAllPagerFlags(db); } break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 | FKey *pFK; Table *pTab; pTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, zRight, zDb); if( pTab && IsOrdinaryTable(pTab) ){ pFK = pTab->u.tab.pFKey; if( pFK ){ int iTabDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); | | | 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 | FKey *pFK; Table *pTab; pTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, zRight, zDb); if( pTab && IsOrdinaryTable(pTab) ){ pFK = pTab->u.tab.pFKey; if( pFK ){ int iTabDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); int i = 0; pParse->nMem = 8; sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iTabDb); while(pFK){ int j; for(j=0; j<pFK->nCol; j++){ sqlite3VdbeMultiLoad(v, 1, "iissssss", i, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 | if( pParent ){ x = sqlite3FkLocateIndex(pParse, pParent, pFK, &pIdx, &aiCols); assert( x==0 || db->mallocFailed ); } addrOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); /* Generate code to read the child key values into registers | | | | 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 | if( pParent ){ x = sqlite3FkLocateIndex(pParse, pParent, pFK, &pIdx, &aiCols); assert( x==0 || db->mallocFailed ); } addrOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); /* Generate code to read the child key values into registers ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in ** this case. */ sqlite3TouchRegister(pParse, regRow + pFK->nCol); for(j=0; j<pFK->nCol; j++){ int iCol = aiCols ? aiCols[j] : pFK->aCol[j].iFrom; sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, 0, iCol, regRow+j); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, regRow+j, addrOk); VdbeCoverage(v); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 | /* PRAGMA integrity_check ** PRAGMA integrity_check(N) ** PRAGMA quick_check ** PRAGMA quick_check(N) ** ** Verify the integrity of the database. ** | | | | | 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 | /* PRAGMA integrity_check ** PRAGMA integrity_check(N) ** PRAGMA quick_check ** PRAGMA quick_check(N) ** ** Verify the integrity of the database. ** ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of ** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption ** without the overhead of cross-checking indexes. Quick_check ** is linear time whereas integrity_check is O(NlogN). ** ** The maximum number of errors is 100 by default. A different default ** can be specified using a numeric parameter N. ** ** Or, the parameter N can be the name of a table. In that case, only ** the one table named is verified. The freelist is only verified if ** the named table is "sqlite_schema" (or one of its aliases). ** ** All schemas are checked by default. To check just a single |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 | pPk = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); r2 = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, pPk->nKeyCol); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Null, 1, r2, r2+pPk->nKeyCol-1); } sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenRead, 0, 1, 0, &iDataCur, &iIdxCur); /* reg[7] counts the number of entries in the table. | | | 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 | pPk = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); r2 = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, pPk->nKeyCol); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Null, 1, r2, r2+pPk->nKeyCol-1); } sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenRead, 0, 1, 0, &iDataCur, &iIdxCur); /* reg[7] counts the number of entries in the table. ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, 7); for(j=0, pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext, j++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, 8+j); /* index entries counter */ } assert( pParse->nMem>=8+j ); assert( sqlite3NoTempsInRange(pParse,1,7+j) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 | mxCol = -1; for(j=0; j<pTab->nCol; j++){ if( (pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL)==0 ) mxCol++; } if( mxCol==pTab->iPKey ) mxCol--; }else{ /* COLFLAG_VIRTUAL columns are not included in the WITHOUT ROWID | | | 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 | mxCol = -1; for(j=0; j<pTab->nCol; j++){ if( (pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL)==0 ) mxCol++; } if( mxCol==pTab->iPKey ) mxCol--; }else{ /* COLFLAG_VIRTUAL columns are not included in the WITHOUT ROWID ** PK index column-count, so there is no need to account for them ** in this case. */ mxCol = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab)->nColumn-1; } if( mxCol>=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iDataCur, mxCol, 3); sqlite3VdbeTypeofColumn(v, 3); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 | /* OP_IsType does not detect NaN values in the database file ** which should be treated as a NULL. So if the header type ** is REAL, we have to load the actual data using OP_Column ** to reliably determine if the value is a NULL. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, p1, p3, 3); jmp3 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, 3, labelOk); VdbeCoverage(v); | | | 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 | /* OP_IsType does not detect NaN values in the database file ** which should be treated as a NULL. So if the header type ** is REAL, we have to load the actual data using OP_Column ** to reliably determine if the value is a NULL. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, p1, p3, 3); jmp3 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, 3, labelOk); VdbeCoverage(v); } zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "NULL value in %s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zCnName); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 3, 0, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC); if( doTypeCheck ){ sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, labelError); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp2); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp3); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 | int addrCkOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); char *zErr; int k; pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1; for(k=pCheck->nExpr-1; k>0; k--){ sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pCheck->a[k].pExpr, addrCkFault, 0); } | | | 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 | int addrCkOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); char *zErr; int k; pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1; for(k=pCheck->nExpr-1; k>0; k--){ sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pCheck->a[k].pExpr, addrCkFault, 0); } sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrCkFault); pParse->iSelfTab = 0; zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CHECK constraint failed in %s", pTab->zName); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 3, 0, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC); integrityCheckResultRow(v); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 | sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, label6); sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, 3, "row "); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Concat, 7, 3, 3); sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, 4, " values differ from index "); sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, jmp5-1); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp6); } | | | 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 | sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, label6); sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, 3, "row "); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Concat, 7, 3, 3); sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, 4, " values differ from index "); sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, jmp5-1); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp6); } /* For UNIQUE indexes, verify that only one entry exists with the ** current key. The entry is unique if (1) any column is NULL ** or (2) the next entry has a different key */ if( IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) ){ int uniqOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); int jmp6; for(kk=0; kk<pIdx->nKeyCol; kk++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 | integrityCheckResultRow(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr); } if( pPk ){ sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r2, pPk->nKeyCol); } } | | | 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 | integrityCheckResultRow(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr); } if( pPk ){ sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r2, pPk->nKeyCol); } } } } { static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2); static const VdbeOpList endCode[] = { { OP_AddImm, 1, 0, 0}, /* 0 */ { OP_IfNotZero, 1, 4, 0}, /* 1 */ { OP_String8, 0, 3, 0}, /* 2 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 | ** database. If the database is not initialized, it is initialized now. ** ** The second form of this pragma is a no-op if the main database file ** has not already been initialized. In this case it sets the default ** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file ** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the ** default text encoding for the existing database is used. | | | 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 | ** database. If the database is not initialized, it is initialized now. ** ** The second form of this pragma is a no-op if the main database file ** has not already been initialized. In this case it sets the default ** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file ** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the ** default text encoding for the existing database is used. ** ** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are ** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If ** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH ** is executed, this is done before the ATTACH operation. ** ** In the second form this pragma sets the text encoding to be used in ** new database files created using this database handle. It is only |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 | ** after accumulating N frames in the log. Or query for the current value ** of N. */ case PragTyp_WAL_AUTOCHECKPOINT: { if( zRight ){ sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight)); } | | | | 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 | ** after accumulating N frames in the log. Or query for the current value ** of N. */ case PragTyp_WAL_AUTOCHECKPOINT: { if( zRight ){ sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight)); } returnSingleInt(v, db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ? SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(db->pWalArg) : 0); } break; #endif /* ** PRAGMA shrink_memory |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 | ** 0x0001 Debugging mode. Do not actually perform any optimizations ** but instead return one line of text for each optimization ** that would have been done. Off by default. ** ** 0x0002 Run ANALYZE on tables that might benefit. On by default. ** See below for additional information. ** | | | | 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 | ** 0x0001 Debugging mode. Do not actually perform any optimizations ** but instead return one line of text for each optimization ** that would have been done. Off by default. ** ** 0x0002 Run ANALYZE on tables that might benefit. On by default. ** See below for additional information. ** ** 0x0004 (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance ** information from the current session in the ** database file so that it will be available to "optimize" ** pragmas run by future database connections. ** ** 0x0008 (Not yet implemented) Create indexes that might have ** been helpful to recent queries ** ** The default MASK is and always shall be 0xfffe. 0xfffe means perform all ** of the optimizations listed above except Debug Mode, including new ** optimizations that have not yet been invented. If new optimizations are ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default ** optimizations will have bitmasks of 0x10000 or larger. ** ** DETERMINATION OF WHEN TO RUN ANALYZE ** ** In the current implementation, a table is analyzed if only if all of ** the following are true: ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 | case PragTyp_OPTIMIZE: { int iDbLast; /* Loop termination point for the schema loop */ int iTabCur; /* Cursor for a table whose size needs checking */ HashElem *k; /* Loop over tables of a schema */ Schema *pSchema; /* The current schema */ Table *pTab; /* A table in the schema */ Index *pIdx; /* An index of the table */ | | | 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 | case PragTyp_OPTIMIZE: { int iDbLast; /* Loop termination point for the schema loop */ int iTabCur; /* Cursor for a table whose size needs checking */ HashElem *k; /* Loop over tables of a schema */ Schema *pSchema; /* The current schema */ Table *pTab; /* A table in the schema */ Index *pIdx; /* An index of the table */ LogEst szThreshold; /* Size threshold above which reanalysis needed */ char *zSubSql; /* SQL statement for the OP_SqlExec opcode */ u32 opMask; /* Mask of operations to perform */ if( zRight ){ opMask = (u32)sqlite3Atoi(zRight); if( (opMask & 0x02)==0 ) break; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 | if( !pIdx->hasStat1 ){ szThreshold = 0; /* Always analyze if any index lacks statistics */ break; } } if( szThreshold ){ sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iTabCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead); | | | 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 | if( !pIdx->hasStat1 ){ szThreshold = 0; /* Always analyze if any index lacks statistics */ break; } } if( szThreshold ){ sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iTabCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2+(opMask&1), szThreshold); VdbeCoverage(v); } zSubSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "ANALYZE \"%w\".\"%w\"", db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, pTab->zName); if( opMask & 0x01 ){ int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 | Btree *pBt; const char *zState = "unknown"; int j; if( db->aDb[i].zDbSName==0 ) continue; pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){ zState = "closed"; | | | 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 | Btree *pBt; const char *zState = "unknown"; int j; if( db->aDb[i].zDbSName==0 ) continue; pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){ zState = "closed"; }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0, SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){ zState = azLockName[j]; } sqlite3VdbeMultiLoad(v, 1, "ss", db->aDb[i].zDbSName, zState); } break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 | #endif } /* End of the PRAGMA switch */ /* The following block is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. Its only ** purpose is to execute assert() statements to verify that if the ** PragFlg_NoColumns1 flag is set and the caller specified an argument | | | 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 | #endif } /* End of the PRAGMA switch */ /* The following block is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. Its only ** purpose is to execute assert() statements to verify that if the ** PragFlg_NoColumns1 flag is set and the caller specified an argument ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow ** instructions to the VM. */ if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1) && zRight ){ sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(v); } pragma_out: sqlite3DbFree(db, zLeft); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 | struct PragmaVtabCursor { sqlite3_vtab_cursor base; /* Base class. Must be first */ sqlite3_stmt *pPragma; /* The pragma statement to run */ sqlite_int64 iRowid; /* Current rowid */ char *azArg[2]; /* Value of the argument and schema */ }; | | | 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 | struct PragmaVtabCursor { sqlite3_vtab_cursor base; /* Base class. Must be first */ sqlite3_stmt *pPragma; /* The pragma statement to run */ sqlite_int64 iRowid; /* Current rowid */ char *azArg[2]; /* Value of the argument and schema */ }; /* ** Pragma virtual table module xConnect method. */ static int pragmaVtabConnect( sqlite3 *db, void *pAux, int argc, const char *const*argv, sqlite3_vtab **ppVtab, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 | *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("%s", sqlite3_errmsg(db)); } *ppVtab = (sqlite3_vtab*)pTab; return rc; } | | | 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 | *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("%s", sqlite3_errmsg(db)); } *ppVtab = (sqlite3_vtab*)pTab; return rc; } /* ** Pragma virtual table module xDisconnect method. */ static int pragmaVtabDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ PragmaVtab *pTab = (PragmaVtab*)pVtab; sqlite3_free(pTab); return SQLITE_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 | rc = sqlite3_finalize(pCsr->pPragma); pCsr->pPragma = 0; pragmaVtabCursorClear(pCsr); } return rc; } | | | | 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 | rc = sqlite3_finalize(pCsr->pPragma); pCsr->pPragma = 0; pragmaVtabCursorClear(pCsr); } return rc; } /* ** Pragma virtual table module xFilter method. */ static int pragmaVtabFilter( sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, int idxNum, const char *idxStr, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor; PragmaVtab *pTab = (PragmaVtab*)(pVtabCursor->pVtab); int rc; int i, j; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 | */ static int pragmaVtabEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){ PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor; return (pCsr->pPragma==0); } /* The xColumn method simply returns the corresponding column from | | | | | | 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 | */ static int pragmaVtabEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){ PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor; return (pCsr->pPragma==0); } /* The xColumn method simply returns the corresponding column from ** the PRAGMA. */ static int pragmaVtabColumn( sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i ){ PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor; PragmaVtab *pTab = (PragmaVtab*)(pVtabCursor->pVtab); if( i<pTab->iHidden ){ sqlite3_result_value(ctx, sqlite3_column_value(pCsr->pPragma, i)); }else{ sqlite3_result_text(ctx, pCsr->azArg[i-pTab->iHidden],-1,SQLITE_TRANSIENT); } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Pragma virtual table module xRowid method. */ static int pragmaVtabRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *p){ PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor; *p = pCsr->iRowid; return SQLITE_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/prepare.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
604 605 606 607 608 609 610 | /* ** Add a new cleanup operation to a Parser. The cleanup should happen when ** the parser object is destroyed. But, beware: the cleanup might happen ** immediately. ** ** Use this mechanism for uncommon cleanups. There is a higher setup | | | 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 | /* ** Add a new cleanup operation to a Parser. The cleanup should happen when ** the parser object is destroyed. But, beware: the cleanup might happen ** immediately. ** ** Use this mechanism for uncommon cleanups. There is a higher setup ** cost for this mechanism (an extra malloc), so it should not be used ** for common cleanups that happen on most calls. But for less ** common cleanups, we save a single NULL-pointer comparison in ** sqlite3ParseObjectReset(), which reduces the total CPU cycle count. ** ** If a memory allocation error occurs, then the cleanup happens immediately. ** When either SQLITE_DEBUG or SQLITE_COVERAGE_TEST are defined, the ** pParse->earlyCleanup flag is set in that case. Calling code show verify |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/resolve.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
162 163 164 165 166 167 168 | Table *pExTab; n = pExpr->iColumn; assert( ExprUseYTab(pExpr) ); pExTab = pExpr->y.pTab; assert( pExTab!=0 ); if( (pExTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated)!=0 | | | 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | Table *pExTab; n = pExpr->iColumn; assert( ExprUseYTab(pExpr) ); pExTab = pExpr->y.pTab; assert( pExTab!=0 ); if( (pExTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated)!=0 && (pExTab->aCol[n].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)!=0 ){ testcase( pExTab->nCol==BMS-1 ); testcase( pExTab->nCol==BMS ); return pExTab->nCol>=BMS ? ALLBITS : MASKBIT(pExTab->nCol)-1; }else{ testcase( n==BMS-1 ); testcase( n==BMS ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | if( sqlite3StrICmp(zTab+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ) return 1; } return 0; } /* ** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up | | | 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 | if( sqlite3StrICmp(zTab+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ) return 1; } return 0; } /* ** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up ** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr ** expression node refer back to that source column. The following changes ** are made to pExpr: ** ** pExpr->iDb Set the index in db->aDb[] of the database X ** (even if X is implied). ** pExpr->iTable Set to the cursor number for the table obtained ** from pSrcList. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
450 451 452 453 454 455 456 | ExprSetProperty(pExpr, EP_CanBeNull); } pSchema = pExpr->y.pTab->pSchema; } } /* if( pSrcList ) */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT) | | | 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 | ExprSetProperty(pExpr, EP_CanBeNull); } pSchema = pExpr->y.pTab->pSchema; } } /* if( pSrcList ) */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT) /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe ** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference. Or ** maybe it is an excluded.* from an upsert. Or maybe it is ** a reference in the RETURNING clause to a table being modified. */ if( cnt==0 && zDb==0 ){ pTab = 0; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER |
︙ | ︙ | |||
488 489 490 491 492 493 494 | if( pUpsert && sqlite3StrICmp("excluded",zTab)==0 ){ pTab = pUpsert->pUpsertSrc->a[0].pTab; pExpr->iTable = EXCLUDED_TABLE_NUMBER; } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT */ | | | 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 | if( pUpsert && sqlite3StrICmp("excluded",zTab)==0 ){ pTab = pUpsert->pUpsertSrc->a[0].pTab; pExpr->iTable = EXCLUDED_TABLE_NUMBER; } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT */ if( pTab ){ int iCol; u8 hCol = sqlite3StrIHash(zCol); pSchema = pTab->pSchema; cntTab++; for(iCol=0, pCol=pTab->aCol; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++, pCol++){ if( pCol->hName==hCol && sqlite3StrICmp(pCol->zCnName, zCol)==0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
629 630 631 632 633 634 635 | pMatch = 0; assert( zTab==0 && zDb==0 ); if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ sqlite3RenameTokenRemap(pParse, 0, (void*)pExpr); } goto lookupname_end; } | | | 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 | pMatch = 0; assert( zTab==0 && zDb==0 ); if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ sqlite3RenameTokenRemap(pParse, 0, (void*)pExpr); } goto lookupname_end; } } } /* Advance to the next name context. The loop will exit when either ** we have a match (cnt>0) or when we run out of name contexts. */ if( cnt ) break; pNC = pNC->pNext; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
820 821 822 823 824 825 826 | /* ** Report an error that an expression is not valid for some set of ** pNC->ncFlags values determined by validMask. ** ** static void notValid( ** Parse *pParse, // Leave error message here | | | 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 | /* ** Report an error that an expression is not valid for some set of ** pNC->ncFlags values determined by validMask. ** ** static void notValid( ** Parse *pParse, // Leave error message here ** NameContext *pNC, // The name context ** const char *zMsg, // Type of error ** int validMask, // Set of contexts for which prohibited ** Expr *pExpr // Invalidate this expression on error ** ){...} ** ** As an optimization, since the conditional is almost always false ** (because errors are rare), the conditional is moved outside of the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
901 902 903 904 905 906 907 | } } #endif switch( pExpr->op ){ /* The special operator TK_ROW means use the rowid for the first ** column in the FROM clause. This is used by the LIMIT and ORDER BY | | | 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 | } } #endif switch( pExpr->op ){ /* The special operator TK_ROW means use the rowid for the first ** column in the FROM clause. This is used by the LIMIT and ORDER BY ** clause processing on UPDATE and DELETE statements, and by ** UPDATE ... FROM statement processing. */ case TK_ROW: { SrcList *pSrcList = pNC->pSrcList; SrcItem *pItem; assert( pSrcList && pSrcList->nSrc>=1 ); pItem = pSrcList->a; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
937 938 939 940 941 942 943 | ** marked as correlated. */ case TK_NOTNULL: case TK_ISNULL: { int anRef[8]; NameContext *p; int i; | | | 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 | ** marked as correlated. */ case TK_NOTNULL: case TK_ISNULL: { int anRef[8]; NameContext *p; int i; for(i=0, p=pNC; p && i<ArraySize(anRef); p=p->pNext, i++){ anRef[i] = p->nRef; } sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft); if( 0==sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pExpr->pLeft) && !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ testcase( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) ); assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_IntValue) ); pExpr->u.iValue = (pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
962 963 964 965 966 967 968 | } /* A column name: ID ** Or table name and column name: ID.ID ** Or a database, table and column: ID.ID.ID ** ** The TK_ID and TK_OUT cases are combined so that there will only | | | 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 | } /* A column name: ID ** Or table name and column name: ID.ID ** Or a database, table and column: ID.ID.ID ** ** The TK_ID and TK_OUT cases are combined so that there will only ** be one call to lookupName(). Then the compiler will in-line ** lookupName() for a size reduction and performance increase. */ case TK_ID: case TK_DOT: { const char *zColumn; const char *zTable; const char *zDb; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 | ** short-hand for likelihood(X,0.0625). ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-36850-34127 The likely(X) function is short-hand ** for likelihood(X,0.9375). ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-53436-40973 The likely(X) function is equivalent ** to likelihood(X,0.9375). */ /* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625. likely() is 0.9375 */ pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 8388608 : 125829120; | | | 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 | ** short-hand for likelihood(X,0.0625). ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-36850-34127 The likely(X) function is short-hand ** for likelihood(X,0.9375). ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-53436-40973 The likely(X) function is equivalent ** to likelihood(X,0.9375). */ /* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625. likely() is 0.9375 */ pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 8388608 : 125829120; } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION { int auth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_FUNCTION, 0,pDef->zName,0); if( auth!=SQLITE_OK ){ if( auth==SQLITE_DENY ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "not authorized to use function: %#T", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 | if( 0==IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC assert( is_agg==0 || (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX) || (pDef->xValue==0 && pDef->xInverse==0) || (pDef->xValue && pDef->xInverse && pDef->xSFunc && pDef->xFinalize) ); if( pDef && pDef->xValue==0 && pWin ){ | | | | 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | if( 0==IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC assert( is_agg==0 || (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX) || (pDef->xValue==0 && pDef->xInverse==0) || (pDef->xValue && pDef->xInverse && pDef->xSFunc && pDef->xFinalize) ); if( pDef && pDef->xValue==0 && pWin ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%#T() may not be used as a window function", pExpr ); pNC->nNcErr++; }else if( (is_agg && (pNC->ncFlags & NC_AllowAgg)==0) || (is_agg && (pDef->funcFlags&SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW) && !pWin) || (is_agg && pWin && (pNC->ncFlags & NC_AllowWin)==0) ){ const char *zType; if( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW) || pWin ){ zType = "window"; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 | }else if( wrong_num_args ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,"wrong number of arguments to function %#T()", pExpr); pNC->nNcErr++; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC else if( is_agg==0 && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ | | | 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 | }else if( wrong_num_args ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,"wrong number of arguments to function %#T()", pExpr); pNC->nNcErr++; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC else if( is_agg==0 && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "FILTER may not be used with non-aggregate %#T()", pExpr ); pNC->nNcErr++; } #endif if( is_agg ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 | pExpr->op2 = 0; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pExpr->y.pWin->pFilter); } #endif pNC2 = pNC; | | | | | 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 | pExpr->op2 = 0; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pExpr->y.pWin->pFilter); } #endif pNC2 = pNC; while( pNC2 && sqlite3ReferencesSrcList(pParse, pExpr, pNC2->pSrcList)==0 ){ pExpr->op2++; pNC2 = pNC2->pNext; } assert( pDef!=0 || IN_RENAME_OBJECT ); if( pNC2 && pDef ){ assert( SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX==NC_MinMaxAgg ); assert( SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER==NC_OrderAgg ); testcase( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)!=0 ); testcase( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER)!=0 ); pNC2->ncFlags |= NC_HasAgg | ((pDef->funcFlags^SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER) & (SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX|SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER)); } } pNC->ncFlags |= savedAllowFlags; } /* FIX ME: Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return ** type of the function */ return WRC_Prune; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY case TK_SELECT: case TK_EXISTS: testcase( pExpr->op==TK_EXISTS ); #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 | testcase( pExpr->op==TK_GE ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_IS ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_BETWEEN ); sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused"); sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pExpr); } | | | 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 | testcase( pExpr->op==TK_GE ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_IS ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT ); testcase( pExpr->op==TK_BETWEEN ); sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused"); sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pExpr); } break; } } assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 || pParse->nErr!=0 ); return pParse->nErr ? WRC_Abort : WRC_Continue; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 | static void resolveOutOfRangeError( Parse *pParse, /* The error context into which to write the error */ const char *zType, /* "ORDER" or "GROUP" */ int i, /* The index (1-based) of the term out of range */ int mx, /* Largest permissible value of i */ Expr *pError /* Associate the error with the expression */ ){ | | | 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 | static void resolveOutOfRangeError( Parse *pParse, /* The error context into which to write the error */ const char *zType, /* "ORDER" or "GROUP" */ int i, /* The index (1-based) of the term out of range */ int mx, /* Largest permissible value of i */ Expr *pError /* Associate the error with the expression */ ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%r %s BY term out of range - should be " "between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx); sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pError); } /* ** Analyze the ORDER BY clause in a compound SELECT statement. Modify |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 | resolveOutOfRangeError(pParse, "ORDER", i+1, pEList->nExpr, pE); return 1; } }else{ iCol = resolveAsName(pParse, pEList, pE); if( iCol==0 ){ /* Now test if expression pE matches one of the values returned | | | 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 | resolveOutOfRangeError(pParse, "ORDER", i+1, pEList->nExpr, pE); return 1; } }else{ iCol = resolveAsName(pParse, pEList, pE); if( iCol==0 ){ /* Now test if expression pE matches one of the values returned ** by pSelect. In the usual case this is done by duplicating the ** expression, resolving any symbols in it, and then comparing ** it against each expression returned by the SELECT statement. ** Once the comparisons are finished, the duplicate expression ** is deleted. ** ** If this is running as part of an ALTER TABLE operation and ** the symbols resolve successfully, also resolve the symbols in the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 | /* Otherwise, treat the ORDER BY term as an ordinary expression */ pItem->u.x.iOrderByCol = 0; if( sqlite3ResolveExprNames(pNC, pE) ){ return 1; } for(j=0; j<pSelect->pEList->nExpr; j++){ if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0, pE, pSelect->pEList->a[j].pExpr, -1)==0 ){ | | | 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 | /* Otherwise, treat the ORDER BY term as an ordinary expression */ pItem->u.x.iOrderByCol = 0; if( sqlite3ResolveExprNames(pNC, pE) ){ return 1; } for(j=0; j<pSelect->pEList->nExpr; j++){ if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0, pE, pSelect->pEList->a[j].pExpr, -1)==0 ){ /* Since this expression is being changed into a reference ** to an identical expression in the result set, remove all Window ** objects belonging to the expression from the Select.pWin list. */ windowRemoveExprFromSelect(pSelect, pE); pItem->u.x.iOrderByCol = j+1; } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 | int isCompound; /* True if p is a compound select */ int nCompound; /* Number of compound terms processed so far */ Parse *pParse; /* Parsing context */ int i; /* Loop counter */ ExprList *pGroupBy; /* The GROUP BY clause */ Select *pLeftmost; /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ | | | 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 | int isCompound; /* True if p is a compound select */ int nCompound; /* Number of compound terms processed so far */ Parse *pParse; /* Parsing context */ int i; /* Loop counter */ ExprList *pGroupBy; /* The GROUP BY clause */ Select *pLeftmost; /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ assert( p!=0 ); if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){ return WRC_Prune; } pOuterNC = pWalker->u.pNC; pParse = pWalker->pParse; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 | if( p->selFlags & SF_Converted ){ Select *pSub = p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect; assert( p->pSrc->nSrc==1 && p->pOrderBy ); assert( pSub->pPrior && pSub->pOrderBy==0 ); pSub->pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy; p->pOrderBy = 0; } | | | 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 | if( p->selFlags & SF_Converted ){ Select *pSub = p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect; assert( p->pSrc->nSrc==1 && p->pOrderBy ); assert( pSub->pPrior && pSub->pOrderBy==0 ); pSub->pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy; p->pOrderBy = 0; } /* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries in the FROM clause */ for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){ SrcItem *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i]; if( pItem->pSelect && (pItem->pSelect->selFlags & SF_Resolved)==0 ){ int nRef = pOuterNC ? pOuterNC->nRef : 0; const char *zSavedContext = pParse->zAuthContext; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 | ** context containing the column when it resolves a name. */ if( pOuterNC ){ assert( pItem->fg.isCorrelated==0 && pOuterNC->nRef>=nRef ); pItem->fg.isCorrelated = (pOuterNC->nRef>nRef); } } } | | | | | | | 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 | ** context containing the column when it resolves a name. */ if( pOuterNC ){ assert( pItem->fg.isCorrelated==0 && pOuterNC->nRef>=nRef ); pItem->fg.isCorrelated = (pOuterNC->nRef>nRef); } } } /* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to ** resolve the result-set expression list. */ sNC.ncFlags = NC_AllowAgg|NC_AllowWin; sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pOuterNC; /* Resolve names in the result set. */ if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, p->pEList) ) return WRC_Abort; sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin; /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY ** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions. */ assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 ); pGroupBy = p->pGroupBy; if( pGroupBy || (sNC.ncFlags & NC_HasAgg)!=0 ){ assert( NC_MinMaxAgg==SF_MinMaxAgg ); assert( NC_OrderAgg==SF_OrderByReqd ); p->selFlags |= SF_Aggregate | (sNC.ncFlags&(NC_MinMaxAgg|NC_OrderAgg)); }else{ sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowAgg; } /* Add the output column list to the name-context before parsing the ** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that ** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by ** aliases in the result set. ** ** Minor point: If this is the case, then the expression will be ** re-evaluated for each reference to it. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 | } if( sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, p->pWhere) ) return WRC_Abort; /* Resolve names in table-valued-function arguments */ for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){ SrcItem *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i]; if( pItem->fg.isTabFunc | | | | | 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 | } if( sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, p->pWhere) ) return WRC_Abort; /* Resolve names in table-valued-function arguments */ for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){ SrcItem *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i]; if( pItem->fg.isTabFunc && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg) ){ return WRC_Abort; } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC if( IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){ Window *pWin; for(pWin=p->pWinDefn; pWin; pWin=pWin->pNextWin){ if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pWin->pOrderBy) || sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pWin->pPartition) ){ return WRC_Abort; } } } #endif /* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in ** outer queries */ sNC.pNext = 0; sNC.ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg|NC_AllowWin; /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from ** the sub-query back to the parent query. At this point each term ** within the ORDER BY clause has been transformed to an integer value. ** These integers will be replaced by copies of the corresponding result ** set expressions by the call to resolveOrderGroupBy() below. */ if( p->selFlags & SF_Converted ){ Select *pSub = p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect; p->pOrderBy = pSub->pOrderBy; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 | ){ return WRC_Abort; } if( db->mallocFailed ){ return WRC_Abort; } sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin; | | | | | 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 | ){ return WRC_Abort; } if( db->mallocFailed ){ return WRC_Abort; } sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin; /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure ** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions. */ if( pGroupBy ){ struct ExprList_item *pItem; if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){ return WRC_Abort; } for(i=0, pItem=pGroupBy->a; i<pGroupBy->nExpr; i++, pItem++){ if( ExprHasProperty(pItem->pExpr, EP_Agg) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "aggregate functions are not allowed in " "the GROUP BY clause"); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 | /* ** This routine walks an expression tree and resolves references to ** table columns and result-set columns. At the same time, do error ** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions ** are seen. ** | | | 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 | /* ** This routine walks an expression tree and resolves references to ** table columns and result-set columns. At the same time, do error ** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions ** are seen. ** ** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the ** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where ** ** X: The name of a database. Ex: "main" or "temp" or ** the symbolic name assigned to an ATTACH-ed database. ** ** Y: The name of a table in a FROM clause. Or in a trigger ** one of the special names "old" or "new". |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 | ** ** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY x; ** ** The "x" term of the order by is replaced by "a+b" to render: ** ** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b; ** | | | | 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 | ** ** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY x; ** ** The "x" term of the order by is replaced by "a+b" to render: ** ** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b; ** ** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is ** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified. ** If the function is an aggregate function, then the NC_HasAgg flag is ** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION. ** If an expression contains aggregate functions then the EP_Agg ** property on the expression is set. ** ** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss. The number ** if errors is returned. */ int sqlite3ResolveExprNames( NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */ Expr *pExpr /* The expression to be analyzed. */ ){ int savedHasAgg; Walker w; if( pExpr==0 ) return SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 | } /* ** Resolve all names for all expression in an expression list. This is ** just like sqlite3ResolveExprNames() except that it works for an expression ** list rather than a single expression. */ | | | 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 | } /* ** Resolve all names for all expression in an expression list. This is ** just like sqlite3ResolveExprNames() except that it works for an expression ** list rather than a single expression. */ int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames( NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */ ExprList *pList /* The expression list to be analyzed. */ ){ int i; int savedHasAgg = 0; Walker w; if( pList==0 ) return WRC_Continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 | } pNC->ncFlags |= savedHasAgg; return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Resolve all names in all expressions of a SELECT and in all | | | 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 | } pNC->ncFlags |= savedHasAgg; return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Resolve all names in all expressions of a SELECT and in all ** descendants of the SELECT, including compounds off of p->pPrior, ** subqueries in expressions, and subqueries used as FROM clause ** terms. ** ** See sqlite3ResolveExprNames() for a description of the kinds of ** transformations that occur. ** ** All SELECT statements should have been expanded using |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/rowset.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 | ** ** The CREATE and DESTROY primitives are the constructor and destructor, ** obviously. The INSERT primitive adds a new element to the RowSet. ** TEST checks to see if an element is already in the RowSet. SMALLEST ** extracts the least value from the RowSet. ** ** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory. Memory is | | | | 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | ** ** The CREATE and DESTROY primitives are the constructor and destructor, ** obviously. The INSERT primitive adds a new element to the RowSet. ** TEST checks to see if an element is already in the RowSet. SMALLEST ** extracts the least value from the RowSet. ** ** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory. Memory is ** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an ** upper bound on the size of allocated memory. No memory is freed ** until DESTROY. ** ** The TEST primitive includes a "batch" number. The TEST primitive ** will only see elements that were inserted before the last change ** in the batch number. In other words, if an INSERT occurs between ** two TESTs where the TESTs have the same batch number, then the ** value added by the INSERT will not be visible to the second TEST. ** The initial batch number is zero, so if the very first TEST contains ** a non-zero batch number, it will see all prior INSERTs. ** ** No INSERTs may occurs after a SMALLEST. An assertion will fail if ** that is attempted. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | ** Each entry in a RowSet is an instance of the following object. ** ** This same object is reused to store a linked list of trees of RowSetEntry ** objects. In that alternative use, pRight points to the next entry ** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused. The ** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list. */ | | | 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | ** Each entry in a RowSet is an instance of the following object. ** ** This same object is reused to store a linked list of trees of RowSetEntry ** objects. In that alternative use, pRight points to the next entry ** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused. The ** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list. */ struct RowSetEntry { i64 v; /* ROWID value for this entry */ struct RowSetEntry *pRight; /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */ struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */ }; /* ** RowSetEntry objects are allocated in large chunks (instances of the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
231 232 233 234 235 236 237 | } p->pLast = pEntry; } /* ** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects. Remove duplicates. ** | | | 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | } p->pLast = pEntry; } /* ** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects. Remove duplicates. ** ** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are ** assumed to each already be in sorted order. */ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge( struct RowSetEntry *pA, /* First sorted list to be merged */ struct RowSetEntry *pB /* Second sorted list to be merged */ ){ struct RowSetEntry head; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
268 269 270 271 272 273 274 | } return head.pRight; } /* ** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of ** increasing v. | | | 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 | } return head.pRight; } /* ** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of ** increasing v. */ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntrySort(struct RowSetEntry *pIn){ unsigned int i; struct RowSetEntry *pNext, *aBucket[40]; memset(aBucket, 0, sizeof(aBucket)); while( pIn ){ pNext = pIn->pRight; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
341 342 343 344 345 346 347 | struct RowSetEntry **ppList, int iDepth ){ struct RowSetEntry *p; /* Root of the new tree */ struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree */ if( *ppList==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/ /* Prevent unnecessary deep recursion when we run out of entries */ | | | 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 | struct RowSetEntry **ppList, int iDepth ){ struct RowSetEntry *p; /* Root of the new tree */ struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree */ if( *ppList==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/ /* Prevent unnecessary deep recursion when we run out of entries */ return 0; } if( iDepth>1 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/ /* This branch causes a *balanced* tree to be generated. A valid tree ** is still generated without this branch, but the tree is wildly ** unbalanced and inefficient. */ pLeft = rowSetNDeepTree(ppList, iDepth-1); p = *ppList; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/select.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
227 228 229 230 231 232 233 | ** NATURAL LEFT - JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL LEFT OUTER JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL RIGHT - JT_NATURAL|JT_RIGHT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL RIGHT OUTER JT_NATURAL|JT_RIGHT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL FULL - JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT ** NATURAL FULL OUTER JT_NATRUAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT ** | | | | 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 | ** NATURAL LEFT - JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL LEFT OUTER JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL RIGHT - JT_NATURAL|JT_RIGHT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL RIGHT OUTER JT_NATURAL|JT_RIGHT|JT_OUTER ** NATURAL FULL - JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT ** NATURAL FULL OUTER JT_NATRUAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT ** ** To preserve historical compatibly, SQLite also accepts a variety ** of other non-standard and in many cases nonsensical join types. ** This routine makes as much sense at it can from the nonsense join ** type and returns a result. Examples of accepted nonsense join types ** include but are not limited to: ** ** INNER CROSS JOIN -> same as JOIN ** NATURAL CROSS JOIN -> same as NATURAL JOIN ** OUTER LEFT JOIN -> same as LEFT JOIN |
︙ | ︙ | |||
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 | int i, j; apAll[0] = pA; apAll[1] = pB; apAll[2] = pC; for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){ p = apAll[i]; for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){ | | | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 | int i, j; apAll[0] = pA; apAll[1] = pB; apAll[2] = pC; for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){ p = apAll[i]; for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){ if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar && sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){ jointype |= aKeyword[j].code; break; } } testcase( j==0 || j==1 || j==2 || j==3 || j==4 || j==5 || j==6 ); if( j>=ArraySize(aKeyword) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
364 365 366 367 368 369 370 | assert( iEnd<pSrc->nSrc ); assert( iStart>=0 ); assert( (piTab==0)==(piCol==0) ); /* Both or neither are NULL */ for(i=iStart; i<=iEnd; i++){ iCol = sqlite3ColumnIndex(pSrc->a[i].pTab, zCol); | | | 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | assert( iEnd<pSrc->nSrc ); assert( iStart>=0 ); assert( (piTab==0)==(piCol==0) ); /* Both or neither are NULL */ for(i=iStart; i<=iEnd; i++){ iCol = sqlite3ColumnIndex(pSrc->a[i].pTab, zCol); if( iCol>=0 && (bIgnoreHidden==0 || IsHiddenColumn(&pSrc->a[i].pTab->aCol[iCol])==0) ){ if( piTab ){ sqlite3SrcItemColumnUsed(&pSrc->a[i], iCol); *piTab = i; *piCol = iCol; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
422 423 424 425 426 427 428 | for(i=0; i<p->x.pList->nExpr; i++){ sqlite3SetJoinExpr(p->x.pList->a[i].pExpr, iTable, joinFlag); } } } sqlite3SetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, joinFlag); p = p->pRight; | | | 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 | for(i=0; i<p->x.pList->nExpr; i++){ sqlite3SetJoinExpr(p->x.pList->a[i].pExpr, iTable, joinFlag); } } } sqlite3SetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, joinFlag); p = p->pRight; } } /* Undo the work of sqlite3SetJoinExpr(). This is used when a LEFT JOIN ** is simplified into an ordinary JOIN, and when an ON expression is ** "pushed down" into the WHERE clause of a subquery. ** ** Convert every term that is marked with EP_OuterON and w.iJoin==iTable into |
︙ | ︙ | |||
459 460 461 462 463 464 465 | for(i=0; i<p->x.pList->nExpr; i++){ unsetJoinExpr(p->x.pList->a[i].pExpr, iTable, nullable); } } } unsetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, nullable); p = p->pRight; | | | 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 | for(i=0; i<p->x.pList->nExpr; i++){ unsetJoinExpr(p->x.pList->a[i].pExpr, iTable, nullable); } } } unsetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, nullable); p = p->pRight; } } /* ** This routine processes the join information for a SELECT statement. ** ** * A NATURAL join is converted into a USING join. After that, we ** do not need to be concerned with NATURAL joins and we only have |
︙ | ︙ | |||
499 500 501 502 503 504 505 | for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc-1; i++, pRight++, pLeft++){ Table *pRightTab = pRight->pTab; u32 joinType; if( NEVER(pLeft->pTab==0 || pRightTab==0) ) continue; joinType = (pRight->fg.jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 ? EP_OuterON : EP_InnerON; | | | 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 | for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc-1; i++, pRight++, pLeft++){ Table *pRightTab = pRight->pTab; u32 joinType; if( NEVER(pLeft->pTab==0 || pRightTab==0) ) continue; joinType = (pRight->fg.jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 ? EP_OuterON : EP_InnerON; /* If this is a NATURAL join, synthesize an appropriate USING clause ** to specify which columns should be joined. */ if( pRight->fg.jointype & JT_NATURAL ){ IdList *pUsing = 0; if( pRight->fg.isUsing || pRight->u3.pOn ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a NATURAL join may not have " "an ON or USING clause", 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
532 533 534 535 536 537 538 | pRight->fg.isSynthUsing = 1; pRight->u3.pUsing = pUsing; } if( pParse->nErr ) return 1; } /* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named | | | 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 | pRight->fg.isSynthUsing = 1; pRight->u3.pUsing = pUsing; } if( pParse->nErr ) return 1; } /* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are ** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this ** to the WHERE clause: A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z ** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is ** not contained in both tables to be joined. */ if( pRight->fg.isUsing ){ IdList *pList = pRight->u3.pUsing; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
714 715 716 717 718 719 720 | ** (1) The data to be sorted has already been packed into a Record ** by a prior OP_MakeRecord. In this case nData==1 and regData ** will be completely unrelated to regOrigData. ** (2) All output columns are included in the sort record. In that ** case regData==regOrigData. ** (3) Some output columns are omitted from the sort record due to ** the SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES optimization, or due to the | | | | 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 | ** (1) The data to be sorted has already been packed into a Record ** by a prior OP_MakeRecord. In this case nData==1 and regData ** will be completely unrelated to regOrigData. ** (2) All output columns are included in the sort record. In that ** case regData==regOrigData. ** (3) Some output columns are omitted from the sort record due to ** the SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES optimization, or due to the ** SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF optimization, or due to the ** SortCtx.pDeferredRowLoad optimization. In any of these cases ** regOrigData is 0 to prevent this routine from trying to copy ** values that might not yet exist. */ assert( nData==1 || regData==regOrigData || regOrigData==0 ); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS pSort->addrPush = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
756 757 758 759 760 761 762 | KeyInfo *pKI; /* Original KeyInfo on the sorter table */ regRecord = makeSorterRecord(pParse, pSort, pSelect, regBase, nBase); regPrevKey = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat; nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq; if( bSeq ){ | | | | | | 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 | KeyInfo *pKI; /* Original KeyInfo on the sorter table */ regRecord = makeSorterRecord(pParse, pSort, pSelect, regBase, nBase); regPrevKey = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat; nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq; if( bSeq ){ addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr); }else{ addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SequenceTest, pSort->iECursor); } VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Compare, regPrevKey, regBase, pSort->nOBSat); pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, pSort->addrSortIndex); if( pParse->db->mallocFailed ) return; pOp->p2 = nKey + nData; pKI = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; memset(pKI->aSortFlags, 0, pKI->nKeyField); /* Makes OP_Jump testable */ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, (char*)pKI, P4_KEYINFO); testcase( pKI->nAllField > pKI->nKeyField+2 ); pOp->p4.pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse,pSort->pOrderBy,nOBSat, pKI->nAllField-pKI->nKeyField-1); pOp = 0; /* Ensure pOp not used after sqlite3VdbeAddOp3() */ addrJmp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump, addrJmp+1, 0, addrJmp+1); VdbeCoverage(v); pSort->labelBkOut = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); pSort->regReturn = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, pSort->regReturn, pSort->labelBkOut); sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_ResetSorter, pSort->iECursor); if( iLimit ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IfNot, iLimit, pSort->labelDone); VdbeCoverage(v); } sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrFirst); sqlite3ExprCodeMove(pParse, regBase, regPrevKey, pSort->nOBSat); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrJmp); } if( iLimit ){ /* At this point the values for the new sorter entry are stored ** in an array of registers. They need to be composed into a record ** and inserted into the sorter if either (a) there are currently ** less than LIMIT+OFFSET items or (b) the new record is smaller than ** the largest record currently in the sorter. If (b) is true and there ** are already LIMIT+OFFSET items in the sorter, delete the largest ** entry before inserting the new one. This way there are never more ** than LIMIT+OFFSET items in the sorter. ** ** If the new record does not need to be inserted into the sorter, ** jump to the next iteration of the loop. If the pSort->labelOBLopt ** value is not zero, then it is a label of where to jump. Otherwise, ** just bypass the row insert logic. See the header comment on the ** sqlite3WhereOrderByLimitOptLabel() function for additional info. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
865 866 867 868 869 870 871 | ** record formed by the current array of registers. If one is found, ** jump to VM address addrRepeat. Otherwise, insert a new record into ** the ephemeral cursor and proceed. ** ** The returned value in this case is a copy of parameter iTab. ** ** WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED: | | | | | | | 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 | ** record formed by the current array of registers. If one is found, ** jump to VM address addrRepeat. Otherwise, insert a new record into ** the ephemeral cursor and proceed. ** ** The returned value in this case is a copy of parameter iTab. ** ** WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED: ** In this case rows are being delivered sorted order. The ephemeral ** table is not required. Instead, the current set of values ** is compared against previous row. If they match, the new row ** is not distinct and control jumps to VM address addrRepeat. Otherwise, ** the VM program proceeds with processing the new row. ** ** The returned value in this case is the register number of the first ** in an array of registers used to store the previous result row so that ** it can be compared to the next. The caller must ensure that this ** register is initialized to NULL. (The fixDistinctOpenEph() routine ** will take care of this initialization.) ** ** WHERE_DISTINCT_UNIQUE: ** In this case it has already been determined that the rows are distinct. ** No special action is required. The return value is zero. ** ** Parameter pEList is the list of expressions used to generated the ** contents of each row. It is used by this routine to determine (a) ** how many elements there are in the array of registers and (b) the ** collation sequences that should be used for the comparisons if ** eTnctType is WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED. */ static int codeDistinct( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing and code generating context */ int eTnctType, /* WHERE_DISTINCT_* value */ int iTab, /* A sorting index used to test for distinctness */ int addrRepeat, /* Jump to here if not distinct */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
986 987 988 989 990 991 992 | ){ Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, iOpenEphAddr); if( sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, iOpenEphAddr+1)->opcode==OP_Explain ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, iOpenEphAddr+1); } if( eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED ){ | | | | | | | | 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 | ){ Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, iOpenEphAddr); if( sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, iOpenEphAddr+1)->opcode==OP_Explain ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, iOpenEphAddr+1); } if( eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED ){ /* Change the OP_OpenEphemeral to an OP_Null that sets the MEM_Cleared ** bit on the first register of the previous value. This will cause the ** OP_Ne added in codeDistinct() to always fail on the first iteration of ** the loop even if the first row is all NULLs. */ VdbeOp *pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, iOpenEphAddr); pOp->opcode = OP_Null; pOp->p1 = 1; pOp->p2 = iVal; } } } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES /* ** This function is called as part of inner-loop generation for a SELECT ** statement with an ORDER BY that is not optimized by an index. It ** determines the expressions, if any, that the sorter-reference ** optimization should be used for. The sorter-reference optimization ** is used for SELECT queries like: ** ** SELECT a, bigblob FROM t1 ORDER BY a LIMIT 10 ** ** If the optimization is used for expression "bigblob", then instead of ** storing values read from that column in the sorter records, the PK of ** the row from table t1 is stored instead. Then, as records are extracted from ** the sorter to return to the user, the required value of bigblob is ** retrieved directly from table t1. If the values are very large, this ** can be more efficient than storing them directly in the sorter records. ** ** The ExprList_item.fg.bSorterRef flag is set for each expression in pEList ** for which the sorter-reference optimization should be enabled. ** Additionally, the pSort->aDefer[] array is populated with entries ** for all cursors required to evaluate all selected expressions. Finally. ** output variable (*ppExtra) is set to an expression list containing ** expressions for all extra PK values that should be stored in the ** sorter records. */ static void selectExprDefer( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 | /* ** This routine generates the code for the inside of the inner loop ** of a SELECT. ** ** If srcTab is negative, then the p->pEList expressions ** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row. If srcTab is | | | 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 | /* ** This routine generates the code for the inside of the inner loop ** of a SELECT. ** ** If srcTab is negative, then the p->pEList expressions ** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row. If srcTab is ** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only ** to get the number of columns and the collation sequence for each column. */ static void selectInnerLoop( Parse *pParse, /* The parser context */ Select *p, /* The complete select statement being coded */ int srcTab, /* Pull data from this table if non-negative */ SortCtx *pSort, /* If not NULL, info on how to process ORDER BY */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 | if( eDest==SRT_Mem || eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ){ ecelFlags = SQLITE_ECEL_DUP; }else{ ecelFlags = 0; } if( pSort && hasDistinct==0 && eDest!=SRT_EphemTab && eDest!=SRT_Table ){ /* For each expression in p->pEList that is a copy of an expression in | | | | | 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 | if( eDest==SRT_Mem || eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ){ ecelFlags = SQLITE_ECEL_DUP; }else{ ecelFlags = 0; } if( pSort && hasDistinct==0 && eDest!=SRT_EphemTab && eDest!=SRT_Table ){ /* For each expression in p->pEList that is a copy of an expression in ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY ** expression within the sort-key that pushOntoSorter() will generate. ** This allows the p->pEList field to be omitted from the sorted record, ** saving space and CPU cycles. */ ecelFlags |= (SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF|SQLITE_ECEL_REF); for(i=pSort->nOBSat; i<pSort->pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){ int j; if( (j = pSort->pOrderBy->a[i].u.x.iOrderByCol)>0 ){ p->pEList->a[j-1].u.x.iOrderByCol = i+1-pSort->nOBSat; } } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES selectExprDefer(pParse, pSort, p->pEList, &pExtra); if( pExtra && pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ){ /* If there are any extra PK columns to add to the sorter records, ** allocate extra memory cells and adjust the OpenEphemeral ** instruction to account for the larger records. This is only ** required if there are one or more WITHOUT ROWID tables with ** composite primary keys in the SortCtx.aDefer[] array. */ VdbeOp *pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, pSort->addrSortIndex); pOp->p2 += (pExtra->nExpr - pSort->nDefer); pOp->p4.pKeyInfo->nAllField += (pExtra->nExpr - pSort->nDefer); pParse->nMem += pExtra->nExpr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 | } testcase( regOrig ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Set ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Mem ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Output ); | | | | 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 | } testcase( regOrig ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Set ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Mem ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Output ); assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem || eDest==SRT_Coroutine || eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Upfrom ); } sRowLoadInfo.regResult = regResult; sRowLoadInfo.ecelFlags = ecelFlags; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES sRowLoadInfo.pExtra = pExtra; sRowLoadInfo.regExtraResult = regResult + nResultCol; if( pExtra ) nResultCol += pExtra->nExpr; #endif if( p->iLimit && (ecelFlags & SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF)!=0 && nPrefixReg>0 ){ assert( pSort!=0 ); assert( hasDistinct==0 ); pSort->pDeferredRowLoad = &sRowLoadInfo; regOrig = 0; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 | ** does not matter. But there might be a LIMIT clause, in which ** case the order does matter */ pushOntoSorter( pParse, pSort, p, regResult, regOrig, nResultCol, nPrefixReg); }else{ int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); assert( sqlite3Strlen30(pDest->zAffSdst)==nResultCol ); | | | | 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 | ** does not matter. But there might be a LIMIT clause, in which ** case the order does matter */ pushOntoSorter( pParse, pSort, p, regResult, regOrig, nResultCol, nPrefixReg); }else{ int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); assert( sqlite3Strlen30(pDest->zAffSdst)==nResultCol ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol, r1, pDest->zAffSdst, nResultCol); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regResult, nResultCol); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r1); } break; } /* If any row exist in the result set, record that fact and abort. */ case SRT_Exists: { sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, iParm); /* The LIMIT clause will terminate the loop for us */ break; } /* If this is a scalar select that is part of an expression, then ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of ** memory cells and break out of the scan loop. */ case SRT_Mem: { if( pSort ){ assert( nResultCol<=pDest->nSdst ); pushOntoSorter( pParse, pSort, p, regResult, regOrig, nResultCol, nPrefixReg); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 | r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); r2 = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nKey+2); r3 = r2+nKey+1; if( eDest==SRT_DistQueue ){ /* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open ** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously ** added to the queue. */ | | | 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 | r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); r2 = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nKey+2); r3 = r2+nKey+1; if( eDest==SRT_DistQueue ){ /* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open ** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously ** added to the queue. */ addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0, regResult, nResultCol); VdbeCoverage(v); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol, r3); if( eDest==SRT_DistQueue ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm+1, r3); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 | int bSeq; /* True if sorter record includes seq. no. */ int nRefKey = 0; struct ExprList_item *aOutEx = p->pEList->a; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS int addrExplain; /* Address of OP_Explain instruction */ #endif | | | 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 | int bSeq; /* True if sorter record includes seq. no. */ int nRefKey = 0; struct ExprList_item *aOutEx = p->pEList->a; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS int addrExplain; /* Address of OP_Explain instruction */ #endif ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 0, "USE TEMP B-TREE FOR %sORDER BY", pSort->nOBSat>0?"RIGHT PART OF ":"") ); sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(v, addrExplain,pSort->addrPush,pSort->addrPushEnd); sqlite3VdbeScanStatusCounters(v, addrExplain, addrExplain, pSort->addrPush); assert( addrBreak<0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 | nKey = pOrderBy->nExpr - pSort->nOBSat; if( pSort->sortFlags & SORTFLAG_UseSorter ){ int regSortOut = ++pParse->nMem; iSortTab = pParse->nTab++; if( pSort->labelBkOut ){ addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); } | | | 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 | nKey = pOrderBy->nExpr - pSort->nOBSat; if( pSort->sortFlags & SORTFLAG_UseSorter ){ int regSortOut = ++pParse->nMem; iSortTab = pParse->nTab++; if( pSort->labelBkOut ){ addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenPseudo, iSortTab, regSortOut, nKey+1+nColumn+nRefKey); if( addrOnce ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrOnce); addr = 1 + sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SorterSort, iTab, addrBreak); VdbeCoverage(v); assert( p->iLimit==0 && p->iOffset==0 ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SorterData, iTab, regSortOut, iSortTab); bSeq = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 | int iCsr = pSort->aDefer[i].iCsr; Table *pTab = pSort->aDefer[i].pTab; int nKey = pSort->aDefer[i].nKey; sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, iCsr); if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iSortTab, iKey++, regKey); | | | 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 | int iCsr = pSort->aDefer[i].iCsr; Table *pTab = pSort->aDefer[i].pTab; int nKey = pSort->aDefer[i].nKey; sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, iCsr); if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iSortTab, iKey++, regKey); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, iCsr, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1, regKey); }else{ int k; int iJmp; assert( sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab)->nKeyCol==nKey ); for(k=0; k<nKey; k++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iSortTab, iKey++, regKey+k); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Insert, iParm, r1, regRow); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regRow, i2); } break; } default: { | | | 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Insert, iParm, r1, regRow); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regRow, i2); } break; } default: { assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Output ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); if( eDest==SRT_Output ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, pDest->iSdst, nColumn); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Yield, pDest->iSDParm); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 | ** Return a pointer to a string containing the 'declaration type' of the ** expression pExpr. The string may be treated as static by the caller. ** ** The declaration type is the exact datatype definition extracted from the ** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The ** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression ** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The | | | | | 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 | ** Return a pointer to a string containing the 'declaration type' of the ** expression pExpr. The string may be treated as static by the caller. ** ** The declaration type is the exact datatype definition extracted from the ** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The ** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression ** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The ** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is ** considered a column by this function. ** ** SELECT col FROM tbl; ** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl; ** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl); ** SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl); ** ** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL. ** ** This routine has either 3 or 6 parameters depending on whether or not ** the SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA compile-time option is used. */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA # define columnType(A,B,C,D,E) columnTypeImpl(A,B,C,D,E) #else /* if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA) */ # define columnType(A,B,C,D,E) columnTypeImpl(A,B) #endif static const char *columnTypeImpl( NameContext *pNC, #ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA Expr *pExpr #else Expr *pExpr, const char **pzOrigDb, const char **pzOrigTab, const char **pzOrigCol |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 | pNC = pNC->pNext; } } if( pTab==0 ){ /* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would ** cause this condition to run. Since then, we have restructured how | | | | | | | | 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 | pNC = pNC->pNext; } } if( pTab==0 ){ /* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would ** cause this condition to run. Since then, we have restructured how ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer ** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like ** the following: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER); ** SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1; ** ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the ** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even ** though it should really be "INTEGER". ** ** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression ** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT ** branch below. */ break; } assert( pTab && ExprUseYTab(pExpr) && pExpr->y.pTab==pTab ); if( pS ){ /* The "table" is actually a sub-select or a view in the FROM clause ** of the SELECT statement. Return the declaration type and origin ** data for the result-set column of the sub-select. */ if( iCol<pS->pEList->nExpr #ifdef SQLITE_ALLOW_ROWID_IN_VIEW && iCol>=0 #else && ALWAYS(iCol>=0) #endif ){ /* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see ** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL. */ NameContext sNC; Expr *p = pS->pEList->a[iCol].pExpr; sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pNC; sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse; zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol); } }else{ /* A real table or a CTE table */ assert( !pS ); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA if( iCol<0 ) iCol = pTab->iPKey; assert( iCol==XN_ROWID || (iCol>=0 && iCol<pTab->nCol) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 | Expr *p; assert( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ); pS = pExpr->x.pSelect; p = pS->pEList->a[0].pExpr; sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pNC; sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse; | | | | 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 | Expr *p; assert( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ); pS = pExpr->x.pSelect; p = pS->pEList->a[0].pExpr; sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pNC; sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse; zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol); break; } #endif } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA if( pzOrigDb ){ assert( pzOrigTab && pzOrigCol ); *pzOrigDb = zOrigDb; *pzOrigTab = zOrigTab; *pzOrigCol = zOrigCol; } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 | const char *zType; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA const char *zOrigDb = 0; const char *zOrigTab = 0; const char *zOrigCol = 0; zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol); | | | 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 | const char *zType; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA const char *zOrigDb = 0; const char *zOrigTab = 0; const char *zOrigCol = 0; zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol); /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other ** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this ** virtual machine is deleted. */ sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_DATABASE, zOrigDb, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_TABLE, zOrigTab, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_COLUMN, zOrigCol, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); #else |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 | } /* ** pTab is a transient Table object that represents a subquery of some ** kind (maybe a parenthesized subquery in the FROM clause of a larger ** query, or a VIEW, or a CTE). This routine computes type information ** for that Table object based on the Select object that implements the | | | 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 | } /* ** pTab is a transient Table object that represents a subquery of some ** kind (maybe a parenthesized subquery in the FROM clause of a larger ** query, or a VIEW, or a CTE). This routine computes type information ** for that Table object based on the Select object that implements the ** subquery. For the purposes of this routine, "type information" means: ** ** * The datatype name, as it might appear in a CREATE TABLE statement ** * Which collating sequence to use for the column ** * The affinity of the column */ void sqlite3SubqueryColumnTypes( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing contexts */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 | } /* ** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the ** pLimit expressions. pLimit->pLeft and pLimit->pRight hold the expressions ** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET | | | | | 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 | } /* ** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the ** pLimit expressions. pLimit->pLeft and pLimit->pRight hold the expressions ** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET ** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset ** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute ** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then ** iLimit and iOffset are negative. ** ** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if ** a limit or offset is defined by pLimit->pLeft and pLimit->pRight. iLimit ** and iOffset should have been preset to appropriate default values (zero) ** prior to calling this routine. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 | int iLimit = 0; int iOffset; int n; Expr *pLimit = p->pLimit; if( p->iLimit ) return; | | | 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 | int iLimit = 0; int iOffset; int n; Expr *pLimit = p->pLimit; if( p->iLimit ) return; /* ** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows. There is some ** controversy about what the correct behavior should be. ** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean ** no rows. */ if( pLimit ){ assert( pLimit->op==TK_LIMIT ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 | ** is added back into the Queue table. Then another row is extracted from Queue ** and the iteration continues until the Queue table is empty. ** ** If the compound query operator is UNION then no duplicate rows are ever ** inserted into the Queue table. The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows ** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be ** discarded. If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed. | | | 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 | ** is added back into the Queue table. Then another row is extracted from Queue ** and the iteration continues until the Queue table is empty. ** ** If the compound query operator is UNION then no duplicate rows are ever ** inserted into the Queue table. The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows ** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be ** discarded. If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed. ** ** If the query has an ORDER BY, then entries in the Queue table are kept in ** ORDER BY order and the first entry is extracted for each cycle. Without ** an ORDER BY, the Queue table is just a FIFO. ** ** If a LIMIT clause is provided, then the iteration stops after LIMIT rows ** have been output to pDest. A LIMIT of zero means to output no rows and a ** negative LIMIT means to output all rows. If there is also an OFFSET clause |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 | int addrTop; /* Top of the loop */ int addrCont, addrBreak; /* CONTINUE and BREAK addresses */ int iCurrent = 0; /* The Current table */ int regCurrent; /* Register holding Current table */ int iQueue; /* The Queue table */ int iDistinct = 0; /* To ensure unique results if UNION */ int eDest = SRT_Fifo; /* How to write to Queue */ | | | 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 | int addrTop; /* Top of the loop */ int addrCont, addrBreak; /* CONTINUE and BREAK addresses */ int iCurrent = 0; /* The Current table */ int regCurrent; /* Register holding Current table */ int iQueue; /* The Queue table */ int iDistinct = 0; /* To ensure unique results if UNION */ int eDest = SRT_Fifo; /* How to write to Queue */ SelectDest destQueue; /* SelectDest targeting the Queue table */ int i; /* Loop counter */ int rc; /* Result code */ ExprList *pOrderBy; /* The ORDER BY clause */ Expr *pLimit; /* Saved LIMIT and OFFSET */ int regLimit, regOffset; /* Registers used by LIMIT and OFFSET */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 | /* ** This routine is called to process a compound query form from ** two or more separate queries using UNION, UNION ALL, EXCEPT, or ** INTERSECT ** ** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries. the query on the ** left is p->pPrior. The left query could also be a compound query | | | 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 | /* ** This routine is called to process a compound query form from ** two or more separate queries using UNION, UNION ALL, EXCEPT, or ** INTERSECT ** ** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries. the query on the ** left is p->pPrior. The left query could also be a compound query ** in which case this routine will be called recursively. ** ** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination ** of type eDest with parameter iParm. ** ** Example 1: Consider a three-way compound SQL statement. ** ** SELECT a FROM t1 UNION SELECT b FROM t2 UNION SELECT c FROM t3 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 | rc = sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &dest); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); pDelete = p->pPrior; p->pPrior = pPrior; p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow); if( p->pLimit && sqlite3ExprIsInteger(p->pLimit->pLeft, &nLimit) | | | | 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 | rc = sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &dest); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); pDelete = p->pPrior; p->pPrior = pPrior; p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow); if( p->pLimit && sqlite3ExprIsInteger(p->pLimit->pLeft, &nLimit) && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit) ){ p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit); } if( addr ){ sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr); } break; } case TK_EXCEPT: case TK_UNION: { int unionTab; /* Cursor number of the temp table holding result */ u8 op = 0; /* One of the SRT_ operations to apply to self */ int priorOp; /* The SRT_ operation to apply to prior selects */ Expr *pLimit; /* Saved values of p->nLimit */ int addr; SelectDest uniondest; testcase( p->op==TK_EXCEPT ); testcase( p->op==TK_UNION ); priorOp = SRT_Union; if( dest.eDest==priorOp ){ /* We can reuse a temporary table generated by a SELECT to our ** right. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 | assert( p->pOrderBy==0 ); addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, unionTab, 0); assert( p->addrOpenEphm[0] == -1 ); p->addrOpenEphm[0] = addr; findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral; assert( p->pEList ); } | | | | | 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 | assert( p->pOrderBy==0 ); addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, unionTab, 0); assert( p->addrOpenEphm[0] == -1 ); p->addrOpenEphm[0] = addr; findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral; assert( p->pEList ); } /* Code the SELECT statements to our left */ assert( !pPrior->pOrderBy ); sqlite3SelectDestInit(&uniondest, priorOp, unionTab); TREETRACE(0x200, pParse, p, ("multiSelect EXCEPT/UNION left...\n")); rc = sqlite3Select(pParse, pPrior, &uniondest); if( rc ){ goto multi_select_end; } /* Code the current SELECT statement */ if( p->op==TK_EXCEPT ){ op = SRT_Except; }else{ assert( p->op==TK_UNION ); op = SRT_Union; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 | if( p->op==TK_UNION ){ p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow); } sqlite3ExprDelete(db, p->pLimit); p->pLimit = pLimit; p->iLimit = 0; p->iOffset = 0; | | | 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 | if( p->op==TK_UNION ){ p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow); } sqlite3ExprDelete(db, p->pLimit); p->pLimit = pLimit; p->iLimit = 0; p->iOffset = 0; /* Convert the data in the temporary table into whatever form ** it is that we currently need. */ assert( unionTab==dest.iSDParm || dest.eDest!=priorOp ); assert( p->pEList || db->mallocFailed ); if( dest.eDest!=priorOp && db->mallocFailed==0 ){ int iCont, iBreak, iStart; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 | default: assert( p->op==TK_INTERSECT ); { int tab1, tab2; int iCont, iBreak, iStart; Expr *pLimit; int addr; SelectDest intersectdest; int r1; | | | | | | 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 | default: assert( p->op==TK_INTERSECT ); { int tab1, tab2; int iCont, iBreak, iStart; Expr *pLimit; int addr; SelectDest intersectdest; int r1; /* INTERSECT is different from the others since it requires ** two temporary tables. Hence it has its own case. Begin ** by allocating the tables we will need. */ tab1 = pParse->nTab++; tab2 = pParse->nTab++; assert( p->pOrderBy==0 ); addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, tab1, 0); assert( p->addrOpenEphm[0] == -1 ); p->addrOpenEphm[0] = addr; findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral; assert( p->pEList ); /* Code the SELECTs to our left into temporary table "tab1". */ sqlite3SelectDestInit(&intersectdest, SRT_Union, tab1); TREETRACE(0x400, pParse, p, ("multiSelect INTERSECT left...\n")); rc = sqlite3Select(pParse, pPrior, &intersectdest); if( rc ){ goto multi_select_end; } /* Code the current SELECT into temporary table "tab2" */ addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, tab2, 0); assert( p->addrOpenEphm[1] == -1 ); p->addrOpenEphm[1] = addr; p->pPrior = 0; pLimit = p->pLimit; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 | pDelete = p->pPrior; p->pPrior = pPrior; if( p->nSelectRow>pPrior->nSelectRow ){ p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow; } sqlite3ExprDelete(db, p->pLimit); p->pLimit = pLimit; | | | 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 | pDelete = p->pPrior; p->pPrior = pPrior; if( p->nSelectRow>pPrior->nSelectRow ){ p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow; } sqlite3ExprDelete(db, p->pLimit); p->pLimit = pLimit; /* Generate code to take the intersection of the two temporary ** tables. */ if( rc ) break; assert( p->pEList ); iBreak = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); iCont = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, tab1, iStart); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iBreak); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Close, tab2, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Close, tab1, 0); break; } } | | | | | 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, tab1, iStart); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iBreak); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Close, tab2, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Close, tab1, 0); break; } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_EXPLAIN if( p->pNext==0 ){ ExplainQueryPlanPop(pParse); } #endif } if( pParse->nErr ) goto multi_select_end; /* Compute collating sequences used by ** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select. ** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables. ** ** This section is run by the right-most SELECT statement only. ** SELECT statements to the left always skip this part. The right-most ** SELECT might also skip this part if it has no ORDER BY clause and ** no temp tables are required. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 | " do not have the same number of result columns", sqlite3SelectOpName(p->op)); } } /* ** Code an output subroutine for a coroutine implementation of a | | | 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 | " do not have the same number of result columns", sqlite3SelectOpName(p->op)); } } /* ** Code an output subroutine for a coroutine implementation of a ** SELECT statement. ** ** The data to be output is contained in pIn->iSdst. There are ** pIn->nSdst columns to be output. pDest is where the output should ** be sent. ** ** regReturn is the number of the register holding the subroutine ** return address. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 | Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; int iContinue; int addr; addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); | | | 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 | Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; int iContinue; int addr; addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT */ if( regPrev ){ int addr1, addr2; addr1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regPrev); VdbeCoverage(v); addr2 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Compare, pIn->iSdst, regPrev+1, pIn->nSdst, (char*)sqlite3KeyInfoRef(pKeyInfo), P4_KEYINFO); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump, addr2+2, iContinue, addr2+2); VdbeCoverage(v); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* If we are creating a set for an "expr IN (SELECT ...)". */ case SRT_Set: { int r1; testcase( pIn->nSdst>1 ); r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); | | | 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* If we are creating a set for an "expr IN (SELECT ...)". */ case SRT_Set: { int r1; testcase( pIn->nSdst>1 ); r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst, r1, pDest->zAffSdst, pIn->nSdst); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, pDest->iSDParm, r1, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r1); break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 | break; } /* If none of the above, then the result destination must be ** SRT_Output. This routine is never called with any other ** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output. ** | | | 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 | break; } /* If none of the above, then the result destination must be ** SRT_Output. This routine is never called with any other ** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output. ** ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers. ** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to ** return the next row of result. */ default: { assert( pDest->eDest==SRT_Output ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst); break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 | ** ** AgtB: Called when there is data from both coroutines and A>B. ** ** EofA: Called when data is exhausted from selectA. ** ** EofB: Called when data is exhausted from selectB. ** | | | 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 | ** ** AgtB: Called when there is data from both coroutines and A>B. ** ** EofA: Called when data is exhausted from selectA. ** ** EofB: Called when data is exhausted from selectB. ** ** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which ** <operator> is used: ** ** ** UNION ALL UNION EXCEPT INTERSECT ** ------------- ----------------- -------------- ----------------- ** AltB: outA, nextA outA, nextA outA, nextA nextA ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 | ** if eof(B) goto EofB ** Cmpr: Compare A, B ** Jump AltB, AeqB, AgtB ** End: ... ** ** We call AltB, AeqB, AgtB, EofA, and EofB "subroutines" but they are not ** actually called using Gosub and they do not Return. EofA and EofB loop | | | 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 | ** if eof(B) goto EofB ** Cmpr: Compare A, B ** Jump AltB, AeqB, AgtB ** End: ... ** ** We call AltB, AeqB, AgtB, EofA, and EofB "subroutines" but they are not ** actually called using Gosub and they do not Return. EofA and EofB loop ** until all data is exhausted then jump to the "end" label. AltB, AeqB, ** and AgtB jump to either L2 or to one of EofA or EofB. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPOUND_SELECT static int multiSelectOrderBy( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ Select *p, /* The right-most of SELECTs to be coded */ SelectDest *pDest /* What to do with query results */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 | int regLimitA; /* Limit register for select-A */ int regLimitB; /* Limit register for select-A */ int regPrev; /* A range of registers to hold previous output */ int savedLimit; /* Saved value of p->iLimit */ int savedOffset; /* Saved value of p->iOffset */ int labelCmpr; /* Label for the start of the merge algorithm */ int labelEnd; /* Label for the end of the overall SELECT stmt */ | | | | 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 | int regLimitA; /* Limit register for select-A */ int regLimitB; /* Limit register for select-A */ int regPrev; /* A range of registers to hold previous output */ int savedLimit; /* Saved value of p->iLimit */ int savedOffset; /* Saved value of p->iOffset */ int labelCmpr; /* Label for the start of the merge algorithm */ int labelEnd; /* Label for the end of the overall SELECT stmt */ int addr1; /* Jump instructions that get retargeted */ int op; /* One of TK_ALL, TK_UNION, TK_EXCEPT, TK_INTERSECT */ KeyInfo *pKeyDup = 0; /* Comparison information for duplicate removal */ KeyInfo *pKeyMerge; /* Comparison information for merging rows */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ ExprList *pOrderBy; /* The ORDER BY clause */ int nOrderBy; /* Number of terms in the ORDER BY clause */ u32 *aPermute; /* Mapping from ORDER BY terms to result set columns */ assert( p->pOrderBy!=0 ); assert( pKeyDup==0 ); /* "Managed" code needs this. Ticket #3382. */ db = pParse->db; v = pParse->pVdbe; assert( v!=0 ); /* Already thrown the error if VDBE alloc failed */ labelEnd = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); labelCmpr = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); /* Patch up the ORDER BY clause */ op = p->op; assert( p->pPrior->pOrderBy==0 ); pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy; assert( pOrderBy ); nOrderBy = pOrderBy->nExpr; /* For operators other than UNION ALL we have to make sure that ** the ORDER BY clause covers every term of the result set. Add |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 | assert( sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(pKeyDup) ); for(i=0; i<nExpr; i++){ pKeyDup->aColl[i] = multiSelectCollSeq(pParse, p, i); pKeyDup->aSortFlags[i] = 0; } } } | | | 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 | assert( sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(pKeyDup) ); for(i=0; i<nExpr; i++){ pKeyDup->aColl[i] = multiSelectCollSeq(pParse, p, i); pKeyDup->aSortFlags[i] = 0; } } } /* Separate the left and the right query from one another */ nSelect = 1; if( (op==TK_ALL || op==TK_UNION) && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_BalancedMerge) ){ for(pSplit=p; pSplit->pPrior!=0 && pSplit->op==op; pSplit=pSplit->pPrior){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 | VdbeComment((v, "left SELECT")); pPrior->iLimit = regLimitA; ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 1, "LEFT")); sqlite3Select(pParse, pPrior, &destA); sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrA); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); | | | | | | | 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 | VdbeComment((v, "left SELECT")); pPrior->iLimit = regLimitA; ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 1, "LEFT")); sqlite3Select(pParse, pPrior, &destA); sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrA); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on ** the right - the "B" select */ addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 1; addr1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_InitCoroutine, regAddrB, 0, addrSelectB); VdbeComment((v, "right SELECT")); savedLimit = p->iLimit; savedOffset = p->iOffset; p->iLimit = regLimitB; p->iOffset = 0; ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 1, "RIGHT")); sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB); p->iLimit = savedLimit; p->iOffset = savedOffset; sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrB); /* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the A ** select as the next output row of the compound select. */ VdbeNoopComment((v, "Output routine for A")); addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse, p, &destA, pDest, regOutA, regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd); /* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B ** select as the next output row of the compound select. */ if( op==TK_ALL || op==TK_UNION ){ VdbeNoopComment((v, "Output routine for B")); addrOutB = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse, p, &destB, pDest, regOutB, regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd); } sqlite3KeyInfoUnref(pKeyDup); /* Generate a subroutine to run when the results from select A ** are exhausted and only data in select B remains. */ if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){ addrEofA_noB = addrEofA = labelEnd; }else{ VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine")); addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB); addrEofA_noB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrEofA); p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow); } /* Generate a subroutine to run when the results from select B ** are exhausted and only data in select A remains. */ if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){ addrEofB = addrEofA; if( p->nSelectRow > pPrior->nSelectRow ) p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow; }else{ VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine")); addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrEofB); } /* Generate code to handle the case of A<B |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 | /* Jump to the this point in order to terminate the query. */ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, labelEnd); /* Make arrangements to free the 2nd and subsequent arms of the compound ** after the parse has finished */ if( pSplit->pPrior ){ | | | 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 | /* Jump to the this point in order to terminate the query. */ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, labelEnd); /* Make arrangements to free the 2nd and subsequent arms of the compound ** after the parse has finished */ if( pSplit->pPrior ){ sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3SelectDelete, pSplit->pPrior); } pSplit->pPrior = pPrior; pPrior->pNext = pSplit; sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pPrior->pOrderBy); pPrior->pOrderBy = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 | /* Forward Declarations */ static void substExprList(SubstContext*, ExprList*); static void substSelect(SubstContext*, Select*, int); /* ** Scan through the expression pExpr. Replace every reference to ** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th | | | | 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 | /* Forward Declarations */ static void substExprList(SubstContext*, ExprList*); static void substSelect(SubstContext*, Select*, int); /* ** Scan through the expression pExpr. Replace every reference to ** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th ** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column ** unchanged.) ** ** This routine is part of the flattening procedure. A subquery ** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the ** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that ** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine makes the necessary ** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table ** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery. */ static Expr *substExpr( SubstContext *pSubst, /* Description of the substitution */ Expr *pExpr /* Expr in which substitution occurs */ ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 | sqlite3WalkSelect(&w, pSelect); } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) /* ** Assign new cursor numbers to each of the items in pSrc. For each | | | 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 | sqlite3WalkSelect(&w, pSelect); } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) /* ** Assign new cursor numbers to each of the items in pSrc. For each ** new cursor number assigned, set an entry in the aCsrMap[] array ** to map the old cursor number to the new: ** ** aCsrMap[iOld+1] = iNew; ** ** The array is guaranteed by the caller to be large enough for all ** existing cursor numbers in pSrc. aCsrMap[0] is the array size. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 | renumberCursorDoMapping(pWalker, &pExpr->w.iJoin); } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Assign a new cursor number to each cursor in the FROM clause (Select.pSrc) | | | | | | 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 | renumberCursorDoMapping(pWalker, &pExpr->w.iJoin); } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Assign a new cursor number to each cursor in the FROM clause (Select.pSrc) ** of the SELECT statement passed as the second argument, and to each ** cursor in the FROM clause of any FROM clause sub-selects, recursively. ** Except, do not assign a new cursor number to the iExcept'th element in ** the FROM clause of (*p). Update all expressions and other references ** to refer to the new cursor numbers. ** ** Argument aCsrMap is an array that may be used for temporary working ** space. Two guarantees are made by the caller: ** ** * the array is larger than the largest cursor number used within the ** select statement passed as an argument, and ** ** * the array entries for all cursor numbers that do *not* appear in ** FROM clauses of the select statement as described above are ** initialized to zero. */ static void renumberCursors( Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */ Select *p, /* Select to renumber cursors within */ int iExcept, /* FROM clause item to skip */ int *aCsrMap /* Working space */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 | ** ** This routine attempts to rewrite queries such as the above into ** a single flat select, like this: ** ** SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5 ** ** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result | | | 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 | ** ** This routine attempts to rewrite queries such as the above into ** a single flat select, like this: ** ** SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5 ** ** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result ** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might ** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be ** avoided. ** ** Flattening is subject to the following constraints: ** ** (**) We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries. Was: ** The subquery and the outer query cannot both be aggregates. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 | ** is now managed correctly ** (3d) the outer query may not be DISTINCT. ** See also (26) for restrictions on RIGHT JOIN. ** ** (4) The subquery can not be DISTINCT. ** ** (**) At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT | | | | | | 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 | ** is now managed correctly ** (3d) the outer query may not be DISTINCT. ** See also (26) for restrictions on RIGHT JOIN. ** ** (4) The subquery can not be DISTINCT. ** ** (**) At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT ** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction ** (4) has since been expanded to exclude all DISTINCT subqueries. ** ** (**) We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries. Was: ** If the subquery is aggregate, the outer query may not be DISTINCT. ** ** (7) The subquery must have a FROM clause. TODO: For subqueries without ** A FROM clause, consider adding a FROM clause with the special ** table sqlite_once that consists of a single row containing a ** single NULL. ** ** (8) If the subquery uses LIMIT then the outer query may not be a join. ** ** (9) If the subquery uses LIMIT then the outer query may not be aggregate. ** ** (**) Restriction (10) was removed from the code on 2005-02-05 but we ** accidentally carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15. Original ** constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query ** may not use LIMIT." ** ** (11) The subquery and the outer query may not both have ORDER BY clauses. ** ** (**) Not implemented. Subsumed into restriction (3). Was previously ** a separate restriction deriving from ticket #350. ** ** (13) The subquery and outer query may not both use LIMIT. ** ** (14) The subquery may not use OFFSET. ** ** (15) If the outer query is part of a compound select, then the ** subquery may not use LIMIT. ** (See ticket #2339 and ticket [02a8e81d44]). ** ** (16) If the outer query is aggregate, then the subquery may not ** use ORDER BY. (Ticket #2942) This used to not matter ** until we introduced the group_concat() function. ** ** (17) If the subquery is a compound select, then ** (17a) all compound operators must be a UNION ALL, and ** (17b) no terms within the subquery compound may be aggregate ** or DISTINCT, and ** (17c) every term within the subquery compound must have a FROM clause ** (17d) the outer query may not be |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 | ** ** (23) If the outer query is a recursive CTE, then the sub-query may not be ** a compound query. This restriction is because transforming the ** parent to a compound query confuses the code that handles ** recursive queries in multiSelect(). ** ** (**) We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries. Was: | | | 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 | ** ** (23) If the outer query is a recursive CTE, then the sub-query may not be ** a compound query. This restriction is because transforming the ** parent to a compound query confuses the code that handles ** recursive queries in multiSelect(). ** ** (**) We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries. Was: ** The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or ** or max() functions. (Without this restriction, a query like: ** "SELECT x FROM (SELECT max(y), x FROM t1)" would not necessarily ** return the value X for which Y was maximal.) ** ** (25) If either the subquery or the parent query contains a window ** function in the select list or ORDER BY clause, flattening ** is not attempted. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 | Select *pParent; /* Current UNION ALL term of the other query */ Select *pSub; /* The inner query or "subquery" */ Select *pSub1; /* Pointer to the rightmost select in sub-query */ SrcList *pSrc; /* The FROM clause of the outer query */ SrcList *pSubSrc; /* The FROM clause of the subquery */ int iParent; /* VDBE cursor number of the pSub result set temp table */ int iNewParent = -1;/* Replacement table for iParent */ | | | 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 | Select *pParent; /* Current UNION ALL term of the other query */ Select *pSub; /* The inner query or "subquery" */ Select *pSub1; /* Pointer to the rightmost select in sub-query */ SrcList *pSrc; /* The FROM clause of the outer query */ SrcList *pSubSrc; /* The FROM clause of the subquery */ int iParent; /* VDBE cursor number of the pSub result set temp table */ int iNewParent = -1;/* Replacement table for iParent */ int isOuterJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */ int i; /* Loop counter */ Expr *pWhere; /* The WHERE clause */ SrcItem *pSubitem; /* The subquery */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Walker w; /* Walker to persist agginfo data */ int *aCsrMap = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4477 4478 4479 4480 4481 4482 4483 | /* Authorize the subquery */ pParse->zAuthContext = pSubitem->zName; TESTONLY(i =) sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_SELECT, 0, 0, 0); testcase( i==SQLITE_DENY ); pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext; | | | | | | 4477 4478 4479 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 | /* Authorize the subquery */ pParse->zAuthContext = pSubitem->zName; TESTONLY(i =) sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_SELECT, 0, 0, 0); testcase( i==SQLITE_DENY ); pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext; /* Delete the transient structures associated with the subquery */ pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect; sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zDatabase); sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zName); sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zAlias); pSubitem->zDatabase = 0; pSubitem->zName = 0; pSubitem->zAlias = 0; pSubitem->pSelect = 0; assert( pSubitem->fg.isUsing!=0 || pSubitem->u3.pOn==0 ); /* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must ** be of the form: ** ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause> ** ** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or ** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original ** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple ** select statements in the compound sub-query. ** ** Example: ** ** SELECT a+1 FROM ( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 | ** ** pSubitem->pTab is always non-NULL by test restrictions and tests above. */ if( ALWAYS(pSubitem->pTab!=0) ){ Table *pTabToDel = pSubitem->pTab; if( pTabToDel->nTabRef==1 ){ Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse); | | | 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 | ** ** pSubitem->pTab is always non-NULL by test restrictions and tests above. */ if( ALWAYS(pSubitem->pTab!=0) ){ Table *pTabToDel = pSubitem->pTab; if( pTabToDel->nTabRef==1 ){ Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse); sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pToplevel, (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3DeleteTable, pTabToDel); testcase( pToplevel->earlyCleanup ); }else{ pTabToDel->nTabRef--; } pSubitem->pTab = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 | pSubSrc = pSub->pSrc; /* FROM clause of subquery */ nSubSrc = pSubSrc->nSrc; /* Number of terms in subquery FROM clause */ pSrc = pParent->pSrc; /* FROM clause of the outer query */ if( pParent==p ){ jointype = pSubitem->fg.jointype; /* First time through the loop */ } | | | 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 | pSubSrc = pSub->pSrc; /* FROM clause of subquery */ nSubSrc = pSubSrc->nSrc; /* Number of terms in subquery FROM clause */ pSrc = pParent->pSrc; /* FROM clause of the outer query */ if( pParent==p ){ jointype = pSubitem->fg.jointype; /* First time through the loop */ } /* The subquery uses a single slot of the FROM clause of the outer ** query. If the subquery has more than one element in its FROM clause, ** then expand the outer query to make space for it to hold all elements ** of the subquery. ** ** Example: ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 | *pItem = pSubSrc->a[i]; pItem->fg.jointype |= ltorj; iNewParent = pSubSrc->a[i].iCursor; memset(&pSubSrc->a[i], 0, sizeof(pSubSrc->a[i])); } pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype &= JT_LTORJ; pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype |= jointype | ltorj; | | | | | | 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 | *pItem = pSubSrc->a[i]; pItem->fg.jointype |= ltorj; iNewParent = pSubSrc->a[i].iCursor; memset(&pSubSrc->a[i], 0, sizeof(pSubSrc->a[i])); } pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype &= JT_LTORJ; pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype |= jointype | ltorj; /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for ** references to the iParent in the outer query. ** ** Example: ** ** SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b; ** \ \_____________ subquery __________/ / ** \_____________________ outer query ______________________________/ ** ** We look at every expression in the outer query and every place we see ** "a" we substitute "x*3" and every place we see "b" we substitute "y+10". */ if( pSub->pOrderBy && (pParent->selFlags & SF_NoopOrderBy)==0 ){ /* At this point, any non-zero iOrderByCol values indicate that the ** ORDER BY column expression is identical to the iOrderByCol'th ** expression returned by SELECT statement pSub. Since these values ** do not necessarily correspond to columns in SELECT statement pParent, ** zero them before transferring the ORDER BY clause. ** ** Not doing this may cause an error if a subsequent call to this ** function attempts to flatten a compound sub-query into pParent ** (the only way this can happen is if the compound sub-query is ** currently part of pSub->pSrc). See ticket [d11a6e908f]. */ ExprList *pOrderBy = pSub->pOrderBy; for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 | x.iTable = iParent; x.iNewTable = iNewParent; x.isOuterJoin = isOuterJoin; x.pEList = pSub->pEList; x.pCList = findLeftmostExprlist(pSub); substSelect(&x, pParent, 0); } | | | | < | 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 | x.iTable = iParent; x.iNewTable = iNewParent; x.isOuterJoin = isOuterJoin; x.pEList = pSub->pEList; x.pCList = findLeftmostExprlist(pSub); substSelect(&x, pParent, 0); } /* The flattened query is a compound if either the inner or the ** outer query is a compound. */ pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Compound; assert( (pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct)==0 ); /* restriction (17b) */ /* ** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y; ** ** One is tempted to try to add a and b to combine the limits. But this ** does not work if either limit is negative. */ if( pSub->pLimit ){ pParent->pLimit = pSub->pLimit; pSub->pLimit = 0; } /* Recompute the SrcItem.colUsed masks for the flattened ** tables. */ for(i=0; i<nSubSrc; i++){ recomputeColumnsUsed(pParent, &pSrc->a[i+iFrom]); } } /* Finally, delete what is left of the subquery and return success. */ sqlite3AggInfoPersistWalkerInit(&w, pParse); sqlite3WalkSelect(&w,pSub1); sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSub1); #if TREETRACE_ENABLED if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x4 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 | u32 mExcludeOn; /* Which ON expressions to exclude from considertion. ** Either EP_OuterON or EP_InnerON|EP_OuterON */ Expr **apExpr; /* [i*2] is COLUMN and [i*2+1] is VALUE */ }; /* ** Add a new entry to the pConst object. Except, do not add duplicate | | | 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 | u32 mExcludeOn; /* Which ON expressions to exclude from considertion. ** Either EP_OuterON or EP_InnerON|EP_OuterON */ Expr **apExpr; /* [i*2] is COLUMN and [i*2+1] is VALUE */ }; /* ** Add a new entry to the pConst object. Except, do not add duplicate ** pColumn entries. Also, do not add if doing so would not be appropriate. ** ** The caller guarantees the pColumn is a column and pValue is a constant. ** This routine has to do some additional checks before completing the ** insert. */ static void constInsert( WhereConst *pConst, /* The WhereConst into which we are inserting */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 | constInsert(pConst,pLeft,pRight,pExpr); } } /* ** This is a helper function for Walker callback propagateConstantExprRewrite(). ** | | | | | 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 | constInsert(pConst,pLeft,pRight,pExpr); } } /* ** This is a helper function for Walker callback propagateConstantExprRewrite(). ** ** Argument pExpr is a candidate expression to be replaced by a value. If ** pExpr is equivalent to one of the columns named in pWalker->u.pConst, ** then overwrite it with the corresponding value. Except, do not do so ** if argument bIgnoreAffBlob is non-zero and the affinity of pExpr ** is SQLITE_AFF_BLOB. */ static int propagateConstantExprRewriteOne( WhereConst *pConst, Expr *pExpr, int bIgnoreAffBlob ){ int i; if( pConst->pOomFault[0] ) return WRC_Prune; if( pExpr->op!=TK_COLUMN ) return WRC_Continue; if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FixedCol|pConst->mExcludeOn) ){ testcase( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FixedCol) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 | ** A substitution is made if: ** ** + pExpr is a column with an affinity other than BLOB that matches ** one of the columns in pWalker->u.pConst, or ** ** + pExpr is a binary comparison operator (=, <=, >=, <, >) that ** uses an affinity other than TEXT and one of its immediate | | | 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 | ** A substitution is made if: ** ** + pExpr is a column with an affinity other than BLOB that matches ** one of the columns in pWalker->u.pConst, or ** ** + pExpr is a binary comparison operator (=, <=, >=, <, >) that ** uses an affinity other than TEXT and one of its immediate ** children is a column that matches one of the columns in ** pWalker->u.pConst. */ static int propagateConstantExprRewrite(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ WhereConst *pConst = pWalker->u.pConst; assert( TK_GT==TK_EQ+1 ); assert( TK_LE==TK_EQ+2 ); assert( TK_LT==TK_EQ+3 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946 4947 | ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(a INT,b TEXT); ** INSERT INTO t1 VALUES(123,'0123'); ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=123 AND b=a; ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=123 AND b=123; ** ** The two SELECT statements above should return different answers. b=a | | | 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946 4947 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 | ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(a INT,b TEXT); ** INSERT INTO t1 VALUES(123,'0123'); ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=123 AND b=a; ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=123 AND b=123; ** ** The two SELECT statements above should return different answers. b=a ** is always true because the comparison uses numeric affinity, but b=123 ** is false because it uses text affinity and '0123' is not the same as '123'. ** To work around this, the expression tree is not actually changed from ** "b=a" to "b=123" but rather the "a" in "b=a" is tagged with EP_FixedCol ** and the "123" value is hung off of the pLeft pointer. Code generator ** routines know to generate the constant "123" instead of looking up the ** column value. Also, to avoid collation problems, this optimization is ** only attempted if the "a=123" term uses the default BINARY collation. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 | w.xSelectCallback2 = 0; w.walkerDepth = 0; w.u.pConst = &x; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, p->pWhere); sqlite3DbFree(x.pParse->db, x.apExpr); nChng += x.nChng; } | | | | | | | | 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 | w.xSelectCallback2 = 0; w.walkerDepth = 0; w.u.pConst = &x; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, p->pWhere); sqlite3DbFree(x.pParse->db, x.apExpr); nChng += x.nChng; } }while( x.nChng ); return nChng; } #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) # if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC) /* ** This function is called to determine whether or not it is safe to ** push WHERE clause expression pExpr down to FROM clause sub-query ** pSubq, which contains at least one window function. Return 1 ** if it is safe and the expression should be pushed down, or 0 ** otherwise. ** ** It is only safe to push the expression down if it consists only ** of constants and copies of expressions that appear in the PARTITION ** BY clause of all window function used by the sub-query. It is safe ** to filter out entire partitions, but not rows within partitions, as ** this may change the results of the window functions. ** ** At the time this function is called it is guaranteed that ** ** * the sub-query uses only one distinct window frame, and ** * that the window frame has a PARTITION BY clause. */ static int pushDownWindowCheck(Parse *pParse, Select *pSubq, Expr *pExpr){ assert( pSubq->pWin->pPartition ); assert( (pSubq->selFlags & SF_MultiPart)==0 ); assert( pSubq->pPrior==0 ); return sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(pParse, pExpr, pSubq->pWin->pPartition); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 | ** JOIN (SELECT 1 AS b2 UNION ALL SELECT 2) AS bb ON (a1=b2) ** LEFT JOIN (SELECT 8 AS c3 UNION ALL SELECT 9) AS cc ON (b2=2); ** ** The correct answer is three rows: (1,1,NULL),(2,2,8),(2,2,9). ** But if the (b2=2) term were to be pushed down into the bb subquery, ** then the (1,1,NULL) row would be suppressed. ** | | | | | | 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 | ** JOIN (SELECT 1 AS b2 UNION ALL SELECT 2) AS bb ON (a1=b2) ** LEFT JOIN (SELECT 8 AS c3 UNION ALL SELECT 9) AS cc ON (b2=2); ** ** The correct answer is three rows: (1,1,NULL),(2,2,8),(2,2,9). ** But if the (b2=2) term were to be pushed down into the bb subquery, ** then the (1,1,NULL) row would be suppressed. ** ** (6) Window functions make things tricky as changes to the WHERE clause ** of the inner query could change the window over which window ** functions are calculated. Therefore, do not attempt the optimization ** if: ** ** (6a) The inner query uses multiple incompatible window partitions. ** ** (6b) The inner query is a compound and uses window-functions. ** ** (6c) The WHERE clause does not consist entirely of constants and ** copies of expressions found in the PARTITION BY clause of ** all window-functions used by the sub-query. It is safe to ** filter out entire partitions, as this does not change the ** window over which any window-function is calculated. ** ** (7) The inner query is a Common Table Expression (CTE) that should ** be materialized. (This restriction is implemented in the calling ** routine.) ** ** (8) If the subquery is a compound that uses UNION, INTERSECT, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 | } if( pSubq->pPrior ){ Select *pSel; int notUnionAll = 0; for(pSel=pSubq; pSel; pSel=pSel->pPrior){ u8 op = pSel->op; | | | 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 | } if( pSubq->pPrior ){ Select *pSel; int notUnionAll = 0; for(pSel=pSubq; pSel; pSel=pSel->pPrior){ u8 op = pSel->op; assert( op==TK_ALL || op==TK_SELECT || op==TK_UNION || op==TK_INTERSECT || op==TK_EXCEPT ); if( op!=TK_ALL && op!=TK_SELECT ){ notUnionAll = 1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC if( pSel->pWin ) return 0; /* restriction (6b) */ #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 | #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Only the first term of a compound can have a WITH clause. But make ** sure no other terms are marked SF_Recursive in case something changes ** in the future. */ { | | | 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 | #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Only the first term of a compound can have a WITH clause. But make ** sure no other terms are marked SF_Recursive in case something changes ** in the future. */ { Select *pX; for(pX=pSubq; pX; pX=pX->pPrior){ assert( (pX->selFlags & (SF_Recursive))==0 ); } } #endif if( pSubq->pLimit!=0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 | if( isLeftJoin && (ExprHasProperty(pWhere,EP_OuterON)==0 || pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor) ){ return 0; /* restriction (4) */ } if( ExprHasProperty(pWhere,EP_OuterON) | | | 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 | if( isLeftJoin && (ExprHasProperty(pWhere,EP_OuterON)==0 || pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor) ){ return 0; /* restriction (4) */ } if( ExprHasProperty(pWhere,EP_OuterON) && pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor ){ return 0; /* restriction (5) */ } #endif if( sqlite3ExprIsSingleTableConstraint(pWhere, pSrcList, iSrc) ){ nChng++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 | } return nChng; } /* ** The pFunc is the only aggregate function in the query. Check to see | | | 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 | } return nChng; } /* ** The pFunc is the only aggregate function in the query. Check to see ** if the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization. ** ** If the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization, then set ** *ppMinMax to be an ORDER BY clause to be used for the optimization ** and return either WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN or WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX depending on ** whether pFunc is a min() or max() function. ** ** If the query is not a candidate for the min/max optimization, return |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 | u8 sortFlags = 0; assert( *ppMinMax==0 ); assert( pFunc->op==TK_AGG_FUNCTION ); assert( !IsWindowFunc(pFunc) ); assert( ExprUseXList(pFunc) ); pEList = pFunc->x.pList; | | | 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 | u8 sortFlags = 0; assert( *ppMinMax==0 ); assert( pFunc->op==TK_AGG_FUNCTION ); assert( !IsWindowFunc(pFunc) ); assert( ExprUseXList(pFunc) ); pEList = pFunc->x.pList; if( pEList==0 || pEList->nExpr!=1 || ExprHasProperty(pFunc, EP_WinFunc) || OptimizationDisabled(db, SQLITE_MinMaxOpt) ){ return eRet; } assert( !ExprHasProperty(pFunc, EP_IntValue) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 | assert( pOrderBy!=0 || db->mallocFailed ); if( pOrderBy ) pOrderBy->a[0].fg.sortFlags = sortFlags; return eRet; } /* ** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query. | | | | | 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 | assert( pOrderBy!=0 || db->mallocFailed ); if( pOrderBy ) pOrderBy->a[0].fg.sortFlags = sortFlags; return eRet; } /* ** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query. ** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This ** function tests if the SELECT is of the form: ** ** SELECT count(*) FROM <tbl> ** ** where table is a database table, not a sub-select or view. If the query ** does match this pattern, then a pointer to the Table object representing ** <tbl> is returned. Otherwise, NULL is returned. ** ** This routine checks to see if it is safe to use the count optimization. ** A correct answer is still obtained (though perhaps more slowly) if ** this routine returns NULL when it could have returned a table pointer. ** But returning the pointer when NULL should have been returned can ** result in incorrect answers and/or crashes. So, when in doubt, return NULL. */ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){ Table *pTab; Expr *pExpr; assert( !p->pGroupBy ); if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1 || p->pSrc->nSrc!=1 || p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect || pAggInfo->nFunc!=1 || p->pHaving ){ return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453 | return pTab; } /* ** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an ** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there | | | | | | | 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453 5454 5455 5456 5457 5458 5459 5460 5461 5462 5463 5464 5465 5466 5467 5468 5469 5470 5471 5472 5473 5474 5475 5476 5477 5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 | return pTab; } /* ** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an ** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there ** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return ** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate ** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK. */ int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, SrcItem *pFrom){ Table *pTab = pFrom->pTab; char *zIndexedBy = pFrom->u1.zIndexedBy; Index *pIdx; assert( pTab!=0 ); assert( pFrom->fg.isIndexedBy!=0 ); for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy); pIdx=pIdx->pNext ); if( !pIdx ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "no such index: %s", zIndexedBy, 0); pParse->checkSchema = 1; return SQLITE_ERROR; } assert( pFrom->fg.isCte==0 ); pFrom->u2.pIBIndex = pIdx; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with ** an alternative collating sequence. ** ** SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2 ORDER BY .. COLLATE ... ** ** These are rewritten as a subquery: ** ** SELECT * FROM (SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 | return 1; } return 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE /* | | | | | 5567 5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579 5580 5581 5582 5583 | return 1; } return 0; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE /* ** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested ** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by ** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE) ** then return a pointer to the CTE definition for that table. Otherwise ** return NULL. ** ** If a non-NULL value is returned, set *ppContext to point to the With ** object that the returned CTE belongs to. */ static struct Cte *searchWith( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 | /* The code generator maintains a stack of active WITH clauses ** with the inner-most WITH clause being at the top of the stack. ** ** This routine pushes the WITH clause passed as the second argument ** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this ** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack but should instead ** be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when | | | | | | 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647 5648 5649 5650 5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 | /* The code generator maintains a stack of active WITH clauses ** with the inner-most WITH clause being at the top of the stack. ** ** This routine pushes the WITH clause passed as the second argument ** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this ** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack but should instead ** be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when ** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT ** statement with which it is associated. ** ** This routine returns a copy of pWith. Or, if bFree is true and ** the pWith object is destroyed immediately due to an OOM condition, ** then this routine return NULL. ** ** If bFree is true, do not continue to use the pWith pointer after ** calling this routine, Instead, use only the return value. */ With *sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){ if( pWith ){ if( bFree ){ pWith = (With*)sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3WithDelete, pWith); if( pWith==0 ) return 0; } if( pParse->nErr==0 ){ assert( pParse->pWith!=pWith ); pWith->pOuter = pParse->pWith; pParse->pWith = pWith; } } return pWith; } /* ** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by ** a WITH clause on the stack currently maintained by the parser (on the ** pParse->pWith linked list). And if currently processing a CTE ** CTE expression, through routine checks to see if the reference is ** a recursive reference to the CTE. ** ** If pFrom matches a CTE according to either of these two above, pFrom->pTab ** and other fields are populated accordingly. ** ** Return 0 if no match is found. ** Return 1 if a match is found. ** Return 2 if an error condition is detected. */ static int resolveFromTermToCte( Parse *pParse, /* The parsing context */ Walker *pWalker, /* Current tree walker */ SrcItem *pFrom /* The FROM clause term to check */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 | bMayRecursive = ( pSel->op==TK_ALL || pSel->op==TK_UNION ); while( bMayRecursive && pRecTerm->op==pSel->op ){ int i; SrcList *pSrc = pRecTerm->pSrc; assert( pRecTerm->pPrior!=0 ); for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc; i++){ SrcItem *pItem = &pSrc->a[i]; | | | | 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751 5752 5753 5754 5755 5756 | bMayRecursive = ( pSel->op==TK_ALL || pSel->op==TK_UNION ); while( bMayRecursive && pRecTerm->op==pSel->op ){ int i; SrcList *pSrc = pRecTerm->pSrc; assert( pRecTerm->pPrior!=0 ); for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc; i++){ SrcItem *pItem = &pSrc->a[i]; if( pItem->zDatabase==0 && pItem->zName!=0 && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pItem->zName, pCte->zName) ){ pItem->pTab = pTab; pTab->nTabRef++; pItem->fg.isRecursive = 1; if( pRecTerm->selFlags & SF_Recursive ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 | } return 0; /* No match */ } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE /* | | | | 5820 5821 5822 5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 | } return 0; /* No match */ } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE /* ** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH ** clause, pop it from the stack stored as part of the Parse object. ** ** This function is used as the xSelectCallback2() callback by ** sqlite3SelectExpand() when walking a SELECT tree to resolve table ** names and other FROM clause elements. */ void sqlite3SelectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse; if( OK_IF_ALWAYS_TRUE(pParse->pWith) && p->pPrior==0 ){ With *pWith = findRightmost(p)->pWith; if( pWith!=0 ){ assert( pParse->pWith==pWith || pParse->nErr ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 5912 | /* ** This routine is a Walker callback for "expanding" a SELECT statement. ** "Expanding" means to do the following: ** ** (1) Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every ** element of the FROM clause. ** | | | 5905 5906 5907 5908 5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919 | /* ** This routine is a Walker callback for "expanding" a SELECT statement. ** "Expanding" means to do the following: ** ** (1) Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every ** element of the FROM clause. ** ** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that ** defines FROM clause. When views appear in the FROM clause, ** fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement ** that implements the view. A copy is made of the view's SELECT ** statement so that we can freely modify or delete that statement ** without worrying about messing up the persistent representation ** of the view. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 | } /* If a column is marked as 'hidden', omit it from the expanded ** result-set list unless the SELECT has the SF_IncludeHidden ** bit set. */ if( (p->selFlags & SF_IncludeHidden)==0 | | | 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 | } /* If a column is marked as 'hidden', omit it from the expanded ** result-set list unless the SELECT has the SF_IncludeHidden ** bit set. */ if( (p->selFlags & SF_IncludeHidden)==0 && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j]) ){ continue; } if( (pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_NOEXPAND)!=0 && zTName==0 && (selFlags & (SF_NestedFrom))==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 | static void printAggInfo(AggInfo *pAggInfo){ int ii; for(ii=0; ii<pAggInfo->nColumn; ii++){ struct AggInfo_col *pCol = &pAggInfo->aCol[ii]; sqlite3DebugPrintf( "agg-column[%d] pTab=%s iTable=%d iColumn=%d iMem=%d" " iSorterColumn=%d %s\n", | | | | 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 | static void printAggInfo(AggInfo *pAggInfo){ int ii; for(ii=0; ii<pAggInfo->nColumn; ii++){ struct AggInfo_col *pCol = &pAggInfo->aCol[ii]; sqlite3DebugPrintf( "agg-column[%d] pTab=%s iTable=%d iColumn=%d iMem=%d" " iSorterColumn=%d %s\n", ii, pCol->pTab ? pCol->pTab->zName : "NULL", pCol->iTable, pCol->iColumn, pAggInfo->iFirstReg+ii, pCol->iSorterColumn, ii>=pAggInfo->nAccumulator ? "" : " Accumulator"); sqlite3TreeViewExpr(0, pAggInfo->aCol[ii].pCExpr, 0); } for(ii=0; ii<pAggInfo->nFunc; ii++){ sqlite3DebugPrintf("agg-func[%d]: iMem=%d\n", ii, pAggInfo->iFirstReg+pAggInfo->nColumn+ii); sqlite3TreeViewExpr(0, pAggInfo->aFunc[ii].pFExpr, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6564 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 | ** ** This routine may only be called once for each AggInfo object. Prior ** to calling this routine: ** ** * The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays may be modified ** * The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may not be used ** | | | 6563 6564 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577 | ** ** This routine may only be called once for each AggInfo object. Prior ** to calling this routine: ** ** * The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays may be modified ** * The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may not be used ** ** After calling this routine: ** ** * The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays are fixed ** * The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may be used ** */ static void assignAggregateRegisters(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){ assert( pAggInfo!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 | assert( ExprUseXList(pE) ); if( pE->x.pList==0 || pE->x.pList->nExpr!=1 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "DISTINCT aggregates must have exactly one " "argument"); pFunc->iDistinct = -1; }else{ KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pE->x.pList,0,0); | | | 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 | assert( ExprUseXList(pE) ); if( pE->x.pList==0 || pE->x.pList->nExpr!=1 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "DISTINCT aggregates must have exactly one " "argument"); pFunc->iDistinct = -1; }else{ KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pE->x.pList,0,0); pFunc->iDistAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, pFunc->iDistinct, 0, 0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO); ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 0, "USE TEMP B-TREE FOR %s(DISTINCT)", pFunc->pFunc->zName)); } } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 6650 6651 | ** ** If regAcc is non-zero and there are no min() or max() aggregates ** in pAggInfo, then only populate the pAggInfo->nAccumulator accumulator ** registers if register regAcc contains 0. The caller will take care ** of setting and clearing regAcc. */ static void updateAccumulator( | | | | 6644 6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 6650 6651 6652 6653 6654 6655 6656 6657 6658 6659 | ** ** If regAcc is non-zero and there are no min() or max() aggregates ** in pAggInfo, then only populate the pAggInfo->nAccumulator accumulator ** registers if register regAcc contains 0. The caller will take care ** of setting and clearing regAcc. */ static void updateAccumulator( Parse *pParse, int regAcc, AggInfo *pAggInfo, int eDistinctType ){ Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; int i; int regHit = 0; int addrHitTest = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6670 6671 6672 6673 6674 6675 6676 | int regAgg; ExprList *pList; assert( ExprUseXList(pF->pFExpr) ); assert( !IsWindowFunc(pF->pFExpr) ); pList = pF->pFExpr->x.pList; if( ExprHasProperty(pF->pFExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ Expr *pFilter = pF->pFExpr->y.pWin->pFilter; | | | | | | | 6669 6670 6671 6672 6673 6674 6675 6676 6677 6678 6679 6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 6687 6688 6689 6690 6691 6692 6693 6694 6695 6696 6697 6698 6699 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 6706 6707 6708 6709 6710 6711 6712 6713 6714 6715 | int regAgg; ExprList *pList; assert( ExprUseXList(pF->pFExpr) ); assert( !IsWindowFunc(pF->pFExpr) ); pList = pF->pFExpr->x.pList; if( ExprHasProperty(pF->pFExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ Expr *pFilter = pF->pFExpr->y.pWin->pFilter; if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator && (pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL) && regAcc ){ /* If regAcc==0, there there exists some min() or max() function ** without a FILTER clause that will ensure the magnet registers ** are populated. */ if( regHit==0 ) regHit = ++pParse->nMem; /* If this is the first row of the group (regAcc contains 0), clear the ** "magnet" register regHit so that the accumulator registers ** are populated if the FILTER clause jumps over the the ** invocation of min() or max() altogether. Or, if this is not ** the first row (regAcc contains 1), set the magnet register so that ** the accumulators are not populated unless the min()/max() is invoked ** and indicates that they should be. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, regAcc, regHit); } addrNext = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pFilter, addrNext, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); } if( pList ){ nArg = pList->nExpr; regAgg = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nArg); sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(pParse, pList, regAgg, 0, SQLITE_ECEL_DUP); }else{ nArg = 0; regAgg = 0; } if( pF->iDistinct>=0 && pList ){ if( addrNext==0 ){ addrNext = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); } pF->iDistinct = codeDistinct(pParse, eDistinctType, pF->iDistinct, addrNext, pList, regAgg); } if( pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){ CollSeq *pColl = 0; struct ExprList_item *pItem; int j; assert( pList!=0 ); /* pList!=0 if pF->pFunc has NEEDCOLL */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774 6775 | #else # define explainSimpleCount(a,b,c) #endif /* ** sqlite3WalkExpr() callback used by havingToWhere(). ** | | | | | 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774 6775 6776 6777 6778 6779 6780 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 6793 6794 6795 6796 6797 6798 6799 6800 | #else # define explainSimpleCount(a,b,c) #endif /* ** sqlite3WalkExpr() callback used by havingToWhere(). ** ** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return ** WRC_Continue to tell sqlite3WalkExpr() to iterate through child nodes. ** ** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the ** sub-expression matches the criteria for being moved to the WHERE ** clause. If so, add it to the WHERE clause and replace the sub-expression ** within the HAVING expression with a constant "1". */ static int havingToWhereExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ if( pExpr->op!=TK_AND ){ Select *pS = pWalker->u.pSelect; /* This routine is called before the HAVING clause of the current ** SELECT is analyzed for aggregates. So if pExpr->pAggInfo is set ** here, it indicates that the expression is a correlated reference to a ** column from an outer aggregate query, or an aggregate function that ** belongs to an outer query. Do not move the expression to the WHERE ** clause in this obscure case, as doing so may corrupt the outer Select ** statements AggInfo structure. */ if( sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(pWalker->pParse, pExpr, pS->pGroupBy) && ExprAlwaysFalse(pExpr)==0 && pExpr->pAggInfo==0 ){ sqlite3 *db = pWalker->pParse->db; Expr *pNew = sqlite3Expr(db, TK_INTEGER, "1"); if( pNew ){ Expr *pWhere = pS->pWhere; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 | pItem--; if( pItem->pSelect!=0 ) return 0; /* (1c-i) */ } return 1; } /* | | | 7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077 7078 | pItem--; if( pItem->pSelect!=0 ) return 0; /* (1c-i) */ } return 1; } /* ** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument. ** ** The results are returned according to the SelectDest structure. ** See comments in sqliteInt.h for further information. ** ** This routine returns the number of errors. If any errors are ** encountered, then an appropriate error message is left in ** pParse->zErrMsg. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 | #endif assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistFifo ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Fifo ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue ); if( IgnorableDistinct(pDest) ){ | | | | 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 | #endif assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistFifo ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Fifo ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue ); if( IgnorableDistinct(pDest) ){ assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union || pDest->eDest==SRT_Except || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistQueue || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistFifo ); /* All of these destinations are also able to ignore the ORDER BY clause */ if( p->pOrderBy ){ #if TREETRACE_ENABLED TREETRACE(0x800,pParse,p, ("dropping superfluous ORDER BY:\n")); if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x800 ){ sqlite3TreeViewExprList(0, p->pOrderBy, 0, "ORDERBY"); } #endif sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3ExprListDelete, p->pOrderBy); testcase( pParse->earlyCleanup ); p->pOrderBy = 0; } p->selFlags &= ~SF_Distinct; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 | TREETRACE(0x10,pParse,p, ("after name resolution:\n")); sqlite3TreeViewSelect(0, p, 0); } #endif /* If the SF_UFSrcCheck flag is set, then this function is being called ** as part of populating the temp table for an UPDATE...FROM statement. | | | | | | | | 7158 7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7166 7167 7168 7169 7170 7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 7183 | TREETRACE(0x10,pParse,p, ("after name resolution:\n")); sqlite3TreeViewSelect(0, p, 0); } #endif /* If the SF_UFSrcCheck flag is set, then this function is being called ** as part of populating the temp table for an UPDATE...FROM statement. ** In this case, it is an error if the target object (pSrc->a[0]) name ** or alias is duplicated within FROM clause (pSrc->a[1..n]). ** ** Postgres disallows this case too. The reason is that some other ** systems handle this case differently, and not all the same way, ** which is just confusing. To avoid this, we follow PG's lead and ** disallow it altogether. */ if( p->selFlags & SF_UFSrcCheck ){ SrcItem *p0 = &p->pSrc->a[0]; if( sameSrcAlias(p0, p->pSrc) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "target object/alias may not appear in FROM clause: %s", p0->zAlias ? p0->zAlias : p0->pTab->zName ); goto select_end; } /* Clear the SF_UFSrcCheck flag. The check has already been performed, ** and leaving this flag set can cause errors if a compound sub-query |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7270 7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 | } } assert( pItem->iCursor>=0 ); unsetJoinExpr(p->pWhere, pItem->iCursor, pTabList->a[0].fg.jointype & JT_LTORJ); } | | | 7269 7270 7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 7277 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 | } } assert( pItem->iCursor>=0 ); unsetJoinExpr(p->pWhere, pItem->iCursor, pTabList->a[0].fg.jointype & JT_LTORJ); } /* No further action if this term of the FROM clause is not a subquery */ if( pSub==0 ) continue; /* Catch mismatch in the declared columns of a view and the number of ** columns in the SELECT on the RHS */ if( pTab->nCol!=pSub->pEList->nExpr ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "expected %d columns for '%s' but got %d", pTab->nCol, pTab->zName, pSub->pEList->nExpr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 | && pSub->pLimit==0 /* Condition (1) */ && (pSub->selFlags & SF_OrderByReqd)==0 /* Condition (2) */ && (p->selFlags & SF_OrderByReqd)==0 /* Condition (3) and (4) */ && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_OmitOrderBy) ){ TREETRACE(0x800,pParse,p, ("omit superfluous ORDER BY on %r FROM-clause subquery\n",i+1)); | | | 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 | && pSub->pLimit==0 /* Condition (1) */ && (pSub->selFlags & SF_OrderByReqd)==0 /* Condition (2) */ && (p->selFlags & SF_OrderByReqd)==0 /* Condition (3) and (4) */ && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_OmitOrderBy) ){ TREETRACE(0x800,pParse,p, ("omit superfluous ORDER BY on %r FROM-clause subquery\n",i+1)); sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse, (void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3ExprListDelete, pSub->pOrderBy); pSub->pOrderBy = 0; } /* If the outer query contains a "complex" result set (that is, ** if the result set of the outer query uses functions or subqueries) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 | */ pParse->nHeight += sqlite3SelectExprHeight(p); /* Make copies of constant WHERE-clause terms in the outer query down ** inside the subquery. This can help the subquery to run more efficiently. */ if( OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_PushDown) | | | 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 | */ pParse->nHeight += sqlite3SelectExprHeight(p); /* Make copies of constant WHERE-clause terms in the outer query down ** inside the subquery. This can help the subquery to run more efficiently. */ if( OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_PushDown) && (pItem->fg.isCte==0 || (pItem->u2.pCteUse->eM10d!=M10d_Yes && pItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse<2)) && pushDownWhereTerms(pParse, pSub, p->pWhere, pTabList, i) ){ #if TREETRACE_ENABLED if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x4000 ){ TREETRACE(0x4000,pParse,p, ("After WHERE-clause push-down into subquery %d:\n", pSub->selId)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 | /* Generate code to implement the subquery */ if( fromClauseTermCanBeCoroutine(pParse, pTabList, i, p->selFlags) ){ /* Implement a co-routine that will return a single row of the result ** set on each invocation. */ int addrTop = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1; | | | | 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517 7518 7519 7520 7521 7522 7523 7524 7525 7526 7527 7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 7533 7534 7535 7536 7537 | /* Generate code to implement the subquery */ if( fromClauseTermCanBeCoroutine(pParse, pTabList, i, p->selFlags) ){ /* Implement a co-routine that will return a single row of the result ** set on each invocation. */ int addrTop = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1; pItem->regReturn = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_InitCoroutine, pItem->regReturn, 0, addrTop); VdbeComment((v, "%!S", pItem)); pItem->addrFillSub = addrTop; sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_Coroutine, pItem->regReturn); ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 1, "CO-ROUTINE %!S", pItem)); sqlite3Select(pParse, pSub, &dest); pItem->pTab->nRowLogEst = pSub->nSelectRow; pItem->fg.viaCoroutine = 1; pItem->regResult = dest.iSdst; sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, pItem->regReturn); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop-1); sqlite3ClearTempRegCache(pParse); }else if( pItem->fg.isCte && pItem->u2.pCteUse->addrM9e>0 ){ /* This is a CTE for which materialization code has already been ** generated. Invoke the subroutine to compute the materialization, ** the make the pItem->iCursor be a copy of the ephemeral table that ** holds the result of the materialization. */ CteUse *pCteUse = pItem->u2.pCteUse; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, pCteUse->regRtn, pCteUse->addrM9e); if( pItem->iCursor!=pCteUse->iCur ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenDup, pItem->iCursor, pCteUse->iCur); VdbeComment((v, "%!S", pItem)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 | #if TREETRACE_ENABLED if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x8000 ){ TREETRACE(0x8000,pParse,p,("After all FROM-clause analysis:\n")); sqlite3TreeViewSelect(0, p, 0); } #endif | | | | | | | 7603 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 7628 7629 7630 7631 7632 | #if TREETRACE_ENABLED if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x8000 ){ TREETRACE(0x8000,pParse,p,("After all FROM-clause analysis:\n")); sqlite3TreeViewSelect(0, p, 0); } #endif /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and ** if the select-list is the same as the ORDER BY list, then this query ** can be rewritten as a GROUP BY. In other words, this: ** ** SELECT DISTINCT xyz FROM ... ORDER BY xyz ** ** is transformed to: ** ** SELECT xyz FROM ... GROUP BY xyz ORDER BY xyz ** ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER ** BY and DISTINCT, and an index or separate temp-table for the other. */ if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct && sqlite3ExprListCompare(sSort.pOrderBy, pEList, -1)==0 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC && p->pWin==0 #endif ){ p->selFlags &= ~SF_Distinct; pGroupBy = p->pGroupBy = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pEList, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 | sSort.labelOBLopt = sqlite3WhereOrderByLimitOptLabel(pWInfo); if( sSort.nOBSat==sSort.pOrderBy->nExpr ){ sSort.pOrderBy = 0; } } TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin returns\n")); | | | 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 | sSort.labelOBLopt = sqlite3WhereOrderByLimitOptLabel(pWInfo); if( sSort.nOBSat==sSort.pOrderBy->nExpr ){ sSort.pOrderBy = 0; } } TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin returns\n")); /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral ** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral ** into an OP_Noop. */ if( sSort.addrSortIndex>=0 && sSort.pOrderBy==0 ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, sSort.addrSortIndex); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7814 7815 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 | for(k=pGroupBy->nExpr, pItem=pGroupBy->a; k>0; k--, pItem++){ pItem->u.x.iAlias = 0; } assert( 66==sqlite3LogEst(100) ); if( p->nSelectRow>66 ) p->nSelectRow = 66; /* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are | | | | | | 7813 7814 7815 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 | for(k=pGroupBy->nExpr, pItem=pGroupBy->a; k>0; k--, pItem++){ pItem->u.x.iAlias = 0; } assert( 66==sqlite3LogEst(100) ); if( p->nSelectRow>66 ) p->nSelectRow = 66; /* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out ** in the correct order. It also may not - the GROUP BY might use a ** database index that causes rows to be grouped together as required ** but not actually sorted. Either way, record the fact that the ** ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses are the same by setting the orderByGrp ** variable. */ if( sSort.pOrderBy && pGroupBy->nExpr==sSort.pOrderBy->nExpr ){ int ii; /* The GROUP BY processing doesn't care whether rows are delivered in ** ASC or DESC order - only that each group is returned contiguously. ** So set the ASC/DESC flags in the GROUP BY to match those in the ** ORDER BY to maximize the chances of rows being delivered in an ** order that makes the ORDER BY redundant. */ for(ii=0; ii<pGroupBy->nExpr; ii++){ u8 sortFlags; sortFlags = sSort.pOrderBy->a[ii].fg.sortFlags & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC; pGroupBy->a[ii].fg.sortFlags = sortFlags; } if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pGroupBy, sSort.pOrderBy, -1)==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 | /* Processing for aggregates with GROUP BY is very different and ** much more complex than aggregates without a GROUP BY. */ if( pGroupBy ){ KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; /* Keying information for the group by clause */ | | | | | | | 7906 7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7914 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 7923 7924 7925 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 7931 7932 7933 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 7940 7941 7942 7943 7944 7945 7946 7947 7948 7949 7950 7951 7952 7953 7954 | /* Processing for aggregates with GROUP BY is very different and ** much more complex than aggregates without a GROUP BY. */ if( pGroupBy ){ KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; /* Keying information for the group by clause */ int addr1; /* A-vs-B comparison jump */ int addrOutputRow; /* Start of subroutine that outputs a result row */ int regOutputRow; /* Return address register for output subroutine */ int addrSetAbort; /* Set the abort flag and return */ int addrTopOfLoop; /* Top of the input loop */ int addrSortingIdx; /* The OP_OpenEphemeral for the sorting index */ int addrReset; /* Subroutine for resetting the accumulator */ int regReset; /* Return address register for reset subroutine */ ExprList *pDistinct = 0; u16 distFlag = 0; int eDist = WHERE_DISTINCT_NOOP; if( pAggInfo->nFunc==1 && pAggInfo->aFunc[0].iDistinct>=0 && ALWAYS(pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr!=0) && ALWAYS(ExprUseXList(pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr)) && pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr->x.pList!=0 ){ Expr *pExpr = pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr->x.pList->a[0].pExpr; pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr, 0); pDistinct = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pGroupBy, 0); pDistinct = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, pDistinct, pExpr); distFlag = pDistinct ? (WHERE_WANT_DISTINCT|WHERE_AGG_DISTINCT) : 0; } /* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to ** implement it. Allocate that sorting index now. If it turns out ** that we do not need it after all, the OP_SorterOpen instruction ** will be converted into a Noop. */ pAggInfo->sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++; pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy, 0, pAggInfo->nColumn); addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen, pAggInfo->sortingIdx, pAggInfo->nSortingColumn, 0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO); /* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing */ iUseFlag = ++pParse->nMem; iAbortFlag = ++pParse->nMem; regOutputRow = ++pParse->nMem; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7968 7969 7970 7971 7972 7973 7974 | ** This might involve two separate loops with an OP_Sort in between, or ** it might be a single loop that uses an index to extract information ** in the right order to begin with. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regReset, addrReset); TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin\n")); pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, pGroupBy, pDistinct, | | | 7967 7968 7969 7970 7971 7972 7973 7974 7975 7976 7977 7978 7979 7980 7981 | ** This might involve two separate loops with an OP_Sort in between, or ** it might be a single loop that uses an index to extract information ** in the right order to begin with. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regReset, addrReset); TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin\n")); pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, pGroupBy, pDistinct, p, (sDistinct.isTnct==2 ? WHERE_DISTINCTBY : WHERE_GROUPBY) | (orderByGrp ? WHERE_SORTBYGROUP : 0) | distFlag, 0 ); if( pWInfo==0 ){ sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pDistinct); goto select_end; } if( pParse->pIdxEpr ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 | ** in sorted order */ int regBase; int regRecord; int nCol; int nGroupBy; | | | 7997 7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 8011 | ** in sorted order */ int regBase; int regRecord; int nCol; int nGroupBy; explainTempTable(pParse, (sDistinct.isTnct && (p->selFlags&SF_Distinct)==0) ? "DISTINCT" : "GROUP BY"); groupBySort = 1; nGroupBy = pGroupBy->nExpr; nCol = nGroupBy; j = nGroupBy; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8061 8062 8063 8064 8065 8066 8067 | } /* If the index or temporary table used by the GROUP BY sort ** will naturally deliver rows in the order required by the ORDER BY ** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier. ** ** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless. | | | | 8060 8061 8062 8063 8064 8065 8066 8067 8068 8069 8070 8071 8072 8073 8074 8075 8076 | } /* If the index or temporary table used by the GROUP BY sort ** will naturally deliver rows in the order required by the ORDER BY ** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier. ** ** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless. ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to ** disable this optimization for testing purposes. */ if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder) && (groupBySort || sqlite3WhereIsSorted(pWInfo)) ){ sSort.pOrderBy = 0; sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, sSort.addrSortIndex); } /* Evaluate the current GROUP BY terms and store in b0, b1, b2... |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8209 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 8215 | /* Search for the index that has the lowest scan cost. ** ** (2011-04-15) Do not do a full scan of an unordered index. ** ** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index. ** | | | 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 8215 8216 8217 8218 8219 8220 8221 8222 | /* Search for the index that has the lowest scan cost. ** ** (2011-04-15) Do not do a full scan of an unordered index. ** ** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index. ** ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only ** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy. */ if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pBest = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); if( !p->pSrc->a[0].fg.notIndexed ){ for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ if( pIdx->bUnordered==0 && pIdx->szIdxRow<pTab->szTabRow |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 | /* If there are accumulator registers but no min() or max() functions ** without FILTER clauses, allocate register regAcc. Register regAcc ** will contain 0 the first time the inner loop runs, and 1 thereafter. ** The code generated by updateAccumulator() uses this to ensure ** that the accumulator registers are (a) updated only once if ** there are no min() or max functions or (b) always updated for the ** first row visited by the aggregate, so that they are updated at | | | 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 | /* If there are accumulator registers but no min() or max() functions ** without FILTER clauses, allocate register regAcc. Register regAcc ** will contain 0 the first time the inner loop runs, and 1 thereafter. ** The code generated by updateAccumulator() uses this to ensure ** that the accumulator registers are (a) updated only once if ** there are no min() or max functions or (b) always updated for the ** first row visited by the aggregate, so that they are updated at ** least once even if the FILTER clause means the min() or max() ** function visits zero rows. */ if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator ){ for(i=0; i<pAggInfo->nFunc; i++){ if( ExprHasProperty(pAggInfo->aFunc[i].pFExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){ continue; } if( pAggInfo->aFunc[i].pFunc->funcFlags&SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8315 8316 8317 8318 8319 8320 8321 | TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereEnd\n")); sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); finalizeAggFunctions(pParse, pAggInfo); } sSort.pOrderBy = 0; sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); | | | | 8314 8315 8316 8317 8318 8319 8320 8321 8322 8323 8324 8325 8326 8327 8328 8329 8330 8331 8332 | TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereEnd\n")); sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); finalizeAggFunctions(pParse, pAggInfo); } sSort.pOrderBy = 0; sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0, pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd); } sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd); } /* endif aggregate query */ if( sDistinct.eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_UNORDERED ){ explainTempTable(pParse, "DISTINCT"); } /* If there is an ORDER BY clause, then we need to sort the results |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/shell.c.in.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 | ** State information about the database connection is contained in an ** instance of the following structure. */ typedef struct ShellState ShellState; struct ShellState { sqlite3 *db; /* The database */ u8 autoExplain; /* Automatically turn on .explain mode */ | | | | 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 | ** State information about the database connection is contained in an ** instance of the following structure. */ typedef struct ShellState ShellState; struct ShellState { sqlite3 *db; /* The database */ u8 autoExplain; /* Automatically turn on .explain mode */ u8 autoEQP; /* Run EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN prior to each SQL stmt */ u8 autoEQPtest; /* autoEQP is in test mode */ u8 autoEQPtrace; /* autoEQP is in trace mode */ u8 scanstatsOn; /* True to display scan stats before each finalize */ u8 openMode; /* SHELL_OPEN_NORMAL, _APPENDVFS, or _ZIPFILE */ u8 doXdgOpen; /* Invoke start/open/xdg-open in output_reset() */ u8 nEqpLevel; /* Depth of the EQP output graph */ u8 eTraceType; /* SHELL_TRACE_* value for type of trace */ u8 bSafeMode; /* True to prohibit unsafe operations */ u8 bSafeModePersist; /* The long-term value of bSafeMode */ ColModeOpts cmOpts; /* Option values affecting columnar mode output */ unsigned statsOn; /* True to display memory stats before each finalize */ unsigned mEqpLines; /* Mask of vertical lines in the EQP output graph */ int inputNesting; /* Track nesting level of .read and other redirects */ int outCount; /* Revert to stdout when reaching zero */ int cnt; /* Number of records displayed so far */ int lineno; /* Line number of last line read from in */ int openFlags; /* Additional flags to open. (SQLITE_OPEN_NOFOLLOW) */ FILE *in; /* Read commands from this stream */ FILE *out; /* Write results here */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 | OpenSession aSession[4]; /* Array of sessions. [0] is in focus. */ #endif } aAuxDb[5], /* Array of all database connections */ *pAuxDb; /* Currently active database connection */ int *aiIndent; /* Array of indents used in MODE_Explain */ int nIndent; /* Size of array aiIndent[] */ int iIndent; /* Index of current op in aiIndent[] */ | | | 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 | OpenSession aSession[4]; /* Array of sessions. [0] is in focus. */ #endif } aAuxDb[5], /* Array of all database connections */ *pAuxDb; /* Currently active database connection */ int *aiIndent; /* Array of indents used in MODE_Explain */ int nIndent; /* Size of array aiIndent[] */ int iIndent; /* Index of current op in aiIndent[] */ char *zNonce; /* Nonce for temporary safe-mode escapes */ EQPGraph sGraph; /* Information for the graphical EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN */ ExpertInfo expert; /* Valid if previous command was ".expert OPT..." */ #ifdef SQLITE_SHELL_FIDDLE struct { const char * zInput; /* Input string from wasm/JS proxy */ const char * zPos; /* Cursor pos into zInput */ const char * zDefaultDbName; /* Default name for db file */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 | */ #define SHELL_TRACE_PLAIN 0 /* Show input SQL text */ #define SHELL_TRACE_EXPANDED 1 /* Show expanded SQL text */ #define SHELL_TRACE_NORMALIZED 2 /* Show normalized SQL text */ /* Bits in the ShellState.flgProgress variable */ #define SHELL_PROGRESS_QUIET 0x01 /* Omit announcing every progress callback */ | | | 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 | */ #define SHELL_TRACE_PLAIN 0 /* Show input SQL text */ #define SHELL_TRACE_EXPANDED 1 /* Show expanded SQL text */ #define SHELL_TRACE_NORMALIZED 2 /* Show normalized SQL text */ /* Bits in the ShellState.flgProgress variable */ #define SHELL_PROGRESS_QUIET 0x01 /* Omit announcing every progress callback */ #define SHELL_PROGRESS_RESET 0x02 /* Reset the count when the progress ** callback limit is reached, and for each ** top-level SQL statement */ #define SHELL_PROGRESS_ONCE 0x04 /* Cancel the --limit after firing once */ /* ** These are the allowed shellFlgs values */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 | } /* ** Allocate space and save off string indicating current error. */ static char *save_err_msg( sqlite3 *db, /* Database to query */ | | | 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 | } /* ** Allocate space and save off string indicating current error. */ static char *save_err_msg( sqlite3 *db, /* Database to query */ const char *zPhase, /* When the error occurs */ int rc, /* Error code returned from API */ const char *zSql /* SQL string, or NULL */ ){ char *zErr; char *zContext; sqlite3_str *pStr = sqlite3_str_new(0); sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, "%s, %s", zPhase, sqlite3_errmsg(db)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 | ** SQL trigger or foreign key. */ int p2 = sqlite3_column_int(pSql, 3); int p2op = (p2 + (iOp-iAddr)); /* Grow the p->aiIndent array as required */ if( iOp>=nAlloc ){ if( iOp==0 ){ | | | 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 | ** SQL trigger or foreign key. */ int p2 = sqlite3_column_int(pSql, 3); int p2op = (p2 + (iOp-iAddr)); /* Grow the p->aiIndent array as required */ if( iOp>=nAlloc ){ if( iOp==0 ){ /* Do further verification that this is explain output. Abort if ** it is not */ static const char *explainCols[] = { "addr", "opcode", "p1", "p2", "p3", "p4", "p5", "comment" }; int jj; for(jj=0; jj<ArraySize(explainCols); jj++){ if( cli_strcmp(sqlite3_column_name(pSql,jj),explainCols[jj])!=0 ){ p->cMode = p->mode; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 | ** This is different from ordinary exec_prepared_stmt() in that ** it has to run the entire query and gather the results into memory ** first, in order to determine column widths, before providing ** any output. */ static void exec_prepared_stmt_columnar( ShellState *p, /* Pointer to ShellState */ | | | 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 | ** This is different from ordinary exec_prepared_stmt() in that ** it has to run the entire query and gather the results into memory ** first, in order to determine column widths, before providing ** any output. */ static void exec_prepared_stmt_columnar( ShellState *p, /* Pointer to ShellState */ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt /* Statement to run */ ){ sqlite3_int64 nRow = 0; int nColumn = 0; char **azData = 0; sqlite3_int64 nAlloc = 0; char *abRowDiv = 0; const unsigned char *uz; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 | } /* ** Run a prepared statement */ static void exec_prepared_stmt( ShellState *pArg, /* Pointer to ShellState */ | | | 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 | } /* ** Run a prepared statement */ static void exec_prepared_stmt( ShellState *pArg, /* Pointer to ShellState */ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt /* Statement to run */ ){ int rc; sqlite3_uint64 nRow = 0; if( pArg->cMode==MODE_Column || pArg->cMode==MODE_Table || pArg->cMode==MODE_Box |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 | while( IsSpace(zSql[0]) ) zSql++; continue; } zStmtSql = sqlite3_sql(pStmt); if( zStmtSql==0 ) zStmtSql = ""; while( IsSpace(zStmtSql[0]) ) zStmtSql++; | | | 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 | while( IsSpace(zSql[0]) ) zSql++; continue; } zStmtSql = sqlite3_sql(pStmt); if( zStmtSql==0 ) zStmtSql = ""; while( IsSpace(zStmtSql[0]) ) zStmtSql++; /* save off the prepared statement handle and reset row count */ if( pArg ){ pArg->pStmt = pStmt; pArg->cnt = 0; } /* Show the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN if .eqp is on */ if( pArg && pArg->autoEQP && sqlite3_stmt_isexplain(pStmt)==0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 | explain_data_delete(pArg); } sqlite3_finalize(pExplain); sqlite3_free(zEQP); } if( pArg->autoEQP>=AUTOEQP_trigger && triggerEQP==0 ){ sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP, 0, 0); | | | 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 | explain_data_delete(pArg); } sqlite3_finalize(pExplain); sqlite3_free(zEQP); } if( pArg->autoEQP>=AUTOEQP_trigger && triggerEQP==0 ){ sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP, 0, 0); /* Reprepare pStmt before reactivating trace modes */ sqlite3_finalize(pStmt); sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0); if( pArg ) pArg->pStmt = pStmt; } restore_debug_trace_modes(); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 | ** is tricky. We never need to preserve a rowid for a WITHOUT ROWID table ** or a table with an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY. We are unable to preserve ** rowids on tables where the rowid is inaccessible because there are other ** columns in the table named "rowid", "_rowid_", and "oid". */ if( preserveRowid && isIPK ){ /* If a single PRIMARY KEY column with type INTEGER was seen, then it | | | 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 | ** is tricky. We never need to preserve a rowid for a WITHOUT ROWID table ** or a table with an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY. We are unable to preserve ** rowids on tables where the rowid is inaccessible because there are other ** columns in the table named "rowid", "_rowid_", and "oid". */ if( preserveRowid && isIPK ){ /* If a single PRIMARY KEY column with type INTEGER was seen, then it ** might be an alias for the ROWID. But it might also be a WITHOUT ROWID ** table or a INTEGER PRIMARY KEY DESC column, neither of which are ** ROWID aliases. To distinguish these cases, check to see if ** there is a "pk" entry in "PRAGMA index_list". There will be ** no "pk" index if the PRIMARY KEY really is an alias for the ROWID. */ zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT 1 FROM pragma_index_list(%Q)" " WHERE origin='pk'", zTab); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 | * This is a short-span macro. See further below for usage. */ #define SHELL_SUB_MACRO(base, variant) base ## _ ## variant #define SHELL_SUBMACRO(base, variant) SHELL_SUB_MACRO(base, variant) /* Let custom-included extensions get their ..._init() called. * The WHATEVER_INIT( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi ) macro should cause * the extension's sqlite3_*_init( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi ) | | | 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453 5454 | * This is a short-span macro. See further below for usage. */ #define SHELL_SUB_MACRO(base, variant) base ## _ ## variant #define SHELL_SUBMACRO(base, variant) SHELL_SUB_MACRO(base, variant) /* Let custom-included extensions get their ..._init() called. * The WHATEVER_INIT( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi ) macro should cause * the extension's sqlite3_*_init( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi ) * initialization routine to be called. */ { int irc = SHELL_SUBMACRO(SQLITE_SHELL_EXTFUNCS, INIT)(p->db); /* Let custom-included extensions expose their functionality. * The WHATEVER_EXPOSE( db, pzErrorMsg ) macro should cause * the SQL functions, virtual tables, collating sequences or * VFS's implemented by the extension to be registered. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5517 5518 5519 5520 5521 5522 5523 | sqlite3_db_config( p->db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS, p->scanstatsOn, (int*)0 ); } } /* | | | 5517 5518 5519 5520 5521 5522 5523 5524 5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 5530 5531 | sqlite3_db_config( p->db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS, p->scanstatsOn, (int*)0 ); } } /* ** Attempt to close the database connection. Report errors. */ void close_db(sqlite3 *db){ int rc = sqlite3_close(db); if( rc ){ utf8_printf(stderr, "Error: sqlite3_close() returns %d: %s\n", rc, sqlite3_errmsg(db)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
12089 12090 12091 12092 12093 12094 12095 | for(i=1; i<argc; i++){ char *z; z = argv[i]; if( z[0]!='-' || i>nOptsEnd ){ if( data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename==0 ){ data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename = z; }else{ | | | 12089 12090 12091 12092 12093 12094 12095 12096 12097 12098 12099 12100 12101 12102 12103 | for(i=1; i<argc; i++){ char *z; z = argv[i]; if( z[0]!='-' || i>nOptsEnd ){ if( data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename==0 ){ data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename = z; }else{ /* Excess arguments are interpreted as SQL (or dot-commands) and ** mean that nothing is read from stdin */ readStdin = 0; nCmd++; azCmd = realloc(azCmd, sizeof(azCmd[0])*nCmd); shell_check_oom(azCmd); azCmd[nCmd-1] = z; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/sqlite.h.in.
︙ | ︙ | |||
127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | ** with the value (X*1000000 + Y*1000 + Z) where X, Y, and Z are the same ** numbers used in [SQLITE_VERSION].)^ ** The SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER for any given release of SQLite will also ** be larger than the release from which it is derived. Either Y will ** be held constant and Z will be incremented or else Y will be incremented ** and Z will be reset to zero. ** | | | 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 | ** with the value (X*1000000 + Y*1000 + Z) where X, Y, and Z are the same ** numbers used in [SQLITE_VERSION].)^ ** The SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER for any given release of SQLite will also ** be larger than the release from which it is derived. Either Y will ** be held constant and Z will be incremented or else Y will be incremented ** and Z will be reset to zero. ** ** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]), ** SQLite source code has been stored in the ** <a href="http://www.fossil-scm.org/">Fossil configuration management ** system</a>. ^The SQLITE_SOURCE_ID macro evaluates to ** a string which identifies a particular check-in of SQLite ** within its configuration management system. ^The SQLITE_SOURCE_ID ** string contains the date and time of the check-in (UTC) and a SHA1 ** or SHA3-256 hash of the entire source tree. If the source code has |
︙ | ︙ | |||
712 713 714 715 716 717 718 | #define SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL 0x00002 #define SQLITE_SYNC_FULL 0x00003 #define SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY 0x00010 /* ** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle ** | | | 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 | #define SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL 0x00002 #define SQLITE_SYNC_FULL 0x00003 #define SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY 0x00010 /* ** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle ** ** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the ** [sqlite3_vfs | OS interface layer]. Individual OS interface ** implementations will ** want to subclass this object by appending additional fields ** for their own use. The pMethods entry is a pointer to an ** [sqlite3_io_methods] object that defines methods for performing ** I/O operations on the open file. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
734 735 736 737 738 739 740 | ** ** Every file opened by the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method populates an ** [sqlite3_file] object (or, more commonly, a subclass of the ** [sqlite3_file] object) with a pointer to an instance of this object. ** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations ** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object. ** | | | 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 | ** ** Every file opened by the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method populates an ** [sqlite3_file] object (or, more commonly, a subclass of the ** [sqlite3_file] object) with a pointer to an instance of this object. ** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations ** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object. ** ** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element ** to a non-NULL pointer, then the sqlite3_io_methods.xClose method ** may be invoked even if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] reported that it failed. The ** only way to prevent a call to xClose following a failed [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] ** is for the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] to set the sqlite3_file.pMethods element ** to NULL. ** ** The flags argument to xSync may be one of [SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL] or |
︙ | ︙ | |||
978 979 980 981 982 983 984 | ** That integer is 0 to disable zero-damage mode or 1 to enable zero-damage ** mode. If the integer is -1, then it is overwritten with the current ** zero-damage mode setting. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE]] ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE] opcode is invoked by SQLite after opening ** a write transaction to indicate that, unless it is rolled back for some | | | | 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 | ** That integer is 0 to disable zero-damage mode or 1 to enable zero-damage ** mode. If the integer is -1, then it is overwritten with the current ** zero-damage mode setting. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE]] ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE] opcode is invoked by SQLite after opening ** a write transaction to indicate that, unless it is rolled back for some ** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current ** transaction. This is used by VACUUM operations. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME]] ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME] opcode can be used to obtain the names of ** all [VFSes] in the VFS stack. The names are of all VFS shims and the ** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from ** [sqlite3_malloc()] and the result is stored in the char* variable ** that the fourth parameter of [sqlite3_file_control()] points to. ** The caller is responsible for freeing the memory when done. As with ** all file-control actions, there is no guarantee that this will actually ** do anything. Callers should initialize the char* variable to a NULL ** pointer in case this file-control is not implemented. This file-control ** is intended for diagnostic use only. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 | ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_DONE] opcode is invoked from within a checkpoint ** in wal mode after the client has finished copying pages from the wal ** file to the database file, but before the *-shm file is updated to ** record the fact that the pages have been checkpointed. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER]] ** The EXPERIMENTAL [SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER] opcode is used to detect | | | | | | 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 | ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_DONE] opcode is invoked from within a checkpoint ** in wal mode after the client has finished copying pages from the wal ** file to the database file, but before the *-shm file is updated to ** record the fact that the pages have been checkpointed. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER]] ** The EXPERIMENTAL [SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER] opcode is used to detect ** whether or not there is a database client in another process with a wal-mode ** transaction open on the database or not. It is only available on unix.The ** (void*) argument passed with this file-control should be a pointer to a ** value of type (int). The integer value is set to 1 if the database is a wal ** mode database and there exists at least one client in another process that ** currently has an SQL transaction open on the database. It is set to 0 if ** the database is not a wal-mode db, or if there is no such connection in any ** other process. This opcode cannot be used to detect transactions opened ** by clients within the current process, only within other processes. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE]] ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE] opcode is for use internally by the ** [checksum VFS shim] only. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_RESET_CACHE]] ** If there is currently no transaction open on the database, and the ** database is not a temp db, then the [SQLITE_FCNTL_RESET_CACHE] file-control ** purges the contents of the in-memory page cache. If there is an open ** transaction, or if the db is a temp-db, this opcode is a no-op, not an error. ** </ul> */ #define SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE 1 #define SQLITE_FCNTL_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE 2 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 | */ int (*xSetSystemCall)(sqlite3_vfs*, const char *zName, sqlite3_syscall_ptr); sqlite3_syscall_ptr (*xGetSystemCall)(sqlite3_vfs*, const char *zName); const char *(*xNextSystemCall)(sqlite3_vfs*, const char *zName); /* ** The methods above are in versions 1 through 3 of the sqlite_vfs object. ** New fields may be appended in future versions. The iVersion | | | 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 | */ int (*xSetSystemCall)(sqlite3_vfs*, const char *zName, sqlite3_syscall_ptr); sqlite3_syscall_ptr (*xGetSystemCall)(sqlite3_vfs*, const char *zName); const char *(*xNextSystemCall)(sqlite3_vfs*, const char *zName); /* ** The methods above are in versions 1 through 3 of the sqlite_vfs object. ** New fields may be appended in future versions. The iVersion ** value will increment whenever this happens. */ }; /* ** CAPI3REF: Flags for the xAccess VFS method ** ** These integer constants can be used as the third parameter to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 | ** ** The sqlite3_db_config() interface is used to make configuration ** changes to a [database connection]. The interface is similar to ** [sqlite3_config()] except that the changes apply to a single ** [database connection] (specified in the first argument). ** ** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...) is the | | | 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 | ** ** The sqlite3_db_config() interface is used to make configuration ** changes to a [database connection]. The interface is similar to ** [sqlite3_config()] except that the changes apply to a single ** [database connection] (specified in the first argument). ** ** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...) is the ** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code ** that indicates what aspect of the [database connection] is being configured. ** Subsequent arguments vary depending on the configuration verb. ** ** ^Calls to sqlite3_db_config() return SQLITE_OK if and only if ** the call is considered successful. */ int sqlite3_db_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 | ** is always at least as big as the requested size but may be larger. ** ** The xRoundup method returns what would be the allocated size of ** a memory allocation given a particular requested size. Most memory ** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple ** of 8. Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2. ** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()] | | | 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 | ** is always at least as big as the requested size but may be larger. ** ** The xRoundup method returns what would be the allocated size of ** a memory allocation given a particular requested size. Most memory ** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple ** of 8. Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2. ** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()] ** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0, ** that causes the corresponding memory allocation to fail. ** ** The xInit method initializes the memory allocator. For example, ** it might allocate any required mutexes or initialize internal data ** structures. The xShutdown method is invoked (indirectly) by ** [sqlite3_shutdown()] and should deallocate any resources acquired ** by xInit. The pAppData pointer is used as the only parameter to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 | ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD</dt> ** <dd>There are no arguments to this option. ^This option sets the ** [threading mode] to Single-thread. In other words, it disables ** all mutexing and puts SQLite into a mode where it can only be used ** by a single thread. ^If SQLite is compiled with ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then ** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default | | | 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 | ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD</dt> ** <dd>There are no arguments to this option. ^This option sets the ** [threading mode] to Single-thread. In other words, it disables ** all mutexing and puts SQLite into a mode where it can only be used ** by a single thread. ^If SQLite is compiled with ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then ** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default ** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return ** [SQLITE_ERROR] if called with the SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD ** configuration option.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD</dt> ** <dd>There are no arguments to this option. ^This option sets the ** [threading mode] to Multi-thread. In other words, it disables ** mutexing on [database connection] and [prepared statement] objects. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 | ** schema. ^The sole argument is a pointer to a constant UTF8 string ** which will become the new schema name in place of "main". ^SQLite ** does not make a copy of the new main schema name string, so the application ** must ensure that the argument passed into this DBCONFIG option is unchanged ** until after the database connection closes. ** </dd> ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 | ** schema. ^The sole argument is a pointer to a constant UTF8 string ** which will become the new schema name in place of "main". ^SQLite ** does not make a copy of the new main schema name string, so the application ** must ensure that the argument passed into this DBCONFIG option is unchanged ** until after the database connection closes. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE]] ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE</dt> ** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a ** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no ** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint ** operation before closing the connection. This option may be used to ** override this behaviour. The first parameter passed to this operation ** is an integer - positive to disable checkpoints-on-close, or zero (the ** default) to enable them, and negative to leave the setting unchanged. ** The second parameter is a pointer to an integer ** into which is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether checkpoints-on-close ** have been disabled - 0 if they are not disabled, 1 if they are. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_QPSG]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_QPSG</dt> ** <dd>^(The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_QPSG option activates or deactivates ** the [query planner stability guarantee] (QPSG). When the QPSG is active, ** a single SQL query statement will always use the same algorithm regardless ** of values of [bound parameters].)^ The QPSG disables some query optimizations ** that look at the values of bound parameters, which can make some queries ** slower. But the QPSG has the advantage of more predictable behavior. With ** the QPSG active, SQLite will always use the same query plan in the field as ** was used during testing in the lab. ** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable ** the QPSG, positive to enable QPSG, or negative to leave the setting ** unchanged. The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which ** is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether the QPSG is disabled or enabled ** following this call. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP</dt> ** <dd> By default, the output of EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN commands does not ** include output for any operations performed by trigger programs. This ** option is used to set or clear (the default) a flag that governs this ** behavior. The first parameter passed to this operation is an integer - ** positive to enable output for trigger programs, or zero to disable it, ** or negative to leave the setting unchanged. ** The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which is written ** 0 or 1 to indicate whether output-for-triggers has been disabled - 0 if ** it is not disabled, 1 if it is. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE</dt> ** <dd> Set the SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE flag and then run ** [VACUUM] in order to reset a database back to an empty database ** with no schema and no content. The following process works even for ** a badly corrupted database file: ** <ol> ** <li> If the database connection is newly opened, make sure it has read the ** database schema by preparing then discarding some query against the ** database, or calling sqlite3_table_column_metadata(), ignoring any ** errors. This step is only necessary if the application desires to keep ** the database in WAL mode after the reset if it was in WAL mode before ** the reset. ** <li> sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE, 1, 0); ** <li> [sqlite3_exec](db, "[VACUUM]", 0, 0, 0); ** <li> sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE, 0, 0); ** </ol> ** Because resetting a database is destructive and irreversible, the ** process requires the use of this obscure API and multiple steps to ** help ensure that it does not happen by accident. Because this ** feature must be capable of resetting corrupt databases, and ** shutting down virtual tables may require access to that corrupt ** storage, the library must abandon any installed virtual tables ** without calling their xDestroy() methods. ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE</dt> ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE option activates or deactivates the ** "defensive" flag for a database connection. When the defensive ** flag is enabled, language features that allow ordinary SQL to ** deliberately corrupt the database file are disabled. The disabled ** features include but are not limited to the following: ** <ul> ** <li> The [PRAGMA writable_schema=ON] statement. ** <li> The [PRAGMA journal_mode=OFF] statement. ** <li> The [PRAGMA schema_version=N] statement. ** <li> Writes to the [sqlite_dbpage] virtual table. ** <li> Direct writes to [shadow tables]. ** </ul> ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_WRITABLE_SCHEMA]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_WRITABLE_SCHEMA</dt> ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_WRITABLE_SCHEMA option activates or deactivates the ** "writable_schema" flag. This has the same effect and is logically equivalent ** to setting [PRAGMA writable_schema=ON] or [PRAGMA writable_schema=OFF]. ** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable ** the writable_schema, positive to enable writable_schema, or negative to ** leave the setting unchanged. The second parameter is a pointer to an ** integer into which is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether the writable_schema ** is enabled or disabled following this call. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LEGACY_ALTER_TABLE]] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 | ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA option tells SQLite to ** assume that database schemas are untainted by malicious content. ** When the SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA option is disabled, SQLite ** takes additional defensive steps to protect the application from harm ** including: ** <ul> ** <li> Prohibit the use of SQL functions inside triggers, views, | | | | | | 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 | ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA option tells SQLite to ** assume that database schemas are untainted by malicious content. ** When the SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA option is disabled, SQLite ** takes additional defensive steps to protect the application from harm ** including: ** <ul> ** <li> Prohibit the use of SQL functions inside triggers, views, ** CHECK constraints, DEFAULT clauses, expression indexes, ** partial indexes, or generated columns ** unless those functions are tagged with [SQLITE_INNOCUOUS]. ** <li> Prohibit the use of virtual tables inside of triggers or views ** unless those virtual tables are tagged with [SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS]. ** </ul> ** This setting defaults to "on" for legacy compatibility, however ** all applications are advised to turn it off if possible. This setting ** can also be controlled using the [PRAGMA trusted_schema] statement. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LEGACY_FILE_FORMAT]] ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LEGACY_FILE_FORMAT</dt> ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LEGACY_FILE_FORMAT option activates or deactivates ** the legacy file format flag. When activated, this flag causes all newly ** created database file to have a schema format version number (the 4-byte ** integer found at offset 44 into the database header) of 1. This in turn ** means that the resulting database file will be readable and writable by ** any SQLite version back to 3.0.0 ([dateof:3.0.0]). Without this setting, ** newly created databases are generally not understandable by SQLite versions ** prior to 3.3.0 ([dateof:3.3.0]). As these words are written, there ** is now scarcely any need to generate database files that are compatible ** all the way back to version 3.0.0, and so this setting is of little ** practical use, but is provided so that SQLite can continue to claim the ** ability to generate new database files that are compatible with version ** 3.0.0. ** <p>Note that when the SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LEGACY_FILE_FORMAT setting is on, ** the [VACUUM] command will fail with an obscure error when attempting to ** process a table with generated columns and a descending index. This is ** not considered a bug since SQLite versions 3.3.0 and earlier do not support ** either generated columns or descending indexes. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS]] ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS</dt> ** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS option is only useful in ** SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS builds. In this case, it sets or clears ** a flag that enables collection of the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2() ** statistics. For statistics to be collected, the flag must be set on ** the database handle both when the SQL statement is prepared and when it ** is stepped. The flag is set (collection of statistics is enabled) ** by default. This option takes two arguments: an integer and a pointer to ** an integer.. The first argument is 1, 0, or -1 to enable, disable, or ** leave unchanged the statement scanstatus option. If the second argument ** is not NULL, then the value of the statement scanstatus setting after ** processing the first argument is written into the integer that the second ** argument points to. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 | ** names are not also used by explicitly declared columns. ^If ** the table has a column of type [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] then that column ** is another alias for the rowid. ** ** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface usually returns the [rowid] of ** the most recent successful [INSERT] into a rowid table or [virtual table] ** on database connection D. ^Inserts into [WITHOUT ROWID] tables are not | | | | | | | | | | 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 | ** names are not also used by explicitly declared columns. ^If ** the table has a column of type [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] then that column ** is another alias for the rowid. ** ** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface usually returns the [rowid] of ** the most recent successful [INSERT] into a rowid table or [virtual table] ** on database connection D. ^Inserts into [WITHOUT ROWID] tables are not ** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred ** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns ** zero. ** ** As well as being set automatically as rows are inserted into database ** tables, the value returned by this function may be set explicitly by ** [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] ** ** Some virtual table implementations may INSERT rows into rowid tables as ** part of committing a transaction (e.g. to flush data accumulated in memory ** to disk). In this case subsequent calls to this function return the rowid ** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to ** unintuitive results. Virtual table implementations that do write to rowid ** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original ** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning ** control to the user. ** ** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will ** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is ** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned ** by this routine reverts to what it was before the trigger was fired.)^ ** ** ^An [INSERT] that fails due to a constraint violation is not a ** successful [INSERT] and does not change the value returned by this ** routine. ^Thus INSERT OR FAIL, INSERT OR IGNORE, INSERT OR ROLLBACK, ** and INSERT OR ABORT make no changes to the return value of this ** routine when their insertion fails. ^(When INSERT OR REPLACE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 | sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Set the Last Insert Rowid value. ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** The sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(D, R) method allows the application to | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 | sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Set the Last Insert Rowid value. ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** The sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(D, R) method allows the application to ** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R ** without inserting a row into the database. */ void sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*,sqlite3_int64); /* ** CAPI3REF: Count The Number Of Rows Modified ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^These functions return the number of rows modified, inserted or ** deleted by the most recently completed INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE ** statement on the database connection specified by the only parameter. ** The two functions are identical except for the type of the return value ** and that if the number of rows modified by the most recent INSERT, UPDATE ** or DELETE is greater than the maximum value supported by type "int", then ** the return value of sqlite3_changes() is undefined. ^Executing any other ** type of SQL statement does not modify the value returned by these functions. ** ** ^Only changes made directly by the INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement are ** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers], ** [foreign key actions] or [REPLACE] constraint resolution are not counted. ** ** Changes to a view that are intercepted by ** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value ** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or ** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real ** tables are counted. ** ** Things are more complicated if the sqlite3_changes() function is ** executed while a trigger program is running. This may happen if the ** program uses the [changes() SQL function], or if some other callback ** function invokes sqlite3_changes() directly. Essentially: ** ** <ul> ** <li> ^(Before entering a trigger program the value returned by ** sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program ** has finished, the original value is restored.)^ ** ** <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE ** statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes() ** upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include ** any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes() ** value will be saved and restored after each sub-trigger has run.)^ ** </ul> ** ** ^This means that if the changes() SQL function (or similar) is used ** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it ** returns the value as set when the calling statement began executing. ** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger ** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the ** previous INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within the same trigger. ** ** If a separate thread makes changes on the same database connection ** while [sqlite3_changes()] is running then the value returned ** is unpredictable and not meaningful. ** ** See also: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Total Number Of Rows Modified ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^These functions return the total number of rows inserted, modified or ** deleted by all [INSERT], [UPDATE] or [DELETE] statements completed ** since the database connection was opened, including those executed as | | | | | | | | | 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Total Number Of Rows Modified ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^These functions return the total number of rows inserted, modified or ** deleted by all [INSERT], [UPDATE] or [DELETE] statements completed ** since the database connection was opened, including those executed as ** part of trigger programs. The two functions are identical except for the ** type of the return value and that if the number of rows modified by the ** connection exceeds the maximum value supported by type "int", then ** the return value of sqlite3_total_changes() is undefined. ^Executing ** any other type of SQL statement does not affect the value returned by ** sqlite3_total_changes(). ** ** ^Changes made as part of [foreign key actions] are included in the ** count, but those made as part of REPLACE constraint resolution are ** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers ** are not counted. ** ** The [sqlite3_total_changes(D)] interface only reports the number ** of rows that changed due to SQL statement run against database ** connection D. Any changes by other database connections are ignored. ** To detect changes against a database file from other database ** connections use the [PRAGMA data_version] command or the ** [SQLITE_FCNTL_DATA_VERSION] [file control]. ** ** If a separate thread makes changes on the same database connection ** while [sqlite3_total_changes()] is running then the value ** returned is unpredictable and not meaningful. ** ** See also: ** <ul> ** <li> the [sqlite3_changes()] interface |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 | ** ^An SQL operation that is interrupted will return [SQLITE_INTERRUPT]. ** ^If the interrupted SQL operation is an INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE ** that is inside an explicit transaction, then the entire transaction ** will be rolled back automatically. ** ** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running ** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete. ^Any new SQL statements | | | 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 | ** ^An SQL operation that is interrupted will return [SQLITE_INTERRUPT]. ** ^If the interrupted SQL operation is an INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE ** that is inside an explicit transaction, then the entire transaction ** will be rolled back automatically. ** ** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running ** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete. ^Any new SQL statements ** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the ** running statement count reaches zero are interrupted as if they had been ** running prior to the sqlite3_interrupt() call. ^New SQL statements ** that are started after the running statement count reaches zero are ** not effected by the sqlite3_interrupt(). ** ^A call to sqlite3_interrupt(D) that occurs when there are no running ** SQL statements is a no-op and has no effect on SQL statements ** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call returns. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 | ** ** ^These routines return 0 if the statement is incomplete. ^If a ** memory allocation fails, then SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. ** ** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus ** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL. ** | | | 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 | ** ** ^These routines return 0 if the statement is incomplete. ^If a ** memory allocation fails, then SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. ** ** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus ** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL. ** ** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior ** to invoking sqlite3_complete16() then sqlite3_initialize() is invoked ** automatically by sqlite3_complete16(). If that initialization fails, ** then the return value from sqlite3_complete16() will be non-zero ** regardless of whether or not the input SQL is complete.)^ ** ** The input to [sqlite3_complete()] must be a zero-terminated ** UTF-8 string. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 | ** to the application. ** ^If the callback returns non-zero, then another attempt ** is made to access the database and the cycle repeats. ** ** The presence of a busy handler does not guarantee that it will be invoked ** when there is lock contention. ^If SQLite determines that invoking the busy ** handler could result in a deadlock, it will go ahead and return [SQLITE_BUSY] | | | 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 | ** to the application. ** ^If the callback returns non-zero, then another attempt ** is made to access the database and the cycle repeats. ** ** The presence of a busy handler does not guarantee that it will be invoked ** when there is lock contention. ^If SQLite determines that invoking the busy ** handler could result in a deadlock, it will go ahead and return [SQLITE_BUSY] ** to the application instead of invoking the ** busy handler. ** Consider a scenario where one process is holding a read lock that ** it is trying to promote to a reserved lock and ** a second process is holding a reserved lock that it is trying ** to promote to an exclusive lock. The first process cannot proceed ** because it is blocked by the second and the second process cannot ** proceed because it is blocked by the first. If both processes |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 | ** or evaluating [PRAGMA busy_timeout=N] will change the ** busy handler and thus clear any previously set busy handler. ** ** The busy callback should not take any actions which modify the ** database connection that invoked the busy handler. In other words, ** the busy handler is not reentrant. Any such actions ** result in undefined behavior. | | | 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 | ** or evaluating [PRAGMA busy_timeout=N] will change the ** busy handler and thus clear any previously set busy handler. ** ** The busy callback should not take any actions which modify the ** database connection that invoked the busy handler. In other words, ** the busy handler is not reentrant. Any such actions ** result in undefined behavior. ** ** A busy handler must not close the database connection ** or [prepared statement] that invoked the busy handler. */ int sqlite3_busy_handler(sqlite3*,int(*)(void*,int),void*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Set A Busy Timeout |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Formatted String Printing Functions ** ** These routines are work-alikes of the "printf()" family of functions ** from the standard C library. ** These routines understand most of the common formatting options from | | | 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Formatted String Printing Functions ** ** These routines are work-alikes of the "printf()" family of functions ** from the standard C library. ** These routines understand most of the common formatting options from ** the standard library printf() ** plus some additional non-standard formats ([%q], [%Q], [%w], and [%z]). ** See the [built-in printf()] documentation for details. ** ** ^The sqlite3_mprintf() and sqlite3_vmprintf() routines write their ** results into memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc64()]. ** The strings returned by these two routines should be ** released by [sqlite3_free()]. ^Both routines return a |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 | ** then the [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered ** the authorizer will fail with an error message. ** ** When the callback returns [SQLITE_OK], that means the operation ** requested is ok. ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the ** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that | | | 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 | ** then the [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered ** the authorizer will fail with an error message. ** ** When the callback returns [SQLITE_OK], that means the operation ** requested is ok. ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the ** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that ** access is denied. ** ** ^The first parameter to the authorizer callback is a copy of the third ** parameter to the sqlite3_set_authorizer() interface. ^The second parameter ** to the callback is an integer [SQLITE_COPY | action code] that specifies ** the particular action to be authorized. ^The third through sixth parameters ** to the callback are either NULL pointers or zero-terminated strings ** that contain additional details about the action to be authorized. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 | ** ** The authorizer callback must not do anything that will modify ** the database connection that invoked the authorizer callback. ** Note that [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] and [sqlite3_step()] both modify their ** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph. ** ** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the | | | 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 | ** ** The authorizer callback must not do anything that will modify ** the database connection that invoked the authorizer callback. ** Note that [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] and [sqlite3_step()] both modify their ** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph. ** ** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the ** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a ** schema change. Hence, the application should ensure that the ** correct authorizer callback remains in place during the [sqlite3_step()]. ** ** ^Note that the authorizer callback is invoked only during ** [sqlite3_prepare()] or its variants. Authorization is not ** performed during statement evaluation in [sqlite3_step()], unless ** as stated in the previous paragraph, sqlite3_step() invokes |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 | ** zero or more [SQLITE_TRACE] constants. ** ** ^Each call to either sqlite3_trace(D,X,P) or sqlite3_trace_v2(D,M,X,P) ** overrides (cancels) all prior calls to sqlite3_trace(D,X,P) or ** sqlite3_trace_v2(D,M,X,P) for the [database connection] D. Each ** database connection may have at most one trace callback. ** | | | 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 | ** zero or more [SQLITE_TRACE] constants. ** ** ^Each call to either sqlite3_trace(D,X,P) or sqlite3_trace_v2(D,M,X,P) ** overrides (cancels) all prior calls to sqlite3_trace(D,X,P) or ** sqlite3_trace_v2(D,M,X,P) for the [database connection] D. Each ** database connection may have at most one trace callback. ** ** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by ** mask M occur. ^The integer return value from the callback is currently ** ignored, though this may change in future releases. Callback ** implementations should return zero to ensure future compatibility. ** ** ^A trace callback is invoked with four arguments: callback(T,C,P,X). ** ^The T argument is one of the [SQLITE_TRACE] ** constants to indicate why the callback was invoked. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 | ** ** ^The sqlite3_progress_handler(D,N,X,P) interface causes the callback ** function X to be invoked periodically during long running calls to ** [sqlite3_step()] and [sqlite3_prepare()] and similar for ** database connection D. An example use for this ** interface is to keep a GUI updated during a large query. ** | | | | 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 | ** ** ^The sqlite3_progress_handler(D,N,X,P) interface causes the callback ** function X to be invoked periodically during long running calls to ** [sqlite3_step()] and [sqlite3_prepare()] and similar for ** database connection D. An example use for this ** interface is to keep a GUI updated during a large query. ** ** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the ** callback function X. ^The parameter N is the approximate number of ** [virtual machine instructions] that are evaluated between successive ** invocations of the callback X. ^If N is less than one then the progress ** handler is disabled. ** ** ^Only a single progress handler may be defined at one time per ** [database connection]; setting a new progress handler cancels the ** old one. ^Setting parameter X to NULL disables the progress handler. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 | ** [sqlite3_config()] method or by the [SQLITE_USE_URI] compile-time option. ** URI filename interpretation is turned off ** by default, but future releases of SQLite might enable URI filename ** interpretation by default. See "[URI filenames]" for additional ** information. ** ** URI filenames are parsed according to RFC 3986. ^If the URI contains an | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 | ** [sqlite3_config()] method or by the [SQLITE_USE_URI] compile-time option. ** URI filename interpretation is turned off ** by default, but future releases of SQLite might enable URI filename ** interpretation by default. See "[URI filenames]" for additional ** information. ** ** URI filenames are parsed according to RFC 3986. ^If the URI contains an ** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string ** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an ** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if ** present, is ignored. ** ** ^SQLite uses the path component of the URI as the name of the disk file ** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character, ** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin ** with a '/' (meaning that the authority section is omitted from the URI) ** then the path is interpreted as a relative path. ** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path ** is a drive specification (e.g. "C:").)^ ** ** [[core URI query parameters]] ** The query component of a URI may contain parameters that are interpreted ** either by SQLite itself, or by a [VFS | custom VFS implementation]. ** SQLite and its built-in [VFSes] interpret the ** following query parameters: ** ** <ul> ** <li> <b>vfs</b>: ^The "vfs" parameter may be used to specify the name of ** a VFS object that provides the operating system interface that should ** be used to access the database file on disk. ^If this option is set to ** an empty string the default VFS object is used. ^Specifying an unknown ** VFS is an error. ^If sqlite3_open_v2() is used and the vfs option is ** present, then the VFS specified by the option takes precedence over ** the value passed as the fourth parameter to sqlite3_open_v2(). ** ** <li> <b>mode</b>: ^(The mode parameter may be set to either "ro", "rw", ** "rwc", or "memory". Attempting to set it to any other value is ** an error)^. ** ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only ** access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the ** third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to ** "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create) ** access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had ** been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both ** SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE and SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE. ^If the mode option is ** set to "memory" then a pure [in-memory database] that never reads ** or writes from disk is used. ^It is an error to specify a value for ** the mode parameter that is less restrictive than that specified by ** the flags passed in the third parameter to sqlite3_open_v2(). ** ** <li> <b>cache</b>: ^The cache parameter may be set to either "shared" or ** "private". ^Setting it to "shared" is equivalent to setting the ** SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE bit in the flags argument passed to ** sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is ** equivalent to setting the SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE bit. ** ^If sqlite3_open_v2() is used and the "cache" parameter is present in ** a URI filename, its value overrides any behavior requested by setting ** SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE or SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE flag. ** ** <li> <b>psow</b>: ^The psow parameter indicates whether or not the ** [powersafe overwrite] property does or does not apply to the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 | ** read-only media. ^When immutable is set, SQLite assumes that the ** database file cannot be changed, even by a process with higher ** privilege, and so the database is opened read-only and all locking ** and change detection is disabled. Caution: Setting the immutable ** property on a database file that does in fact change can result ** in incorrect query results and/or [SQLITE_CORRUPT] errors. ** See also: [SQLITE_IOCAP_IMMUTABLE]. | | | | | | | | | | | | | 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 | ** read-only media. ^When immutable is set, SQLite assumes that the ** database file cannot be changed, even by a process with higher ** privilege, and so the database is opened read-only and all locking ** and change detection is disabled. Caution: Setting the immutable ** property on a database file that does in fact change can result ** in incorrect query results and/or [SQLITE_CORRUPT] errors. ** See also: [SQLITE_IOCAP_IMMUTABLE]. ** ** </ul> ** ** ^Specifying an unknown parameter in the query component of a URI is not an ** error. Future versions of SQLite might understand additional query ** parameters. See "[query parameters with special meaning to SQLite]" for ** additional information. ** ** [[URI filename examples]] <h3>URI filename examples</h3> ** ** <table border="1" align=center cellpadding=5> ** <tr><th> URI filenames <th> Results ** <tr><td> file:data.db <td> ** Open the file "data.db" in the current directory. ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db<br> ** file:///home/fred/data.db <br> ** file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td> ** Open the database file "/home/fred/data.db". ** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td> ** An error. "darkstar" is not a recognized authority. ** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap"> ** file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/fred/Desktop/data.db ** <td> Windows only: Open the file "data.db" on fred's desktop on drive ** C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly ** necessary - space characters can be used literally ** in URI filenames. ** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td> ** Open file "data.db" in the current directory for read-only access. ** Regardless of whether or not shared-cache mode is enabled by ** default, use a private cache. ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db?vfs=unix-dotfile <td> ** Open file "/home/fred/data.db". Use the special VFS "unix-dotfile" ** that uses dot-files in place of posix advisory locking. ** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td> ** An error. "readonly" is not a valid option for the "mode" parameter. ** Use "ro" instead: "file:data.db?mode=ro". ** </table> ** ** ^URI hexadecimal escape sequences (%HH) are supported within the path and ** query components of a URI. A hexadecimal escape sequence consists of a ** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits ** specifying an octet value. ^Before the path or query components of a ** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all ** hexadecimal escape sequences replaced by a single byte containing the ** corresponding octet. If this process generates an invalid UTF-8 encoding, ** the results are undefined. ** ** <b>Note to Windows users:</b> The encoding used for the filename argument ** of sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open_v2() must be UTF-8, not whatever ** codepage is currently defined. Filenames containing international |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 | const char *zVfs /* Name of VFS module to use */ ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Values For URI Parameters ** ** These are utility routines, useful to [VFS|custom VFS implementations], | | | | | | | 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 | const char *zVfs /* Name of VFS module to use */ ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Values For URI Parameters ** ** These are utility routines, useful to [VFS|custom VFS implementations], ** that check if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of that query parameter. ** ** The first parameter to these interfaces (hereafter referred to ** as F) must be one of: ** <ul> ** <li> A database filename pointer created by the SQLite core and ** passed into the xOpen() method of a VFS implementation, or ** <li> A filename obtained from [sqlite3_db_filename()], or ** <li> A new filename constructed using [sqlite3_create_filename()]. ** </ul> ** If the F parameter is not one of the above, then the behavior is ** undefined and probably undesirable. Older versions of SQLite were ** more tolerant of invalid F parameters than newer versions. ** ** If F is a suitable filename (as described in the previous paragraph) ** and if P is the name of the query parameter, then ** sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns the value of the P ** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a ** query parameter on F. If P is a query parameter of F and it ** has no explicit value, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns ** a pointer to an empty string. ** ** The sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routine assumes that P is a boolean ** parameter and returns true (1) or false (0) according to the value ** of P. The sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routine returns true (1) if the ** value of query parameter P is one of "yes", "true", or "on" in any ** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number. The ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routines returns false (0) if the value of ** query parameter P is one of "no", "false", or "off" in any case or ** if the value begins with a numeric zero. If P is not a query ** parameter on F or if the value of P does not match any of the ** above, then sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) returns (B!=0). ** ** The sqlite3_uri_int64(F,P,D) routine converts the value of P into a ** 64-bit signed integer and returns that integer, or D if P does not ** exist. If the value of P is something other than an integer, then ** zero is returned. ** ** The sqlite3_uri_key(F,N) returns a pointer to the name (not ** the value) of the N-th query parameter for filename F, or a NULL ** pointer if N is less than zero or greater than the number of query ** parameters minus 1. The N value is zero-based so N should be 0 to obtain ** the name of the first query parameter, 1 for the second parameter, and ** so forth. ** ** If F is a NULL pointer, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns NULL and ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) returns B. If F is not a NULL pointer and ** is not a database file pathname pointer that the SQLite core passed ** into the xOpen VFS method, then the behavior of this routine is undefined ** and probably undesirable. ** ** Beginning with SQLite [version 3.31.0] ([dateof:3.31.0]) the input F |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 | const char *sqlite3_filename_journal(sqlite3_filename); const char *sqlite3_filename_wal(sqlite3_filename); /* ** CAPI3REF: Database File Corresponding To A Journal ** ** ^If X is the name of a rollback or WAL-mode journal file that is | | | | | | 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 | const char *sqlite3_filename_journal(sqlite3_filename); const char *sqlite3_filename_wal(sqlite3_filename); /* ** CAPI3REF: Database File Corresponding To A Journal ** ** ^If X is the name of a rollback or WAL-mode journal file that is ** passed into the xOpen method of [sqlite3_vfs], then ** sqlite3_database_file_object(X) returns a pointer to the [sqlite3_file] ** object that represents the main database file. ** ** This routine is intended for use in custom [VFS] implementations ** only. It is not a general-purpose interface. ** The argument sqlite3_file_object(X) must be a filename pointer that ** has been passed into [sqlite3_vfs].xOpen method where the ** flags parameter to xOpen contains one of the bits ** [SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL] or [SQLITE_OPEN_WAL]. Any other use ** of this routine results in undefined and probably undesirable ** behavior. */ sqlite3_file *sqlite3_database_file_object(const char*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Create and Destroy VFS Filenames ** ** These interfaces are provided for use by [VFS shim] implementations and ** are not useful outside of that context. ** ** The sqlite3_create_filename(D,J,W,N,P) allocates memory to hold a version of ** database filename D with corresponding journal file J and WAL file W and ** with N URI parameters key/values pairs in the array P. The result from ** sqlite3_create_filename(D,J,W,N,P) is a pointer to a database filename that ** is safe to pass to routines like: ** <ul> ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_parameter()], ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_boolean()], ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_int64()], ** <li> [sqlite3_uri_key()], ** <li> [sqlite3_filename_database()], ** <li> [sqlite3_filename_journal()], or ** <li> [sqlite3_filename_wal()]. ** </ul> ** If a memory allocation error occurs, sqlite3_create_filename() might ** return a NULL pointer. The memory obtained from sqlite3_create_filename(X) ** must be released by a corresponding call to sqlite3_free_filename(Y). |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 | ** The sqlite3_free_filename(Y) routine releases a memory allocation ** previously obtained from sqlite3_create_filename(). Invoking ** sqlite3_free_filename(Y) where Y is a NULL pointer is a harmless no-op. ** ** If the Y parameter to sqlite3_free_filename(Y) is anything other ** than a NULL pointer or a pointer previously acquired from ** sqlite3_create_filename(), then bad things such as heap | | | | | 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 | ** The sqlite3_free_filename(Y) routine releases a memory allocation ** previously obtained from sqlite3_create_filename(). Invoking ** sqlite3_free_filename(Y) where Y is a NULL pointer is a harmless no-op. ** ** If the Y parameter to sqlite3_free_filename(Y) is anything other ** than a NULL pointer or a pointer previously acquired from ** sqlite3_create_filename(), then bad things such as heap ** corruption or segfaults may occur. The value Y should not be ** used again after sqlite3_free_filename(Y) has been called. This means ** that if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen()] method of a VFS has been called using Y, ** then the corresponding [sqlite3_module.xClose() method should also be ** invoked prior to calling sqlite3_free_filename(Y). */ sqlite3_filename sqlite3_create_filename( const char *zDatabase, const char *zJournal, const char *zWal, int nParam, const char **azParam ); void sqlite3_free_filename(sqlite3_filename); /* ** CAPI3REF: Error Codes And Messages ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with ** [database connection] D failed, then the sqlite3_errcode(D) interface ** returns the numeric [result code] or [extended result code] for that ** API call. ** ^The sqlite3_extended_errcode() ** interface is the same except that it always returns the ** [extended result code] even when extended result codes are ** disabled. ** ** The values returned by sqlite3_errcode() and/or ** sqlite3_extended_errcode() might change with each API call. ** Except, there are some interfaces that are guaranteed to never ** change the value of the error code. The error-code preserving |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 | ** CAPI3REF: Prepared Statement Object ** KEYWORDS: {prepared statement} {prepared statements} ** ** An instance of this object represents a single SQL statement that ** has been compiled into binary form and is ready to be evaluated. ** ** Think of each SQL statement as a separate computer program. The | | | 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 | ** CAPI3REF: Prepared Statement Object ** KEYWORDS: {prepared statement} {prepared statements} ** ** An instance of this object represents a single SQL statement that ** has been compiled into binary form and is ready to be evaluated. ** ** Think of each SQL statement as a separate computer program. The ** original SQL text is source code. A prepared statement object ** is the compiled object code. All SQL must be converted into a ** prepared statement before it can be run. ** ** The life-cycle of a prepared statement object usually goes like this: ** ** <ol> ** <li> Create the prepared statement object using [sqlite3_prepare_v2()]. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 | ** on a connection by connection basis. The first parameter is the ** [database connection] whose limit is to be set or queried. The ** second parameter is one of the [limit categories] that define a ** class of constructs to be size limited. The third parameter is the ** new limit for that construct.)^ ** ** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged. | | | | 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 | ** on a connection by connection basis. The first parameter is the ** [database connection] whose limit is to be set or queried. The ** second parameter is one of the [limit categories] that define a ** class of constructs to be size limited. The third parameter is the ** new limit for that construct.)^ ** ** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged. ** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a ** [limits | hard upper bound] ** set at compile-time by a C preprocessor macro called ** [limits | SQLITE_MAX_<i>NAME</i>]. ** (The "_LIMIT_" in the name is changed to "_MAX_".))^ ** ^Attempts to increase a limit above its hard upper bound are ** silently truncated to the hard upper bound. ** ** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the ** [sqlite3_limit()] interface returns the prior value of the limit. ** ^Hence, to find the current value of a limit without changing it, ** simply invoke this interface with the third parameter set to -1. ** ** Run-time limits are intended for use in applications that manage ** both their own internal database and also databases that are controlled ** by untrusted external sources. An example application might be a |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 | ** New flags may be added in future releases of SQLite. ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT</dt> ** <dd>The SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT flag is a hint to the query planner ** that the prepared statement will be retained for a long time and ** probably reused many times.)^ ^Without this flag, [sqlite3_prepare_v3()] | | | 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 4153 | ** New flags may be added in future releases of SQLite. ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT</dt> ** <dd>The SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT flag is a hint to the query planner ** that the prepared statement will be retained for a long time and ** probably reused many times.)^ ^Without this flag, [sqlite3_prepare_v3()] ** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will ** be used just once or at most a few times and then destroyed using ** [sqlite3_finalize()] relatively soon. The current implementation acts ** on this hint by avoiding the use of [lookaside memory] so as not to ** deplete the limited store of lookaside memory. Future versions of ** SQLite may act on this hint differently. ** ** [[SQLITE_PREPARE_NORMALIZE]] <dt>SQLITE_PREPARE_NORMALIZE</dt> |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 | ** [sqlite3_step()] would only return a generic [SQLITE_ERROR] result code ** and the application would have to make a second call to [sqlite3_reset()] ** in order to find the underlying cause of the problem. With the "v2" prepare ** interfaces, the underlying reason for the error is returned immediately. ** </li> ** ** <li> | | | | | | 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 | ** [sqlite3_step()] would only return a generic [SQLITE_ERROR] result code ** and the application would have to make a second call to [sqlite3_reset()] ** in order to find the underlying cause of the problem. With the "v2" prepare ** interfaces, the underlying reason for the error is returned immediately. ** </li> ** ** <li> ** ^If the specific value bound to a [parameter | host parameter] in the ** WHERE clause might influence the choice of query plan for a statement, ** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been ** a schema change, on the first [sqlite3_step()] call following any change ** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter]. ** ^The specific value of a WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the ** choice of query plan if the parameter is the left-hand side of a [LIKE] ** or [GLOB] operator or if the parameter is compared to an indexed column ** and the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4] compile-time option is enabled. ** </li> ** </ol> ** ** <p>^sqlite3_prepare_v3() differs from sqlite3_prepare_v2() only in having |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 | ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt ** ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_readonly(X) interface returns true (non-zero) if ** and only if the [prepared statement] X makes no direct changes to ** the content of the database file. ** ** Note that [application-defined SQL functions] or | | | | | | | 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 | ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt ** ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_readonly(X) interface returns true (non-zero) if ** and only if the [prepared statement] X makes no direct changes to ** the content of the database file. ** ** Note that [application-defined SQL functions] or ** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect. ** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that ** calls [sqlite3_exec()], then the following SQL statement would ** change the database file through side-effects: ** ** <blockquote><pre> ** SELECT eval('DELETE FROM t1') FROM t2; ** </pre></blockquote> ** ** But because the [SELECT] statement does not change the database file ** directly, sqlite3_stmt_readonly() would still return true.)^ ** ** ^Transaction control statements such as [BEGIN], [COMMIT], [ROLLBACK], ** [SAVEPOINT], and [RELEASE] cause sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true, ** since the statements themselves do not actually modify the database but ** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the ** database. ^The [ATTACH] and [DETACH] statements also cause ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true since, while those statements ** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make ** changes to the content of the database files on disk. ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_readonly() interface returns true for [BEGIN] since ** [BEGIN] merely sets internal flags, but the [BEGIN|BEGIN IMMEDIATE] and ** [BEGIN|BEGIN EXCLUSIVE] commands do touch the database and so ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() returns false for those commands. ** ** ^This routine returns false if there is any possibility that the ** statement might change the database file. ^A false return does ** not guarantee that the statement will change the database file. ** ^For example, an UPDATE statement might have a WHERE clause that ** makes it a no-op, but the sqlite3_stmt_readonly() result would still ** be false. ^Similarly, a CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS statement is a ** read-only no-op if the table already exists, but ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() still returns false for such a statement. ** ** ^If prepared statement X is an [EXPLAIN] or [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] ** statement, then sqlite3_stmt_readonly(X) returns the same value as ** if the EXPLAIN or EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN prefix were omitted. */ int sqlite3_stmt_readonly(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 | int sqlite3_stmt_isexplain(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); /* ** CAPI3REF: Determine If A Prepared Statement Has Been Reset ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt ** ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) interface returns true (non-zero) if the | | | | | | | | 4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 | int sqlite3_stmt_isexplain(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); /* ** CAPI3REF: Determine If A Prepared Statement Has Been Reset ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt ** ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) interface returns true (non-zero) if the ** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using ** [sqlite3_step(S)] but has neither run to completion (returned ** [SQLITE_DONE] from [sqlite3_step(S)]) nor ** been reset using [sqlite3_reset(S)]. ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) ** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer. If S is not a ** NULL pointer and is not a pointer to a valid [prepared statement] ** object, then the behavior is undefined and probably undesirable. ** ** This interface can be used in combination [sqlite3_next_stmt()] ** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database ** connection that are in need of being reset. This can be used, ** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared ** statements that are holding a transaction open. */ int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Dynamically Typed Value Object ** KEYWORDS: {protected sqlite3_value} {unprotected sqlite3_value} ** ** SQLite uses the sqlite3_value object to represent all values ** that can be stored in a database table. SQLite uses dynamic typing ** for the values it stores. ^Values stored in sqlite3_value objects ** can be integers, floating point values, strings, BLOBs, or NULL. ** ** An sqlite3_value object may be either "protected" or "unprotected". ** Some interfaces require a protected sqlite3_value. Other interfaces ** will accept either a protected or an unprotected sqlite3_value. ** Every interface that accepts sqlite3_value arguments specifies ** whether or not it requires a protected sqlite3_value. The ** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new ** protected sqlite3_value from an unprotected sqlite3_value. ** ** The terms "protected" and "unprotected" refer to whether or not ** a mutex is held. An internal mutex is held for a protected ** sqlite3_value object but no mutex is held for an unprotected ** sqlite3_value object. If SQLite is compiled to be single-threaded ** (with [SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] and with [sqlite3_threadsafe()] returning 0) ** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD] ** then there is no distinction between protected and unprotected ** sqlite3_value objects and they can be used interchangeably. However, ** for maximum code portability it is recommended that applications ** still make the distinction between protected and unprotected ** sqlite3_value objects even when not strictly required. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 | ** otherwise. ** ** [[byte-order determination rules]] ^The byte-order of ** UTF16 input text is determined by the byte-order mark (BOM, U+FEFF) ** found in first character, which is removed, or in the absence of a BOM ** the byte order is the native byte order of the host ** machine for sqlite3_bind_text16() or the byte order specified in | | | | | 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 | ** otherwise. ** ** [[byte-order determination rules]] ^The byte-order of ** UTF16 input text is determined by the byte-order mark (BOM, U+FEFF) ** found in first character, which is removed, or in the absence of a BOM ** the byte order is the native byte order of the host ** machine for sqlite3_bind_text16() or the byte order specified in ** the 6th parameter for sqlite3_bind_text64().)^ ** ^If UTF16 input text contains invalid unicode ** characters, then SQLite might change those invalid characters ** into the unicode replacement character: U+FFFD. ** ** ^(In those routines that have a fourth argument, its value is the ** number of bytes in the parameter. To be clear: the value is the ** number of <u>bytes</u> in the value, not the number of characters.)^ ** ^If the fourth parameter to sqlite3_bind_text() or sqlite3_bind_text16() ** is negative, then the length of the string is ** the number of bytes up to the first zero terminator. ** If the fourth parameter to sqlite3_bind_blob() is negative, then ** the behavior is undefined. ** If a non-negative fourth parameter is provided to sqlite3_bind_text() ** or sqlite3_bind_text16() or sqlite3_bind_text64() then ** that parameter must be the byte offset ** where the NUL terminator would occur assuming the string were NUL ** terminated. If any NUL characters occurs at byte offsets less than ** the value of the fourth parameter then the resulting string value will ** contain embedded NULs. The result of expressions involving strings ** with embedded NULs is undefined. ** ** ^The fifth argument to the BLOB and string binding interfaces controls ** or indicates the lifetime of the object referenced by the third parameter. ** These three options exist: ** ^ (1) A destructor to dispose of the BLOB or string after SQLite has finished ** with it may be passed. ^It is called to dispose of the BLOB or string even ** if the call to the bind API fails, except the destructor is not called if ** the third parameter is a NULL pointer or the fourth parameter is negative. ** ^ (2) The special constant, [SQLITE_STATIC], may be passed to indicate that ** the application remains responsible for disposing of the object. ^In this ** case, the object and the provided pointer to it must remain valid until ** either the prepared statement is finalized or the same SQL parameter is ** bound to something else, whichever occurs sooner. ** ^ (3) The constant, [SQLITE_TRANSIENT], may be passed to indicate that the ** object is to be copied prior to the return from sqlite3_bind_*(). ^The ** object and pointer to it must remain valid until then. ^SQLite will then |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 | int sqlite3_clear_bindings(sqlite3_stmt*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Number Of Columns In A Result Set ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt ** ** ^Return the number of columns in the result set returned by the | | | 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 4741 4742 4743 4744 4745 4746 4747 4748 | int sqlite3_clear_bindings(sqlite3_stmt*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Number Of Columns In A Result Set ** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt ** ** ^Return the number of columns in the result set returned by the ** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the ** [prepared statement] returns no data (for example an [UPDATE]). ** ^However, just because this routine returns a positive number does not ** mean that one or more rows of data will be returned. ^A SELECT statement ** will always have a positive sqlite3_column_count() but depending on the ** WHERE clause constraints and the table content, it might return no rows. ** ** See also: [sqlite3_data_count()] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 | ** previously returned [SQLITE_ERROR] or [SQLITE_DONE]. Or it could ** be the case that the same database connection is being used by two or ** more threads at the same moment in time. ** ** For all versions of SQLite up to and including 3.6.23.1, a call to ** [sqlite3_reset()] was required after sqlite3_step() returned anything ** other than [SQLITE_ROW] before any subsequent invocation of | | | 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 | ** previously returned [SQLITE_ERROR] or [SQLITE_DONE]. Or it could ** be the case that the same database connection is being used by two or ** more threads at the same moment in time. ** ** For all versions of SQLite up to and including 3.6.23.1, a call to ** [sqlite3_reset()] was required after sqlite3_step() returned anything ** other than [SQLITE_ROW] before any subsequent invocation of ** sqlite3_step(). Failure to reset the prepared statement using ** [sqlite3_reset()] would result in an [SQLITE_MISUSE] return from ** sqlite3_step(). But after [version 3.6.23.1] ([dateof:3.6.23.1], ** sqlite3_step() began ** calling [sqlite3_reset()] automatically in this circumstance rather ** than returning [SQLITE_MISUSE]. This is not considered a compatibility ** break because any application that ever receives an SQLITE_MISUSE error ** is broken by definition. The [SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET] compile-time option |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 | ** <blockquote><table border=0 cellpadding=0 cellspacing=0> ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_blob</b><td>→<td>BLOB result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_double</b><td>→<td>REAL result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int</b><td>→<td>32-bit INTEGER result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int64</b><td>→<td>64-bit INTEGER result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text</b><td>→<td>UTF-8 TEXT result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text16</b><td>→<td>UTF-16 TEXT result | | | 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 | ** <blockquote><table border=0 cellpadding=0 cellspacing=0> ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_blob</b><td>→<td>BLOB result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_double</b><td>→<td>REAL result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int</b><td>→<td>32-bit INTEGER result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int64</b><td>→<td>64-bit INTEGER result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text</b><td>→<td>UTF-8 TEXT result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text16</b><td>→<td>UTF-16 TEXT result ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>→<td>The result as an ** [sqlite3_value|unprotected sqlite3_value] object. ** <tr><td> <td> <td> ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_bytes</b><td>→<td>Size of a BLOB ** or a UTF-8 TEXT result in bytes ** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_bytes16 </b> ** <td>→ <td>Size of UTF-16 ** TEXT in bytes |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 | ** ^The sqlite3_column_type() routine returns the ** [SQLITE_INTEGER | datatype code] for the initial data type ** of the result column. ^The returned value is one of [SQLITE_INTEGER], ** [SQLITE_FLOAT], [SQLITE_TEXT], [SQLITE_BLOB], or [SQLITE_NULL]. ** The return value of sqlite3_column_type() can be used to decide which ** of the first six interface should be used to extract the column value. ** The value returned by sqlite3_column_type() is only meaningful if no | | | 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068 5069 | ** ^The sqlite3_column_type() routine returns the ** [SQLITE_INTEGER | datatype code] for the initial data type ** of the result column. ^The returned value is one of [SQLITE_INTEGER], ** [SQLITE_FLOAT], [SQLITE_TEXT], [SQLITE_BLOB], or [SQLITE_NULL]. ** The return value of sqlite3_column_type() can be used to decide which ** of the first six interface should be used to extract the column value. ** The value returned by sqlite3_column_type() is only meaningful if no ** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question. ** After a type conversion, the result of calling sqlite3_column_type() ** is undefined, though harmless. Future ** versions of SQLite may change the behavior of sqlite3_column_type() ** following a type conversion. ** ** If the result is a BLOB or a TEXT string, then the sqlite3_column_bytes() ** or sqlite3_column_bytes16() interfaces can be used to determine the size |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 | ** ^If the result is a UTF-8 string, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() converts ** the string to UTF-16 and then returns the number of bytes. ** ^If the result is a numeric value then sqlite3_column_bytes16() uses ** [sqlite3_snprintf()] to convert that value to a UTF-16 string and returns ** the number of bytes in that string. ** ^If the result is NULL, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() returns zero. ** | | | 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 | ** ^If the result is a UTF-8 string, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() converts ** the string to UTF-16 and then returns the number of bytes. ** ^If the result is a numeric value then sqlite3_column_bytes16() uses ** [sqlite3_snprintf()] to convert that value to a UTF-16 string and returns ** the number of bytes in that string. ** ^If the result is NULL, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() returns zero. ** ** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and ** [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] do not include the zero terminators at the end ** of the string. ^For clarity: the values returned by ** [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] are the number of ** bytes in the string, not the number of characters. ** ** ^Strings returned by sqlite3_column_text() and sqlite3_column_text16(), ** even empty strings, are always zero-terminated. ^The return |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5106 5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 | ** an unprotected sqlite3_value object may only be used safely with ** [sqlite3_bind_value()] and [sqlite3_result_value()]. ** If the [unprotected sqlite3_value] object returned by ** [sqlite3_column_value()] is used in any other way, including calls ** to routines like [sqlite3_value_int()], [sqlite3_value_text()], ** or [sqlite3_value_bytes()], the behavior is not threadsafe. ** Hence, the sqlite3_column_value() interface | | | 5106 5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 | ** an unprotected sqlite3_value object may only be used safely with ** [sqlite3_bind_value()] and [sqlite3_result_value()]. ** If the [unprotected sqlite3_value] object returned by ** [sqlite3_column_value()] is used in any other way, including calls ** to routines like [sqlite3_value_int()], [sqlite3_value_text()], ** or [sqlite3_value_bytes()], the behavior is not threadsafe. ** Hence, the sqlite3_column_value() interface ** is normally only useful within the implementation of ** [application-defined SQL functions] or [virtual tables], not within ** top-level application code. ** ** These routines may attempt to convert the datatype of the result. ** ^For example, if the internal representation is FLOAT and a text result ** is requested, [sqlite3_snprintf()] is used internally to perform the ** conversion automatically. ^(The following table details the conversions |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5293 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 | ** CAPI3REF: Create Or Redefine SQL Functions ** KEYWORDS: {function creation routines} ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^These functions (collectively known as "function creation routines") ** are used to add SQL functions or aggregates or to redefine the behavior ** of existing SQL functions or aggregates. The only differences between | | | | | | 5293 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 | ** CAPI3REF: Create Or Redefine SQL Functions ** KEYWORDS: {function creation routines} ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^These functions (collectively known as "function creation routines") ** are used to add SQL functions or aggregates or to redefine the behavior ** of existing SQL functions or aggregates. The only differences between ** the three "sqlite3_create_function*" routines are the text encoding ** expected for the second parameter (the name of the function being ** created) and the presence or absence of a destructor callback for ** the application data pointer. Function sqlite3_create_window_function() ** is similar, but allows the user to supply the extra callback functions ** needed by [aggregate window functions]. ** ** ^The first parameter is the [database connection] to which the SQL ** function is to be added. ^If an application uses more than one database ** connection then application-defined SQL functions must be added ** to each database connection separately. ** ** ^The second parameter is the name of the SQL function to be created or ** redefined. ^The length of the name is limited to 255 bytes in a UTF-8 ** representation, exclusive of the zero-terminator. ^Note that the name ** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes. ** ^Any attempt to create a function with a longer name ** will result in [SQLITE_MISUSE] being returned. ** ** ^The third parameter (nArg) ** is the number of arguments that the SQL function or ** aggregate takes. ^If this parameter is -1, then the SQL function or ** aggregate may take any number of arguments between 0 and the limit ** set by [sqlite3_limit]([SQLITE_LIMIT_FUNCTION_ARG]). If the third ** parameter is less than -1 or greater than 127 then the behavior is ** undefined. ** ** ^The fourth parameter, eTextRep, specifies what ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | text encoding] this SQL function prefers for ** its parameters. The application should set this parameter to ** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes ** [sqlite3_value_text16le()] on an input, or [SQLITE_UTF16BE] if the ** implementation invokes [sqlite3_value_text16be()] on an input, or ** [SQLITE_UTF16] if [sqlite3_value_text16()] is used, or [SQLITE_UTF8] ** otherwise. ^The same SQL function may be registered multiple times using ** different preferred text encodings, with different implementations for ** each encoding. ** ^When multiple implementations of the same function are available, SQLite |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 | ** flag, which if present prevents the function from being invoked from ** within VIEWs, TRIGGERs, CHECK constraints, generated column expressions, ** index expressions, or the WHERE clause of partial indexes. ** ** For best security, the [SQLITE_DIRECTONLY] flag is recommended for ** all application-defined SQL functions that do not need to be ** used inside of triggers, view, CHECK constraints, or other elements of | | | | | | | | | | 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 | ** flag, which if present prevents the function from being invoked from ** within VIEWs, TRIGGERs, CHECK constraints, generated column expressions, ** index expressions, or the WHERE clause of partial indexes. ** ** For best security, the [SQLITE_DIRECTONLY] flag is recommended for ** all application-defined SQL functions that do not need to be ** used inside of triggers, view, CHECK constraints, or other elements of ** the database schema. This flags is especially recommended for SQL ** functions that have side effects or reveal internal application state. ** Without this flag, an attacker might be able to modify the schema of ** a database file to include invocations of the function with parameters ** chosen by the attacker, which the application will then execute when ** the database file is opened and read. ** ** ^(The fifth parameter is an arbitrary pointer. The implementation of the ** function can gain access to this pointer using [sqlite3_user_data()].)^ ** ** ^The sixth, seventh and eighth parameters passed to the three ** "sqlite3_create_function*" functions, xFunc, xStep and xFinal, are ** pointers to C-language functions that implement the SQL function or ** aggregate. ^A scalar SQL function requires an implementation of the xFunc ** callback only; NULL pointers must be passed as the xStep and xFinal ** parameters. ^An aggregate SQL function requires an implementation of xStep ** and xFinal and NULL pointer must be passed for xFunc. ^To delete an existing ** SQL function or aggregate, pass NULL pointers for all three function ** callbacks. ** ** ^The sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth parameters (xStep, xFinal, xValue ** and xInverse) passed to sqlite3_create_window_function are pointers to ** C-language callbacks that implement the new function. xStep and xFinal ** must both be non-NULL. xValue and xInverse may either both be NULL, in ** which case a regular aggregate function is created, or must both be ** non-NULL, in which case the new function may be used as either an aggregate ** or aggregate window function. More details regarding the implementation ** of aggregate window functions are ** [user-defined window functions|available here]. ** ** ^(If the final parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2() or ** sqlite3_create_window_function() is not NULL, then it is destructor for ** the application data pointer. The destructor is invoked when the function ** is deleted, either by being overloaded or when the database connection ** closes.)^ ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to ** sqlite3_create_function_v2() fails. ^When the destructor callback is ** invoked, it is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application ** data pointer which was the fifth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2(). ** ** ^It is permitted to register multiple implementations of the same ** functions with the same name but with either differing numbers of ** arguments or differing preferred text encodings. ^SQLite will use ** the implementation that most closely matches the way in which the ** SQL function is used. ^A function implementation with a non-negative ** nArg parameter is a better match than a function implementation with ** a negative nArg. ^A function where the preferred text encoding ** matches the database encoding is a better ** match than a function where the encoding is different. ** ^A function where the encoding difference is between UTF16le and UTF16be ** is a closer match than a function where the encoding difference is ** between UTF8 and UTF16. ** ** ^Built-in functions may be overloaded by new application-defined functions. ** ** ^An application-defined function is permitted to call other |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5468 5469 5470 5471 5472 5473 5474 | #define SQLITE_UTF16 4 /* Use native byte order */ #define SQLITE_ANY 5 /* Deprecated */ #define SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED 8 /* sqlite3_create_collation only */ /* ** CAPI3REF: Function Flags ** | | | | | | | 5468 5469 5470 5471 5472 5473 5474 5475 5476 5477 5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 5487 5488 5489 5490 5491 5492 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 | #define SQLITE_UTF16 4 /* Use native byte order */ #define SQLITE_ANY 5 /* Deprecated */ #define SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED 8 /* sqlite3_create_collation only */ /* ** CAPI3REF: Function Flags ** ** These constants may be ORed together with the ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | preferred text encoding] as the fourth argument ** to [sqlite3_create_function()], [sqlite3_create_function16()], or ** [sqlite3_create_function_v2()]. ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC]] <dt>SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC</dt><dd> ** The SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC flag means that the new function always gives ** the same output when the input parameters are the same. ** The [abs|abs() function] is deterministic, for example, but ** [randomblob|randomblob()] is not. Functions must ** be deterministic in order to be used in certain contexts such as ** with the WHERE clause of [partial indexes] or in [generated columns]. ** SQLite might also optimize deterministic functions by factoring them ** out of inner loops. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DIRECTONLY]] <dt>SQLITE_DIRECTONLY</dt><dd> ** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag means that the function may only be invoked ** from top-level SQL, and cannot be used in VIEWs or TRIGGERs nor in ** schema structures such as [CHECK constraints], [DEFAULT clauses], ** [expression indexes], [partial indexes], or [generated columns]. ** <p> ** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag is recommended for any ** [application-defined SQL function] ** that has side-effects or that could potentially leak sensitive information. ** This will prevent attacks in which an application is tricked ** into using a database file that has had its schema surreptitiously ** modified to invoke the application-defined function in ways that are ** harmful. ** <p> ** Some people say it is good practice to set SQLITE_DIRECTONLY on all ** [application-defined SQL functions], regardless of whether or not they ** are security sensitive, as doing so prevents those functions from being used ** inside of the database schema, and thus ensures that the database |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 | #define SQLITE_INNOCUOUS 0x000200000 /* ** CAPI3REF: Deprecated Functions ** DEPRECATED ** ** These functions are [deprecated]. In order to maintain | | | 5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 | #define SQLITE_INNOCUOUS 0x000200000 /* ** CAPI3REF: Deprecated Functions ** DEPRECATED ** ** These functions are [deprecated]. In order to maintain ** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue ** to be supported. However, new applications should avoid ** the use of these functions. To encourage programmers to avoid ** these functions, we will not explain what they do. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED SQLITE_DEPRECATED int sqlite3_aggregate_count(sqlite3_context*); SQLITE_DEPRECATED int sqlite3_expired(sqlite3_stmt*); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 | ** pointer instead of a [sqlite3_stmt*] pointer and an integer column number. ** ** ^The sqlite3_value_text16() interface extracts a UTF-16 string ** in the native byte-order of the host machine. ^The ** sqlite3_value_text16be() and sqlite3_value_text16le() interfaces ** extract UTF-16 strings as big-endian and little-endian respectively. ** | | | | 5619 5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 | ** pointer instead of a [sqlite3_stmt*] pointer and an integer column number. ** ** ^The sqlite3_value_text16() interface extracts a UTF-16 string ** in the native byte-order of the host machine. ^The ** sqlite3_value_text16be() and sqlite3_value_text16le() interfaces ** extract UTF-16 strings as big-endian and little-endian respectively. ** ** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized ** using [sqlite3_bind_pointer(S,I,P,X,D)] or [sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,X,D)] ** and if X and Y are strings that compare equal according to strcmp(X,Y), ** then sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) will return the pointer P. ^Otherwise, ** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer() ** routine is part of the [pointer passing interface] added for SQLite 3.20.0. ** ** ^(The sqlite3_value_type(V) interface returns the ** [SQLITE_INTEGER | datatype code] for the initial datatype of the ** [sqlite3_value] object V. The returned value is one of [SQLITE_INTEGER], ** [SQLITE_FLOAT], [SQLITE_TEXT], [SQLITE_BLOB], or [SQLITE_NULL].)^ ** Other interfaces might change the datatype for an sqlite3_value object. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Aggregate Function Context ** METHOD: sqlite3_context ** ** Implementations of aggregate SQL functions use this ** routine to allocate memory for storing their state. ** | | | | | | 5769 5770 5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783 5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Aggregate Function Context ** METHOD: sqlite3_context ** ** Implementations of aggregate SQL functions use this ** routine to allocate memory for storing their state. ** ** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called ** for a particular aggregate function, SQLite allocates ** N bytes of memory, zeroes out that memory, and returns a pointer ** to the new memory. ^On second and subsequent calls to ** sqlite3_aggregate_context() for the same aggregate function instance, ** the same buffer is returned. Sqlite3_aggregate_context() is normally ** called once for each invocation of the xStep callback and then one ** last time when the xFinal callback is invoked. ^(When no rows match ** an aggregate query, the xStep() callback of the aggregate function ** implementation is never called and xFinal() is called exactly once. ** In those cases, sqlite3_aggregate_context() might be called for the ** first time from within xFinal().)^ ** ** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer ** when first called if N is less than or equal to zero or if a memory ** allocation error occurs. ** ** ^(The amount of space allocated by sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) is ** determined by the N parameter on first successful call. Changing the ** value of N in any subsequent call to sqlite3_aggregate_context() within ** the same aggregate function instance will not resize the memory ** allocation.)^ Within the xFinal callback, it is customary to set ** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no ** pointless memory allocations occur. ** ** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by ** sqlite3_aggregate_context() when the aggregate query concludes. ** ** The first parameter must be a copy of the ** [sqlite3_context | SQL function context] that is the first parameter ** to the xStep or xFinal callback routine that implements the aggregate ** function. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 | ** ** These functions may be used by (non-aggregate) SQL functions to ** associate metadata with argument values. If the same value is passed to ** multiple invocations of the same SQL function during query execution, under ** some circumstances the associated metadata may be preserved. An example ** of where this might be useful is in a regular-expression matching ** function. The compiled version of the regular expression can be stored as | | | 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852 5853 5854 5855 5856 5857 5858 | ** ** These functions may be used by (non-aggregate) SQL functions to ** associate metadata with argument values. If the same value is passed to ** multiple invocations of the same SQL function during query execution, under ** some circumstances the associated metadata may be preserved. An example ** of where this might be useful is in a regular-expression matching ** function. The compiled version of the regular expression can be stored as ** metadata associated with the pattern string. ** Then as long as the pattern string remains the same, ** the compiled regular expression can be reused on multiple ** invocations of the same function. ** ** ^The sqlite3_get_auxdata(C,N) interface returns a pointer to the metadata ** associated by the sqlite3_set_auxdata(C,N,P,X) function with the Nth argument ** value to the application-defined function. ^N is zero for the left-most |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 | ** once, when the metadata is discarded. ** SQLite is free to discard the metadata at any time, including: <ul> ** <li> ^(when the corresponding function parameter changes)^, or ** <li> ^(when [sqlite3_reset()] or [sqlite3_finalize()] is called for the ** SQL statement)^, or ** <li> ^(when sqlite3_set_auxdata() is invoked again on the same ** parameter)^, or | | | | 5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 | ** once, when the metadata is discarded. ** SQLite is free to discard the metadata at any time, including: <ul> ** <li> ^(when the corresponding function parameter changes)^, or ** <li> ^(when [sqlite3_reset()] or [sqlite3_finalize()] is called for the ** SQL statement)^, or ** <li> ^(when sqlite3_set_auxdata() is invoked again on the same ** parameter)^, or ** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory ** allocation error occurs.)^ </ul> ** ** Note the last bullet in particular. The destructor X in ** sqlite3_set_auxdata(C,N,P,X) might be called immediately, before the ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() interface even returns. Hence sqlite3_set_auxdata() ** should be called near the end of the function implementation and the ** function implementation should not make any use of P after ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() has been called. ** ** ^(In practice, metadata is preserved between function calls for |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 | ** be deallocated after sqlite3_result_value() returns without harm. ** ^A [protected sqlite3_value] object may always be used where an ** [unprotected sqlite3_value] object is required, so either ** kind of [sqlite3_value] object can be used with this interface. ** ** ^The sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,T,D) interface sets the result to an ** SQL NULL value, just like [sqlite3_result_null(C)], except that it | | | 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 | ** be deallocated after sqlite3_result_value() returns without harm. ** ^A [protected sqlite3_value] object may always be used where an ** [unprotected sqlite3_value] object is required, so either ** kind of [sqlite3_value] object can be used with this interface. ** ** ^The sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,T,D) interface sets the result to an ** SQL NULL value, just like [sqlite3_result_null(C)], except that it ** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that ** NULL value such that the pointer can be retrieved within an ** [application-defined SQL function] using [sqlite3_value_pointer()]. ** ^If the D parameter is not NULL, then it is a pointer to a destructor ** for the P parameter. ^SQLite invokes D with P as its only argument ** when SQLite is finished with P. The T parameter should be a static ** string and preferably a string literal. The sqlite3_result_pointer() ** routine is part of the [pointer passing interface] added for SQLite 3.20.0. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Setting The Subtype Of An SQL Function ** METHOD: sqlite3_context ** ** The sqlite3_result_subtype(C,T) function causes the subtype of | | | | 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Setting The Subtype Of An SQL Function ** METHOD: sqlite3_context ** ** The sqlite3_result_subtype(C,T) function causes the subtype of ** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with ** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T. Only the lower 8 bits ** of the subtype T are preserved in current versions of SQLite; ** higher order bits are discarded. ** The number of subtype bytes preserved by SQLite might increase ** in future releases of SQLite. */ void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context*,unsigned int); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 | ** ^Multiple collating functions can be registered using the same name but ** with different eTextRep parameters and SQLite will use whichever ** function requires the least amount of data transformation. ** ^If the xCompare argument is NULL then the collating function is ** deleted. ^When all collating functions having the same name are deleted, ** that collation is no longer usable. ** | | | 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149 6150 6151 | ** ^Multiple collating functions can be registered using the same name but ** with different eTextRep parameters and SQLite will use whichever ** function requires the least amount of data transformation. ** ^If the xCompare argument is NULL then the collating function is ** deleted. ^When all collating functions having the same name are deleted, ** that collation is no longer usable. ** ** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg ** application data pointer and with two strings in the encoding specified ** by the eTextRep argument. The two integer parameters to the collating ** function callback are the length of the two strings, in bytes. The collating ** function must return an integer that is negative, zero, or positive ** if the first string is less than, equal to, or greater than the second, ** respectively. A collating function must always return the same answer ** given the same inputs. If two or more collating functions are registered |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6168 6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 | ** ^The sqlite3_create_collation_v2() works like sqlite3_create_collation() ** with the addition that the xDestroy callback is invoked on pArg when ** the collating function is deleted. ** ^Collating functions are deleted when they are overridden by later ** calls to the collation creation functions or when the ** [database connection] is closed using [sqlite3_close()]. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 6168 6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196 6197 6198 6199 6200 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 6207 6208 6209 6210 6211 | ** ^The sqlite3_create_collation_v2() works like sqlite3_create_collation() ** with the addition that the xDestroy callback is invoked on pArg when ** the collating function is deleted. ** ^Collating functions are deleted when they are overridden by later ** calls to the collation creation functions or when the ** [database connection] is closed using [sqlite3_close()]. ** ** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the ** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() function fails. Applications that invoke ** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should ** check the return code and dispose of the application data pointer ** themselves rather than expecting SQLite to deal with it for them. ** This is different from every other SQLite interface. The inconsistency ** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards ** compatibility. ** ** See also: [sqlite3_collation_needed()] and [sqlite3_collation_needed16()]. */ int sqlite3_create_collation( sqlite3*, const char *zName, int eTextRep, void *pArg, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ); int sqlite3_create_collation_v2( sqlite3*, const char *zName, int eTextRep, void *pArg, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*), void(*xDestroy)(void*) ); int sqlite3_create_collation16( sqlite3*, const void *zName, int eTextRep, void *pArg, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Collation Needed Callbacks ** METHOD: sqlite3 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 | ** required collation sequence.)^ ** ** The callback function should register the desired collation using ** [sqlite3_create_collation()], [sqlite3_create_collation16()], or ** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()]. */ int sqlite3_collation_needed( | | | | | | 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 | ** required collation sequence.)^ ** ** The callback function should register the desired collation using ** [sqlite3_create_collation()], [sqlite3_create_collation16()], or ** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()]. */ int sqlite3_collation_needed( sqlite3*, void*, void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*) ); int sqlite3_collation_needed16( sqlite3*, void*, void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*) ); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CEROD /* ** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless ** activated, none of the CEROD routines will work. */ void sqlite3_activate_cerod( const char *zPassPhrase /* Activation phrase */ ); #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 | ** as part of process initialization and before any SQLite interface ** routines have been called and that this variable remain unchanged ** thereafter. ** ** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore, ** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string | | | 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319 | ** as part of process initialization and before any SQLite interface ** routines have been called and that this variable remain unchanged ** thereafter. ** ** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore, ** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string ** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory ** using [sqlite3_free]. ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be ** made NULL or made to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc] ** or else the use of the [temp_store_directory pragma] should be avoided. ** Except when requested by the [temp_store_directory pragma], SQLite ** does not free the memory that sqlite3_temp_directory points to. If |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 | ** as part of process initialization and before any SQLite interface ** routines have been called and that this variable remain unchanged ** thereafter. ** ** ^The [data_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore, ** the [data_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string | | | 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 | ** as part of process initialization and before any SQLite interface ** routines have been called and that this variable remain unchanged ** thereafter. ** ** ^The [data_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore, ** the [data_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string ** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory ** using [sqlite3_free]. ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be ** made NULL or made to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc] ** or else the use of the [data_store_directory pragma] should be avoided. */ SQLITE_EXTERN char *sqlite3_data_directory; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 | void *sqlite3_commit_hook(sqlite3*, int(*)(void*), void*); void *sqlite3_rollback_hook(sqlite3*, void(*)(void *), void*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Autovacuum Compaction Amount Callback ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** | | | 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 6634 6635 6636 6637 6638 6639 6640 6641 6642 | void *sqlite3_commit_hook(sqlite3*, int(*)(void*), void*); void *sqlite3_rollback_hook(sqlite3*, void(*)(void *), void*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Autovacuum Compaction Amount Callback ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^The sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(D,C,P,X) interface registers a callback ** function C that is invoked prior to each autovacuum of the database ** file. ^The callback is passed a copy of the generic data pointer (P), ** the schema-name of the attached database that is being autovacuumed, ** the size of the database file in pages, the number of free pages, ** and the number of bytes per page, respectively. The callback should ** return the number of free pages that should be removed by the ** autovacuum. ^If the callback returns zero, then no autovacuum happens. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 | ** on the same [database connection] D, or NULL for ** the first call on D. ** ** See also the [sqlite3_commit_hook()], [sqlite3_rollback_hook()], ** and [sqlite3_preupdate_hook()] interfaces. */ void *sqlite3_update_hook( | | | | | | 6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 6758 6759 6760 6761 6762 6763 6764 6765 6766 6767 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774 6775 6776 6777 6778 6779 6780 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 6793 6794 6795 | ** on the same [database connection] D, or NULL for ** the first call on D. ** ** See also the [sqlite3_commit_hook()], [sqlite3_rollback_hook()], ** and [sqlite3_preupdate_hook()] interfaces. */ void *sqlite3_update_hook( sqlite3*, void(*)(void *,int ,char const *,char const *,sqlite3_int64), void* ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Enable Or Disable Shared Pager Cache ** ** ^(This routine enables or disables the sharing of the database cache ** and schema data structures between [database connection | connections] ** to the same database. Sharing is enabled if the argument is true ** and disabled if the argument is false.)^ ** ** This interface is omitted if SQLite is compiled with ** [-DSQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE]. The [-DSQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE] ** compile-time option is recommended because the ** [use of shared cache mode is discouraged]. ** ** ^Cache sharing is enabled and disabled for an entire process. ** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]). ** In prior versions of SQLite, ** sharing was enabled or disabled for each thread separately. ** ** ^(The cache sharing mode set by this interface effects all subsequent ** calls to [sqlite3_open()], [sqlite3_open_v2()], and [sqlite3_open16()]. ** Existing database connections continue to use the sharing mode ** that was in effect at the time they were opened.)^ ** ** ^(This routine returns [SQLITE_OK] if shared cache was enabled or disabled ** successfully. An [error code] is returned otherwise.)^ ** ** ^Shared cache is disabled by default. It is recommended that it stay ** that way. In other words, do not use this routine. This interface ** continues to be provided for historical compatibility, but its use is ** discouraged. Any use of shared cache is discouraged. If shared cache ** must be used, it is recommended that shared cache only be enabled for ** individual database connections using the [sqlite3_open_v2()] interface ** with the [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE] flag. ** ** Note: This method is disabled on MacOS X 10.7 and iOS version 5.0 ** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems, ** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] with [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE]. ** ** This interface is threadsafe on processors where writing a ** 32-bit integer is atomic. ** ** See Also: [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6834 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839 6840 | ** ^The sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64() interface sets and/or queries the ** soft limit on the amount of heap memory that may be allocated by SQLite. ** ^SQLite strives to keep heap memory utilization below the soft heap ** limit by reducing the number of pages held in the page cache ** as heap memory usages approaches the limit. ** ^The soft heap limit is "soft" because even though SQLite strives to stay ** below the limit, it will exceed the limit rather than generate | | | 6834 6835 6836 6837 6838 6839 6840 6841 6842 6843 6844 6845 6846 6847 6848 | ** ^The sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64() interface sets and/or queries the ** soft limit on the amount of heap memory that may be allocated by SQLite. ** ^SQLite strives to keep heap memory utilization below the soft heap ** limit by reducing the number of pages held in the page cache ** as heap memory usages approaches the limit. ** ^The soft heap limit is "soft" because even though SQLite strives to stay ** below the limit, it will exceed the limit rather than generate ** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error. In other words, the soft heap limit ** is advisory only. ** ** ^The sqlite3_hard_heap_limit64(N) interface sets a hard upper bound of ** N bytes on the amount of memory that will be allocated. ^The ** sqlite3_hard_heap_limit64(N) interface is similar to ** sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64(N) except that memory allocations will fail ** when the hard heap limit is reached. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6950 6951 6952 6953 6954 6955 6956 | ** ** ^The memory pointed to by the character pointers returned for the ** declaration type and collation sequence is valid until the next ** call to any SQLite API function. ** ** ^If the specified table is actually a view, an [error code] is returned. ** | | | 6950 6951 6952 6953 6954 6955 6956 6957 6958 6959 6960 6961 6962 6963 6964 | ** ** ^The memory pointed to by the character pointers returned for the ** declaration type and collation sequence is valid until the next ** call to any SQLite API function. ** ** ^If the specified table is actually a view, an [error code] is returned. ** ** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table ** is not a [WITHOUT ROWID] table and an ** [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] column has been explicitly declared, then the output ** parameters are set for the explicitly declared column. ^(If there is no ** [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] column, then the outputs ** for the [rowid] are set as follows: ** ** <pre> |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 7022 | ** ** ^Extension loading must be enabled using ** [sqlite3_enable_load_extension()] or ** [sqlite3_db_config](db,[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_LOAD_EXTENSION],1,NULL) ** prior to calling this API, ** otherwise an error will be returned. ** | | | 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 7030 | ** ** ^Extension loading must be enabled using ** [sqlite3_enable_load_extension()] or ** [sqlite3_db_config](db,[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_LOAD_EXTENSION],1,NULL) ** prior to calling this API, ** otherwise an error will be returned. ** ** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the ** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_LOAD_EXTENSION] method be used to enable only this ** interface. The use of the [sqlite3_enable_load_extension()] interface ** should be avoided. This will keep the SQL function [load_extension()] ** disabled and prevent SQL injections from giving attackers ** access to extension loading capabilities. ** ** See also the [load_extension() SQL function]. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Cancel Automatic Extension Loading ** ** ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] interface unregisters the ** initialization routine X that was registered using a prior call to ** [sqlite3_auto_extension(X)]. ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] | | | 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Cancel Automatic Extension Loading ** ** ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] interface unregisters the ** initialization routine X that was registered using a prior call to ** [sqlite3_auto_extension(X)]. ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] ** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully ** unregistered and it returns 0 if X was not on the list of initialization ** routines. */ int sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(void(*xEntryPoint)(void)); /* ** CAPI3REF: Reset Automatic Extension Loading |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 | typedef struct sqlite3_vtab_cursor sqlite3_vtab_cursor; typedef struct sqlite3_module sqlite3_module; /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Object ** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module} ** | | | | 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 | typedef struct sqlite3_vtab_cursor sqlite3_vtab_cursor; typedef struct sqlite3_module sqlite3_module; /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Object ** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module} ** ** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module", ** defines the implementation of a [virtual table]. ** This structure consists mostly of methods for the module. ** ** ^A virtual table module is created by filling in a persistent ** instance of this structure and passing a pointer to that instance ** to [sqlite3_create_module()] or [sqlite3_create_module_v2()]. ** ^The registration remains valid until it is replaced by a different ** module or until the [database connection] closes. The content |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7169 7170 7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 | int (*xSync)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab); int (*xCommit)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab); int (*xRollback)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab); int (*xFindFunction)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, int nArg, const char *zName, void (**pxFunc)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value**), void **ppArg); int (*xRename)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNew); | | | 7169 7170 7171 7172 7173 7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 7183 | int (*xSync)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab); int (*xCommit)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab); int (*xRollback)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab); int (*xFindFunction)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, int nArg, const char *zName, void (**pxFunc)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value**), void **ppArg); int (*xRename)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNew); /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those ** below are for version 2 and greater. */ int (*xSavepoint)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int); int (*xRelease)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int); int (*xRollbackTo)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int); /* The methods above are in versions 1 and 2 of the sqlite_module object. ** Those below are for version 3 and greater. */ int (*xShadowName)(const char*); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7219 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 | ** required by the current scan. Virtual table columns are numbered from ** zero in the order in which they appear within the CREATE TABLE statement ** passed to sqlite3_declare_vtab(). For the first 63 columns (columns 0-62), ** the corresponding bit is set within the colUsed mask if the column may be ** required by SQLite. If the table has at least 64 columns and any column ** to the right of the first 63 is required, then bit 63 of colUsed is also ** set. In other words, column iCol may be required if the expression | | | 7219 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 7226 7227 7228 7229 7230 7231 7232 7233 | ** required by the current scan. Virtual table columns are numbered from ** zero in the order in which they appear within the CREATE TABLE statement ** passed to sqlite3_declare_vtab(). For the first 63 columns (columns 0-62), ** the corresponding bit is set within the colUsed mask if the column may be ** required by SQLite. If the table has at least 64 columns and any column ** to the right of the first 63 is required, then bit 63 of colUsed is also ** set. In other words, column iCol may be required if the expression ** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to ** non-zero. ** ** The [xBestIndex] method must fill aConstraintUsage[] with information ** about what parameters to pass to xFilter. ^If argvIndex>0 then ** the right-hand side of the corresponding aConstraint[] is evaluated ** and becomes the argvIndex-th entry in argv. ^(If aConstraintUsage[].omit ** is true, then the constraint is assumed to be fully handled by the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 7251 7252 | ** ** ^The orderByConsumed means that output from [xFilter]/[xNext] will occur in ** the correct order to satisfy the ORDER BY clause so that no separate ** sorting step is required. ** ** ^The estimatedCost value is an estimate of the cost of a particular ** strategy. A cost of N indicates that the cost of the strategy is similar | | | | | | | | | 7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 7257 7258 7259 7260 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265 7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 7277 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284 7285 7286 7287 7288 7289 7290 | ** ** ^The orderByConsumed means that output from [xFilter]/[xNext] will occur in ** the correct order to satisfy the ORDER BY clause so that no separate ** sorting step is required. ** ** ^The estimatedCost value is an estimate of the cost of a particular ** strategy. A cost of N indicates that the cost of the strategy is similar ** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N) ** indicates that the expense of the operation is similar to that of a ** binary search on a unique indexed field of an SQLite table with N rows. ** ** ^The estimatedRows value is an estimate of the number of rows that ** will be returned by the strategy. ** ** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a ** mask of SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_* flags. Currently there is only one such flag - ** SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE. If the xBestIndex method sets this flag, SQLite ** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row. ** ** Additionally, if xBestIndex sets the SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE flag, then ** SQLite also assumes that if a call to the xUpdate() method is made as ** part of the same statement to delete or update a virtual table row and the ** implementation returns SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, then there is no need to rollback ** any database changes. In other words, if the xUpdate() returns ** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, the database contents must be exactly as they were ** before xUpdate was called. By contrast, if SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE is not ** set and xUpdate returns SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, any database changes made by ** the xUpdate method are automatically rolled back by SQLite. ** ** IMPORTANT: The estimatedRows field was added to the sqlite3_index_info ** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]). ** If a virtual table extension is ** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting ** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely ** to include crashing the application). The estimatedRows field should ** therefore only be used if [sqlite3_libversion_number()] returns a ** value greater than or equal to 3008002. Similarly, the idxFlags field ** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]). ** It may therefore only be used if ** sqlite3_libversion_number() returns a value greater than or equal to ** 3009000. */ struct sqlite3_index_info { /* Inputs */ int nConstraint; /* Number of entries in aConstraint */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 | /* Fields below are only available in SQLite 3.10.0 and later */ sqlite3_uint64 colUsed; /* Input: Mask of columns used by statement */ }; /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Scan Flags ** | | | 7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 | /* Fields below are only available in SQLite 3.10.0 and later */ sqlite3_uint64 colUsed; /* Input: Mask of columns used by statement */ }; /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Scan Flags ** ** Virtual table implementations are allowed to set the ** [sqlite3_index_info].idxFlags field to some combination of ** these bits. */ #define SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE 1 /* Scan visits at most 1 row */ /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Constraint Operator Codes |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7388 7389 7390 7391 7392 7393 7394 | ** ** ^These routines are used to register a new [virtual table module] name. ** ^Module names must be registered before ** creating a new [virtual table] using the module and before using a ** preexisting [virtual table] for the module. ** ** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified | | | 7388 7389 7390 7391 7392 7393 7394 7395 7396 7397 7398 7399 7400 7401 7402 | ** ** ^These routines are used to register a new [virtual table module] name. ** ^Module names must be registered before ** creating a new [virtual table] using the module and before using a ** preexisting [virtual table] for the module. ** ** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified ** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the ** second parameter. ^The third parameter is a pointer to ** the implementation of the [virtual table module]. ^The fourth ** parameter is an arbitrary client data pointer that is passed through ** into the [xCreate] and [xConnect] methods of the virtual table module ** when a new virtual table is be being created or reinitialized. ** ** ^The sqlite3_create_module_v2() interface has a fifth parameter which |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 | int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3*, const char *zSQL); /* ** CAPI3REF: Overload A Function For A Virtual Table ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions | | | 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517 | int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3*, const char *zSQL); /* ** CAPI3REF: Overload A Function For A Virtual Table ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions ** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module]. ** But global versions of those functions ** must exist in order to be overloaded.)^ ** ** ^(This API makes sure a global version of a function with a particular ** name and number of parameters exists. If no such function exists ** before this API is called, a new function is created.)^ ^The implementation ** of the new function always causes an exception to be thrown. So |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 | ** in row iRow, column zColumn, table zTable in database zDb; ** in other words, the same BLOB that would be selected by: ** ** <pre> ** SELECT zColumn FROM zDb.zTable WHERE [rowid] = iRow; ** </pre>)^ ** | | | | | | | | | | | | 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7557 7558 7559 7560 7561 7562 7563 7564 7565 7566 7567 7568 7569 7570 7571 7572 7573 7574 7575 7576 7577 7578 7579 7580 7581 7582 7583 7584 7585 7586 7587 7588 7589 7590 7591 7592 | ** in row iRow, column zColumn, table zTable in database zDb; ** in other words, the same BLOB that would be selected by: ** ** <pre> ** SELECT zColumn FROM zDb.zTable WHERE [rowid] = iRow; ** </pre>)^ ** ** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but ** rather the symbolic name of the database. For attached databases, this is ** the name that appears after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement. ** For the main database file, the database name is "main". For TEMP ** tables, the database name is "temp".)^ ** ** ^If the flags parameter is non-zero, then the BLOB is opened for read ** and write access. ^If the flags parameter is zero, the BLOB is opened for ** read-only access. ** ** ^(On success, [SQLITE_OK] is returned and the new [BLOB handle] is stored ** in *ppBlob. Otherwise an [error code] is returned and, unless the error ** code is SQLITE_MISUSE, *ppBlob is set to NULL.)^ ^This means that, provided ** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()] ** on *ppBlob after this function it returns. ** ** This function fails with SQLITE_ERROR if any of the following are true: ** <ul> ** <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^, ** <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^, ** <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^, ** <li> ^(Column zColumn does not exist)^, ** <li> ^(Row iRow is not present in the table)^, ** <li> ^(The specified column of row iRow contains a value that is not ** a TEXT or BLOB value)^, ** <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE ** constraint and the blob is being opened for read/write access)^, ** <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled, ** column zColumn is part of a [child key] definition and the blob is ** being opened for read/write access)^. ** </ul> ** ** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the ** [database connection] error code and message accessible via ** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions. ** ** A BLOB referenced by sqlite3_blob_open() may be read using the ** [sqlite3_blob_read()] interface and modified by using ** [sqlite3_blob_write()]. The [BLOB handle] can be moved to a ** different row of the same table using the [sqlite3_blob_reopen()] ** interface. However, the column, table, or database of a [BLOB handle] ** cannot be changed after the [BLOB handle] is opened. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 | ** ** ^Use the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface to determine the size of ** the opened blob. ^The size of a blob may not be changed by this ** interface. Use the [UPDATE] SQL command to change the size of a ** blob. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_bind_zeroblob()] and [sqlite3_result_zeroblob()] interfaces | | | 7604 7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615 7616 7617 7618 | ** ** ^Use the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface to determine the size of ** the opened blob. ^The size of a blob may not be changed by this ** interface. Use the [UPDATE] SQL command to change the size of a ** blob. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_bind_zeroblob()] and [sqlite3_result_zeroblob()] interfaces ** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a ** zero-filled blob to read or write using the incremental-blob interface. ** ** To avoid a resource leak, every open [BLOB handle] should eventually ** be released by a call to [sqlite3_blob_close()]. ** ** See also: [sqlite3_blob_close()], ** [sqlite3_blob_reopen()], [sqlite3_blob_read()], |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7654 7655 7656 7657 7658 7659 7660 | int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *, sqlite3_int64); /* ** CAPI3REF: Close A BLOB Handle ** DESTRUCTOR: sqlite3_blob ** ** ^This function closes an open [BLOB handle]. ^(The BLOB handle is closed | | | | | | | 7654 7655 7656 7657 7658 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 7689 7690 | int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *, sqlite3_int64); /* ** CAPI3REF: Close A BLOB Handle ** DESTRUCTOR: sqlite3_blob ** ** ^This function closes an open [BLOB handle]. ^(The BLOB handle is closed ** unconditionally. Even if this routine returns an error code, the ** handle is still closed.)^ ** ** ^If the blob handle being closed was opened for read-write access, and if ** the database is in auto-commit mode and there are no other open read-write ** blob handles or active write statements, the current transaction is ** committed. ^If an error occurs while committing the transaction, an error ** code is returned and the transaction rolled back. ** ** Calling this function with an argument that is not a NULL pointer or an ** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine ** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to ** [sqlite3_blob_open()]) is a harmless no-op. ^Otherwise, if this function ** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the ** sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg() functions are set before returning. */ int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *); /* ** CAPI3REF: Return The Size Of An Open BLOB ** METHOD: sqlite3_blob ** ** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the ** successfully opened [BLOB handle] in its only argument. ^The ** incremental blob I/O routines can only read or overwriting existing ** blob content; they cannot change the size of a blob. ** ** This routine only works on a [BLOB handle] which has been created ** by a prior successful call to [sqlite3_blob_open()] and which has not ** been closed by [sqlite3_blob_close()]. Passing any other pointer in |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 | ** ** ^(This function is used to write data into an open [BLOB handle] from a ** caller-supplied buffer. N bytes of data are copied from the buffer Z ** into the open BLOB, starting at offset iOffset.)^ ** ** ^(On success, sqlite3_blob_write() returns SQLITE_OK. ** Otherwise, an [error code] or an [extended error code] is returned.)^ | | | | | | | | 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 | ** ** ^(This function is used to write data into an open [BLOB handle] from a ** caller-supplied buffer. N bytes of data are copied from the buffer Z ** into the open BLOB, starting at offset iOffset.)^ ** ** ^(On success, sqlite3_blob_write() returns SQLITE_OK. ** Otherwise, an [error code] or an [extended error code] is returned.)^ ** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the ** [database connection] error code and message accessible via ** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions. ** ** ^If the [BLOB handle] passed as the first argument was not opened for ** writing (the flags parameter to [sqlite3_blob_open()] was zero), ** this function returns [SQLITE_READONLY]. ** ** This function may only modify the contents of the BLOB; it is ** not possible to increase the size of a BLOB using this API. ** ^If offset iOffset is less than N bytes from the end of the BLOB, ** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the ** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined ** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less ** than zero [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. ** ** ^An attempt to write to an expired [BLOB handle] fails with an ** error code of [SQLITE_ABORT]. ^Writes to the BLOB that occurred ** before the [BLOB handle] expired are not rolled back by the ** expiration of the handle, though of course those changes might ** have been overwritten by the statement that expired the BLOB handle |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8059 8060 8061 8062 8063 8064 8065 | #define SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MASTER 2 /* ** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** | | | 8059 8060 8061 8062 8063 8064 8065 8066 8067 8068 8069 8070 8071 8072 8073 | #define SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MASTER 2 /* ** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that ** serializes access to the [database connection] given in the argument ** when the [threading mode] is Serialized. ** ^If the [threading mode] is Single-thread or Multi-thread then this ** routine returns a NULL pointer. */ sqlite3_mutex *sqlite3_db_mutex(sqlite3*); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8086 8087 8088 8089 8090 8091 8092 | ** main database file. ** ^The third and fourth parameters to this routine ** are passed directly through to the second and third parameters of ** the xFileControl method. ^The return value of the xFileControl ** method becomes the return value of this routine. ** ** A few opcodes for [sqlite3_file_control()] are handled directly | | | 8086 8087 8088 8089 8090 8091 8092 8093 8094 8095 8096 8097 8098 8099 8100 | ** main database file. ** ^The third and fourth parameters to this routine ** are passed directly through to the second and third parameters of ** the xFileControl method. ^The return value of the xFileControl ** method becomes the return value of this routine. ** ** A few opcodes for [sqlite3_file_control()] are handled directly ** by the SQLite core and never invoke the ** sqlite3_io_methods.xFileControl method. ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_FILE_POINTER] value for the op parameter causes ** a pointer to the underlying [sqlite3_file] object to be written into ** the space pointed to by the 4th parameter. The ** [SQLITE_FCNTL_JOURNAL_POINTER] works similarly except that it returns ** the [sqlite3_file] object associated with the journal file instead of ** the main database. The [SQLITE_FCNTL_VFS_POINTER] opcode returns |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8177 8178 8179 8180 8181 8182 8183 | #define SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE 32 #define SQLITE_TESTCTRL_LOGEST 33 #define SQLITE_TESTCTRL_LAST 33 /* Largest TESTCTRL */ /* ** CAPI3REF: SQL Keyword Checking ** | | | 8177 8178 8179 8180 8181 8182 8183 8184 8185 8186 8187 8188 8189 8190 8191 | #define SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE 32 #define SQLITE_TESTCTRL_LOGEST 33 #define SQLITE_TESTCTRL_LAST 33 /* Largest TESTCTRL */ /* ** CAPI3REF: SQL Keyword Checking ** ** These routines provide access to the set of SQL language keywords ** recognized by SQLite. Applications can uses these routines to determine ** whether or not a specific identifier needs to be escaped (for example, ** by enclosing in double-quotes) so as not to confuse the parser. ** ** The sqlite3_keyword_count() interface returns the number of distinct ** keywords understood by SQLite. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Create A New Dynamic String Object ** CONSTRUCTOR: sqlite3_str ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface allocates and initializes ** a new [sqlite3_str] object. To avoid memory leaks, the object returned by | | | | | 8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 8268 8269 8270 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Create A New Dynamic String Object ** CONSTRUCTOR: sqlite3_str ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface allocates and initializes ** a new [sqlite3_str] object. To avoid memory leaks, the object returned by ** [sqlite3_str_new()] must be freed by a subsequent call to ** [sqlite3_str_finish(X)]. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface always returns a pointer to a ** valid [sqlite3_str] object, though in the event of an out-of-memory ** error the returned object might be a special singleton that will ** silently reject new text, always return SQLITE_NOMEM from ** [sqlite3_str_errcode()], always return 0 for ** [sqlite3_str_length()], and always return NULL from ** [sqlite3_str_finish(X)]. It is always safe to use the value ** returned by [sqlite3_str_new(D)] as the sqlite3_str parameter ** to any of the other [sqlite3_str] methods. ** ** The D parameter to [sqlite3_str_new(D)] may be NULL. If the ** D parameter in [sqlite3_str_new(D)] is not NULL, then the maximum |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8292 8293 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Add Content To A Dynamic String ** METHOD: sqlite3_str ** ** These interfaces add content to an sqlite3_str object previously obtained ** from [sqlite3_str_new()]. ** | | | | | 8292 8293 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 8299 8300 8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306 8307 8308 8309 8310 8311 8312 8313 8314 8315 8316 8317 8318 8319 8320 8321 8322 8323 8324 8325 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Add Content To A Dynamic String ** METHOD: sqlite3_str ** ** These interfaces add content to an sqlite3_str object previously obtained ** from [sqlite3_str_new()]. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendf(X,F,...)] and ** [sqlite3_str_vappendf(X,F,V)] interfaces uses the [built-in printf] ** functionality of SQLite to append formatted text onto the end of ** [sqlite3_str] object X. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_append(X,S,N)] method appends exactly N bytes from string S ** onto the end of the [sqlite3_str] object X. N must be non-negative. ** S must contain at least N non-zero bytes of content. To append a ** zero-terminated string in its entirety, use the [sqlite3_str_appendall()] ** method instead. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendall(X,S)] method appends the complete content of ** zero-terminated string S onto the end of [sqlite3_str] object X. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendchar(X,N,C)] method appends N copies of the ** single-byte character C onto the end of [sqlite3_str] object X. ** ^This method can be used, for example, to add whitespace indentation. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_str_reset(X)] method resets the string under construction ** inside [sqlite3_str] object X back to zero bytes in length. ** ** These methods do not return a result code. ^If an error occurs, that fact ** is recorded in the [sqlite3_str] object and can be recovered by a ** subsequent call to [sqlite3_str_errcode(X)]. */ void sqlite3_str_appendf(sqlite3_str*, const char *zFormat, ...); void sqlite3_str_vappendf(sqlite3_str*, const char *zFormat, va_list); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8413 8414 8415 8416 8417 8418 8419 | ** this parameter. The amount returned is the sum of the allocation ** sizes as reported by the xSize method in [sqlite3_mem_methods].</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request ** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their ** internal equivalents). Only the value returned in the | | | | | | | 8413 8414 8415 8416 8417 8418 8419 8420 8421 8422 8423 8424 8425 8426 8427 8428 8429 8430 8431 8432 8433 8434 8435 8436 8437 8438 8439 8440 8441 8442 8443 8444 8445 8446 8447 8448 8449 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 8455 8456 8457 8458 8459 8460 8461 8462 8463 8464 8465 8466 | ** this parameter. The amount returned is the sum of the allocation ** sizes as reported by the xSize method in [sqlite3_mem_methods].</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request ** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their ** internal equivalents). Only the value returned in the ** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT</dt> ** <dd>This parameter records the number of separate memory allocations ** currently checked out.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pages used out of the ** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]. The ** value returned is in pages, not in bytes.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]] ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of bytes of page cache ** allocation which could not be satisfied by the [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE] ** buffer and where forced to overflow to [sqlite3_malloc()]. The ** returned value includes allocations that overflowed because they ** where too large (they were larger than the "sz" parameter to ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]) and allocations that overflowed because ** no space was left in the page cache.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request ** handed to the [pagecache memory allocator]. Only the value returned in the ** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED]] <dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED</dt> ** <dd>No longer used.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_OVERFLOW]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_OVERFLOW</dt> ** <dd>No longer used.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE]] <dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>No longer used.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK</dt> ** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack. ** The *pCurrent value is undefined. The *pHighwater value is only ** meaningful if SQLite is compiled with [YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH].</dd>)^ ** </dl> ** ** New status parameters may be added from time to time. */ #define SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED 0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8474 8475 8476 8477 8478 8479 8480 | #define SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE 8 /* NOT USED */ #define SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT 9 /* ** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** | | | | 8474 8475 8476 8477 8478 8479 8480 8481 8482 8483 8484 8485 8486 8487 8488 8489 8490 8491 8492 8493 | #define SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE 8 /* NOT USED */ #define SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT 9 /* ** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information ** about a single [database connection]. ^The first argument is the ** database connection object to be interrogated. ^The second argument ** is an integer constant, taken from the set of ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options], that ** determines the parameter to interrogate. The set of ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options] is likely ** to grow in future releases of SQLite. ** ** ^The current value of the requested parameter is written into *pCur ** and the highest instantaneous value is written into *pHiwtr. ^If ** the resetFlg is true, then the highest instantaneous value is ** reset back down to the current value. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8514 8515 8516 8517 8518 8519 8520 | ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of lookaside memory slots currently ** checked out.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT</dt> | | | 8514 8515 8516 8517 8518 8519 8520 8521 8522 8523 8524 8525 8526 8527 8528 | ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of lookaside memory slots currently ** checked out.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of malloc attempts that were ** satisfied using lookaside memory. Only the high-water value is meaningful; ** the current value is always zero.)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_MISS_SIZE]] ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_MISS_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number malloc attempts that might have ** been satisfied using lookaside memory but failed due to the amount of |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8539 8540 8541 8542 8543 8544 8545 | ** the current value is always zero.)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap ** memory used by all pager caches associated with the database connection.)^ ** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED is always 0. ** | | | | | | 8539 8540 8541 8542 8543 8544 8545 8546 8547 8548 8549 8550 8551 8552 8553 8554 8555 8556 8557 8558 8559 8560 8561 8562 8563 8564 8565 8566 8567 8568 8569 8570 8571 8572 8573 8574 8575 8576 8577 8578 8579 8580 8581 8582 8583 8584 8585 8586 8587 8588 8589 | ** the current value is always zero.)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap ** memory used by all pager caches associated with the database connection.)^ ** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED is always 0. ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]] ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter is similar to DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED, except that if a ** pager cache is shared between two or more connections the bytes of heap ** memory used by that pager cache is divided evenly between the attached ** connections.)^ In other words, if none of the pager caches associated ** with the database connection are shared, this request returns the same ** value as DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED. Or, if one or more or the pager caches are ** shared, the value returned by this call will be smaller than that returned ** by DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED. ^The highwater mark associated with ** SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED is always 0. ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap ** memory used to store the schema for all databases associated ** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^ ** ^The full amount of memory used by the schemas is reported, even if the ** schema memory is shared with other database connections due to ** [shared cache mode] being enabled. ** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED is always 0. ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_STMT_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_STMT_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap ** and lookaside memory used by all prepared statements associated with ** the database connection.)^ ** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_STMT_USED is always 0. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache hits that have ** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT ** is always 0. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache misses that have ** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS ** is always 0. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_WRITE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_WRITE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of dirty cache entries that have ** been written to disk. Specifically, the number of pages written to the ** wal file in wal mode databases, or the number of pages written to the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8633 8634 8635 8636 8637 8638 8639 | ** ^(Each prepared statement maintains various ** [SQLITE_STMTSTATUS counters] that measure the number ** of times it has performed specific operations.)^ These counters can ** be used to monitor the performance characteristics of the prepared ** statements. For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds ** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate ** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than | | | 8633 8634 8635 8636 8637 8638 8639 8640 8641 8642 8643 8644 8645 8646 8647 | ** ^(Each prepared statement maintains various ** [SQLITE_STMTSTATUS counters] that measure the number ** of times it has performed specific operations.)^ These counters can ** be used to monitor the performance characteristics of the prepared ** statements. For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds ** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate ** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than ** an index. ** ** ^(This interface is used to retrieve and reset counter values from ** a [prepared statement]. The first argument is the prepared statement ** object to be interrogated. The second argument ** is an integer code for a specific [SQLITE_STMTSTATUS counter] ** to be interrogated.)^ ** ^The current value of the requested counter is returned. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8660 8661 8662 8663 8664 8665 8666 | ** values associated with the [sqlite3_stmt_status()] interface. ** The meanings of the various counters are as follows: ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in ** a table as part of a full table scan. Large numbers for this counter | | | | | | 8660 8661 8662 8663 8664 8665 8666 8667 8668 8669 8670 8671 8672 8673 8674 8675 8676 8677 8678 8679 8680 8681 8682 8683 8684 8685 8686 8687 8688 8689 8690 8691 8692 8693 8694 8695 8696 8697 8698 8699 8700 8701 8702 8703 8704 8705 8706 8707 8708 8709 8710 | ** values associated with the [sqlite3_stmt_status()] interface. ** The meanings of the various counters are as follows: ** ** <dl> ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in ** a table as part of a full table scan. Large numbers for this counter ** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through ** careful use of indices.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of sort operations that have occurred. ** A non-zero value in this counter may indicate an opportunity to ** improvement performance through careful use of indices.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of rows inserted into transient indices that ** were created automatically in order to help joins run faster. ** A non-zero value in this counter may indicate an opportunity to ** improvement performance by adding permanent indices that do not ** need to be reinitialized each time the statement is run.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of virtual machine operations executed ** by the prepared statement if that number is less than or equal ** to 2147483647. The number of virtual machine operations can be ** used as a proxy for the total work done by the prepared statement. ** If the number of virtual machine operations exceeds 2147483647 ** then the value returned by this statement status code is undefined. ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of times that the prepare statement has been ** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or changes to ** [bound parameters] that might affect the query plan. ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of times that the prepared statement has ** been run. A single "run" for the purposes of this counter is one ** or more calls to [sqlite3_step()] followed by a call to [sqlite3_reset()]. ** The counter is incremented on the first [sqlite3_step()] call of each ** cycle. ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS]] ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER HIT]] ** <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT<br> ** SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS</dt> ** <dd>^SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT is the number of times that a join ** step was bypassed because a Bloom filter returned not-found. The ** corresponding SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS value is the number of ** times that the Bloom filter returned a find, and thus the join step ** had to be processed as normal. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8757 8758 8759 8760 8761 8762 8763 | }; /* ** CAPI3REF: Application Defined Page Cache. ** KEYWORDS: {page cache} ** ** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2], ...) interface can | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8757 8758 8759 8760 8761 8762 8763 8764 8765 8766 8767 8768 8769 8770 8771 8772 8773 8774 8775 8776 8777 8778 8779 8780 8781 8782 8783 8784 8785 8786 8787 8788 8789 8790 8791 8792 8793 8794 8795 8796 8797 8798 8799 8800 8801 8802 8803 8804 8805 8806 8807 8808 8809 8810 8811 8812 8813 8814 8815 8816 8817 8818 8819 8820 8821 8822 8823 8824 8825 8826 8827 8828 8829 8830 8831 8832 8833 8834 8835 8836 8837 8838 8839 8840 8841 8842 8843 8844 8845 8846 8847 8848 8849 8850 8851 8852 8853 8854 8855 8856 | }; /* ** CAPI3REF: Application Defined Page Cache. ** KEYWORDS: {page cache} ** ** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2], ...) interface can ** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an ** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2 structure.)^ ** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by ** SQLite is used for the page cache. ** By implementing a ** custom page cache using this API, an application can better control ** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which ** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to ** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for ** how long. ** ** The alternative page cache mechanism is an ** extreme measure that is only needed by the most demanding applications. ** The built-in page cache is recommended for most uses. ** ** ^(The contents of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2 structure are copied to an ** internal buffer by SQLite within the call to [sqlite3_config]. Hence ** the application may discard the parameter after the call to ** [sqlite3_config()] returns.)^ ** ** [[the xInit() page cache method]] ** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective ** call to [sqlite3_initialize()])^ ** (usually only once during the lifetime of the process). ^(The xInit() ** method is passed a copy of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2.pArg value.)^ ** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures ** required by the custom page cache implementation. ** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the ** built-in default page cache is used instead of the application defined ** page cache.)^ ** ** [[the xShutdown() page cache method]] ** ^The xShutdown() method is called by [sqlite3_shutdown()]. ** It can be used to clean up ** any outstanding resources before process shutdown, if required. ** ^The xShutdown() method may be NULL. ** ** ^SQLite automatically serializes calls to the xInit method, ** so the xInit method need not be threadsafe. ^The ** xShutdown method is only called from [sqlite3_shutdown()] so it does ** not need to be threadsafe either. All other methods must be threadsafe ** in multithreaded applications. ** ** ^SQLite will never invoke xInit() more than once without an intervening ** call to xShutdown(). ** ** [[the xCreate() page cache methods]] ** ^SQLite invokes the xCreate() method to construct a new cache instance. ** SQLite will typically create one cache instance for each open database file, ** though this is not guaranteed. ^The ** first parameter, szPage, is the size in bytes of the pages that must ** be allocated by the cache. ^szPage will always a power of two. ^The ** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage ** associated with each page cache entry. ^The szExtra parameter will ** a number less than 250. SQLite will use the ** extra szExtra bytes on each page to store metadata about the underlying ** database page on disk. The value passed into szExtra depends ** on the SQLite version, the target platform, and how SQLite was compiled. ** ^The third argument to xCreate(), bPurgeable, is true if the cache being ** created will be used to cache database pages of a file stored on disk, or ** false if it is used for an in-memory database. The cache implementation ** does not have to do anything special based with the value of bPurgeable; ** it is purely advisory. ^On a cache where bPurgeable is false, SQLite will ** never invoke xUnpin() except to deliberately delete a page. ** ^In other words, calls to xUnpin() on a cache with bPurgeable set to ** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true. ** ^Hence, a cache created with bPurgeable false will ** never contain any unpinned pages. ** ** [[the xCachesize() page cache method]] ** ^(The xCachesize() method may be called at any time by SQLite to set the ** suggested maximum cache-size (number of pages stored by) the cache ** instance passed as the first argument. This is the value configured using ** the SQLite "[PRAGMA cache_size]" command.)^ As with the bPurgeable ** parameter, the implementation is not required to do anything with this ** value; it is advisory only. ** ** [[the xPagecount() page cache methods]] ** The xPagecount() method must return the number of pages currently ** stored in the cache, both pinned and unpinned. ** ** [[the xFetch() page cache methods]] ** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to ** an sqlite3_pcache_page object associated with that page, or a NULL pointer. ** The pBuf element of the returned sqlite3_pcache_page object will be a ** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a ** single database page. The pExtra element of sqlite3_pcache_page will be ** a pointer to the szExtra bytes of extra storage that SQLite has requested ** for each entry in the page cache. ** ** The page to be fetched is determined by the key. ^The minimum key value ** is 1. After it has been retrieved using xFetch, the page is considered ** to be "pinned". |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8881 8882 8883 8884 8885 8886 8887 | ** as its second argument. If the third parameter, discard, is non-zero, ** then the page must be evicted from the cache. ** ^If the discard parameter is ** zero, then the page may be discarded or retained at the discretion of ** page cache implementation. ^The page cache implementation ** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time. ** | | | | 8881 8882 8883 8884 8885 8886 8887 8888 8889 8890 8891 8892 8893 8894 8895 8896 | ** as its second argument. If the third parameter, discard, is non-zero, ** then the page must be evicted from the cache. ** ^If the discard parameter is ** zero, then the page may be discarded or retained at the discretion of ** page cache implementation. ^The page cache implementation ** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time. ** ** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single ** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls ** to xFetch(). ** ** [[the xRekey() page cache methods]] ** The xRekey() method is used to change the key value associated with the ** page passed as the second argument. If the cache ** previously contains an entry associated with newKey, it must be ** discarded. ^Any prior cache entry associated with newKey is guaranteed not |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8922 8923 8924 8925 8926 8927 8928 | int (*xInit)(void*); void (*xShutdown)(void*); sqlite3_pcache *(*xCreate)(int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable); void (*xCachesize)(sqlite3_pcache*, int nCachesize); int (*xPagecount)(sqlite3_pcache*); sqlite3_pcache_page *(*xFetch)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned key, int createFlag); void (*xUnpin)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, int discard); | | | 8922 8923 8924 8925 8926 8927 8928 8929 8930 8931 8932 8933 8934 8935 8936 | int (*xInit)(void*); void (*xShutdown)(void*); sqlite3_pcache *(*xCreate)(int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable); void (*xCachesize)(sqlite3_pcache*, int nCachesize); int (*xPagecount)(sqlite3_pcache*); sqlite3_pcache_page *(*xFetch)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned key, int createFlag); void (*xUnpin)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, int discard); void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, unsigned oldKey, unsigned newKey); void (*xTruncate)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned iLimit); void (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_pcache*); void (*xShrink)(sqlite3_pcache*); }; /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8967 8968 8969 8970 8971 8972 8973 | typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; /* ** CAPI3REF: Online Backup API. ** ** The backup API copies the content of one database into another. ** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8967 8968 8969 8970 8971 8972 8973 8974 8975 8976 8977 8978 8979 8980 8981 8982 8983 8984 8985 8986 8987 8988 8989 8990 8991 8992 8993 8994 8995 8996 8997 8998 8999 9000 9001 9002 9003 9004 9005 9006 9007 9008 9009 9010 9011 9012 9013 9014 9015 9016 9017 9018 9019 9020 9021 9022 9023 9024 9025 9026 9027 9028 9029 9030 9031 9032 9033 9034 9035 9036 9037 9038 9039 9040 | typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; /* ** CAPI3REF: Online Backup API. ** ** The backup API copies the content of one database into another. ** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or ** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files. ** ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Online Backup API] ** ** ^SQLite holds a write transaction open on the destination database file ** for the duration of the backup operation. ** ^The source database is read-locked only while it is being read; ** it is not locked continuously for the entire backup operation. ** ^Thus, the backup may be performed on a live source database without ** preventing other database connections from ** reading or writing to the source database while the backup is underway. ** ** ^(To perform a backup operation: ** <ol> ** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> is called once to initialize the ** backup, ** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer ** the data between the two databases, and finally ** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources ** associated with the backup operation. ** </ol>)^ ** There should be exactly one call to sqlite3_backup_finish() for each ** successful call to sqlite3_backup_init(). ** ** [[sqlite3_backup_init()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> ** ** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the ** [database connection] associated with the destination database ** and the database name, respectively. ** ^The database name is "main" for the main database, "temp" for the ** temporary database, or the name specified after the AS keyword in ** an [ATTACH] statement for an attached database. ** ^The S and M arguments passed to ** sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) identify the [database connection] ** and database name of the source database, respectively. ** ^The source and destination [database connections] (parameters S and D) ** must be different or else sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) will fail with ** an error. ** ** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if ** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the ** destination database. ** ** ^If an error occurs within sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M), then NULL is ** returned and an error code and error message are stored in the ** destination [database connection] D. ** ^The error code and message for the failed call to sqlite3_backup_init() ** can be retrieved using the [sqlite3_errcode()], [sqlite3_errmsg()], and/or ** [sqlite3_errmsg16()] functions. ** ^A successful call to sqlite3_backup_init() returns a pointer to an ** [sqlite3_backup] object. ** ^The [sqlite3_backup] object may be used with the sqlite3_backup_step() and ** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup ** operation. ** ** [[sqlite3_backup_step()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> ** ** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between ** the source and destination databases specified by [sqlite3_backup] object B. ** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied. ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully copies N pages and there ** are still more pages to be copied, then the function returns [SQLITE_OK]. ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully finishes copying all pages ** from source to destination, then it returns [SQLITE_DONE]. ** ^If an error occurs while running sqlite3_backup_step(B,N), ** then an [error code] is returned. ^As well as [SQLITE_OK] and ** [SQLITE_DONE], a call to sqlite3_backup_step() may return [SQLITE_READONLY], |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9048 9049 9050 9051 9052 9053 9054 | ** and the destination and source page sizes differ, or ** <li> the destination database is an in-memory database and the ** destination and source page sizes differ. ** </ol>)^ ** ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then ** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function] | | | | | | | | | | | | | 9048 9049 9050 9051 9052 9053 9054 9055 9056 9057 9058 9059 9060 9061 9062 9063 9064 9065 9066 9067 9068 9069 9070 9071 9072 9073 9074 9075 9076 9077 9078 9079 9080 9081 9082 9083 9084 9085 9086 9087 9088 9089 9090 9091 9092 9093 9094 9095 9096 9097 9098 9099 | ** and the destination and source page sizes differ, or ** <li> the destination database is an in-memory database and the ** destination and source page sizes differ. ** </ol>)^ ** ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then ** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function] ** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the ** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then ** [SQLITE_BUSY] is returned to the caller. ^In this case the call to ** sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later. ^If the source ** [database connection] ** is being used to write to the source database when sqlite3_backup_step() ** is called, then [SQLITE_LOCKED] is returned immediately. ^Again, in this ** case the call to sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later on. ^(If ** [SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS | SQLITE_IOERR_XXX], [SQLITE_NOMEM], or ** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then ** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These ** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept ** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle ** to the sqlite3_backup_finish() to release associated resources. ** ** ^The first call to sqlite3_backup_step() obtains an exclusive lock ** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either ** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete ** and sqlite3_backup_step() returns [SQLITE_DONE]. ^Every call to ** sqlite3_backup_step() obtains a [shared lock] on the source database that ** lasts for the duration of the sqlite3_backup_step() call. ** ^Because the source database is not locked between calls to ** sqlite3_backup_step(), the source database may be modified mid-way ** through the backup process. ^If the source database is modified by an ** external process or via a database connection other than the one being ** used by the backup operation, then the backup will be automatically ** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source ** database is modified by the using the same database connection as is used ** by the backup operation, then the backup database is automatically ** updated at the same time. ** ** [[sqlite3_backup_finish()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> ** ** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the ** application wishes to abandon the backup operation, the application ** should destroy the [sqlite3_backup] by passing it to sqlite3_backup_finish(). ** ^The sqlite3_backup_finish() interfaces releases all ** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object. ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() has not yet returned [SQLITE_DONE], then any ** active write-transaction on the destination database is rolled back. ** The [sqlite3_backup] object is invalid ** and may not be used following a call to sqlite3_backup_finish(). ** ** ^The value returned by sqlite3_backup_finish is [SQLITE_OK] if no ** sqlite3_backup_step() errors occurred, regardless or whether or not |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9125 9126 9127 9128 9129 9130 9131 | ** ** ^The source [database connection] may be used by the application for other ** purposes while a backup operation is underway or being initialized. ** ^If SQLite is compiled and configured to support threadsafe database ** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently ** from within other threads. ** | | | | | | 9125 9126 9127 9128 9129 9130 9131 9132 9133 9134 9135 9136 9137 9138 9139 9140 9141 9142 9143 9144 9145 9146 9147 9148 9149 9150 9151 9152 9153 9154 9155 | ** ** ^The source [database connection] may be used by the application for other ** purposes while a backup operation is underway or being initialized. ** ^If SQLite is compiled and configured to support threadsafe database ** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently ** from within other threads. ** ** However, the application must guarantee that the destination ** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after ** sqlite3_backup_init() is called and before the corresponding call to ** sqlite3_backup_finish(). SQLite does not currently check to see ** if the application incorrectly accesses the destination [database connection] ** and so no error code is reported, but the operations may malfunction ** nevertheless. Use of the destination database connection while a ** backup is in progress might also cause a mutex deadlock. ** ** If running in [shared cache mode], the application must ** guarantee that the shared cache used by the destination database ** is not accessed while the backup is running. In practice this means ** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being ** backed up to is not accessed by any connection within the process, ** not just the specific connection that was passed to sqlite3_backup_init(). ** ** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple ** threads may safely make multiple concurrent calls to sqlite3_backup_step(). ** However, the sqlite3_backup_remaining() and sqlite3_backup_pagecount() ** APIs are not strictly speaking threadsafe. If they are invoked at the ** same time as another thread is invoking sqlite3_backup_step() it is ** possible that they return invalid values. */ sqlite3_backup *sqlite3_backup_init( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9166 9167 9168 9169 9170 9171 9172 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Unlock Notification ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with ** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or ** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 9166 9167 9168 9169 9170 9171 9172 9173 9174 9175 9176 9177 9178 9179 9180 9181 9182 9183 9184 9185 9186 9187 9188 9189 9190 9191 9192 9193 9194 9195 9196 9197 9198 9199 9200 9201 9202 9203 9204 9205 9206 9207 9208 9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214 9215 9216 9217 9218 9219 9220 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225 9226 9227 9228 9229 9230 9231 9232 9233 9234 9235 9236 9237 9238 9239 9240 9241 9242 9243 9244 9245 9246 9247 9248 9249 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Unlock Notification ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with ** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or ** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See ** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking. ** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke ** when the connection currently holding the required lock relinquishes it. ** ^This API is only available if the library was compiled with the ** [SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY] C-preprocessor symbol defined. ** ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Unlock Notification Feature]. ** ** ^Shared-cache locks are released when a database connection concludes ** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back. ** ** ^When a connection (known as the blocked connection) fails to obtain a ** shared-cache lock and SQLITE_LOCKED is returned to the caller, the ** identity of the database connection (the blocking connection) that ** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an ** application receives an SQLITE_LOCKED error, it may call the ** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as ** the first argument to register for a callback that will be invoked ** when the blocking connections current transaction is concluded. ^The ** callback is invoked from within the [sqlite3_step] or [sqlite3_close] ** call that concludes the blocking connection's transaction. ** ** ^(If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called in a multi-threaded application, ** there is a chance that the blocking connection will have already ** concluded its transaction by the time sqlite3_unlock_notify() is invoked. ** If this happens, then the specified callback is invoked immediately, ** from within the call to sqlite3_unlock_notify().)^ ** ** ^If the blocked connection is attempting to obtain a write-lock on a ** shared-cache table, and more than one other connection currently holds ** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of ** the other connections to use as the blocking connection. ** ** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a ** blocked connection. If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called when the ** blocked connection already has a registered unlock-notify callback, ** then the new callback replaces the old.)^ ^If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is ** called with a NULL pointer as its second argument, then any existing ** unlock-notify callback is cancelled. ^The blocked connections ** unlock-notify callback may also be cancelled by closing the blocked ** connection using [sqlite3_close()]. ** ** The unlock-notify callback is not reentrant. If an application invokes ** any sqlite3_xxx API functions from within an unlock-notify callback, a ** crash or deadlock may be the result. ** ** ^Unless deadlock is detected (see below), sqlite3_unlock_notify() always ** returns SQLITE_OK. ** ** <b>Callback Invocation Details</b> ** ** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a ** single void* pointer that is passed to the callback when it is invoked. ** However, the signature of the callback function allows SQLite to pass ** it an array of void* context pointers. The first argument passed to ** an unlock-notify callback is a pointer to an array of void* pointers, ** and the second is the number of entries in the array. ** ** When a blocking connection's transaction is concluded, there may be ** more than one blocked connection that has registered for an unlock-notify ** callback. ^If two or more such blocked connections have specified the ** same callback function, then instead of invoking the callback function ** multiple times, it is invoked once with the set of void* context pointers ** specified by the blocked connections bundled together into an array. ** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions ** related to the set of unblocked database connections. ** ** <b>Deadlock Detection</b> ** ** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a ** database waits for the callback to be issued before taking any further ** action (a reasonable assumption), then using this API may cause the ** application to deadlock. For example, if connection X is waiting for ** connection Y's transaction to be concluded, and similarly connection ** Y is waiting on connection X's transaction, then neither connection ** will proceed and the system may remain deadlocked indefinitely. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9258 9259 9260 9261 9262 9263 9264 | ** the system is also considered to be deadlocked if connection B has ** registered for an unlock-notify callback on the conclusion of connection ** C's transaction, where connection C is waiting on connection A. ^Any ** number of levels of indirection are allowed. ** ** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b> ** | | | | 9258 9259 9260 9261 9262 9263 9264 9265 9266 9267 9268 9269 9270 9271 9272 9273 9274 9275 9276 9277 9278 9279 9280 9281 9282 9283 9284 9285 | ** the system is also considered to be deadlocked if connection B has ** registered for an unlock-notify callback on the conclusion of connection ** C's transaction, where connection C is waiting on connection A. ^Any ** number of levels of indirection are allowed. ** ** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b> ** ** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost ** always appropriate to call sqlite3_unlock_notify(). There is however, ** one exception. When executing a "DROP TABLE" or "DROP INDEX" statement, ** SQLite checks if there are any currently executing SELECT statements ** that belong to the same connection. If there are, SQLITE_LOCKED is ** returned. In this case there is no "blocking connection", so invoking ** sqlite3_unlock_notify() results in the unlock-notify callback being ** invoked immediately. If the application then re-attempts the "DROP TABLE" ** or "DROP INDEX" query, an infinite loop might be the result. ** ** One way around this problem is to check the extended error code returned ** by an sqlite3_step() call. ^(If there is a blocking connection, then the ** extended error code is set to SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. Otherwise, in ** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just ** SQLITE_LOCKED.)^ */ int sqlite3_unlock_notify( sqlite3 *pBlocked, /* Waiting connection */ void (*xNotify)(void **apArg, int nArg), /* Callback function to invoke */ void *pNotifyArg /* Argument to pass to xNotify */ ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9362 9363 9364 9365 9366 9367 9368 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Write-Ahead Log Commit Hook ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^The [sqlite3_wal_hook()] function is used to register a callback that ** is invoked each time data is committed to a database in wal mode. ** | | | | | | | 9362 9363 9364 9365 9366 9367 9368 9369 9370 9371 9372 9373 9374 9375 9376 9377 9378 9379 9380 9381 9382 9383 9384 9385 9386 9387 9388 9389 9390 9391 9392 9393 9394 9395 9396 9397 9398 9399 9400 9401 9402 9403 9404 9405 9406 9407 9408 9409 9410 9411 9412 9413 9414 9415 9416 9417 9418 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Write-Ahead Log Commit Hook ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^The [sqlite3_wal_hook()] function is used to register a callback that ** is invoked each time data is committed to a database in wal mode. ** ** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and ** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation ** may read, write or [checkpoint] the database as required. ** ** ^The first parameter passed to the callback function when it is invoked ** is a copy of the third parameter passed to sqlite3_wal_hook() when ** registering the callback. ^The second is a copy of the database handle. ** ^The third parameter is the name of the database that was written to - ** either "main" or the name of an [ATTACH]-ed database. ^The fourth parameter ** is the number of pages currently in the write-ahead log file, ** including those that were just committed. ** ** The callback function should normally return [SQLITE_OK]. ^If an error ** code is returned, that error will propagate back up through the ** SQLite code base to cause the statement that provoked the callback ** to report an error, though the commit will have still occurred. If the ** callback returns [SQLITE_ROW] or [SQLITE_DONE], or if it returns a value ** that does not correspond to any valid SQLite error code, the results ** are undefined. ** ** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback ** registered at one time. ^Calling [sqlite3_wal_hook()] replaces any ** previously registered write-ahead log callback. ^The return value is ** a copy of the third parameter from the previous call, if any, or 0. ** ^Note that the [sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint()] interface and the ** [wal_autocheckpoint pragma] both invoke [sqlite3_wal_hook()] and will ** overwrite any prior [sqlite3_wal_hook()] settings. */ void *sqlite3_wal_hook( sqlite3*, int(*)(void *,sqlite3*,const char*,int), void* ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Configure an auto-checkpoint ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^The [sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(D,N)] is a wrapper around ** [sqlite3_wal_hook()] that causes any database on [database connection] D ** to automatically [checkpoint] ** after committing a transaction if there are N or ** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file. ^Passing zero or ** a negative value as the nFrame parameter disables automatic ** checkpoints entirely. ** ** ^The callback registered by this function replaces any existing callback ** registered using [sqlite3_wal_hook()]. ^Likewise, registering a callback ** using [sqlite3_wal_hook()] disables the automatic checkpoint mechanism ** configured by this function. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9434 9435 9436 9437 9438 9439 9440 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Checkpoint a database ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) is equivalent to ** [sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2](D,X,[SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE],0,0).)^ ** | | | 9434 9435 9436 9437 9438 9439 9440 9441 9442 9443 9444 9445 9446 9447 9448 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Checkpoint a database ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) is equivalent to ** [sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2](D,X,[SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE],0,0).)^ ** ** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the ** [write-ahead log] for database X on [database connection] D to be ** transferred into the database file and for the write-ahead log to ** be reset. See the [checkpointing] documentation for addition ** information. ** ** This interface used to be the only way to cause a checkpoint to ** occur. But then the newer and more powerful [sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2()] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9460 9461 9462 9463 9464 9465 9466 | ** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(D,X,M,L,C) interface runs a checkpoint ** operation on database X of [database connection] D in mode M. Status ** information is written back into integers pointed to by L and C.)^ ** ^(The M parameter must be a valid [checkpoint mode]:)^ ** ** <dl> ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE<dd> | | | | | | | 9460 9461 9462 9463 9464 9465 9466 9467 9468 9469 9470 9471 9472 9473 9474 9475 9476 9477 9478 9479 9480 9481 9482 9483 9484 9485 9486 9487 9488 9489 9490 9491 9492 9493 | ** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(D,X,M,L,C) interface runs a checkpoint ** operation on database X of [database connection] D in mode M. Status ** information is written back into integers pointed to by L and C.)^ ** ^(The M parameter must be a valid [checkpoint mode]:)^ ** ** <dl> ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE<dd> ** ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database ** readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames ** in the log were checkpointed. ^The [busy-handler callback] ** is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode. ** ^On the other hand, passive mode might leave the checkpoint unfinished ** if there are concurrent readers or writers. ** ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL<dd> ** ^This mode blocks (it invokes the ** [sqlite3_busy_handler|busy-handler callback]) until there is no ** database writer and all readers are reading from the most recent database ** snapshot. ^It then checkpoints all frames in the log file and syncs the ** database file. ^This mode blocks new database writers while it is pending, ** but new database readers are allowed to continue unimpeded. ** ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART<dd> ** ^This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL with the addition ** that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the ** [busy-handler callback]) ** until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures ** that the next writer will restart the log file from the beginning. ** ^Like SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, this mode blocks new ** database writer attempts while it is pending, but does not impede readers. ** ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE<dd> ** ^This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART with the ** addition that it also truncates the log file to zero bytes just prior |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9501 9502 9503 9504 9505 9506 9507 | ** log file (including any that were already checkpointed before the function ** was called) or to -1 if the checkpoint could not run due to an error or ** because the database is not in WAL mode. ^Note that upon successful ** completion of an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE, the log file will have been ** truncated to zero bytes and so both *pnLog and *pnCkpt will be set to zero. ** ** ^All calls obtain an exclusive "checkpoint" lock on the database file. ^If | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 9501 9502 9503 9504 9505 9506 9507 9508 9509 9510 9511 9512 9513 9514 9515 9516 9517 9518 9519 9520 9521 9522 9523 9524 9525 9526 9527 9528 9529 9530 9531 9532 9533 9534 9535 9536 9537 9538 9539 | ** log file (including any that were already checkpointed before the function ** was called) or to -1 if the checkpoint could not run due to an error or ** because the database is not in WAL mode. ^Note that upon successful ** completion of an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE, the log file will have been ** truncated to zero bytes and so both *pnLog and *pnCkpt will be set to zero. ** ** ^All calls obtain an exclusive "checkpoint" lock on the database file. ^If ** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the ** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a ** busy-handler configured, it will not be invoked in this case. ** ** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the ** exclusive "writer" lock on the database file. ^If the writer lock cannot be ** obtained immediately, and a busy-handler is configured, it is invoked and ** the writer lock retried until either the busy-handler returns 0 or the lock ** is successfully obtained. ^The busy-handler is also invoked while waiting for ** database readers as described above. ^If the busy-handler returns 0 before ** the writer lock is obtained or while waiting for database readers, the ** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as ** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible ** without blocking any further. ^SQLITE_BUSY is returned in this case. ** ** ^If parameter zDb is NULL or points to a zero length string, then the ** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to ** [database connection] db. In this case the ** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If ** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the ** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining ** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other ** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned ** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error ** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached ** databases, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** ^If database zDb is the name of an attached database that is not in WAL ** mode, SQLITE_OK is returned and both *pnLog and *pnCkpt set to -1. ^If ** zDb is not NULL (or a zero length string) and is not the name of any ** attached database, SQLITE_ERROR is returned to the caller. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9585 9586 9587 9588 9589 9590 9591 | ** of parameters after C depend on which [virtual table configuration option] ** is used. */ int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...); /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Configuration Options | | | 9585 9586 9587 9588 9589 9590 9591 9592 9593 9594 9595 9596 9597 9598 9599 | ** of parameters after C depend on which [virtual table configuration option] ** is used. */ int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...); /* ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Configuration Options ** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration options} ** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration option} ** ** These macros define the various options to the ** [sqlite3_vtab_config()] interface that [virtual table] implementations ** can use to customize and optimize their behavior. ** ** <dl> |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9608 9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 | ** statement is rolled back as if [ON CONFLICT | OR ABORT] had been ** specified as part of the users SQL statement, regardless of the actual ** ON CONFLICT mode specified. ** ** If X is non-zero, then the virtual table implementation guarantees ** that if [xUpdate] returns [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], it will do so before ** any modifications to internal or persistent data structures have been made. | | | | | | | | | 9608 9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616 9617 9618 9619 9620 9621 9622 9623 9624 9625 9626 9627 9628 9629 9630 9631 9632 9633 9634 9635 9636 9637 9638 9639 9640 9641 9642 | ** statement is rolled back as if [ON CONFLICT | OR ABORT] had been ** specified as part of the users SQL statement, regardless of the actual ** ON CONFLICT mode specified. ** ** If X is non-zero, then the virtual table implementation guarantees ** that if [xUpdate] returns [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], it will do so before ** any modifications to internal or persistent data structures have been made. ** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite ** is able to roll back a statement or database transaction, and abandon ** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate. ** If the ON CONFLICT mode is REPLACE and the [xUpdate] method returns ** [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], SQLite handles this as if the ON CONFLICT mode ** had been ABORT. ** ** Virtual table implementations that are required to handle OR REPLACE ** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the ** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON ** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should ** silently replace the appropriate rows within the xUpdate callback and ** return SQLITE_OK. Or, if this is not possible, it may return ** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT ** constraint handling. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_VTAB_DIRECTONLY]]<dt>SQLITE_VTAB_DIRECTONLY</dt> ** <dd>Calls of the form ** [sqlite3_vtab_config](db,SQLITE_VTAB_DIRECTONLY) from within the ** the [xConnect] or [xCreate] methods of a [virtual table] implementation ** prohibits that virtual table from being used from within triggers and ** views. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS]]<dt>SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS</dt> ** <dd>Calls of the form ** [sqlite3_vtab_config](db,SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS) from within the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 | ** results. */ int sqlite3_vtab_distinct(sqlite3_index_info*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Identify and handle IN constraints in xBestIndex ** | | | | 9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815 9816 9817 9818 9819 9820 9821 9822 9823 9824 9825 9826 9827 9828 9829 9830 9831 9832 | ** results. */ int sqlite3_vtab_distinct(sqlite3_index_info*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Identify and handle IN constraints in xBestIndex ** ** This interface may only be used from within an ** [xBestIndex|xBestIndex() method] of a [virtual table] implementation. ** The result of invoking this interface from any other context is ** undefined and probably harmful. ** ** ^(A constraint on a virtual table of the form ** "[IN operator|column IN (...)]" is ** communicated to the xBestIndex method as a ** [SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ] constraint.)^ If xBestIndex wants to use ** this constraint, it must set the corresponding ** aConstraintUsage[].argvIndex to a positive integer. ^(Then, under ** the usual mode of handling IN operators, SQLite generates [bytecode] ** that invokes the [xFilter|xFilter() method] once for each value ** on the right-hand side of the IN operator.)^ Thus the virtual table ** only sees a single value from the right-hand side of the IN operator ** at a time. ** ** In some cases, however, it would be advantageous for the virtual |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9867 9868 9869 9870 9871 9872 9873 | ** <li><p> The P->aConstraintUsage[N].argvIndex value is set to a positive ** integer. This is how the virtual table tells SQLite that it wants to ** use the N-th constraint. ** ** <li><p> The last call to sqlite3_vtab_in(P,N,F) for which F was ** non-negative had F>=1. ** </ol>)^ | | | 9867 9868 9869 9870 9871 9872 9873 9874 9875 9876 9877 9878 9879 9880 9881 | ** <li><p> The P->aConstraintUsage[N].argvIndex value is set to a positive ** integer. This is how the virtual table tells SQLite that it wants to ** use the N-th constraint. ** ** <li><p> The last call to sqlite3_vtab_in(P,N,F) for which F was ** non-negative had F>=1. ** </ol>)^ ** ** ^If either or both of the conditions above are false, then SQLite uses ** the traditional one-at-a-time processing strategy for the IN constraint. ** ^If both conditions are true, then the argvIndex-th parameter to the ** xFilter method will be an [sqlite3_value] that appears to be NULL, ** but which can be passed to [sqlite3_vtab_in_first()] and ** [sqlite3_vtab_in_next()] to find all values on the right-hand side ** of the IN constraint. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
9942 9943 9944 9945 9946 9947 9948 | ** the [xBestIndex] method of a [virtual table] implementation, with P being ** a copy of the [sqlite3_index_info] object pointer passed into xBestIndex and ** J being a 0-based index into P->aConstraint[], then this routine ** attempts to set *V to the value of the right-hand operand of ** that constraint if the right-hand operand is known. ^If the ** right-hand operand is not known, then *V is set to a NULL pointer. ** ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V) interface returns SQLITE_OK if | | | 9942 9943 9944 9945 9946 9947 9948 9949 9950 9951 9952 9953 9954 9955 9956 | ** the [xBestIndex] method of a [virtual table] implementation, with P being ** a copy of the [sqlite3_index_info] object pointer passed into xBestIndex and ** J being a 0-based index into P->aConstraint[], then this routine ** attempts to set *V to the value of the right-hand operand of ** that constraint if the right-hand operand is known. ^If the ** right-hand operand is not known, then *V is set to a NULL pointer. ** ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V) interface returns SQLITE_OK if ** and only if *V is set to a value. ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V) ** inteface returns SQLITE_NOTFOUND if the right-hand side of the J-th ** constraint is not available. ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value() interface ** can return an result code other than SQLITE_OK or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if ** something goes wrong. ** ** The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value() interface is usually only successful if ** the right-hand operand of a constraint is a literal value in the original |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 | ** <dd>^The "const char *" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set ** to a zero-terminated UTF-8 string containing the [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] ** description for the X-th loop. ** ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID</dt> ** <dd>^The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the ** id for the X-th query plan element. The id value is unique within the | | | | 10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 10047 10048 10049 10050 10051 10052 10053 | ** <dd>^The "const char *" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set ** to a zero-terminated UTF-8 string containing the [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] ** description for the X-th loop. ** ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID</dt> ** <dd>^The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the ** id for the X-th query plan element. The id value is unique within the ** statement. The select-id is the same value as is output in the first ** column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query. ** ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_PARENTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_PARENTID</dt> ** <dd>The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the ** the id of the parent of the current query element, if applicable, or ** to zero if the query element has no parent. This is the same value as ** returned in the second column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query. ** ** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE</dt> ** <dd>The sqlite3_int64 output value is set to the number of cycles, ** according to the processor time-stamp counter, that elapsed while the ** query element was being processed. This value is not available for ** all query elements - if it is unavailable the output variable is ** set to -1. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10073 10074 10075 10076 10077 10078 10079 | ** ** Since this interface is expected to be rarely used, it is only ** available if SQLite is compiled using the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS] ** compile-time option. ** ** The "iScanStatusOp" parameter determines which status information to return. ** The "iScanStatusOp" must be one of the [scanstatus options] or the behavior | | | | | | | | | 10073 10074 10075 10076 10077 10078 10079 10080 10081 10082 10083 10084 10085 10086 10087 10088 10089 10090 10091 10092 10093 10094 10095 10096 10097 10098 10099 10100 10101 10102 10103 10104 10105 10106 10107 10108 10109 10110 10111 10112 10113 10114 10115 10116 10117 10118 10119 10120 10121 | ** ** Since this interface is expected to be rarely used, it is only ** available if SQLite is compiled using the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS] ** compile-time option. ** ** The "iScanStatusOp" parameter determines which status information to return. ** The "iScanStatusOp" must be one of the [scanstatus options] or the behavior ** of this interface is undefined. ^The requested measurement is written into ** a variable pointed to by the "pOut" parameter. ** ** The "flags" parameter must be passed a mask of flags. At present only ** one flag is defined - SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX. If SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX ** is specified, then status information is available for all elements ** of a query plan that are reported by "EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN" output. If ** SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX is not specified, then only query plan elements ** that correspond to query loops (the "SCAN..." and "SEARCH..." elements of ** the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN output) are available. Invoking API ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is equivalent to calling ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2() with a zeroed flags parameter. ** ** Parameter "idx" identifies the specific query element to retrieve statistics ** for. Query elements are numbered starting from zero. A value of -1 may be ** to query for statistics regarding the entire query. ^If idx is out of range ** - less than -1 or greater than or equal to the total number of query ** elements used to implement the statement - a non-zero value is returned and ** the variable that pOut points to is unchanged. ** ** See also: [sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_reset()] */ int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, /* Prepared statement for which info desired */ int idx, /* Index of loop to report on */ int iScanStatusOp, /* Information desired. SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */ void *pOut /* Result written here */ ); int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, /* Prepared statement for which info desired */ int idx, /* Index of loop to report on */ int iScanStatusOp, /* Information desired. SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */ int flags, /* Mask of flags defined below */ void *pOut /* Result written here */ ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Prepared Statement Scan Status ** KEYWORDS: {scan status flags} */ #define SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX 0x0001 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10132 10133 10134 10135 10136 10137 10138 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Flush caches to disk mid-transaction ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^If a write-transaction is open on [database connection] D when the ** [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)] interface invoked, any dirty | | | | | 10132 10133 10134 10135 10136 10137 10138 10139 10140 10141 10142 10143 10144 10145 10146 10147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 10153 10154 | /* ** CAPI3REF: Flush caches to disk mid-transaction ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^If a write-transaction is open on [database connection] D when the ** [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)] interface invoked, any dirty ** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out ** to disk. A dirty page may be in use if a database cursor created by an ** active SQL statement is reading from it, or if it is page 1 of a database ** file (page 1 is always "in use"). ^The [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)] ** interface flushes caches for all schemas - "main", "temp", and ** any [attached] databases. ** ** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages ** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained ** immediately and there is a busy-handler callback configured, it is invoked ** in the usual manner. ^If the required lock still cannot be obtained, then ** the database is skipped and an attempt made to flush any dirty pages ** belonging to the next (if any) database. ^If any databases are skipped ** because locks cannot be obtained, but no other error occurs, this ** function returns SQLITE_BUSY. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10188 10189 10190 10191 10192 10193 10194 | ** ^The second parameter to the preupdate callback is a pointer to ** the [database connection] that registered the preupdate hook. ** ^The third parameter to the preupdate callback is one of the constants ** [SQLITE_INSERT], [SQLITE_DELETE], or [SQLITE_UPDATE] to identify the ** kind of update operation that is about to occur. ** ^(The fourth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the ** database within the database connection that is being modified. This | | | | | 10188 10189 10190 10191 10192 10193 10194 10195 10196 10197 10198 10199 10200 10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10211 | ** ^The second parameter to the preupdate callback is a pointer to ** the [database connection] that registered the preupdate hook. ** ^The third parameter to the preupdate callback is one of the constants ** [SQLITE_INSERT], [SQLITE_DELETE], or [SQLITE_UPDATE] to identify the ** kind of update operation that is about to occur. ** ^(The fourth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the ** database within the database connection that is being modified. This ** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or ** the name given after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement for attached ** databases.)^ ** ^The fifth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the ** table that is being modified. ** ** For an UPDATE or DELETE operation on a [rowid table], the sixth ** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the ** row being modified or deleted. For an INSERT operation on a rowid table, ** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth ** parameter is undefined. For an INSERT or UPDATE on a rowid table the ** seventh parameter is the final rowid value of the row being inserted ** or updated. The value of the seventh parameter passed to the callback ** function is not defined for operations on WITHOUT ROWID tables, or for ** DELETE operations on rowid tables. ** ** ^The sqlite3_preupdate_hook(D,C,P) function returns the P argument from |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 | ** undefined. This must only be used within SQLITE_INSERT and SQLITE_UPDATE ** preupdate callbacks; if it is used by an SQLITE_DELETE callback then the ** behavior is undefined. The [sqlite3_value] that P points to ** will be destroyed when the preupdate callback returns. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_preupdate_depth(D)] interface returns 0 if the preupdate ** callback was invoked as a result of a direct insert, update, or delete | | | | 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 10247 10248 10249 10250 10251 10252 10253 10254 10255 10256 10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 | ** undefined. This must only be used within SQLITE_INSERT and SQLITE_UPDATE ** preupdate callbacks; if it is used by an SQLITE_DELETE callback then the ** behavior is undefined. The [sqlite3_value] that P points to ** will be destroyed when the preupdate callback returns. ** ** ^The [sqlite3_preupdate_depth(D)] interface returns 0 if the preupdate ** callback was invoked as a result of a direct insert, update, or delete ** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level ** triggers; or 2 for changes resulting from triggers called by top-level ** triggers; and so forth. ** ** When the [sqlite3_blob_write()] API is used to update a blob column, ** the pre-update hook is invoked with SQLITE_DELETE. This is because the ** in this case the new values are not available. In this case, when a ** callback made with op==SQLITE_DELETE is actually a write using the ** sqlite3_blob_write() API, the [sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite()] returns ** the index of the column being written. In other cases, where the ** pre-update hook is being invoked for some other reason, including a ** regular DELETE, sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite() returns -1. ** ** See also: [sqlite3_update_hook()] */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10285 10286 10287 10288 10289 10290 10291 | ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^Attempt to return the underlying operating system error code or error ** number that caused the most recent I/O error or failure to open a file. ** The return value is OS-dependent. For example, on unix systems, after ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] returns [SQLITE_CANTOPEN], this interface could be ** called to get back the underlying "errno" that caused the problem, such | | | 10285 10286 10287 10288 10289 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 10297 10298 10299 | ** METHOD: sqlite3 ** ** ^Attempt to return the underlying operating system error code or error ** number that caused the most recent I/O error or failure to open a file. ** The return value is OS-dependent. For example, on unix systems, after ** [sqlite3_open_v2()] returns [SQLITE_CANTOPEN], this interface could be ** called to get back the underlying "errno" that caused the problem, such ** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth. */ int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Database Snapshot ** KEYWORDS: {snapshot} {sqlite3_snapshot} ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10323 10324 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329 | ** ** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface attempts to make a ** new [sqlite3_snapshot] object that records the current state of ** schema S in database connection D. ^On success, the ** [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface writes a pointer to the newly ** created [sqlite3_snapshot] object into *P and returns SQLITE_OK. ** If there is not already a read-transaction open on schema S when | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 10323 10324 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329 10330 10331 10332 10333 10334 10335 10336 10337 10338 10339 10340 10341 10342 10343 10344 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 10350 10351 10352 10353 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359 10360 10361 10362 10363 10364 10365 10366 10367 10368 10369 10370 10371 10372 10373 10374 10375 10376 10377 10378 10379 10380 10381 10382 10383 10384 10385 10386 10387 10388 10389 10390 10391 10392 10393 10394 10395 10396 10397 10398 10399 10400 10401 10402 10403 10404 10405 10406 10407 10408 10409 10410 10411 | ** ** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface attempts to make a ** new [sqlite3_snapshot] object that records the current state of ** schema S in database connection D. ^On success, the ** [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface writes a pointer to the newly ** created [sqlite3_snapshot] object into *P and returns SQLITE_OK. ** If there is not already a read-transaction open on schema S when ** this function is called, one is opened automatically. ** ** The following must be true for this function to succeed. If any of ** the following statements are false when sqlite3_snapshot_get() is ** called, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. The final value of *P is undefined ** in this case. ** ** <ul> ** <li> The database handle must not be in [autocommit mode]. ** ** <li> Schema S of [database connection] D must be a [WAL mode] database. ** ** <li> There must not be a write transaction open on schema S of database ** connection D. ** ** <li> One or more transactions must have been written to the current wal ** file since it was created on disk (by any connection). This means ** that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal ** file immediately after it is first opened. At least one transaction ** must be written to it first. ** </ul> ** ** This function may also return SQLITE_NOMEM. If it is called with the ** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason, ** whether or not a read transaction is opened on schema S is undefined. ** ** The [sqlite3_snapshot] object returned from a successful call to ** [sqlite3_snapshot_get()] must be freed using [sqlite3_snapshot_free()] ** to avoid a memory leak. ** ** The [sqlite3_snapshot_get()] interface is only available when the ** [SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT] compile-time option is used. */ SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL int sqlite3_snapshot_get( sqlite3 *db, const char *zSchema, sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot ); /* ** CAPI3REF: Start a read transaction on an historical snapshot ** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot ** ** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] interface either starts a new read ** transaction or upgrades an existing one for schema S of ** [database connection] D such that the read transaction refers to ** historical [snapshot] P, rather than the most recent change to the ** database. ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] interface returns SQLITE_OK ** on success or an appropriate [error code] if it fails. ** ** ^In order to succeed, the database connection must not be in ** [autocommit mode] when [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] is called. If there ** is already a read transaction open on schema S, then the database handle ** must have no active statements (SELECT statements that have been passed ** to sqlite3_step() but not sqlite3_reset() or sqlite3_finalize()). ** SQLITE_ERROR is returned if either of these conditions is violated, or ** if schema S does not exist, or if the snapshot object is invalid. ** ** ^A call to sqlite3_snapshot_open() will fail to open if the specified ** snapshot has been overwritten by a [checkpoint]. In this case ** SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT is returned. ** ** If there is already a read transaction open when this function is ** invoked, then the same read transaction remains open (on the same ** database snapshot) if SQLITE_ERROR, SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT ** is returned. If another error code - for example SQLITE_PROTOCOL or an ** SQLITE_IOERR error code - is returned, then the final state of the ** read transaction is undefined. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then the ** read transaction is now open on database snapshot P. ** ** ^(A call to [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] will fail if the ** database connection D does not know that the database file for ** schema S is in [WAL mode]. A database connection might not know ** that the database file is in [WAL mode] if there has been no prior ** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode] ** after the most recent I/O on the database connection.)^ ** (Hint: Run "[PRAGMA application_id]" against a newly opened ** database connection in order to make it ready to use snapshots.) ** ** The [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] interface is only available when the ** [SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT] compile-time option is used. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10429 10430 10431 10432 10433 10434 10435 | SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL void sqlite3_snapshot_free(sqlite3_snapshot*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Compare the ages of two snapshot handles. ** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot ** ** The sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(P1, P2) interface is used to compare the ages | | | | | | | 10429 10430 10431 10432 10433 10434 10435 10436 10437 10438 10439 10440 10441 10442 10443 10444 10445 10446 10447 10448 10449 10450 10451 10452 10453 | SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL void sqlite3_snapshot_free(sqlite3_snapshot*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Compare the ages of two snapshot handles. ** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot ** ** The sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(P1, P2) interface is used to compare the ages ** of two valid snapshot handles. ** ** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database ** file, the result of the comparison is undefined. ** ** Additionally, the result of the comparison is only valid if both of the ** snapshot handles were obtained by calling sqlite3_snapshot_get() since the ** last time the wal file was deleted. The wal file is deleted when the ** database is changed back to rollback mode or when the number of database ** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the ** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function ** is undefined. ** ** Otherwise, this API returns a negative value if P1 refers to an older ** snapshot than P2, zero if the two handles refer to the same database ** snapshot, and a positive value if P1 is a newer snapshot than P2. ** ** This interface is only available if SQLite is compiled with the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 | ** are made, and the sqlite3_serialize() function will return a pointer ** to the contiguous memory representation of the database that SQLite ** is currently using for that database, or NULL if the no such contiguous ** memory representation of the database exists. A contiguous memory ** representation of the database will usually only exist if there has ** been a prior call to [sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,...)] with the same ** values of D and S. | | | 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 10514 10515 10516 10517 10518 | ** are made, and the sqlite3_serialize() function will return a pointer ** to the contiguous memory representation of the database that SQLite ** is currently using for that database, or NULL if the no such contiguous ** memory representation of the database exists. A contiguous memory ** representation of the database will usually only exist if there has ** been a prior call to [sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,...)] with the same ** values of D and S. ** The size of the database is written into *P even if the ** SQLITE_SERIALIZE_NOCOPY bit is set but no contiguous copy ** of the database exists. ** ** A call to sqlite3_serialize(D,S,P,F) might return NULL even if the ** SQLITE_SERIALIZE_NOCOPY bit is omitted from argument F if a memory ** allocation error occurs. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10541 10542 10543 10544 10545 10546 10547 | ** prior call to [sqlite3_deserialize()]. */ #define SQLITE_SERIALIZE_NOCOPY 0x001 /* Do no memory allocations */ /* ** CAPI3REF: Deserialize a database ** | | | 10541 10542 10543 10544 10545 10546 10547 10548 10549 10550 10551 10552 10553 10554 10555 | ** prior call to [sqlite3_deserialize()]. */ #define SQLITE_SERIALIZE_NOCOPY 0x001 /* Do no memory allocations */ /* ** CAPI3REF: Deserialize a database ** ** The sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) interface causes the ** [database connection] D to disconnect from database S and then ** reopen S as an in-memory database based on the serialization contained ** in P. The serialized database P is N bytes in size. M is the size of ** the buffer P, which might be larger than N. If M is larger than N, and ** the SQLITE_DESERIALIZE_READONLY bit is not set in F, then SQLite is ** permitted to add content to the in-memory database as long as the total ** size does not exceed M bytes. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
10564 10565 10566 10567 10568 10569 10570 | ** database is currently in a read transaction or is involved in a backup ** operation. ** ** It is not possible to deserialized into the TEMP database. If the ** S argument to sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) is "temp" then the ** function returns SQLITE_ERROR. ** | | | 10564 10565 10566 10567 10568 10569 10570 10571 10572 10573 10574 10575 10576 10577 10578 | ** database is currently in a read transaction or is involved in a backup ** operation. ** ** It is not possible to deserialized into the TEMP database. If the ** S argument to sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) is "temp" then the ** function returns SQLITE_ERROR. ** ** If sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) fails for any reason and if the ** SQLITE_DESERIALIZE_FREEONCLOSE bit is set in argument F, then ** [sqlite3_free()] is invoked on argument P prior to returning. ** ** This interface is omitted if SQLite is compiled with the ** [SQLITE_OMIT_DESERIALIZE] option. */ int sqlite3_deserialize( |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/sqliteInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | ** coverage: ** ** NO_TEST - The branches on this line are not ** measured by branch coverage. This is ** used on lines of code that actually ** implement parts of coverage testing. ** | | | | | | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | ** coverage: ** ** NO_TEST - The branches on this line are not ** measured by branch coverage. This is ** used on lines of code that actually ** implement parts of coverage testing. ** ** OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE - This branch is allowed to always be false ** and the correct answer is still obtained, ** though perhaps more slowly. ** ** OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE - This branch is allowed to always be true ** and the correct answer is still obtained, ** though perhaps more slowly. ** ** PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD - This branch prevents a buffer overread ** that would be harmless and undetectable ** if it did occur. ** ** In all cases, the special comment must be enclosed in the usual ** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the ** asterisks and the comment text. */ /* ** Make sure the Tcl calling convention macro is defined. This macro is ** only used by test code and Tcl integration code. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
178 179 180 181 182 183 184 | defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_WIN64) && \ defined(__MINGW_MAJOR_VERSION) && __MINGW_MAJOR_VERSION >= 4 && \ defined(__MSVCRT__) # define _USE_32BIT_TIME_T #endif /* Optionally #include a user-defined header, whereby compilation options | | | 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_WIN64) && \ defined(__MINGW_MAJOR_VERSION) && __MINGW_MAJOR_VERSION >= 4 && \ defined(__MSVCRT__) # define _USE_32BIT_TIME_T #endif /* Optionally #include a user-defined header, whereby compilation options ** may be set prior to where they take effect, but after platform setup. ** If SQLITE_CUSTOM_INCLUDE=? is defined, its value names the #include ** file. */ #ifdef SQLITE_CUSTOM_INCLUDE # define INC_STRINGIFY_(f) #f # define INC_STRINGIFY(f) INC_STRINGIFY_(f) # include INC_STRINGIFY(SQLITE_CUSTOM_INCLUDE) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | /* ** A few places in the code require atomic load/store of aligned ** integer values. */ #ifndef __has_extension # define __has_extension(x) 0 /* compatibility with non-clang compilers */ #endif | | | 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 | /* ** A few places in the code require atomic load/store of aligned ** integer values. */ #ifndef __has_extension # define __has_extension(x) 0 /* compatibility with non-clang compilers */ #endif #if GCC_VERSION>=4007000 || __has_extension(c_atomic) # define SQLITE_ATOMIC_INTRINSICS 1 # define AtomicLoad(PTR) __atomic_load_n((PTR),__ATOMIC_RELAXED) # define AtomicStore(PTR,VAL) __atomic_store_n((PTR),(VAL),__ATOMIC_RELAXED) #else # define SQLITE_ATOMIC_INTRINSICS 0 # define AtomicLoad(PTR) (*(PTR)) # define AtomicStore(PTR,VAL) (*(PTR) = (VAL)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
718 719 720 721 722 723 724 | ** Default value for the SQLITE_CONFIG_SORTERREF_SIZE option. */ #ifndef SQLITE_DEFAULT_SORTERREF_SIZE # define SQLITE_DEFAULT_SORTERREF_SIZE 0x7fffffff #endif /* | | | 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 | ** Default value for the SQLITE_CONFIG_SORTERREF_SIZE option. */ #ifndef SQLITE_DEFAULT_SORTERREF_SIZE # define SQLITE_DEFAULT_SORTERREF_SIZE 0x7fffffff #endif /* ** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and ** SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE are not compatible with one another. ** You must choose one or the other (or neither) but not both. */ #if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE) #error Cannot use both SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 | void *pBusyArg; /* First arg to busy callback */ int nBusy; /* Incremented with each busy call */ }; /* ** Name of table that holds the database schema. ** | | | 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 | void *pBusyArg; /* First arg to busy callback */ int nBusy; /* Incremented with each busy call */ }; /* ** Name of table that holds the database schema. ** ** The PREFERRED names are used wherever possible. But LEGACY is also ** used for backwards compatibility. ** ** 1. Queries can use either the PREFERRED or the LEGACY names ** 2. The sqlite3_set_authorizer() callback uses the LEGACY name ** 3. The PRAGMA table_list statement uses the PREFERRED name ** ** The LEGACY names are stored in the internal symbol hash table |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 | # warning Use SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS=3 instead of SQLITE_EXTRA_DURABLE # define SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS 3 #endif /* ** Default synchronous levels. ** | | | 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 | # warning Use SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS=3 instead of SQLITE_EXTRA_DURABLE # define SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS 3 #endif /* ** Default synchronous levels. ** ** Note that (for historical reasons) the PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_* macros differ ** from the SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS value by 1. ** ** PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS ** OFF 1 0 ** NORMAL 2 1 ** FULL 3 2 ** EXTRA 4 3 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 | Schema *pSchema; /* Pointer to database schema (possibly shared) */ }; /* ** An instance of the following structure stores a database schema. ** ** Most Schema objects are associated with a Btree. The exception is | | | 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 | Schema *pSchema; /* Pointer to database schema (possibly shared) */ }; /* ** An instance of the following structure stores a database schema. ** ** Most Schema objects are associated with a Btree. The exception is ** the Schema for the TEMP database (sqlite3.aDb[1]) which is free-standing. ** In shared cache mode, a single Schema object can be shared by multiple ** Btrees that refer to the same underlying BtShared object. ** ** Schema objects are automatically deallocated when the last Btree that ** references them is destroyed. The TEMP Schema is manually freed by ** sqlite3_close(). * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 | u16 szTrue; /* True value of sz, even if disabled */ u8 bMalloced; /* True if pStart obtained from sqlite3_malloc() */ u32 nSlot; /* Number of lookaside slots allocated */ u32 anStat[3]; /* 0: hits. 1: size misses. 2: full misses */ LookasideSlot *pInit; /* List of buffers not previously used */ LookasideSlot *pFree; /* List of available buffers */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE | | | | 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 | u16 szTrue; /* True value of sz, even if disabled */ u8 bMalloced; /* True if pStart obtained from sqlite3_malloc() */ u32 nSlot; /* Number of lookaside slots allocated */ u32 anStat[3]; /* 0: hits. 1: size misses. 2: full misses */ LookasideSlot *pInit; /* List of buffers not previously used */ LookasideSlot *pFree; /* List of available buffers */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE LookasideSlot *pSmallInit; /* List of small buffers not previously used */ LookasideSlot *pSmallFree; /* List of available small buffers */ void *pMiddle; /* First byte past end of full-size buffers and ** the first byte of LOOKASIDE_SMALL buffers */ #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE */ void *pStart; /* First byte of available memory space */ void *pEnd; /* First byte past end of available space */ void *pTrueEnd; /* True value of pEnd, when db->pnBytesFreed!=0 */ }; struct LookasideSlot { LookasideSlot *pNext; /* Next buffer in the list of free buffers */ }; #define DisableLookaside db->lookaside.bDisable++;db->lookaside.sz=0 #define EnableLookaside db->lookaside.bDisable--;\ db->lookaside.sz=db->lookaside.bDisable?0:db->lookaside.szTrue /* Size of the smaller allocations in two-size lookaside */ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE # define LOOKASIDE_SMALL 0 #else # define LOOKASIDE_SMALL 128 #endif /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 | ** SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT == SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC from the API ** SQLITE_FUNC_DIRECT == SQLITE_DIRECTONLY from the API ** SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE == SQLITE_INNOCUOUS -- opposite meanings!!! ** SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK depends on SQLITE_UTF* macros in the API ** ** Note that even though SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE and SQLITE_INNOCUOUS have the ** same bit value, their meanings are inverted. SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE is | | | 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 | ** SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT == SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC from the API ** SQLITE_FUNC_DIRECT == SQLITE_DIRECTONLY from the API ** SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE == SQLITE_INNOCUOUS -- opposite meanings!!! ** SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK depends on SQLITE_UTF* macros in the API ** ** Note that even though SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE and SQLITE_INNOCUOUS have the ** same bit value, their meanings are inverted. SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE is ** used internally and if set means that the function has side effects. ** SQLITE_INNOCUOUS is used by application code and means "not unsafe". ** See multiple instances of tag-20230109-1. */ #define SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK 0x0003 /* SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_UTF16BE or UTF16LE */ #define SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE 0x0004 /* Candidate for the LIKE optimization */ #define SQLITE_FUNC_CASE 0x0008 /* Case-sensitive LIKE-type function */ #define SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM 0x0010 /* Ephemeral. Delete with VDBE */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 | #define SQLITE_FUNC_BUILTIN 0x00800000 /* This is a built-in function */ #define SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER 0x08000000 /* count/min/max aggregate */ /* Identifier numbers for each in-line function */ #define INLINEFUNC_coalesce 0 #define INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row 1 #define INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr 2 | | | 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 | #define SQLITE_FUNC_BUILTIN 0x00800000 /* This is a built-in function */ #define SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER 0x08000000 /* count/min/max aggregate */ /* Identifier numbers for each in-line function */ #define INLINEFUNC_coalesce 0 #define INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row 1 #define INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr 2 #define INLINEFUNC_expr_compare 3 #define INLINEFUNC_affinity 4 #define INLINEFUNC_iif 5 #define INLINEFUNC_sqlite_offset 6 #define INLINEFUNC_unlikely 99 /* Default case */ /* ** The following three macros, FUNCTION(), LIKEFUNC() and AGGREGATE() are |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 | ** ** MFUNCTION(zName, nArg, xPtr, xFunc) ** For math-library functions. xPtr is an arbitrary pointer. ** ** PURE_DATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc) ** Used for "pure" date/time functions, this macro is like DFUNCTION ** except that it does set the SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT flags. iArg is | | | 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 | ** ** MFUNCTION(zName, nArg, xPtr, xFunc) ** For math-library functions. xPtr is an arbitrary pointer. ** ** PURE_DATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc) ** Used for "pure" date/time functions, this macro is like DFUNCTION ** except that it does set the SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT flags. iArg is ** ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an ** arbitrary non-NULL pointer. The bNC parameter is not used. ** ** AGGREGATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xStep, xFinal) ** Used to create an aggregate function definition implemented by ** the C functions xStep and xFinal. The first four parameters ** are interpreted in the same way as the first 4 parameters to ** FUNCTION(). |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 | ** same as ROLLBACK for DEFERRED keys. SETNULL means that the foreign ** key is set to NULL. SETDFLT means that the foreign key is set ** to its default value. CASCADE means that a DELETE or UPDATE of the ** referenced table row is propagated into the row that holds the ** foreign key. ** ** The OE_Default value is a place holder that means to use whatever | | | 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 | ** same as ROLLBACK for DEFERRED keys. SETNULL means that the foreign ** key is set to NULL. SETDFLT means that the foreign key is set ** to its default value. CASCADE means that a DELETE or UPDATE of the ** referenced table row is propagated into the row that holds the ** foreign key. ** ** The OE_Default value is a place holder that means to use whatever ** conflict resolution algorithm is required from context. ** ** The following symbolic values are used to record which type ** of conflict resolution action to take. */ #define OE_None 0 /* There is no constraint to check */ #define OE_Rollback 1 /* Fail the operation and rollback the transaction */ #define OE_Abort 2 /* Back out changes but do no rollback transaction */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 | Select *pSelect; /* SELECT statement that this AggInfo supports */ #endif }; /* ** Macros to compute aCol[] and aFunc[] register numbers. ** | | | 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 | Select *pSelect; /* SELECT statement that this AggInfo supports */ #endif }; /* ** Macros to compute aCol[] and aFunc[] register numbers. ** ** These macros should not be used prior to the call to ** assignAggregateRegisters() that computes the value of pAggInfo->iFirstReg. ** The assert()s that are part of this macro verify that constraint. */ #define AggInfoColumnReg(A,I) (assert((A)->iFirstReg),(A)->iFirstReg+(I)) #define AggInfoFuncReg(A,I) \ (assert((A)->iFirstReg),(A)->iFirstReg+(A)->nColumn+(I)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 | #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0 int nHeight; /* Height of the tree headed by this node */ #endif int iTable; /* TK_COLUMN: cursor number of table holding column ** TK_REGISTER: register number ** TK_TRIGGER: 1 -> new, 0 -> old ** EP_Unlikely: 134217728 times likelihood | | | 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 | #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0 int nHeight; /* Height of the tree headed by this node */ #endif int iTable; /* TK_COLUMN: cursor number of table holding column ** TK_REGISTER: register number ** TK_TRIGGER: 1 -> new, 0 -> old ** EP_Unlikely: 134217728 times likelihood ** TK_IN: ephemeral table holding RHS ** TK_SELECT_COLUMN: Number of columns on the LHS ** TK_SELECT: 1st register of result vector */ ynVar iColumn; /* TK_COLUMN: column index. -1 for rowid. ** TK_VARIABLE: variable number (always >= 1). ** TK_SELECT_COLUMN: column of the result vector */ i16 iAgg; /* Which entry in pAggInfo->aCol[] or ->aFunc[] */ union { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 | unsigned viaCoroutine :1; /* Implemented as a co-routine */ unsigned isRecursive :1; /* True for recursive reference in WITH */ unsigned fromDDL :1; /* Comes from sqlite_schema */ unsigned isCte :1; /* This is a CTE */ unsigned notCte :1; /* This item may not match a CTE */ unsigned isUsing :1; /* u3.pUsing is valid */ unsigned isOn :1; /* u3.pOn was once valid and non-NULL */ | | | 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 | unsigned viaCoroutine :1; /* Implemented as a co-routine */ unsigned isRecursive :1; /* True for recursive reference in WITH */ unsigned fromDDL :1; /* Comes from sqlite_schema */ unsigned isCte :1; /* This is a CTE */ unsigned notCte :1; /* This item may not match a CTE */ unsigned isUsing :1; /* u3.pUsing is valid */ unsigned isOn :1; /* u3.pOn was once valid and non-NULL */ unsigned isSynthUsing :1; /* u3.pUsing is synthesized from NATURAL */ unsigned isNestedFrom :1; /* pSelect is a SF_NestedFrom subquery */ } fg; int iCursor; /* The VDBE cursor number used to access this table */ union { Expr *pOn; /* fg.isUsing==0 => The ON clause of a join */ IdList *pUsing; /* fg.isUsing==1 => The USING clause of a join */ } u3; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 | ** clause in an upsert. ** ** The pUpsertTarget field is only set if the ON CONFLICT clause includes ** conflict-target clause. (In "ON CONFLICT(a,b)" the "(a,b)" is the ** conflict-target clause.) The pUpsertTargetWhere is the optional ** WHERE clause used to identify partial unique indexes. ** | | | 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 | ** clause in an upsert. ** ** The pUpsertTarget field is only set if the ON CONFLICT clause includes ** conflict-target clause. (In "ON CONFLICT(a,b)" the "(a,b)" is the ** conflict-target clause.) The pUpsertTargetWhere is the optional ** WHERE clause used to identify partial unique indexes. ** ** pUpsertSet is the list of column=expr terms of the UPDATE statement. ** The pUpsertSet field is NULL for a ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING. The ** pUpsertWhere is the WHERE clause for the UPDATE and is NULL if the ** WHERE clause is omitted. */ struct Upsert { ExprList *pUpsertTarget; /* Optional description of conflict target */ Expr *pUpsertTargetWhere; /* WHERE clause for partial index targets */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 | #define OPFLAG_SEEKEQ 0x02 /* OP_Open** cursor uses EQ seek only */ #define OPFLAG_FORDELETE 0x08 /* OP_Open should use BTREE_FORDELETE */ #define OPFLAG_P2ISREG 0x10 /* P2 to OP_Open** is a register number */ #define OPFLAG_PERMUTE 0x01 /* OP_Compare: use the permutation */ #define OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION 0x02 /* OP_Delete/Insert: save cursor pos */ #define OPFLAG_AUXDELETE 0x04 /* OP_Delete: index in a DELETE op */ #define OPFLAG_NOCHNG_MAGIC 0x6d /* OP_MakeRecord: serialtype 10 is ok */ | | | 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 | #define OPFLAG_SEEKEQ 0x02 /* OP_Open** cursor uses EQ seek only */ #define OPFLAG_FORDELETE 0x08 /* OP_Open should use BTREE_FORDELETE */ #define OPFLAG_P2ISREG 0x10 /* P2 to OP_Open** is a register number */ #define OPFLAG_PERMUTE 0x01 /* OP_Compare: use the permutation */ #define OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION 0x02 /* OP_Delete/Insert: save cursor pos */ #define OPFLAG_AUXDELETE 0x04 /* OP_Delete: index in a DELETE op */ #define OPFLAG_NOCHNG_MAGIC 0x6d /* OP_MakeRecord: serialtype 10 is ok */ #define OPFLAG_PREFORMAT 0x80 /* OP_Insert uses preformatted cell */ /* ** Each trigger present in the database schema is stored as an instance of ** struct Trigger. ** ** Pointers to instances of struct Trigger are stored in two ways. ** 1. In the "trigHash" hash table (part of the sqlite3* that represents the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 | #define INITFLAG_AlterRename 0x0001 /* Reparse after a RENAME */ #define INITFLAG_AlterDrop 0x0002 /* Reparse after a DROP COLUMN */ #define INITFLAG_AlterAdd 0x0003 /* Reparse after an ADD COLUMN */ /* Tuning parameters are set using SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE and are controlled ** on debug-builds of the CLI using ".testctrl tune ID VALUE". Tuning ** parameters are for temporary use during development, to help find | | | 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 | #define INITFLAG_AlterRename 0x0001 /* Reparse after a RENAME */ #define INITFLAG_AlterDrop 0x0002 /* Reparse after a DROP COLUMN */ #define INITFLAG_AlterAdd 0x0003 /* Reparse after an ADD COLUMN */ /* Tuning parameters are set using SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE and are controlled ** on debug-builds of the CLI using ".testctrl tune ID VALUE". Tuning ** parameters are for temporary use during development, to help find ** optimal values for parameters in the query planner. The should not ** be used on trunk check-ins. They are a temporary mechanism available ** for transient development builds only. ** ** Tuning parameters are numbered starting with 1. */ #define SQLITE_NTUNE 6 /* Should be zero for all trunk check-ins */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 | int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse*, ExprList*); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG int sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(KeyInfo*); #endif int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *, void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), | | | | 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 | int sqlite3HasExplicitNulls(Parse*, ExprList*); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG int sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(KeyInfo*); #endif int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *, void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), void (*)(sqlite3_context*), void (*)(sqlite3_context*), void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), FuncDestructor *pDestructor ); void sqlite3NoopDestructor(void*); void *sqlite3OomFault(sqlite3*); void sqlite3OomClear(sqlite3*); int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3 *db, int); int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/sqliteLimit.h.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | /* ** 2007 May 7 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | /* ** 2007 May 7 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** ** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process. */ /* ** The maximum length of a TEXT or BLOB in bytes. This also ** limits the size of a row in a table or index. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | ** to turn this limit off. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH # define SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH 1000000000 #endif /* | | | | | | 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | ** to turn this limit off. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH # define SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH 1000000000 #endif /* ** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to ** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might ** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an ** expression. A value of 0 means that there is no limit. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH # define SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH 1000 #endif /* ** The maximum number of terms in a compound SELECT statement. ** The code generator for compound SELECT statements does one ** level of recursion for each term. A stack overflow can result ** if the number of terms is too large. In practice, most SQL ** never has more than 3 or 4 terms. Use a value of 0 to disable ** any limit on the number of terms in a compound SELECT. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_COMPOUND_SELECT # define SQLITE_MAX_COMPOUND_SELECT 500 #endif /* ** The maximum number of opcodes in a VDBE program. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 | #endif /* Maximum page size. The upper bound on this value is 65536. This a limit ** imposed by the use of 16-bit offsets within each page. ** ** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at ** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates | | | | | | 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | #endif /* Maximum page size. The upper bound on this value is 65536. This a limit ** imposed by the use of 16-bit offsets within each page. ** ** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at ** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates ** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library ** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database ** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite ** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback ** the aborted transaction. This could lead to database corruption. */ #ifdef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE # undef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE #endif #define SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE 65536 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | # define SQLITE_MAX_LIKE_PATTERN_LENGTH 50000 #endif /* ** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers. ** ** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself | | | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 | # define SQLITE_MAX_LIKE_PATTERN_LENGTH 50000 #endif /* ** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers. ** ** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself ** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all ** may be executed. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH # define SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH 1000 #endif |
Changes to src/tclsqlite.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 | } return Tcl_NewStringObj((char*)sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, iCol), -1); } /* ** If using Tcl version 8.6 or greater, use the NR functions to avoid | | | 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 | } return Tcl_NewStringObj((char*)sqlite3_column_text(pStmt, iCol), -1); } /* ** If using Tcl version 8.6 or greater, use the NR functions to avoid ** recursive evaluation of scripts by the [db eval] and [db trans] ** commands. Even if the headers used while compiling the extension ** are 8.6 or newer, the code still tests the Tcl version at runtime. ** This allows stubs-enabled builds to be used with older Tcl libraries. */ #if TCL_MAJOR_VERSION>8 || (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION==8 && TCL_MINOR_VERSION>=6) # define SQLITE_TCL_NRE 1 static int DbUseNre(void){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 | ** as 'db changes' due to conflict-algorithm selected. ** ** This code is basically an implementation/enhancement of ** the sqlite3 shell.c ".import" command. ** ** This command usage is equivalent to the sqlite2.x COPY statement, ** which imports file data into a table using the PostgreSQL COPY file format: | | | 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 | ** as 'db changes' due to conflict-algorithm selected. ** ** This code is basically an implementation/enhancement of ** the sqlite3 shell.c ".import" command. ** ** This command usage is equivalent to the sqlite2.x COPY statement, ** which imports file data into a table using the PostgreSQL COPY file format: ** $db copy $conflict_algorithm $table_name $filename \t \\N */ case DB_COPY: { char *zTable; /* Insert data into this table */ char *zFile; /* The file from which to extract data */ char *zConflict; /* The conflict algorithm to use */ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; /* A statement */ int nCol; /* Number of columns in the table */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 | } /* $db transaction [-deferred|-immediate|-exclusive] SCRIPT ** ** Start a new transaction (if we are not already in the midst of a ** transaction) and execute the TCL script SCRIPT. After SCRIPT ** completes, either commit the transaction or roll it back if SCRIPT | | | 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 | } /* $db transaction [-deferred|-immediate|-exclusive] SCRIPT ** ** Start a new transaction (if we are not already in the midst of a ** transaction) and execute the TCL script SCRIPT. After SCRIPT ** completes, either commit the transaction or roll it back if SCRIPT ** throws an exception. Or if no new transaction was started, do nothing. ** pass the exception on up the stack. ** ** This command was inspired by Dave Thomas's talk on Ruby at the ** 2005 O'Reilly Open Source Convention (OSCON). */ case DB_TRANSACTION: { Tcl_Obj *pScript; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test1.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 | sqlite3_close(db); return TCL_OK; } /* ** Usage: sqlite3_next_stmt DB STMT ** | | | 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 | sqlite3_close(db); return TCL_OK; } /* ** Usage: sqlite3_next_stmt DB STMT ** ** Return the next statement in sequence after STMT. */ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_next_stmt( void * clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[] ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ return TCL_ERROR; } /* ** Usage: sqlite3_test_errstr <err code> ** | | | | 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ return TCL_ERROR; } /* ** Usage: sqlite3_test_errstr <err code> ** ** Test that the English language string equivalents for sqlite error codes ** are sane. The parameter is an integer representing an sqlite error code. ** The result is a list of two elements, the string representation of the ** error code and the English language explanation. */ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_errstr( void * clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[] ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 | assert( pMain==0 || pMain==sqlite3_vfs_find(0) ); /* We can find a VFS by its name */ assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__one")==&one ); assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__two")==&two ); /* Calling sqlite_vfs_register with non-zero second parameter changes the | | | 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 6123 6124 6125 | assert( pMain==0 || pMain==sqlite3_vfs_find(0) ); /* We can find a VFS by its name */ assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__one")==&one ); assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__two")==&two ); /* Calling sqlite_vfs_register with non-zero second parameter changes the ** default VFS, even if the 1st parameter is an existing VFS that is ** previously registered as the non-default. */ sqlite3_vfs_register(&one, 1); assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__one")==&one ); assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__two")==&two ); assert( sqlite3_vfs_find(0)==&one ); sqlite3_vfs_register(&two, 1); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test3.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
418 419 420 421 422 423 424 | /* ** usage: varint_test START MULTIPLIER COUNT INCREMENT ** ** This command tests the putVarint() and getVarint() ** routines, both for accuracy and for speed. ** ** An integer is written using putVarint() and read back with | | | 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 | /* ** usage: varint_test START MULTIPLIER COUNT INCREMENT ** ** This command tests the putVarint() and getVarint() ** routines, both for accuracy and for speed. ** ** An integer is written using putVarint() and read back with ** getVarint() and verified to be unchanged. This repeats COUNT ** times. The first integer is START*MULTIPLIER. Each iteration ** increases the integer by INCREMENT. ** ** This command returns nothing if it works. It returns an error message ** if something goes wrong. */ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI btree_varint_test( |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test6.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 | typedef struct CrashFile CrashFile; typedef struct CrashGlobal CrashGlobal; typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer; /* ** Method: ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | typedef struct CrashFile CrashFile; typedef struct CrashGlobal CrashGlobal; typedef struct WriteBuffer WriteBuffer; /* ** Method: ** ** This layer is implemented as a wrapper around the "real" ** sqlite3_file object for the host system. Each time data is ** written to the file object, instead of being written to the ** underlying file, the write operation is stored in an in-memory ** structure (type WriteBuffer). This structure is placed at the ** end of a global ordered list (the write-list). ** ** When data is read from a file object, the requested region is ** first retrieved from the real file. The write-list is then ** traversed and data copied from any overlapping WriteBuffer ** structures to the output buffer. i.e. a read() operation following ** one or more write() operations works as expected, even if no ** data has actually been written out to the real file. ** ** When a fsync() operation is performed, an operating system crash ** may be simulated, in which case exit(-1) is called (the call to ** xSync() never returns). Whether or not a crash is simulated, ** the data associated with a subset of the WriteBuffer structures ** stored in the write-list is written to the real underlying files ** and the entries removed from the write-list. If a crash is simulated, ** a subset of the buffers may be corrupted before the data is written. ** ** The exact subset of the write-list written and/or corrupted is ** determined by the simulated device characteristics and sector-size. ** ** "Normal" mode: ** ** Normal mode is used when the simulated device has none of the ** SQLITE_IOCAP_XXX flags set. ** ** In normal mode, if the fsync() is not a simulated crash, the ** write-list is traversed from beginning to end. Each WriteBuffer ** structure associated with the file handle used to call xSync() ** is written to the real file and removed from the write-list. ** ** If a crash is simulated, one of the following takes place for ** each WriteBuffer in the write-list, regardless of which ** file-handle it is associated with: ** ** 1. The buffer is correctly written to the file, just as if ** a crash were not being simulated. ** ** 2. Nothing is done. ** ** 3. Garbage data is written to all sectors of the file that ** overlap the region specified by the WriteBuffer. Or garbage ** data is written to some contiguous section within the ** overlapped sectors. ** ** Device Characteristic flag handling: ** ** If the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag is set, then option (3) above is ** never selected. ** ** If the IOCAP_ATOMIC512 flag is set, and the WriteBuffer represents ** an aligned write() of an integer number of 512 byte regions, then ** option (3) above is never selected. Instead, each 512 byte region ** is either correctly written or left completely untouched. Similar ** logic governs the behavior if any of the other ATOMICXXX flags ** is set. ** ** If either the IOCAP_SAFEAPPEND or IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL flags are set ** and a crash is being simulated, then an entry of the write-list is ** selected at random. Everything in the list after the selected entry ** is discarded before processing begins. ** ** If IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL is set and a crash is being simulated, option ** (1) is selected for all write-list entries except the last. If a ** crash is not being simulated, then all entries in the write-list ** that occur before at least one write() on the file-handle specified ** as part of the xSync() are written to their associated real files. ** ** If IOCAP_SAFEAPPEND is set and the first byte written by the write() ** operation is one byte past the current end of the file, then option ** (1) is always selected. */ /* ** Each write operation in the write-list is represented by an instance ** of the following structure. ** ** If zBuf is 0, then this structure represents a call to xTruncate(), ** not xWrite(). In that case, iOffset is the size that the file is ** truncated to. */ struct WriteBuffer { i64 iOffset; /* Byte offset of the start of this write() */ int nBuf; /* Number of bytes written */ u8 *zBuf; /* Pointer to copy of written data */ CrashFile *pFile; /* File this write() applies to */ WriteBuffer *pNext; /* Next in CrashGlobal.pWriteList */ }; struct CrashFile { const sqlite3_io_methods *pMethod; /* Must be first */ sqlite3_file *pRealFile; /* Underlying "real" file handle */ char *zName; int flags; /* Flags the file was opened with */ /* Cache of the entire file. This is used to speed up OsRead() and ** OsFileSize() calls. Although both could be done by traversing the ** write-list, in practice this is impractically slow. */ u8 *zData; /* Buffer containing file contents */ int nData; /* Size of buffer allocated at zData */ i64 iSize; /* Size of file in bytes */ }; struct CrashGlobal { WriteBuffer *pWriteList; /* Head of write-list */ WriteBuffer *pWriteListEnd; /* End of write-list */ int iSectorSize; /* Value of simulated sector size */ int iDeviceCharacteristics; /* Value of simulated device characteristics */ int iCrash; /* Crash on the iCrash'th call to xSync() */ char zCrashFile[500]; /* Crash during an xSync() on this file */ }; static CrashGlobal g = {0, 0, SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE, 0, 0}; /* ** Set this global variable to 1 to enable crash testing. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
168 169 170 171 172 173 174 | } static void *crash_realloc(void *p, int n){ return (void *)Tcl_AttemptRealloc(p, (size_t)n); } /* ** Wrapper around the sqlite3OsWrite() function that avoids writing to the | | | 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 | } static void *crash_realloc(void *p, int n){ return (void *)Tcl_AttemptRealloc(p, (size_t)n); } /* ** Wrapper around the sqlite3OsWrite() function that avoids writing to the ** 512 byte block beginning at offset PENDING_BYTE. */ static int writeDbFile(CrashFile *p, u8 *z, i64 iAmt, i64 iOff){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int iSkip = 0; if( (iAmt-iSkip)>0 ){ rc = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pRealFile, &z[iSkip], (int)(iAmt-iSkip), iOff+iSkip); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int iDc = g.iDeviceCharacteristics; WriteBuffer *pWrite; WriteBuffer **ppPtr; | | | 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | static int writeListSync(CrashFile *pFile, int isCrash){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int iDc = g.iDeviceCharacteristics; WriteBuffer *pWrite; WriteBuffer **ppPtr; /* If this is not a crash simulation, set pFinal to point to the ** last element of the write-list that is associated with file handle ** pFile. ** ** If this is a crash simulation, set pFinal to an arbitrarily selected ** element of the write-list. */ WriteBuffer *pFinal = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
238 239 240 241 242 243 244 | if( (pWrite->pFile==pFile || iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){ eAction = 1; } }else{ char random; sqlite3_randomness(1, &random); | | | 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 | if( (pWrite->pFile==pFile || iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){ eAction = 1; } }else{ char random; sqlite3_randomness(1, &random); /* Do not select option 3 (sector trashing) if the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag ** is set or this is an OsTruncate(), not an Oswrite(). */ if( (iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_ATOMIC) || (pWrite->zBuf==0) ){ random &= 0x01; } /* If IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL is set and this is not the final entry |
︙ | ︙ | |||
284 285 286 287 288 289 290 | ); }else{ rc = sqlite3OsTruncate(pRealFile, pWrite->iOffset); } *ppPtr = pWrite->pNext; #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST if( isCrash ){ | | | | | | 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 | ); }else{ rc = sqlite3OsTruncate(pRealFile, pWrite->iOffset); } *ppPtr = pWrite->pNext; #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST if( isCrash ){ printf("Writing %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n", pWrite->nBuf, (int)pWrite->iOffset, pWrite->pFile->zName ); } #endif crash_free(pWrite); break; } case 2: { /* Do nothing */ ppPtr = &pWrite->pNext; #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST if( isCrash ){ printf("Omiting %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n", pWrite->nBuf, (int)pWrite->iOffset, pWrite->pFile->zName ); } #endif break; } case 3: { /* Trash sectors */ u8 *zGarbage; int iFirst = (int)(pWrite->iOffset/g.iSectorSize); int iLast = (int)((pWrite->iOffset+pWrite->nBuf-1)/g.iSectorSize); assert(pWrite->zBuf); #ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST printf("Trashing %d sectors (%d bytes) @ %lld (sector %d) (%s)\n", 1+iLast-iFirst, (1+iLast-iFirst)*g.iSectorSize, pWrite->iOffset, iFirst, pWrite->pFile->zName ); #endif zGarbage = crash_malloc(g.iSectorSize); if( zGarbage ){ sqlite3_int64 i; for(i=iFirst; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<=iLast; i++){ sqlite3_randomness(g.iSectorSize, zGarbage); rc = writeDbFile( pWrite->pFile, zGarbage, g.iSectorSize, i*g.iSectorSize ); } crash_free(zGarbage); }else{ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
385 386 387 388 389 390 391 | if( g.pWriteList ){ assert(g.pWriteListEnd); g.pWriteListEnd->pNext = pNew; }else{ g.pWriteList = pNew; } g.pWriteListEnd = pNew; | | | | | | 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 | if( g.pWriteList ){ assert(g.pWriteListEnd); g.pWriteListEnd->pNext = pNew; }else{ g.pWriteList = pNew; } g.pWriteListEnd = pNew; return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Close a crash-file. */ static int cfClose(sqlite3_file *pFile){ CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile; writeListSync(pCrash, 0); sqlite3OsClose(pCrash->pRealFile); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Read data from a crash-file. */ static int cfRead( sqlite3_file *pFile, void *zBuf, int iAmt, sqlite_int64 iOfst ){ CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile; int nCopy = (int)MIN((i64)iAmt, (pCrash->iSize - iOfst)); if( nCopy>0 ){ memcpy(zBuf, &pCrash->zData[iOfst], nCopy); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
427 428 429 430 431 432 433 | return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Write data to a crash-file. */ static int cfWrite( | | | | | 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 | return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Write data to a crash-file. */ static int cfWrite( sqlite3_file *pFile, const void *zBuf, int iAmt, sqlite_int64 iOfst ){ CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile; if( iAmt+iOfst>pCrash->iSize ){ pCrash->iSize = (int)(iAmt+iOfst); } while( pCrash->iSize>pCrash->nData ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
600 601 602 603 604 605 606 | }; /* ** Open a crash-file file handle. ** ** The caller will have allocated pVfs->szOsFile bytes of space ** at pFile. This file uses this space for the CrashFile structure | | | 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 | }; /* ** Open a crash-file file handle. ** ** The caller will have allocated pVfs->szOsFile bytes of space ** at pFile. This file uses this space for the CrashFile structure ** and allocates space for the "real" file structure using ** sqlite3_malloc(). The assumption here is (pVfs->szOsFile) is ** equal or greater than sizeof(CrashFile). */ static int cfOpen( sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zName, sqlite3_file *pFile, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
663 664 665 666 667 668 669 | } static int cfDelete(sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zPath, int dirSync){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = (sqlite3_vfs *)pCfVfs->pAppData; return pVfs->xDelete(pVfs, zPath, dirSync); } static int cfAccess( | | | | | | | 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 | } static int cfDelete(sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zPath, int dirSync){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = (sqlite3_vfs *)pCfVfs->pAppData; return pVfs->xDelete(pVfs, zPath, dirSync); } static int cfAccess( sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zPath, int flags, int *pResOut ){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = (sqlite3_vfs *)pCfVfs->pAppData; return pVfs->xAccess(pVfs, zPath, flags, pResOut); } static int cfFullPathname( sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zPath, int nPathOut, char *zPathOut ){ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = (sqlite3_vfs *)pCfVfs->pAppData; return pVfs->xFullPathname(pVfs, zPath, nPathOut, zPathOut); } static void *cfDlOpen(sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs, const char *zPath){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
750 751 752 753 754 755 756 | int setSectorsize = 0; int setDeviceChar = 0; for(i=0; i<objc; i+=2){ int nOpt; char *zOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &nOpt); | | | | | 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 | int setSectorsize = 0; int setDeviceChar = 0; for(i=0; i<objc; i+=2){ int nOpt; char *zOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &nOpt); if( (nOpt>11 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-sectorsize", zOpt, nOpt)) && (nOpt>16 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-characteristics", zOpt, nOpt)) ){ Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Bad option: \"", zOpt, "\" - must be \"-characteristics\" or \"-sectorsize\"", 0 ); return TCL_ERROR; } if( i==objc-1 ){ Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Option requires an argument: \"", zOpt, "\"",0); return TCL_ERROR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
782 783 784 785 786 787 788 | } for(j=0; j<nObj; j++){ int rc; int iChoice; Tcl_Obj *pFlag = Tcl_DuplicateObj(apObj[j]); Tcl_IncrRefCount(pFlag); Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(pFlag)); | | | 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 | } for(j=0; j<nObj; j++){ int rc; int iChoice; Tcl_Obj *pFlag = Tcl_DuplicateObj(apObj[j]); Tcl_IncrRefCount(pFlag); Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(pFlag)); rc = Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct( interp, pFlag, aFlag, sizeof(aFlag[0]), "no such flag", 0, &iChoice ); Tcl_DecrRefCount(pFlag); if( rc ){ return TCL_ERROR; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
810 811 812 813 814 815 816 | return TCL_OK; } /* ** tclcmd: sqlite3_crash_now ** | | | 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 | return TCL_OK; } /* ** tclcmd: sqlite3_crash_now ** ** Simulate a crash immediately. This function does not return ** (writeListSync() calls exit(-1)). */ static int SQLITE_TCLAPI crashNowCmd( void * clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
849 850 851 852 853 854 855 | static sqlite3_vfs crashVfs = { 2, /* iVersion */ 0, /* szOsFile */ 0, /* mxPathname */ 0, /* pNext */ "crash", /* zName */ 0, /* pAppData */ | | | 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 | static sqlite3_vfs crashVfs = { 2, /* iVersion */ 0, /* szOsFile */ 0, /* mxPathname */ 0, /* pNext */ "crash", /* zName */ 0, /* pAppData */ cfOpen, /* xOpen */ cfDelete, /* xDelete */ cfAccess, /* xAccess */ cfFullPathname, /* xFullPathname */ cfDlOpen, /* xDlOpen */ cfDlError, /* xDlError */ cfDlSym, /* xDlSym */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
905 906 907 908 909 910 911 | ** This procedure implements a TCL command that enables crash testing ** in testfixture. Once enabled, crash testing cannot be disabled. ** ** Available options are "-characteristics" and "-sectorsize". Both require ** an argument. For -sectorsize, this is the simulated sector size in ** bytes. For -characteristics, the argument must be a list of io-capability ** flags to simulate. Valid flags are "atomic", "atomic512", "atomic1K", | | | 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | ** This procedure implements a TCL command that enables crash testing ** in testfixture. Once enabled, crash testing cannot be disabled. ** ** Available options are "-characteristics" and "-sectorsize". Both require ** an argument. For -sectorsize, this is the simulated sector size in ** bytes. For -characteristics, the argument must be a list of io-capability ** flags to simulate. Valid flags are "atomic", "atomic512", "atomic1K", ** "atomic2K", "atomic4K", "atomic8K", "atomic16K", "atomic32K", ** "atomic64K", "sequential" and "safe_append". ** ** Example: ** ** sqlite_crashparams -sect 1024 -char {atomic sequential} ./test.db 1 ** */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 | if( objc!=2 && objc!=3 ){ Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?-default? PARENT-VFS"); return TCL_ERROR; } zParent = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]); if( objc==3 ){ if( strcmp(zParent, "-default") ){ | | | 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 | if( objc!=2 && objc!=3 ){ Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "?-default? PARENT-VFS"); return TCL_ERROR; } zParent = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]); if( objc==3 ){ if( strcmp(zParent, "-default") ){ Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", zParent, "\": must be -default", 0 ); return TCL_ERROR; } zParent = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test8.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE typedef struct echo_vtab echo_vtab; typedef struct echo_cursor echo_cursor; /* ** The test module defined in this file uses four global Tcl variables to | | | 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE typedef struct echo_vtab echo_vtab; typedef struct echo_cursor echo_cursor; /* ** The test module defined in this file uses four global Tcl variables to ** communicate with test-scripts: ** ** $::echo_module ** $::echo_module_sync_fail ** $::echo_module_begin_fail ** $::echo_module_cost ** ** The variable ::echo_module is a list. Each time one of the following |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_devsym.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 | ** Return the device characteristic flags supported by an devsym-file. */ static int devsymDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *pFile){ return g.iDeviceChar; } /* | | | 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 | ** Return the device characteristic flags supported by an devsym-file. */ static int devsymDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *pFile){ return g.iDeviceChar; } /* ** Shared-memory methods are all pass-throughs. */ static int devsymShmLock(sqlite3_file *pFile, int ofst, int n, int flags){ devsym_file *p = (devsym_file *)pFile; return p->pReal->pMethods->xShmLock(p->pReal, ofst, n, flags); } static int devsymShmMap( sqlite3_file *pFile, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_init.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | #endif static struct Wrapped { sqlite3_pcache_methods2 pcache; sqlite3_mem_methods mem; sqlite3_mutex_methods mutex; | | | | | | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 | #endif static struct Wrapped { sqlite3_pcache_methods2 pcache; sqlite3_mem_methods mem; sqlite3_mutex_methods mutex; int mem_init; /* True if mem subsystem is initialized */ int mem_fail; /* True to fail mem subsystem initialization */ int mutex_init; /* True if mutex subsystem is initialized */ int mutex_fail; /* True to fail mutex subsystem initialization */ int pcache_init; /* True if pcache subsystem is initialized */ int pcache_fail; /* True to fail pcache subsystem initialization */ } wrapped; static int wrMemInit(void *pAppData){ int rc; if( wrapped.mem_fail ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_intarray.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | ** ** The intarray virtual table is designed to facilitate using an ** array of integers as the right-hand side of an IN operator. So ** instead of doing a prepared statement like this: ** ** SELECT * FROM table WHERE x IN (?,?,?,...,?); ** | | | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 | ** ** The intarray virtual table is designed to facilitate using an ** array of integers as the right-hand side of an IN operator. So ** instead of doing a prepared statement like this: ** ** SELECT * FROM table WHERE x IN (?,?,?,...,?); ** ** And then binding individual integers to each of ? slots, a C-language ** application can create an intarray object (named "ex1" in the following ** example), prepare a statement like this: ** ** SELECT * FROM table WHERE x IN ex1; ** ** Then bind an ordinary C/C++ array of integer values to the ex1 object ** to run the statement. |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_md5.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
291 292 293 294 295 296 297 | zBuf[j++] = zEncode[a & 0xf]; } zBuf[j] = 0; } /* | | | 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 | zBuf[j++] = zEncode[a & 0xf]; } zBuf[j] = 0; } /* ** Convert a 128-bit MD5 digest into sequences of eight 5-digit integers ** each representing 16 bits of the digest and separated from each ** other by a "-" character. */ static void MD5DigestToBase10x8(unsigned char digest[16], char zDigest[50]){ int i, j; unsigned int x; for(i=j=0; i<16; i+=2){ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_multiplex.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | ** int sqlite3_multiplex_initialize( ** const char *zOrigVfsName, // The underlying real VFS ** int makeDefault // True to make multiplex the default VFS ** ); ** ** The procedure call above will create and register a new VFS shim named ** "multiplex". The multiplex VFS will use the VFS named by zOrigVfsName to | | | | | | | | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | ** int sqlite3_multiplex_initialize( ** const char *zOrigVfsName, // The underlying real VFS ** int makeDefault // True to make multiplex the default VFS ** ); ** ** The procedure call above will create and register a new VFS shim named ** "multiplex". The multiplex VFS will use the VFS named by zOrigVfsName to ** do the actual disk I/O. (The zOrigVfsName parameter may be NULL, in ** which case the default VFS at the moment sqlite3_multiplex_initialize() ** is called will be used as the underlying real VFS.) ** ** If the makeDefault parameter is TRUE then multiplex becomes the new ** default VFS. Otherwise, you can use the multiplex VFS by specifying ** "multiplex" as the 4th parameter to sqlite3_open_v2() or by employing ** URI filenames and adding "vfs=multiplex" as a parameter to the filename ** URI. ** ** The multiplex VFS allows databases up to 32 GiB in size. But it splits ** the files up into smaller pieces, so that they will work even on ** filesystems that do not support large files. The default chunk size ** is 2147418112 bytes (which is 64KiB less than 2GiB) but this can be ** changed at compile-time by defining the SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE ** macro. Use the "chunksize=NNNN" query parameter with a URI filename ** in order to select an alternative chunk size for individual connections ** at run-time. */ #include "sqlite3.h" #include <string.h> #include <assert.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include "test_multiplex.h" #ifndef SQLITE_CORE #define SQLITE_CORE 1 /* Disable the API redefinition in sqlite3ext.h */ #endif #include "sqlite3ext.h" /* ** These should be defined to be the same as the values in ** sqliteInt.h. They are defined separately here so that ** the multiplex VFS shim can be built as a loadable ** module. */ #define UNUSED_PARAMETER(x) (void)(x) #define MAX_PAGE_SIZE 0x10000 #define DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE 0x1000 /* Maximum chunk number */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | /************************ Shim Definitions ******************************/ #ifndef SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_VFS_NAME # define SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_VFS_NAME "multiplex" #endif /* This is the limit on the chunk size. It may be changed by calling | | | 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | /************************ Shim Definitions ******************************/ #ifndef SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_VFS_NAME # define SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_VFS_NAME "multiplex" #endif /* This is the limit on the chunk size. It may be changed by calling ** the xFileControl() interface. It will be rounded up to a ** multiple of MAX_PAGE_SIZE. We default it here to 2GiB less 64KiB. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE # define SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE 2147418112 #endif /* This used to be the default limit on number of chunks, but |
︙ | ︙ | |||
126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | unsigned int szChunk; /* Chunk size used for this group */ unsigned char bEnabled; /* TRUE to use Multiplex VFS for this file */ unsigned char bTruncate; /* TRUE to enable truncation of databases */ }; /* ** An instance of the following object represents each open connection | | | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | unsigned int szChunk; /* Chunk size used for this group */ unsigned char bEnabled; /* TRUE to use Multiplex VFS for this file */ unsigned char bTruncate; /* TRUE to enable truncation of databases */ }; /* ** An instance of the following object represents each open connection ** to a file that is multiplex'ed. This object is a ** subclass of sqlite3_file. The sqlite3_file object for the underlying ** VFS is appended to this structure. */ struct multiplexConn { sqlite3_file base; /* Base class - must be first */ multiplexGroup *pGroup; /* The underlying group of files */ }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs; /* The sThisVfs is the VFS structure used by this shim. It is initialized ** at start-time and thus does not require a mutex */ sqlite3_vfs sThisVfs; | | | | 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 | sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs; /* The sThisVfs is the VFS structure used by this shim. It is initialized ** at start-time and thus does not require a mutex */ sqlite3_vfs sThisVfs; /* The sIoMethods defines the methods used by sqlite3_file objects ** associated with this shim. It is initialized at start-time and does ** not require a mutex. ** ** When the underlying VFS is called to open a file, it might return ** either a version 1 or a version 2 sqlite3_file object. This shim ** has to create a wrapper sqlite3_file of the same version. Hence ** there are two I/O method structures, one for version 1 and the other ** for version 2. */ sqlite3_io_methods sIoMethodsV1; sqlite3_io_methods sIoMethodsV2; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
195 196 197 198 199 200 201 | ** Generate the file-name for chunk iChunk of the group with base name ** zBase. The file-name is written to buffer zOut before returning. Buffer ** zOut must be allocated by the caller so that it is at least (nBase+5) ** bytes in size, where nBase is the length of zBase, not including the ** nul-terminator. ** ** If iChunk is 0 (or 400 - the number for the first journal file chunk), | | | | | | 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | ** Generate the file-name for chunk iChunk of the group with base name ** zBase. The file-name is written to buffer zOut before returning. Buffer ** zOut must be allocated by the caller so that it is at least (nBase+5) ** bytes in size, where nBase is the length of zBase, not including the ** nul-terminator. ** ** If iChunk is 0 (or 400 - the number for the first journal file chunk), ** the output is a copy of the input string. Otherwise, if ** SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES is not defined or the input buffer does not contain ** a "." character, then the output is a copy of the input string with the ** three-digit zero-padded decimal representation if iChunk appended to it. ** For example: ** ** zBase="test.db", iChunk=4 -> zOut="test.db004" ** ** Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES is defined and the input buffer contains ** a "." character, then everything after the "." is replaced by the ** three-digit representation of iChunk. ** ** zBase="test.db", iChunk=4 -> zOut="test.004" ** ** The output buffer string is terminated by 2 0x00 bytes. This makes it safe ** to pass to sqlite3_uri_parameter() and similar. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
228 229 230 231 232 233 234 | if( iChunk!=0 && iChunk<=MX_CHUNK_NUMBER ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES int i; for(i=n-1; i>0 && i>=n-4 && zOut[i]!='.'; i--){} if( i>=n-4 ) n = i+1; if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){ /* The extensions on overflow files for main databases are 001, 002, | | | | 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | if( iChunk!=0 && iChunk<=MX_CHUNK_NUMBER ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES int i; for(i=n-1; i>0 && i>=n-4 && zOut[i]!='.'; i--){} if( i>=n-4 ) n = i+1; if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){ /* The extensions on overflow files for main databases are 001, 002, ** 003 and so forth. To avoid name collisions, add 400 to the ** extensions of journal files so that they are 401, 402, 403, .... */ iChunk += SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET; }else if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ){ /* To avoid name collisions, add 700 to the ** extensions of WAL files so that they are 701, 702, 703, .... */ iChunk += SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_WAL_8_3_OFFSET; } #endif sqlite3_snprintf(4,&zOut[n],"%03d",iChunk); n += 3; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
293 294 295 296 297 298 299 | int *pOutFlags, /* Output flags */ int createFlag /* True to create if iChunk>0 */ ){ sqlite3_file *pSubOpen = 0; sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs = gMultiplex.pOrigVfs; /* Real VFS */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES | | | | 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 | int *pOutFlags, /* Output flags */ int createFlag /* True to create if iChunk>0 */ ){ sqlite3_file *pSubOpen = 0; sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs = gMultiplex.pOrigVfs; /* Real VFS */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES /* If JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET is set to (say) 400, then any overflow files are ** part of a database journal are named db.401, db.402, and so on. A ** database may therefore not grow to larger than 400 chunks. Attempting ** to open chunk 401 indicates the database is full. */ if( iChunk>=SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET ){ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL, "multiplexed chunk overflow: %s", pGroup->zName); *rc = SQLITE_FULL; return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
347 348 349 350 351 352 353 | } } return pSubOpen; } /* ** Return the size, in bytes, of chunk number iChunk. If that chunk | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 | } } return pSubOpen; } /* ** Return the size, in bytes, of chunk number iChunk. If that chunk ** does not exist, then return 0. This function does not distinguish between ** non-existent files and zero-length files. */ static sqlite3_int64 multiplexSubSize( multiplexGroup *pGroup, /* The multiplexor group */ int iChunk, /* Which chunk to open. 0==original file */ int *rc /* Result code in and out */ ){ sqlite3_file *pSub; sqlite3_int64 sz = 0; if( *rc ) return 0; pSub = multiplexSubOpen(pGroup, iChunk, rc, NULL, 0); if( pSub==0 ) return 0; *rc = pSub->pMethods->xFileSize(pSub, &sz); return sz; } /* ** This is the implementation of the multiplex_control() SQL function. */ static void multiplexControlFunc( sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context); int op = 0; int iVal; if( !db || argc!=2 ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else{ /* extract params */ op = sqlite3_value_int(argv[0]); iVal = sqlite3_value_int(argv[1]); /* map function op to file_control op */ switch( op ){ case 1: op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE; break; case 2: op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE; break; case 3: op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS; break; default: rc = SQLITE_NOTFOUND; break; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3_file_control(db, 0, op, &iVal); } sqlite3_result_error_code(context, rc); } /* ** This is the entry point to register the auto-extension for the ** multiplex_control() function. */ static int multiplexFuncInit( sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg, const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi ){ int rc; rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "multiplex_control", 2, SQLITE_ANY, 0, multiplexControlFunc, 0, 0); return rc; } /* ** Close a single sub-file in the connection group. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
504 505 506 507 508 509 510 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ const char *zUri = (flags & SQLITE_OPEN_URI) ? zName : 0; /* assign pointers to extra space allocated */ memset(pGroup, 0, sz); pMultiplexOpen->pGroup = pGroup; pGroup->bEnabled = (unsigned char)-1; | | | 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ const char *zUri = (flags & SQLITE_OPEN_URI) ? zName : 0; /* assign pointers to extra space allocated */ memset(pGroup, 0, sz); pMultiplexOpen->pGroup = pGroup; pGroup->bEnabled = (unsigned char)-1; pGroup->bTruncate = (unsigned char)sqlite3_uri_boolean(zUri, "truncate", (flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB)==0); pGroup->szChunk = (int)sqlite3_uri_int64(zUri, "chunksize", SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE); pGroup->szChunk = (pGroup->szChunk+0xffff)&~0xffff; if( zName ){ char *p = (char *)&pGroup[1]; pGroup->zName = p; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
547 548 549 550 551 552 553 | int bExists; if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL ){ pGroup->bEnabled = 0; }else if( sz64==0 ){ if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){ /* If opening a main journal file and the first chunk is zero | | | | | | 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 | int bExists; if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL ){ pGroup->bEnabled = 0; }else if( sz64==0 ){ if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){ /* If opening a main journal file and the first chunk is zero ** bytes in size, delete any subsequent chunks from the ** file-system. */ int iChunk = 1; do { rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs, pGroup->aReal[iChunk].z, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists ){ rc = pOrigVfs->xDelete(pOrigVfs, pGroup->aReal[iChunk].z, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = multiplexSubFilename(pGroup, ++iChunk); } } }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists ); } }else{ /* If the first overflow file exists and if the size of the main file ** is different from the chunk size, that means the chunk size is set ** set incorrectly. So fix it. ** ** Or, if the first overflow file does not exist and the main file is ** larger than the chunk size, that means the chunk size is too small. ** But we have no way of determining the intended chunk size, so ** just disable the multiplexor all together. */ rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs, pGroup->aReal[1].z, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists); bExists = multiplexSubSize(pGroup, 1, &rc)>0; if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists && sz64==(sz64&0xffff0000) && sz64>0 && sz64!=pGroup->szChunk ){ pGroup->szChunk = (int)sz64; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
614 615 616 617 618 619 620 | int syncDir ){ int rc; sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs = gMultiplex.pOrigVfs; /* Real VFS */ rc = pOrigVfs->xDelete(pOrigVfs, zName, syncDir); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* If the main chunk was deleted successfully, also delete any subsequent | | | 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 | int syncDir ){ int rc; sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs = gMultiplex.pOrigVfs; /* Real VFS */ rc = pOrigVfs->xDelete(pOrigVfs, zName, syncDir); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* If the main chunk was deleted successfully, also delete any subsequent ** chunks - starting with the last (highest numbered). */ int nName = (int)strlen(zName); char *z; z = sqlite3_malloc64(nName + 5); if( z==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
691 692 693 694 695 696 697 | return gMultiplex.pOrigVfs->xCurrentTimeInt64(gMultiplex.pOrigVfs, b); } /************************ I/O Method Wrappers *******************************/ /* xClose requests get passed through to the original VFS. ** We loop over all open chunk handles and close them. | | | 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 | return gMultiplex.pOrigVfs->xCurrentTimeInt64(gMultiplex.pOrigVfs, b); } /************************ I/O Method Wrappers *******************************/ /* xClose requests get passed through to the original VFS. ** We loop over all open chunk handles and close them. ** The group structure for this file is unlinked from ** our list of groups and freed. */ static int multiplexClose(sqlite3_file *pConn){ multiplexConn *p = (multiplexConn*)pConn; multiplexGroup *pGroup = p->pGroup; int rc = SQLITE_OK; multiplexFreeComponents(pGroup); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 | aFcntl[0] = sqlite3_mprintf("%d", pGroup->bEnabled!=0); rc = SQLITE_OK; break; } /* ** PRAGMA multiplex_chunksize; ** | | | 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 | aFcntl[0] = sqlite3_mprintf("%d", pGroup->bEnabled!=0); rc = SQLITE_OK; break; } /* ** PRAGMA multiplex_chunksize; ** ** Return the chunksize for the multiplexor, or no-op if the ** multiplexor is not active. */ if( sqlite3_stricmp(aFcntl[1],"multiplex_chunksize")==0 && pGroup->bEnabled ){ aFcntl[0] = sqlite3_mprintf("%u", pGroup->szChunk); rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 | return SQLITE_OK; } /************************** Public Interfaces *****************************/ /* ** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize() ** | | | | 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 | return SQLITE_OK; } /************************** Public Interfaces *****************************/ /* ** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize() ** ** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work. ** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL. ** ** The multiplex VFS shim is named "multiplex". It will become the default ** VFS if makeDefault is non-zero. ** ** THIS ROUTINE IS NOT THREADSAFE. Call this routine exactly once ** during start-up. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_multiplex.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** ** This file contains a VFS "shim" - a layer that sits in between the ** pager and the real VFS. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** ** This file contains a VFS "shim" - a layer that sits in between the ** pager and the real VFS. ** ** This particular shim enforces a multiplex system on DB files. ** This shim shards/partitions a single DB file into smaller ** "chunks" such that the total DB file size may exceed the maximum ** file size of the underlying file system. ** */ #ifndef SQLITE_TEST_MULTIPLEX_H #define SQLITE_TEST_MULTIPLEX_H /* ** CAPI: File-control Operations Supported by Multiplex VFS ** ** Values interpreted by the xFileControl method of a Multiplex VFS db file-handle. ** ** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE: ** This file control is used to enable or disable the multiplex ** shim. ** ** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE: ** This file control is used to set the maximum allowed chunk ** size for a multiplex file set. The chunk size should be ** a multiple of SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, and will be rounded up ** if not. ** ** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS: ** This file control is used to set the maximum number of chunks ** allowed to be used for a multiplex file set. */ #define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE 214014 #define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE 214015 #define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS 214016 #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif /* ** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize() ** ** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work. ** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL. ** ** The multiplex VFS shim is named "multiplex". It will become the default ** VFS if makeDefault is non-zero. ** ** An auto-extension is registered which will make the function ** multiplex_control() available to database connections. This ** function gives access to the xFileControl interface of the ** multiplex VFS shim. ** ** SELECT multiplex_control(<op>,<val>); ** ** <op>=1 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE ** <val>=0 disable ** <val>=1 enable ** ** <op>=2 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE ** <val> int, chunk size ** ** <op>=3 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS ** <val> int, max chunks ** ** THIS ROUTINE IS NOT THREADSAFE. Call this routine exactly once ** during start-up. */ extern int sqlite3_multiplex_initialize(const char *zOrigVfsName, int makeDefault); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_mutex.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | sqlite3_mutex *pReal; int eType; }; /* State variables */ static struct test_mutex_globals { int isInstalled; /* True if installed */ | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | sqlite3_mutex *pReal; int eType; }; /* State variables */ static struct test_mutex_globals { int isInstalled; /* True if installed */ int disableInit; /* True to cause sqlite3_initialize() to fail */ int disableTry; /* True to force sqlite3_mutex_try() to fail */ int isInit; /* True if initialized */ sqlite3_mutex_methods m; /* Interface to "real" mutex system */ int aCounter[MAX_MUTEXES]; /* Number of grabs of each type of mutex */ sqlite3_mutex aStatic[STATIC_MUTEXES]; /* The static mutexes */ } g = {0}; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_pcache.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | /* ** 2008 November 18 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* | | | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 | /* ** 2008 November 18 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** ** This file contains code used for testing the SQLite system. ** None of the code in this file goes into a deliverable build. ** ** This file contains an application-defined pager cache ** implementation that can be plugged in in place of the ** default pcache. This alternative pager cache will throw ** some errors that the default cache does not. ** ** This pagecache implementation is designed for simplicity ** not speed. */ #include "sqlite3.h" #include <string.h> #include <assert.h> /* ** Global data used by this test implementation. There is no ** mutexing, which means this page cache will not work in a ** multi-threaded test. */ typedef struct testpcacheGlobalType testpcacheGlobalType; struct testpcacheGlobalType { void *pDummy; /* Dummy allocation to simulate failures */ int nInstance; /* Number of current instances */ unsigned discardChance; /* Chance of discarding on an unpin (0-100) */ unsigned prngSeed; /* Seed for the PRNG */ unsigned highStress; /* Call xStress aggressively */ }; static testpcacheGlobalType testpcacheGlobal; /* ** Initializer. ** ** Verify that the initializer is only called when the system is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
127 128 129 130 131 132 133 | } /* ** Allocate a new page cache instance. */ static sqlite3_pcache *testpcacheCreate( | | | | 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 | } /* ** Allocate a new page cache instance. */ static sqlite3_pcache *testpcacheCreate( int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable ){ int nMem; char *x; testpcache *p; int i; assert( testpcacheGlobal.pDummy!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
221 222 223 224 225 226 227 | } /* Do not allocate the last TESTPCACHE_RESERVE pages unless createFlag is 2 */ if( p->nPinned>=TESTPCACHE_NPAGE-TESTPCACHE_RESERVE && createFlag<2 ){ return 0; } | | | 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 | } /* Do not allocate the last TESTPCACHE_RESERVE pages unless createFlag is 2 */ if( p->nPinned>=TESTPCACHE_NPAGE-TESTPCACHE_RESERVE && createFlag<2 ){ return 0; } /* Do not allocate if highStress is enabled and createFlag is not 2. ** ** The highStress setting causes pagerStress() to be called much more ** often, which exercises the pager logic more intensely. */ if( testpcacheGlobal.highStress && createFlag<2 ){ return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
424 425 426 427 428 429 430 | ** page. 0 means never discard (unless the discard flag is set). ** 100 means always discard. */ void installTestPCache( int installFlag, /* True to install. False to uninstall. */ unsigned discardChance, /* 0-100. Chance to discard on unpin */ unsigned prngSeed, /* Seed for the PRNG */ | | | 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 | ** page. 0 means never discard (unless the discard flag is set). ** 100 means always discard. */ void installTestPCache( int installFlag, /* True to install. False to uninstall. */ unsigned discardChance, /* 0-100. Chance to discard on unpin */ unsigned prngSeed, /* Seed for the PRNG */ unsigned highStress /* Call xStress aggressively */ ){ static const sqlite3_pcache_methods2 testPcache = { 1, (void*)&testpcacheGlobal, testpcacheInit, testpcacheShutdown, testpcacheCreate, |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_quota.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 | ** Write content into a quota_FILE. Invoke the quota callback and block ** the write if we exceed quota. */ size_t sqlite3_quota_fwrite( const void *pBuf, /* Take content to write from here */ size_t size, /* Size of each element */ size_t nmemb, /* Number of elements */ | | | 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 | ** Write content into a quota_FILE. Invoke the quota callback and block ** the write if we exceed quota. */ size_t sqlite3_quota_fwrite( const void *pBuf, /* Take content to write from here */ size_t size, /* Size of each element */ size_t nmemb, /* Number of elements */ quota_FILE *p /* Write to this quota_FILE object */ ){ sqlite3_int64 iOfst; sqlite3_int64 iEnd; sqlite3_int64 szNew; quotaFile *pFile; size_t rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 | static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_quota_glob( void * clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[] ){ const char *zPattern; /* The glob pattern */ | | | 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 | static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_quota_glob( void * clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[] ){ const char *zPattern; /* The glob pattern */ const char *zText; /* Text to compare against the pattern */ int rc; if( objc!=3 ){ Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "PATTERN TEXT"); return TCL_ERROR; } zPattern = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]); zText = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_vfstrace.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
783 784 785 786 787 788 789 | static int vfstraceCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, sqlite3_int64 *pTimeOut){ vfstrace_info *pInfo = (vfstrace_info*)pVfs->pAppData; sqlite3_vfs *pRoot = pInfo->pRootVfs; return pRoot->xCurrentTimeInt64(pRoot, pTimeOut); } /* | | | 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 | static int vfstraceCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, sqlite3_int64 *pTimeOut){ vfstrace_info *pInfo = (vfstrace_info*)pVfs->pAppData; sqlite3_vfs *pRoot = pInfo->pRootVfs; return pRoot->xCurrentTimeInt64(pRoot, pTimeOut); } /* ** Return th3 most recent error code and message */ static int vfstraceGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int iErr, char *zErr){ vfstrace_info *pInfo = (vfstrace_info*)pVfs->pAppData; sqlite3_vfs *pRoot = pInfo->pRootVfs; return pRoot->xGetLastError(pRoot, iErr, zErr); } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/test_windirent.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 | */ #ifndef is_filtered # define is_filtered(a) ((((a).attrib)&_A_HIDDEN) || (((a).attrib)&_A_SYSTEM)) #endif /* | | | 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 | */ #ifndef is_filtered # define is_filtered(a) ((((a).attrib)&_A_HIDDEN) || (((a).attrib)&_A_SYSTEM)) #endif /* ** Provide the function prototype for the POSIX compatible getenv() ** function. This function is not thread-safe. */ extern const char *windirent_getenv(const char *name); /* ** Finally, we can provide the function prototypes for the opendir(), |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/update.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | Expr *pWhere, /* WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement */ int onError /* ON CONFLICT strategy */ ); #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ /* ** The most recently coded instruction was an OP_Column to retrieve the | | | | | | 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 | Expr *pWhere, /* WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement */ int onError /* ON CONFLICT strategy */ ); #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ /* ** The most recently coded instruction was an OP_Column to retrieve the ** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the ** OP_Column to the default value, if any. ** ** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the ** column definition. This was either supplied by the user when the table ** was created, or added later to the table definition by an ALTER TABLE ** command. If the latter, then the row-records in the table btree on disk ** may not contain a value for the column and the default value, taken ** from the P4 parameter of the OP_Column instruction, is returned instead. ** If the former, then all row-records are guaranteed to include a value ** for the column and the P4 value is not required. ** ** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have ** literal default values specified: a number, null or a string. (If a more ** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated ** when the ALTER TABLE is executed and one of the literal values written ** into the sqlite_schema table.) ** ** Therefore, the P4 parameter is only required if the default value for ** the column is a literal number, string or null. The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() ** function is capable of transforming these types of expressions into ** sqlite3_value objects. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | pCol = &pTab->aCol[i]; if( pCol->iDflt ){ sqlite3_value *pValue = 0; u8 enc = ENC(sqlite3VdbeDb(v)); assert( !IsView(pTab) ); VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zCnName)); assert( i<pTab->nCol ); | | | | 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 | pCol = &pTab->aCol[i]; if( pCol->iDflt ){ sqlite3_value *pValue = 0; u8 enc = ENC(sqlite3VdbeDb(v)); assert( !IsView(pTab) ); VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zCnName)); assert( i<pTab->nCol ); sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab,pCol), enc, pCol->affinity, &pValue); if( pValue ){ sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, pValue, P4_MEM); } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT if( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL && !IsVirtual(pTab) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
146 147 148 149 150 151 152 | return pRet; } /* ** Assuming both the pLimit and pOrderBy parameters are NULL, this function ** generates VM code to run the query: ** | | | | | | | | | | 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | return pRet; } /* ** Assuming both the pLimit and pOrderBy parameters are NULL, this function ** generates VM code to run the query: ** ** SELECT <other-columns>, pChanges FROM pTabList WHERE pWhere ** ** and write the results to the ephemeral table already opened as cursor ** iEph. None of pChanges, pTabList or pWhere are modified or consumed by ** this function, they must be deleted by the caller. ** ** Or, if pLimit and pOrderBy are not NULL, and pTab is not a view: ** ** SELECT <other-columns>, pChanges FROM pTabList ** WHERE pWhere ** GROUP BY <other-columns> ** ORDER BY pOrderBy LIMIT pLimit ** ** If pTab is a view, the GROUP BY clause is omitted. ** ** Exactly how results are written to table iEph, and exactly what ** the <other-columns> in the query above are is determined by the type ** of table pTabList->a[0].pTab. ** ** If the table is a WITHOUT ROWID table, then argument pPk must be its ** PRIMARY KEY. In this case <other-columns> are the primary key columns ** of the table, in order. The results of the query are written to ephemeral ** table iEph as index keys, using OP_IdxInsert. ** ** If the table is actually a view, then <other-columns> are all columns of ** the view. The results are written to the ephemeral table iEph as records ** with automatically assigned integer keys. ** ** If the table is a virtual or ordinary intkey table, then <other-columns> ** is its rowid. For a virtual table, the results are written to iEph as ** records with automatically assigned integer keys For intkey tables, the ** rowid value in <other-columns> is used as the integer key, and the ** remaining fields make up the table record. */ static void updateFromSelect( Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */ int iEph, /* Cursor for open eph. table */ Index *pPk, /* PK if table 0 is WITHOUT ROWID */ ExprList *pChanges, /* List of expressions to return */ SrcList *pTabList, /* List of tables to select from */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | pGrp = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, sqlite3PExpr(pParse,TK_ROW,0,0)); } #endif } assert( pChanges!=0 || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); if( pChanges ){ for(i=0; i<pChanges->nExpr; i++){ | | | | | 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 | pGrp = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, sqlite3PExpr(pParse,TK_ROW,0,0)); } #endif } assert( pChanges!=0 || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); if( pChanges ){ for(i=0; i<pChanges->nExpr; i++){ pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, pList, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pChanges->a[i].pExpr, 0) ); } } pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pList, pSrc, pWhere2, pGrp, 0, pOrderBy2, SF_UFSrcCheck|SF_IncludeHidden|SF_UpdateFrom, pLimit2 ); if( pSelect ) pSelect->selFlags |= SF_OrderByReqd; sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, eDest, iEph); dest.iSDParm2 = (pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : -1); sqlite3Select(pParse, pSelect, &dest); sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
353 354 355 356 357 358 359 | db = pParse->db; assert( db->pParse==pParse ); if( pParse->nErr ){ goto update_cleanup; } assert( db->mallocFailed==0 ); | | | 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 | db = pParse->db; assert( db->pParse==pParse ); if( pParse->nErr ){ goto update_cleanup; } assert( db->mallocFailed==0 ); /* Locate the table which we want to update. */ pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTabList); if( pTab==0 ) goto update_cleanup; iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(pParse->db, pTab->pSchema); /* Figure out if we have any triggers and if the table being ** updated is a view. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
431 432 433 434 435 436 437 | /* On an UPSERT, reuse the same cursors already opened by INSERT */ iDataCur = pUpsert->iDataCur; iIdxCur = pUpsert->iIdxCur; pParse->nTab = iBaseCur; } pTabList->a[0].iCursor = iDataCur; | | | 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 | /* On an UPSERT, reuse the same cursors already opened by INSERT */ iDataCur = pUpsert->iDataCur; iIdxCur = pUpsert->iIdxCur; pParse->nTab = iBaseCur; } pTabList->a[0].iCursor = iDataCur; /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[]. ** Initialize aXRef[] and aToOpen[] to their default values. */ aXRef = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(int) * (pTab->nCol+nIdx+1) + nIdx+2 ); if( aXRef==0 ) goto update_cleanup; aRegIdx = aXRef+pTab->nCol; aToOpen = (u8*)(aRegIdx+nIdx+1); memset(aToOpen, 1, nIdx+1); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
482 483 484 485 486 487 488 | }else if( pPk && (pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_PRIMKEY)!=0 ){ chngPk = 1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS else if( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED ){ testcase( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL ); testcase( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_STORED ); | | | 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 | }else if( pPk && (pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_PRIMKEY)!=0 ){ chngPk = 1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS else if( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED ){ testcase( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL ); testcase( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & COLFLAG_STORED ); sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot UPDATE generated column \"%s\"", pTab->aCol[j].zCnName); goto update_cleanup; } #endif aXRef[j] = i; break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
525 526 527 528 529 530 531 | assert( (chngRowid & chngPk)==0 ); assert( chngRowid==0 || chngRowid==1 ); assert( chngPk==0 || chngPk==1 ); chngKey = chngRowid + chngPk; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS /* Mark generated columns as changing if their generator expressions | | | | 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 | assert( (chngRowid & chngPk)==0 ); assert( chngRowid==0 || chngRowid==1 ); assert( chngPk==0 || chngPk==1 ); chngKey = chngRowid + chngPk; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS /* Mark generated columns as changing if their generator expressions ** reference any changing column. The actual aXRef[] value for ** generated expressions is not used, other than to check to see that it ** is non-negative, so the value of aXRef[] for generated columns can be ** set to any non-negative number. We use 99999 so that the value is ** obvious when looking at aXRef[] in a symbolic debugger. */ if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated ){ int bProgress; testcase( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasVirtual ); testcase( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasStored ); do{ bProgress = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | bProgress = 1; } } }while( bProgress ); } #endif | | | 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 | bProgress = 1; } } }while( bProgress ); } #endif /* The SET expressions are not actually used inside the WHERE loop. ** So reset the colUsed mask. Unless this is a virtual table. In that ** case, set all bits of the colUsed mask (to ensure that the virtual ** table implementation makes all columns available). */ pTabList->a[0].colUsed = IsVirtual(pTab) ? ALLBITS : 0; hasFK = sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, aXRef, chngKey); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
591 592 593 594 595 596 597 | } } if( reg==0 ) aToOpen[nAllIdx+1] = 0; aRegIdx[nAllIdx] = reg; } aRegIdx[nAllIdx] = ++pParse->nMem; /* Register storing the table record */ if( bReplace ){ | | | 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 | } } if( reg==0 ) aToOpen[nAllIdx+1] = 0; aRegIdx[nAllIdx] = reg; } aRegIdx[nAllIdx] = ++pParse->nMem; /* Register storing the table record */ if( bReplace ){ /* If REPLACE conflict resolution might be invoked, open cursors on all ** indexes in case they are needed to delete records. */ memset(aToOpen, 1, nIdx+1); } if( pParse->nested==0 ) sqlite3VdbeCountChanges(v); sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, pTrigger || hasFK, iDb); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
630 631 632 633 634 635 636 | } /* If we are trying to update a view, realize that view into ** an ephemeral table. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) if( nChangeFrom==0 && isView ){ | | | 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 | } /* If we are trying to update a view, realize that view into ** an ephemeral table. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) if( nChangeFrom==0 && isView ){ sqlite3MaterializeView(pParse, pTab, pWhere, pOrderBy, pLimit, iDataCur ); pOrderBy = 0; pLimit = 0; } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
702 703 704 705 706 707 708 | ); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY if( isView ) iDataCur = iEph; #endif } } } | | | | 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 | ); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY if( isView ) iDataCur = iEph; #endif } } } if( nChangeFrom ){ sqlite3MultiWrite(pParse); eOnePass = ONEPASS_OFF; nKey = nPk; regKey = iPk; }else{ if( pUpsert ){ /* If this is an UPSERT, then all cursors have already been opened by ** the outer INSERT and the data cursor should be pointing at the row ** that is to be updated. So bypass the code that searches for the ** row(s) to be updated. */ pWInfo = 0; eOnePass = ONEPASS_SINGLE; sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pWhere, labelBreak, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); bFinishSeek = 0; }else{ /* Begin the database scan. ** ** Do not consider a single-pass strategy for a multi-row update if ** there is anything that might disrupt the cursor being used to do ** the UPDATE: ** (1) This is a nested UPDATE ** (2) There are triggers ** (3) There are FOREIGN KEY constraints |
︙ | ︙ | |||
783 784 785 786 787 788 789 | }else{ if( ALWAYS(addrOpen) ) sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, addrOpen); } }else{ /* Read the PK of the current row into an array of registers. In ** ONEPASS_OFF mode, serialize the array into a record and store it in ** the ephemeral table. Or, in ONEPASS_SINGLE or MULTI mode, change | | | 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 | }else{ if( ALWAYS(addrOpen) ) sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, addrOpen); } }else{ /* Read the PK of the current row into an array of registers. In ** ONEPASS_OFF mode, serialize the array into a record and store it in ** the ephemeral table. Or, in ONEPASS_SINGLE or MULTI mode, change ** the OP_OpenEphemeral instruction to a Noop (the ephemeral table ** is not required) and leave the PK fields in the array of registers. */ for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){ assert( pPk->aiColumn[i]>=0 ); sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iDataCur, pPk->aiColumn[i], iPk+i); } if( eOnePass ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
806 807 808 809 810 811 812 | } } if( pUpsert==0 ){ if( nChangeFrom==0 && eOnePass!=ONEPASS_MULTI ){ sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); } | | | | | | 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 | } } if( pUpsert==0 ){ if( nChangeFrom==0 && eOnePass!=ONEPASS_MULTI ){ sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); } if( !isView ){ int addrOnce = 0; /* Open every index that needs updating. */ if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){ if( aiCurOnePass[0]>=0 ) aToOpen[aiCurOnePass[0]-iBaseCur] = 0; if( aiCurOnePass[1]>=0 ) aToOpen[aiCurOnePass[1]-iBaseCur] = 0; } if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI && (nIdx-(aiCurOnePass[1]>=0))>0 ){ addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v); } sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenWrite, 0, iBaseCur, aToOpen, 0, 0); if( addrOnce ){ sqlite3VdbeJumpHereOrPopInst(v, addrOnce); } } /* Top of the update loop */ if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){ if( aiCurOnePass[0]!=iDataCur && aiCurOnePass[1]!=iDataCur #ifdef SQLITE_ALLOW_ROWID_IN_VIEW && !isView #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
898 899 900 901 902 903 904 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_MustBeInt, regNewRowid); VdbeCoverage(v); } /* Compute the old pre-UPDATE content of the row being changed, if that ** information is needed */ if( chngPk || hasFK || pTrigger ){ u32 oldmask = (hasFK ? sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab) : 0); | | | 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_MustBeInt, regNewRowid); VdbeCoverage(v); } /* Compute the old pre-UPDATE content of the row being changed, if that ** information is needed */ if( chngPk || hasFK || pTrigger ){ u32 oldmask = (hasFK ? sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab) : 0); oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse, pTrigger, pChanges, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE|TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, onError ); for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){ u32 colFlags = pTab->aCol[i].colFlags; k = sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, i) + regOld; if( oldmask==0xffffffff || (i<32 && (oldmask & MASKBIT32(i))!=0) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
927 928 929 930 931 932 933 | ** row data. This array is used to check constants, create the new ** table and index records, and as the values for any new.* references ** made by triggers. ** ** If there are one or more BEFORE triggers, then do not populate the ** registers associated with columns that are (a) not modified by ** this UPDATE statement and (b) not accessed by new.* references. The | | | | 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 | ** row data. This array is used to check constants, create the new ** table and index records, and as the values for any new.* references ** made by triggers. ** ** If there are one or more BEFORE triggers, then do not populate the ** registers associated with columns that are (a) not modified by ** this UPDATE statement and (b) not accessed by new.* references. The ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger ** may have modified them). So not loading those that are not going to ** be used eliminates some redundant opcodes. */ newmask = sqlite3TriggerColmask( pParse, pTrigger, pChanges, 1, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, onError ); for(i=0, k=regNew; i<pTab->nCol; i++, k++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
951 952 953 954 955 956 957 | int nOff = (isView ? pTab->nCol : nPk); assert( eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iEph, nOff+j, k); }else{ sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pChanges->a[j].pExpr, k); } }else if( 0==(tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE) || i>31 || (newmask & MASKBIT32(i)) ){ | | | 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 | int nOff = (isView ? pTab->nCol : nPk); assert( eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iEph, nOff+j, k); }else{ sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pChanges->a[j].pExpr, k); } }else if( 0==(tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE) || i>31 || (newmask & MASKBIT32(i)) ){ /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed ** into a register. This is done if there are no BEFORE triggers, or ** if there are one or more BEFORE triggers that use this value via ** a new.* reference in a trigger program. */ testcase( i==31 ); testcase( i==32 ); sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iDataCur, i, k); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
978 979 980 981 982 983 984 | #endif /* Fire any BEFORE UPDATE triggers. This happens before constraints are ** verified. One could argue that this is wrong. */ if( tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE ){ sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regNew); | | | | | | | 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 | #endif /* Fire any BEFORE UPDATE triggers. This happens before constraints are ** verified. One could argue that this is wrong. */ if( tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE ){ sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regNew); sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue); if( !isView ){ /* The row-trigger may have deleted the row being updated. In this ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are ** required. This behavior - what happens when the row being updated ** is deleted or renamed by a BEFORE trigger - is left undefined in the ** documentation. */ if( pPk ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_NotFound,iDataCur,labelContinue,regKey,nKey); VdbeCoverage(v); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iDataCur, labelContinue,regOldRowid); VdbeCoverage(v); } /* After-BEFORE-trigger-reload-loop: ** If it did not delete it, the BEFORE trigger may still have modified ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their registers ** in case this has happened. Only unmodified columns are reloaded. ** The values computed for modified columns use the values before the ** BEFORE trigger runs. See test case trigger1-18.0 (added 2018-04-26) ** for an example. */ for(i=0, k=regNew; i<pTab->nCol; i++, k++){ if( pTab->aCol[i].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED ){ if( pTab->aCol[i].colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL ) k--; }else if( aXRef[i]<0 && i!=pTab->iPKey ){ sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iDataCur, i, k); } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated ){ testcase( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasVirtual ); testcase( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasStored ); sqlite3ComputeGeneratedColumns(pParse, regNew, pTab); } #endif } } if( !isView ){ /* Do constraint checks. */ assert( regOldRowid>0 ); sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(pParse, pTab, aRegIdx, iDataCur, iIdxCur, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_FinishSeek, iDataCur); } /* If changing the rowid value, or if there are foreign key constraints ** to process, delete the old record. Otherwise, add a noop OP_Delete ** to invoke the pre-update hook. ** | | | 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_FinishSeek, iDataCur); } /* If changing the rowid value, or if there are foreign key constraints ** to process, delete the old record. Otherwise, add a noop OP_Delete ** to invoke the pre-update hook. ** ** That (regNew==regnewRowid+1) is true is also important for the ** pre-update hook. If the caller invokes preupdate_new(), the returned ** value is copied from memory cell (regNewRowid+1+iCol), where iCol ** is the column index supplied by the user. */ assert( regNew==regNewRowid+1 ); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Delete, iDataCur, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iDataCur, 0); } #endif if( hasFK ){ sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regNewRowid, aXRef, chngKey); } | | | | | | | | 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iDataCur, 0); } #endif if( hasFK ){ sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regNewRowid, aXRef, chngKey); } /* Insert the new index entries and the new record. */ sqlite3CompleteInsertion( pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx, OPFLAG_ISUPDATE | (eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ? OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION : 0), 0, 0 ); /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key ** to the row just updated. */ if( hasFK ){ sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, pChanges, regOldRowid, aXRef, chngKey); } } /* Increment the row counter */ if( regRowCount ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1); } sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue); /* Repeat the above with the next record to be updated, until ** all record selected by the WHERE clause have been updated. */ if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_SINGLE ){ /* Nothing to do at end-of-loop for a single-pass */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 | update_cleanup: sqlite3AuthContextPop(&sContext); sqlite3DbFree(db, aXRef); /* Also frees aRegIdx[] and aToOpen[] */ sqlite3SrcListDelete(db, pTabList); sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pChanges); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWhere); | | | | | 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 | update_cleanup: sqlite3AuthContextPop(&sContext); sqlite3DbFree(db, aXRef); /* Also frees aRegIdx[] and aToOpen[] */ sqlite3SrcListDelete(db, pTabList); sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pChanges); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWhere); #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT) sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pOrderBy); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pLimit); #endif return; } /* Make sure "isView" and other macros defined above are undefined. Otherwise ** they may interfere with compilation of other functions in this file ** (or in another file, if this file becomes part of the amalgamation). */ #ifdef isView #undef isView #endif #ifdef pTrigger #undef pTrigger #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* ** Generate code for an UPDATE of a virtual table. ** ** There are two possible strategies - the default and the special ** "onepass" strategy. Onepass is only used if the virtual table ** implementation indicates that pWhere may match at most one row. ** ** The default strategy is to create an ephemeral table that contains ** for each row to be changed: ** ** (A) The original rowid of that row. ** (B) The revised rowid for the row. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 | int i; /* Loop counter */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */ const char *pVTab = (const char*)sqlite3GetVTable(db, pTab); WhereInfo *pWInfo = 0; int nArg = 2 + pTab->nCol; /* Number of arguments to VUpdate */ int regArg; /* First register in VUpdate arg array */ int regRec; /* Register in which to assemble record */ | | | 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 | int i; /* Loop counter */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */ const char *pVTab = (const char*)sqlite3GetVTable(db, pTab); WhereInfo *pWInfo = 0; int nArg = 2 + pTab->nCol; /* Number of arguments to VUpdate */ int regArg; /* First register in VUpdate arg array */ int regRec; /* Register in which to assemble record */ int regRowid; /* Register for ephemeral table rowid */ int iCsr = pSrc->a[0].iCursor; /* Cursor used for virtual table scan */ int aDummy[2]; /* Unused arg for sqlite3WhereOkOnePass() */ int eOnePass; /* True to use onepass strategy */ int addr; /* Address of OP_OpenEphemeral */ /* Allocate nArg registers in which to gather the arguments for VUpdate. Then ** create and open the ephemeral table in which the records created from |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 | if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ){ /* End the virtual table scan */ if( pSrc->nSrc==1 ){ sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); } | | | | 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 | if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ){ /* End the virtual table scan */ if( pSrc->nSrc==1 ){ sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); } /* Begin scanning through the ephemeral table. */ addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Rewind, ephemTab); VdbeCoverage(v); /* Extract arguments from the current row of the ephemeral table and ** invoke the VUpdate method. */ for(i=0; i<nArg; i++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, ephemTab, i, regArg+i); } } sqlite3VtabMakeWritable(pParse, pTab); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VUpdate, 0, nArg, regArg, pVTab, P4_VTAB); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/util.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | #include <stdarg.h> #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT #include <math.h> #endif /* ** Calls to sqlite3FaultSim() are used to simulate a failure during testing, | | | | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | #include <stdarg.h> #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT #include <math.h> #endif /* ** Calls to sqlite3FaultSim() are used to simulate a failure during testing, ** or to bypass normal error detection during testing in order to let ** execute proceed further downstream. ** ** In deployment, sqlite3FaultSim() *always* return SQLITE_OK (0). The ** sqlite3FaultSim() function only returns non-zero during testing. ** ** During testing, if the test harness has set a fault-sim callback using ** a call to sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL), then ** each call to sqlite3FaultSim() is relayed to that application-supplied |
︙ | ︙ | |||
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | */ int sqlite3Strlen30(const char *z){ if( z==0 ) return 0; return 0x3fffffff & (int)strlen(z); } /* | | | 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | */ int sqlite3Strlen30(const char *z){ if( z==0 ) return 0; return 0x3fffffff & (int)strlen(z); } /* ** Return the declared type of a column. Or return zDflt if the column ** has no declared type. ** ** The column type is an extra string stored after the zero-terminator on ** the column name if and only if the COLFLAG_HASTYPE flag is set. */ char *sqlite3ColumnType(Column *pCol, char *zDflt){ if( pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_HASTYPE ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
417 418 419 420 421 422 423 | LONGDOUBLE_TYPE r = 1.0; while(1){ if( E & 1 ) r *= x; E >>= 1; if( E==0 ) break; x *= x; } | | | | 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 | LONGDOUBLE_TYPE r = 1.0; while(1){ if( E & 1 ) r *= x; E >>= 1; if( E==0 ) break; x *= x; } return r; #endif } /* ** The string z[] is an text representation of a real number. ** Convert this string to a double and write it into *pResult. ** ** The string z[] is length bytes in length (bytes, not characters) and ** uses the encoding enc. The string is not necessarily zero-terminated. ** ** Return TRUE if the result is a valid real number (or integer) and FALSE ** if the string is empty or contains extraneous text. More specifically ** return ** 1 => The input string is a pure integer ** 2 or more => The input has a decimal point or eNNN clause ** 0 or less => The input string is not a valid number ** -1 => Not a valid number, but has a valid prefix which ** includes a decimal point and/or an eNNN clause ** ** Valid numbers are in one of these formats: ** ** [+-]digits[E[+-]digits] ** [+-]digits.[digits][E[+-]digits] ** [+-].digits[E[+-]digits] |
︙ | ︙ | |||
535 536 537 538 539 540 541 | /* if exponent is present */ if( *z=='e' || *z=='E' ){ z+=incr; eValid = 0; eType++; | | | 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 | /* if exponent is present */ if( *z=='e' || *z=='E' ){ z+=incr; eValid = 0; eType++; /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread. The ** special comment alerts the mutation tester that the correct answer ** is obtained even if the branch is omitted */ if( z>=zEnd ) goto do_atof_calc; /*PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD*/ /* get sign of exponent */ if( *z=='-' ){ esign = -1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
631 632 633 634 635 636 637 | } } } /* store the result */ *pResult = result; | | | 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 | } } } /* store the result */ *pResult = result; /* return true if number and no extra non-whitespace characters after */ if( z==zEnd && nDigit>0 && eValid && eType>0 ){ return eType; }else if( eType>=2 && (eType==3 || eValid) && nDigit>0 ){ return -1; }else{ return 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
767 768 769 770 771 772 773 | testcase( i==18*incr ); testcase( i==19*incr ); testcase( i==20*incr ); if( u>LARGEST_INT64 ){ /* This test and assignment is needed only to suppress UB warnings ** from clang and -fsanitize=undefined. This test and assignment make ** the code a little larger and slower, and no harm comes from omitting | | | 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 | testcase( i==18*incr ); testcase( i==19*incr ); testcase( i==20*incr ); if( u>LARGEST_INT64 ){ /* This test and assignment is needed only to suppress UB warnings ** from clang and -fsanitize=undefined. This test and assignment make ** the code a little larger and slower, and no harm comes from omitting ** them, but we must appease the undefined-behavior pharisees. */ *pNum = neg ? SMALLEST_INT64 : LARGEST_INT64; }else if( neg ){ *pNum = -(i64)u; }else{ *pNum = (i64)u; } rc = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
982 983 984 985 986 987 988 | p[8] = (u8)v; v >>= 8; for(i=7; i>=0; i--){ p[i] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80); v >>= 7; } return 9; | | | 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 | p[8] = (u8)v; v >>= 8; for(i=7; i>=0; i--){ p[i] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80); v >>= 7; } return 9; } n = 0; do{ buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80); v >>= 7; }while( v!=0 ); buf[0] &= 0x7f; assert( n<=9 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 | /* ** Read a 32-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0]. ** Return the number of bytes read. The value is stored in *v. ** ** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned ** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff. ** | | | | 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 | /* ** Read a 32-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0]. ** Return the number of bytes read. The value is stored in *v. ** ** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned ** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff. ** ** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the ** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as ** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled. */ u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){ u32 a,b; /* The 1-byte case. Overwhelmingly the most common. Handled inline ** by the getVarin32() macro */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 | /* ** Log an error that is an API call on a connection pointer that should ** not have been used. The "type" of connection pointer is given as the ** argument. The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid". */ static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){ | | | 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 | /* ** Log an error that is an API call on a connection pointer that should ** not have been used. The "type" of connection pointer is given as the ** argument. The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid". */ static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, "API call with %s database connection pointer", zType ); } /* ** Check to make sure we have a valid db pointer. This test is not |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 | return 0; }else{ return 1; } } /* | | | 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 | return 0; }else{ return 1; } } /* ** Attempt to add, subtract, or multiply the 64-bit signed value iB against ** the other 64-bit signed integer at *pA and store the result in *pA. ** Return 0 on success. Or if the operation would have resulted in an ** overflow, leave *pA unchanged and return 1. */ int sqlite3AddInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){ #if GCC_VERSION>=5004000 && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) return __builtin_add_overflow(*pA, iB, pA); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 | if( iA>0 && LARGEST_INT64 - iA < iB ) return 1; }else{ testcase( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) == iB + 1 ); testcase( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) == iB + 2 ); if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1; } *pA += iB; | | | 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 | if( iA>0 && LARGEST_INT64 - iA < iB ) return 1; }else{ testcase( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) == iB + 1 ); testcase( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) == iB + 2 ); if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1; } *pA += iB; return 0; #endif } int sqlite3SubInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){ #if GCC_VERSION>=5004000 && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) return __builtin_sub_overflow(*pA, iB, pA); #else testcase( iB==SMALLEST_INT64+1 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 | } *pA = iA*iB; return 0; #endif } /* | | | 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 | } *pA = iA*iB; return 0; #endif } /* ** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or ** if the integer has a value of -2147483648, return +2147483647 */ int sqlite3AbsInt32(int x){ if( x>=0 ) return x; if( x==(int)0x80000000 ) return 0x7fffffff; return -x; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 | sz = sqlite3Strlen30(z); for(i=sz-1; i>0 && z[i]!='/' && z[i]!='.'; i--){} if( z[i]=='.' && ALWAYS(sz>i+4) ) memmove(&z[i+1], &z[sz-3], 4); } } #endif | | | | 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 | sz = sqlite3Strlen30(z); for(i=sz-1; i>0 && z[i]!='/' && z[i]!='.'; i--){} if( z[i]=='.' && ALWAYS(sz>i+4) ) memmove(&z[i+1], &z[sz-3], 4); } } #endif /* ** Find (an approximate) sum of two LogEst values. This computation is ** not a simple "+" operator because LogEst is stored as a logarithmic ** value. ** */ LogEst sqlite3LogEstAdd(LogEst a, LogEst b){ static const unsigned char x[] = { 10, 10, /* 0,1 */ 9, 9, /* 2,3 */ 8, 8, /* 4,5 */ 7, 7, 7, /* 6,7,8 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 | ** value for the pair and the size of the name/number pair, respectively. ** The text name overlays one or more following integers. The text name ** is always zero-terminated. ** ** Conceptually: ** ** struct VList { | | | | | 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 | ** value for the pair and the size of the name/number pair, respectively. ** The text name overlays one or more following integers. The text name ** is always zero-terminated. ** ** Conceptually: ** ** struct VList { ** int nAlloc; // Number of allocated slots ** int nUsed; // Number of used slots ** struct VListEntry { ** int iValue; // Value for this entry ** int nSlot; // Slots used by this entry ** // ... variable name goes here ** } a[0]; ** } ** ** During code generation, pointers to the variable names within the ** VList are taken. When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an ** indication that the VList may never again be enlarged, since the ** accompanying realloc() would invalidate the pointers. */ VList *sqlite3VListAdd( sqlite3 *db, /* The database connection used for malloc() */ VList *pIn, /* The input VList. Might be NULL */ const char *zName, /* Name of symbol to add */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 | } /* ** High-resolution hardware timer used for debugging and testing only. */ #if defined(VDBE_PROFILE) \ || defined(SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE) \ | | | 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 | } /* ** High-resolution hardware timer used for debugging and testing only. */ #if defined(VDBE_PROFILE) \ || defined(SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE) \ || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS) # include "hwtime.h" #endif |
Changes to src/vacuum.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
204 205 206 207 208 209 210 | /* Attach the temporary database as 'vacuum_db'. The synchronous pragma ** can be set to 'off' for this file, as it is not recovered if a crash ** occurs anyway. The integrity of the database is maintained by a ** (possibly synchronous) transaction opened on the main database before ** sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() is called. ** | | | 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | /* Attach the temporary database as 'vacuum_db'. The synchronous pragma ** can be set to 'off' for this file, as it is not recovered if a crash ** occurs anyway. The integrity of the database is maintained by a ** (possibly synchronous) transaction opened on the main database before ** sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() is called. ** ** An optimization would be to use a non-journaled pager. ** (Later:) I tried setting "PRAGMA vacuum_db.journal_mode=OFF" but ** that actually made the VACUUM run slower. Very little journalling ** actually occurs when doing a vacuum since the vacuum_db is initially ** empty. Only the journal header is written. Apparently it takes more ** time to parse and run the PRAGMA to turn journalling off than it does ** to write the journal header file. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vdbe.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
150 151 152 153 154 155 156 | ** ** M: 2 - two-way branch (I=0: fall-thru 1: jump ) ** 3 - two-way + NULL (I=0: fall-thru 1: jump 2: NULL ) ** 4 - OP_Jump (I=0: jump p1 1: jump p2 2: jump p3) ** ** In other words, if M is 2, then I is either 0 (for fall-through) or ** 1 (for when the branch is taken). If M is 3, the I is 0 for an | | | 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 | ** ** M: 2 - two-way branch (I=0: fall-thru 1: jump ) ** 3 - two-way + NULL (I=0: fall-thru 1: jump 2: NULL ) ** 4 - OP_Jump (I=0: jump p1 1: jump p2 2: jump p3) ** ** In other words, if M is 2, then I is either 0 (for fall-through) or ** 1 (for when the branch is taken). If M is 3, the I is 0 for an ** ordinary fall-through, I is 1 if the branch was taken, and I is 2 ** if the result of comparison is NULL. For M=3, I=2 the jump may or ** may not be taken, depending on the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL flags in p5. ** When M is 4, that means that an OP_Jump is being run. I is 0, 1, or 2 ** depending on if the operands are less than, equal, or greater than. ** ** iSrcLine is the source code line (from the __LINE__ macro) that ** generated the VDBE instruction combined with flag bits. The source |
︙ | ︙ | |||
243 244 245 246 247 248 249 | static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( Vdbe *p, /* The virtual machine */ int iCur, /* Index of the new VdbeCursor */ int nField, /* Number of fields in the table or index */ u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */ ){ /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory | | | | | 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 | static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( Vdbe *p, /* The virtual machine */ int iCur, /* Index of the new VdbeCursor */ int nField, /* Number of fields in the table or index */ u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */ ){ /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons: ** ** * Sometimes cursor numbers are used for a couple of different ** purposes in a vdbe program. The different uses might require ** different sized allocations. Memory cells provide growable ** allocations. ** ** * When using ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT, memory cell buffers can ** be freed lazily via the sqlite3_release_memory() API. This ** minimizes the number of malloc calls made by the system. ** ** The memory cell for cursor 0 is aMem[0]. The rest are allocated from ** the top of the register space. Cursor 1 is at Mem[p->nMem-1]. ** Cursor 2 is at Mem[p->nMem-2]. And so forth. */ Mem *pMem = iCur>0 ? &p->aMem[p->nMem-iCur] : p->aMem; int nByte; VdbeCursor *pCx = 0; nByte = ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0); assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor ); if( p->apCsr[iCur] ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ sqlite3VdbeFreeCursorNN(p, p->apCsr[iCur]); p->apCsr[iCur] = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
364 365 366 367 368 369 370 | /* ** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter: ** ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER: ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL: ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC: | | | 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 | /* ** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter: ** ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER: ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL: ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC: ** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a ** floating-point representation if an integer representation ** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is ** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because ** an integer representation is more space efficient on disk. ** ** SQLITE_AFF_FLEXNUM: ** If the value is text, then try to convert it into a number of |
︙ | ︙ | |||
399 400 401 402 403 404 405 | }else if( affinity<=SQLITE_AFF_REAL ){ sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); } } }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string | | | 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | }else if( affinity<=SQLITE_AFF_REAL ){ sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); } } }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if ** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those ** CPU cycles. */ if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ if( (pRec->flags&(MEM_Real|MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal)) ){ testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_Int ); testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_Real ); testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_IntReal ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
431 432 433 434 435 436 437 | applyNumericAffinity(pMem, 0); eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); } return eType; } /* | | | | | 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | applyNumericAffinity(pMem, 0); eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); } return eType; } /* ** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, ** not the internal Mem* type. */ void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity( sqlite3_value *pVal, u8 affinity, u8 enc ){ applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc); } /* ** pMem currently only holds a string type (or maybe a BLOB that we can |
︙ | ︙ | |||
474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | return MEM_Int; } return MEM_Real; } /* ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or | | | 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 | return MEM_Int; } return MEM_Real; } /* ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or ** none. ** ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags. ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately. */ static u16 numericType(Mem *pMem){ assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Null)==0 || pMem->db==0 || pMem->db->mallocFailed ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
624 625 626 627 628 629 630 | # define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) #endif #ifndef NDEBUG /* ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to | | | | 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 | # define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) #endif #ifndef NDEBUG /* ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to ** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint. ** ** Usage: ** ** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); */ static int checkSavepointCount(sqlite3 *db){ int n = 0; Savepoint *p; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
704 705 706 707 708 709 710 | /* SQLITE_NULL */ "NULL" }; return azTypes[sqlite3_value_type(pMem)-1]; } /* ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can. | | | 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 | /* SQLITE_NULL */ "NULL" }; return azTypes[sqlite3_value_type(pMem)-1]; } /* ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can. ** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). */ int sqlite3VdbeExec( Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */ ){ Op *aOp = p->aOp; /* Copy of p->aOp */ Op *pOp = aOp; /* Current operation */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG |
︙ | ︙ | |||
818 819 820 821 822 823 824 | */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp); test_trace_breakpoint((int)(pOp - aOp),pOp,p); } #endif | | | 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 | */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp); test_trace_breakpoint((int)(pOp - aOp),pOp,p); } #endif /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens ** if we have a special test build. */ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST if( sqlite3_interrupt_count>0 ){ sqlite3_interrupt_count--; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
872 873 874 875 876 877 878 | memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); } } #endif #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG pOrigOp = pOp; #endif | | | 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 | memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); } } #endif #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG pOrigOp = pOp; #endif switch( pOp->opcode ){ /***************************************************************************** ** What follows is a massive switch statement where each case implements a ** separate instruction in the virtual machine. If we follow the usual ** indentation conventions, each case should be indented by 6 spaces. But ** that is a lot of wasted space on the left margin. So the code within |
︙ | ︙ | |||
913 914 915 916 917 918 919 | ** Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use. ** *****************************************************************************/ /* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * * ** ** An unconditional jump to address P2. | | | | | | 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 | ** Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use. ** *****************************************************************************/ /* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * * ** ** An unconditional jump to address P2. ** The next instruction executed will be ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of ** the program. ** ** The P1 parameter is not actually used by this opcode. However, it ** is sometimes set to 1 instead of 0 as a hint to the command-line shell ** that this Goto is the bottom of a loop and that the lines from P2 down ** to the current line should be indented for EXPLAIN output. */ case OP_Goto: { /* jump */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* In debugging mode, when the p5 flags is set on an OP_Goto, that ** means we should really jump back to the preceding OP_ReleaseReg ** instruction. */ if( pOp->p5 ){ assert( pOp->p2 < (int)(pOp - aOp) ); assert( pOp->p2 > 1 ); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 2]; assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_ReleaseReg ); goto check_for_interrupt; } #endif jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt: pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev, ** OP_VNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon ** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. ** ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean. ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this ** way for performance, to avoid having to run the interrupt and progress ** checks on every opcode. This helps sqlite3_step() to run about 1.5% ** faster according to "valgrind --tool=cachegrind" */ check_for_interrupt: |
︙ | ︙ | |||
969 970 971 972 973 974 975 | if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){ nProgressLimit = LARGEST_UINT64; rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; goto abort_due_to_error; } } #endif | | | 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 | if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){ nProgressLimit = LARGEST_UINT64; rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; goto abort_due_to_error; } } #endif break; } /* Opcode: Gosub P1 P2 * * * ** ** Write the current address onto register P1 ** and then jump to address P2. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | ** ** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(), ** or sqlite3_finalize(). For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0). ** For errors, it can be some other value. If P1!=0 then P2 will determine ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort, ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the | | | | 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 | ** ** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(), ** or sqlite3_finalize(). For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0). ** For errors, it can be some other value. If P1!=0 then P2 will determine ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort, ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the ** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. ** ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string. ** ** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string. ** ** 0: (no change) ** 1: NOT NULL constraint failed: P4 ** 2: UNIQUE constraint failed: P4 ** 3: CHECK constraint failed: P4 ** 4: FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4 ** ** If P5 is not zero and P4 is NULL, then everything after the ":" is ** omitted. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 | /* Halt the sub-program. Return control to the parent frame. */ pFrame = p->pFrame; p->pFrame = pFrame->pParent; p->nFrame--; sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame); if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){ | | | 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 | /* Halt the sub-program. Return control to the parent frame. */ pFrame = p->pFrame; p->pFrame = pFrame->pParent; p->nFrame--; sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame); if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){ /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified ** as the p2 of the calling OP_Program. */ pcx = p->aOp[pcx].p2-1; } aOp = p->aOp; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 | break; } #endif /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' ** | | | 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 | break; } #endif /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' ** ** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed ** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time. During ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored ** as the P1 parameter. */ case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */ assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 | goto too_big; } pOp->opcode = OP_String; assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */ /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through } | | | 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 | goto too_big; } pOp->opcode = OP_String; assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */ /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through } /* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1) ** ** The string value P4 of length P1 (bytes) is stored in register P2. ** ** If P3 is not zero and the content of register P3 is equal to P5, then ** the datatype of the register P2 is converted to BLOB. The content is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 | ** ** Halt with an SQLITE_CONSTRAINT error if there are any unresolved ** foreign key constraint violations. If there are no foreign key ** constraint violations, this is a no-op. ** ** FK constraint violations are also checked when the prepared statement ** exits. This opcode is used to raise foreign key constraint errors prior | | | 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 | ** ** Halt with an SQLITE_CONSTRAINT error if there are any unresolved ** foreign key constraint violations. If there are no foreign key ** constraint violations, this is a no-op. ** ** FK constraint violations are also checked when the prepared statement ** exits. This opcode is used to raise foreign key constraint errors prior ** to returning results such as a row change count or the result of a ** RETURNING clause. */ case OP_FkCheck: { if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p,0))!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto abort_due_to_error; } break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 | ** and store the result in register P3. ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. */ /* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1] ** ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 | | | | | | 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 | ** and store the result in register P3. ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. */ /* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1] ** ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 ** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in ** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is ** NULL, the result is NULL. */ /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1] ** ** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by ** register P1 and store the result in register P3. ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL. ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL. */ case OP_Add: /* same as TK_PLUS, in1, in2, out3 */ case OP_Subtract: /* same as TK_MINUS, in1, in2, out3 */ case OP_Multiply: /* same as TK_STAR, in1, in2, out3 */ case OP_Divide: /* same as TK_SLASH, in1, in2, out3 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 | pOut->u.i = iA; MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); break; } /* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2 | | | | 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 | pOut->u.i = iA; MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); break; } /* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2 ** ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1. ** The result is always an integer. ** ** To force any register to be an integer, just add 0. */ case OP_AddImm: { /* in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); pIn1->u.i += pOp->p2; break; } /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * * ** ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0 ** raise an SQLITE_MISMATCH exception. */ case OP_MustBeInt: { /* jump, in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 | #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST /* Opcode: Cast P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1]) ** ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2. | | | 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 | #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST /* Opcode: Cast P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1]) ** ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2. ** ** <ul> ** <li> P2=='A' → BLOB ** <li> P2=='B' → TEXT ** <li> P2=='C' → NUMERIC ** <li> P2=='D' → INTEGER ** <li> P2=='E' → REAL ** </ul> |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 | } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */ /* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]==r[P1] ** ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)==reg(P1) then | | | | | 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 | } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */ /* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]==r[P1] ** ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)==reg(P1) then ** jump to address P2. ** ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored ** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. ** ** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is ** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in ** P4 is used to do the comparison. If P4 is not specified then ** memcmp() is used to compare text string. If both values are ** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values ** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 | /* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]<r[P1] ** ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then ** jump to address P2. ** ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or | | | | | 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 | /* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: IF r[P3]<r[P1] ** ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then ** jump to address P2. ** ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or ** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL. ** ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored ** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. ** ** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is ** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in ** P4 is used to do the comparison. If P4 is not specified then ** memcmp() is used to compare text string. If both values are ** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values ** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 | } /* Opcode: ElseEq * P2 * * * ** ** This opcode must follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator. There ** can be zero or more OP_ReleaseReg opcodes intervening, but no other ** opcodes are allowed to occur between this instruction and the previous | | | 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 | } /* Opcode: ElseEq * P2 * * * ** ** This opcode must follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator. There ** can be zero or more OP_ReleaseReg opcodes intervening, but no other ** opcodes are allowed to occur between this instruction and the previous ** OP_Lt or OP_Gt. ** ** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands as the ** prior OP_Lt or OP_Gt would have been true, then jump to P2. ** If the result of an OP_Eq comparison on the two previous ** operands would have been false or NULL, then fall through. */ case OP_ElseEq: { /* same as TK_ESCAPE, jump */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 | REGISTER_TRACE(p2+idx, &aMem[p2+idx]); assert( i<pKeyInfo->nKeyField ); pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[i]; bRev = (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC); iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl); VVA_ONLY( iCompareIsInit = 1; ) if( iCompare ){ | | | 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 | REGISTER_TRACE(p2+idx, &aMem[p2+idx]); assert( i<pKeyInfo->nKeyField ); pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[i]; bRev = (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC); iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl); VVA_ONLY( iCompareIsInit = 1; ) if( iCompare ){ if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL) && ((aMem[p1+idx].flags & MEM_Null) || (aMem[p2+idx].flags & MEM_Null)) ){ iCompare = -iCompare; } if( bRev ) iCompare = -iCompare; break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 | /* Opcode: IsTrue P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P2] = coalesce(r[P1]==TRUE,P3) ^ P4 ** ** This opcode implements the IS TRUE, IS FALSE, IS NOT TRUE, and ** IS NOT FALSE operators. ** ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store that | | | | | 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 | /* Opcode: IsTrue P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P2] = coalesce(r[P1]==TRUE,P3) ^ P4 ** ** This opcode implements the IS TRUE, IS FALSE, IS NOT TRUE, and ** IS NOT FALSE operators. ** ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store that ** boolean (a 0 or 1) in register P2. Or if the value in register P1 is ** NULL, then the P3 is stored in register P2. Invert the answer if P4 ** is 1. ** ** The logic is summarized like this: ** ** <ul> ** <li> If P3==0 and P4==0 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS TRUE ** <li> If P3==1 and P4==1 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS FALSE ** <li> If P3==0 and P4==1 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS NOT TRUE ** <li> If P3==1 and P4==0 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS NOT FALSE ** </ul> */ case OP_IsTrue: { /* in1, out2 */ assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); assert( pOp->p4.i==0 || pOp->p4.i==1 ); assert( pOp->p3==0 || pOp->p3==1 ); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p2], sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(&aMem[pOp->p1], pOp->p3) ^ pOp->p4.i); break; } /* Opcode: Not P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1] ** ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the ** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2. */ case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, !sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(pIn1,0)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 | } break; } /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2 ** | | | 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 | } break; } /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2 ** ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. */ case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0, 2); if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ goto jump_to_p2; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 | /* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=PX cursor P1 column P2 ** ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using ** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional ** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column | | | 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 | /* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=PX cursor P1 column P2 ** ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using ** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional ** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column ** from this record. If there are less than (P2+1) ** values in the record, extract a NULL. ** ** The value extracted is stored in register P3. ** ** If the record contains fewer than P2 fields, then extract a NULL. Or, ** if the P4 argument is a P4_MEM use the value of the P4 argument as ** the result. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 | } /* Make sure at least the first p2+1 entries of the header have been ** parsed and valid information is in aOffset[] and pC->aType[]. */ if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try | | | | 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 | } /* Make sure at least the first p2+1 entries of the header have been ** parsed and valid information is in aOffset[] and pC->aType[]. */ if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field */ if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){ /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */ if( pC->aRow==0 ){ memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtreeZeroOffset(pC->uc.pCursor,aOffset[0],&sMem); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; zData = (u8*)sMem.z; }else{ zData = pC->aRow; } /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */ op_column_read_header: i = pC->nHdrParsed; offset64 = aOffset[i]; zHdr = zData + pC->iHdrOffset; zEndHdr = zData + aOffset[0]; testcase( zHdr>=zEndHdr ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 | || (len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t))==0 ){ /* Content is irrelevant for ** 1. the typeof() function, ** 2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and ** 3. if the content length is zero. ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading | | | 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 | || (len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t))==0 ){ /* Content is irrelevant for ** 1. the typeof() function, ** 2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and ** 3. if the content length is zero. ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading ** content from disk. ** ** Although sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() may read at most 8 bytes from the ** buffer passed to it, debugging function VdbeMemPrettyPrint() may ** read more. Use the global constant sqlite3CtypeMap[] as the array, ** as that array is 256 bytes long (plenty for VdbeMemPrettyPrint()) ** and it begins with a bunch of zeros. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 | u8 *zHdr; /* Where to write next byte of the header */ u8 *zPayload; /* Where to write next byte of the payload */ /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks ** like this: ** ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | | | 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 | u8 *zHdr; /* Where to write next byte of the header */ u8 *zPayload; /* Where to write next byte of the payload */ /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks ** like this: ** ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ ** ** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1 ** and so forth. ** ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning ** of the record to data0. */ nData = 0; /* Number of bytes of data space */ nHdr = 0; /* Number of bytes of header space */ nZero = 0; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 | /* Rare case of a really large header */ nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr); nHdr += nVarint; if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ) nHdr++; } nByte = nHdr+nData; | | | 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 | /* Rare case of a really large header */ nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr); nHdr += nVarint; if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ) nHdr++; } nByte = nHdr+nData; /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used). */ if( nByte+nZero<=pOut->szMalloc ){ /* The output register is already large enough to hold the record. ** No error checks or buffer enlargement is required */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 | REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); break; } /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count() ** | | | | 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 | REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); break; } /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count() ** ** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2. ** ** If P3==0, then an exact count is obtained, which involves visiting ** every btree page of the table. But if P3 is non-zero, an estimate ** is returned based on the current cursor position. */ case OP_Count: { /* out2 */ i64 nEntry; BtCursor *pCrsr; assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); pCrsr = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->uc.pCursor; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 | int iSavepoint; int ii; p1 = pOp->p1; zName = pOp->p4.z; /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open | | | | 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 | int iSavepoint; int ii; p1 = pOp->p1; zName = pOp->p4.z; /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. */ assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 ); assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); assert( db->pSavepoint || db->isTransactionSavepoint==0 ); assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); assert( p->bIsReader ); if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){ if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles). */ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress"); rc = SQLITE_BUSY; }else{ nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 | #endif /* Create a new savepoint structure. */ pNew = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(Savepoint)+nName+1); if( pNew ){ pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1]; memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1); | | | 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 | #endif /* Create a new savepoint structure. */ pNew = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(Savepoint)+nName+1); if( pNew ){ pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1]; memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1); /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special ** "transaction savepoint". */ if( db->autoCommit ){ db->autoCommit = 0; db->isTransactionSavepoint = 1; }else{ db->nSavepoint++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 | }else{ assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); iSavepoint = 0; /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an ** an error is returned to the user. */ for( | | | | | | 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 | }else{ assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); iSavepoint = 0; /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an ** an error is returned to the user. */ for( pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName); pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext ){ iSavepoint++; } if( !pSavepoint ){ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are ** active write statements. */ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - " "SQL statements in progress"); rc = SQLITE_BUSY; }else{ /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so, ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction ** is committed. */ int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint; if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto vdbe_return; } db->autoCommit = 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 | if( isSchemaChange ){ sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, 0); sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange; } } if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; | | | | | | 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 | if( isSchemaChange ){ sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, 0); sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange; } } if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */ while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){ pTmp = db->pSavepoint; db->pSavepoint = pTmp->pNext; sqlite3DbFree(db, pTmp); db->nSavepoint--; } /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored ** when the savepoint was created. */ if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ assert( pSavepoint==db->pSavepoint ); db->pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext; sqlite3DbFree(db, pSavepoint); if( !isTransaction ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 | if( desiredAutoCommit!=db->autoCommit ){ if( iRollback ){ assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 ); sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); db->autoCommit = 1; }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing | | | 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 | if( desiredAutoCommit!=db->autoCommit ){ if( iRollback ){ assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 ); sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); db->autoCommit = 1; }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. */ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - " "SQL statements in progress"); rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto abort_due_to_error; }else if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto vdbe_return; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 | } goto vdbe_return; }else{ sqlite3VdbeError(p, (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":( (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active": "cannot commit - no transaction is active")); | | | | 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 | } goto vdbe_return; }else{ sqlite3VdbeError(p, (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":( (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active": "cannot commit - no transaction is active")); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; goto abort_due_to_error; } /*NOTREACHED*/ assert(0); } /* Opcode: Transaction P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already ** active. ** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction. ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started. If P2 is 2 or more ** then an exclusive transaction is started. ** ** P1 is the index of the database file on which the transaction is ** started. Index 0 is the main database file and index 1 is the ** file used for temporary tables. Indices of 2 or more are used for |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 | goto vdbe_return; } goto abort_due_to_error; } if( p->usesStmtJournal && pOp->p2 | | | | 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 | goto vdbe_return; } goto abort_due_to_error; } if( p->usesStmtJournal && pOp->p2 && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) ){ assert( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ); if( p->iStatement==0 ){ assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 ); db->nStatement++; p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement; } rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, p->iStatement-1); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(pBt, p->iStatement); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 | /* ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-03189-51135 As each SQL statement runs, the schema ** version is checked to ensure that the schema has not changed since the ** SQL statement was prepared. */ sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed"); | | | | 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 | /* ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-03189-51135 As each SQL statement runs, the schema ** version is checked to ensure that the schema has not changed since the ** SQL statement was prepared. */ sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed"); /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do ** not reload the schema from the database file. ** ** If virtual-tables are in use, this is not just an optimization. ** Often, v-tables store their data in other SQLite tables, which ** are queried from within xNext() and other v-table methods using ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within ** a v-table method. */ if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){ sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, pOp->p1); } p->expired = 1; rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 | break; } /* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * P5 ** ** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1. ** P2==1 is the schema version. P2==2 is the database format. | | | | 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 | break; } /* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * P5 ** ** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1. ** P2==1 is the schema version. P2==2 is the database format. ** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache ** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the ** database file used to store temporary tables. ** ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode. ** ** If P2 is the SCHEMA_VERSION cookie (cookie number 1) then the internal ** schema version is set to P3-P5. The "PRAGMA schema_version=N" statement ** has P5 set to 1, so that the internal schema version will be different |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 | break; } /* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 ** ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is | | | | | | | 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 | break; } /* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 ** ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is ** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3. ** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached ** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers. ** It is an error for P1 to be negative. ** ** Allowed P5 bits: ** <ul> ** <li> <b>0x02 OPFLAG_SEEKEQ</b>: This cursor will only be used for ** equality lookups (implemented as a pair of opcodes OP_SeekGE/OP_IdxGT ** of OP_SeekLE/OP_IdxLT) ** </ul> ** ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo ** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the ** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating ** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer ** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a ** number of columns no less than the value of P4. ** ** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx */ /* Opcode: ReopenIdx P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 | ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 ** ** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root ** page is P2 (or whose root page is held in register P2 if the ** OPFLAG_P2ISREG bit is set in P5 - see below). ** ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to | | | | | 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 | ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 ** ** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root ** page is P2 (or whose root page is held in register P2 if the ** OPFLAG_P2ISREG bit is set in P5 - see below). ** ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo ** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the ** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating ** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer ** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a ** number of columns no less than the value of P4. ** ** Allowed P5 bits: ** <ul> ** <li> <b>0x02 OPFLAG_SEEKEQ</b>: This cursor will only be used for ** equality lookups (implemented as a pair of opcodes OP_SeekGE/OP_IdxGT |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 | pCur->wrFlag = wrFlag; #endif rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag, pKeyInfo, pCur->uc.pCursor); pCur->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has | | | 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 | pCur->wrFlag = wrFlag; #endif rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag, pKeyInfo, pCur->uc.pCursor); pCur->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has ** since moved into the btree layer. */ pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO; open_cursor_set_hints: assert( OPFLAG_BULKCSR==BTREE_BULKLOAD ); assert( OPFLAG_SEEKEQ==BTREE_SEEK_EQ ); testcase( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_BULKCSR ); testcase( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 | pCx->pKeyInfo = pOrig->pKeyInfo; pCx->isTable = pOrig->isTable; pCx->pgnoRoot = pOrig->pgnoRoot; pCx->isOrdered = pOrig->isOrdered; pCx->ub.pBtx = pOrig->ub.pBtx; pCx->noReuse = 1; pOrig->noReuse = 1; | | | | 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 | pCx->pKeyInfo = pOrig->pKeyInfo; pCx->isTable = pOrig->isTable; pCx->pgnoRoot = pOrig->pgnoRoot; pCx->isOrdered = pOrig->isOrdered; pCx->ub.pBtx = pOrig->ub.pBtx; pCx->noReuse = 1; pOrig->noReuse = 1; rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR, pCx->pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor); /* The sqlite3BtreeCursor() routine can only fail for the first cursor ** opened for a database. Since there is already an open cursor when this ** opcode is run, the sqlite3BtreeCursor() cannot fail */ assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); break; } /* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 ** ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table. ** The cursor is always opened read/write even if ** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed. ** ** If the cursor P1 is already opened on an ephemeral table, the table ** is cleared (all content is erased). ** ** P2 is the number of columns in the ephemeral table. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 | ** indices in joins. */ case OP_OpenAutoindex: /* ncycle */ case OP_OpenEphemeral: { /* ncycle */ VdbeCursor *pCx; KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; | | | | | | 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 | ** indices in joins. */ case OP_OpenAutoindex: /* ncycle */ case OP_OpenEphemeral: { /* ncycle */ VdbeCursor *pCx; KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; static const int vfsFlags = SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB; assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); if( pOp->p3>0 ){ /* Make register reg[P3] into a value that can be used as the data ** form sqlite3BtreeInsert() where the length of the data is zero. */ assert( pOp->p2==0 ); /* Only used when number of columns is zero */ assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenEphemeral ); assert( aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Null ); aMem[pOp->p3].n = 0; aMem[pOp->p3].z = ""; } pCx = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; if( pCx && !pCx->noReuse && ALWAYS(pOp->p2<=pCx->nField) ){ /* If the ephemeral table is already open and has no duplicates from ** OP_OpenDup, then erase all existing content so that the table is ** empty again, rather than creating a new table. */ assert( pCx->isEphemeral ); pCx->seqCount = 0; pCx->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, 0); }else{ pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, CURTYPE_BTREE); if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; pCx->isEphemeral = 1; rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->ub.pBtx, BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->ub.pBtx, 1, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* If a transient index is required, create it by calling ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() with the BTREE_BLOBKEY flag before ** opening it. If a transient table is required, just use the ** automatically created table with root-page 1 (an BLOB_INTKEY table). */ if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){ assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->ub.pBtx, &pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ assert( pCx->pgnoRoot==SCHEMA_ROOT+1 ); assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR, pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 | } /* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: P3 columns in r[P2] ** ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single ** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory | | | 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 | } /* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: P3 columns in r[P2] ** ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single ** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory ** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2. ** ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single ** row output from the sorter so that the row can be decomposed into ** individual columns using the OP_Column opcode. The OP_Column opcode ** is the only cursor opcode that works with a pseudo-table. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 | break; } #endif /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 4621 | break; } #endif /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), ** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers ** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that ** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this ** opcode will either land on a record that exactly matches the key, or ** else it will cause a jump to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, ** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments. ** The IdxGT opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the ** IdxGT opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The ** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this ** is an equality search. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is ** configured to use Next, not Prev. ** ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGt, SeekLe */ /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers ** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that ** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is ** configured to use Next, not Prev. ** ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe */ /* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers ** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that ** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is ** configured to use Prev, not Next. ** ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLe */ /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers ** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that ** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is ** configured to use Prev, not Next. ** ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this ** opcode will either land on a record that exactly matches the key, or ** else it will cause a jump to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, ** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments. ** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the ** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The ** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this ** is an equality search. ** ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLt */ case OP_SeekLT: /* jump, in3, group, ncycle */ case OP_SeekLE: /* jump, in3, group, ncycle */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 | ** on the cursor between 1 and This.P1 times. ** ** The This.P5 parameter is a flag that indicates what to do if the ** cursor ends up pointing at a valid row that is past the target ** row. If This.P5 is false (0) then a jump is made to SeekGE.P2. If ** This.P5 is true (non-zero) then a jump is made to This.P2. The P5==0 ** case occurs when there are no inequality constraints to the right of | | | | | 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 | ** on the cursor between 1 and This.P1 times. ** ** The This.P5 parameter is a flag that indicates what to do if the ** cursor ends up pointing at a valid row that is past the target ** row. If This.P5 is false (0) then a jump is made to SeekGE.P2. If ** This.P5 is true (non-zero) then a jump is made to This.P2. The P5==0 ** case occurs when there are no inequality constraints to the right of ** the IN constraint. The jump to SeekGE.P2 ends the loop. The P5!=0 case ** occurs when there are inequality constraints to the right of the IN ** operator. In that case, the This.P2 will point either directly to or ** to setup code prior to the OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxGE opcode that checks for ** loop terminate. ** ** Possible outcomes from this opcode:<ol> ** ** <li> If the cursor is initially not pointed to any valid row, then ** fall through into the subsequent OP_SeekGE opcode. ** ** <li> If the cursor is left pointing to a row that is before the target ** row, even after making as many as This.P1 calls to ** sqlite3BtreeNext(), then also fall through into OP_SeekGE. ** ** <li> If the cursor is left pointing at the target row, either because it ** was at the target row to begin with or because one or more ** sqlite3BtreeNext() calls moved the cursor to the target row, ** then jump to This.P2.., ** ** <li> If the cursor started out before the target row and a call to ** to sqlite3BtreeNext() moved the cursor off the end of the index ** (indicating that the target row definitely does not exist in the ** btree) then jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop. ** ** <li> If the cursor ends up on a valid row that is past the target row ** (indicating that the target row does not exist in the btree) then ** jump to SeekOP.P2 if This.P5==0 or to This.P2 if This.P5>0. ** </ol> */ case OP_SeekScan: { /* ncycle */ VdbeCursor *pC; int res; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 | assert( pOp->p2>=(int)(pOp-aOp)+2 ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( pOp->p5==0 ){ /* There are no inequality constraints following the IN constraint. */ assert( pOp[1].p1==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p1 ); assert( pOp[1].p2==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p2 ); assert( pOp[1].p3==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p3 ); | | | | 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 | assert( pOp->p2>=(int)(pOp-aOp)+2 ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( pOp->p5==0 ){ /* There are no inequality constraints following the IN constraint. */ assert( pOp[1].p1==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p1 ); assert( pOp[1].p2==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p2 ); assert( pOp[1].p3==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p3 ); assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGT || aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE ); testcase( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE ); }else{ /* There are inequality constraints. */ assert( pOp->p2==(int)(pOp-aOp)+2 ); assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_SeekGE ); } #endif assert( pOp->p1>0 ); pC = p->apCsr[pOp[1].p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); assert( !pC->isTable ); if( !sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValidNN(pC->uc.pCursor) ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("... cursor not valid - fall through\n"); } #endif break; } nStep = pOp->p1; assert( nStep>=1 ); r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; r.nField = (u16)pOp[1].p4.i; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 | if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; if( res>0 && pOp->p5==0 ){ seekscan_search_fail: /* Jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("... %d steps and then skip\n", pOp->p1 - nStep); | | | | | | 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 | if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; if( res>0 && pOp->p5==0 ){ seekscan_search_fail: /* Jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("... %d steps and then skip\n", pOp->p1 - nStep); } #endif VdbeBranchTaken(1,3); pOp++; goto jump_to_p2; } if( res>=0 ){ /* Jump to This.P2, bypassing the OP_SeekGE opcode */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("... %d steps and then success\n", pOp->p1 - nStep); } #endif VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); goto jump_to_p2; break; } if( nStep<=0 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("... fall through after %d steps\n", pOp->p1); } #endif VdbeBranchTaken(0,3); break; } nStep--; pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, 0); if( rc ){ if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; goto seekscan_search_fail; }else{ goto abort_due_to_error; } } } break; } /* Opcode: SeekHit P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: set P2<=seekHit<=P3 ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 | pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); assert( pOp->p3>=pOp->p2 ); if( pC->seekHit<pOp->p2 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p2); | | | | 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 | pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); assert( pOp->p3>=pOp->p2 ); if( pC->seekHit<pOp->p2 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p2); } #endif pC->seekHit = pOp->p2; }else if( pC->seekHit>pOp->p3 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p3); } #endif pC->seekHit = pOp->p3; } break; } /* Opcode: IfNotOpen P1 P2 * * * |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 | */ /* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked ** record. | | | | 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 5077 5078 5079 5080 5081 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 | */ /* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked ** record. ** ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 ** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the ** matching entry. ** ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be ** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev ** opcodes do not work after this operation. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 | */ /* Opcode: NoConflict P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked ** record. | | | 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 5129 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134 | */ /* Opcode: NoConflict P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked ** record. ** ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the ** P1 index btree has a matching key prefix. If there are no matches, jump ** immediately to P2. If there is a match, fall through and leave the P1 ** cursor pointing to the matching row. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 | VdbeCursor *pC; assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("seekHit is %d\n", pC->seekHit); | | | 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 | VdbeCursor *pC; assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ printf("seekHit is %d\n", pC->seekHit); } #endif if( pC->seekHit>=pOp->p4.i ) break; /* Fall through into OP_NotFound */ /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through } case OP_NoConflict: /* jump, in3, ncycle */ case OP_NotFound: /* jump, in3, ncycle */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 | } /* Opcode: SeekRowid P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] ** ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer ** keys). If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not | | | | 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 | } /* Opcode: SeekRowid P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] ** ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer ** keys). If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not ** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. ** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain ** a record with rowid P3 then ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next ** instruction. ** ** The OP_NotExists opcode performs the same operation, but with OP_NotExists ** the P3 register must be guaranteed to contain an integer value. With this ** opcode, register P3 might not contain an integer. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 | */ /* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] ** ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer ** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an | | | 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 | */ /* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] ** ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer ** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an ** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next ** instruction. ** ** The OP_SeekRowid opcode performs the same operation but also allows the ** P3 register to contain a non-integer value, in which case the jump is ** always taken. This opcode requires that P3 always contain an integer. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 | /* Opcode: Sequence P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=cursor[P1].ctr++ ** ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1. ** Write the sequence number into register P2. ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this | | | | | 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 | /* Opcode: Sequence P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=cursor[P1].ctr++ ** ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1. ** Write the sequence number into register P2. ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this ** instruction. */ case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */ assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]!=0 ); assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); pOut->u.i = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->seqCount++; break; } /* Opcode: NewRowid P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid ** ** Get a new integer record number (a.k.a "rowid") used as the key to a table. ** The record number is not previously used as a key in the database ** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written ** written to register P2. ** ** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are ** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the ' ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the ** AUTOINCREMENT feature. */ case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2 */ i64 v; /* The new rowid */ VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor of table to get the new rowid */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5523 5524 5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 | ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equal to P3. ** ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set, then this opcode is part of an ** UPDATE operation. Otherwise (if the flag is clear) then this opcode ** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to ** the update hook. ** | | | | 5523 5524 5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 | ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equal to P3. ** ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set, then this opcode is part of an ** UPDATE operation. Otherwise (if the flag is clear) then this opcode ** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to ** the update hook. ** ** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is ** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked ** following a successful insert. ** ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically ** allocated, then ownership of P2 is transferred to the pseudo-cursor ** and register P2 becomes ephemeral. If the cursor is changed, the ** value of register P2 will then change. Make sure this does not ** cause any problems.) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 | x.nZero = pData->u.nZero; }else{ x.nZero = 0; } x.pKey = 0; assert( BTREE_PREFORMAT==OPFLAG_PREFORMAT ); rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, | | | 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 | x.nZero = pData->u.nZero; }else{ x.nZero = 0; } x.pKey = 0; assert( BTREE_PREFORMAT==OPFLAG_PREFORMAT ); rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)), seekResult ); pC->deferredMoveto = 0; pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 | ** ** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing. ** ** If the OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of the P5 parameter is set, then ** the cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous ** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then ** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case | | | | | | | 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 5665 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 5681 5682 5683 5684 5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692 | ** ** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing. ** ** If the OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of the P5 parameter is set, then ** the cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous ** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then ** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case ** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If ** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be ** left in an undefined state. ** ** If the OPFLAG_AUXDELETE bit is set on P5, that indicates that this ** delete one of several associated with deleting a table row and all its ** associated index entries. Exactly one of those deletes is the "primary" ** delete. The others are all on OPFLAG_FORDELETE cursors or else are ** marked with the AUXDELETE flag. ** ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 (NB: P2 not P5) is set, then the row ** change count is incremented (otherwise not). ** ** P1 must not be pseudo-table. It has to be a real table with ** multiple rows. ** ** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either ** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must ** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in ** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is ** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured, ** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2. ** ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address ** of the memory cell that contains the value that the rowid of the row will ** be set to by the update. */ case OP_Delete: { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5717 5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 5723 | assert( CORRUPT_DB || pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); } #endif /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was | | | | | | | | | 5717 5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 5723 5724 5725 5726 5727 5728 5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 5750 5751 5752 5753 5754 5755 5756 5757 5758 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 | assert( CORRUPT_DB || pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); } #endif /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set ** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid. */ if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){ assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); assert( pOp->p4.pTab!=0 ); zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zDbSName; pTab = pOp->p4.pTab; if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)!=0 && pC->isTable ){ pC->movetoTarget = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); } }else{ zDb = 0; pTab = 0; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */ assert( db->xPreUpdateCallback==0 || pTab==pOp->p4.pTab ); if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pTab ){ assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) || HasRowid(pTab)==0 || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int) ); sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC, (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE, zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget, pOp->p3, -1 ); } if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break; #endif /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */ assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 ); assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION ); assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE ); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG if( p->pFrame==0 ){ if( pC->isEphemeral==0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 | break; } /* Opcode: SorterCompare P1 P2 P3 P4 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2 ** ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the | | | 5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 | break; } /* Opcode: SorterCompare P1 P2 P3 P4 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2 ** ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the ** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that ** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared. ** ** If either P3 or the sorter contains a NULL in one of their significant ** fields (not counting the P4 fields at the end which are ignored) then ** the comparison is assumed to be equal. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 | p->apCsr[pOp->p3]->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; break; } /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data ** | | | | | 5860 5861 5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 | p->apCsr[pOp->p3]->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; break; } /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data ** ** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at ** which cursor P1 is currently pointing. ** There is no interpretation of the data. ** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as ** it is found in the database file. ** ** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row. ** If cursor P2 is a table, then the content extracted is the data. ** ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) ** of a real table, not a pseudo-table. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 | ** It is assumed that the cursor is used only for appending and so ** if the cursor is valid, then the cursor must already be pointing ** at the end of the btree and so no changes are made to ** the cursor. */ /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * * ** | | | 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036 6037 6038 | ** It is assumed that the cursor is used only for appending and so ** if the cursor is valid, then the cursor must already be pointing ** at the end of the btree and so no changes are made to ** the cursor. */ /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * * ** ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index. ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2. ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through ** to the following instruction. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 | #endif p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]++; /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */ /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through } /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * * ** | | | | 6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 6141 6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 | #endif p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]++; /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */ /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through } /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * * ** ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index. ** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2. ** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following ** instruction. ** ** If P2 is zero, that is an assertion that the P1 table is never ** empty and hence the jump will never be taken. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 | ** incremented by this instruction. If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit is clear, ** then the change counter is unchanged. ** ** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set, the implementation might ** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1. However, ** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent | | | 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 | ** incremented by this instruction. If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit is clear, ** then the change counter is unchanged. ** ** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set, the implementation might ** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1. However, ** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior ** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent ** to P2. ** ** This instruction only works for indices. The equivalent instruction ** for tables is OP_Insert. */ case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */ VdbeCursor *pC; BtreePayload x; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 | rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2); if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; x.nKey = pIn2->n; x.pKey = pIn2->z; x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3; x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i; rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, | | | 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 6350 | rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2); if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; x.nKey = pIn2->n; x.pKey = pIn2->z; x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3; x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i; rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)), ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0) ); assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; if( rc) goto abort_due_to_error; break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 | break; } /* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * P5 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3] ** ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form | | | 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 | break; } /* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * P5 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3] ** ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form ** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the ** index opened by cursor P1. ** ** If P5 is not zero, then raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT_INDEX error ** if no matching index entry is found. This happens when running ** an UPDATE or DELETE statement and the index entry to be updated ** or deleted is not found. For some uses of IdxDelete ** (example: the EXCEPT operator) it does not matter that no matching |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 | ** ** This is a deferred seek. Nothing actually happens until ** the cursor is used to read a record. That way, if no reads ** occur, no unnecessary I/O happens. ** ** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing ** one entry for each column in the P3 table. If array entry a(i) | | | | 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 | ** ** This is a deferred seek. Nothing actually happens until ** the cursor is used to read a record. That way, if no reads ** occur, no unnecessary I/O happens. ** ** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing ** one entry for each column in the P3 table. If array entry a(i) ** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is ** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i ** from P1. This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect ** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to ** seek and read cursor P3. */ /* Opcode: IdxRowid P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 6511 | assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid ); sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&aMem[pOp->p2]); } break; } /* Opcode: FinishSeek P1 * * * * | | | | | | | | | | | 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 6515 6516 6517 6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570 6571 6572 | assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid ); sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&aMem[pOp->p2]); } break; } /* Opcode: FinishSeek P1 * * * * ** ** If cursor P1 was previously moved via OP_DeferredSeek, complete that ** seek operation now, without further delay. If the cursor seek has ** already occurred, this instruction is a no-op. */ case OP_FinishSeek: { /* ncycle */ VdbeCursor *pC; /* The P1 index cursor */ assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ rc = sqlite3VdbeFinishMoveto(pC); if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; } break; } /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID ** fields at the end. ** ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value ** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. */ /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID ** fields at the end. ** ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value ** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. */ /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ** ROWID on the P1 index. ** ** If the P1 index entry is less than the key value then jump to P2. ** Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. */ /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ** ROWID on the P1 index. ** ** If the P1 index entry is less than or equal to the key value then jump ** to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6654 6655 6656 6657 6658 6659 6660 | ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. ** ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page ** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred - ** is stored in register P2. If no page movement was required (because the | | | | | | | | 6654 6655 6656 6657 6658 6659 6660 6661 6662 6663 6664 6665 6666 6667 6668 6669 6670 6671 6672 6673 6674 6675 6676 | ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. ** ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page ** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred - ** is stored in register P2. If no page movement was required (because the ** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a ** zero is stored in register P2. If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero ** is stored in register P2. ** ** This opcode throws an error if there are any active reader VMs when ** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with ** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM ** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM ** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum ** and non-autovacuum modes. ** ** See also: Clear */ case OP_Destroy: { /* out2 */ int iMoved; int iDb; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6719 6720 6721 6722 6723 6724 6725 | ** than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is also incremented ** by the number of rows in the table being cleared. ** ** See also: Destroy */ case OP_Clear: { i64 nChange; | | | 6719 6720 6721 6722 6723 6724 6725 6726 6727 6728 6729 6730 6731 6732 6733 | ** than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is also incremented ** by the number of rows in the table being cleared. ** ** See also: Destroy */ case OP_Clear: { i64 nChange; sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); nChange = 0; assert( p->readOnly==0 ); assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) ); rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable(db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, (u32)pOp->p1, &nChange); if( pOp->p3 ){ p->nChange += nChange; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 | ** that is open on cursor P1. ** ** This opcode only works for cursors used for sorting and ** opened with OP_OpenEphemeral or OP_SorterOpen. */ case OP_ResetSorter: { VdbeCursor *pC; | | | 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 6754 6755 6756 6757 6758 6759 6760 6761 | ** that is open on cursor P1. ** ** This opcode only works for cursors used for sorting and ** opened with OP_OpenEphemeral or OP_SorterOpen. */ case OP_ResetSorter: { VdbeCursor *pC; assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); if( isSorter(pC) ){ sqlite3VdbeSorterReset(db, pC->uc.pSorter); }else{ assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6819 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824 6825 | case OP_ParseSchema: { int iDb; const char *zSchema; char *zSql; InitData initData; /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes | | | 6819 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824 6825 6826 6827 6828 6829 6830 6831 6832 6833 | case OP_ParseSchema: { int iDb; const char *zSchema; char *zSql; InitData initData; /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking ** sqlite3InitCallback(). */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG for(iDb=0; iDb<db->nDb; iDb++){ assert( iDb==1 || sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[iDb].pBt) ); } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6880 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 | if( rc ){ sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ goto no_mem; } goto abort_due_to_error; } | | | | | 6880 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 6905 6906 6907 6908 6909 6910 6911 6912 6913 6914 6915 6916 | if( rc ){ sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ goto no_mem; } goto abort_due_to_error; } break; } #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) /* Opcode: LoadAnalysis P1 * * * * ** ** Read the sqlite_stat1 table for database P1 and load the content ** of that table into the internal index hash table. This will cause ** the analysis to be used when preparing all subsequent queries. */ case OP_LoadAnalysis: { assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1); if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; break; } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */ /* Opcode: DropTable P1 * * P4 * ** ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe ** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep ** the internal representation of the ** schema consistent with what is on disk. */ case OP_DropTable: { sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTable(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 | break; } /* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * * P4 * ** ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe ** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger | | | | 6930 6931 6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6939 6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946 6947 6948 6949 6950 6951 6952 6953 6954 6955 6956 6957 6958 6959 6960 6961 6962 6963 6964 | break; } /* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * * P4 * ** ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe ** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep ** the internal representation of the ** schema consistent with what is on disk. */ case OP_DropTrigger: { sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTrigger(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); break; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK /* Opcode: IntegrityCk P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** ** Do an analysis of the currently open database. Store in ** register P1 the text of an error message describing any problems. ** If no problems are found, store a NULL in register P1. ** ** The register P3 contains one less than the maximum number of allowed errors. ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported. ** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are ** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining. ** ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers ** stored in P4_INTARRAY argument. ** ** If P5 is not zero, the check is done on the auxiliary database ** file, not the main database file. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 | ** unchanged and jump to instruction P2. */ case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */ i64 val; pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 || sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) ); | | | 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 | ** unchanged and jump to instruction P2. */ case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */ i64 val; pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 || sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) ); if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 || sqlite3RowSetNext((RowSet*)pIn1->z, &val)==0 ){ /* The boolean index is empty */ sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7118 7119 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 7156 7157 7158 7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7166 7167 7168 7169 7170 7171 7172 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** ** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). ** ** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory ** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 ** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE ** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address ** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime. ** ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program. ** ** If P5 is non-zero, then recursive program invocation is enabled. */ case OP_Program: { /* jump */ int nMem; /* Number of memory registers for sub-program */ int nByte; /* Bytes of runtime space required for sub-program */ Mem *pRt; /* Register to allocate runtime space */ Mem *pMem; /* Used to iterate through memory cells */ Mem *pEnd; /* Last memory cell in new array */ VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* New vdbe frame to execute in */ SubProgram *pProgram; /* Sub-program to execute */ void *t; /* Token identifying trigger */ pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram; pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3]; assert( pProgram->nOp>0 ); /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear). ** ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token ** variable. */ if( pOp->p5 ){ t = pProgram->token; for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame && pFrame->token!=t; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); if( pFrame ) break; } if( p->nFrame>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_TRIGGER_DEPTH] ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; sqlite3VdbeError(p, "too many levels of trigger recursion"); goto abort_due_to_error; } /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */ if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Blob)==0 ){ /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value. */ nMem = pProgram->nMem + pProgram->nCsr; assert( nMem>0 ); if( pProgram->nCsr==0 ) nMem++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7203 7204 7205 7206 7207 7208 7209 | for(pMem=VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); pMem!=pEnd; pMem++){ pMem->flags = MEM_Undefined; pMem->db = db; } }else{ pFrame = (VdbeFrame*)pRt->z; assert( pRt->xDel==sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel ); | | | 7203 7204 7205 7206 7207 7208 7209 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 | for(pMem=VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); pMem!=pEnd; pMem++){ pMem->flags = MEM_Undefined; pMem->db = db; } }else{ pFrame = (VdbeFrame*)pRt->z; assert( pRt->xDel==sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel ); assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem || (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) ); assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr ); assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc ); } p->nFrame++; pFrame->pParent = p->pFrame; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7244 7245 7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 | #endif pOp = &aOp[-1]; goto check_for_interrupt; } /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * * ** | | | | | | | | | | 7244 7245 7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 7257 7258 7259 7260 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265 7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 7271 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 7277 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284 7285 7286 7287 7288 7289 7290 7291 7292 7293 7294 7295 7296 7297 7298 7299 7300 7301 7302 7303 7304 | #endif pOp = &aOp[-1]; goto check_for_interrupt; } /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * * ** ** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the ** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory ** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames ** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* ** and old.* values. ** ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding ** the value of the P1 argument to the value of the P1 argument to the ** calling OP_Program instruction. */ case OP_Param: { /* out2 */ VdbeFrame *pFrame; Mem *pIn; pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); pFrame = p->pFrame; pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1]; sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem); break; } #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY /* Opcode: FkCounter P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2 ** ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive). ** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented ** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints). */ case OP_FkCounter: { if( db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs ){ db->nDeferredImmCons += pOp->p2; }else if( pOp->p1 ){ db->nDeferredCons += pOp->p2; }else{ p->nFkConstraint += pOp->p2; } break; } /* Opcode: FkIfZero P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2 ** ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero. ** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next ** instruction. ** ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter ** is zero (the one that counts deferred constraint violations). If P1 is ** zero, the jump is taken if the statement constraint-counter is zero ** (immediate foreign key constraint violations). */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT /* Opcode: MemMax P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P1]=max(r[P1],r[P2]) ** ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed | | | 7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT /* Opcode: MemMax P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P1]=max(r[P1],r[P2]) ** ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed ** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of ** its current value and the value in register P2. ** ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially ** an integer. */ case OP_MemMax: { /* in2 */ VdbeFrame *pFrame; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7376 7377 7378 7379 7380 7381 7382 | ** value computed is the total number of rows that will need to be ** visited in order to complete the query. ** ** If r[P3] is zero or negative, that means there is no OFFSET ** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1]. ** ** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT | | | 7376 7377 7378 7379 7380 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 7390 | ** value computed is the total number of rows that will need to be ** visited in order to complete the query. ** ** If r[P3] is zero or negative, that means there is no OFFSET ** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1]. ** ** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT ** and r[P2] is set to -1. ** ** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3]. */ case OP_OffsetLimit: { /* in1, out2, in3 */ i64 x; pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7408 7409 7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 | } /* Opcode: IfNotZero P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=0 then r[P1]--, goto P2 ** ** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is ** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1. | | | 7408 7409 7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 | } /* Opcode: IfNotZero P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=0 then r[P1]--, goto P2 ** ** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is ** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1. ** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2. ** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through. */ case OP_IfNotZero: { /* jump, in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i<0, 2); if( pIn1->u.i ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7442 7443 7444 7445 7446 7447 7448 | } /* Opcode: AggStep * P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) ** ** Execute the xStep function for an aggregate. | | | | | 7442 7443 7444 7445 7446 7447 7448 7449 7450 7451 7452 7453 7454 7455 7456 7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 | } /* Opcode: AggStep * P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) ** ** Execute the xStep function for an aggregate. ** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the ** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the ** accumulator. ** ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its ** successors. */ /* Opcode: AggInverse * P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] inverse(r[P2@P5]) ** ** Execute the xInverse function for an aggregate. ** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the ** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the ** accumulator. ** ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its ** successors. */ /* Opcode: AggStep1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) ** ** Execute the xStep (if P1==0) or xInverse (if P1!=0) function for an ** aggregate. The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the ** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the ** accumulator. ** ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its ** successors. ** ** This opcode is initially coded as OP_AggStep0. On first evaluation, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7533 7534 7535 7536 7537 7538 7539 | pMem->uTemp = 0x1122e0e3; } #endif /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it | | | 7533 7534 7535 7536 7537 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 | pMem->uTemp = 0x1122e0e3; } #endif /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it ** reinitializes the relevant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){ pCtx->pMem = pMem; for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7582 7583 7584 7585 7586 7587 7588 | break; } /* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 * P4 * ** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2 ** ** P1 is the memory location that is the accumulator for an aggregate | | | 7582 7583 7584 7585 7586 7587 7588 7589 7590 7591 7592 7593 7594 7595 7596 | break; } /* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 * P4 * ** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2 ** ** P1 is the memory location that is the accumulator for an aggregate ** or window function. Execute the finalizer function ** for an aggregate and store the result in P1. ** ** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and ** P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function. The P2 ** argument is not used by this opcode. It is only there to disambiguate ** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments. The ** P4 argument is only needed for the case where |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 | rc = sqlite3VdbeMemAggValue(pMem, &aMem[pOp->p3], pOp->p4.pFunc); pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; }else #endif { rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc); } | | | 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627 7628 7629 7630 7631 7632 7633 7634 7635 | rc = sqlite3VdbeMemAggValue(pMem, &aMem[pOp->p3], pOp->p4.pFunc); pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; }else #endif { rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc); } if( rc ){ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem)); goto abort_due_to_error; } sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pMem, encoding); UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pMem); REGISTER_TRACE((int)(pMem-aMem), pMem); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7665 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 | if( rc ){ if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ) goto abort_due_to_error; rc = SQLITE_OK; aRes[0] = 1; } for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]); | | | | 7665 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 | if( rc ){ if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ) goto abort_due_to_error; rc = SQLITE_OK; aRes[0] = 1; } for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]); } break; }; #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA /* Opcode: JournalMode P1 P2 P3 * * ** ** Change the journal mode of database P1 to P3. P3 must be one of the ** PAGER_JOURNALMODE_XXX values. If changing between the various rollback |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7693 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 | int eOld; /* The old journal mode */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL const char *zFilename; /* Name of database file for pPager */ #endif pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); eNew = pOp->p3; | | | | | | | | | | | 7693 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7764 7765 | int eOld; /* The old journal mode */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL const char *zFilename; /* Name of database file for pPager */ #endif pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); eNew = pOp->p3; assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY ); assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); assert( p->readOnly==0 ); pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt); eOld = sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager); if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY ) eNew = eOld; assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(pBt) ); if( !sqlite3PagerOkToChangeJournalMode(pPager) ) eNew = eOld; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1); /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory */ if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */ || !sqlite3PagerWalSupported(pPager)) /* No shared-memory support */ ){ eNew = eOld; } if( (eNew!=eOld) && (eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL) ){ if( !db->autoCommit || db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot change %s wal mode from within a transaction", (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? "into" : "out of") ); goto abort_due_to_error; }else{ if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){ /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file ** after a successful return. */ rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); } }else if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){ /* Cannot transition directly from MEMORY to WAL. Use mode OFF ** as an intermediate */ sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF); } /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal. */ assert( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)!=SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(pBt, (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? 2 : 1)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 | /* Opcode: Expire P1 P2 * * * ** ** Cause precompiled statements to expire. When an expired statement ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2()) ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA. | | | 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 7840 | /* Opcode: Expire P1 P2 * * * ** ** Cause precompiled statements to expire. When an expired statement ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2()) ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA. ** ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero, ** then only the currently executing statement is expired. ** ** If P2 is 0, then SQL statements are expired immediately. If P2 is 1, ** then running SQL statements are allowed to continue to run to completion. ** The P2==1 case occurs when a CREATE INDEX or similar schema change happens ** that might help the statement run faster but which does not affect the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3 ** ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when | | | | | | 7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 7888 7889 7890 7891 7892 7893 7894 7895 7896 7897 7898 7899 7900 7901 7902 7903 7904 7905 7906 7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7914 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 7923 7924 7925 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 7931 7932 7933 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 7940 7941 7942 7943 7944 7945 7946 7947 7948 7949 | } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3 ** ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when ** the shared-cache feature is enabled. ** ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database ** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or ** a write lock if P3==1. ** ** P2 contains the root-page of the table to lock. ** ** P4 contains a pointer to the name of the table being locked. This is only ** used to generate an error message if the lock cannot be obtained. */ case OP_TableLock: { u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3; if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) ){ int p1 = pOp->p1; assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb ); assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) ); assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 ); rc = sqlite3BtreeLockTable(db->aDb[p1].pBt, pOp->p2, isWriteLock); if( rc ){ if( (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_LOCKED ){ const char *z = pOp->p4.z; sqlite3VdbeError(p, "database table is locked: %s", z); } goto abort_due_to_error; } } break; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 * ** ** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the ** xBegin method for that table. ** ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from ** within a callback to a virtual table xSync() method. If it is, the error ** code will be set to SQLITE_LOCKED. */ case OP_VBegin: { VTable *pVTab; pVTab = pOp->p4.pVtab; rc = sqlite3VtabBegin(db, pVTab); if( pVTab ) sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVTab->pVtab); if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; break; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * * ** ** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database ** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table. */ case OP_VCreate: { Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ const char *zTab; /* Name of the virtual table */ memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8198 8199 8200 8201 8202 8203 8204 | } pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; pModule = pVtab->pModule; assert( pModule->xNext ); /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during | | | 8198 8199 8200 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 8206 8207 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 | } pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; pModule = pVtab->pModule; assert( pModule->xNext ); /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor. */ rc = pModule->xNext(pCur->uc.pVCur); sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; res = pModule->xEof(pCur->uc.pVCur); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8226 8227 8228 8229 8230 8231 8232 | ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value ** in register P1 is passed as the zName argument to the xRename method. */ case OP_VRename: { sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; Mem *pName; int isLegacy; | | | 8226 8227 8228 8229 8230 8231 8232 8233 8234 8235 8236 8237 8238 8239 8240 | ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value ** in register P1 is passed as the zName argument to the xRename method. */ case OP_VRename: { sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; Mem *pName; int isLegacy; isLegacy = (db->flags & SQLITE_LegacyAlter); db->flags |= SQLITE_LegacyAlter; pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; pName = &aMem[pOp->p1]; assert( pVtab->pModule->xRename ); assert( memIsValid(pName) ); assert( p->readOnly==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: data=r[P3@P2] ** ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values | | | | | | | | | | 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 8268 8269 8270 8271 8272 8273 8274 8275 8276 8277 8278 8279 8280 8281 8282 8283 8284 8285 8286 8287 8288 8289 8290 8291 8292 8293 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 8299 8300 8301 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: data=r[P3@P2] ** ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values ** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate ** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate. ** ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both. ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3) ** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no ** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new ** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new ** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are ** the values of columns in the new row. ** ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of ** a row to delete. ** ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call ** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted. ** ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to ** apply in the case of a constraint failure on an insert or update. */ case OP_VUpdate: { sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; const sqlite3_module *pModule; int nArg; int i; sqlite_int64 rowid = 0; Mem **apArg; Mem *pX; assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace ); assert( p->readOnly==0 ); if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem; sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8382 8383 8384 8385 8386 8387 8388 | ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that ** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with arguments taken ** from register P2 and successors. The number of arguments is in ** the sqlite3_context object that P4 points to. ** The result of the function is stored ** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. ** | | | | | | 8382 8383 8384 8385 8386 8387 8388 8389 8390 8391 8392 8393 8394 8395 8396 8397 8398 8399 8400 8401 8402 8403 8404 8405 8406 8407 8408 8409 8410 8411 8412 8413 8414 8415 8416 8417 8418 8419 8420 8421 8422 8423 8424 8425 8426 8427 8428 8429 8430 8431 8432 8433 8434 8435 8436 8437 8438 8439 8440 8441 8442 8443 | ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that ** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with arguments taken ** from register P2 and successors. The number of arguments is in ** the sqlite3_context object that P4 points to. ** The result of the function is stored ** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. ** ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next ** invocation of this opcode. ** ** See also: AggStep, AggFinal, PureFunc */ /* Opcode: PureFunc P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@NP]) ** ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that ** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with arguments taken ** from register P2 and successors. The number of arguments is in ** the sqlite3_context object that P4 points to. ** The result of the function is stored ** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. ** ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next ** invocation of this opcode. ** ** This opcode works exactly like OP_Function. The only difference is in ** its name. This opcode is used in places where the function must be ** purely non-deterministic. Some built-in date/time functions can be ** either deterministic of non-deterministic, depending on their arguments. ** When those function are used in a non-deterministic way, they will check ** to see if they were called using OP_PureFunc instead of OP_Function, and ** if they were, they throw an error. ** ** See also: AggStep, AggFinal, Function */ case OP_PureFunc: /* group */ case OP_Function: { /* group */ int i; sqlite3_context *pCtx; assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it ** reinitializes the relevant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){ pCtx->pVdbe = p; pCtx->pOut = pOut; pCtx->enc = encoding; for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8461 8462 8463 8464 8465 8466 8467 | rc = pCtx->isError; } sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(db, &p->pAuxData, pCtx->iOp, pOp->p1); pCtx->isError = 0; if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; } | | | 8461 8462 8463 8464 8465 8466 8467 8468 8469 8470 8471 8472 8473 8474 8475 | rc = pCtx->isError; } sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(db, &p->pAuxData, pCtx->iOp, pOp->p1); pCtx->isError = 0; if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; } assert( (pOut->flags&MEM_Str)==0 || pOut->enc==encoding || db->mallocFailed ); assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pOut) ); REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8793 8794 8795 8796 8797 8798 8799 | registerTrace(pOrigOp->p2, &aMem[pOrigOp->p2]); } if( opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3 ){ registerTrace(pOrigOp->p3, &aMem[pOrigOp->p3]); } if( opProperty==0xff ){ /* Never happens. This code exists to avoid a harmless linkage | | | 8793 8794 8795 8796 8797 8798 8799 8800 8801 8802 8803 8804 8805 8806 8807 | registerTrace(pOrigOp->p2, &aMem[pOrigOp->p2]); } if( opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3 ){ registerTrace(pOrigOp->p3, &aMem[pOrigOp->p3]); } if( opProperty==0xff ){ /* Never happens. This code exists to avoid a harmless linkage ** warning about sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump() being defined but not ** used. */ sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump(p); } } #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ #endif /* NDEBUG */ } /* The end of the for(;;) loop the loops through opcodes */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8830 8831 8832 8833 8834 8835 8836 | #endif if( p->zErrMsg==0 && rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); } p->rc = rc; sqlite3SystemError(db, rc); testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); | | | 8830 8831 8832 8833 8834 8835 8836 8837 8838 8839 8840 8841 8842 8843 8844 | #endif if( p->zErrMsg==0 && rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){ sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); } p->rc = rc; sqlite3SystemError(db, rc); testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); if( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_RUN_STATE ) sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db); if( rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT && db->autoCommit==0 ){ db->flags |= SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly; } rc = SQLITE_ERROR; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
8872 8873 8874 8875 8876 8877 8878 | } } #endif p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep; if( DbMaskNonZero(p->lockMask) ){ sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); } | | | | 8872 8873 8874 8875 8876 8877 8878 8879 8880 8881 8882 8883 8884 8885 8886 8887 | } } #endif p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep; if( DbMaskNonZero(p->lockMask) ){ sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); } assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0 || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0 ); return rc; /* Jump to here if a string or blob larger than SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ** is encountered. */ too_big: |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vdbe.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
323 324 325 326 327 328 329 | # define VdbeModuleComment(X) #endif /* ** The VdbeCoverage macros are used to set a coverage testing point ** for VDBE branch instructions. The coverage testing points are line ** numbers in the sqlite3.c source file. VDBE branch coverage testing | | | | | 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 | # define VdbeModuleComment(X) #endif /* ** The VdbeCoverage macros are used to set a coverage testing point ** for VDBE branch instructions. The coverage testing points are line ** numbers in the sqlite3.c source file. VDBE branch coverage testing ** only works with an amalgamation build. That's ok since a VDBE branch ** coverage build designed for testing the test suite only. No application ** should ever ship with VDBE branch coverage measuring turned on. ** ** VdbeCoverage(v) // Mark the previously coded instruction ** // as a branch ** ** VdbeCoverageIf(v, conditional) // Mark previous if conditional true ** ** VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken(v) // Previous branch is always taken ** ** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken(v) // Previous branch is never taken ** ** VdbeCoverageNeverNull(v) // Previous three-way branch is only ** // taken on the first two ways. The ** // NULL option is not possible ** ** VdbeCoverageEqNe(v) // Previous OP_Jump is only interested ** // in distinguishing equal and not-equal. ** ** Every VDBE branch operation must be tagged with one of the macros above. ** If not, then when "make test" is run with -DSQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE and ** -DSQLITE_DEBUG then an ALWAYS() will fail in the vdbeTakeBranch() ** routine in vdbe.c, alerting the developer to the missed tag. ** ** During testing, the test application will invoke ** sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE,...) to set a callback ** routine that is invoked as each bytecode branch is taken. The callback ** contains the sqlite3.c source line number of the VdbeCoverage macro and ** flags to indicate whether or not the branch was taken. The test application ** is responsible for keeping track of this and reporting byte-code branches ** that are never taken. ** ** See the VdbeBranchTaken() macro and vdbeTakeBranch() function in the ** vdbe.c source file for additional information. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vdbeInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
145 146 147 148 149 150 151 | */ #define CACHE_STALE 0 /* ** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type ** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as ** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific | | | 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | */ #define CACHE_STALE 0 /* ** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type ** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as ** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific ** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished, ** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure, ** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program ** began executing. ** ** The memory for a VdbeFrame object is allocated and managed by a memory ** cell in the parent (calling) frame. When the memory cell is deleted or ** overwritten, the VdbeFrame object is not freed immediately. Instead, it |
︙ | ︙ | |||
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 | ** ** * MEM_Blob A blob, stored in Mem.z length Mem.n. ** Incompatible with MEM_Str, MEM_Null, ** MEM_Int, MEM_Real, and MEM_IntReal. ** ** * MEM_Blob|MEM_Zero A blob in Mem.z of length Mem.n plus ** MEM.u.i extra 0x00 bytes at the end. | | | | 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | ** ** * MEM_Blob A blob, stored in Mem.z length Mem.n. ** Incompatible with MEM_Str, MEM_Null, ** MEM_Int, MEM_Real, and MEM_IntReal. ** ** * MEM_Blob|MEM_Zero A blob in Mem.z of length Mem.n plus ** MEM.u.i extra 0x00 bytes at the end. ** ** * MEM_Int Integer stored in Mem.u.i. ** ** * MEM_Real Real stored in Mem.u.r. ** ** * MEM_IntReal Real stored as an integer in Mem.u.i. ** ** If the MEM_Null flag is set, then the value is an SQL NULL value. ** For a pointer type created using sqlite3_bind_pointer() or ** sqlite3_result_pointer() the MEM_Term and MEM_Subtype flags are also set. ** ** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation. ** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main ** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also ** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real ** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag. */ #define MEM_Undefined 0x0000 /* Value is undefined */ #define MEM_Null 0x0001 /* Value is NULL (or a pointer) */ #define MEM_Str 0x0002 /* Value is a string */ #define MEM_Int 0x0004 /* Value is an integer */ #define MEM_Real 0x0008 /* Value is a real number */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
326 327 328 329 330 331 332 | (((X)->flags&MEM_TypeMask)==(MEM_Null|MEM_Zero) \ && (X)->n==0 && (X)->u.nZero==0) /* ** Return true if a memory cell has been initialized and is valid. ** is for use inside assert() statements only. ** | | | | 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 | (((X)->flags&MEM_TypeMask)==(MEM_Null|MEM_Zero) \ && (X)->n==0 && (X)->u.nZero==0) /* ** Return true if a memory cell has been initialized and is valid. ** is for use inside assert() statements only. ** ** A Memory cell is initialized if at least one of the ** MEM_Null, MEM_Str, MEM_Int, MEM_Real, MEM_Blob, or MEM_IntReal bits ** is set. It is "undefined" if all those bits are zero. */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG #define memIsValid(M) ((M)->flags & MEM_AffMask)!=0 #endif /* ** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function ** implementation calling sqlite3_set_auxdata() is stored in an instance ** of this structure. All such structures associated with a single VM ** are stored in a linked list headed at Vdbe.pAuxData. All are destroyed ** when the VM is halted (if not before). */ struct AuxData { int iAuxOp; /* Instruction number of OP_Function opcode */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
384 385 386 387 388 389 390 | */ typedef unsigned bft; /* Bit Field Type */ /* The ScanStatus object holds a single value for the ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() interface. ** ** aAddrRange[]: | | | 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 | */ typedef unsigned bft; /* Bit Field Type */ /* The ScanStatus object holds a single value for the ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() interface. ** ** aAddrRange[]: ** This array is used by ScanStatus elements associated with EQP ** notes that make an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE value available. It is ** an array of up to 3 ranges of VM addresses for which the Vdbe.anCycle[] ** values should be summed to calculate the NCYCLE value. Each pair of ** integer addresses is a start and end address (both inclusive) for a range ** instructions. A start value of 0 indicates an empty range. */ typedef struct ScanStatus ScanStatus; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
501 502 503 504 505 506 507 | */ #define VDBE_INIT_STATE 0 /* Prepared statement under construction */ #define VDBE_READY_STATE 1 /* Ready to run but not yet started */ #define VDBE_RUN_STATE 2 /* Run in progress */ #define VDBE_HALT_STATE 3 /* Finished. Need reset() or finalize() */ /* | | | | 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 | */ #define VDBE_INIT_STATE 0 /* Prepared statement under construction */ #define VDBE_READY_STATE 1 /* Ready to run but not yet started */ #define VDBE_RUN_STATE 2 /* Run in progress */ #define VDBE_HALT_STATE 3 /* Finished. Need reset() or finalize() */ /* ** Structure used to store the context required by the ** sqlite3_preupdate_*() API functions. */ struct PreUpdate { Vdbe *v; VdbeCursor *pCsr; /* Cursor to read old values from */ int op; /* One of SQLITE_INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE */ u8 *aRecord; /* old.* database record */ KeyInfo keyinfo; UnpackedRecord *pUnpacked; /* Unpacked version of aRecord[] */ UnpackedRecord *pNewUnpacked; /* Unpacked version of new.* record */ int iNewReg; /* Register for new.* values */ int iBlobWrite; /* Value returned by preupdate_blobwrite() */ i64 iKey1; /* First key value passed to hook */ i64 iKey2; /* Second key value passed to hook */ Mem *aNew; /* Array of new.* values */ Table *pTab; /* Schema object being updated */ Index *pPk; /* PK index if pTab is WITHOUT ROWID */ }; /* ** An instance of this object is used to pass an vector of values into ** OP_VFilter, the xFilter method of a virtual table. The vector is the ** set of values on the right-hand side of an IN constraint. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
663 664 665 666 667 668 669 | void sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(Vdbe*, VdbeCursor*); void sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(Vdbe*); #else # define sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(V,C) # define sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(V) #endif | | | 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 | void sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(Vdbe*, VdbeCursor*); void sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(Vdbe*); #else # define sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(V,C) # define sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(V) #endif #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) void sqlite3VdbeEnter(Vdbe*); #else # define sqlite3VdbeEnter(X) #endif #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && SQLITE_THREADSAFE>0 void sqlite3VdbeLeave(Vdbe*); |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vdbeapi.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | /* Destroy an sqlite3_value object previously obtained from ** sqlite3_value_dup(). */ void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value *pOld){ sqlite3ValueFree(pOld); } | | | 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 | /* Destroy an sqlite3_value object previously obtained from ** sqlite3_value_dup(). */ void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value *pOld){ sqlite3ValueFree(pOld); } /**************************** sqlite3_result_ ******************************* ** The following routines are used by user-defined functions to specify ** the function result. ** ** The setStrOrError() function calls sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr() to store the ** result as a string or blob. Appropriate errors are set if the string/blob |
︙ | ︙ | |||
415 416 417 418 419 420 421 | }else{ xDel((void*)p); } sqlite3_result_error_toobig(pCtx); return SQLITE_TOOBIG; } void sqlite3_result_blob( | | | | | | | 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | }else{ xDel((void*)p); } sqlite3_result_error_toobig(pCtx); return SQLITE_TOOBIG; } void sqlite3_result_blob( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const void *z, int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( n>=0 ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, 0, xDel); } void sqlite3_result_blob64( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const void *z, sqlite3_uint64 n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC ); if( n>0x7fffffff ){ (void)invokeValueDestructor(z, xDel, pCtx); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
485 486 487 488 489 490 491 | void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context *pCtx, unsigned int eSubtype){ Mem *pOut = pCtx->pOut; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pOut->db->mutex) ); pOut->eSubtype = eSubtype & 0xff; pOut->flags |= MEM_Subtype; } void sqlite3_result_text( | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 | void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context *pCtx, unsigned int eSubtype){ Mem *pOut = pCtx->pOut; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pOut->db->mutex) ); pOut->eSubtype = eSubtype & 0xff; pOut->flags |= MEM_Subtype; } void sqlite3_result_text( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const char *z, int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF8, xDel); } void sqlite3_result_text64( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const char *z, sqlite3_uint64 n, void (*xDel)(void *), unsigned char enc ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC ); if( enc!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){ if( enc==SQLITE_UTF16 ) enc = SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE; n &= ~(u64)1; } if( n>0x7fffffff ){ (void)invokeValueDestructor(z, xDel, pCtx); }else{ setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, (int)n, enc, xDel); } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 void sqlite3_result_text16( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const void *z, int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel); } void sqlite3_result_text16be( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const void *z, int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel); } void sqlite3_result_text16le( sqlite3_context *pCtx, const void *z, int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16LE, xDel); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ void sqlite3_result_value(sqlite3_context *pCtx, sqlite3_value *pValue){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
582 583 584 585 586 587 588 | } } /* Force an SQLITE_TOOBIG error. */ void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG; | | | | | 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 | } } /* Force an SQLITE_TOOBIG error. */ void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG; sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); } /* An SQLITE_NOMEM error. */ void sqlite3_result_error_nomem(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pCtx->pOut); pCtx->isError = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; sqlite3OomFault(pCtx->pOut->db); } #ifndef SQLITE_UNTESTABLE /* Force the INT64 value currently stored as the result to be ** a MEM_IntReal value. See the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_RESULT_INTREAL ** test-control. */ void sqlite3ResultIntReal(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); if( pCtx->pOut->flags & MEM_Int ){ pCtx->pOut->flags &= ~MEM_Int; pCtx->pOut->flags |= MEM_IntReal; } } #endif /* ** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It ** invokes callbacks registered with sqlite3_wal_hook() as required. */ static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL int i; for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
639 640 641 642 643 644 645 | /* ** Execute the statement pStmt, either until a row of data is ready, the ** statement is completely executed or an error occurs. ** ** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step() | | | | | | 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 | /* ** Execute the statement pStmt, either until a row of data is ready, the ** statement is completely executed or an error occurs. ** ** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step() ** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a ** schema change has occurred. That detail is handled by the ** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure. */ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){ sqlite3 *db; int rc; assert(p); db = p->db; if( p->eVdbeState!=VDBE_RUN_STATE ){ restart_step: if( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_READY_STATE ){ if( p->expired ){ p->rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA; rc = SQLITE_ERROR; if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){ /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an ** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the ** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same ** value. */ rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p); } goto end_of_step; } /* If there are no other statements currently running, then ** reset the interrupt flag. This prevents a call to sqlite3_interrupt ** from interrupting a statement that has not yet started. */ if( db->nVdbeActive==0 ){ AtomicStore(&db->u1.isInterrupted, 0); } assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0 || (db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0) ); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE if( (db->mTrace & (SQLITE_TRACE_PROFILE|SQLITE_TRACE_XPROFILE))!=0 && !db->init.busy && p->zSql ){ sqlite3OsCurrentTimeInt64(db->pVfs, &p->startTime); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
699 700 701 702 703 704 705 | }else if( ALWAYS(p->eVdbeState==VDBE_HALT_STATE) ){ /* We used to require that sqlite3_reset() be called before retrying ** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE. But beginning ** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would ** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error. | | | | | 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 | }else if( ALWAYS(p->eVdbeState==VDBE_HALT_STATE) ){ /* We used to require that sqlite3_reset() be called before retrying ** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE. But beginning ** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would ** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error. ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility, ** since any application that receives an SQLITE_MISUSE is broken by ** definition. ** ** Nevertheless, some published applications that were originally written ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE ** returns, and those were broken by the automatic-reset change. As a ** a work-around, the SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET compile-time restores the ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the ** previous sqlite3_step() returned something other than a SQLITE_LOCKED ** or SQLITE_BUSY error. */ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET if( (rc = p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_LOCKED ){ sqlite3_reset((sqlite3_stmt*)p); }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
757 758 759 760 761 762 763 | if( rc==SQLITE_DONE && db->autoCommit ){ assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ); p->rc = doWalCallbacks(db); if( p->rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } }else if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE && (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){ | | | | | 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 | if( rc==SQLITE_DONE && db->autoCommit ){ assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ); p->rc = doWalCallbacks(db); if( p->rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } }else if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE && (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){ /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an ** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the ** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value. */ rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p); } } db->errCode = rc; if( SQLITE_NOMEM==sqlite3ApiExit(p->db, p->rc) ){ p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ) rc = p->rc; } end_of_step: /* There are only a limited number of result codes allowed from the ** statements prepared using the legacy sqlite3_prepare() interface */ assert( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 || rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR || (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE ); return (rc&db->errMask); } /* ** This is the top-level implementation of sqlite3_step(). Call |
︙ | ︙ | |||
801 802 803 804 805 806 807 | db = v->db; sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); while( (rc = sqlite3Step(v))==SQLITE_SCHEMA && cnt++ < SQLITE_MAX_SCHEMA_RETRY ){ int savedPc = v->pc; rc = sqlite3Reprepare(v); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ | | | | | | | 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 | db = v->db; sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); while( (rc = sqlite3Step(v))==SQLITE_SCHEMA && cnt++ < SQLITE_MAX_SCHEMA_RETRY ){ int savedPc = v->pc; rc = sqlite3Reprepare(v); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement. ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message ** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is ** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via ** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode(). */ const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr); sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg); if( !db->mallocFailed ){ v->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, zErr); v->rc = rc = sqlite3ApiExit(db, rc); } else { v->zErrMsg = 0; v->rc = rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
882 883 884 885 886 887 888 | return sqlite3_value_nochange(p->pOut); } /* ** The destructor function for a ValueList object. This needs to be ** a separate function, unknowable to the application, to ensure that ** calls to sqlite3_vtab_in_first()/sqlite3_vtab_in_next() that are not | | | 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 | return sqlite3_value_nochange(p->pOut); } /* ** The destructor function for a ValueList object. This needs to be ** a separate function, unknowable to the application, to ensure that ** calls to sqlite3_vtab_in_first()/sqlite3_vtab_in_next() that are not ** preceded by activation of IN processing via sqlite3_vtab_int() do not ** try to access a fake ValueList object inserted by a hostile extension. */ void sqlite3VdbeValueListFree(void *pToDelete){ sqlite3_free(pToDelete); } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 | ** The left-most argument is 0. ** ** Undocumented behavior: If iArg is negative then make the data available ** to all functions within the current prepared statement using iArg as an ** access code. */ void sqlite3_set_auxdata( | | | | | 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 | ** The left-most argument is 0. ** ** Undocumented behavior: If iArg is negative then make the data available ** to all functions within the current prepared statement using iArg as an ** access code. */ void sqlite3_set_auxdata( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int iArg, void *pAux, void (*xDelete)(void*) ){ AuxData *pAuxData; Vdbe *pVdbe = pCtx->pVdbe; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 | if( xDelete ){ xDelete(pAux); } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* | | | 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 | if( xDelete ){ xDelete(pAux); } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* ** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been ** called. ** ** This function is deprecated. Do not use it for new code. It is ** provide only to avoid breaking legacy code. New aggregate function ** implementations should keep their own counts within their aggregate ** context. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 | ** switches (-Os), gcc may align this Mem object on a 4-byte boundary ** instead of an 8-byte one. This all works fine, except that when ** running with SQLITE_DEBUG defined the SQLite code sometimes assert()s ** that a Mem structure is located on an 8-byte boundary. To prevent ** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined ** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical ** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro. */ | | | | 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 | ** switches (-Os), gcc may align this Mem object on a 4-byte boundary ** instead of an 8-byte one. This all works fine, except that when ** running with SQLITE_DEBUG defined the SQLite code sometimes assert()s ** that a Mem structure is located on an 8-byte boundary. To prevent ** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined ** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical ** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro. */ static const Mem nullMem #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__) __attribute__((aligned(8))) #endif = { /* .u = */ {0}, /* .z = */ (char*)0, /* .n = */ (int)0, /* .flags = */ (u16)MEM_Null, /* .enc = */ (u8)0, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 | sqlite3Error(pVm->db, SQLITE_RANGE); pOut = (Mem*)columnNullValue(); } return pOut; } /* | | | | | 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 | sqlite3Error(pVm->db, SQLITE_RANGE); pOut = (Mem*)columnNullValue(); } return pOut; } /* ** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a ** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the ** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If ** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result ** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM. ** ** Specifically, this is called from within: ** ** sqlite3_column_int() ** sqlite3_column_int64() ** sqlite3_column_text() ** sqlite3_column_text16() ** sqlite3_column_real() ** sqlite3_column_bytes() ** sqlite3_column_bytes16() ** sqlite3_column_blob() */ static void columnMallocFailure(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt) { /* If malloc() failed during an encoding conversion within an ** sqlite3_column_XXX API, then set the return code of the statement to ** SQLITE_NOMEM. The next call to _step() (if any) will return SQLITE_ERROR ** and _finalize() will return NOMEM. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 | ** The following routines are used to access elements of the current row ** in the result set. */ const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){ const void *val; val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) ); /* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might | | | | 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 | ** The following routines are used to access elements of the current row ** in the result set. */ const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){ const void *val; val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) ); /* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob() ** expression. */ columnMallocFailure(pStmt); return val; } int sqlite3_column_bytes(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){ int val = sqlite3_value_bytes( columnMem(pStmt,i) ); columnMallocFailure(pStmt); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 | return columnName(pStmt, N, 1, COLNAME_COLUMN); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA */ /******************************* sqlite3_bind_ *************************** | | | | | | | 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 | return columnName(pStmt, N, 1, COLNAME_COLUMN); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA */ /******************************* sqlite3_bind_ *************************** ** ** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement. */ /* ** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the ** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is ** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Otherwise SQLITE_OK. ** ** A successful evaluation of this routine acquires the mutex on p. ** the mutex is released if any kind of error occurs. ** ** The error code stored in database p->db is overwritten with the return ** value in any case. */ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, unsigned int i){ Mem *pVar; if( vdbeSafetyNotNull(p) ){ return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; } sqlite3_mutex_enter(p->db->mutex); if( p->eVdbeState!=VDBE_READY_STATE ){ sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, "bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql); return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; } if( i>=(unsigned int)p->nVar ){ sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_RANGE); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); return SQLITE_RANGE; } pVar = &p->aVar[i]; sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pVar); pVar->flags = MEM_Null; p->db->errCode = SQLITE_OK; /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then ** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan. ** ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-57496-20354 If the specific value bound to a host ** parameter in the WHERE clause might influence the choice of query plan ** for a statement, then the statement will be automatically recompiled, ** as if there had been a schema change, on the first sqlite3_step() call ** following any change to the bindings of that parameter. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 | } /* ** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable. */ int sqlite3_bind_blob( | | | | | | | | | | 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 | } /* ** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable. */ int sqlite3_bind_blob( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const void *zData, int nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( nData<0 ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; #endif return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0); } int sqlite3_bind_blob64( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const void *zData, sqlite3_uint64 nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC ); return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0); } int sqlite3_bind_double(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, double rValue){ int rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 | sqlite3VdbeMemSetPointer(&p->aVar[i-1], pPtr, zPTtype, xDestructor); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); }else if( xDestructor ){ xDestructor(pPtr); } return rc; } | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 | sqlite3VdbeMemSetPointer(&p->aVar[i-1], pPtr, zPTtype, xDestructor); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); }else if( xDestructor ){ xDestructor(pPtr); } return rc; } int sqlite3_bind_text( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const char *zData, int nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8); } int sqlite3_bind_text64( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const char *zData, sqlite3_uint64 nData, void (*xDel)(void*), unsigned char enc ){ assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC ); if( enc!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){ if( enc==SQLITE_UTF16 ) enc = SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE; nData &= ~(u16)1; } return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, enc); } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 int sqlite3_bind_text16( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const void *zData, int n, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, n & ~(u64)1, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 */ int sqlite3_bind_value(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, const sqlite3_value *pValue){ int rc; switch( sqlite3_value_type((sqlite3_value*)pValue) ){ case SQLITE_INTEGER: { rc = sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, i, pValue->u.i); break; } case SQLITE_FLOAT: { assert( pValue->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal) ); rc = sqlite3_bind_double(pStmt, i, (pValue->flags & MEM_Real) ? pValue->u.r : (double)pValue->u.i ); break; } case SQLITE_BLOB: { if( pValue->flags & MEM_Zero ){ rc = sqlite3_bind_zeroblob(pStmt, i, pValue->u.nZero); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 | rc = sqlite3ApiExit(p->db, rc); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); return rc; } /* ** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to. | | | 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 | rc = sqlite3ApiExit(p->db, rc); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); return rc; } /* ** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to. ** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite. */ int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){ Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt; return p ? p->nVar : 0; } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 | /* ** Return the value of a status counter for a prepared statement */ int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int op, int resetFlag){ Vdbe *pVdbe = (Vdbe*)pStmt; u32 v; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR | | | 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 | /* ** Return the value of a status counter for a prepared statement */ int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int op, int resetFlag){ Vdbe *pVdbe = (Vdbe*)pStmt; u32 v; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !pStmt || (op!=SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_MEMUSED && (op<0||op>=ArraySize(pVdbe->aCounter))) ){ (void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; return 0; } #endif if( op==SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_MEMUSED ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* ** Allocate and populate an UnpackedRecord structure based on the serialized ** record in nKey/pKey. Return a pointer to the new UnpackedRecord structure ** if successful, or a NULL pointer if an OOM error is encountered. */ static UnpackedRecord *vdbeUnpackRecord( | | | | 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* ** Allocate and populate an UnpackedRecord structure based on the serialized ** record in nKey/pKey. Return a pointer to the new UnpackedRecord structure ** if successful, or a NULL pointer if an OOM error is encountered. */ static UnpackedRecord *vdbeUnpackRecord( KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, int nKey, const void *pKey ){ UnpackedRecord *pRet; /* Return value */ pRet = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(pKeyInfo); if( pRet ){ memset(pRet->aMem, 0, sizeof(Mem)*(pKeyInfo->nKeyField+1)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* ** This function is designed to be called from within a pre-update callback ** only. It returns zero if the change that caused the callback was made ** immediately by a user SQL statement. Or, if the change was made by a ** trigger program, it returns the number of trigger programs currently | | | | 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* ** This function is designed to be called from within a pre-update callback ** only. It returns zero if the change that caused the callback was made ** immediately by a user SQL statement. Or, if the change was made by a ** trigger program, it returns the number of trigger programs currently ** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a ** top-level trigger etc.). ** ** For the purposes of the previous paragraph, a foreign key CASCADE, SET NULL ** or SET DEFAULT action is considered a trigger. */ int sqlite3_preupdate_depth(sqlite3 *db){ PreUpdate *p = db->pPreUpdate; return (p ? p->v->nFrame : 0); } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* ** This function is designed to be called from within a pre-update callback ** only. */ int sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite(sqlite3 *db){ PreUpdate *p = db->pPreUpdate; return (p ? p->iBlobWrite : -1); } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 | } return 1; } if( flags & SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX ){ idx = iScan; pScan = &p->aScan[idx]; }else{ | | | 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 | } return 1; } if( flags & SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX ){ idx = iScan; pScan = &p->aScan[idx]; }else{ /* If the COMPLEX flag is clear, then this function must ignore any ** ScanStatus structures with ScanStatus.addrLoop set to 0. */ for(idx=0; idx<p->nScan; idx++){ pScan = &p->aScan[idx]; if( pScan->zName ){ iScan--; if( iScan<0 ) break; } |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vdbeaux.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | /* ** 2003 September 6 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | /* ** 2003 September 6 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating ** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.) */ #include "sqliteInt.h" #include "vdbeInt.h" /* Forward references */ static void freeEphemeralFunction(sqlite3 *db, FuncDef *pDef); static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *, Op *, int); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
148 149 150 151 152 153 154 | pB->expmask = pA->expmask; pB->prepFlags = pA->prepFlags; memcpy(pB->aCounter, pA->aCounter, sizeof(pB->aCounter)); pB->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE]++; } /* | | | | | | 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | pB->expmask = pA->expmask; pB->prepFlags = pA->prepFlags; memcpy(pB->aCounter, pA->aCounter, sizeof(pB->aCounter)); pB->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE]++; } /* ** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger ** than its current size. nOp is guaranteed to be less than or equal ** to 1024/sizeof(Op). ** ** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return ** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain ** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be ** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe). */ static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){ VdbeOp *pNew; Parse *p = v->pParse; /* The SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS compile-time option is designed to force ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for ** simulated OOM faults. SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS is generally used ** during testing only. With SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS grow the op array ** by the minimum* amount required until the size reaches 512. Normal ** operation (without SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS) is to double the current ** size of the op array or add 1KB of space, whichever is smaller. */ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS sqlite3_int64 nNew = (v->nOpAlloc>=512 ? 2*(sqlite3_int64)v->nOpAlloc |
︙ | ︙ | |||
620 621 622 623 624 625 626 | } } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* sqlite3AssertMayAbort() logic */ /* ** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes | | | | | 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 | } } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* sqlite3AssertMayAbort() logic */ /* ** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes ** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may ** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows: ** ** Op *pOp; ** VdbeOpIter sIter; ** ** memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter)); ** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe* ** while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){ ** // Do something with pOp ** } ** sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub); ** */ typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter; struct VdbeOpIter { Vdbe *v; /* Vdbe to iterate through the opcodes of */ SubProgram **apSub; /* Array of subprograms */ int nSub; /* Number of entries in apSub */ int iAddr; /* Address of next instruction to return */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
665 666 667 668 669 670 671 | pRet = &aOp[p->iAddr]; p->iAddr++; if( p->iAddr==nOp ){ p->iSub++; p->iAddr = 0; } | | | 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 | pRet = &aOp[p->iAddr]; p->iAddr++; if( p->iAddr==nOp ){ p->iSub++; p->iAddr = 0; } if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){ int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*); int j; for(j=0; j<p->nSub; j++){ if( p->apSub[j]==pRet->p4.pProgram ) break; } if( j==p->nSub ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
699 700 701 702 703 704 705 | ** * OP_Halt with P1=SQLITE_CONSTRAINT and P2=OE_Abort. ** * OP_HaltIfNull with P1=SQLITE_CONSTRAINT and P2=OE_Abort. ** * OP_Destroy ** * OP_VUpdate ** * OP_VCreate ** * OP_VRename ** * OP_FkCounter with P2==0 (immediate foreign key constraint) | | | 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 | ** * OP_Halt with P1=SQLITE_CONSTRAINT and P2=OE_Abort. ** * OP_HaltIfNull with P1=SQLITE_CONSTRAINT and P2=OE_Abort. ** * OP_Destroy ** * OP_VUpdate ** * OP_VCreate ** * OP_VRename ** * OP_FkCounter with P2==0 (immediate foreign key constraint) ** * OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine ** (for CREATE TABLE AS SELECT ...) ** ** Then check that the value of Parse.mayAbort is true if an ** ABORT may be thrown, or false otherwise. Return true if it does ** match, or false otherwise. This function is intended to be used as ** part of an assert statement in the compiler. Similar to: ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
724 725 726 727 728 729 730 | if( v==0 ) return 0; memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter)); sIter.v = v; while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){ int opcode = pOp->opcode; | | | | | 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 | if( v==0 ) return 0; memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter)); sIter.v = v; while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){ int opcode = pOp->opcode; if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename || opcode==OP_VDestroy || opcode==OP_VCreate || opcode==OP_ParseSchema || opcode==OP_Function || opcode==OP_PureFunc || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull) && ((pOp->p1)!=SQLITE_OK && pOp->p2==OE_Abort)) ){ hasAbort = 1; break; } if( opcode==OP_CreateBtree && pOp->p3==BTREE_INTKEY ) hasCreateTable = 1; if( mayAbort ){ /* hasCreateIndex may also be set for some DELETE statements that use ** OP_Clear. So this routine may end up returning true in the case ** where a "DELETE FROM tbl" has a statement-journal but does not ** require one. This is not so bad - it is an inefficiency, not a bug. */ if( opcode==OP_CreateBtree && pOp->p3==BTREE_BLOBKEY ) hasCreateIndex = 1; if( opcode==OP_Clear ) hasCreateIndex = 1; } if( opcode==OP_InitCoroutine ) hasInitCoroutine = 1; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY |
︙ | ︙ | |||
822 823 824 825 826 827 828 | int *aLabel = pParse->aLabel; assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ); /* tag-20230419-1 */ p->readOnly = 1; p->bIsReader = 0; pOp = &p->aOp[p->nOp-1]; assert( p->aOp[0].opcode==OP_Init ); | | | 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 | int *aLabel = pParse->aLabel; assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ); /* tag-20230419-1 */ p->readOnly = 1; p->bIsReader = 0; pOp = &p->aOp[p->nOp-1]; assert( p->aOp[0].opcode==OP_Init ); while( 1 /* Loop terminates when it reaches the OP_Init opcode */ ){ /* Only JUMP opcodes and the short list of special opcodes in the switch ** below need to be considered. The mkopcodeh.tcl generator script groups ** all these opcodes together near the front of the opcode list. Skip ** any opcode that does not need processing by virtual of the fact that ** it is larger than SQLITE_MX_JUMP_OPCODE, as a performance optimization. */ if( pOp->opcode<=SQLITE_MX_JUMP_OPCODE ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
888 889 890 891 892 893 894 | } } /* The mkopcodeh.tcl script has so arranged things that the only ** non-jump opcodes less than SQLITE_MX_JUMP_CODE are guaranteed to ** have non-negative values for P2. */ assert( (sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode]&OPFLG_JUMP)==0 || pOp->p2>=0); } | | | 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 | } } /* The mkopcodeh.tcl script has so arranged things that the only ** non-jump opcodes less than SQLITE_MX_JUMP_CODE are guaranteed to ** have non-negative values for P2. */ assert( (sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode]&OPFLG_JUMP)==0 || pOp->p2>=0); } assert( pOp>p->aOp ); pOp--; } resolve_p2_values_loop_exit: if( aLabel ){ sqlite3DbNNFreeNN(p->db, pParse->aLabel); pParse->aLabel = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 | if( onError==OE_Abort ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(p, OP_Abortable); } #endif /* ** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with ** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility | | | | | 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 | if( onError==OE_Abort ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(p, OP_Abortable); } #endif /* ** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with ** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility ** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the ** vdbeFreeOpArray() function. ** ** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned ** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and ** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the ** returned program. */ VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){ VdbeOp *aOp = p->aOp; assert( aOp && !p->db->mallocFailed ); /* Check that sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree() was not called on this VM */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 | #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS) /* ** Add an entry to the array of counters managed by sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus(). */ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus( Vdbe *p, /* VM to add scanstatus() to */ int addrExplain, /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */ | | | 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 | #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS) /* ** Add an entry to the array of counters managed by sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus(). */ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus( Vdbe *p, /* VM to add scanstatus() to */ int addrExplain, /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */ int addrLoop, /* Address of loop counter */ int addrVisit, /* Address of rows visited counter */ LogEst nEst, /* Estimated number of output rows */ const char *zName /* Name of table or index being scanned */ ){ if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){ sqlite3_int64 nByte = (p->nScan+1) * sizeof(ScanStatus); ScanStatus *aNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 | } } /* ** Add the range of instructions from addrStart to addrEnd (inclusive) to ** the set of those corresponding to the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() counters ** associated with the OP_Explain instruction at addrExplain. The | | | | | | 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 | } } /* ** Add the range of instructions from addrStart to addrEnd (inclusive) to ** the set of those corresponding to the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() counters ** associated with the OP_Explain instruction at addrExplain. The ** sum of the sqlite3Hwtime() values for each of these instructions ** will be returned for SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE requests. */ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange( Vdbe *p, int addrExplain, int addrStart, int addrEnd ){ if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){ ScanStatus *pScan = 0; int ii; for(ii=p->nScan-1; ii>=0; ii--){ pScan = &p->aScan[ii]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 | /* ** Set the addresses for the SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NLOOP and SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NROW ** counters for the query element associated with the OP_Explain at ** addrExplain. */ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusCounters( | | | | | 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 | /* ** Set the addresses for the SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NLOOP and SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NROW ** counters for the query element associated with the OP_Explain at ** addrExplain. */ void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusCounters( Vdbe *p, int addrExplain, int addrLoop, int addrVisit ){ if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){ ScanStatus *pScan = 0; int ii; for(ii=p->nScan-1; ii>=0; ii--){ pScan = &p->aScan[ii]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 | sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(p, addr, p->nOp); } } /* ** If the input FuncDef structure is ephemeral, then free it. If | | | 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 | sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(p, addr, p->nOp); } } /* ** If the input FuncDef structure is ephemeral, then free it. If ** the FuncDef is not ephemeral, then do nothing. */ static void freeEphemeralFunction(sqlite3 *db, FuncDef *pDef){ assert( db!=0 ); if( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM)!=0 ){ sqlite3DbNNFreeNN(db, pDef); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 | break; } } } /* ** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the | | | | | 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 | break; } } } /* ** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the ** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain ** nOp entries. */ static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){ assert( nOp>=0 ); assert( db!=0 ); if( aOp ){ Op *pOp = &aOp[nOp-1]; while(1){ /* Exit via break */ if( pOp->p4type <= P4_FREE_IF_LE ) freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment); #endif if( pOp==aOp ) break; pOp--; } sqlite3DbNNFreeNN(db, aOp); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 | ** static array using sqlite3VdbeAddOpList but we want to make a ** few minor changes to the program. ** ** If n>=0 then the P4 operand is dynamic, meaning that a copy of ** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc(). ** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the ** first null byte. If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4. | | | 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 | ** static array using sqlite3VdbeAddOpList but we want to make a ** few minor changes to the program. ** ** If n>=0 then the P4 operand is dynamic, meaning that a copy of ** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc(). ** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the ** first null byte. If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4. ** ** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points ** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of ** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer. ** ** If addr<0 then change P4 on the most recently inserted instruction. */ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE vdbeChangeP4Full( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 | pOp->p4.p = (void*)zP4; pOp->p4type = (signed char)n; if( n==P4_VTAB ) sqlite3VtabLock((VTable*)zP4); } } /* | | | 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 | pOp->p4.p = (void*)zP4; pOp->p4type = (signed char)n; if( n==P4_VTAB ) sqlite3VtabLock((VTable*)zP4); } } /* ** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction ** to the value defined by the arguments. This is a high-speed ** version of sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(). ** ** The P4 operand must not have been previously defined. And the new ** P4 must not be P4_INT32. Use sqlite3VdbeChangeP4() in either of ** those cases. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 | ** Return the opcode for a given address. The address must be non-negative. ** See sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp() to get the most recently added opcode. ** ** If a memory allocation error has occurred prior to the calling of this ** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned. That opcode ** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value. ** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning | | | 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 | ** Return the opcode for a given address. The address must be non-negative. ** See sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp() to get the most recently added opcode. ** ** If a memory allocation error has occurred prior to the calling of this ** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned. That opcode ** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value. ** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning ** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from ** this routine is a valid pointer. But because the dummy.opcode is 0, ** dummy will never be written to. This is verified by code inspection and ** by running with Valgrind. */ VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeGetOp(Vdbe *p, int addr){ /* C89 specifies that the constant "dummy" will be initialized to all ** zeros, which is correct. MSVC generates a warning, nevertheless. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 | KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; assert( pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 ); sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, "k(%d", pKeyInfo->nKeyField); for(j=0; j<pKeyInfo->nKeyField; j++){ CollSeq *pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[j]; const char *zColl = pColl ? pColl->zName : ""; if( strcmp(zColl, "BINARY")==0 ) zColl = "B"; | | | | | 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 | KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; assert( pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 ); sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, "k(%d", pKeyInfo->nKeyField); for(j=0; j<pKeyInfo->nKeyField; j++){ CollSeq *pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[j]; const char *zColl = pColl ? pColl->zName : ""; if( strcmp(zColl, "BINARY")==0 ) zColl = "B"; sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, ",%s%s%s", (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC) ? "-" : "", (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)? "N." : "", zColl); } sqlite3_str_append(&x, ")", 1); break; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS case P4_EXPR: { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 | ** this routine obtains the mutex associated with each BtShared structure ** that may be accessed by the VM passed as an argument. In doing so it also ** sets the BtShared.db member of each of the BtShared structures, ensuring ** that the correct busy-handler callback is invoked if required. ** ** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then ** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables | | | | 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 | ** this routine obtains the mutex associated with each BtShared structure ** that may be accessed by the VM passed as an argument. In doing so it also ** sets the BtShared.db member of each of the BtShared structures, ensuring ** that the correct busy-handler callback is invoked if required. ** ** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then ** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables ** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle ** associated with the VM. ** ** If SQLite is not threadsafe and does not support shared-cache mode, this ** function is a no-op. ** ** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared ** statement p will ever use. Let N be the number of bits in p->btreeMask ** corresponding to btrees that use shared cache. Then the runtime of ** this routine is N*N. But as N is rarely more than 1, this should not ** be a problem. */ void sqlite3VdbeEnter(Vdbe *p){ int i; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 | zCom = sqlite3VdbeDisplayComment(0, pOp, zP4); #else zCom = 0; #endif /* NB: The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created ** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the ** information from the vdbe.c source text */ | | | | 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 | zCom = sqlite3VdbeDisplayComment(0, pOp, zP4); #else zCom = 0; #endif /* NB: The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created ** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the ** information from the vdbe.c source text */ fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc, sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3, zP4 ? zP4 : "", pOp->p5, zCom ? zCom : "" ); fflush(pOut); sqlite3_free(zP4); sqlite3_free(zCom); sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 | return; } do{ assert( (&p[1])==pEnd || p[0].db==p[1].db ); assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) ); /* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease() | | | | | | | | 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 | return; } do{ assert( (&p[1])==pEnd || p[0].db==p[1].db ); assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) ); /* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease() ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is ** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources. ** ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7 ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if ** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind() ** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction. */ testcase( p->flags & MEM_Agg ); testcase( p->flags & MEM_Dyn ); if( p->flags&(MEM_Agg|MEM_Dyn) ){ testcase( (p->flags & MEM_Dyn)!=0 && p->xDel==sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel ); sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(p); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 | } if( eMode==0 ) break; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB if( eMode==2 ){ Op *pOp = aOp + i; if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead ) break; if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG)==0 ) break; | | | 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 | } if( eMode==0 ) break; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB if( eMode==2 ){ Op *pOp = aOp + i; if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead ) break; if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG)==0 ) break; if( pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx ) break; }else #endif { assert( eMode==1 ); if( aOp[i].opcode==OP_Explain ) break; if( aOp[i].opcode==OP_Init && iPc>1 ) break; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 | sqlite3VdbeError(p, sqlite3ErrStr(p->rc)); }else{ char *zP4 = sqlite3VdbeDisplayP4(db, pOp); if( p->explain==2 ){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, pOp->p1); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+1, pOp->p2); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+2, pOp->p3); | | | 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 | sqlite3VdbeError(p, sqlite3ErrStr(p->rc)); }else{ char *zP4 = sqlite3VdbeDisplayP4(db, pOp); if( p->explain==2 ){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, pOp->p1); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+1, pOp->p2); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+2, pOp->p3); sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pMem+3, zP4, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free); p->nResColumn = 4; }else{ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+0, i); sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pMem+1, (char*)sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+2, pOp->p1); sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+3, pOp->p2); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 | } /* ** Prepare a virtual machine for execution for the first time after ** creating the virtual machine. This involves things such ** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter. ** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more | | | | 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 | } /* ** Prepare a virtual machine for execution for the first time after ** creating the virtual machine. This involves things such ** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter. ** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more ** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec(). ** ** This function may be called exactly once on each virtual machine. ** After this routine is called the VM has been "packaged" and is ready ** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to ** sqlite3VdbeAddOp() functions are prohibited. This routine disconnects ** the Vdbe from the Parse object that helped generate it so that the ** the Vdbe becomes an independent entity and the Parse object can be ** destroyed. ** ** Use the sqlite3VdbeRewind() procedure to restore a virtual machine back ** to its initial state after it has been run. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 | pParse->pVList = 0; db = p->db; assert( db->mallocFailed==0 ); nVar = pParse->nVar; nMem = pParse->nMem; nCursor = pParse->nTab; nArg = pParse->nMaxArg; | | | 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 | pParse->pVList = 0; db = p->db; assert( db->mallocFailed==0 ); nVar = pParse->nVar; nMem = pParse->nMem; nCursor = pParse->nTab; nArg = pParse->nMaxArg; /* Each cursor uses a memory cell. The first cursor (cursor 0) can ** use aMem[0] which is not otherwise used by the VDBE program. Allocate ** space at the end of aMem[] for cursors 1 and greater. ** See also: allocateCursor(). */ nMem += nCursor; if( nCursor==0 && nMem>0 ) nMem++; /* Space for aMem[0] even if not used */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 | sqlite3VdbeSetColName(p, i-iFirst, COLNAME_NAME, azColName[i], SQLITE_STATIC); } } p->expired = 0; /* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in one or two | | | | 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 | sqlite3VdbeSetColName(p, i-iFirst, COLNAME_NAME, azColName[i], SQLITE_STATIC); } } p->expired = 0; /* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in one or two ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the ** end of the opcode array. If we are unable to satisfy all memory ** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation. ** ** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from ** the leftover memory at the end of the opcode array. This can significantly ** reduce the amount of memory held by a prepared statement. */ x.nNeeded = 0; p->aMem = allocSpace(&x, 0, nMem*sizeof(Mem)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 | initMemArray(p->aMem, nMem, db, MEM_Undefined); memset(p->apCsr, 0, nCursor*sizeof(VdbeCursor*)); } sqlite3VdbeRewind(p); } /* | | | 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 | initMemArray(p->aMem, nMem, db, MEM_Undefined); memset(p->apCsr, 0, nCursor*sizeof(VdbeCursor*)); } sqlite3VdbeRewind(p); } /* ** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor ** happens to hold. */ void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){ if( pCx ) sqlite3VdbeFreeCursorNN(p,pCx); } void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursorNN(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){ switch( pCx->eCurType ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 | pFrame->pAuxData = 0; return pFrame->pc; } /* ** Close all cursors. ** | | | 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 | pFrame->pAuxData = 0; return pFrame->pc; } /* ** Close all cursors. ** ** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory ** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain ** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to ** open cursors. */ static void closeAllCursors(Vdbe *p){ if( p->pFrame ){ VdbeFrame *pFrame; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 | int nTrans = 0; /* Number of databases with an active write-transaction ** that are candidates for a two-phase commit using a ** super-journal */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int needXcommit = 0; #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE | | | | | | | | | | 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 | int nTrans = 0; /* Number of databases with an active write-transaction ** that are candidates for a two-phase commit using a ** super-journal */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int needXcommit = 0; #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used. */ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); #endif /* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any ** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to ** be done before determining whether a super-journal file is ** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database ** to the transaction. */ rc = sqlite3VtabSync(db, p); /* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than ** one database file has an open write transaction, a super-journal ** file is required for an atomic commit. */ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ){ /* Whether or not a database might need a super-journal depends upon ** its journal mode (among other things). This matrix determines which ** journal modes use a super-journal and which do not */ static const u8 aMJNeeded[] = { /* DELETE */ 1, /* PERSIST */ 1, /* OFF */ 0, /* TRUNCATE */ 1, /* MEMORY */ 0, /* WAL */ 0 }; Pager *pPager; /* Pager associated with pBt */ needXcommit = 1; sqlite3BtreeEnter(pBt); pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt); if( db->aDb[i].safety_level!=PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_OFF && aMJNeeded[sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager)] && sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(pPager)==0 ){ assert( i!=1 ); nTrans++; } rc = sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(pPager); sqlite3BtreeLeave(pBt); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 | } /* The simple case - no more than one database file (not counting the ** TEMP database) has a transaction active. There is no need for the ** super-journal. ** ** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length | | | | | 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 | } /* The simple case - no more than one database file (not counting the ** TEMP database) has a transaction active. There is no need for the ** super-journal. ** ** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the ** simple case then too. */ if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt)) || nTrans<=1 ){ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, 0); } } /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1. ** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an ** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely, ** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error. */ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 | ** be "9" to avoid name collisions when using 8+3 filenames. */ assert( zSuper[sqlite3Strlen30(zSuper)-3]=='9' ); sqlite3FileSuffix3(zMainFile, zSuper); rc = sqlite3OsAccess(pVfs, zSuper, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &res); }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* Open the super-journal. */ | | | | 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 | ** be "9" to avoid name collisions when using 8+3 filenames. */ assert( zSuper[sqlite3Strlen30(zSuper)-3]=='9' ); sqlite3FileSuffix3(zMainFile, zSuper); rc = sqlite3OsAccess(pVfs, zSuper, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &res); }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* Open the super-journal. */ rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zSuper, &pSuperJrnl, SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE| SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL, 0 ); } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3DbFree(db, zSuper-4); return rc; } /* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new ** super-journal file. If an error occurs at this point close ** and delete the super-journal file. All the individual journal files ** still have 'null' as the super-journal pointer, so they will roll ** back independently if a failure occurs. */ for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 | ** ** If the error occurs during the first call to ** sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(), then there is a chance that the ** super-journal file will be orphaned. But we cannot delete it, ** in case the super-journal file name was written into the journal ** file before the failure occurred. */ | | | 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 | ** ** If the error occurs during the first call to ** sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(), then there is a chance that the ** super-journal file will be orphaned. But we cannot delete it, ** in case the super-journal file name was written into the journal ** file before the failure occurred. */ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zSuper); } } sqlite3OsCloseFree(pSuperJrnl); assert( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 | ** deleting or truncating journals. If something goes wrong while ** this is happening we don't really care. The integrity of the ** transaction is already guaranteed, but some stray 'cold' journals ** may be lying around. Returning an error code won't help matters. */ disable_simulated_io_errors(); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); | | | | 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 | ** deleting or truncating journals. If something goes wrong while ** this is happening we don't really care. The integrity of the ** transaction is already guaranteed, but some stray 'cold' journals ** may be lying around. Returning an error code won't help matters. */ disable_simulated_io_errors(); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt, 1); } } sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); enable_simulated_io_errors(); sqlite3VtabCommit(db); } #endif return rc; } /* ** This routine checks that the sqlite3.nVdbeActive count variable ** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are ** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match. ** This is an internal self-check only - it is not an essential processing ** step. ** ** This is a no-op if NDEBUG is defined. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 | #define checkActiveVdbeCnt(x) #endif /* ** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction, ** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement | | | | | 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 | #define checkActiveVdbeCnt(x) #endif /* ** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction, ** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement ** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the ** statement transaction is committed. ** ** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned. ** Otherwise SQLITE_OK. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){ sqlite3 *const db = p->db; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int i; const int iSavepoint = p->iStatement-1; assert( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK || eOp==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE); assert( db->nStatement>0 ); assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) ); for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ int rc2 = SQLITE_OK; Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ rc2 = sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(pBt, SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, iSavepoint); } if( rc2==SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 | rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, iSavepoint); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, iSavepoint); } } | | | | | | | | | 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 | rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, iSavepoint); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, iSavepoint); } } /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when ** the statement transaction was opened. */ if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons; db->nDeferredImmCons = p->nStmtDefImmCons; } return rc; } int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){ if( p->db->nStatement && p->iStatement ){ return vdbeCloseStatement(p, eOp); } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database ** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be ** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint ** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. ** ** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns ** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY ** and write an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY int sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(Vdbe *p, int deferred){ sqlite3 *db = p->db; if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0) || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0) ){ p->rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY; p->errorAction = OE_Abort; sqlite3VdbeError(p, "FOREIGN KEY constraint failed"); if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)==0 ) return SQLITE_ERROR; return SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 | */ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ int rc; /* Used to store transient return codes */ sqlite3 *db = p->db; /* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or ** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the | | | 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 | */ int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ int rc; /* Used to store transient return codes */ sqlite3 *db = p->db; /* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or ** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the ** execution of this virtual machine. ** ** If any of the following errors occur: ** ** SQLITE_NOMEM ** SQLITE_IOERR ** SQLITE_FULL ** SQLITE_INTERRUPT |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 | || mrc==SQLITE_IOERR || mrc==SQLITE_INTERRUPT || mrc==SQLITE_FULL; }else{ mrc = isSpecialError = 0; } if( isSpecialError ){ | | | | | | | 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 | || mrc==SQLITE_IOERR || mrc==SQLITE_INTERRUPT || mrc==SQLITE_FULL; }else{ mrc = isSpecialError = 0; } if( isSpecialError ){ /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT, ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a ** consistent state. ** ** Even if the statement is read-only, it is important to perform ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error ** occurred while writing to the journal, sub-journal or database ** file as part of an effort to free up cache space (see function ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore ** the pager to a consistent state. */ if( !p->readOnly || mrc!=SQLITE_INTERRUPT ){ if( (mrc==SQLITE_NOMEM || mrc==SQLITE_FULL) && p->usesStmtJournal ){ eStatementOp = SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK; }else{ /* We are forced to roll back the active transaction. Before doing |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 | } } /* Check for immediate foreign key violations. */ if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){ sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0); } | | | | | | | | | | | | | 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 | } } /* Check for immediate foreign key violations. */ if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){ sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0); } /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction. ** ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled ** above has occurred. */ if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db) && db->autoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0) ){ if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){ rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ if( NEVER(p->readOnly) ){ sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); return SQLITE_ERROR; } rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY; }else if( db->flags & SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT; db->flags &= ~SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly; }else{ /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful ** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit ** is required. */ rc = vdbeCommit(db, p); } if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && p->readOnly ){ sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); return SQLITE_BUSY; }else if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 | }else{ sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db); db->autoCommit = 1; p->nChange = 0; } } | | | | | 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 | }else{ sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db); db->autoCommit = 1; p->nChange = 0; } } /* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to ** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to ** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement ** error code is SQLITE_OK or SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, then promote the ** current statement error code. */ if( eStatementOp ){ rc = sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(p, eStatementOp); if( rc ){ if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT ){ p->rc = rc; sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); p->zErrMsg = 0; } sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db); db->autoCommit = 1; p->nChange = 0; } } /* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter. */ if( p->changeCntOn ){ if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); }else{ sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, 0); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 | p->eVdbeState = VDBE_HALT_STATE; checkActiveVdbeCnt(db); if( db->mallocFailed ){ p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } /* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held | | | 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 | p->eVdbeState = VDBE_HALT_STATE; checkActiveVdbeCnt(db); if( db->mallocFailed ){ p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } /* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked() ** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks. */ if( db->autoCommit ){ sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(db); } assert( db->nVdbeActive>0 || db->autoCommit==0 || db->nStatement==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 | */ void sqlite3VdbeResetStepResult(Vdbe *p){ p->rc = SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed | | | 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 | */ void sqlite3VdbeResetStepResult(Vdbe *p){ p->rc = SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed ** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be ** returned by calls to sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg()). ** ** This function does not clear the VDBE error code or message, just ** copies them to the database handle. */ int sqlite3VdbeTransferError(Vdbe *p){ sqlite3 *db = p->db; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 | db->errCode = rc; db->errByteOffset = -1; return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG /* | | | 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 | db->errCode = rc; db->errByteOffset = -1; return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG /* ** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run, ** invoke it. */ static void vdbeInvokeSqllog(Vdbe *v){ if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xSqllog && v->rc==SQLITE_OK && v->zSql && v->pc>=0 ){ char *zExpanded = sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(v, v->zSql); assert( v->db->init.busy==0 ); if( zExpanded ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 | db->errCode = p->rc; } } /* Reset register contents and reclaim error message memory. */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG | | | 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 | db->errCode = p->rc; } } /* Reset register contents and reclaim error message memory. */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and ** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up. */ if( p->apCsr ) for(i=0; i<p->nCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr[i]==0 ); if( p->aMem ){ for(i=0; i<p->nMem; i++) assert( p->aMem[i].flags==MEM_Undefined ); } #endif if( p->zErrMsg ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 | } fclose(out); } } #endif return p->rc & db->errMask; } | | | 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 | } fclose(out); } } #endif return p->rc & db->errMask; } /* ** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution. Return an integer which is ** the result code. Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg. */ int sqlite3VdbeFinalize(Vdbe *p){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( VDBE_RUN_STATE>VDBE_READY_STATE ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 | /* ** If parameter iOp is less than zero, then invoke the destructor for ** all auxiliary data pointers currently cached by the VM passed as ** the first argument. ** ** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is | | | | 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 | /* ** If parameter iOp is less than zero, then invoke the destructor for ** all auxiliary data pointers currently cached by the VM passed as ** the first argument. ** ** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is ** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user ** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of ** VM pVdbe, and only then if: ** ** * the associated function parameter is the 32nd or later (counting ** from left to right), or ** ** * the corresponding bit in argument mask is clear (where the first ** function parameter corresponds to bit 0 etc.). |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 | } #endif /* inlined into OP_MakeRecord */ /* ** The sizes for serial types less than 128 */ const u8 sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[128] = { | | | 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 | } #endif /* inlined into OP_MakeRecord */ /* ** The sizes for serial types less than 128 */ const u8 sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[128] = { /* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 */ /* 0 */ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 8, 0, 0, /* 10 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, /* 20 */ 4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 6, 7, 7, 8, 8, /* 30 */ 9, 9, 10, 10, 11, 11, 12, 12, 13, 13, /* 40 */ 14, 14, 15, 15, 16, 16, 17, 17, 18, 18, /* 50 */ 19, 19, 20, 20, 21, 21, 22, 22, 23, 23, /* 60 */ 24, 24, 25, 25, 26, 26, 27, 27, 28, 28, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 | /* ** Return the length of the data corresponding to the supplied serial-type. */ u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){ if( serial_type>=128 ){ return (serial_type-12)/2; }else{ | | | | | | 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 | /* ** Return the length of the data corresponding to the supplied serial-type. */ u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){ if( serial_type>=128 ){ return (serial_type-12)/2; }else{ assert( serial_type<12 || sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]==(serial_type - 12)/2 ); return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]; } } u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){ assert( serial_type<128 ); return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]; } /* ** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating ** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the ** upper 4 bytes. Return the result. ** ** For most architectures, this is a no-op. ** ** (later): It is reported to me that the mixed-endian problem ** on ARM7 is an issue with GCC, not with the ARM7 chip. It seems ** that early versions of GCC stored the two words of a 64-bit |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 | ** application using -DSQLITE_DEBUG=1 at least once. With DEBUG ** enabled, some asserts below will ensure that the byte order of ** floating point values is correct. ** ** (2007-08-30) Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely ** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers. Frank ** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware | | | 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 | ** application using -DSQLITE_DEBUG=1 at least once. With DEBUG ** enabled, some asserts below will ensure that the byte order of ** floating point values is correct. ** ** (2007-08-30) Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely ** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers. Frank ** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware ** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full ** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard. (This is the ** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.) On such systems, floating point ** byte swapping becomes very complicated. To avoid problems, ** the necessary byte swapping is carried out using a 64-bit integer ** rather than a 64-bit float. Frank assures us that the code here ** works for him. We, the developers, have no way to independently ** verify this, but Frank seems to know what he is talking about |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 | ** Deserialize the data blob pointed to by buf as serial type serial_type ** and store the result in pMem. ** ** This function is implemented as two separate routines for performance. ** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate ** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer ** is avoided. | | | 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 | ** Deserialize the data blob pointed to by buf as serial type serial_type ** and store the result in pMem. ** ** This function is implemented as two separate routines for performance. ** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate ** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer ** is avoided. */ static void serialGet( const unsigned char *buf, /* Buffer to deserialize from */ u32 serial_type, /* Serial type to deserialize */ Mem *pMem /* Memory cell to write value into */ ){ u64 x = FOUR_BYTE_UINT(buf); u32 y = FOUR_BYTE_UINT(buf+4); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 | testcase( pMem->u.i<0 ); return; } case 4: { /* 4-byte signed integer */ /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-01849-26079 Value is a big-endian 32-bit ** twos-complement integer. */ pMem->u.i = FOUR_BYTE_INT(buf); | | | 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 | testcase( pMem->u.i<0 ); return; } case 4: { /* 4-byte signed integer */ /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-01849-26079 Value is a big-endian 32-bit ** twos-complement integer. */ pMem->u.i = FOUR_BYTE_INT(buf); #ifdef __HP_cc /* Work around a sign-extension bug in the HP compiler for HP/UX */ if( buf[0]&0x80 ) pMem->u.i |= 0xffffffff80000000LL; #endif pMem->flags = MEM_Int; testcase( pMem->u.i<0 ); return; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 | ** This routine is used to allocate sufficient space for an UnpackedRecord ** structure large enough to be used with sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack() if ** the first argument is a pointer to KeyInfo structure pKeyInfo. ** ** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within ** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably ** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should | | | 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 | ** This routine is used to allocate sufficient space for an UnpackedRecord ** structure large enough to be used with sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack() if ** the first argument is a pointer to KeyInfo structure pKeyInfo. ** ** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within ** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably ** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should ** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the ** allocation comes from the pSpace/szSpace buffer, *ppFree is set to NULL ** before returning. ** ** If an OOM error occurs, NULL is returned. */ UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord( KeyInfo *pKeyInfo /* Description of the record */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 | assert( pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 ); p->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; p->nField = pKeyInfo->nKeyField + 1; return p; } /* | | | | | 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 | assert( pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 ); p->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; p->nField = pKeyInfo->nKeyField + 1; return p; } /* ** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the ** UnpackedRecord structure indicated by the fourth argument with the ** contents of the decoded record. */ void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack( KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, /* Information about the record format */ int nKey, /* Size of the binary record */ const void *pKey, /* The binary record */ UnpackedRecord *p /* Populate this structure before returning. */ ){ const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char *)pKey; u32 d; u32 idx; /* Offset in aKey[] to read from */ u16 u; /* Unsigned loop counter */ u32 szHdr; Mem *pMem = p->aMem; p->default_rc = 0; assert( EIGHT_BYTE_ALIGNMENT(pMem) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 | sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(&aKey[d], serial_type, pMem); d += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type); pMem++; if( (++u)>=p->nField ) break; } if( d>(u32)nKey && u ){ assert( CORRUPT_DB ); | | | 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 | sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(&aKey[d], serial_type, pMem); d += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type); pMem++; if( (++u)>=p->nField ) break; } if( d>(u32)nKey && u ){ assert( CORRUPT_DB ); /* In a corrupt record entry, the last pMem might have been set up using ** uninitialized memory. Overwrite its value with NULL, to prevent ** warnings from MSAN. */ sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pMem-1); } assert( u<=pKeyInfo->nKeyField + 1 ); p->nField = u; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 | mem1.enc = pKeyInfo->enc; mem1.db = pKeyInfo->db; /* mem1.flags = 0; // Will be initialized by sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() */ VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */ /* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized. ** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints. | | | | | | 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 | mem1.enc = pKeyInfo->enc; mem1.db = pKeyInfo->db; /* mem1.flags = 0; // Will be initialized by sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() */ VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */ /* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized. ** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints. ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing ** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance ** impact, since this routine is a very high runner. And so, we choose ** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized. */ /* mem1.u.i = 0; // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */ idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1); if( szHdr1>98307 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT; d1 = szHdr1; assert( pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField || CORRUPT_DB ); assert( pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 ); assert( pKeyInfo->nKeyField>0 ); assert( idx1<=szHdr1 || CORRUPT_DB ); do{ u32 serial_type1; /* Read the serial types for the next element in each key. */ idx1 += getVarint32( aKey1+idx1, serial_type1 ); /* Verify that there is enough key space remaining to avoid ** a buffer overread. The "d1+serial_type1+2" subexpression will ** always be greater than or equal to the amount of required key space. ** Use that approximation to avoid the more expensive call to ** sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen() in the common case. */ if( d1+(u64)serial_type1+2>(u64)nKey1 && d1+(u64)sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u64)nKey1 ){ break; } /* Extract the values to be compared. */ sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(&aKey1[d1], serial_type1, &mem1); d1 += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1); /* Do the comparison */ rc = sqlite3MemCompare(&mem1, &pPKey2->aMem[i], pKeyInfo->nAllField>i ? pKeyInfo->aColl[i] : 0); if( rc!=0 ){ assert( mem1.szMalloc==0 ); /* See comment below */ if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL) && ((mem1.flags & MEM_Null) || (pPKey2->aMem[i].flags & MEM_Null)) ){ rc = -rc; } if( pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC ){ rc = -rc; /* Invert the result for DESC sort order. */ } goto debugCompareEnd; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 | ** If this constraint is not satisfied, it means that the high-speed ** vdbeRecordCompareInt() and vdbeRecordCompareString() routines will ** not work correctly. If this assert() ever fires, it probably means ** that the KeyInfo.nKeyField or KeyInfo.nAllField values were computed ** incorrectly. */ static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits( | | | 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 | ** If this constraint is not satisfied, it means that the high-speed ** vdbeRecordCompareInt() and vdbeRecordCompareString() routines will ** not work correctly. If this assert() ever fires, it probably means ** that the KeyInfo.nKeyField or KeyInfo.nAllField values were computed ** incorrectly. */ static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits( int nKey, const void *pKey, /* The record to verify */ const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo /* Compare size with this KeyInfo */ ){ int nField = 0; u32 szHdr; u32 idx; u32 notUsed; const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char*)pKey; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 | #else # define vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(A,B,C) #endif /* ** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values ** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero | | | 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 | #else # define vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(A,B,C) #endif /* ** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values ** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero ** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than ** *pMem2, respectively. Similar in spirit to "rc = (*pMem1) - (*pMem2);". */ static int vdbeCompareMemString( const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const CollSeq *pColl, u8 *prcErr /* If an OOM occurs, set to SQLITE_NOMEM */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 | int f1, f2; int combined_flags; f1 = pMem1->flags; f2 = pMem2->flags; combined_flags = f1|f2; assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem1) && !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem2) ); | | | 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 4452 4453 4454 4455 | int f1, f2; int combined_flags; f1 = pMem1->flags; f2 = pMem2->flags; combined_flags = f1|f2; assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem1) && !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem2) ); /* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values ** are NULL, return 0. */ if( combined_flags&MEM_Null ){ return (f2&MEM_Null) - (f1&MEM_Null); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 | return 1; } if( (f2 & MEM_Str)==0 ){ return -1; } assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc || pMem1->db->mallocFailed ); | | | | | 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 | return 1; } if( (f2 & MEM_Str)==0 ){ return -1; } assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc || pMem1->db->mallocFailed ); assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE ); /* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if ** the user deletes the collation sequence after the vdbe program is ** compiled (this was not always the case). */ assert( !pColl || pColl->xCmp ); if( pColl ){ return vdbeCompareMemString(pMem1, pMem2, pColl, 0); } /* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through ** to the blob case and use memcmp(). */ } /* Both values must be blobs. Compare using memcmp(). */ return sqlite3BlobCompare(pMem1, pMem2); } /* ** The first argument passed to this function is a serial-type that ** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive ** except 7. The second points to a buffer containing an integer value ** serialized according to serial_type. This function deserializes ** and returns the value. */ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){ u32 y; assert( CORRUPT_DB || (serial_type>=1 && serial_type<=9 && serial_type!=7) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 | return (serial_type - 8); } /* ** This function compares the two table rows or index records ** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2. It returns a negative, zero | | | | | | | 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 | return (serial_type - 8); } /* ** This function compares the two table rows or index records ** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2. It returns a negative, zero ** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or ** greater than key2. The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob ** created by the OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE. The pPKey2 ** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from ** sqlite3VdbeParseRecord. ** ** If argument bSkip is non-zero, it is assumed that the caller has already ** determined that the first fields of the keys are equal. ** ** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all ** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is ** returned. ** ** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to ** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered, ** pPKey2->errCode is set to SQLITE_NOMEM and, if it is not NULL, the ** malloc-failed flag set on database handle (pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db). */ int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip( int nKey1, const void *pKey1, /* Left key */ UnpackedRecord *pPKey2, /* Right key */ int bSkip /* If true, skip the first field */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 | idx1 = 1; }else{ idx1 = sqlite3GetVarint32(aKey1, &szHdr1); } d1 = szHdr1; i = 0; } | | | | 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 | idx1 = 1; }else{ idx1 = sqlite3GetVarint32(aKey1, &szHdr1); } d1 = szHdr1; i = 0; } if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){ pPKey2->errCode = (u8)SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; return 0; /* Corruption */ } VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */ assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField || CORRUPT_DB ); assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 ); assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nKeyField>0 ); assert( idx1<=szHdr1 || CORRUPT_DB ); while( 1 /*exit-by-break*/ ){ u32 serial_type; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 | } /* RHS is real */ else if( pRhs->flags & MEM_Real ){ serial_type = aKey1[idx1]; if( serial_type>=10 ){ /* Serial types 12 or greater are strings and blobs (greater than | | | | 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 | } /* RHS is real */ else if( pRhs->flags & MEM_Real ){ serial_type = aKey1[idx1]; if( serial_type>=10 ){ /* Serial types 12 or greater are strings and blobs (greater than ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future ** use", so it doesn't really matter what the results of comparing ** them to numeric values are. */ rc = serial_type==10 ? -1 : +1; }else if( serial_type==0 ){ rc = -1; }else{ sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(&aKey1[d1], serial_type, &mem1); if( serial_type==7 ){ if( mem1.u.r<pRhs->u.r ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 | mem1.z = (char*)&aKey1[d1]; rc = vdbeCompareMemString( &mem1, pRhs, pKeyInfo->aColl[i], &pPKey2->errCode ); }else{ int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n); rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp); | | | 4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 | mem1.z = (char*)&aKey1[d1]; rc = vdbeCompareMemString( &mem1, pRhs, pKeyInfo->aColl[i], &pPKey2->errCode ); }else{ int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n); rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp); if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n; } } } /* RHS is a blob */ else if( pRhs->flags & MEM_Blob ){ assert( (pRhs->flags & MEM_Zero)==0 || pRhs->n==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 | ** the following assert(). If the assert() fails, it indicates a ** memory leak and a need to call sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&mem1). */ assert( mem1.szMalloc==0 ); /* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and ** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc ** value. */ | | | | | | 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 4801 4802 4803 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816 4817 4818 4819 4820 4821 | ** the following assert(). If the assert() fails, it indicates a ** memory leak and a need to call sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&mem1). */ assert( mem1.szMalloc==0 ); /* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and ** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc ** value. */ assert( CORRUPT_DB || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc) || pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db->mallocFailed ); pPKey2->eqSeen = 1; return pPKey2->default_rc; } int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare( int nKey1, const void *pKey1, /* Left key */ UnpackedRecord *pPKey2 /* Right key */ ){ return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 0); } /* ** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() ** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the ** size-of-header varint at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single ** byte (i.e. is less than 128). ** ** To avoid concerns about buffer overreads, this routine is only used ** on schemas where the maximum valid header size is 63 bytes or less. */ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868 | case 6: { /* 8-byte signed integer */ x = FOUR_BYTE_UINT(aKey); x = (x<<32) | FOUR_BYTE_UINT(aKey+4); lhs = *(i64*)&x; testcase( lhs<0 ); break; } | | | | | | | | | 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 | case 6: { /* 8-byte signed integer */ x = FOUR_BYTE_UINT(aKey); x = (x<<32) | FOUR_BYTE_UINT(aKey+4); lhs = *(i64*)&x; testcase( lhs<0 ); break; } case 8: lhs = 0; break; case 9: lhs = 1; break; /* This case could be removed without changing the results of running ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch ** statement (since the range of switch targets now starts at zero and ** is contiguous) but does not cause any duplicate code to be generated ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other ** compilers might be similar. */ case 0: case 7: return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2); default: return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2); } assert( pPKey2->u.i == pPKey2->aMem[0].u.i ); v = pPKey2->u.i; if( v>lhs ){ res = pPKey2->r1; }else if( v<lhs ){ res = pPKey2->r2; }else if( pPKey2->nField>1 ){ /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing ** fields. */ res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 1); }else{ /* The first fields of the two keys are equal and there are no trailing ** fields. Return pPKey2->default_rc in this case. */ res = pPKey2->default_rc; pPKey2->eqSeen = 1; } assert( vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, res) ); return res; } /* ** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() ** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is a string, that (b) the first field ** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint ** at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single byte. */ static int vdbeRecordCompareString( int nKey1, const void *pKey1, /* Left key */ UnpackedRecord *pPKey2 /* Right key */ ){ const u8 *aKey1 = (const u8*)pKey1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 | if( serial_type<12 ){ if( serial_type<0 ){ sqlite3GetVarint32(&aKey1[1], (u32*)&serial_type); if( serial_type>=12 ) goto vrcs_restart; assert( CORRUPT_DB ); } res = pPKey2->r1; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */ | | | 4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 | if( serial_type<12 ){ if( serial_type<0 ){ sqlite3GetVarint32(&aKey1[1], (u32*)&serial_type); if( serial_type>=12 ) goto vrcs_restart; assert( CORRUPT_DB ); } res = pPKey2->r1; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */ }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){ res = pPKey2->r2; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a blob */ }else{ int nCmp; int nStr; int szHdr = aKey1[0]; nStr = (serial_type-12) / 2; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 | ** suitable for comparing serialized records to the unpacked record passed ** as the only argument. */ RecordCompare sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(UnpackedRecord *p){ /* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume ** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record ** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt() | | | 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 | ** suitable for comparing serialized records to the unpacked record passed ** as the only argument. */ RecordCompare sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(UnpackedRecord *p){ /* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume ** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record ** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt() ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the ** maximum possible legal header size plus 8 bytes. Because there is ** guaranteed to be at least 74 (but not 136) bytes of padding following each ** buffer passed to varintRecordCompareInt() this makes it convenient to ** limit the size of the header to 64 bytes in cases where the first field ** is an integer. ** ** The easiest way to enforce this limit is to consider only records with |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 | u32 typeRowid; /* Serial type of the rowid */ u32 lenRowid; /* Size of the rowid */ Mem m, v; /* Get the size of the index entry. Only indices entries of less ** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption. ** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so | | | 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 | u32 typeRowid; /* Serial type of the rowid */ u32 lenRowid; /* Size of the rowid */ Mem m, v; /* Get the size of the index entry. Only indices entries of less ** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption. ** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits */ assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) ); nCellKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur); assert( (nCellKey & SQLITE_MAX_U32)==(u64)nCellKey ); /* Read in the complete content of the index entry */ sqlite3VdbeMemInit(&m, db, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 | ** Compare the key of the index entry that cursor pC is pointing to against ** the key string in pUnpacked. Write into *pRes a number ** that is negative, zero, or positive if pC is less than, equal to, ** or greater than pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK on success. ** ** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it ** omits the rowid at the end. The rowid at the end of the index entry | | | 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 | ** Compare the key of the index entry that cursor pC is pointing to against ** the key string in pUnpacked. Write into *pRes a number ** that is negative, zero, or positive if pC is less than, equal to, ** or greater than pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK on success. ** ** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it ** omits the rowid at the end. The rowid at the end of the index entry ** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes ** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key. */ int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare( sqlite3 *db, /* Database connection */ VdbeCursor *pC, /* The cursor to compare against */ UnpackedRecord *pUnpacked, /* Unpacked version of key */ int *res /* Write the comparison result here */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 | *res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(m.n, m.z, pUnpacked, 0); sqlite3VdbeMemReleaseMalloc(&m); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to | | | 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 | *res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(m.n, m.z, pUnpacked, 0); sqlite3VdbeMemReleaseMalloc(&m); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to ** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'. */ void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, i64 nChange){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); db->nChange = nChange; db->nTotalChange += nChange; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 | */ u8 sqlite3VdbePrepareFlags(Vdbe *v){ return v->prepFlags; } /* ** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound | | | 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 | */ u8 sqlite3VdbePrepareFlags(Vdbe *v){ return v->prepFlags; } /* ** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound ** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return ** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_* ** constants) to the value before returning it. ** ** The returned value must be freed by the caller using sqlite3ValueFree(). */ sqlite3_value *sqlite3VdbeGetBoundValue(Vdbe *v, int iVar, u8 aff){ assert( iVar>0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 | } return 1; } #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) /* ** This Walker callback is used to help verify that calls to | | | 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291 | } return 1; } #if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) /* ** This Walker callback is used to help verify that calls to ** sqlite3BtreeCursorHint() with opcode BTREE_HINT_RANGE have ** byte-code register values correctly initialized. */ int sqlite3CursorRangeHintExprCheck(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ if( pExpr->op==TK_REGISTER ){ assert( (pWalker->u.aMem[pExpr->iTable].flags & MEM_Undefined)==0 ); } return WRC_Continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 | } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* | | | 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 | } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK /* ** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated ** with the memory cells in the p->aMem[] array. Also free the UnpackedRecord ** structure itself, using sqlite3DbFree(). ** ** This function is used to free UnpackedRecord structures allocated by ** the vdbeUnpackRecord() function found in vdbeapi.c. */ static void vdbeFreeUnpacked(sqlite3 *db, int nField, UnpackedRecord *p){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 | }else{ iKey2 = iKey1; } } assert( pCsr!=0 ); assert( pCsr->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); | | | 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 | }else{ iKey2 = iKey1; } } assert( pCsr!=0 ); assert( pCsr->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); assert( pCsr->nField==nRealCol || (pCsr->nField==nRealCol+1 && op==SQLITE_DELETE && iReg==-1) ); preupdate.v = v; preupdate.pCsr = pCsr; preupdate.op = op; preupdate.iNewReg = iReg; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vdbesort.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | ** sqlite3VdbeSorterClose() Close the VdbeSorter object and reclaim ** all resources. ** ** sqlite3VdbeSorterReset() Refurbish the VdbeSorter for reuse. This ** is like Close() followed by Init() only ** much faster. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | ** sqlite3VdbeSorterClose() Close the VdbeSorter object and reclaim ** all resources. ** ** sqlite3VdbeSorterReset() Refurbish the VdbeSorter for reuse. This ** is like Close() followed by Init() only ** much faster. ** ** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can ** only occur in between Init()/Reset() and Rewind(). Next(), Rowkey(), and ** Compare() can only occur in between Rewind() and Close()/Reset(). i.e. ** ** Init() ** for each record: Write() ** Rewind() ** Rowkey()/Compare() ** Next() ** Close() ** ** Algorithm: ** ** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held ** unsorted in main memory. Assuming the amount of memory used never exceeds ** a threshold, when Rewind() is called the set of records is sorted using ** an in-memory merge sort. In this case, no temporary files are required ** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records ** directly from main memory. ** ** If the amount of space used to store records in main memory exceeds the ** threshold, then the set of records currently in memory are sorted and ** written to a temporary file in "Packed Memory Array" (PMA) format. ** A PMA created at this point is known as a "level-0 PMA". Higher levels ** of PMAs may be created by merging existing PMAs together - for example ** merging two or more level-0 PMAs together creates a level-1 PMA. ** ** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing ** records to a PMA is roughly the same as the limit configured for the ** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to ** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multiplied by ** that returned by "PRAGMA main.cache_size", in bytes. ** ** If the sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then all PMAs generated ** are appended to a single temporary file. Or, if the sorter is running in ** multi-threaded mode then up to (N+1) temporary files may be opened, where ** N is the configured number of worker threads. In this case, instead of ** sorting the records and writing the PMA to a temporary file itself, the ** calling thread usually launches a worker thread to do so. Except, if ** there are already N worker threads running, the main thread does the work ** itself. ** ** The sorter is running in multi-threaded mode if (a) the library was built ** with pre-processor symbol SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS set to a value greater ** than zero, and (b) worker threads have been enabled at runtime by calling ** "PRAGMA threads=N" with some value of N greater than 0. ** ** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a ** final PMA. So at this point the data is stored in some number of sorted ** PMAs within temporary files on disk. ** ** If there are fewer than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total and the ** sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then these PMAs are merged ** incrementally as keys are retrieved from the sorter by the VDBE. The ** MergeEngine object, described in further detail below, performs this ** merge. ** ** Or, if running in multi-threaded mode, then a background thread is ** launched to merge the existing PMAs. Once the background thread has ** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread ** begins reading keys from that PMA while the background thread proceeds ** with merging the next T bytes of data. And so on. ** ** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used ** by Write() above to determine when to create a new PMA. ** ** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when ** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used. ** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on ** disk are merged together. Then T bytes of data from the second set, and ** so on, such that no operation ever merges more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT ** PMAs at a time. This done is to improve locality. ** ** If running in multi-threaded mode and there are more than ** SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on disk when Rewind() is called, then more ** than one background thread may be created. Specifically, there may be ** one background thread for each temporary file on disk, and one background ** thread to merge the output of each of the others to a single PMA for ** the main thread to read from. */ #include "sqliteInt.h" #include "vdbeInt.h" /* ** If SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS is defined, this module outputs various ** messages to stderr that may be helpful in understanding the performance ** characteristics of the sorter in multi-threaded mode. */ #if 0 # define SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS 1 #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
163 164 165 166 167 168 169 | typedef struct SorterRecord SorterRecord; /* A record being sorted */ typedef struct SortSubtask SortSubtask; /* A sub-task in the sort process */ typedef struct SorterFile SorterFile; /* Temporary file object wrapper */ typedef struct SorterList SorterList; /* In-memory list of records */ typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger; /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */ /* | | | 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 | typedef struct SorterRecord SorterRecord; /* A record being sorted */ typedef struct SortSubtask SortSubtask; /* A sub-task in the sort process */ typedef struct SorterFile SorterFile; /* Temporary file object wrapper */ typedef struct SorterList SorterList; /* In-memory list of records */ typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger; /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */ /* ** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data ** stored in the file. */ struct SorterFile { sqlite3_file *pFd; /* File handle */ i64 iEof; /* Bytes of data stored in pFd */ }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | ** to or equal to the number of PMAs being merged. The extra aReadr[] elements ** are treated as if they are empty (always at EOF). ** ** The aTree[] array is also N elements in size. The value of N is stored in ** the MergeEngine.nTree variable. ** ** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing | | | | | | | 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 | ** to or equal to the number of PMAs being merged. The extra aReadr[] elements ** are treated as if they are empty (always at EOF). ** ** The aTree[] array is also N elements in size. The value of N is stored in ** the MergeEngine.nTree variable. ** ** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing ** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of ** comparing aReadr[2*i-N] and aReadr[2*i-N+1]. Whichever key is smaller, the ** aTree element is set to the index of it. ** ** For the purposes of this comparison, EOF is considered greater than any ** other key value. If the keys are equal (only possible with two EOF ** values), it doesn't matter which index is stored. ** ** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described ** above contains the index of the smallest of each block of 4 PmaReaders ** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that ** currently points to the smallest key value. aTree[0] is unused. ** ** Example: ** ** aReadr[0] -> Banana ** aReadr[1] -> Feijoa ** aReadr[2] -> Elderberry ** aReadr[3] -> Currant ** aReadr[4] -> Grapefruit ** aReadr[5] -> Apple ** aReadr[6] -> Durian ** aReadr[7] -> EOF ** ** aTree[] = { X, 5 0, 5 0, 3, 5, 6 } ** ** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by ** PmaReader 5). When the Next() operation is invoked, PmaReader 5 will ** be advanced to the next key in its segment. Say the next key is ** "Eggplant": ** ** aReadr[5] -> Eggplant ** ** The contents of aTree[] are updated first by comparing the new PmaReader |
︙ | ︙ | |||
267 268 269 270 271 272 273 | ** other way. VdbeSorter.nTask is set to the number of worker threads allowed ** (see SQLITE_CONFIG_WORKER_THREADS) plus one (the main thread). Thus for ** single-threaded operation, there is exactly one instance of this object ** and for multi-threaded operation there are two or more instances. ** ** Essentially, this structure contains all those fields of the VdbeSorter ** structure for which each thread requires a separate instance. For example, | | | | | 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 | ** other way. VdbeSorter.nTask is set to the number of worker threads allowed ** (see SQLITE_CONFIG_WORKER_THREADS) plus one (the main thread). Thus for ** single-threaded operation, there is exactly one instance of this object ** and for multi-threaded operation there are two or more instances. ** ** Essentially, this structure contains all those fields of the VdbeSorter ** structure for which each thread requires a separate instance. For example, ** each thread requeries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in ** as part of comparison operations. ** ** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then, ** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for ** two purposes: ** ** 1. When flushing the contents of memory to a level-0 PMA on disk, to ** attempt to select a SortSubtask for which there is not already an ** active background thread (since doing so causes the main thread ** to block until it finishes). ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
302 303 304 305 306 307 308 | SorterCompare xCompare; /* Compare function to use */ SorterFile file; /* Temp file for level-0 PMAs */ SorterFile file2; /* Space for other PMAs */ }; /* | | | 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 | SorterCompare xCompare; /* Compare function to use */ SorterFile file; /* Temp file for level-0 PMAs */ SorterFile file2; /* Space for other PMAs */ }; /* ** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each ** sorter cursor created by the VDBE. ** ** mxKeysize: ** As records are added to the sorter by calls to sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(), ** this variable is updated so as to be set to the size on disk of the ** largest record in the sorter. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
339 340 341 342 343 344 345 | #define SORTER_TYPE_TEXT 0x02 /* ** An instance of the following object is used to read records out of a ** PMA, in sorted order. The next key to be read is cached in nKey/aKey. ** aKey might point into aMap or into aBuffer. If neither of those locations ** contain a contiguous representation of the key, then aAlloc is allocated | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 | #define SORTER_TYPE_TEXT 0x02 /* ** An instance of the following object is used to read records out of a ** PMA, in sorted order. The next key to be read is cached in nKey/aKey. ** aKey might point into aMap or into aBuffer. If neither of those locations ** contain a contiguous representation of the key, then aAlloc is allocated ** and the key is copied into aAlloc and aKey is made to point to aAlloc. ** ** pFd==0 at EOF. */ struct PmaReader { i64 iReadOff; /* Current read offset */ i64 iEof; /* 1 byte past EOF for this PmaReader */ int nAlloc; /* Bytes of space at aAlloc */ int nKey; /* Number of bytes in key */ sqlite3_file *pFd; /* File handle we are reading from */ u8 *aAlloc; /* Space for aKey if aBuffer and pMap wont work */ u8 *aKey; /* Pointer to current key */ u8 *aBuffer; /* Current read buffer */ int nBuffer; /* Size of read buffer in bytes */ u8 *aMap; /* Pointer to mapping of entire file */ IncrMerger *pIncr; /* Incremental merger */ }; /* ** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored ** within a temp file. However, if the PmaReader.pIncr variable points to ** an object of the following type, it may be used to iterate/merge through ** multiple PMAs simultaneously. ** ** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and ** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1). ** ** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0] ** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in ** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from ** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the ** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off ** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of ** sorted record data from pMerger. ** ** When the PmaReader reaches the end of aFile[0], it blocks until the ** background thread has finished populating aFile[1]. It then exchanges ** the contents of the aFile[0] and aFile[1] variables within this structure, ** sets the PmaReader fields to read from the new aFile[0] and kicks off ** another background thread to populate the new aFile[1]. And so on, until ** the contents of pMerger are exhausted. ** ** A single-threaded IncrMerger does not open any temporary files of its ** own. Instead, it has exclusive access to mxSz bytes of space beginning ** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a ** background thread to prepare data for the PmaReader, with a single ** threaded IncrMerger the allocate part of pTask->file2 is "refilled" with ** keys from pMerger by the calling thread whenever the PmaReader runs out ** of data. */ struct IncrMerger { SortSubtask *pTask; /* Task that owns this merger */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
495 496 497 498 499 500 501 | *ppOut = &p->aMap[p->iReadOff]; p->iReadOff += nByte; return SQLITE_OK; } assert( p->aBuffer ); | | | | | 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 | *ppOut = &p->aMap[p->iReadOff]; p->iReadOff += nByte; return SQLITE_OK; } assert( p->aBuffer ); /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next ** p->nBuffer bytes of data from the file into it. Or, if there are less ** than p->nBuffer bytes remaining in the PMA, read all remaining data. */ iBuf = p->iReadOff % p->nBuffer; if( iBuf==0 ){ int nRead; /* Bytes to read from disk */ int rc; /* sqlite3OsRead() return code */ /* Determine how many bytes of data to read. */ if( (p->iEof - p->iReadOff) > (i64)p->nBuffer ){ nRead = p->nBuffer; }else{ nRead = (int)(p->iEof - p->iReadOff); } assert( nRead>0 ); /* Readr data from the file. Return early if an error occurs. */ rc = sqlite3OsRead(p->pFd, p->aBuffer, nRead, p->iReadOff); assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf; if( nByte<=nAvail ){ /* The requested data is available in the in-memory buffer. In this ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a ** pointer into the buffer to the caller. */ *ppOut = &p->aBuffer[iBuf]; p->iReadOff += nByte; }else{ /* The requested data is not all available in the in-memory buffer. ** In this case, allocate space at p->aAlloc[] to copy the requested ** range into. Then return a copy of pointer p->aAlloc to the caller. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
599 600 601 602 603 604 605 | } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the | | | | 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 | } return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the ** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted ** (because the file is too large or the VFS layer is configured not to use ** mmap), return SQLITE_OK and set *pp to NULL. ** ** Or, if an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. The final value of ** *pp is undefined in this case. */ static int vdbeSorterMapFile(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterFile *pFile, u8 **pp){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pFile->iEof<=(i64)(pTask->pSorter->db->nMaxSorterMmap) ){ sqlite3_file *pFd = pFile->pFd; if( pFd->pMethods->iVersion>=3 ){ rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pFd, 0, (int)pFile->iEof, (void**)pp); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); } } return rc; } /* ** Attach PmaReader pReadr to file pFile (if it is not already attached to ** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK ** if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs. */ static int vdbePmaReaderSeek( SortSubtask *pTask, /* Task context */ PmaReader *pReadr, /* Reader whose cursor is to be moved */ SorterFile *pFile, /* Sorter file to read from */ i64 iOff /* Offset in pFile */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | } return rc; } /* ** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile | | | | | 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 | } return rc; } /* ** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile ** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function ** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the ** PMA is empty). ** ** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file ** contains a single PMA, and that that PMA omits the initial length varint. */ static int vdbePmaReaderInit( SortSubtask *pTask, /* Task context */ SorterFile *pFile, /* Sorter file to read from */ i64 iStart, /* Start offset in pFile */ PmaReader *pReadr, /* PmaReader to populate */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
747 748 749 750 751 752 753 | rc = vdbePmaReaderNext(pReadr); } return rc; } /* ** A version of vdbeSorterCompare() that assumes that it has already been | | | | 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 | rc = vdbePmaReaderNext(pReadr); } return rc; } /* ** A version of vdbeSorterCompare() that assumes that it has already been ** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of ** key2. */ static int vdbeSorterCompareTail( SortSubtask *pTask, /* Subtask context (for pKeyInfo) */ int *pbKey2Cached, /* True if pTask->pUnpacked is pKey2 */ const void *pKey1, int nKey1, /* Left side of comparison */ const void *pKey2, int nKey2 /* Right side of comparison */ ){ UnpackedRecord *r2 = pTask->pUnpacked; if( *pbKey2Cached==0 ){ sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(pTask->pSorter->pKeyInfo, nKey2, pKey2, r2); *pbKey2Cached = 1; } return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, r2, 1); } /* ** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2, ** size nKey2 bytes). Use (pTask->pKeyInfo) for the collation sequences ** used by the comparison. Return the result of the comparison. ** ** If IN/OUT parameter *pbKey2Cached is true when this function is called, ** it is assumed that (pTask->pUnpacked) contains the unpacked version ** of key2. If it is false, (pTask->pUnpacked) is populated with the unpacked ** version of key2 and *pbKey2Cached set to true before returning. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
911 912 913 914 915 916 917 | ** ** Usually, the sorter module uses the value of (pCsr->pKeyInfo->nKeyField) ** to determine the number of fields that should be compared from the ** records being sorted. However, if the value passed as argument nField ** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField ** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX ** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in | | | 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 | ** ** Usually, the sorter module uses the value of (pCsr->pKeyInfo->nKeyField) ** to determine the number of fields that should be compared from the ** records being sorted. However, if the value passed as argument nField ** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField ** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX ** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in ** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part ** of the records being sorted. So if the sort is stable, there is never ** any reason to compare PK fields and they can be ignored for a small ** performance boost. ** ** The sorter can guarantee a stable sort when running in single-threaded ** mode, but not in multi-threaded mode. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 | assert( pSorter->iMemory==0 ); pSorter->nMemory = pgsz; pSorter->list.aMemory = (u8*)sqlite3Malloc(pgsz); if( !pSorter->list.aMemory ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } } | | | 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 | assert( pSorter->iMemory==0 ); pSorter->nMemory = pgsz; pSorter->list.aMemory = (u8*)sqlite3Malloc(pgsz); if( !pSorter->list.aMemory ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } } if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13 && (pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==0 || pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==db->pDfltColl) && (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[0] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)==0 ){ pSorter->typeMask = SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER | SORTER_TYPE_TEXT; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 | for(p=pRecord; p; p=pNext){ pNext = p->u.pNext; sqlite3DbFree(db, p); } } /* | | | 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 | for(p=pRecord; p; p=pNext){ pNext = p->u.pNext; sqlite3DbFree(db, p); } } /* ** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All ** fields of *pTask are zeroed before returning. */ static void vdbeSortSubtaskCleanup(sqlite3 *db, SortSubtask *pTask){ sqlite3DbFree(db, pTask->pUnpacked); #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 /* pTask->list.aMemory can only be non-zero if it was handed memory ** from the main thread. That only occurs SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 | void *pIn /* Argument passed into xTask() */ ){ assert( pTask->pThread==0 && pTask->bDone==0 ); return sqlite3ThreadCreate(&pTask->pThread, xTask, pIn); } /* | | | | | 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 | void *pIn /* Argument passed into xTask() */ ){ assert( pTask->pThread==0 && pTask->bDone==0 ); return sqlite3ThreadCreate(&pTask->pThread, xTask, pIn); } /* ** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create ** level-0 PMAs. */ static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){ int rc = rcin; int i; /* This function is always called by the main user thread. ** ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called, ** it is possible that thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread ** is currently attempt to join one of the other threads. To avoid a race ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join ** thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread first. */ for(i=pSorter->nTask-1; i>=0; i--){ SortSubtask *pTask = &pSorter->aTask[i]; int rc2 = vdbeSorterJoinThread(pTask); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = rc2; } return rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 | vdbeSorterExtendFile(db, *ppFd, nExtend); } } return rc; } /* | | | | 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 | vdbeSorterExtendFile(db, *ppFd, nExtend); } } return rc; } /* ** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord ** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or ** if no allocation was required), or SQLITE_NOMEM otherwise. */ static int vdbeSortAllocUnpacked(SortSubtask *pTask){ if( pTask->pUnpacked==0 ){ pTask->pUnpacked = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(pTask->pSorter->pKeyInfo); if( pTask->pUnpacked==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; pTask->pUnpacked->nField = pTask->pSorter->pKeyInfo->nKeyField; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 | ** Return the SorterCompare function to compare values collected by the ** sorter object passed as the only argument. */ static SorterCompare vdbeSorterGetCompare(VdbeSorter *p){ if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER ){ return vdbeSorterCompareInt; }else if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_TEXT ){ | | | | | 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 | ** Return the SorterCompare function to compare values collected by the ** sorter object passed as the only argument. */ static SorterCompare vdbeSorterGetCompare(VdbeSorter *p){ if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER ){ return vdbeSorterCompareInt; }else if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_TEXT ){ return vdbeSorterCompareText; } return vdbeSorterCompare; } /* ** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return ** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if ** an error occurs. */ static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){ int i; SorterRecord *p; int rc; SorterRecord *aSlot[64]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 | p = 0; for(i=0; i<ArraySize(aSlot); i++){ if( aSlot[i]==0 ) continue; p = p ? vdbeSorterMerge(pTask, p, aSlot[i]) : aSlot[i]; } pList->pList = p; | | | | 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 | p = 0; for(i=0; i<ArraySize(aSlot); i++){ if( aSlot[i]==0 ) continue; p = p ? vdbeSorterMerge(pTask, p, aSlot[i]) : aSlot[i]; } pList->pList = p; assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM ); return pTask->pUnpacked->errCode; } /* ** Initialize a PMA-writer object. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 | if( nCopy>(p->nBuffer - p->iBufEnd) ){ nCopy = p->nBuffer - p->iBufEnd; } memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy); p->iBufEnd += nCopy; if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){ | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 | if( nCopy>(p->nBuffer - p->iBufEnd) ){ nCopy = p->nBuffer - p->iBufEnd; } memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy); p->iBufEnd += nCopy; if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){ p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart ); p->iBufStart = p->iBufEnd = 0; p->iWriteOff += p->nBuffer; } assert( p->iBufEnd<p->nBuffer ); nRem -= nCopy; } } /* ** Flush any buffered data to disk and clean up the PMA-writer object. ** The results of using the PMA-writer after this call are undefined. ** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not ** required. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code. ** ** Before returning, set *piEof to the offset immediately following the ** last byte written to the file. */ static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){ int rc; if( p->eFWErr==0 && ALWAYS(p->aBuffer) && p->iBufEnd>p->iBufStart ){ p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart ); } *piEof = (p->iWriteOff + p->iBufEnd); sqlite3_free(p->aBuffer); rc = p->eFWErr; memset(p, 0, sizeof(PmaWriter)); return rc; } /* ** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return ** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs. */ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){ int nByte; u8 aByte[10]; nByte = sqlite3PutVarint(aByte, iVal); vdbePmaWriteBlob(p, aByte, nByte); } /* ** Write the current contents of in-memory linked-list pList to a level-0 ** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if ** successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. ** ** The format of a PMA is: ** ** * A varint. This varint contains the total number of bytes of content ** in the PMA (not including the varint itself). ** ** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys. ** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the ** key). The varint is the number of bytes in the blob of data. */ static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){ sqlite3 *db = pTask->pSorter->db; int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ PmaWriter writer; /* Object used to write to the file */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA. ** This is used by an assert() statement at the end of this function. */ i64 iSz = pList->szPMA + sqlite3VarintLen(pList->szPMA) + pTask->file.iEof; #endif vdbeSorterWorkDebug(pTask, "enter"); memset(&writer, 0, sizeof(PmaWriter)); assert( pList->szPMA>0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 | return vdbeSorterListToPMA(&pSorter->aTask[0], &pSorter->list); #else int rc = SQLITE_OK; int i; SortSubtask *pTask = 0; /* Thread context used to create new PMA */ int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1); | | | | 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 | return vdbeSorterListToPMA(&pSorter->aTask[0], &pSorter->list); #else int rc = SQLITE_OK; int i; SortSubtask *pTask = 0; /* Thread context used to create new PMA */ int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1); /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written. ** Or will be, anyhow. */ pSorter->bUsePMA = 1; /* Select a sub-task to sort and flush the current list of in-memory ** records to disk. If the sorter is running in multi-threaded mode, ** round-robin between the first (pSorter->nTask-1) tasks. Except, if ** the background thread from a sub-tasks previous turn is still running, ** skip it. If the first (pSorter->nTask-1) sub-tasks are all still busy, ** fall back to using the final sub-task. The first (pSorter->nTask-1) ** sub-tasks are preferred as they use background threads - the final ** sub-task uses the main thread. */ for(i=0; i<nWorker; i++){ int iTest = (pSorter->iPrev + i + 1) % nWorker; pTask = &pSorter->aTask[iTest]; if( pTask->bDone ){ rc = vdbeSorterJoinThread(pTask); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 | /* Figure out whether or not the current contents of memory should be ** flushed to a PMA before continuing. If so, do so. ** ** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then ** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is ** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory. | | | | | 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 | /* Figure out whether or not the current contents of memory should be ** flushed to a PMA before continuing. If so, do so. ** ** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then ** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is ** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory. ** ** Or, if using separate allocations for each record, flush the contents ** of memory to a PMA if either of the following are true: ** ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater ** than (page-size * cache-size), or ** ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater ** than (page-size * 10) and sqlite3HeapNearlyFull() returns true. */ nReq = pVal->n + sizeof(SorterRecord); nPMA = pVal->n + sqlite3VarintLen(pVal->n); if( pSorter->mxPmaSize ){ if( pSorter->list.aMemory ){ bFlush = pSorter->iMemory && (pSorter->iMemory+nReq) > pSorter->mxPmaSize; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 | /* ** This function is called when the PmaReader corresponding to pIncr has ** finished reading the contents of aFile[0]. Its purpose is to "refill" ** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the ** beginning. ** | | | | | | 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 | /* ** This function is called when the PmaReader corresponding to pIncr has ** finished reading the contents of aFile[0]. Its purpose is to "refill" ** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the ** beginning. ** ** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading ** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0]. ** ** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the ** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap ** aFile[0] and aFile[1] in place. If the contents of pMerger have not ** been exhausted, this function also launches a new background thread ** to populate the new aFile[1]. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success, or an SQLite error code otherwise. */ static int vdbeIncrSwap(IncrMerger *pIncr){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 | ** SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS==0). The other values are only used ** when there exists one or more separate worker threads. */ #define INCRINIT_NORMAL 0 #define INCRINIT_TASK 1 #define INCRINIT_ROOT 2 | | | | | | 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 | ** SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS==0). The other values are only used ** when there exists one or more separate worker threads. */ #define INCRINIT_NORMAL 0 #define INCRINIT_TASK 1 #define INCRINIT_ROOT 2 /* ** Forward reference required as the vdbeIncrMergeInit() and ** vdbePmaReaderIncrInit() routines are called mutually recursively when ** building a merge tree. */ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode); /* ** Initialize the MergeEngine object passed as the second argument. Once this ** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the ** MergeEngine object in the usual fashion. ** ** If argument eMode is INCRINIT_ROOT, then it is assumed that any IncrMerge ** objects attached to the PmaReader objects that the merger reads from have ** already been populated, but that they have not yet populated aFile[0] and ** set the PmaReader objects up to read from it. In this case all that is ** required is to call vdbePmaReaderNext() on each PmaReader to point it at ** its first key. ** ** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use ** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data ** to pMerger. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. */ static int vdbeMergeEngineInit( SortSubtask *pTask, /* Thread that will run pMerger */ MergeEngine *pMerger, /* MergeEngine to initialize */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 | /* ** The PmaReader passed as the first argument is guaranteed to be an ** incremental-reader (pReadr->pIncr!=0). This function serves to open ** and/or initialize the temp file related fields of the IncrMerge ** object at (pReadr->pIncr). ** ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_NORMAL, then all PmaReaders | | | | | | | 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 | /* ** The PmaReader passed as the first argument is guaranteed to be an ** incremental-reader (pReadr->pIncr!=0). This function serves to open ** and/or initialize the temp file related fields of the IncrMerge ** object at (pReadr->pIncr). ** ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_NORMAL, then all PmaReaders ** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then ** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to ** the first key in its range. ** ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_TASK, then pReadr is guaranteed ** to be a multi-threaded PmaReader and this function is being called in a ** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are ** initialized as for INCRINIT_NORMAL and the aFile[1] buffer belonging to ** pReadr is populated. However, pReadr itself is not set up to point ** to its first key. A call to vdbePmaReaderNext() is still required to do ** that. ** ** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately ** in the INCRINIT_TASK case is that vdbePmaReaderNext() assumes that it has ** to block on thread (pTask->thread) before accessing aFile[1]. But, since ** this entire function is being run by thread (pTask->thread), that will ** lead to the current background thread attempting to join itself. ** ** Finally, if argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_ROOT, it may be assumed ** that pReadr->pIncr is a multi-threaded IncrMerge objects, and that all |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 | sqlite3 *db = pTask->pSorter->db; /* eMode is always INCRINIT_NORMAL in single-threaded mode */ assert( SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 || eMode==INCRINIT_NORMAL ); rc = vdbeMergeEngineInit(pTask, pIncr->pMerger, eMode); | | | 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 | sqlite3 *db = pTask->pSorter->db; /* eMode is always INCRINIT_NORMAL in single-threaded mode */ assert( SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 || eMode==INCRINIT_NORMAL ); rc = vdbeMergeEngineInit(pTask, pIncr->pMerger, eMode); /* Set up the required files for pIncr. A multi-threaded IncrMerge object ** requires two temp files to itself, whereas a single-threaded object ** only requires a region of pTask->file2. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int mxSz = pIncr->mxSz; #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 if( pIncr->bUseThread ){ rc = vdbeSorterOpenTempFile(db, mxSz, &pIncr->aFile[0].pFd); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 | } } #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIncr->bUseThread ){ /* Use the current thread to populate aFile[1], even though this ** PmaReader is multi-threaded. If this is an INCRINIT_TASK object, | | | | | | | | | 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 | } } #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIncr->bUseThread ){ /* Use the current thread to populate aFile[1], even though this ** PmaReader is multi-threaded. If this is an INCRINIT_TASK object, ** then this function is already running in background thread ** pIncr->pTask->thread. ** ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the ** main VDBE thread. But that is Ok, as that thread cannot return ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the ** first results are ready from this merger object anyway. */ assert( eMode==INCRINIT_ROOT || eMode==INCRINIT_TASK ); rc = vdbeIncrPopulate(pIncr); } #endif if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS==0 || eMode!=INCRINIT_TASK) ){ rc = vdbePmaReaderNext(pReadr); } return rc; } #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 /* ** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in ** background threads. */ static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){ PmaReader *pReader = (PmaReader*)pCtx; void *pRet = SQLITE_INT_TO_PTR( vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(pReader,INCRINIT_TASK) ); pReader->pIncr->pTask->bDone = 1; return pRet; } #endif /* ** If the PmaReader passed as the first argument is not an incremental-reader ** (if pReadr->pIncr==0), then this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it invokes ** the vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() function with the parameters passed to ** this routine to initialize the incremental merge. ** ** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1), ** then a background thread is launched to call vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(). ** Or, if the IncrMerger is single threaded, the same function is called ** using the current thread. */ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){ IncrMerger *pIncr = pReadr->pIncr; /* Incremental merger */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 | /* ** Allocate a new MergeEngine object to merge the contents of nPMA level-0 ** PMAs from pTask->file. If no error occurs, set *ppOut to point to ** the new object and return SQLITE_OK. Or, if an error does occur, set *ppOut ** to NULL and return an SQLite error code. ** ** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the | | | 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 | /* ** Allocate a new MergeEngine object to merge the contents of nPMA level-0 ** PMAs from pTask->file. If no error occurs, set *ppOut to point to ** the new object and return SQLITE_OK. Or, if an error does occur, set *ppOut ** to NULL and return an SQLite error code. ** ** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the ** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is ** set to the offset immediately following the last byte of the last ** PMA before returning. If an error does occur, then the final value of ** *piOffset is undefined. */ static int vdbeMergeEngineLevel0( SortSubtask *pTask, /* Sorter task to read from */ int nPMA, /* Number of PMAs to read */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 | } return rc; } /* ** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter ** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp | | | | | | 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 | } return rc; } /* ** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter ** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp ** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that ** can be used to incrementally merge all PMAs on disk. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut set to point to the ** MergeEngine object at the root of the tree before returning. Or, if an ** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value ** of *ppOut is undefined. */ static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild( VdbeSorter *pSorter, /* The VDBE cursor that implements the sort */ MergeEngine **ppOut /* Write the MergeEngine here */ ){ MergeEngine *pMain = 0; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int iTask; #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly ** one PmaReader per sub-task. */ assert( pSorter->bUseThreads || pSorter->nTask==1 ); if( pSorter->nTask>1 ){ pMain = vdbeMergeEngineNew(pSorter->nTask); if( pMain==0 ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } #endif |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 | if( (pIncr = pMain->aReadr[iTask].pIncr) ){ vdbeIncrMergerSetThreads(pIncr); assert( pIncr->pTask!=pLast ); } } for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTask<pSorter->nTask; iTask++){ /* Check that: | | | 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 | if( (pIncr = pMain->aReadr[iTask].pIncr) ){ vdbeIncrMergerSetThreads(pIncr); assert( pIncr->pTask!=pLast ); } } for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTask<pSorter->nTask; iTask++){ /* Check that: ** ** a) The incremental merge object is configured to use the ** right task, and ** b) If it is using task (nTask-1), it is configured to run ** in single-threaded mode. This is important, as the ** root merge (INCRINIT_ROOT) will be using the same task ** object. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 | rc = vdbeSorterSort(&pSorter->aTask[0], &pSorter->list); }else{ *pbEof = 1; } return rc; } | | | | 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 | rc = vdbeSorterSort(&pSorter->aTask[0], &pSorter->list); }else{ *pbEof = 1; } return rc; } /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite() ** function flushes the contents of memory to disk, it immediately always ** creates a new list consisting of a single key immediately afterwards. ** So the list is never empty at this point. */ assert( pSorter->list.pList ); rc = vdbeSorterFlushPMA(pSorter); /* Join all threads */ rc = vdbeSorterJoinAll(pSorter, rc); vdbeSorterRewindDebug("rewind"); /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to ** incrementally read and merge all remaining PMAs. */ assert( pSorter->pReader==0 ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = vdbeSorterSetupMerge(pSorter); *pbEof = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 | if( pSorter->list.aMemory==0 ) vdbeSorterRecordFree(db, pFree); rc = pSorter->list.pList ? SQLITE_OK : SQLITE_DONE; } return rc; } /* | | | 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 | if( pSorter->list.aMemory==0 ) vdbeSorterRecordFree(db, pFree); rc = pSorter->list.pList ? SQLITE_OK : SQLITE_DONE; } return rc; } /* ** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the ** current key. */ static void *vdbeSorterRowkey( const VdbeSorter *pSorter, /* Sorter object */ int *pnKey /* OUT: Size of current key in bytes */ ){ void *pKey; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/vtab.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE #include "sqliteInt.h" /* ** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the ** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE #include "sqliteInt.h" /* ** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the ** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of ** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of ** the sqlite3_declare_vtab() and sqlite3_vtab_config() APIs, both of which ** are invoked only from within xCreate and xConnect methods. */ struct VtabCtx { VTable *pVTable; /* The virtual table being constructed */ Table *pTab; /* The Table object to which the virtual table belongs */ VtabCtx *pPrior; /* Parent context (if any) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 | sqlite3DbFree(db, pMod); } } /* ** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected. ** Locks nest. Every lock should have a corresponding unlock. | | | | 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 | sqlite3DbFree(db, pMod); } } /* ** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected. ** Locks nest. Every lock should have a corresponding unlock. ** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur. ** ** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked, ** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed. */ void sqlite3VtabLock(VTable *pVTab){ pVTab->nRef++; } /* ** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table. ** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access ** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise. */ VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){ VTable *pVtab; assert( IsVirtual(pTab) ); for(pVtab=pTab->u.vtab.p; pVtab && pVtab->db!=db; pVtab=pVtab->pNext); return pVtab; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
218 219 220 221 222 223 224 | sqlite3DbFree(db, pVTab); } } /* ** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the ** p->u.vtab.p list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated | | | | | 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | sqlite3DbFree(db, pVTab); } } /* ** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the ** p->u.vtab.p list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated ** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity. ** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with ** connection db is left in the p->u.vtab.p list. */ static VTable *vtabDisconnectAll(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ VTable *pRet = 0; VTable *pVTable; assert( IsVirtual(p) ); pVTable = p->u.vtab.p; p->u.vtab.p = 0; /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments ** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why ** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any ** database connection that may have an entry in the p->u.vtab.p list. */ assert( db==0 || sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) ); while( pVTable ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | } /* ** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. ** ** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all | | | | 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 | } /* ** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. ** ** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all ** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the ** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The ** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows: ** ** 1) By this function. In this case, all BtShared mutexes and the mutex ** associated with the database handle itself must be held. ** ** 2) By function vtabDisconnectAll(), when it adds a VTable entry to ** the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. In this case either the BtShared mutex ** associated with the database the virtual table is stored in is held ** or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then ** the database handle mutex is held. ** ** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously ** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe. */ void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){ VTable *p = db->pDisconnect; assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(db) ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
326 327 328 329 330 331 332 | /* ** Clear any and all virtual-table information from the Table record. ** This routine is called, for example, just before deleting the Table ** record. ** ** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer | | | | | | 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 | /* ** Clear any and all virtual-table information from the Table record. ** This routine is called, for example, just before deleting the Table ** record. ** ** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer ** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable ** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema. ** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database ** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the ** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures ** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated ** database connection. */ void sqlite3VtabClear(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ assert( IsVirtual(p) ); assert( db!=0 ); if( db->pnBytesFreed==0 ) vtabDisconnectAll(0, p); if( p->u.vtab.azArg ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
417 418 419 420 421 422 423 | ** The first invocation, to obtain permission to INSERT a row into the ** sqlite_schema table, has already been made by sqlite3StartTable(). ** The second call, to obtain permission to create the table, is made now. */ if( pTable->u.vtab.azArg ){ int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTable->pSchema); assert( iDb>=0 ); /* The database the table is being created in */ | | | 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 | ** The first invocation, to obtain permission to INSERT a row into the ** sqlite_schema table, has already been made by sqlite3StartTable(). ** The second call, to obtain permission to create the table, is made now. */ if( pTable->u.vtab.azArg ){ int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTable->pSchema); assert( iDb>=0 ); /* The database the table is being created in */ sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName, pTable->u.vtab.azArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName); } #endif } /* ** This routine takes the module argument that has been accumulating |
︙ | ︙ | |||
450 451 452 453 454 455 456 | sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* The database connection */ if( pTab==0 ) return; assert( IsVirtual(pTab) ); addArgumentToVtab(pParse); pParse->sArg.z = 0; if( pTab->u.vtab.nArg<1 ) return; | | | 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 | sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* The database connection */ if( pTab==0 ) return; assert( IsVirtual(pTab) ); addArgumentToVtab(pParse); pParse->sArg.z = 0; if( pTab->u.vtab.nArg<1 ) return; /* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the ** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being ** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_schema) then ** do additional initialization work and store the statement text ** in the sqlite_schema table. */ if( !db->init.busy ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
472 473 474 475 476 477 478 | /* Compute the complete text of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement */ if( pEnd ){ pParse->sNameToken.n = (int)(pEnd->z - pParse->sNameToken.z) + pEnd->n; } zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken); | | | | | 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 | /* Compute the complete text of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement */ if( pEnd ){ pParse->sNameToken.n = (int)(pEnd->z - pParse->sNameToken.z) + pEnd->n; } zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken); /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the ** schema table. We just need to update that slot with all ** the information we've collected. ** ** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an ** entry in the sqlite_schema table that was created for this vtab ** by sqlite3StartTable(). */ iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " " "SET type='table', name=%Q, tbl_name=%Q, rootpage=0, sql=%Q " "WHERE rowid=#%d", |
︙ | ︙ | |||
551 552 553 554 555 556 557 | /* ** Invoke a virtual table constructor (either xCreate or xConnect). The ** pointer to the function to invoke is passed as the fourth parameter ** to this procedure. */ static int vtabCallConstructor( | | | 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 | /* ** Invoke a virtual table constructor (either xCreate or xConnect). The ** pointer to the function to invoke is passed as the fourth parameter ** to this procedure. */ static int vtabCallConstructor( sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab, Module *pMod, int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**), char **pzErr ){ VtabCtx sCtx; VTable *pVTable; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
573 574 575 576 577 578 579 | assert( IsVirtual(pTab) ); azArg = (const char *const*)pTab->u.vtab.azArg; /* Check that the virtual-table is not already being initialized */ for(pCtx=db->pVtabCtx; pCtx; pCtx=pCtx->pPrior){ if( pCtx->pTab==pTab ){ | | | 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 | assert( IsVirtual(pTab) ); azArg = (const char *const*)pTab->u.vtab.azArg; /* Check that the virtual-table is not already being initialized */ for(pCtx=db->pVtabCtx; pCtx; pCtx=pCtx->pPrior){ if( pCtx->pTab==pTab ){ *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "vtable constructor called recursively: %s", pTab->zName ); return SQLITE_LOCKED; } } zModuleName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pTab->zName); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
637 638 639 640 641 642 643 | *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, zFormat, pTab->zName); sqlite3VtabUnlock(pVTable); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else{ int iCol; u16 oooHidden = 0; /* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure | | | 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 | *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, zFormat, pTab->zName); sqlite3VtabUnlock(pVTable); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else{ int iCol; u16 oooHidden = 0; /* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure ** into the linked list headed by pTab->u.vtab.p. Then loop through the ** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden". ** If so, set the Column COLFLAG_HIDDEN flag and remove the token from ** the type string. */ pVTable->pNext = pTab->u.vtab.p; pTab->u.vtab.p = pVTable; for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
683 684 685 686 687 688 689 | sqlite3DbFree(db, zModuleName); return rc; } /* ** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method | | | 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 | sqlite3DbFree(db, zModuleName); return rc; } /* ** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method ** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned ** and an error left in pParse. ** ** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table. */ int sqlite3VtabCallConnect(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; const char *zMod; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
755 756 757 758 759 760 761 | /* Add pVtab to the end of sqlite3.aVTrans */ db->aVTrans[db->nVTrans++] = pVTab; sqlite3VtabLock(pVTab); } /* ** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method | | | | | 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 | /* Add pVtab to the end of sqlite3.aVTrans */ db->aVTrans[db->nVTrans++] = pVTab; sqlite3VtabLock(pVTab); } /* ** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method ** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb. ** ** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point to an English language ** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned. ** In this case the caller must call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on *pzErr. */ int sqlite3VtabCallCreate(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab, char **pzErr){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; Table *pTab; Module *pMod; const char *zMod; pTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, zTab, db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName); assert( pTab && IsVirtual(pTab) && !pTab->u.vtab.p ); /* Locate the required virtual table module */ zMod = pTab->u.vtab.azArg[0]; pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod); /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method, ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an ** error. Otherwise, do nothing. */ if( pMod==0 || pMod->pModule->xCreate==0 || pMod->pModule->xDestroy==0 ){ *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "no such module: %s", zMod); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else{ rc = vtabCallConstructor(db, pTab, pMod, pMod->pModule->xCreate, pzErr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
834 835 836 837 838 839 840 | /* We should never be able to reach this point while loading the ** schema. Nevertheless, defend against that (turn off db->init.busy) ** in case a bug arises. */ assert( db->init.busy==0 ); initBusy = db->init.busy; db->init.busy = 0; sParse.nQueryLoop = 1; | | | 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 | /* We should never be able to reach this point while loading the ** schema. Nevertheless, defend against that (turn off db->init.busy) ** in case a bug arises. */ assert( db->init.busy==0 ); initBusy = db->init.busy; db->init.busy = 0; sParse.nQueryLoop = 1; if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable) && ALWAYS(sParse.pNewTable!=0) && ALWAYS(!db->mallocFailed) && IsOrdinaryTable(sParse.pNewTable) ){ assert( sParse.zErrMsg==0 ); if( !pTab->aCol ){ Table *pNew = sParse.pNewTable; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
938 939 940 941 942 943 944 | /* ** This function invokes either the xRollback or xCommit method ** of each of the virtual tables in the sqlite3.aVTrans array. The method ** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is ** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure. ** | | | 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 | /* ** This function invokes either the xRollback or xCommit method ** of each of the virtual tables in the sqlite3.aVTrans array. The method ** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is ** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure. ** ** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks. */ static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){ int i; if( db->aVTrans ){ VTable **aVTrans = db->aVTrans; db->aVTrans = 0; for(i=0; i<db->nVTrans; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
987 988 989 990 991 992 993 | } } db->aVTrans = aVTrans; return rc; } /* | | | | 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 | } } db->aVTrans = aVTrans; return rc; } /* ** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself. */ int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){ callFinaliser(db, offsetof(sqlite3_module,xRollback)); return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself. */ int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){ callFinaliser(db, offsetof(sqlite3_module,xCommit)); return SQLITE_OK; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 | */ int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; const sqlite3_module *pModule; /* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater ** than zero, then this function is being called from within a | | | | | 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 | */ int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; const sqlite3_module *pModule; /* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater ** than zero, then this function is being called from within a ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to ** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED. */ if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){ return SQLITE_LOCKED; } if( !pVTab ){ return SQLITE_OK; } pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule; if( pModule->xBegin ){ int i; /* If pVtab is already in the aVTrans array, return early */ for(i=0; i<db->nVTrans; i++){ if( db->aVTrans[i]==pVTab ){ return SQLITE_OK; } } /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the ** sqlite3.aVTrans[] array. */ rc = growVTrans(db); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = pModule->xBegin(pVTab->pVtab); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int iSvpt = db->nStatement + db->nSavepoint; addToVTrans(db, pVTab); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 | /* ** Invoke either the xSavepoint, xRollbackTo or xRelease method of all ** virtual tables that currently have an open transaction. Pass iSavepoint ** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked. ** ** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is | | | | 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 | /* ** Invoke either the xSavepoint, xRollbackTo or xRelease method of all ** virtual tables that currently have an open transaction. Pass iSavepoint ** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked. ** ** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is ** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the xRelease method of each virtual table with ** an open transaction is invoked. ** ** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK, ** processing is abandoned and the error returned to the caller of this ** function immediately. If all calls to virtual table methods are successful, ** SQLITE_OK is returned. */ int sqlite3VtabSavepoint(sqlite3 *db, int op, int iSavepoint){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 | ** second parameter (pExpr) is the first argument to this function. ** If pExpr is a column in a virtual table, then let the virtual ** table implementation have an opportunity to overload the function. ** ** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to ** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators. ** | | | 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | ** second parameter (pExpr) is the first argument to this function. ** If pExpr is a column in a virtual table, then let the virtual ** table implementation have an opportunity to overload the function. ** ** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to ** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators. ** ** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a ** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the ** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag. */ FuncDef *sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction( sqlite3 *db, /* Database connection for reporting malloc problems */ FuncDef *pDef, /* Function to possibly overload */ int nArg, /* Number of arguments to the function */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 | if( NEVER(pTab==0) ) return pDef; if( !IsVirtual(pTab) ) return pDef; pVtab = sqlite3GetVTable(db, pTab)->pVtab; assert( pVtab!=0 ); assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 ); pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule; if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef; | | | 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 | if( NEVER(pTab==0) ) return pDef; if( !IsVirtual(pTab) ) return pDef; pVtab = sqlite3GetVTable(db, pTab)->pVtab; assert( pVtab!=0 ); assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 ); pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule; if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef; /* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function. ** ** Though undocumented, we have historically always invoked xFindFunction ** with an all lower-case function name. Continue in this tradition to ** avoid any chance of an incompatibility. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 | sqlite3OomFault(pToplevel->db); } } /* ** Check to see if virtual table module pMod can be have an eponymous ** virtual table instance. If it can, create one if one does not already | | | | 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 | sqlite3OomFault(pToplevel->db); } } /* ** Check to see if virtual table module pMod can be have an eponymous ** virtual table instance. If it can, create one if one does not already ** exist. Return non-zero if either the eponymous virtual table instance ** exists when this routine returns or if an attempt to create it failed ** and an error message was left in pParse. ** ** An eponymous virtual table instance is one that is named after its ** module, and more importantly, does not require a CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ** statement in order to come into existence. Eponymous virtual table ** instances always exist. They cannot be DROP-ed. ** ** Any virtual table module for which xConnect and xCreate are the same ** method can have an eponymous virtual table instance. */ int sqlite3VtabEponymousTableInit(Parse *pParse, Module *pMod){ const sqlite3_module *pModule = pMod->pModule; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 | ** Erase the eponymous virtual table instance associated with ** virtual table module pMod, if it exists. */ void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){ Table *pTab = pMod->pEpoTab; if( pTab!=0 ){ /* Mark the table as Ephemeral prior to deleting it, so that the | | | | | | 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 | ** Erase the eponymous virtual table instance associated with ** virtual table module pMod, if it exists. */ void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){ Table *pTab = pMod->pEpoTab; if( pTab!=0 ){ /* Mark the table as Ephemeral prior to deleting it, so that the ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in ** the schema. */ pTab->tabFlags |= TF_Ephemeral; sqlite3DeleteTable(db, pTab); pMod->pEpoTab = 0; } } /* ** Return the ON CONFLICT resolution mode in effect for the virtual ** table update operation currently in progress. ** ** The results of this routine are undefined unless it is called from ** within an xUpdate method. */ int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){ static const unsigned char aMap[] = { SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE }; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; #endif assert( OE_Rollback==1 && OE_Abort==2 && OE_Fail==3 ); assert( OE_Ignore==4 && OE_Replace==5 ); assert( db->vtabOnConflict>=1 && db->vtabOnConflict<=5 ); return (int)aMap[db->vtabOnConflict-1]; } /* ** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide ** the SQLite core with additional information about the behavior ** of the virtual table being implemented. */ int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3 *db, int op, ...){ va_list ap; int rc = SQLITE_OK; VtabCtx *p; |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/wal.c.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 | /* ** 2010 February 1 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | /* ** 2010 February 1 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: ** ** May you do good and not evil. ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** ** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in ** "journal_mode=WAL" mode. ** ** WRITE-AHEAD LOG (WAL) FILE FORMAT ** ** A WAL file consists of a header followed by zero or more "frames". ** Each frame records the revised content of a single page from the ** database file. All changes to the database are recorded by writing ** frames into the WAL. Transactions commit when a frame is written that ** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record ** multiple transactions. Periodically, the content of the WAL is ** transferred back into the database file in an operation called a ** "checkpoint". ** ** A single WAL file can be used multiple times. In other words, the ** WAL can fill up with frames and then be checkpointed and then new ** frames can overwrite the old ones. A WAL always grows from beginning |
︙ | ︙ | |||
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | ** 16: Salt-1, random integer incremented with each checkpoint ** 20: Salt-2, a different random integer changing with each ckpt ** 24: Checksum-1 (first part of checksum for first 24 bytes of header). ** 28: Checksum-2 (second part of checksum for first 24 bytes of header). ** ** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each ** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a <page-size> bytes | | | | 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | ** 16: Salt-1, random integer incremented with each checkpoint ** 20: Salt-2, a different random integer changing with each ckpt ** 24: Checksum-1 (first part of checksum for first 24 bytes of header). ** 28: Checksum-2 (second part of checksum for first 24 bytes of header). ** ** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each ** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a <page-size> bytes ** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned ** integer values, as follows: ** ** 0: Page number. ** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages ** after the commit. For all other records, zero. ** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the header) ** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the header) ** 16: Checksum-1. ** 20: Checksum-2. ** ** A frame is considered valid if and only if the following conditions are |
︙ | ︙ | |||
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | ** magic number in the first 4 bytes of the WAL is 0x377f0683 and it ** is computed using little-endian if the magic number is 0x377f0682. ** The checksum values are always stored in the frame header in a ** big-endian format regardless of which byte order is used to compute ** the checksum. The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as ** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N]. The ** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows: | | | | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | ** magic number in the first 4 bytes of the WAL is 0x377f0683 and it ** is computed using little-endian if the magic number is 0x377f0682. ** The checksum values are always stored in the frame header in a ** big-endian format regardless of which byte order is used to compute ** the checksum. The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as ** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N]. The ** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows: ** ** for i from 0 to n-1 step 2: ** s0 += x[i] + s1; ** s1 += x[i+1] + s0; ** endfor ** ** Note that s0 and s1 are both weighted checksums using fibonacci weights ** in reverse order (the largest fibonacci weight occurs on the first element ** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit ** terms of the sequence whereas s0 omits the final term. ** ** On a checkpoint, the WAL is first VFS.xSync-ed, then valid content of the ** WAL is transferred into the database, then the database is VFS.xSync-ed. ** The VFS.xSync operations serve as write barriers - all writes launched ** before the xSync must complete before any write that launches after the ** xSync begins. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
112 113 114 115 116 117 118 | ** for all subsequent read operations. New transactions can be appended ** to the WAL, but as long as the reader uses its original mxFrame value ** and ignores the newly appended content, it will see a consistent snapshot ** of the database from a single point in time. This technique allows ** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database ** content simultaneously. ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 | ** for all subsequent read operations. New transactions can be appended ** to the WAL, but as long as the reader uses its original mxFrame value ** and ignores the newly appended content, it will see a consistent snapshot ** of the database from a single point in time. This technique allows ** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database ** content simultaneously. ** ** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but ** because frames for page P can appear anywhere within the WAL, the ** reader has to scan the entire WAL looking for page P frames. If the ** WAL is large (multiple megabytes is typical) that scan can be slow, ** and read performance suffers. To overcome this problem, a separate ** data structure called the wal-index is maintained to expedite the ** search for frames of a particular page. ** ** WAL-INDEX FORMAT ** ** Conceptually, the wal-index is shared memory, though VFS implementations ** might choose to implement the wal-index using a mmapped file. Because ** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL ** on a network filesystem. All users of the database must be able to ** share memory. ** ** In the default unix and windows implementation, the wal-index is a mmapped ** file whose name is the database name with a "-shm" suffix added. For that ** reason, the wal-index is sometimes called the "shm" file. ** ** The wal-index is transient. After a crash, the wal-index can (and should ** be) reconstructed from the original WAL file. In fact, the VFS is required ** to either truncate or zero the header of the wal-index when the last ** connection to it closes. Because the wal-index is transient, it can ** use an architecture-specific format; it does not have to be cross-platform. ** Hence, unlike the database and WAL file formats which store all values ** as big endian, the wal-index can store multi-byte values in the native ** byte order of the host computer. ** ** The purpose of the wal-index is to answer this question quickly: Given ** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the ** last frame in the wal before frame M for page P in the WAL, or return ** NULL if there are no frames for page P in the WAL prior to M. ** ** The wal-index consists of a header region, followed by an one or ** more index blocks. ** ** The wal-index header contains the total number of frames within the WAL ** in the mxFrame field. ** ** Each index block except for the first contains information on ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames. The first index block contains information on ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE are selected so that together the wal-index header and ** first index block are the same size as all other index blocks in the ** wal-index. The values are: ** ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE 4096 ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE 4062 ** ** Each index block contains two sections, a page-mapping that contains the ** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table ** that allows readers to query an index block for a specific page number. ** The page-mapping is an array of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE ** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the ** first index-block contains the database page number corresponding to the ** first frame in the WAL file. The first entry in the second index block ** in the WAL file corresponds to the (HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1)th frame in ** the log, and so on. ** ** The last index block in a wal-index usually contains less than the full ** complement of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE) page-numbers, ** depending on the contents of the WAL file. This does not change the ** allocated size of the page-mapping array - the page-mapping array merely ** contains unused entries. ** ** Even without using the hash table, the last frame for page P ** can be found by scanning the page-mapping sections of each index block ** starting with the last index block and moving toward the first, and ** within each index block, starting at the end and moving toward the ** beginning. The first entry that equals P corresponds to the frame ** holding the content for that page. ** ** The hash table consists of HASHTABLE_NSLOT 16-bit unsigned integers. ** HASHTABLE_NSLOT = 2*HASHTABLE_NPAGE, and there is one entry in the ** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash ** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions ** prior to finding a match is 1. Each entry of the hash table is an ** 1-based index of an entry in the mapping section of the same ** index block. Let K be the 1-based index of the largest entry in ** the mapping section. (For index blocks other than the last, K will ** always be exactly HASHTABLE_NPAGE (4096) and for the last index block ** K will be (mxFrame%HASHTABLE_NPAGE).) Unused slots of the hash table ** contain a value of 0. ** ** To look for page P in the hash table, first compute a hash iKey on ** P as follows: ** ** iKey = (P * 383) % HASHTABLE_NSLOT ** ** Then start scanning entries of the hash table, starting with iKey ** (wrapping around to the beginning when the end of the hash table is ** reached) until an unused hash slot is found. Let the first unused slot ** be at index iUnused. (iUnused might be less than iKey if there was ** wrap-around.) Because the hash table is never more than half full, ** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let ** iMax be the value between iKey and iUnused, closest to iUnused, ** where aHash[iMax]==P. If there is no iMax entry (if there exists ** no hash slot such that aHash[i]==p) then page P is not in the ** current index block. Otherwise the iMax-th mapping entry of the ** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references ** page P. ** ** A hash search begins with the last index block and moves toward the ** first index block, looking for entries corresponding to page P. On ** average, only two or three slots in each index block need to be ** examined in order to either find the last entry for page P, or to ** establish that no such entry exists in the block. Each index block |
︙ | ︙ | |||
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 | ** Both readers can use the same hash table and mapping section to get ** the correct result. There may be entries in the hash table with ** K>K0 but to the first reader, those entries will appear to be unused ** slots in the hash table and so the first reader will get an answer as ** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table ** in the first place - which is what reader one wants. Meanwhile, the ** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted | | | 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 | ** Both readers can use the same hash table and mapping section to get ** the correct result. There may be entries in the hash table with ** K>K0 but to the first reader, those entries will appear to be unused ** slots in the hash table and so the first reader will get an answer as ** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table ** in the first place - which is what reader one wants. Meanwhile, the ** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted ** later, which is exactly what reader two wants. ** ** When a rollback occurs, the value of K is decreased. Hash table entries ** that correspond to frames greater than the new K value are removed ** from the hash table at this point. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL |
︙ | ︙ | |||
265 266 267 268 269 270 271 | ** The maximum (and only) versions of the wal and wal-index formats ** that may be interpreted by this version of SQLite. ** ** If a client begins recovering a WAL file and finds that (a) the checksum ** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not ** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN. ** | | | | 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 | ** The maximum (and only) versions of the wal and wal-index formats ** that may be interpreted by this version of SQLite. ** ** If a client begins recovering a WAL file and finds that (a) the checksum ** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not ** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN. ** ** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the ** checksum test is successful) and finds that the version field is not ** WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION, then no read-transaction is opened and SQLite ** returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN. */ #define WAL_MAX_VERSION 3007000 #define WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION 3007000 /* ** Index numbers for various locking bytes. WAL_NREADER is the number ** of available reader locks and should be at least 3. The default ** is SQLITE_SHM_NLOCK==8 and WAL_NREADER==5. ** ** Technically, the various VFSes are free to implement these locks however ** they see fit. However, compatibility is encouraged so that VFSes can ** interoperate. The standard implementation used on both unix and windows ** is for the index number to indicate a byte offset into the ** WalCkptInfo.aLock[] array in the wal-index header. In other words, all ** locks are on the shm file. The WALINDEX_LOCK_OFFSET constant (which ** should be 120) is the location in the shm file for the first locking ** byte. */ #define WAL_WRITE_LOCK 0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
312 313 314 315 316 317 318 | ** object followed by one instance of the WalCkptInfo object. ** For all versions of SQLite through 3.10.0 and probably beyond, ** the locking bytes (WalCkptInfo.aLock) start at offset 120 and ** the total header size is 136 bytes. ** ** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive. ** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page. The latter case was | | | 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 | ** object followed by one instance of the WalCkptInfo object. ** For all versions of SQLite through 3.10.0 and probably beyond, ** the locking bytes (WalCkptInfo.aLock) start at offset 120 and ** the total header size is 136 bytes. ** ** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive. ** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page. The latter case was ** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added. */ struct WalIndexHdr { u32 iVersion; /* Wal-index version */ u32 unused; /* Unused (padding) field */ u32 iChange; /* Counter incremented each transaction */ u8 isInit; /* 1 when initialized */ u8 bigEndCksum; /* True if checksums in WAL are big-endian */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | ** ** The aLock[] field is a set of bytes used for locking. These bytes should ** never be read or written. ** ** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock. If a reader ** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than ** the mxFrame for that reader. The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff) | | | | | 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 | ** ** The aLock[] field is a set of bytes used for locking. These bytes should ** never be read or written. ** ** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock. If a reader ** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than ** the mxFrame for that reader. The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff) ** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is ** a special case; its value is never used and it exists as a place-holder ** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexes by one. Readers holding ** WAL_READ_LOCK(0) always ignore the entire WAL and read all content ** directly from the database. ** ** The value of aReadMark[K] may only be changed by a thread that ** is holding an exclusive lock on WAL_READ_LOCK(K). Thus, the value of ** aReadMark[K] cannot changed while there is a reader is using that mark ** since the reader will be holding a shared lock on WAL_READ_LOCK(K). ** ** The checkpointer may only transfer frames from WAL to database where ** the frame numbers are less than or equal to every aReadMark[] that is ** in use (that is, every aReadMark[j] for which there is a corresponding ** WAL_READ_LOCK(j)). New readers (usually) pick the aReadMark[] with the ** largest value and will increase an unused aReadMark[] to mxFrame if there ** is not already an aReadMark[] equal to mxFrame. The exception to the ** previous sentence is when nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that everything ** in the WAL has been backfilled into the database) then new readers ** will choose aReadMark[0] which has value 0 and hence such reader will ** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore ** the WAL. ** ** Writers normally append new frames to the end of the WAL. However, ** if nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that all WAL content has been ** written back into the database) and if no readers are using the WAL ** (in other words, if there are no WAL_READ_LOCK(i) where i>0) then ** the writer will first "reset" the WAL back to the beginning and start |
︙ | ︙ | |||
480 481 482 483 484 485 486 | #define WAL_HDRSIZE 32 /* WAL magic value. Either this value, or the same value with the least ** significant bit also set (WAL_MAGIC | 0x00000001) is stored in 32-bit ** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file. ** ** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL | | | | | 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 | #define WAL_HDRSIZE 32 /* WAL magic value. Either this value, or the same value with the least ** significant bit also set (WAL_MAGIC | 0x00000001) is stored in 32-bit ** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file. ** ** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL ** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit ** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting ** all data as 32-bit little-endian words. */ #define WAL_MAGIC 0x377f0682 /* ** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file, ** assuming a database page size of szPage bytes. The offset returned ** is to the start of the write-ahead log frame-header. */ #define walFrameOffset(iFrame, szPage) ( \ WAL_HDRSIZE + ((iFrame)-1)*(i64)((szPage)+WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE) \ ) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
539 540 541 542 543 544 545 | #endif }; /* ** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode. */ #define WAL_NORMAL_MODE 0 | | | | 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 | #endif }; /* ** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode. */ #define WAL_NORMAL_MODE 0 #define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1 #define WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE 2 /* ** Possible values for WAL.readOnly */ #define WAL_RDWR 0 /* Normal read/write connection */ #define WAL_RDONLY 1 /* The WAL file is readonly */ #define WAL_SHM_RDONLY 2 /* The SHM file is readonly */ /* ** Each page of the wal-index mapping contains a hash-table made up of ** an array of HASHTABLE_NSLOT elements of the following type. */ typedef u16 ht_slot; /* ** This structure is used to implement an iterator that loops through ** all frames in the WAL in database page order. Where two or more frames ** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the ** frame most recently written to the WAL (in other words, the frame with ** the largest index). ** ** The internals of this structure are only accessed by: ** ** walIteratorInit() - Create a new iterator, ** walIteratorNext() - Step an iterator, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
594 595 596 597 598 599 600 | ** Changing any of these constants will alter the wal-index format and ** create incompatibilities. */ #define HASHTABLE_NPAGE 4096 /* Must be power of 2 */ #define HASHTABLE_HASH_1 383 /* Should be prime */ #define HASHTABLE_NSLOT (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2) /* Must be a power of 2 */ | | | 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 | ** Changing any of these constants will alter the wal-index format and ** create incompatibilities. */ #define HASHTABLE_NPAGE 4096 /* Must be power of 2 */ #define HASHTABLE_HASH_1 383 /* Should be prime */ #define HASHTABLE_NSLOT (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2) /* Must be a power of 2 */ /* ** The block of page numbers associated with the first hash-table in a ** wal-index is smaller than usual. This is so that there is a complete ** hash-table on each aligned 32KB page of the wal-index. */ #define HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE (HASHTABLE_NPAGE - (WALINDEX_HDR_SIZE/sizeof(u32))) /* The wal-index is divided into pages of WALINDEX_PGSZ bytes each. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
620 621 622 623 624 625 626 | ** so. It is safe to enlarge the wal-index if pWal->writeLock is true ** or pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE. ** ** Three possible result scenarios: ** ** (1) rc==SQLITE_OK and *ppPage==Requested-Wal-Index-Page ** (2) rc>=SQLITE_ERROR and *ppPage==NULL | | | 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 | ** so. It is safe to enlarge the wal-index if pWal->writeLock is true ** or pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE. ** ** Three possible result scenarios: ** ** (1) rc==SQLITE_OK and *ppPage==Requested-Wal-Index-Page ** (2) rc>=SQLITE_ERROR and *ppPage==NULL ** (3) rc==SQLITE_OK and *ppPage==NULL // only if iPage==0 ** ** Scenario (3) can only occur when pWal->writeLock is false and iPage==0 */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int walIndexPageRealloc( Wal *pWal, /* The WAL context */ int iPage, /* The page we seek */ volatile u32 **ppPage /* Write the page pointer here */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
652 653 654 655 656 657 658 | /* Request a pointer to the required page from the VFS */ assert( pWal->apWiData[iPage]==0 ); if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE ){ pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ); if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; }else{ | | | 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 | /* Request a pointer to the required page from the VFS */ assert( pWal->apWiData[iPage]==0 ); if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE ){ pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ); if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; }else{ rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ, pWal->writeLock, (void volatile **)&pWal->apWiData[iPage] ); assert( pWal->apWiData[iPage]!=0 || rc!=SQLITE_OK || (pWal->writeLock==0 && iPage==0) ); testcase( pWal->apWiData[iPage]==0 && rc==SQLITE_OK ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
713 714 715 716 717 718 719 | */ #define BYTESWAP32(x) ( \ (((x)&0x000000FF)<<24) + (((x)&0x0000FF00)<<8) \ + (((x)&0x00FF0000)>>8) + (((x)&0xFF000000)>>24) \ ) /* | | | 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 | */ #define BYTESWAP32(x) ( \ (((x)&0x000000FF)<<24) + (((x)&0x0000FF00)<<8) \ + (((x)&0x00FF0000)>>8) + (((x)&0xFF000000)>>24) \ ) /* ** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in ** array aByte[] and the initial values of aIn[0] and aIn[1] (or ** initial values of 0 and 0 if aIn==NULL). ** ** The checksum is written back into aOut[] before returning. ** ** nByte must be a positive multiple of 8. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
825 826 827 828 829 830 831 | memcpy((void*)&aHdr[1], (const void*)&pWal->hdr, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); walShmBarrier(pWal); memcpy((void*)&aHdr[0], (const void*)&pWal->hdr, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); } /* ** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer | | | | 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 | memcpy((void*)&aHdr[1], (const void*)&pWal->hdr, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); walShmBarrier(pWal); memcpy((void*)&aHdr[0], (const void*)&pWal->hdr, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); } /* ** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer ** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of ** 4-byte big-endian integers, as follows: ** ** 0: Page number. ** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages ** after the commit. For all other records, zero. ** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the wal-header) ** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the wal-header) ** 16: Checksum-1. ** 20: Checksum-2. */ static void walEncodeFrame( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
880 881 882 883 884 885 886 | ){ int nativeCksum; /* True for native byte-order checksums */ u32 *aCksum = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum; u32 pgno; /* Page number of the frame */ assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 ); /* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header | | | | | | | | 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 | ){ int nativeCksum; /* True for native byte-order checksums */ u32 *aCksum = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum; u32 pgno; /* Page number of the frame */ assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 ); /* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header ** match the salt values in the wal-header. */ if( memcmp(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aFrame[8], 8)!=0 ){ return 0; } /* A frame is only valid if the page number is greater than zero. */ pgno = sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[0]); if( pgno==0 ){ return 0; } /* A frame is only valid if a checksum of the WAL header, ** all prior frames, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header, ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8 ** bytes of this frame-header. */ nativeCksum = (pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN); walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aFrame, 8, aCksum, aCksum); walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aData, pWal->szPage, aCksum, aCksum); if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16]) || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20]) ){ /* Checksum failed. */ return 0; } /* If we reach this point, the frame is valid. Return the page number ** and the new database size. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
937 938 939 940 941 942 943 | static char zName[15]; sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zName), zName, "READ-LOCK[%d]", lockIdx-WAL_READ_LOCK(0)); return zName; } } #endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */ | | | 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 | static char zName[15]; sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zName), zName, "READ-LOCK[%d]", lockIdx-WAL_READ_LOCK(0)); return zName; } } #endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */ /* ** Set or release locks on the WAL. Locks are either shared or exclusive. ** A lock cannot be moved directly between shared and exclusive - it must go ** through the unlocked state first. ** ** In locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE, all of these routines become no-ops. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 | typedef struct WalHashLoc WalHashLoc; struct WalHashLoc { volatile ht_slot *aHash; /* Start of the wal-index hash table */ volatile u32 *aPgno; /* aPgno[1] is the page of first frame indexed */ u32 iZero; /* One less than the frame number of first indexed*/ }; | | | | | 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 | typedef struct WalHashLoc WalHashLoc; struct WalHashLoc { volatile ht_slot *aHash; /* Start of the wal-index hash table */ volatile u32 *aPgno; /* aPgno[1] is the page of first frame indexed */ u32 iZero; /* One less than the frame number of first indexed*/ }; /* ** Return pointers to the hash table and page number array stored on ** page iHash of the wal-index. The wal-index is broken into 32KB pages ** numbered starting from 0. ** ** Set output variable pLoc->aHash to point to the start of the hash table ** in the wal-index file. Set pLoc->iZero to one less than the frame ** number of the first frame indexed by this hash table. If a ** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number ** (pLoc->iZero+N) in the log. ** ** Finally, set pLoc->aPgno so that pLoc->aPgno[0] is the page number of the ** first frame indexed by the hash table, frame (pLoc->iZero). */ static int walHashGet( Wal *pWal, /* WAL handle */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 | } return rc; } /* ** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table ** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame | | | 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 | } return rc; } /* ** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table ** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame ** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages ** are numbered starting from 0. */ static int walFramePage(u32 iFrame){ int iHash = (iFrame+HASHTABLE_NPAGE-HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE-1) / HASHTABLE_NPAGE; assert( (iHash==0 || iFrame>HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE) && (iHash>=1 || iFrame<=HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE) && (iHash<=1 || iFrame>(HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+HASHTABLE_NPAGE)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 | assert( pWal->writeLock ); testcase( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE-1 ); testcase( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE ); testcase( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1 ); if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return; | | | | | 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 | assert( pWal->writeLock ); testcase( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE-1 ); testcase( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE ); testcase( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1 ); if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return; /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing ** the entry that corresponds to frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame. It is guaranteed ** that the page said hash-table and array reside on is already mapped.(1) */ assert( pWal->nWiData>walFramePage(pWal->hdr.mxFrame) ); assert( pWal->apWiData[walFramePage(pWal->hdr.mxFrame)] ); i = walHashGet(pWal, walFramePage(pWal->hdr.mxFrame), &sLoc); if( NEVER(i) ) return; /* Defense-in-depth, in case (1) above is wrong */ /* Zero all hash-table entries that correspond to frame numbers greater ** than pWal->hdr.mxFrame. */ iLimit = pWal->hdr.mxFrame - sLoc.iZero; assert( iLimit>0 ); for(i=0; i<HASHTABLE_NSLOT; i++){ if( sLoc.aHash[i]>iLimit ){ sLoc.aHash[i] = 0; } } /* Zero the entries in the aPgno array that correspond to frames with ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame. */ nByte = (int)((char *)sLoc.aHash - (char *)&sLoc.aPgno[iLimit]); assert( nByte>=0 ); memset((void *)&sLoc.aPgno[iLimit], 0, nByte); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPENSIVE_ASSERT /* Verify that the every entry in the mapping region is still reachable |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int iKey; /* Hash table key */ int idx; /* Value to write to hash-table slot */ int nCollide; /* Number of hash collisions */ idx = iFrame - sLoc.iZero; assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 ); | | | | | | 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int iKey; /* Hash table key */ int idx; /* Value to write to hash-table slot */ int nCollide; /* Number of hash collisions */ idx = iFrame - sLoc.iZero; assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 ); /* If this is the first entry to be added to this hash-table, zero the ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding. */ if( idx==1 ){ int nByte = (int)((u8*)&sLoc.aHash[HASHTABLE_NSLOT] - (u8*)sLoc.aPgno); assert( nByte>=0 ); memset((void*)sLoc.aPgno, 0, nByte); } /* If the entry in aPgno[] is already set, then the previous writer ** must have exited unexpectedly in the middle of a transaction (after ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory). ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from ** the hash-table before writing any new entries. */ if( sLoc.aPgno[idx-1] ){ walCleanupHash(pWal); assert( !sLoc.aPgno[idx-1] ); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 | } return rc; } /* | | | 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 | } return rc; } /* ** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file. ** ** This routine first tries to establish an exclusive lock on the ** wal-index to prevent other threads/processes from doing anything ** with the WAL or wal-index while recovery is running. The ** WAL_RECOVER_LOCK is also held so that other threads will know ** that this thread is running recovery. If unable to establish ** the necessary locks, this routine returns SQLITE_BUSY. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 | /* Read in the WAL header. */ rc = sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto recovery_error; } /* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than | | | | | | | | 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 | /* Read in the WAL header. */ rc = sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto recovery_error; } /* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid ** data. Similarly, if the 'magic' value is invalid, ignore the whole ** WAL file. */ magic = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[0]); szPage = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[8]); if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC || szPage&(szPage-1) || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || szPage<512 ){ goto finished; } pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = (u8)(magic&0x00000001); pWal->szPage = szPage; pWal->nCkpt = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[12]); memcpy(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aBuf[16], 8); /* Verify that the WAL header checksum is correct */ walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN, aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum ); if( pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[24]) || pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[28]) ){ goto finished; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 | u32 iLast = MIN(iLastFrame, HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+iPg*HASHTABLE_NPAGE); u32 iFirst = 1 + (iPg==0?0:HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+(iPg-1)*HASHTABLE_NPAGE); u32 nHdr, nHdr32; rc = walIndexPage(pWal, iPg, (volatile u32**)&aShare); assert( aShare!=0 || rc!=SQLITE_OK ); if( aShare==0 ) break; pWal->apWiData[iPg] = aPrivate; | | | 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 | u32 iLast = MIN(iLastFrame, HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+iPg*HASHTABLE_NPAGE); u32 iFirst = 1 + (iPg==0?0:HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+(iPg-1)*HASHTABLE_NPAGE); u32 nHdr, nHdr32; rc = walIndexPage(pWal, iPg, (volatile u32**)&aShare); assert( aShare!=0 || rc!=SQLITE_OK ); if( aShare==0 ) break; pWal->apWiData[iPg] = aPrivate; for(iFrame=iFirst; iFrame<=iLast; iFrame++){ i64 iOffset = walFrameOffset(iFrame, szPage); u32 pgno; /* Database page number for frame */ u32 nTruncate; /* dbsize field from frame header */ /* Read and decode the next log frame. */ rc = sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, aFrame, szFrame, iOffset); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ volatile WalCkptInfo *pInfo; int i; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aFrameCksum[0]; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1]; walIndexWriteHdr(pWal); | | | | 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ volatile WalCkptInfo *pInfo; int i; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aFrameCksum[0]; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1]; walIndexWriteHdr(pWal); /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is ** currently holding locks that exclude all other writers and ** checkpointers. Then set the values of read-mark slots 1 through N. */ pInfo = walCkptInfo(pWal); pInfo->nBackfill = 0; pInfo->nBackfillAttempted = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; pInfo->aReadMark[0] = 0; for(i=1; i<WAL_NREADER; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 | } } if( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE ){ sqlite3OsShmUnmap(pWal->pDbFd, isDelete); } } | | | | | 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 | } } if( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE ){ sqlite3OsShmUnmap(pWal->pDbFd, isDelete); } } /* ** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must ** already be opened on connection pDbFd. The buffer that zWalName points ** to must remain valid for the lifetime of the returned Wal* handle. ** ** A SHARED lock should be held on the database file when this function ** is called. The purpose of this SHARED lock is to prevent any other ** client from unlinking the WAL or wal-index file. If another process ** were to do this just after this client opened one of these files, the ** system would be badly broken. ** ** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and ** *ppWal is set to point to a new WAL handle. If an error occurs, ** an SQLite error code is returned and *ppWal is left unmodified. */ int sqlite3WalOpen( sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, /* vfs module to open wal and wal-index */ sqlite3_file *pDbFd, /* The open database file */ const char *zWalName, /* Name of the WAL file */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 | *ppWal = pRet; WALTRACE(("WAL%d: opened\n", pRet)); } return rc; } /* | | | 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 | *ppWal = pRet; WALTRACE(("WAL%d: opened\n", pRet)); } return rc; } /* ** Change the size to which the WAL file is truncated on each reset. */ void sqlite3WalLimit(Wal *pWal, i64 iLimit){ if( pWal ) pWal->mxWalSize = iLimit; } /* ** Find the smallest page number out of all pages held in the WAL that |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 | ht_slot *aRight = *paRight; assert( nLeft>0 && nRight>0 ); while( iRight<nRight || iLeft<nLeft ){ ht_slot logpage; Pgno dbpage; | | | 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 | ht_slot *aRight = *paRight; assert( nLeft>0 && nRight>0 ); while( iRight<nRight || iLeft<nLeft ){ ht_slot logpage; Pgno dbpage; if( (iLeft<nLeft) && (iRight>=nRight || aContent[aLeft[iLeft]]<aContent[aRight[iRight]]) ){ logpage = aLeft[iLeft++]; }else{ logpage = aRight[iRight++]; } dbpage = aContent[logpage]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 | for(i=1; i<*pnList; i++){ assert( aContent[aList[i]] > aContent[aList[i-1]] ); } } #endif } | | | | 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 | for(i=1; i<*pnList; i++){ assert( aContent[aList[i]] > aContent[aList[i-1]] ); } } #endif } /* ** Free an iterator allocated by walIteratorInit(). */ static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){ sqlite3_free(p); } /* ** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all ** pages in the WAL following frame nBackfill in ascending order. Frames ** nBackfill or earlier may be included - excluding them is an optimization ** only. The caller must hold the checkpoint lock. ** ** On success, make *pp point to the newly allocated WalInterator object ** return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an error code. If this routine ** returns an error, the value of *pp is undefined. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 | ** it only runs if there is actually content in the log (mxFrame>0). */ assert( pWal->ckptLock && pWal->hdr.mxFrame>0 ); iLast = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; /* Allocate space for the WalIterator object. */ nSegment = walFramePage(iLast) + 1; | | | 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 | ** it only runs if there is actually content in the log (mxFrame>0). */ assert( pWal->ckptLock && pWal->hdr.mxFrame>0 ); iLast = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; /* Allocate space for the WalIterator object. */ nSegment = walFramePage(iLast) + 1; nByte = sizeof(WalIterator) + (nSegment-1)*sizeof(struct WalSegment) + iLast*sizeof(ht_slot); p = (WalIterator *)sqlite3_malloc64(nByte); if( !p ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; } memset(p, 0, nByte); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 | if( (i+1)==nSegment ){ nEntry = (int)(iLast - sLoc.iZero); }else{ nEntry = (int)((u32*)sLoc.aHash - (u32*)sLoc.aPgno); } aIndex = &((ht_slot *)&p->aSegment[p->nSegment])[sLoc.iZero]; sLoc.iZero++; | | | 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 | if( (i+1)==nSegment ){ nEntry = (int)(iLast - sLoc.iZero); }else{ nEntry = (int)((u32*)sLoc.aHash - (u32*)sLoc.aPgno); } aIndex = &((ht_slot *)&p->aSegment[p->nSegment])[sLoc.iZero]; sLoc.iZero++; for(j=0; j<nEntry; j++){ aIndex[j] = (ht_slot)j; } walMergesort((u32 *)sLoc.aPgno, aTmp, aIndex, &nEntry); p->aSegment[i].iZero = sLoc.iZero; p->aSegment[i].nEntry = nEntry; p->aSegment[i].aIndex = aIndex; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 | *pp = p; return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT /* ** Attempt to enable blocking locks. Blocking locks are enabled only if (a) | | | | 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 | *pp = p; return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT /* ** Attempt to enable blocking locks. Blocking locks are enabled only if (a) ** they are supported by the VFS, and (b) the database handle is configured ** with a busy-timeout. Return 1 if blocking locks are successfully enabled, ** or 0 otherwise. */ static int walEnableBlocking(Wal *pWal){ int res = 0; if( pWal->db ){ int tmout = pWal->db->busyTimeout; if( tmout ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 | int tmout = 0; sqlite3OsFileControl(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCK_TIMEOUT, (void*)&tmout); } /* ** If parameter bLock is true, attempt to enable blocking locks, take ** the WRITER lock, and then disable blocking locks. If blocking locks | | | 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 | int tmout = 0; sqlite3OsFileControl(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCK_TIMEOUT, (void*)&tmout); } /* ** If parameter bLock is true, attempt to enable blocking locks, take ** the WRITER lock, and then disable blocking locks. If blocking locks ** cannot be enabled, no attempt to obtain the WRITER lock is made. Return ** an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise. It is not ** an error if blocking locks can not be enabled. ** ** If the bLock parameter is false and the WRITER lock is held, release it. */ int sqlite3WalWriteLock(Wal *pWal, int bLock){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 | ** file - there are no readers that may attempt to read a frame from ** the log file. ** ** This function updates the shared-memory structures so that the next ** client to write to the database (which may be this one) does so by ** writing frames into the start of the log file. ** | | | | 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 | ** file - there are no readers that may attempt to read a frame from ** the log file. ** ** This function updates the shared-memory structures so that the next ** client to write to the database (which may be this one) does so by ** writing frames into the start of the log file. ** ** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the ** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e. ** one obtained from sqlite3_randomness()). */ static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){ volatile WalCkptInfo *pInfo = walCkptInfo(pWal); int i; /* Loop counter */ u32 *aSalt = pWal->hdr.aSalt; /* Big-endian salt values */ pWal->nCkpt++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 | ** in response to an sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() request or the equivalent. ** ** The amount of information copies from WAL to database might be limited ** by active readers. This routine will never overwrite a database page ** that a concurrent reader might be using. ** ** All I/O barrier operations (a.k.a fsyncs) occur in this routine when | | | | | 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 | ** in response to an sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() request or the equivalent. ** ** The amount of information copies from WAL to database might be limited ** by active readers. This routine will never overwrite a database page ** that a concurrent reader might be using. ** ** All I/O barrier operations (a.k.a fsyncs) occur in this routine when ** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL. That means that if ** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background ** process, foreground threads will never block on a lengthy fsync call. ** ** Fsync is called on the WAL before writing content out of the WAL and ** into the database. This ensures that if the new content is persistent ** in the WAL and can be recovered following a power-loss or hard reset. ** ** Fsync is also called on the database file if (and only if) the entire ** WAL content is copied into the database file. This second fsync makes ** it safe to delete the WAL since the new content will persist in the ** database file. ** ** This routine uses and updates the nBackfill field of the wal-index header. ** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill. ** (A WAL reset or recovery will revert nBackfill to zero, but not increase ** its value.) ** ** The caller must be holding sufficient locks to ensure that no other ** checkpoint is running (in any other thread or process) at the same ** time. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 | i64 nSize; /* Current size of database file */ sqlite3OsFileControl(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_START, 0); rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pWal->pDbFd, &nSize); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && nSize<nReq ){ if( (nSize+65536+(i64)pWal->hdr.mxFrame*szPage)<nReq ){ /* If the size of the final database is larger than the current ** database plus the amount of data in the wal file, plus the | | | 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 | i64 nSize; /* Current size of database file */ sqlite3OsFileControl(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_FCNTL_CKPT_START, 0); rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pWal->pDbFd, &nSize); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && nSize<nReq ){ if( (nSize+65536+(i64)pWal->hdr.mxFrame*szPage)<nReq ){ /* If the size of the final database is larger than the current ** database plus the amount of data in the wal file, plus the ** maximum size of the pending-byte page (65536 bytes), then ** must be corruption somewhere. */ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; }else{ sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT,&nReq); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 | /* Reset the return code so as not to report a checkpoint failure ** just because there are active readers. */ rc = SQLITE_OK; } } /* If this is an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART or TRUNCATE operation, and the | | | | 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 | /* Reset the return code so as not to report a checkpoint failure ** just because there are active readers. */ rc = SQLITE_OK; } } /* If this is an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART or TRUNCATE operation, and the ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that ** the next process to write to the database restarts the wal file. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eMode!=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE ){ assert( pWal->writeLock ); if( pInfo->nBackfill<pWal->hdr.mxFrame ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; }else if( eMode>=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 | ** successful return. ** ** In theory, it might be safe to do this without updating the ** wal-index header in shared memory, as all subsequent reader or ** writer clients should see that the entire log file has been ** checkpointed and behave accordingly. This seems unsafe though, ** as it would leave the system in a state where the contents of | | | 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 | ** successful return. ** ** In theory, it might be safe to do this without updating the ** wal-index header in shared memory, as all subsequent reader or ** writer clients should see that the entire log file has been ** checkpointed and behave accordingly. This seems unsafe though, ** as it would leave the system in a state where the contents of ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the ** file-system. To avoid this, update the wal-index header to ** indicate that the log file contains zero valid frames. */ walRestartHdr(pWal, salt1); rc = sqlite3OsTruncate(pWal->pWalFd, 0); } walUnlockExclusive(pWal, WAL_READ_LOCK(1), WAL_NREADER-1); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 | */ if( zBuf!=0 && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsLock(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE)) ){ if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE ){ pWal->exclusiveMode = WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE; } | | | | 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 | */ if( zBuf!=0 && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsLock(pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_LOCK_EXCLUSIVE)) ){ if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE ){ pWal->exclusiveMode = WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE; } rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db, SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, 0, 0, sync_flags, nBuf, zBuf, 0, 0 ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int bPersist = -1; sqlite3OsFileControlHint( pWal->pDbFd, SQLITE_FCNTL_PERSIST_WAL, &bPersist ); if( bPersist!=1 ){ /* Try to delete the WAL file if the checkpoint completed and ** fsynced (rc==SQLITE_OK) and if we are not in persistent-wal ** mode (!bPersist) */ isDelete = 1; }else if( pWal->mxWalSize>=0 ){ /* Try to truncate the WAL file to zero bytes if the checkpoint ** completed and fsynced (rc==SQLITE_OK) and we are in persistent ** WAL mode (bPersist) and if the PRAGMA journal_size_limit is a ** non-negative value (pWal->mxWalSize>=0). Note that we truncate |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 | ** There are two copies of the header at the beginning of the wal-index. ** When reading, read [0] first then [1]. Writes are in the reverse order. ** Memory barriers are used to prevent the compiler or the hardware from ** reordering the reads and writes. TSAN and similar tools can sometimes ** give false-positive warnings about these accesses because the tools do not ** account for the double-read and the memory barrier. The use of mutexes ** here would be problematic as the memory being accessed is potentially | | | | 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 | ** There are two copies of the header at the beginning of the wal-index. ** When reading, read [0] first then [1]. Writes are in the reverse order. ** Memory barriers are used to prevent the compiler or the hardware from ** reordering the reads and writes. TSAN and similar tools can sometimes ** give false-positive warnings about these accesses because the tools do not ** account for the double-read and the memory barrier. The use of mutexes ** here would be problematic as the memory being accessed is potentially ** shared among multiple processes and not all mutex implementations work ** reliably in that environment. */ aHdr = walIndexHdr(pWal); memcpy(&h1, (void *)&aHdr[0], sizeof(h1)); /* Possible TSAN false-positive */ walShmBarrier(pWal); memcpy(&h2, (void *)&aHdr[1], sizeof(h2)); if( memcmp(&h1, &h2, sizeof(h1))!=0 ){ return 1; /* Dirty read */ } if( h1.isInit==0 ){ return 1; /* Malformed header - probably all zeros */ } walChecksumBytes(1, (u8*)&h1, sizeof(h1)-sizeof(h1.aCksum), 0, aCksum); if( aCksum[0]!=h1.aCksum[0] || aCksum[1]!=h1.aCksum[1] ){ return 1; /* Checksum does not match */ } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 | ** If the wal-header appears to be corrupt, try to reconstruct the ** wal-index from the WAL before returning. ** ** Set *pChanged to 1 if the wal-index header value in pWal->hdr is ** changed by this operation. If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged ** to 0. ** | | | | 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 | ** If the wal-header appears to be corrupt, try to reconstruct the ** wal-index from the WAL before returning. ** ** Set *pChanged to 1 if the wal-index header value in pWal->hdr is ** changed by this operation. If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged ** to 0. ** ** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK. ** Otherwise an SQLite error code. */ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ int rc; /* Return code */ int badHdr; /* True if a header read failed */ volatile u32 *page0; /* Chunk of wal-index containing header */ /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the ** wal-index header) is mapped. Return early if an error occurs here. */ assert( pChanged ); rc = walIndexPage(pWal, 0, &page0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ assert( rc!=SQLITE_READONLY ); /* READONLY changed to OK in walIndexPage */ if( rc==SQLITE_READONLY_CANTINIT ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 | ** is zero, which prevents the SHM from growing */ testcase( page0!=0 ); } assert( page0!=0 || pWal->writeLock==0 ); /* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the ** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually | | | 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 | ** is zero, which prevents the SHM from growing */ testcase( page0!=0 ); } assert( page0!=0 || pWal->writeLock==0 ); /* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the ** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently ** being modified by another thread or process. */ badHdr = (page0 ? walIndexTryHdr(pWal, pChanged) : 1); /* If the first attempt failed, it might have been due to a race ** with a writer. So get a WRITE lock and try again. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 | ** to use that database but lacks write permission on the *-shm file. ** Other scenarios are also possible, depending on the VFS implementation. ** ** Precondition: ** ** The *-wal file has been read and an appropriate wal-index has been ** constructed in pWal->apWiData[] using heap memory instead of shared | | | | | | | | 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 | ** to use that database but lacks write permission on the *-shm file. ** Other scenarios are also possible, depending on the VFS implementation. ** ** Precondition: ** ** The *-wal file has been read and an appropriate wal-index has been ** constructed in pWal->apWiData[] using heap memory instead of shared ** memory. ** ** If this function returns SQLITE_OK, then the read transaction has ** been successfully opened. In this case output variable (*pChanged) ** is set to true before returning if the caller should discard the ** contents of the page cache before proceeding. Or, if it returns ** WAL_RETRY, then the heap memory wal-index has been discarded and ** the caller should retry opening the read transaction from the ** beginning (including attempting to map the *-shm file). ** ** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. */ static int walBeginShmUnreliable(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ i64 szWal; /* Size of wal file on disk in bytes */ i64 iOffset; /* Current offset when reading wal file */ u8 aBuf[WAL_HDRSIZE]; /* Buffer to load WAL header into */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 | /* Check to see if a complete transaction has been appended to the ** wal file since the heap-memory wal-index was created. If so, the ** heap-memory wal-index is discarded and WAL_RETRY returned to ** the caller. */ aSaveCksum[0] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]; aSaveCksum[1] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1]; | | | | 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 | /* Check to see if a complete transaction has been appended to the ** wal file since the heap-memory wal-index was created. If so, the ** heap-memory wal-index is discarded and WAL_RETRY returned to ** the caller. */ aSaveCksum[0] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]; aSaveCksum[1] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1]; for(iOffset=walFrameOffset(pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1, pWal->szPage); iOffset+szFrame<=szWal; iOffset+=szFrame ){ u32 pgno; /* Database page number for frame */ u32 nTruncate; /* dbsize field from frame header */ /* Read and decode the next log frame. */ rc = sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, aFrame, szFrame, iOffset); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 | ** ** On success return SQLITE_OK. On a permanent failure (such an ** I/O error or an SQLITE_BUSY because another process is running ** recovery) return a positive error code. ** ** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable ** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely | | | | | | | 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 | ** ** On success return SQLITE_OK. On a permanent failure (such an ** I/O error or an SQLITE_BUSY because another process is running ** recovery) return a positive error code. ** ** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable ** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely ** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr() ** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the ** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication ** to the caller that the local page cache is obsolete and needs to be ** flushed.) When useWal==1, the wal-index header is assumed to already ** be loaded and the pChanged parameter is unused. ** ** The caller must set the cnt parameter to the number of prior calls to ** this routine during the current read attempt that returned WAL_RETRY. ** This routine will start taking more aggressive measures to clear the ** race conditions after multiple WAL_RETRY returns, and after an excessive ** number of errors will ultimately return SQLITE_PROTOCOL. The ** SQLITE_PROTOCOL return indicates that some other process has gone rogue ** and is not honoring the locking protocol. There is a vanishingly small ** chance that SQLITE_PROTOCOL could be returned because of a run of really ** bad luck when there is lots of contention for the wal-index, but that ** possibility is so small that it can be safely neglected, we believe. ** ** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on ** WAL_READ_LOCK(pWal->readLock). The pWal->readLock integer is ** in the range 0 <= pWal->readLock < WAL_NREADER. If pWal->readLock==(-1) ** that means the Wal does not hold any read lock. The reader must not ** access any database page that is modified by a WAL frame up to and ** including frame number aReadMark[pWal->readLock]. The reader will ** use WAL frames up to and including pWal->hdr.mxFrame if pWal->readLock>0 ** Or if pWal->readLock==0, then the reader will ignore the WAL |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 | /* useWal may only be set for read/write connections */ assert( (pWal->readOnly & WAL_SHM_RDONLY)==0 || useWal==0 ); /* Take steps to avoid spinning forever if there is a protocol error. ** ** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest ** instances of time. No I/O or other system calls are done while the | | | | | 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 | /* useWal may only be set for read/write connections */ assert( (pWal->readOnly & WAL_SHM_RDONLY)==0 || useWal==0 ); /* Take steps to avoid spinning forever if there is a protocol error. ** ** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest ** instances of time. No I/O or other system calls are done while the ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But ** if we are unlucky, another process that is holding a lock might get ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve, ** during the few nanoseconds that it is holding the lock. In that case, ** it might take longer than normal for the lock to free. ** ** After 5 RETRYs, we begin calling sqlite3OsSleep(). The first few ** calls to sqlite3OsSleep() have a delay of 1 microsecond. Really this ** is more of a scheduler yield than an actual delay. But on the 10th ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer, ** so that on the 100th (and last) RETRY we delay for 323 milliseconds. ** The total delay time before giving up is less than 10 seconds. */ if( cnt>5 ){ int nDelay = 1; /* Pause time in microseconds */ if( cnt>100 ){ VVA_ONLY( pWal->lockError = 1; ) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 | ** would be technically correct. But the race is benign since with ** WAL_RETRY this routine will be called again and will probably be ** right on the second iteration. */ if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){ /* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY. ** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The | | | | | 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 | ** would be technically correct. But the race is benign since with ** WAL_RETRY this routine will be called again and will probably be ** right on the second iteration. */ if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){ /* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY. ** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region ** must be zeroed before the requested page is returned. */ rc = WAL_RETRY; }else if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = walLockShared(pWal, WAL_RECOVER_LOCK)) ){ walUnlockShared(pWal, WAL_RECOVER_LOCK); rc = WAL_RETRY; }else if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 | /* It is not safe to allow the reader to continue here if frames ** may have been appended to the log before READ_LOCK(0) was obtained. ** When holding READ_LOCK(0), the reader ignores the entire log file, ** which implies that the database file contains a trustworthy ** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from ** happening, this is usually correct. ** | | | 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 | /* It is not safe to allow the reader to continue here if frames ** may have been appended to the log before READ_LOCK(0) was obtained. ** When holding READ_LOCK(0), the reader ignores the entire log file, ** which implies that the database file contains a trustworthy ** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from ** happening, this is usually correct. ** ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log ** is wrapped and written for that matter) before the READ_LOCK(0) ** is obtained, that is not necessarily true. A checkpointer may ** have started to backfill the appended frames but crashed before ** it finished. Leaving a corrupt image in the database file. */ walUnlockShared(pWal, WAL_READ_LOCK(0)); return WAL_RETRY; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 | ** ** Before checking that the live wal-index header has not changed ** since it was read, set Wal.minFrame to the first frame in the wal ** file that has not yet been checkpointed. This client will not need ** to read any frames earlier than minFrame from the wal file - they ** can be safely read directly from the database file. ** | | | | 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 | ** ** Before checking that the live wal-index header has not changed ** since it was read, set Wal.minFrame to the first frame in the wal ** file that has not yet been checkpointed. This client will not need ** to read any frames earlier than minFrame from the wal file - they ** can be safely read directly from the database file. ** ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of ** nBackfill and checking that the wal-header in shared-memory still ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the ** checkpointer that set nBackfill was not working with a wal-index ** header newer than that cached in pWal->hdr. If it were, that could ** cause a problem. The checkpointer could omit to checkpoint ** a version of page X that lies before pWal->minFrame (call that version ** A) on the basis that there is a newer version (version B) of the same ** page later in the wal file. But if version B happens to like past ** frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame - then the client would incorrectly assume |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 | pWal->readLock = (i16)mxI; } return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT /* | | | | | | 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 | pWal->readLock = (i16)mxI; } return rc; } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT /* ** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted ** variable so that older snapshots can be accessed. To do this, loop ** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1), ** comparing their content to the corresponding page with the database ** file, if any. Set nBackfillAttempted to the frame number of the ** first frame for which the wal file content matches the db file. ** ** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page ** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which ** is not always true. It is also possible that nBackfillAttempted ** may be left set to a value larger than expected, if a wal frame ** contains content that duplicate of an earlier version of the same ** page. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code if an ** error occurs. It is not an error if nBackfillAttempted cannot be |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT if( pSnapshot ){ if( memcmp(pSnapshot, &pWal->hdr, sizeof(WalIndexHdr))!=0 ){ bChanged = 1; } | | | | | | | 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 | #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT if( pSnapshot ){ if( memcmp(pSnapshot, &pWal->hdr, sizeof(WalIndexHdr))!=0 ){ bChanged = 1; } /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running ** concurrent with this code. If this is the case, it may be that the ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate ** its intent. To avoid the race condition this leads to, ensure that ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock ** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted. */ (void)walEnableBlocking(pWal); rc = walLockShared(pWal, WAL_CKPT_LOCK); walDisableBlocking(pWal); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ return rc; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 | }else{ rc = SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT; } /* A client using a non-current snapshot may not ignore any frames ** from the start of the wal file. This is because, for a system ** where (minFrame < iSnapshot < maxFrame), a checkpointer may | | | 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 | }else{ rc = SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT; } /* A client using a non-current snapshot may not ignore any frames ** from the start of the wal file. This is because, for a system ** where (minFrame < iSnapshot < maxFrame), a checkpointer may ** have omitted to checkpoint a frame earlier than minFrame in ** the file because there exists a frame after iSnapshot that ** is the same database page. */ pWal->minFrame = 1; if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3WalEndReadTransaction(pWal); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 | int iMinHash; /* This routine is only be called from within a read transaction. */ assert( pWal->readLock>=0 || pWal->lockError ); /* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then ** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early | | | | | | | | | | 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 | int iMinHash; /* This routine is only be called from within a read transaction. */ assert( pWal->readLock>=0 || pWal->lockError ); /* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then ** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0, ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the ** WAL were empty. */ if( iLast==0 || (pWal->readLock==0 && pWal->bShmUnreliable==0) ){ *piRead = 0; return SQLITE_OK; } /* Search the hash table or tables for an entry matching page number ** pgno. Each iteration of the following for() loop searches one ** hash table (each hash table indexes up to HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames). ** ** This code might run concurrently to the code in walIndexAppend() ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash ** table). This means the value just read from the hash ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the ** current read transaction was opened. Values added after the ** read transaction was opened may have been written incorrectly - ** i.e. these slots may contain garbage data. However, we assume ** that any slots written before the current read transaction was ** opened remain unmodified. ** ** For the reasons above, the if(...) condition featured in the inner ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required ** if we had exclusive access to the hash-table: ** ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno): ** This condition filters out normal hash-table collisions. ** ** (iFrame<=iLast): ** This condition filters out entries that were added to the hash ** table after the current read-transaction had started. */ iMinHash = walFramePage(pWal->minFrame); for(iHash=walFramePage(iLast); iHash>=iMinHash; iHash--){ WalHashLoc sLoc; /* Hash table location */ int iKey; /* Hash slot index */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 | testcase( sz<=32768 ); testcase( sz>=65536 ); iOffset = walFrameOffset(iRead, sz) + WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE; /* testcase( IS_BIG_INT(iOffset) ); // requires a 4GiB WAL */ return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset); } | | | | 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 | testcase( sz<=32768 ); testcase( sz>=65536 ); iOffset = walFrameOffset(iRead, sz) + WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE; /* testcase( IS_BIG_INT(iOffset) ); // requires a 4GiB WAL */ return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset); } /* ** Return the size of the database in pages (or zero, if unknown). */ Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){ if( pWal && ALWAYS(pWal->readLock>=0) ){ return pWal->hdr.nPage; } return 0; } /* ** This function starts a write transaction on the WAL. ** ** A read transaction must have already been started by a prior call ** to sqlite3WalBeginReadTransaction(). ** ** If another thread or process has written into the database since ** the read transaction was started, then it is not possible for this |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 | ** function returns SQLITE_OK. */ int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *pUndoCtx){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){ Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; Pgno iFrame; | | | | | | | | | | | | 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 | ** function returns SQLITE_OK. */ int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *pUndoCtx){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){ Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; Pgno iFrame; /* Restore the clients cache of the wal-index header to the state it ** was in before the client began writing to the database. */ memcpy(&pWal->hdr, (void *)walIndexHdr(pWal), sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1; ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax; iFrame++ ){ /* This call cannot fail. Unless the page for which the page number ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and ** (b) has an outstanding reference, then xUndo is either a no-op ** (if (a) is false) or simply expels the page from the cache (if (b) ** is false). ** ** If the upper layer is doing a rollback, it is guaranteed that there ** are no outstanding references to any page other than page 1. And ** page 1 is never written to the log until the transaction is ** committed. As a result, the call to xUndo may not fail. */ assert( walFramePgno(pWal, iFrame)!=1 ); rc = xUndo(pUndoCtx, walFramePgno(pWal, iFrame)); } if( iMax!=pWal->hdr.mxFrame ) walCleanupHash(pWal); } return rc; } /* ** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 ** values. This function populates the array with values required to ** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current ** point in the event of a savepoint rollback (via WalSavepointUndo()). */ void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){ assert( pWal->writeLock ); aWalData[0] = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; aWalData[1] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]; aWalData[2] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1]; aWalData[3] = pWal->nCkpt; } /* ** Move the write position of the WAL back to the point identified by ** the values in the aWalData[] array. aWalData must point to an array ** of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 values that has been previously populated ** by a call to WalSavepoint(). */ int sqlite3WalSavepointUndo(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 | } } sqlite3_free(aBuf); return rc; } | | | 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 | } } sqlite3_free(aBuf); return rc; } /* ** Write a set of frames to the log. The caller must hold the write-lock ** on the log file (obtained using sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction()). */ int sqlite3WalFrames( Wal *pWal, /* Wal handle to write to */ int szPage, /* Database page-size in bytes */ PgHdr *pList, /* List of dirty pages to write */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 | sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[8], szPage); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[12], pWal->nCkpt); if( pWal->nCkpt==0 ) sqlite3_randomness(8, pWal->hdr.aSalt); memcpy(&aWalHdr[16], pWal->hdr.aSalt, 8); walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]); | | | 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 | sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[8], szPage); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[12], pWal->nCkpt); if( pWal->nCkpt==0 ) sqlite3_randomness(8, pWal->hdr.aSalt); memcpy(&aWalHdr[16], pWal->hdr.aSalt, 8); walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]); pWal->szPage = szPage; pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = SQLITE_BIGENDIAN; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aCksum[0]; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aCksum[1]; pWal->truncateOnCommit = 1; rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pWal->pWalFd, aWalHdr, sizeof(aWalHdr), 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 | /* Write all frames into the log file exactly once */ for(p=pList; p; p=p->pDirty){ int nDbSize; /* 0 normally. Positive == commit flag */ /* Check if this page has already been written into the wal file by ** the current transaction. If so, overwrite the existing frame and | | | 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 | /* Write all frames into the log file exactly once */ for(p=pList; p; p=p->pDirty){ int nDbSize; /* 0 normally. Positive == commit flag */ /* Check if this page has already been written into the wal file by ** the current transaction. If so, overwrite the existing frame and ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that ** checksums must be recomputed when the transaction is committed. */ if( iFirst && (p->pDirty || isCommit==0) ){ u32 iWrite = 0; VVA_ONLY(rc =) sqlite3WalFindFrame(pWal, p->pgno, &iWrite); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || iWrite==0 ); if( iWrite>=iFirst ){ i64 iOff = walFrameOffset(iWrite, szPage) + WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 | if( walFrameOffset(iFrame+nExtra+1, szPage)>pWal->mxWalSize ){ sz = walFrameOffset(iFrame+nExtra+1, szPage); } walLimitSize(pWal, sz); pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0; } | | | 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 | if( walFrameOffset(iFrame+nExtra+1, szPage)>pWal->mxWalSize ){ sz = walFrameOffset(iFrame+nExtra+1, szPage); } walLimitSize(pWal, sz); pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0; } /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the ** wal-index to do this as the SQLITE_SHM_WRITE lock held on the wal-index ** guarantees that there are no other writers, and no data that may ** be in use by existing readers is being overwritten. */ iFrame = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; for(p=pList; p && rc==SQLITE_OK; p=p->pDirty){ if( (p->flags & PGHDR_WAL_APPEND)==0 ) continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 | } } WALTRACE(("WAL%p: frame write %s\n", pWal, rc ? "failed" : "ok")); return rc; } | | | 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 | } } WALTRACE(("WAL%p: frame write %s\n", pWal, rc ? "failed" : "ok")); return rc; } /* ** This routine is called to implement sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() and ** related interfaces. ** ** Obtain a CHECKPOINT lock and then backfill as much information as ** we can from WAL into the database. ** ** If parameter xBusy is not NULL, it is a pointer to a busy-handler |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 | WALTRACE(("WAL%p: checkpoint begins\n", pWal)); /* Enable blocking locks, if possible. If blocking locks are successfully ** enabled, set xBusy2=0 so that the busy-handler is never invoked. */ sqlite3WalDb(pWal, db); (void)walEnableBlocking(pWal); | | | 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 | WALTRACE(("WAL%p: checkpoint begins\n", pWal)); /* Enable blocking locks, if possible. If blocking locks are successfully ** enabled, set xBusy2=0 so that the busy-handler is never invoked. */ sqlite3WalDb(pWal, db); (void)walEnableBlocking(pWal); /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive ** "checkpoint" lock on the database file. ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-10421-19736 If any other process is running a ** checkpoint operation at the same time, the lock cannot be obtained and ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-53820-33897 Even if there is a busy-handler configured, ** it will not be invoked in this case. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ if( pnLog ) *pnLog = (int)pWal->hdr.mxFrame; if( pnCkpt ) *pnCkpt = (int)(walCkptInfo(pWal)->nBackfill); } } if( isChanged ){ | | | 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 | if( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ if( pnLog ) *pnLog = (int)pWal->hdr.mxFrame; if( pnCkpt ) *pnCkpt = (int)(walCkptInfo(pWal)->nBackfill); } } if( isChanged ){ /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was ** performed, then the pager-cache associated with pWal is now ** out of date. So zero the cached wal-index header to ensure that ** next time the pager opens a snapshot on this database it knows that ** the cache needs to be reset. */ memset(&pWal->hdr, 0, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 | ** into locking_mode=NORMAL. This means that we must acquire a lock ** on the pWal->readLock byte. If the WAL is already in locking_mode=NORMAL ** or if the acquisition of the lock fails, then return 0. If the ** transition out of exclusive-mode is successful, return 1. This ** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive ** lock on the main database file. ** | | | | | 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 | ** into locking_mode=NORMAL. This means that we must acquire a lock ** on the pWal->readLock byte. If the WAL is already in locking_mode=NORMAL ** or if the acquisition of the lock fails, then return 0. If the ** transition out of exclusive-mode is successful, return 1. This ** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive ** lock on the main database file. ** ** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into ** locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE. This means that the pWal->readLock must ** be released. Return 1 if the transition is made and 0 if the ** WAL is already in exclusive-locking mode - meaning that this ** routine is a no-op. The pager must already hold the exclusive lock ** on the main database file before invoking this operation. ** ** If op is negative, then do a dry-run of the op==1 case but do ** not actually change anything. The pager uses this to see if it ** should acquire the database exclusive lock prior to invoking ** the op==1 case. */ int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){ int rc; assert( pWal->writeLock==0 ); assert( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE || op==-1 ); /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot ** happen if the connection is actually in exclusive mode (as no xShmLock ** locks are taken in this case). Nor should the pager attempt to ** upgrade to exclusive-mode following such an error. */ assert( pWal->readLock>=0 || pWal->lockError ); assert( pWal->readLock>=0 || (op<=0 && pWal->exclusiveMode==0) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 | rc = 1; }else{ rc = pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE; } return rc; } | | | | 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 | rc = 1; }else{ rc = pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE; } return rc; } /* ** Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using ** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the ** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. */ int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal){ return (pWal && pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE ); } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT /* Create a snapshot object. The content of a snapshot is opaque to |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 | return rc; } /* Try to open on pSnapshot when the next read-transaction starts */ void sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen( | | | | | 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 | return rc; } /* Try to open on pSnapshot when the next read-transaction starts */ void sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen( Wal *pWal, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot ){ pWal->pSnapshot = (WalIndexHdr*)pSnapshot; } /* ** Return a +ve value if snapshot p1 is newer than p2. A -ve value if ** p1 is older than p2 and zero if p1 and p2 are the same snapshot. */ int sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(sqlite3_snapshot *p1, sqlite3_snapshot *p2){ WalIndexHdr *pHdr1 = (WalIndexHdr*)p1; WalIndexHdr *pHdr2 = (WalIndexHdr*)p2; /* aSalt[0] is a copy of the value stored in the wal file header. It ** is incremented each time the wal file is restarted. */ if( pHdr1->aSalt[0]<pHdr2->aSalt[0] ) return -1; if( pHdr1->aSalt[0]>pHdr2->aSalt[0] ) return +1; if( pHdr1->mxFrame<pHdr2->mxFrame ) return -1; if( pHdr1->mxFrame>pHdr2->mxFrame ) return +1; return 0; } /* ** The caller currently has a read transaction open on the database. ** This function takes a SHARED lock on the CHECKPOINTER slot and then ** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still ** available. If so, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** If the snapshot is not available, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Or, if ** the CHECKPOINTER lock cannot be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY. If any error ** occurs (any value other than SQLITE_OK is returned), the CHECKPOINTER ** lock is released before returning. */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/walker.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 | } p = p->pPrior; }while( p!=0 ); return WRC_Continue; } /* Increase the walkerDepth when entering a subquery, and | | | 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 | } p = p->pPrior; }while( p!=0 ); return WRC_Continue; } /* Increase the walkerDepth when entering a subquery, and ** decrease when leaving the subquery. */ int sqlite3WalkerDepthIncrease(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(pSelect); pWalker->walkerDepth++; return WRC_Continue; } void sqlite3WalkerDepthDecrease(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/where.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
84 85 86 87 88 89 90 | ** ** If the ORDER BY LIMIT optimization applies, the jump destination should ** be the continuation for the second-inner-most loop. If the ORDER BY ** LIMIT optimization does not apply, then the jump destination should ** be the continuation for the inner-most loop. ** ** It is always safe for this routine to return the continuation of the | | | | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 | ** ** If the ORDER BY LIMIT optimization applies, the jump destination should ** be the continuation for the second-inner-most loop. If the ORDER BY ** LIMIT optimization does not apply, then the jump destination should ** be the continuation for the inner-most loop. ** ** It is always safe for this routine to return the continuation of the ** inner-most loop, in the sense that a correct answer will result. ** Returning the continuation the second inner loop is an optimization ** that might make the code run a little faster, but should not change ** the final answer. */ int sqlite3WhereOrderByLimitOptLabel(WhereInfo *pWInfo){ WhereLevel *pInner; if( !pWInfo->bOrderedInnerLoop ){ /* The ORDER BY LIMIT optimization does not apply. Jump to the ** continuation of the inner-most loop. */ return pWInfo->iContinue; } pInner = &pWInfo->a[pWInfo->nLevel-1]; assert( pInner->addrNxt!=0 ); return pInner->pRJ ? pWInfo->iContinue : pInner->addrNxt; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | } /* ** Return ONEPASS_OFF (0) if an UPDATE or DELETE statement is unable to ** operate directly on the rowids returned by a WHERE clause. Return ** ONEPASS_SINGLE (1) if the statement can operation directly because only ** a single row is to be changed. Return ONEPASS_MULTI (2) if the one-pass | | | 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | } /* ** Return ONEPASS_OFF (0) if an UPDATE or DELETE statement is unable to ** operate directly on the rowids returned by a WHERE clause. Return ** ONEPASS_SINGLE (1) if the statement can operation directly because only ** a single row is to be changed. Return ONEPASS_MULTI (2) if the one-pass ** optimization can be used on multiple ** ** If the ONEPASS optimization is used (if this routine returns true) ** then also write the indices of open cursors used by ONEPASS ** into aiCur[0] and aiCur[1]. iaCur[0] gets the cursor of the data ** table and iaCur[1] gets the cursor used by an auxiliary index. ** Either value may be -1, indicating that cursor is not used. ** Any cursors returned will have been opened for writing. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | /* ** Search for a term in the WHERE clause that is of the form "X <op> <expr>" ** where X is a reference to the iColumn of table iCur or of index pIdx ** if pIdx!=0 and <op> is one of the WO_xx operator codes specified by ** the op parameter. Return a pointer to the term. Return 0 if not found. ** | | | 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 | /* ** Search for a term in the WHERE clause that is of the form "X <op> <expr>" ** where X is a reference to the iColumn of table iCur or of index pIdx ** if pIdx!=0 and <op> is one of the WO_xx operator codes specified by ** the op parameter. Return a pointer to the term. Return 0 if not found. ** ** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur. ** Search for terms matching the iColumn-th column of pIdx ** rather than the iColumn-th column of table iCur. ** ** The term returned might by Y=<expr> if there is another constraint in ** the WHERE clause that specifies that X=Y. Any such constraints will be ** identified by the WO_EQUIV bit in the pTerm->eOperator field. The ** aiCur[]/iaColumn[] arrays hold X and all its equivalents. There are 11 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
588 589 590 591 592 593 594 | Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ SrcList *pTabList, /* The FROM clause */ WhereClause *pWC, /* The WHERE clause */ ExprList *pDistinct /* The result set that needs to be DISTINCT */ ){ Table *pTab; Index *pIdx; | | | | | 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 | Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ SrcList *pTabList, /* The FROM clause */ WhereClause *pWC, /* The WHERE clause */ ExprList *pDistinct /* The result set that needs to be DISTINCT */ ){ Table *pTab; Index *pIdx; int i; int iBase; /* If there is more than one table or sub-select in the FROM clause of ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT ** clause is redundant. */ if( pTabList->nSrc!=1 ) return 0; iBase = pTabList->a[0].iCursor; pTab = pTabList->a[0].pTab; /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return ** true. Note: The (p->iTable==iBase) part of this test may be false if the ** current SELECT is a correlated sub-query. */ for(i=0; i<pDistinct->nExpr; i++){ Expr *p = sqlite3ExprSkipCollateAndLikely(pDistinct->a[i].pExpr); if( NEVER(p==0) ) continue; if( p->op!=TK_COLUMN && p->op!=TK_AGG_COLUMN ) continue; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
652 653 654 655 656 657 658 | return N<=10 ? 0 : sqlite3LogEst(N) - 33; } /* ** Convert OP_Column opcodes to OP_Copy in previously generated code. ** ** This routine runs over generated VDBE code and translates OP_Column | | | 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 | return N<=10 ? 0 : sqlite3LogEst(N) - 33; } /* ** Convert OP_Column opcodes to OP_Copy in previously generated code. ** ** This routine runs over generated VDBE code and translates OP_Column ** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine ** instead of via table lookup. ** ** If the iAutoidxCur is not zero, then any OP_Rowid instructions on ** cursor iTabCur are transformed into OP_Sequence opcode for the ** iAutoidxCur cursor, in order to generate unique rowids for the ** automatic index being generated. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
773 774 775 776 777 778 779 | if( (pSrc->fg.jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT))!=0 && ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_InnerON) ){ return 0; } return 1; } | | | 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 | if( (pSrc->fg.jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT))!=0 && ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_InnerON) ){ return 0; } return 1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX /* ** Return TRUE if the WHERE clause term pTerm is of a form where it ** could be used with an index to access pSrc, assuming an appropriate ** index existed. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
818 819 820 821 822 823 824 | ** Argument pIdx represents an automatic index that the current statement ** will create and populate. Add an OP_Explain with text of the form: ** ** CREATE AUTOMATIC INDEX ON <table>(<cols>) [WHERE <expr>] ** ** This is only required if sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is enabled, to ** associate an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE and SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NLOOP | | | 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 | ** Argument pIdx represents an automatic index that the current statement ** will create and populate. Add an OP_Explain with text of the form: ** ** CREATE AUTOMATIC INDEX ON <table>(<cols>) [WHERE <expr>] ** ** This is only required if sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is enabled, to ** associate an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE and SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NLOOP ** values with. In order to avoid breaking legacy code and test cases, ** the OP_Explain is not added if this is an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN command. */ static void explainAutomaticIndex( Parse *pParse, Index *pIdx, /* Automatic index to explain */ int bPartial, /* True if pIdx is a partial index */ int *pAddrExplain /* OUT: Address of OP_Explain */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 | pSrc->fg.viaCoroutine = 0; }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, pLevel->iTabCur, addrTop+1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX); } sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord); | | | 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 | pSrc->fg.viaCoroutine = 0; }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, pLevel->iTabCur, addrTop+1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX); } sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord); /* Jump here when skipping the initialization */ sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrInit); sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(v, addrExp, addrExp, -1); end_auto_index_create: sqlite3ExprDelete(pParse->db, pPartial); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 | sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrOnce); pParse->pIdxEpr = saved_pIdxEpr; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* | | | 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 | sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrOnce); pParse->pIdxEpr = saved_pIdxEpr; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* ** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the ** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure ** by passing the pointer returned by this function to freeIndexInfo(). */ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo( WhereInfo *pWInfo, /* The WHERE clause */ WhereClause *pWC, /* The WHERE clause being analyzed */ Bitmask mUnusable, /* Ignore terms with these prereqs */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 | WhereTerm *pTerm; int nOrderBy; sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo; u16 mNoOmit = 0; const Table *pTab; int eDistinct = 0; ExprList *pOrderBy = pWInfo->pOrderBy; | | | 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 | WhereTerm *pTerm; int nOrderBy; sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo; u16 mNoOmit = 0; const Table *pTab; int eDistinct = 0; ExprList *pOrderBy = pWInfo->pOrderBy; assert( pSrc!=0 ); pTab = pSrc->pTab; assert( pTab!=0 ); assert( IsVirtual(pTab) ); /* Find all WHERE clause constraints referring to this virtual table. ** Mark each term with the TERM_OK flag. Set nTerm to the number of |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 | ){ continue; } nTerm++; pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_OK; } | | | 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 | ){ continue; } nTerm++; pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_OK; } /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current ** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of ** the sqlite3_index_info structure. */ nOrderBy = 0; if( pOrderBy ){ int n = pOrderBy->nExpr; for(i=0; i<n; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 | assert( WO_LT==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LT ); assert( WO_LE==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LE ); assert( WO_GT==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GT ); assert( WO_GE==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE ); assert( pTerm->eOperator&(WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE|WO_AUX) ); if( op & (WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE) | | | 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 | assert( WO_LT==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LT ); assert( WO_LE==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LE ); assert( WO_GT==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GT ); assert( WO_GE==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE ); assert( pTerm->eOperator&(WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE|WO_AUX) ); if( op & (WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE) && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight) ){ testcase( j!=i ); if( j<16 ) mNoOmit |= (1 << j); if( op==WO_LT ) pIdxCons[j].op = WO_LE; if( op==WO_GT ) pIdxCons[j].op = WO_GE; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 | ** ** aStat[0] Est. number of rows less than pRec ** aStat[1] Est. number of rows equal to pRec ** ** Return the index of the sample that is the smallest sample that ** is greater than or equal to pRec. Note that this index is not an index ** into the aSample[] array - it is an index into a virtual set of samples | | | | 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 | ** ** aStat[0] Est. number of rows less than pRec ** aStat[1] Est. number of rows equal to pRec ** ** Return the index of the sample that is the smallest sample that ** is greater than or equal to pRec. Note that this index is not an index ** into the aSample[] array - it is an index into a virtual set of samples ** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record ** pRec. */ static int whereKeyStats( Parse *pParse, /* Database connection */ Index *pIdx, /* Index to consider domain of */ UnpackedRecord *pRec, /* Vector of values to consider */ int roundUp, /* Round up if true. Round down if false */ tRowcnt *aStat /* OUT: stats written here */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 | #ifndef SQLITE_DEBUG UNUSED_PARAMETER( pParse ); #endif assert( pRec!=0 ); assert( pIdx->nSample>0 ); assert( pRec->nField>0 ); | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 | #ifndef SQLITE_DEBUG UNUSED_PARAMETER( pParse ); #endif assert( pRec!=0 ); assert( pIdx->nSample>0 ); assert( pRec->nField>0 ); /* Do a binary search to find the first sample greater than or equal ** to pRec. If pRec contains a single field, the set of samples to search ** is simply the aSample[] array. If the samples in aSample[] contain more ** than one fields, all fields following the first are ignored. ** ** If pRec contains N fields, where N is more than one, then as well as the ** samples in aSample[] (truncated to N fields), the search also has to ** consider prefixes of those samples. For example, if the set of samples ** in aSample is: ** ** aSample[0] = (a, 5) ** aSample[1] = (a, 10) ** aSample[2] = (b, 5) ** aSample[3] = (c, 100) ** aSample[4] = (c, 105) ** ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize, ** the code actually searches this set: ** ** 0: (a) ** 1: (a, 5) ** 2: (a, 10) ** 3: (a, 10) ** 4: (b) ** 5: (b, 5) ** 6: (c) ** 7: (c, 100) ** 8: (c, 105) ** 9: (c, 105) ** ** For each sample in the aSample[] array, N samples are present in the ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on ** sample aSample[0]. Samples 2 and 3 on aSample[1] etc. ** ** Often, sample i of each block of N effective samples has (i+1) fields. ** Except, each sample may be extended to ensure that it is greater than or ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above, ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result, ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not ** cause any problems. */ if( !HasRowid(pIdx->pTable) && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ){ nField = pIdx->nKeyCol; }else{ nField = pIdx->nColumn; } nField = MIN(pRec->nField, nField); iCol = 0; iSample = pIdx->nSample * nField; do{ int iSamp; /* Index in aSample[] of test sample */ int n; /* Number of fields in test sample */ iTest = (iMin+iSample)/2; iSamp = iTest / nField; if( iSamp>0 ){ /* The proposed effective sample is a prefix of sample aSample[iSamp]. ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField) ** fields that is greater than the previous effective sample. */ for(n=(iTest % nField) + 1; n<nField; n++){ if( aSample[iSamp-1].anLt[n-1]!=aSample[iSamp].anLt[n-1] ) break; } }else{ n = iTest + 1; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 | ** than to invoke the asserts. */ if( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ){ if( res==0 ){ /* If (res==0) is true, then pRec must be equal to sample i. */ assert( i<pIdx->nSample ); assert( iCol==nField-1 ); pRec->nField = nField; | | | | | 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 | ** than to invoke the asserts. */ if( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ){ if( res==0 ){ /* If (res==0) is true, then pRec must be equal to sample i. */ assert( i<pIdx->nSample ); assert( iCol==nField-1 ); pRec->nField = nField; assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec) || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); }else{ /* Unless i==pIdx->nSample, indicating that pRec is larger than ** all samples in the aSample[] array, pRec must be smaller than the ** (iCol+1) field prefix of sample i. */ assert( i<=pIdx->nSample && i>=0 ); pRec->nField = iCol+1; assert( i==pIdx->nSample || sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)>0 || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); /* if i==0 and iCol==0, then record pRec is smaller than all samples ** in the aSample[] array. Otherwise, if (iCol>0) then pRec must ** be greater than or equal to the (iCol) field prefix of sample i. ** If (i>0), then pRec must also be greater than sample (i-1). */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 | if( res==0 ){ /* Record pRec is equal to sample i */ assert( iCol==nField-1 ); aStat[0] = aSample[i].anLt[iCol]; aStat[1] = aSample[i].anEq[iCol]; }else{ | | | 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 | if( res==0 ){ /* Record pRec is equal to sample i */ assert( iCol==nField-1 ); aStat[0] = aSample[i].anLt[iCol]; aStat[1] = aSample[i].anEq[iCol]; }else{ /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first ** sample that is greater than pRec. Or, if i==pIdx->nSample then pRec ** is larger than all samples in the array. */ tRowcnt iUpper, iGap; if( i>=pIdx->nSample ){ iUpper = pIdx->nRowEst0; }else{ iUpper = aSample[i].anLt[iCol]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 | pRec->nField = nField; return i; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 */ /* ** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower | | | 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 | pRec->nField = nField; return i; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 */ /* ** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower ** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated ** that the scan will visit nNew rows. This function returns the number ** estimated to be visited after taking pTerm into account. ** ** If the user explicitly specified a likelihood() value for this term, ** then the return value is the likelihood multiplied by the number of ** input rows. Otherwise, this function assumes that an "IS NOT NULL" term ** has a likelihood of 0.50, and any other term a likelihood of 0.25. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 | assert( pIdx->zColAff[iCol]!=0 ); return pIdx->zColAff[iCol]; } #endif #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 | | | | | | | | | 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 | assert( pIdx->zColAff[iCol]!=0 ); return pIdx->zColAff[iCol]; } #endif #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 /* ** This function is called to estimate the number of rows visited by a ** range-scan on a skip-scan index. For example: ** ** CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a, b, c); ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=? AND c BETWEEN ? AND ?; ** ** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows ** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate ** by some factor to account for the (c BETWEEN ? AND ?) expression based ** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be performed multiple ** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with ** by the caller. ** ** It does this by scanning through all stat4 samples, comparing values ** extracted from pLower and pUpper with the corresponding column in each ** sample. If L and U are the number of samples found to be less than or ** equal to the values extracted from pLower and pUpper respectively, and ** N is the total number of samples, the pLoop->nOut value is adjusted ** as follows: ** ** nOut = nOut * ( min(U - L, 1) / N ) ** ** If pLower is NULL, or a value cannot be extracted from the term, L is ** set to zero. If pUpper is NULL, or a value cannot be extracted from it, ** U is set to N. ** ** Normally, this function sets *pbDone to 1 before returning. However, ** if no value can be extracted from either pLower or pUpper (and so the ** estimate of the number of rows delivered remains unchanged), *pbDone ** is left as is. ** ** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise, ** SQLITE_OK. */ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing & code generating context */ WhereTerm *pLower, /* Lower bound on the range. ex: "x>123" Might be NULL */ WhereTerm *pUpper, /* Upper bound on the range. ex: "x<455" Might be NULL */ WhereLoop *pLoop, /* Update the .nOut value of this loop */ int *pbDone /* Set to true if at least one expr. value extracted */ ){ Index *p = pLoop->u.btree.pIndex; int nEq = pLoop->u.btree.nEq; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; int nLower = -1; int nUpper = p->nSample+1; int rc = SQLITE_OK; u8 aff = sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(db, p, nEq); CollSeq *pColl; sqlite3_value *p1 = 0; /* Value extracted from pLower */ sqlite3_value *p2 = 0; /* Value extracted from pUpper */ sqlite3_value *pVal = 0; /* Value extracted from record */ pColl = sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, p->azColl[nEq]); if( pLower ){ rc = sqlite3Stat4ValueFromExpr(pParse, pLower->pExpr->pRight, aff, &p1); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 | int res = sqlite3MemCompare(p2, pVal, pColl); if( res>=0 ) nUpper++; } } nDiff = (nUpper - nLower); if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1; | | | 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 | int res = sqlite3MemCompare(p2, pVal, pColl); if( res>=0 ) nUpper++; } } nDiff = (nUpper - nLower); if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1; /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the ** comparisons indicate that they are close together, use the fallback ** method (assume that the scan visits 1/64 of the rows) for estimating ** the number of rows visited. Otherwise, estimate the number of rows ** using the method described in the header comment for this function. */ if( nDiff!=1 || pUpper==0 || pLower==0 ){ int nAdjust = (sqlite3LogEst(p->nSample) - sqlite3LogEst(nDiff)); pLoop->nOut -= nAdjust; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 | ** The value in (pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq) is the number of the index ** column subject to the range constraint. Or, equivalently, the number of ** equality constraints optimized by the proposed index scan. For example, ** assuming index p is on t1(a, b), and the SQL query is: ** ** ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ... ** | | | | | | | 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 | ** The value in (pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq) is the number of the index ** column subject to the range constraint. Or, equivalently, the number of ** equality constraints optimized by the proposed index scan. For example, ** assuming index p is on t1(a, b), and the SQL query is: ** ** ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ... ** ** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second ** left-most column of the index). Or, if the query is: ** ** ... FROM t1 WHERE a > ? AND a < ? ... ** ** then nEq is set to 0. ** ** When this function is called, *pnOut is set to the sqlite3LogEst() of the ** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without ** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of ** rows in the index. Assuming no error occurs, *pnOut is adjusted (reduced) ** to account for the range constraints pLower and pUpper. ** ** In the absence of sqlite_stat4 ANALYZE data, or if such data cannot be ** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4. ** and a pair of constraints (x>? AND x<?) reduces the expected number of ** rows visited by a factor of 64. */ static int whereRangeScanEst( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing & code generating context */ WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, WhereTerm *pLower, /* Lower bound on the range. ex: "x>123" Might be NULL */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 | ){ if( nEq==pBuilder->nRecValid ){ UnpackedRecord *pRec = pBuilder->pRec; tRowcnt a[2]; int nBtm = pLoop->u.btree.nBtm; int nTop = pLoop->u.btree.nTop; | | | | 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 | ){ if( nEq==pBuilder->nRecValid ){ UnpackedRecord *pRec = pBuilder->pRec; tRowcnt a[2]; int nBtm = pLoop->u.btree.nBtm; int nTop = pLoop->u.btree.nTop; /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in ** the index that are less than the lower bound of the range query. The ** lower bound being the concatenation of $P and $L, where $P is the ** key-prefix formed by the nEq values matched against the nEq left-most ** columns of the index, and $L is the value in pLower. ** ** Or, if pLower is NULL or $L cannot be extracted from it (because it ** is not a simple variable or literal value), the lower bound of the ** range is $P. Due to a quirk in the way whereKeyStats() works, even ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and ** ($P:$L) and the larger of the two returned values is used. ** ** Similarly, iUpper is to be set to the estimate of the number of rows ** less than the upper bound of the range query. Where the upper bound ** is either ($P) or ($P:$U). Again, even if $U is available, both values ** of iUpper are requested of whereKeyStats() and the smaller used. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 | pRec->nField = pBuilder->nRecValid; } /* Determine iLower and iUpper using ($P) only. */ if( nEq==0 ){ iLower = 0; iUpper = p->nRowEst0; }else{ | | | 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 | pRec->nField = pBuilder->nRecValid; } /* Determine iLower and iUpper using ($P) only. */ if( nEq==0 ){ iLower = 0; iUpper = p->nRowEst0; }else{ /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must ** have been requested when testing key $P in whereEqualScanEst(). */ whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a); iLower = a[0]; iUpper = a[0] + a[1]; } assert( pLower==0 || (pLower->eOperator & (WO_GT|WO_GE))!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 | nNew = whereRangeAdjust(pUpper, nNew); /* TUNING: If there is both an upper and lower limit and neither limit ** has an application-defined likelihood(), assume the range is ** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended ** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the ** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to | | | 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 | nNew = whereRangeAdjust(pUpper, nNew); /* TUNING: If there is both an upper and lower limit and neither limit ** has an application-defined likelihood(), assume the range is ** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended ** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the ** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to ** match 1/64 of the index. */ if( pLower && pLower->truthProb>0 && pUpper && pUpper->truthProb>0 ){ nNew -= 20; } nOut -= (pLower!=0) + (pUpper!=0); if( nNew<10 ) nNew = 10; if( nNew<nOut ) nOut = nNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 | ** Estimate the number of rows that will be returned based on ** an equality constraint x=VALUE and where that VALUE occurs in ** the histogram data. This only works when x is the left-most ** column of an index and sqlite_stat4 histogram data is available ** for that index. When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is ** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE". ** | | | 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 | ** Estimate the number of rows that will be returned based on ** an equality constraint x=VALUE and where that VALUE occurs in ** the histogram data. This only works when x is the left-most ** column of an index and sqlite_stat4 histogram data is available ** for that index. When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is ** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE". ** ** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return ** non-zero. ** ** This routine can fail if it is unable to load a collating sequence ** required for string comparison, or if unable to allocate memory ** for a UTF conversion required for comparison. The error is stored ** in the pParse structure. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 | if( bOk==0 ) return SQLITE_NOTFOUND; pBuilder->nRecValid = nEq; whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a); WHERETRACE(0x20,("equality scan regions %s(%d): %d\n", p->zName, nEq-1, (int)a[1])); *pnRow = a[1]; | | | | 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 | if( bOk==0 ) return SQLITE_NOTFOUND; pBuilder->nRecValid = nEq; whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a); WHERETRACE(0x20,("equality scan regions %s(%d): %d\n", p->zName, nEq-1, (int)a[1])); *pnRow = a[1]; return rc; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 /* ** Estimate the number of rows that will be returned based on ** an IN constraint where the right-hand side of the IN operator ** is a list of values. Example: ** ** WHERE x IN (1,2,3,4) ** ** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return ** non-zero. ** ** This routine can fail if it is unable to load a collating sequence ** required for string comparison, or if unable to allocate memory ** for a UTF conversion required for comparison. The error is stored ** in the pParse structure. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 | if( ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_OuterON) ) zType[2] = 'L'; if( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED ) zType[3] = 'C'; if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_SINGLE ){ assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left={%d:%d}", pTerm->leftCursor, pTerm->u.x.leftColumn); }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && pTerm->u.pOrInfo!=0 ){ | | | 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 | if( ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_OuterON) ) zType[2] = 'L'; if( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED ) zType[3] = 'C'; if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_SINGLE ){ assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left={%d:%d}", pTerm->leftCursor, pTerm->u.x.leftColumn); }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && pTerm->u.pOrInfo!=0 ){ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%llx", pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable); }else{ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left=%d", pTerm->leftCursor); } sqlite3DebugPrintf( "TERM-%-3d %p %s %-12s op=%03x wtFlags=%04x", iTerm, pTerm, zType, zLeft, pTerm->eOperator, pTerm->wtFlags); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 | } sqlite3DbNNFreeNN(db, pWInfo); } /* ** Return TRUE if all of the following are true: ** | | | | 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 | } sqlite3DbNNFreeNN(db, pWInfo); } /* ** Return TRUE if all of the following are true: ** ** (1) X has the same or lower cost, or returns the same or fewer rows, ** than Y. ** (2) X uses fewer WHERE clause terms than Y ** (3) Every WHERE clause term used by X is also used by Y ** (4) X skips at least as many columns as Y ** (5) If X is a covering index, than Y is too ** ** Conditions (2) and (3) mean that X is a "proper subset" of Y. ** If X is a proper subset of Y then Y is a better choice and ought ** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost ** relationship is inverted and needs to be adjusted. Constraint (4) ** was added because if X uses skip-scan less than Y it still might ** deserve a lower cost even if it is a proper subset of Y. Constraint (5) ** was added because a covering index probably deserves to have a lower cost ** than a non-covering index even if it is a proper subset. */ static int whereLoopCheaperProperSubset( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 | for(i=pX->nLTerm-1; i>=0; i--){ if( pX->aLTerm[i]==0 ) continue; for(j=pY->nLTerm-1; j>=0; j--){ if( pY->aLTerm[j]==pX->aLTerm[i] ) break; } if( j<0 ) return 0; /* X not a subset of Y since term X[i] not used by Y */ } | | | 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 | for(i=pX->nLTerm-1; i>=0; i--){ if( pX->aLTerm[i]==0 ) continue; for(j=pY->nLTerm-1; j>=0; j--){ if( pY->aLTerm[j]==pX->aLTerm[i] ) break; } if( j<0 ) return 0; /* X not a subset of Y since term X[i] not used by Y */ } if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 && (pY->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){ return 0; /* Constraint (5) */ } return 1; /* All conditions meet */ } /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 | */ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){ if( (pTemplate->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) return; for(; p; p=p->pNextLoop){ if( p->iTab!=pTemplate->iTab ) continue; if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue; if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){ | | | | | 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 | */ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){ if( (pTemplate->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) return; for(; p; p=p->pNextLoop){ if( p->iTab!=pTemplate->iTab ) continue; if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue; if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){ /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its ** subset p. */ WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n", pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut, MIN(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun), MIN(p->nOut - 1, pTemplate->nOut))); pTemplate->rRun = MIN(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun); pTemplate->nOut = MIN(p->nOut - 1, pTemplate->nOut); }else if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(pTemplate, p) ){ /* Adjust pTemplate cost upward so that it is costlier than p since ** pTemplate is a proper subset of p */ WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n", pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut, MAX(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun), MAX(p->nOut + 1, pTemplate->nOut))); pTemplate->rRun = MAX(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun); pTemplate->nOut = MAX(p->nOut + 1, pTemplate->nOut); } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 | ** then those WhereLoops need to be considered separately. Neither is ** a candidate to replace the other. */ continue; } /* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero ** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN ** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */ | | | | 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 | ** then those WhereLoops need to be considered separately. Neither is ** a candidate to replace the other. */ continue; } /* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero ** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN ** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */ assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0 || p->rSetup==pTemplate->rSetup ); /* whereLoopAddBtree() always generates and inserts the automatic index ** case first. Hence compatible candidate WhereLoops never have a larger ** rSetup. Call this SETUP-INVARIANT */ assert( p->rSetup>=pTemplate->rSetup ); /* Any loop using an application-defined index (or PRIMARY KEY or ** UNIQUE constraint) with one or more == constraints is better ** than an automatic index. Unless it is a skip-scan. */ if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_AUTO_INDEX)!=0 && (pTemplate->nSkip)==0 && (pTemplate->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)!=0 && (pTemplate->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_EQ)!=0 && (p->prereq & pTemplate->prereq)==pTemplate->prereq |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 | ** If pBuilder->pOrSet is not NULL then we care about only the ** prerequisites and rRun and nOut costs of the N best loops. That ** information is gathered in the pBuilder->pOrSet object. This special ** processing mode is used only for OR clause processing. ** ** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we ** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the | | | 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 | ** If pBuilder->pOrSet is not NULL then we care about only the ** prerequisites and rRun and nOut costs of the N best loops. That ** information is gathered in the pBuilder->pOrSet object. This special ** processing mode is used only for OR clause processing. ** ** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we ** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the ** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following ** conditions are met: ** ** (1) They have the same iTab. ** (2) They have the same iSortIdx. ** (3) The template has same or fewer dependencies than the current loop ** (4) The template has the same or lower cost than the current loop */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 | ** than pTemplate, so just ignore pTemplate */ #if WHERETRACE_ENABLED /* 0x8 */ if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x8 ){ sqlite3DebugPrintf(" skip: "); sqlite3WhereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC); } #endif | | | 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 | ** than pTemplate, so just ignore pTemplate */ #if WHERETRACE_ENABLED /* 0x8 */ if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x8 ){ sqlite3DebugPrintf(" skip: "); sqlite3WhereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC); } #endif return SQLITE_OK; }else{ p = *ppPrev; } /* If we reach this point it means that either p[] should be overwritten ** with pTemplate[] if p[] exists, or if p==NULL then allocate a new ** WhereLoop and insert it. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 | *ppPrev = p = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(WhereLoop)); if( p==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; whereLoopInit(p); p->pNextLoop = 0; }else{ /* We will be overwriting WhereLoop p[]. But before we do, first ** go through the rest of the list and delete any other entries besides | | | 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 | *ppPrev = p = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(WhereLoop)); if( p==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; whereLoopInit(p); p->pNextLoop = 0; }else{ /* We will be overwriting WhereLoop p[]. But before we do, first ** go through the rest of the list and delete any other entries besides ** p[] that are also supplanted by pTemplate */ WhereLoop **ppTail = &p->pNextLoop; WhereLoop *pToDel; while( *ppTail ){ ppTail = whereLoopFindLesser(ppTail, pTemplate); if( ppTail==0 ) break; pToDel = *ppTail; if( pToDel==0 ) break; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 | } } if( pLoop->nOut > nRow-iReduce ){ pLoop->nOut = nRow - iReduce; } } | | | 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 | } } if( pLoop->nOut > nRow-iReduce ){ pLoop->nOut = nRow - iReduce; } } /* ** Term pTerm is a vector range comparison operation. The first comparison ** in the vector can be optimized using column nEq of the index. This ** function returns the total number of vector elements that can be used ** as part of the range comparison. ** ** For example, if the query is: ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 | WhereTerm *pTerm /* The vector inequality constraint */ ){ int nCmp = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pTerm->pExpr->pLeft); int i; nCmp = MIN(nCmp, (pIdx->nColumn - nEq)); for(i=1; i<nCmp; i++){ | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 | WhereTerm *pTerm /* The vector inequality constraint */ ){ int nCmp = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pTerm->pExpr->pLeft); int i; nCmp = MIN(nCmp, (pIdx->nColumn - nEq)); for(i=1; i<nCmp; i++){ /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq) ** of the index. If not, exit the loop. */ char aff; /* Comparison affinity */ char idxaff = 0; /* Indexed columns affinity */ CollSeq *pColl; /* Comparison collation sequence */ Expr *pLhs, *pRhs; assert( ExprUseXList(pTerm->pExpr->pLeft) ); pLhs = pTerm->pExpr->pLeft->x.pList->a[i].pExpr; pRhs = pTerm->pExpr->pRight; if( ExprUseXSelect(pRhs) ){ pRhs = pRhs->x.pSelect->pEList->a[i].pExpr; }else{ pRhs = pRhs->x.pList->a[i].pExpr; } /* Check that the LHS of the comparison is a column reference to ** the right column of the right source table. And that the sort ** order of the index column is the same as the sort order of the ** leftmost index column. */ if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN || pLhs->iTable!=iCur || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq] || pIdx->aSortOrder[i+nEq]!=pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq] ){ break; } testcase( pLhs->iColumn==XN_ROWID ); aff = sqlite3CompareAffinity(pRhs, sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLhs)); idxaff = sqlite3TableColumnAffinity(pIdx->pTable, pLhs->iColumn); if( aff!=idxaff ) break; pColl = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pLhs, pRhs); if( pColl==0 ) break; if( sqlite3StrICmp(pColl->zName, pIdx->azColl[i+nEq]) ) break; } return i; } /* ** Adjust the cost C by the costMult factor T. This only occurs if ** compiled with -DSQLITE_ENABLE_COSTMULT */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COSTMULT # define ApplyCostMultiplier(C,T) C += T #else # define ApplyCostMultiplier(C,T) #endif /* ** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the ** index pIndex. Try to match one more. ** ** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the ** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq ** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this ** function returns. ** ** If pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK, that means pIndex is ** a fake index used for the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY. */ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex( WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, /* The WhereLoop factory */ SrcItem *pSrc, /* FROM clause term being analyzed */ Index *pProbe, /* An index on pSrc */ LogEst nInMul /* log(Number of iterations due to IN) */ ){ WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; /* WHERE analyze context */ Parse *pParse = pWInfo->pParse; /* Parsing context */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection malloc context */ WhereLoop *pNew; /* Template WhereLoop under construction */ WhereTerm *pTerm; /* A WhereTerm under consideration */ int opMask; /* Valid operators for constraints */ WhereScan scan; /* Iterator for WHERE terms */ Bitmask saved_prereq; /* Original value of pNew->prereq */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 | ){ break; /* OOM while trying to enlarge the pNew->aLTerm array */ } pNew->aLTerm[pNew->nLTerm++] = pTerm; pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf; assert( nInMul==0 | | | | | 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 | ){ break; /* OOM while trying to enlarge the pNew->aLTerm array */ } pNew->aLTerm[pNew->nLTerm++] = pTerm; pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf; assert( nInMul==0 || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0 || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0 || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0 ); if( eOp & WO_IN ){ Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr; if( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ){ /* "x IN (SELECT ...)": TUNING: the SELECT returns 25 rows */ int i; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 | nIn = sqlite3LogEst(pExpr->x.pList->nExpr); } if( pProbe->hasStat1 && rLogSize>=10 ){ LogEst M, logK, x; /* Let: ** N = the total number of rows in the table ** K = the number of entries on the RHS of the IN operator | | | 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 | nIn = sqlite3LogEst(pExpr->x.pList->nExpr); } if( pProbe->hasStat1 && rLogSize>=10 ){ LogEst M, logK, x; /* Let: ** N = the total number of rows in the table ** K = the number of entries on the RHS of the IN operator ** M = the number of rows in the table that match terms to the ** to the left in the same index. If the IN operator is on ** the left-most index column, M==N. ** ** Given the definitions above, it is better to omit the IN operator ** from the index lookup and instead do a scan of the M elements, ** testing each scanned row against the IN operator separately, if: ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 | } } pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_IN; }else if( eOp & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ){ int iCol = pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq]; pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_EQ; assert( saved_nEq==pNew->u.btree.nEq ); | | | | | 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 | } } pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_IN; }else if( eOp & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ){ int iCol = pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq]; pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_EQ; assert( saved_nEq==pNew->u.btree.nEq ); if( iCol==XN_ROWID || (iCol>=0 && nInMul==0 && saved_nEq==pProbe->nKeyCol-1) ){ if( iCol==XN_ROWID || pProbe->uniqNotNull || (pProbe->nKeyCol==1 && pProbe->onError && eOp==WO_EQ) ){ pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_ONEROW; }else{ pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_UNQ_WANTED; } } if( scan.iEquiv>1 ) pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_TRANSCONS; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 | pBtm = (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT)!=0 ? pNew->aLTerm[pNew->nLTerm-2] : 0; } } /* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to ** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the | | | | | 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 | pBtm = (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT)!=0 ? pNew->aLTerm[pNew->nLTerm-2] : 0; } } /* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to ** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all ** "x IN(...)" terms are replaced with "x = ?". This block updates ** the value of pNew->nOut to account for pTerm (but not nIn/nInMul). */ assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut ); if( pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_RANGE ){ /* Adjust nOut using stat4 data. Or, if there is no stat4 ** data, using some other estimate. */ whereRangeScanEst(pParse, pBuilder, pBtm, pTop, pNew); }else{ int nEq = ++pNew->u.btree.nEq; assert( eOp & (WO_ISNULL|WO_EQ|WO_IN|WO_IS) ); assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut ); if( pTerm->truthProb<=0 && pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq]>=0 ){ assert( (eOp & WO_IN) || nIn==0 ); testcase( eOp & WO_IN ); pNew->nOut += pTerm->truthProb; pNew->nOut -= nIn; }else{ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 tRowcnt nOut = 0; if( nInMul==0 && pProbe->nSample && ALWAYS(pNew->u.btree.nEq<=pProbe->nSampleCol) && ((eOp & WO_IN)==0 || ExprUseXList(pTerm->pExpr)) && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_Stat4) ){ Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr; if( (eOp & (WO_EQ|WO_ISNULL|WO_IS))!=0 ){ testcase( eOp & WO_EQ ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 | } } if( nOut==0 ) #endif { pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]); if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){ | | | | | 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 | } } if( nOut==0 ) #endif { pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]); if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){ /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows ** as (col=?). */ pNew->nOut += 10; } } } } /* Set rCostIdx to the cost of visiting selected rows in index. Add ** it to pNew->rRun, which is currently set to the cost of the index ** seek only. Then, if this is a non-covering index, add the cost of ** visiting the rows in the main table. */ assert( pSrc->pTab->szTabRow>0 ); if( pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK ){ /* The pProbe->szIdxRow is low for an IPK table since the interior ** pages are small. Thus szIdxRow gives a good estimate of seek cost. ** But the leaf pages are full-size, so pProbe->szIdxRow would badly ** under-estimate the scanning cost. */ rCostIdx = pNew->nOut + 16; }else{ rCostIdx = pNew->nOut + 1 + (15*pProbe->szIdxRow)/pSrc->pTab->szTabRow; } pNew->rRun = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rLogSize, rCostIdx); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 | pNew->nSkip = saved_nSkip; pNew->wsFlags = saved_wsFlags; pNew->nOut = saved_nOut; pNew->nLTerm = saved_nLTerm; /* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints ** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average | | | | 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 | pNew->nSkip = saved_nSkip; pNew->wsFlags = saved_wsFlags; pNew->nOut = saved_nOut; pNew->nLTerm = saved_nLTerm; /* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints ** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18. ** ** The magic number 18 is selected on the basis that scanning 17 rows ** is almost always quicker than an index seek (even though if the index ** contains fewer than 2^17 rows we assume otherwise in other parts of ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower. ** On the other hand, the extra seeks could end up being significantly ** more expensive. */ assert( 42==sqlite3LogEst(18) ); if( saved_nEq==saved_nSkip && saved_nEq+1<pProbe->nKeyCol && saved_nEq==pNew->nLTerm && pProbe->noSkipScan==0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 | ** Information passed in is pWalk->u.pCovIdxCk. Call it pCk. ** ** If the Expr node references the table with cursor pCk->iTabCur, then ** make sure that column is covered by the index pCk->pIdx. We know that ** all columns less than 63 (really BMS-1) are covered, so we don't need ** to check them. But we do need to check any column at 63 or greater. ** | | | 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 | ** Information passed in is pWalk->u.pCovIdxCk. Call it pCk. ** ** If the Expr node references the table with cursor pCk->iTabCur, then ** make sure that column is covered by the index pCk->pIdx. We know that ** all columns less than 63 (really BMS-1) are covered, so we don't need ** to check them. But we do need to check any column at 63 or greater. ** ** If the index does not cover the column, then set pWalk->eCode to ** non-zero and return WRC_Abort to stop the search. ** ** If this node does not disprove that the index can be a covering index, ** then just return WRC_Continue, to continue the search. ** ** If pCk->pIdx contains indexed expressions and one of those expressions ** matches pExpr, then prune the search. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 | ** ** For a full scan, assuming the table (or index) contains nRow rows: ** ** cost = nRow * 3.0 // full-table scan ** cost = nRow * K // scan of covering index ** cost = nRow * (K+3.0) // scan of non-covering index ** | | | | | | | | 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 | ** ** For a full scan, assuming the table (or index) contains nRow rows: ** ** cost = nRow * 3.0 // full-table scan ** cost = nRow * K // scan of covering index ** cost = nRow * (K+3.0) // scan of non-covering index ** ** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative ** estimated average size of the index and table records. ** ** For an index scan, where nVisit is the number of index rows visited ** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on ** the index b-tree: ** ** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + K * nVisit) // covering index ** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + (K+3.0) * nVisit) // non-covering index ** ** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the ** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when ** implicit "x IN (SELECT x FROM tbl)" terms are added for skip-scans. ** ** The estimated values (nRow, nVisit, nSeek) often contain a large amount ** of uncertainty. For this reason, scoring is designed to pick plans that ** "do the least harm" if the estimates are inaccurate. For example, a ** log(nRow) factor is omitted from a non-covering index scan in order to ** bias the scoring in favor of using an index, since the worst-case ** performance of using an index is far better than the worst-case performance ** of a full table scan. */ static int whereLoopAddBtree( WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, /* WHERE clause information */ Bitmask mPrereq /* Extra prerequisites for using this table */ ){ WhereInfo *pWInfo; /* WHERE analysis context */ Index *pProbe; /* An index we are evaluating */ Index sPk; /* A fake index object for the primary key */ LogEst aiRowEstPk[2]; /* The aiRowLogEst[] value for the sPk index */ i16 aiColumnPk = -1; /* The aColumn[] value for the sPk index */ SrcList *pTabList; /* The FROM clause */ SrcItem *pSrc; /* The FROM clause btree term to add */ WhereLoop *pNew; /* Template WhereLoop object */ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ int iSortIdx = 1; /* Index number */ int b; /* A boolean value */ LogEst rSize; /* number of rows in the table */ WhereClause *pWC; /* The parsed WHERE clause */ Table *pTab; /* Table being queried */ pNew = pBuilder->pNew; pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList; pSrc = pTabList->a + pNew->iTab; pTab = pSrc->pTab; pWC = pBuilder->pWC; assert( !IsVirtual(pSrc->pTab) ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 | pNew->prereq = mPrereq | pTerm->prereqRight; rc = whereLoopInsert(pBuilder, pNew); } } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX */ | | | | 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 | pNew->prereq = mPrereq | pTerm->prereqRight; rc = whereLoopInsert(pBuilder, pNew); } } } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX */ /* Loop over all indices. If there was an INDEXED BY clause, then only ** consider index pProbe. */ for(; rc==SQLITE_OK && pProbe; pProbe=(pSrc->fg.isIndexedBy ? 0 : pProbe->pNext), iSortIdx++ ){ if( pProbe->pPartIdxWhere!=0 && !whereUsablePartialIndex(pSrc->iCursor, pSrc->fg.jointype, pWC, pProbe->pPartIdxWhere) ){ testcase( pNew->iTab!=pSrc->iCursor ); /* See ticket [98d973b8f5] */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 | if( pTerm->truthProb<=0 ){ nLookup += pTerm->truthProb; }else{ nLookup--; if( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ) nLookup -= 19; } } | | | 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 | if( pTerm->truthProb<=0 ){ nLookup += pTerm->truthProb; }else{ nLookup--; if( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ) nLookup -= 19; } } pNew->rRun = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pNew->rRun, nLookup); } ApplyCostMultiplier(pNew->rRun, pTab->costMult); whereLoopOutputAdjust(pWC, pNew, rSize); if( (pSrc->fg.jointype & JT_RIGHT)!=0 && pProbe->aColExpr ){ /* Do not do an SCAN of a index-on-expression in a RIGHT JOIN ** because the cursor used to access the index might not be |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* ** Return true if pTerm is a virtual table LIMIT or OFFSET term. */ static int isLimitTerm(WhereTerm *pTerm){ assert( pTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX || pTerm->eMatchOp==0 ); | | | 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 | #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* ** Return true if pTerm is a virtual table LIMIT or OFFSET term. */ static int isLimitTerm(WhereTerm *pTerm){ assert( pTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX || pTerm->eMatchOp==0 ); return pTerm->eMatchOp>=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT && pTerm->eMatchOp<=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET; } /* ** Argument pIdxInfo is already populated with all constraints that may ** be used by the virtual table identified by pBuilder->pNew->iTab. This ** function marks a subset of those constraints usable, invokes the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 | SrcItem *pSrc = &pBuilder->pWInfo->pTabList->a[pNew->iTab]; int nConstraint = pIdxInfo->nConstraint; assert( (mUsable & mPrereq)==mPrereq ); *pbIn = 0; pNew->prereq = mPrereq; | | | | 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 | SrcItem *pSrc = &pBuilder->pWInfo->pTabList->a[pNew->iTab]; int nConstraint = pIdxInfo->nConstraint; assert( (mUsable & mPrereq)==mPrereq ); *pbIn = 0; pNew->prereq = mPrereq; /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by ** arguments mUsable and mExclude. */ pIdxCons = *(struct sqlite3_index_constraint**)&pIdxInfo->aConstraint; for(i=0; i<nConstraint; i++, pIdxCons++){ WhereTerm *pTerm = &pWC->a[pIdxCons->iTermOffset]; pIdxCons->usable = 0; if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight && (pTerm->eOperator & mExclude)==0 && (pbRetryLimit || !isLimitTerm(pTerm)) ){ pIdxCons->usable = 1; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 | }else{ testcase( i!=iTerm ); } if( pTerm->eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET ){ pNew->u.vtab.bOmitOffset = 1; } } | | | 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 | }else{ testcase( i!=iTerm ); } if( pTerm->eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET ){ pNew->u.vtab.bOmitOffset = 1; } } if( SMASKBIT32(i) & pHidden->mHandleIn ){ pNew->u.vtab.mHandleIn |= MASKBIT32(iTerm); }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN)!=0 ){ /* A virtual table that is constrained by an IN clause may not ** consume the ORDER BY clause because (1) the order of IN terms ** is not necessarily related to the order of output terms and ** (2) Multiple outputs from a single IN value will not merge ** together. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 | ** ** pIdxInfo must be an sqlite3_index_info structure passed into xBestIndex. ** This routine depends on there being a HiddenIndexInfo structure immediately ** following the sqlite3_index_info structure. ** ** Return a pointer to the collation name: ** | | | 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 | ** ** pIdxInfo must be an sqlite3_index_info structure passed into xBestIndex. ** This routine depends on there being a HiddenIndexInfo structure immediately ** following the sqlite3_index_info structure. ** ** Return a pointer to the collation name: ** ** 1. If there is an explicit COLLATE operator on the constraint, return it. ** ** 2. Else, if the column has an alternative collation, return that. ** ** 3. Otherwise, return "BINARY". */ const char *sqlite3_vtab_collation(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, int iCons){ HiddenIndexInfo *pHidden = (HiddenIndexInfo*)&pIdxInfo[1]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 | ** false otherwise. If iCons is an IN(...) constraint, set (if bHandle!=0) ** or clear (if bHandle==0) the flag to handle it using an iterator. */ int sqlite3_vtab_in(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, int iCons, int bHandle){ HiddenIndexInfo *pHidden = (HiddenIndexInfo*)&pIdxInfo[1]; u32 m = SMASKBIT32(iCons); if( m & pHidden->mIn ){ | | | | 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 | ** false otherwise. If iCons is an IN(...) constraint, set (if bHandle!=0) ** or clear (if bHandle==0) the flag to handle it using an iterator. */ int sqlite3_vtab_in(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, int iCons, int bHandle){ HiddenIndexInfo *pHidden = (HiddenIndexInfo*)&pIdxInfo[1]; u32 m = SMASKBIT32(iCons); if( m & pHidden->mIn ){ if( bHandle==0 ){ pHidden->mHandleIn &= ~m; }else if( bHandle>0 ){ pHidden->mHandleIn |= m; } return 1; } return 0; } /* ** This interface is callable from within the xBestIndex callback only. ** ** If possible, set (*ppVal) to point to an object containing the value ** on the right-hand-side of constraint iCons. */ int sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value( sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, /* Copy of first argument to xBestIndex */ int iCons, /* Constraint for which RHS is wanted */ sqlite3_value **ppVal /* Write value extracted here */ ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 | ** pBuilder->pNew->iTab. That table is guaranteed to be a virtual table. ** ** If there are no LEFT or CROSS JOIN joins in the query, both mPrereq and ** mUnusable are set to 0. Otherwise, mPrereq is a mask of all FROM clause ** entries that occur before the virtual table in the FROM clause and are ** separated from it by at least one LEFT or CROSS JOIN. Similarly, the ** mUnusable mask contains all FROM clause entries that occur after the | | | | | | | 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 | ** pBuilder->pNew->iTab. That table is guaranteed to be a virtual table. ** ** If there are no LEFT or CROSS JOIN joins in the query, both mPrereq and ** mUnusable are set to 0. Otherwise, mPrereq is a mask of all FROM clause ** entries that occur before the virtual table in the FROM clause and are ** separated from it by at least one LEFT or CROSS JOIN. Similarly, the ** mUnusable mask contains all FROM clause entries that occur after the ** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or ** CROSS JOIN. ** ** For example, if the query were: ** ** ... FROM t1, t2 LEFT JOIN t3, t4, vt CROSS JOIN t5, t6; ** ** then mPrereq corresponds to (t1, t2) and mUnusable to (t5, t6). ** ** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual ** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by ** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex. ** Conversely, all tables in mUnusable must be scanned after the current ** virtual table, so any terms for which the prerequisites overlap with ** mUnusable should always be configured as "not-usable" for xBestIndex. */ static int whereLoopAddVirtual( WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, /* WHERE clause information */ Bitmask mPrereq, /* Tables that must be scanned before this one */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 | rc = whereLoopAddVirtualOne( pBuilder, mPrereq, ALLBITS, 0, p, mNoOmit, &bIn, 0 ); } /* If the call to xBestIndex() with all terms enabled produced a plan ** that does not require any source tables (IOW: a plan with mBest==0) | | | 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 | rc = whereLoopAddVirtualOne( pBuilder, mPrereq, ALLBITS, 0, p, mNoOmit, &bIn, 0 ); } /* If the call to xBestIndex() with all terms enabled produced a plan ** that does not require any source tables (IOW: a plan with mBest==0) ** and does not use an IN(...) operator, then there is no point in making ** any further calls to xBestIndex() since they will all return the same ** result (if the xBestIndex() implementation is sane). */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && ((mBest = (pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq))!=0 || bIn) ){ int seenZero = 0; /* True if a plan with no prereqs seen */ int seenZeroNoIN = 0; /* Plan with no prereqs and no IN(...) seen */ Bitmask mPrev = 0; Bitmask mBestNoIn = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 | mBestNoIn = pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq; if( mBestNoIn==0 ){ seenZero = 1; seenZeroNoIN = 1; } } | | | 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 | mBestNoIn = pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq; if( mBestNoIn==0 ){ seenZero = 1; seenZeroNoIN = 1; } } /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq) ** in the set of terms that apply to the current virtual table. */ while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int i; Bitmask mNext = ALLBITS; assert( mNext>0 ); for(i=0; i<nConstraint; i++){ Bitmask mThis = ( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ /* ** Add WhereLoop entries to handle OR terms. This works for either ** btrees or virtual tables. */ static int whereLoopAddOr( | | | | | | | | 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 | #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ /* ** Add WhereLoop entries to handle OR terms. This works for either ** btrees or virtual tables. */ static int whereLoopAddOr( WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, Bitmask mPrereq, Bitmask mUnusable ){ WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; WhereClause *pWC; WhereLoop *pNew; WhereTerm *pTerm, *pWCEnd; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int iCur; WhereClause tempWC; WhereLoopBuilder sSubBuild; WhereOrSet sSum, sCur; SrcItem *pItem; pWC = pBuilder->pWC; pWCEnd = pWC->a + pWC->nTerm; pNew = pBuilder->pNew; memset(&sSum, 0, sizeof(sSum)); pItem = pWInfo->pTabList->a + pNew->iTab; iCur = pItem->iCursor; /* The multi-index OR optimization does not work for RIGHT and FULL JOIN */ if( pItem->fg.jointype & JT_RIGHT ) return SQLITE_OK; for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTerm<pWCEnd && rc==SQLITE_OK; pTerm++){ if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0 ){ WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc; WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm]; WhereTerm *pOrTerm; int once = 1; int i, j; sSubBuild = *pBuilder; sSubBuild.pOrSet = &sCur; WHERETRACE(0x400, ("Begin processing OR-clause %p\n", pTerm)); for(pOrTerm=pOrWC->a; pOrTerm<pOrWCEnd; pOrTerm++){ if( (pOrTerm->eOperator & WO_AND)!=0 ){ sSubBuild.pWC = &pOrTerm->u.pAndInfo->wc; }else if( pOrTerm->leftCursor==iCur ){ tempWC.pWInfo = pWC->pWInfo; tempWC.pOuter = pWC; tempWC.op = TK_AND; tempWC.nTerm = 1; tempWC.nBase = 1; tempWC.a = pOrTerm; sSubBuild.pWC = &tempWC; }else{ continue; } sCur.n = 0; #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED WHERETRACE(0x400, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n", (int)(pOrTerm-pOrWC->a), pTerm, sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm)); if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x20000 ){ sqlite3WhereClausePrint(sSubBuild.pWC); } #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE if( IsVirtual(pItem->pTab) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 4411 | pNew->rSetup = 0; pNew->iSortIdx = 0; memset(&pNew->u, 0, sizeof(pNew->u)); for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<sSum.n; i++){ /* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs ** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding ** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its | | | | | 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 | pNew->rSetup = 0; pNew->iSortIdx = 0; memset(&pNew->u, 0, sizeof(pNew->u)); for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<sSum.n; i++){ /* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs ** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding ** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that ** this does not happen. Otherwise, for WHERE clauses such as the ** following where there is an index on "y": ** ** WHERE likelihood(x=?, 0.99) OR y=? ** ** the planner may elect to "OR" together a full-table scan and an ** index lookup. And other similarly odd results. */ pNew->rRun = sSum.a[i].rRun + 1; pNew->nOut = sSum.a[i].nOut; pNew->prereq = sSum.a[i].prereq; rc = whereLoopInsert(pBuilder, pNew); } WHERETRACE(0x400, ("End processing OR-clause %p\n", pTerm)); } } return rc; } /* ** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables */ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; Bitmask mPrereq = 0; Bitmask mPrior = 0; int iTab; SrcList *pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 | pBuilder->iPlanLimit = SQLITE_QUERY_PLANNER_LIMIT; for(iTab=0, pItem=pTabList->a; pItem<pEnd; iTab++, pItem++){ Bitmask mUnusable = 0; pNew->iTab = iTab; pBuilder->iPlanLimit += SQLITE_QUERY_PLANNER_LIMIT_INCR; pNew->maskSelf = sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pItem->iCursor); | | | 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 | pBuilder->iPlanLimit = SQLITE_QUERY_PLANNER_LIMIT; for(iTab=0, pItem=pTabList->a; pItem<pEnd; iTab++, pItem++){ Bitmask mUnusable = 0; pNew->iTab = iTab; pBuilder->iPlanLimit += SQLITE_QUERY_PLANNER_LIMIT_INCR; pNew->maskSelf = sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pItem->iCursor); if( bFirstPastRJ || (pItem->fg.jointype & (JT_OUTER|JT_CROSS|JT_LTORJ))!=0 ){ /* Add prerequisites to prevent reordering of FROM clause terms ** across CROSS joins and outer joins. The bFirstPastRJ boolean ** prevents the right operand of a RIGHT JOIN from being swapped with ** other elements even further to the right. ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 | return rc; } /* ** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 6th ** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY ** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation. Return N: | | | | | 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 | return rc; } /* ** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 6th ** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY ** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation. Return N: ** ** N>0: N terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied ** N==0: No terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied ** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied. ** ** Note that processing for WHERE_GROUPBY and WHERE_DISTINCTBY is not as ** strict. With GROUP BY and DISTINCT the only requirement is that ** equivalent rows appear immediately adjacent to one another. GROUP BY ** and DISTINCT do not require rows to appear in any particular order as long ** as equivalent rows are grouped together. Thus for GROUP BY and DISTINCT ** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the ** pOrderBy terms must be matched in strict left-to-right order. */ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy( WhereInfo *pWInfo, /* The WHERE clause */ ExprList *pOrderBy, /* ORDER BY or GROUP BY or DISTINCT clause to check */ WherePath *pPath, /* The WherePath to check */ u16 wctrlFlags, /* WHERE_GROUPBY or _DISTINCTBY or _ORDERBY_LIMIT */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 | ** Every one-row WhereLoop will have the WHERE_ONEROW bit set in wsFlags. ** ** We say the WhereLoop is "order-distinct" if the set of columns from ** that WhereLoop that are in the ORDER BY clause are different for every ** row of the WhereLoop. Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically ** order-distinct. A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause ** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being | | | 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 | ** Every one-row WhereLoop will have the WHERE_ONEROW bit set in wsFlags. ** ** We say the WhereLoop is "order-distinct" if the set of columns from ** that WhereLoop that are in the ORDER BY clause are different for every ** row of the WhereLoop. Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically ** order-distinct. A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause ** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that ** are NULL and NULL values are equivalent for the purpose of order-distinct. ** To be order-distinct, the columns must be UNIQUE and NOT NULL. ** ** The rowid for a table is always UNIQUE and NOT NULL so whenever the ** rowid appears in the ORDER BY clause, the corresponding WhereLoop is ** automatically order-distinct. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 | if( iLoop<nLoop ){ pLoop = pPath->aLoop[iLoop]; if( wctrlFlags & WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT ) continue; }else{ pLoop = pLast; } if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE ){ | | | 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 | if( iLoop<nLoop ){ pLoop = pPath->aLoop[iLoop]; if( wctrlFlags & WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT ) continue; }else{ pLoop = pLast; } if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE ){ if( pLoop->u.vtab.isOrdered && ((wctrlFlags&(WHERE_DISTINCTBY|WHERE_SORTBYGROUP))!=WHERE_DISTINCTBY) ){ obSat = obDone; } break; }else if( wctrlFlags & WHERE_DISTINCTBY ){ pLoop->u.btree.nDistinctCol = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 | if( NEVER(pOBExpr==0) ) continue; if( pOBExpr->op!=TK_COLUMN && pOBExpr->op!=TK_AGG_COLUMN ) continue; if( pOBExpr->iTable!=iCur ) continue; pTerm = sqlite3WhereFindTerm(&pWInfo->sWC, iCur, pOBExpr->iColumn, ~ready, eqOpMask, 0); if( pTerm==0 ) continue; if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_IN ){ | | | | 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 | if( NEVER(pOBExpr==0) ) continue; if( pOBExpr->op!=TK_COLUMN && pOBExpr->op!=TK_AGG_COLUMN ) continue; if( pOBExpr->iTable!=iCur ) continue; pTerm = sqlite3WhereFindTerm(&pWInfo->sWC, iCur, pOBExpr->iColumn, ~ready, eqOpMask, 0); if( pTerm==0 ) continue; if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_IN ){ /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT ** optimization, and then only if they are actually used ** by the query plan */ assert( wctrlFlags & (WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT|WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN|WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX) ); for(j=0; j<pLoop->nLTerm && pTerm!=pLoop->aLTerm[j]; j++){} if( j>=pLoop->nLTerm ) continue; } if( (pTerm->eOperator&(WO_EQ|WO_IS))!=0 && pOBExpr->iColumn>=0 ){ Parse *pParse = pWInfo->pParse; CollSeq *pColl1 = sqlite3ExprNNCollSeq(pParse, pOrderBy->a[i].pExpr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 | ** that are not constrained by == or IN. */ rev = revSet = 0; distinctColumns = 0; for(j=0; j<nColumn; j++){ u8 bOnce = 1; /* True to run the ORDER BY search loop */ | | | | | 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 | ** that are not constrained by == or IN. */ rev = revSet = 0; distinctColumns = 0; for(j=0; j<nColumn; j++){ u8 bOnce = 1; /* True to run the ORDER BY search loop */ assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq || (pLoop->aLTerm[j]==0)==(j<pLoop->nSkip) ); if( j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq && j>=pLoop->nSkip ){ u16 eOp = pLoop->aLTerm[j]->eOperator; /* Skip over == and IS and ISNULL terms. (Also skip IN terms when ** doing WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT processing). Except, IS and ISNULL ** terms imply that the index is not UNIQUE NOT NULL in which case ** the loop need to be marked as not order-distinct because it can ** have repeated NULL rows. ** ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...)) ** expression for which the SELECT returns more than one column, ** check that it is the only column used by this loop. Otherwise, ** if it is one of two or more, none of the columns can be ** considered to match an ORDER BY term. */ if( (eOp & eqOpMask)!=0 ){ if( eOp & (WO_ISNULL|WO_IS) ){ testcase( eOp & WO_ISNULL ); testcase( eOp & WO_IS ); testcase( isOrderDistinct ); isOrderDistinct = 0; } continue; }else if( ALWAYS(eOp & WO_IN) ){ /* ALWAYS() justification: eOp is an equality operator due to the ** j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq constraint above. Any equality other ** than WO_IN is captured by the previous "if". So this one ** always has to be WO_IN. */ Expr *pX = pLoop->aLTerm[j]->pExpr; for(i=j+1; i<pLoop->u.btree.nEq; i++){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 | && pIndex->pTable->aCol[iColumn].notNull==0 ){ isOrderDistinct = 0; } if( iColumn==XN_EXPR ){ isOrderDistinct = 0; } | | | | 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 | && pIndex->pTable->aCol[iColumn].notNull==0 ){ isOrderDistinct = 0; } if( iColumn==XN_EXPR ){ isOrderDistinct = 0; } } /* Find the ORDER BY term that corresponds to the j-th column ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off */ isMatch = 0; for(i=0; bOnce && i<nOrderBy; i++){ if( MASKBIT(i) & obSat ) continue; pOBExpr = sqlite3ExprSkipCollateAndLikely(pOrderBy->a[i].pExpr); testcase( wctrlFlags & WHERE_GROUPBY ); testcase( wctrlFlags & WHERE_DISTINCTBY ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 | isMatch = 1; break; } if( isMatch && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_GROUPBY)==0 ){ /* Make sure the sort order is compatible in an ORDER BY clause. ** Sort order is irrelevant for a GROUP BY clause. */ if( revSet ){ | | | 4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 | isMatch = 1; break; } if( isMatch && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_GROUPBY)==0 ){ /* Make sure the sort order is compatible in an ORDER BY clause. ** Sort order is irrelevant for a GROUP BY clause. */ if( revSet ){ if( (rev ^ revIdx) != (pOrderBy->a[i].fg.sortFlags&KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC) ){ isMatch = 0; } }else{ rev = revIdx ^ (pOrderBy->a[i].fg.sortFlags & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC); if( rev ) *pRevMask |= MASKBIT(iLoop); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 | if( pLast ) zName[i++] = pLast->cId; zName[i] = 0; return zName; } #endif /* | | | | | | | | | 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 4934 | if( pLast ) zName[i++] = pLast->cId; zName[i] = 0; return zName; } #endif /* ** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have ** nOrderby columns and that the first nSorted columns are already in ** order. */ static LogEst whereSortingCost( WhereInfo *pWInfo, /* Query planning context */ LogEst nRow, /* Estimated number of rows to sort */ int nOrderBy, /* Number of ORDER BY clause terms */ int nSorted /* Number of initial ORDER BY terms naturally in order */ ){ /* Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is ** the number of rows to sort is: ** ** cost = (K * N * log(N)). ** ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the ** sorting cost to: ** ** cost = (K * N * log(N)) * (Y/X) ** ** The constant K is at least 2.0 but will be larger if there are a ** large number of columns to be sorted, as the sorting time is ** proportional to the amount of content to be sorted. The algorithm ** does not currently distinguish between fat columns (BLOBs and TEXTs) ** and skinny columns (INTs). It just uses the number of columns as ** an approximation for the row width. ** ** And extra factor of 2.0 or 3.0 is added to the sorting cost if the sort ** is built using OP_IdxInsert and OP_Sort rather than with OP_SorterInsert. */ LogEst rSortCost, nCol; assert( pWInfo->pSelect!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 | pFrom->aLoop = pX; } if( nOrderBy ){ /* If there is an ORDER BY clause and it is not being ignored, set up ** space for the aSortCost[] array. Each element of the aSortCost array ** is either zero - meaning it has not yet been initialized - or the ** cost of sorting nRowEst rows of data where the first X terms of | | | | 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 | pFrom->aLoop = pX; } if( nOrderBy ){ /* If there is an ORDER BY clause and it is not being ignored, set up ** space for the aSortCost[] array. Each element of the aSortCost array ** is either zero - meaning it has not yet been initialized - or the ** cost of sorting nRowEst rows of data where the first X terms of ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array ** index. */ aSortCost = (LogEst*)pX; memset(aSortCost, 0, sizeof(LogEst) * nOrderBy); } assert( aSortCost==0 || &pSpace[nSpace]==(char*)&aSortCost[nOrderBy] ); assert( aSortCost!=0 || &pSpace[nSpace]==(char*)pX ); /* Seed the search with a single WherePath containing zero WhereLoops. ** ** TUNING: Do not let the number of iterations go above 28. If the cost ** of computing an automatic index is not paid back within the first 28 ** rows, then do not use the automatic index. */ aFrom[0].nRow = MIN(pParse->nQueryLoop, 48); assert( 48==sqlite3LogEst(28) ); nFrom = 1; assert( aFrom[0].isOrdered==0 ); if( nOrderBy ){ /* If nLoop is zero, then there are no FROM terms in the query. Since ** in this case the query may return a maximum of one row, the results ** are already in the requested order. Set isOrdered to nOrderBy to ** indicate this. Or, if nLoop is greater than zero, set isOrdered to ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered, ** depending on the loops added to the current plan. */ aFrom[0].isOrdered = nLoop>0 ? -1 : nOrderBy; } /* Compute successively longer WherePaths using the previous generation ** of WherePaths as the basis for the next. Keep track of the mxChoice ** best paths at each generation */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5080 5081 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 | ** to run less than 1.25 times. It is tempting to also exclude ** automatic index usage on an outer loop, but sometimes an automatic ** index is useful in the outer loop of a correlated subquery. */ assert( 10==sqlite3LogEst(2) ); continue; } | | | 5080 5081 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 | ** to run less than 1.25 times. It is tempting to also exclude ** automatic index usage on an outer loop, but sometimes an automatic ** index is useful in the outer loop of a correlated subquery. */ assert( 10==sqlite3LogEst(2) ); continue; } /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop. ** Compute its cost */ rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pWLoop->rSetup,pWLoop->rRun + pFrom->nRow); rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, pFrom->rUnsorted); nOut = pFrom->nRow + pWLoop->nOut; maskNew = pFrom->maskLoop | pWLoop->maskSelf; isOrdered = pFrom->isOrdered; if( isOrdered<0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 | if( isOrdered>=0 && isOrdered<nOrderBy ){ if( aSortCost[isOrdered]==0 ){ aSortCost[isOrdered] = whereSortingCost( pWInfo, nRowEst, nOrderBy, isOrdered ); } /* TUNING: Add a small extra penalty (3) to sorting as an | | | | 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 | if( isOrdered>=0 && isOrdered<nOrderBy ){ if( aSortCost[isOrdered]==0 ){ aSortCost[isOrdered] = whereSortingCost( pWInfo, nRowEst, nOrderBy, isOrdered ); } /* TUNING: Add a small extra penalty (3) to sorting as an ** extra encouragement to the query planner to select a plan ** where the rows emerge in the correct order without any sorting ** required. */ rCost = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, aSortCost[isOrdered]) + 3; WHERETRACE(0x002, ("---- sort cost=%-3d (%d/%d) increases cost %3d to %-3d\n", aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy, rUnsorted, rCost)); }else{ rCost = rUnsorted; rUnsorted -= 2; /* TUNING: Slight bias in favor of no-sort plans */ } /* TUNING: A full-scan of a VIEW or subquery in the outer loop |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 | } #endif }else{ /* Control reaches here if best-so-far path pTo=aTo[jj] covers the ** same set of loops and has the same isOrdered setting as the ** candidate path. Check to see if the candidate should replace ** pTo or if the candidate should be skipped. | | | | 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 | } #endif }else{ /* Control reaches here if best-so-far path pTo=aTo[jj] covers the ** same set of loops and has the same isOrdered setting as the ** candidate path. Check to see if the candidate should replace ** pTo or if the candidate should be skipped. ** ** The conditional is an expanded vector comparison equivalent to: ** (pTo->rCost,pTo->nRow,pTo->rUnsorted) <= (rCost,nOut,rUnsorted) */ if( pTo->rCost<rCost || (pTo->rCost==rCost && (pTo->nRow<nOut || (pTo->nRow==nOut && pTo->rUnsorted<=rUnsorted) ) ) ){ #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED /* 0x4 */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 | memcpy(pTo->aLoop, pFrom->aLoop, sizeof(WhereLoop*)*iLoop); pTo->aLoop[iLoop] = pWLoop; if( nTo>=mxChoice ){ mxI = 0; mxCost = aTo[0].rCost; mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow; for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jj<mxChoice; jj++, pTo++){ | | | | 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 | memcpy(pTo->aLoop, pFrom->aLoop, sizeof(WhereLoop*)*iLoop); pTo->aLoop[iLoop] = pWLoop; if( nTo>=mxChoice ){ mxI = 0; mxCost = aTo[0].rCost; mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow; for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jj<mxChoice; jj++, pTo++){ if( pTo->rCost>mxCost || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted) ){ mxCost = pTo->rCost; mxUnsorted = pTo->rUnsorted; mxI = jj; } } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 | } if( nFrom==0 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "no query solution"); sqlite3StackFreeNN(pParse->db, pSpace); return SQLITE_ERROR; } | | | 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 | } if( nFrom==0 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "no query solution"); sqlite3StackFreeNN(pParse->db, pSpace); return SQLITE_ERROR; } /* Find the lowest cost path. pFrom will be left pointing to that path */ pFrom = aFrom; for(ii=1; ii<nFrom; ii++){ if( pFrom->rCost>aFrom[ii].rCost ) pFrom = &aFrom[ii]; } assert( pWInfo->nLevel==nLoop ); /* Load the lowest cost path into pWInfo */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 | } }else{ pWInfo->revMask = pFrom->revLoop; if( pWInfo->nOBSat<=0 ){ pWInfo->nOBSat = 0; if( nLoop>0 ){ u32 wsFlags = pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1]->wsFlags; | | | 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 | } }else{ pWInfo->revMask = pFrom->revLoop; if( pWInfo->nOBSat<=0 ){ pWInfo->nOBSat = 0; if( nLoop>0 ){ u32 wsFlags = pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1]->wsFlags; if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0 && (wsFlags&(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN))!=(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN) ){ Bitmask m = 0; int rc = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy, pFrom, WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &m); testcase( wsFlags & WHERE_IPK ); testcase( wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 | pWInfo->bOrderedInnerLoop = 1; } } if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SORTBYGROUP) && pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr && nLoop>0 ){ Bitmask revMask = 0; | | | 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 | pWInfo->bOrderedInnerLoop = 1; } } if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SORTBYGROUP) && pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr && nLoop>0 ){ Bitmask revMask = 0; int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy, pFrom, 0, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &revMask ); assert( pWInfo->sorted==0 ); if( nOrder==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr ){ pWInfo->sorted = 1; pWInfo->revMask = revMask; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 | ** Most queries use only a single table (they are not joins) and have ** simple == constraints against indexed fields. This routine attempts ** to plan those simple cases using much less ceremony than the ** general-purpose query planner, and thereby yield faster sqlite3_prepare() ** times for the common case. ** ** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this | | | 5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 | ** Most queries use only a single table (they are not joins) and have ** simple == constraints against indexed fields. This routine attempts ** to plan those simple cases using much less ceremony than the ** general-purpose query planner, and thereby yield faster sqlite3_prepare() ** times for the common case. ** ** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this ** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the ** general-purpose query planner. */ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ WhereInfo *pWInfo; SrcItem *pItem; WhereClause *pWC; WhereTerm *pTerm; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 | /* TUNING: Cost of a rowid lookup is 10 */ pLoop->rRun = 33; /* 33==sqlite3LogEst(10) */ }else{ for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ int opMask; assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm ); if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) | | | | 5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 | /* TUNING: Cost of a rowid lookup is 10 */ pLoop->rRun = 33; /* 33==sqlite3LogEst(10) */ }else{ for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ int opMask; assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm ); if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0 || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace) ) continue; opMask = pIdx->uniqNotNull ? (WO_EQ|WO_IS) : WO_EQ; for(j=0; j<pIdx->nKeyCol; j++){ pTerm = whereScanInit(&scan, pWC, iCur, j, opMask, pIdx); while( pTerm && pTerm->prereqRight ) pTerm = whereScanNext(&scan); if( pTerm==0 ) break; testcase( pTerm->eOperator & WO_IS ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 | pWalker->eCode = 0; return WRC_Abort; } return WRC_Continue; } /* | | | | | 5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 5487 5488 5489 5490 5491 5492 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 | pWalker->eCode = 0; return WRC_Abort; } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL ** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are ** part of sub-select statements. */ static int exprIsDeterministic(Expr *p){ Walker w; memset(&w, 0, sizeof(w)); w.eCode = 1; w.xExprCallback = exprNodeIsDeterministic; w.xSelectCallback = sqlite3SelectWalkFail; sqlite3WalkExpr(&w, p); return w.eCode; } #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED /* ** Display all WhereLoops in pWInfo */ static void showAllWhereLoops(WhereInfo *pWInfo, WhereClause *pWC){ if( sqlite3WhereTrace ){ /* Display all of the WhereLoop objects */ WhereLoop *p; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5520 5521 5522 5523 5524 5525 5526 | /* Attempt to omit tables from a join that do not affect the result. ** For a table to not affect the result, the following must be true: ** ** 1) The query must not be an aggregate. ** 2) The table must be the RHS of a LEFT JOIN. ** 3) Either the query must be DISTINCT, or else the ON or USING clause | | | | | 5520 5521 5522 5523 5524 5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540 5541 5542 5543 5544 5545 5546 5547 5548 5549 5550 5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 | /* Attempt to omit tables from a join that do not affect the result. ** For a table to not affect the result, the following must be true: ** ** 1) The query must not be an aggregate. ** 2) The table must be the RHS of a LEFT JOIN. ** 3) Either the query must be DISTINCT, or else the ON or USING clause ** must contain a constraint that limits the scan of the table to ** at most a single row. ** 4) The table must not be referenced by any part of the query apart ** from its own USING or ON clause. ** 5) The table must not have an inner-join ON or USING clause if there is ** a RIGHT JOIN anywhere in the query. Otherwise the ON/USING clause ** might move from the right side to the left side of the RIGHT JOIN. ** Note: Due to (2), this condition can only arise if the table is ** the right-most table of a subquery that was flattened into the ** main query and that subquery was the right-hand operand of an ** inner join that held an ON or USING clause. ** ** For example, given: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(ipk INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, v1); ** CREATE TABLE t2(ipk INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, v2); ** CREATE TABLE t3(ipk INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, v3); ** ** then table t2 can be omitted from the following: ** ** SELECT v1, v3 FROM t1 ** LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.ipk=t2.ipk) ** LEFT JOIN t3 ON (t1.ipk=t3.ipk) ** ** or from: ** ** SELECT DISTINCT v1, v3 FROM t1 ** LEFT JOIN t2 ** LEFT JOIN t3 ON (t1.ipk=t3.ipk) */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE Bitmask whereOmitNoopJoin( WhereInfo *pWInfo, Bitmask notReady ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 | ** terms of the WHERE clause that use only terms in that loop and outer ** loops are evaluated and if false a jump is made around all subsequent ** inner loops (or around the "..." if the test occurs within the inner- ** most loop) ** ** OUTER JOINS ** | | | 5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818 5819 5820 5821 5822 5823 5824 | ** terms of the WHERE clause that use only terms in that loop and outer ** loops are evaluated and if false a jump is made around all subsequent ** inner loops (or around the "..." if the test occurs within the inner- ** most loop) ** ** OUTER JOINS ** ** An outer join of tables t1 and t2 is conceptually coded as follows: ** ** foreach row1 in t1 do ** flag = 0 ** foreach row2 in t2 do ** start: ** ... ** flag = 1 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 | ** ORDER BY CLAUSE PROCESSING ** ** pOrderBy is a pointer to the ORDER BY clause (or the GROUP BY clause ** if the WHERE_GROUPBY flag is set in wctrlFlags) of a SELECT statement ** if there is one. If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine ** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL. ** | | | 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 | ** ORDER BY CLAUSE PROCESSING ** ** pOrderBy is a pointer to the ORDER BY clause (or the GROUP BY clause ** if the WHERE_GROUPBY flag is set in wctrlFlags) of a SELECT statement ** if there is one. If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine ** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL. ** ** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If ** WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE is set, iIdxCur is the cursor number of an index ** to use for OR clause processing. The WHERE clause should use this ** specific cursor. If WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED is set, then iIdxCur is ** the first cursor in an array of cursors for all indices. iIdxCur should ** be used to compute the appropriate cursor depending on which index is ** used. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 | WhereLoop *pLoop; /* Pointer to a single WhereLoop object */ int ii; /* Loop counter */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ int rc; /* Return code */ u8 bFordelete = 0; /* OPFLAG_FORDELETE or zero, as appropriate */ assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_MULTIROW)==0 || ( | | | | | | 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 | WhereLoop *pLoop; /* Pointer to a single WhereLoop object */ int ii; /* Loop counter */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ int rc; /* Return code */ u8 bFordelete = 0; /* OPFLAG_FORDELETE or zero, as appropriate */ assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_MULTIROW)==0 || ( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0 && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0 )); /* Only one of WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE or WHERE_USE_LIMIT */ assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0 || (wctrlFlags & WHERE_USE_LIMIT)==0 ); /* Variable initialization */ db = pParse->db; memset(&sWLB, 0, sizeof(sWLB)); /* An ORDER/GROUP BY clause of more than 63 terms cannot be optimized */ testcase( pOrderBy && pOrderBy->nExpr==BMS-1 ); if( pOrderBy && pOrderBy->nExpr>=BMS ) pOrderBy = 0; /* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of ** bits in a Bitmask */ testcase( pTabList->nSrc==BMS ); if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "at most %d tables in a join", BMS); return 0; } /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in ** pTabList. But if the WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE flag is set, then we should ** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that ** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized. */ nTabList = (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE) ? 1 : pTabList->nSrc; /* Allocate and initialize the WhereInfo structure that will become the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5926 5927 5928 5929 5930 5931 5932 | pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[0] = pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[1] = -1; pWInfo->nLevel = nTabList; pWInfo->iBreak = pWInfo->iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); pWInfo->wctrlFlags = wctrlFlags; pWInfo->iLimit = iAuxArg; pWInfo->savedNQueryLoop = pParse->nQueryLoop; pWInfo->pSelect = pSelect; | | | 5926 5927 5928 5929 5930 5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 | pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[0] = pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[1] = -1; pWInfo->nLevel = nTabList; pWInfo->iBreak = pWInfo->iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); pWInfo->wctrlFlags = wctrlFlags; pWInfo->iLimit = iAuxArg; pWInfo->savedNQueryLoop = pParse->nQueryLoop; pWInfo->pSelect = pSelect; memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0, offsetof(WhereInfo,sWC) - offsetof(WhereInfo,nOBSat)); memset(&pWInfo->a[0], 0, sizeof(WhereLoop)+nTabList*sizeof(WhereLevel)); assert( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ); /* ONEPASS defaults to OFF */ pMaskSet = &pWInfo->sMaskSet; pMaskSet->n = 0; pMaskSet->ix[0] = -99; /* Initialize ix[0] to a value that can never be ** a valid cursor number, to avoid an initial |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 | #endif /* Split the WHERE clause into separate subexpressions where each ** subexpression is separated by an AND operator. */ sqlite3WhereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo); sqlite3WhereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND); | | | | 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 | #endif /* Split the WHERE clause into separate subexpressions where each ** subexpression is separated by an AND operator. */ sqlite3WhereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo); sqlite3WhereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND); /* Special case: No FROM clause */ if( nTabList==0 ){ if( pOrderBy ) pWInfo->nOBSat = pOrderBy->nExpr; if( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_WANT_DISTINCT)!=0 && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_DistinctOpt) ){ pWInfo->eDistinct = WHERE_DISTINCT_UNIQUE; } ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 0, "SCAN CONSTANT ROW")); }else{ /* Assign a bit from the bitmask to every term in the FROM clause. ** ** The N-th term of the FROM clause is assigned a bitmask of 1<<N. ** ** The rule of the previous sentence ensures that if X is the bitmask for ** a table T, then X-1 is the bitmask for all other tables to the left of T. ** Knowing the bitmask for all tables to the left of a left join is ** important. Ticket #3015. ** ** Note that bitmasks are created for all pTabList->nSrc tables in ** pTabList, not just the first nTabList tables. nTabList is normally ** equal to pTabList->nSrc but might be shortened to 1 if the |
︙ | ︙ | |||
5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 | Bitmask m = sqlite3WhereGetMask(pMaskSet, pTabList->a[ii].iCursor); assert( m>=mx ); mx = m; } } #endif } | | | 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 | Bitmask m = sqlite3WhereGetMask(pMaskSet, pTabList->a[ii].iCursor); assert( m>=mx ); mx = m; } } #endif } /* Analyze all of the subexpressions. */ sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(pTabList, &pWInfo->sWC); if( pSelect && pSelect->pLimit ){ sqlite3WhereAddLimit(&pWInfo->sWC, pSelect); } if( pParse->nErr ) goto whereBeginError; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 | /* If one or more WhereTerm.truthProb values were used in estimating ** loop parameters, but then those truthProb values were subsequently ** changed based on STAT4 information while computing subsequent loops, ** then we need to rerun the whole loop building process so that all ** loops will be built using the revised truthProb values. */ if( sWLB.bldFlags2 & SQLITE_BLDF2_2NDPASS ){ WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC); | | | | 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 | /* If one or more WhereTerm.truthProb values were used in estimating ** loop parameters, but then those truthProb values were subsequently ** changed based on STAT4 information while computing subsequent loops, ** then we need to rerun the whole loop building process so that all ** loops will be built using the revised truthProb values. */ if( sWLB.bldFlags2 & SQLITE_BLDF2_2NDPASS ){ WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC); WHERETRACE(0xffffffff, ("**** Redo all loop computations due to" " TERM_HIGHTRUTH changes ****\n")); while( pWInfo->pLoops ){ WhereLoop *p = pWInfo->pLoops; pWInfo->pLoops = p->pNextLoop; whereLoopDelete(db, p); } rc = whereLoopAddAll(&sWLB); if( rc ) goto whereBeginError; } #endif WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC); wherePathSolver(pWInfo, 0); if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError; if( pWInfo->pOrderBy ){ wherePathSolver(pWInfo, pWInfo->nRowOut+1); if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6156 6157 6158 6159 6160 6161 6162 | /* Attempt to omit tables from a join that do not affect the result. ** See the comment on whereOmitNoopJoin() for further information. ** ** This query optimization is factored out into a separate "no-inline" ** procedure to keep the sqlite3WhereBegin() procedure from becoming ** too large. If sqlite3WhereBegin() becomes too large, that prevents | | | 6156 6157 6158 6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169 6170 | /* Attempt to omit tables from a join that do not affect the result. ** See the comment on whereOmitNoopJoin() for further information. ** ** This query optimization is factored out into a separate "no-inline" ** procedure to keep the sqlite3WhereBegin() procedure from becoming ** too large. If sqlite3WhereBegin() becomes too large, that prevents ** some C-compiler optimizers from in-lining the ** sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart() procedure, and it is important to ** in-line sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart() for performance reasons. */ notReady = ~(Bitmask)0; if( pWInfo->nLevel>=2 && pResultSet!=0 /* these two combine to guarantee */ && 0==(wctrlFlags & WHERE_AGG_DISTINCT) /* condition (1) above */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 | op = OP_OpenWrite; pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[0] = pTabItem->iCursor; }; sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, pTabItem->iCursor, iDb, pTab, op); assert( pTabItem->iCursor==pLevel->iTabCur ); testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS-1 ); testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS ); | | | 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 | op = OP_OpenWrite; pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[0] = pTabItem->iCursor; }; sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, pTabItem->iCursor, iDb, pTab, op); assert( pTabItem->iCursor==pLevel->iTabCur ); testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS-1 ); testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS ); if( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol<BMS && (pTab->tabFlags & (TF_HasGenerated|TF_WithoutRowid))==0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_AUTO_INDEX|WHERE_BLOOMFILTER))==0 ){ /* If we know that only a prefix of the record will be used, ** it is advantageous to reduce the "column count" field in ** the P4 operand of the OP_OpenRead/Write opcode. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 6499 6500 | if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenEphemeral ) return 1; } return 0; } #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ /* | | | 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 6499 6500 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 | if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenEphemeral ) return 1; } return 0; } #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ /* ** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on ** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information. */ void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){ Parse *pParse = pWInfo->pParse; Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; int i; WhereLevel *pLevel; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 6585 6586 | sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, pLevel->addrNxt); for(j=pLevel->u.in.nIn, pIn=&pLevel->u.in.aInLoop[j-1]; j>0; j--, pIn--){ assert( sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, pIn->addrInTop+1)->opcode==OP_IsNull || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, pIn->addrInTop+1); if( pIn->eEndLoopOp!=OP_Noop ){ if( pIn->nPrefix ){ | | | | | 6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 | sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, pLevel->addrNxt); for(j=pLevel->u.in.nIn, pIn=&pLevel->u.in.aInLoop[j-1]; j>0; j--, pIn--){ assert( sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, pIn->addrInTop+1)->opcode==OP_IsNull || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, pIn->addrInTop+1); if( pIn->eEndLoopOp!=OP_Noop ){ if( pIn->nPrefix ){ int bEarlyOut = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)==0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_EARLYOUT)!=0; if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){ /* For LEFT JOIN queries, cursor pIn->iCur may not have been ** opened yet. This occurs for WHERE clauses such as ** "a = ? AND b IN (...)", where the index is on (a, b). If ** the RHS of the (a=?) is NULL, then the "b IN (...)" may ** never have been coded, but the body of the loop run to ** return the null-row. So, if the cursor is not open yet, ** jump over the OP_Next or OP_Prev instruction about to ** be coded. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IfNotOpen, pIn->iCur, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 2 + bEarlyOut); VdbeCoverage(v); } if( bEarlyOut ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IfNoHope, pLevel->iIdxCur, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2, pIn->iBase, pIn->nPrefix); VdbeCoverage(v); /* Retarget the OP_IsNull against the left operand of IN so ** it jumps past the OP_IfNoHope. This is because the ** OP_IsNull also bypasses the OP_Affinity opcode that is ** required by OP_IfNoHope. */ sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, pIn->addrInTop+1); } } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, pIn->eEndLoopOp, pIn->iCur, pIn->addrInTop); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6642 6643 6644 6645 6646 6647 6648 | int ws = pLoop->wsFlags; addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfPos, pLevel->iLeftJoin); VdbeCoverage(v); assert( (ws & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 || (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)!=0 ); if( (ws & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){ assert( pLevel->iTabCur==pTabList->a[pLevel->iFrom].iCursor ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pLevel->iTabCur); } | | | | 6642 6643 6644 6645 6646 6647 6648 6649 6650 6651 6652 6653 6654 6655 6656 6657 | int ws = pLoop->wsFlags; addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfPos, pLevel->iLeftJoin); VdbeCoverage(v); assert( (ws & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 || (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)!=0 ); if( (ws & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){ assert( pLevel->iTabCur==pTabList->a[pLevel->iFrom].iCursor ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pLevel->iTabCur); } if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED) || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx) ){ if( ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR ){ Index *pIx = pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx; int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pIx->pSchema); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_ReopenIdx, pLevel->iIdxCur, pIx->tnum, iDb); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pIx); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
6698 6699 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 | continue; } /* If this scan uses an index, make VDBE code substitutions to read data ** from the index instead of from the table where possible. In some cases ** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can ** yield a significant performance boost. | | | 6698 6699 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 6706 6707 6708 6709 6710 6711 6712 | continue; } /* If this scan uses an index, make VDBE code substitutions to read data ** from the index instead of from the table where possible. In some cases ** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can ** yield a significant performance boost. ** ** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and ** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table ** directly. This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes ** that reference the table and converts them into opcodes that ** reference the index. */ if( pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_INDEXED|WHERE_IDX_ONLY) ){ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/whereInt.h.
︙ | ︙ | |||
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | typedef struct WhereOrCost WhereOrCost; typedef struct WhereOrSet WhereOrSet; typedef struct WhereMemBlock WhereMemBlock; typedef struct WhereRightJoin WhereRightJoin; /* ** This object is a header on a block of allocated memory that will be | | | 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 | typedef struct WhereOrCost WhereOrCost; typedef struct WhereOrSet WhereOrSet; typedef struct WhereMemBlock WhereMemBlock; typedef struct WhereRightJoin WhereRightJoin; /* ** This object is a header on a block of allocated memory that will be ** automatically freed when its WInfo object is destructed. */ struct WhereMemBlock { WhereMemBlock *pNext; /* Next block in the chain */ u64 sz; /* Bytes of space */ }; /* |
︙ | ︙ | |||
94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | union { /* Information that depends on pWLoop->wsFlags */ struct { int nIn; /* Number of entries in aInLoop[] */ struct InLoop { int iCur; /* The VDBE cursor used by this IN operator */ int addrInTop; /* Top of the IN loop */ int iBase; /* Base register of multi-key index record */ | | | 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | union { /* Information that depends on pWLoop->wsFlags */ struct { int nIn; /* Number of entries in aInLoop[] */ struct InLoop { int iCur; /* The VDBE cursor used by this IN operator */ int addrInTop; /* Top of the IN loop */ int iBase; /* Base register of multi-key index record */ int nPrefix; /* Number of prior entries in the key */ u8 eEndLoopOp; /* IN Loop terminator. OP_Next or OP_Prev */ } *aInLoop; /* Information about each nested IN operator */ } in; /* Used when pWLoop->wsFlags&WHERE_IN_ABLE */ Index *pCoveringIdx; /* Possible covering index for WHERE_MULTI_OR */ } u; struct WhereLoop *pWLoop; /* The selected WhereLoop object */ Bitmask notReady; /* FROM entries not usable at this level */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
163 164 165 166 167 168 169 | WhereTerm **aLTerm; /* WhereTerms used */ WhereLoop *pNextLoop; /* Next WhereLoop object in the WhereClause */ WhereTerm *aLTermSpace[3]; /* Initial aLTerm[] space */ }; /* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a ** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause. | | | 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 | WhereTerm **aLTerm; /* WhereTerms used */ WhereLoop *pNextLoop; /* Next WhereLoop object in the WhereClause */ WhereTerm *aLTermSpace[3]; /* Initial aLTerm[] space */ }; /* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a ** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause. ** See WhereOrSet for additional information */ struct WhereOrCost { Bitmask prereq; /* Prerequisites */ LogEst rRun; /* Cost of running this subquery */ LogEst nOut; /* Number of outputs for this subquery */ }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
215 216 217 218 219 220 221 | /* ** The query generator uses an array of instances of this structure to ** help it analyze the subexpressions of the WHERE clause. Each WHERE ** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators, ** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR. ** | | | 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 | /* ** The query generator uses an array of instances of this structure to ** help it analyze the subexpressions of the WHERE clause. Each WHERE ** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators, ** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR. ** ** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure. ** The following identity holds: ** ** WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm ** ** When a term is of the form: ** ** X <op> <expr> |
︙ | ︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | WhereInfo *pWInfo; /* WHERE clause processing context */ WhereClause *pOuter; /* Outer conjunction */ u8 op; /* Split operator. TK_AND or TK_OR */ u8 hasOr; /* True if any a[].eOperator is WO_OR */ int nTerm; /* Number of terms */ int nSlot; /* Number of entries in a[] */ int nBase; /* Number of terms through the last non-Virtual */ | | | 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 | WhereInfo *pWInfo; /* WHERE clause processing context */ WhereClause *pOuter; /* Outer conjunction */ u8 op; /* Split operator. TK_AND or TK_OR */ u8 hasOr; /* True if any a[].eOperator is WO_OR */ int nTerm; /* Number of terms */ int nSlot; /* Number of entries in a[] */ int nBase; /* Number of terms through the last non-Virtual */ WhereTerm *a; /* Each a[] describes a term of the WHERE clause */ #if defined(SQLITE_SMALL_STACK) WhereTerm aStatic[1]; /* Initial static space for a[] */ #else WhereTerm aStatic[8]; /* Initial static space for a[] */ #endif }; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
373 374 375 376 377 378 379 | WhereClause wc; /* The subexpression broken out */ }; /* ** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping ** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm. ** | | | | 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 | WhereClause wc; /* The subexpression broken out */ }; /* ** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping ** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm. ** ** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in ** SrcItem.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE ** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might ** contain gaps in the numbering sequence. But we want to make maximum ** use of the bits in our bitmasks. This structure provides a mapping ** from the sparse cursor numbers into consecutive integers beginning ** with 0. ** ** If WhereMaskSet.ix[A]==B it means that The A-th bit of a Bitmask |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/wherecode.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | if( i ) sqlite3_str_append(pStr, ",", 1); sqlite3_str_append(pStr, "?", 1); } if( nTerm>1 ) sqlite3_str_append(pStr, ")", 1); } /* | | | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 | if( i ) sqlite3_str_append(pStr, ",", 1); sqlite3_str_append(pStr, "?", 1); } if( nTerm>1 ) sqlite3_str_append(pStr, ")", 1); } /* ** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This ** function appends text to pStr that describes the subset of table ** rows scanned by the strategy in the form of an SQL expression. ** ** For example, if the query: ** ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=1 AND b>2; ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | explainAppendTerm(pStr, pIndex, pLoop->u.btree.nTop, j, i, "<"); } sqlite3_str_append(pStr, ")", 1); } /* ** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN | | | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 | explainAppendTerm(pStr, pIndex, pLoop->u.btree.nTop, j, i, "<"); } sqlite3_str_append(pStr, ")", 1); } /* ** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN ** command, or if stmt_scanstatus_v2() stats are enabled, or if SQLITE_DEBUG ** was defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain ** opcode is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in pLevel. ** ** If an OP_Explain opcode is added to the VM, its address is returned. ** Otherwise, if no OP_Explain is coded, zero is returned. */ int sqlite3WhereExplainOneScan( |
︙ | ︙ | |||
275 276 277 278 279 280 281 | return ret; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_EXPLAIN */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS /* ** Configure the VM passed as the first argument with an | | | | | 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 | return ret; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_EXPLAIN */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS /* ** Configure the VM passed as the first argument with an ** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to ** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM ** clause that the scan reads data from. ** ** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an ** OP_Explain instruction that describes the same loop. */ void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus( Vdbe *v, /* Vdbe to add scanstatus entry to */ SrcList *pSrclist, /* FROM clause pLvl reads data from */ WhereLevel *pLvl, /* Level to add scanstatus() entry for */ int addrExplain /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
350 351 352 353 354 355 356 | ** ** x GLOB 'abc*' AND x>='abc' AND x<'acd' ** \___________/ \______/ \_____/ ** parent child1 child2 ** ** Only the parent term was in the original WHERE clause. The child1 ** and child2 terms were added by the LIKE optimization. If both of | | | 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 | ** ** x GLOB 'abc*' AND x>='abc' AND x<'acd' ** \___________/ \______/ \_____/ ** parent child1 child2 ** ** Only the parent term was in the original WHERE clause. The child1 ** and child2 terms were added by the LIKE optimization. If both of ** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be ** skipped. ** ** Usually the parent term is marked as TERM_CODED. But if the parent ** term was originally TERM_LIKE, then the parent gets TERM_LIKECOND instead. ** The TERM_LIKECOND marking indicates that the term should be coded inside ** a conditional such that is only evaluated on the second pass of a ** LIKE-optimization loop, when scanning BLOBs instead of strings. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | if( pTerm->nChild!=0 ) break; nLoop++; } } /* ** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff | | | 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 | if( pTerm->nChild!=0 ) break; nLoop++; } } /* ** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff ** to the n registers starting at base. ** ** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB and SQLITE_AFF_NONE entries (which ** are no-ops) at the beginning and end of zAff are ignored. If all entries ** in zAff are SQLITE_AFF_BLOB or SQLITE_AFF_NONE, then no code gets generated. ** ** This routine makes its own copy of zAff so that the caller is free ** to modify zAff after this routine returns. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
425 426 427 428 429 430 431 | /* Code the OP_Affinity opcode if there is anything left to do. */ if( n>0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Affinity, base, n, 0, zAff, n); } } /* | | | 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 | /* Code the OP_Affinity opcode if there is anything left to do. */ if( n>0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Affinity, base, n, 0, zAff, n); } } /* ** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is ** either a vector of n elements or, if n==1, a scalar expression. ** Before the comparison operation, affinity zAff is to be applied ** to the pRight values. This function modifies characters within the ** affinity string to SQLITE_AFF_BLOB if either: ** ** * the comparison will be performed with no affinity, or ** * the affinity change in zAff is guaranteed not to change the value. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
536 537 538 539 540 541 542 | ** of the subroutines do not handle this case. */ Expr *p = pLhs->a[0].pExpr; pLhs->a[0].pExpr = 0; sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pNew->pLeft); pNew->pLeft = p; } if( pSelect->pOrderBy ){ | | | | | | | 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 | ** of the subroutines do not handle this case. */ Expr *p = pLhs->a[0].pExpr; pLhs->a[0].pExpr = 0; sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pNew->pLeft); pNew->pLeft = p; } if( pSelect->pOrderBy ){ /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the ** result-set. Since the result-set of the SELECT statement may ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer ** set correctly. Since setting them is just an optimization, ** it's easiest just to zero them here. */ ExprList *pOrderBy = pSelect->pOrderBy; for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){ pOrderBy->a[i].u.x.iOrderByCol = 0; } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
563 564 565 566 567 568 569 | } return pNew; } /* ** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause. An equality | | | 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 | } return pNew; } /* ** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause. An equality ** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be ** coded. ** ** The current value for the constraint is left in a register, the index ** of which is returned. An attempt is made store the result in iTarget but ** this is only guaranteed for TK_ISNULL and TK_IN constraints. If the ** constraint is a TK_EQ or TK_IS, then the current value might be left in ** some other register and it is the caller's responsibility to compensate. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
704 705 706 707 708 709 710 | } pIn++; } } testcase( iEq>0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN)==0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)!=0 ); | | | 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 | } pIn++; } } testcase( iEq>0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN)==0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)!=0 ); if( iEq>0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN|WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE))==0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekHit, pLevel->iIdxCur, 0, iEq); } }else{ pLevel->u.in.nIn = 0; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
741 742 743 744 745 746 747 | /* ** Generate code that will evaluate all == and IN constraints for an ** index scan. ** ** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c). ** Suppose the WHERE clause is this: a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10 ** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this | | | 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 | /* ** Generate code that will evaluate all == and IN constraints for an ** index scan. ** ** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c). ** Suppose the WHERE clause is this: a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10 ** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this ** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two ** constraints are coded. This routine will generate code to evaluate ** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3). The current values for a and b will be stored ** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned. ** ** In the example above nEq==2. But this subroutine works for any value ** of nEq including 0. If nEq==0, this routine is nearly a no-op. ** The only thing it does is allocate the pLevel->iMem memory cell and |
︙ | ︙ | |||
833 834 835 836 837 838 839 | VdbeCoverageIf(v, bRev!=0); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, j); for(j=0; j<nSkip; j++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iIdxCur, j, regBase+j); testcase( pIdx->aiColumn[j]==XN_EXPR ); VdbeComment((v, "%s", explainIndexColumnName(pIdx, j))); } | | | | | | 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 | VdbeCoverageIf(v, bRev!=0); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, j); for(j=0; j<nSkip; j++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iIdxCur, j, regBase+j); testcase( pIdx->aiColumn[j]==XN_EXPR ); VdbeComment((v, "%s", explainIndexColumnName(pIdx, j))); } } /* Evaluate the equality constraints */ assert( zAff==0 || (int)strlen(zAff)>=nEq ); for(j=nSkip; j<nEq; j++){ int r1; pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[j]; assert( pTerm!=0 ); /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns. ** Ex: CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a,b,a); SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=0 AND b=0; */ testcase( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED)!=0 ); testcase( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); r1 = codeEqualityTerm(pParse, pTerm, pLevel, j, bRev, regBase+j); if( r1!=regBase+j ){ if( nReg==1 ){ sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regBase); regBase = r1; }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, r1, regBase+j); } } if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN ){ if( pTerm->pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){ /* No affinity ever needs to be (or should be) applied to a value ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the ** affinity of the comparison has been applied to the value. */ if( zAff ) zAff[j] = SQLITE_AFF_BLOB; } }else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_ISNULL)==0 ){ Expr *pRight = pTerm->pExpr->pRight; if( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_IS)==0 && sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pRight) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, regBase+j, pLevel->addrBrk); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
887 888 889 890 891 892 893 | *pzAff = zAff; return regBase; } #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS /* ** If the most recently coded instruction is a constant range constraint | | | 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 | *pzAff = zAff; return regBase; } #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS /* ** If the most recently coded instruction is a constant range constraint ** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then ** set P3 and P5 on the OP_String opcode so that the string will be cast ** to a BLOB at appropriate times. ** ** The LIKE optimization trys to evaluate "x LIKE 'abc%'" as a range ** expression: "x>='ABC' AND x<'abd'". But this requires that the range ** scan loop run twice, once for strings and a second time for BLOBs. ** The OP_String opcodes on the second pass convert the upper and lower |
︙ | ︙ | |||
912 913 914 915 916 917 918 | WhereTerm *pTerm /* The upper or lower bound just coded */ ){ if( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT ){ VdbeOp *pOp; assert( pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>0 ); pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v); assert( pOp!=0 ); | | | 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 | WhereTerm *pTerm /* The upper or lower bound just coded */ ){ if( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT ){ VdbeOp *pOp; assert( pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>0 ); pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v); assert( pOp!=0 ); assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8 || pTerm->pWC->pWInfo->pParse->db->mallocFailed ); pOp->p3 = (int)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>>1); /* Register holding counter */ pOp->p5 = (u8)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr&1); /* ASC or DESC */ } } #else # define whereLikeOptimizationStringFixup(A,B,C) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
955 956 957 958 959 960 961 | } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Test whether or not expression pExpr, which was part of a WHERE clause, ** should be included in the cursor-hint for a table that is on the rhs | | | | | | | | | 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 | } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** Test whether or not expression pExpr, which was part of a WHERE clause, ** should be included in the cursor-hint for a table that is on the rhs ** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the ** expression is not suitable. ** ** An expression is unsuitable if it might evaluate to non NULL even if ** a TK_COLUMN node that does affect the value of the expression is set ** to NULL. For example: ** ** col IS NULL ** col IS NOT NULL ** coalesce(col, 1) ** CASE WHEN col THEN 0 ELSE 1 END */ static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ if( pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE ){ pWalker->eCode = 1; }else if( pExpr->op==TK_FUNCTION ){ int d1; char d2[4]; if( 0==sqlite3IsLikeFunction(pWalker->pParse->db, pExpr, &d1, d2) ){ pWalker->eCode = 1; } } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** This function is called on every node of an expression tree used as an ** argument to the OP_CursorHint instruction. If the node is a TK_COLUMN ** that accesses any table other than the one identified by ** CCurHint.iTabCur, then do the following: ** ** 1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read ** the specified column into the new register, and ** ** 2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads ** from the newly populated register. ** ** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table identified ** by pCCurHint.iTabCur, and an index is being used (which we will ** know because CCurHint.pIdx!=0) then transform the TK_COLUMN into ** an access of the index rather than the original table. */ static int codeCursorHintFixExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ int rc = WRC_Continue; int reg; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 | sWalker.u.pCCurHint = &sHint; pWC = &pWInfo->sWC; for(i=0; i<pWC->nBase; i++){ pTerm = &pWC->a[i]; if( pTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_CODED) ) continue; if( pTerm->prereqAll & pLevel->notReady ) continue; | | | | | | | 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 | sWalker.u.pCCurHint = &sHint; pWC = &pWInfo->sWC; for(i=0; i<pWC->nBase; i++){ pTerm = &pWC->a[i]; if( pTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_CODED) ) continue; if( pTerm->prereqAll & pLevel->notReady ) continue; /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT ** JOIN for which the current table is not the rhs are omitted ** from the cursor-hint. ** ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms ** that were specified as part of the WHERE clause must be excluded. ** This is to address the following: ** ** SELECT ... t1 LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.a=t2.b) WHERE t2.c IS NULL; ** ** Say there is a single row in t2 that matches (t1.a=t2.b), but its ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is ** pushed down to the cursor, this row is filtered out, causing ** SQLite to synthesize a row of NULL values. Which does match the ** WHERE clause, and so the query returns a row. Which is incorrect. ** ** For the same reason, WHERE terms such as: ** ** WHERE 1 = (t2.c IS NULL) ** ** are also excluded. See codeCursorHintIsOrFunction() for details. */ if( pTabItem->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT ){ Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr; if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) || pExpr->w.iJoin!=pTabItem->iCursor ){ sWalker.eCode = 0; sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintIsOrFunction; sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pTerm->pExpr); if( sWalker.eCode ) continue; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 | /* If we survive all prior tests, that means this term is worth hinting */ pExpr = sqlite3ExprAnd(pParse, pExpr, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pTerm->pExpr, 0)); } if( pExpr!=0 ){ sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintFixExpr; if( pParse->nErr==0 ) sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr); | | | | 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 | /* If we survive all prior tests, that means this term is worth hinting */ pExpr = sqlite3ExprAnd(pParse, pExpr, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pTerm->pExpr, 0)); } if( pExpr!=0 ){ sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintFixExpr; if( pParse->nErr==0 ) sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint, (sHint.pIdx ? sHint.iIdxCur : sHint.iTabCur), 0, 0, (const char*)pExpr, P4_EXPR); } } #else # define codeCursorHint(A,B,C,D) /* No-op */ #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS */ /* ** Cursor iCur is open on an intkey b-tree (a table). Register iRowid contains ** a rowid value just read from cursor iIdxCur, open on index pIdx. This ** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the ** rowid stored in register iRowid. ** ** Normally, this is just: ** ** OP_DeferredSeek $iCur $iRowid ** ** Which causes a seek on $iCur to the row with rowid $iRowid. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 | int iIdxCur /* Index cursor */ ){ Parse *pParse = pWInfo->pParse; /* Parse context */ Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; /* Vdbe to generate code within */ assert( iIdxCur>0 ); assert( pIdx->aiColumn[pIdx->nColumn-1]==-1 ); | | | 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 | int iIdxCur /* Index cursor */ ){ Parse *pParse = pWInfo->pParse; /* Parse context */ Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; /* Vdbe to generate code within */ assert( iIdxCur>0 ); assert( pIdx->aiColumn[pIdx->nColumn-1]==-1 ); pWInfo->bDeferredSeek = 1; sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_DeferredSeek, iIdxCur, 0, iCur); if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN)) && DbMaskAllZero(sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse)->writeMask) ){ int i; Table *pTab = pIdx->pTable; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 | ){ testcase( pOp->opcode==OP_Rowid ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, pOp->opcode, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3); break; } } | | | 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 | ){ testcase( pOp->opcode==OP_Rowid ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, pOp->opcode, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3); break; } } /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if ** the IN constraint is not satisfied */ pCompare = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, 0, 0); if( !db->mallocFailed ){ int iFld = pTerm->u.x.iField; Expr *pLeft = pTerm->pExpr->pLeft; assert( pLeft!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 | } codeCursorHint(pTabItem, pWInfo, pLevel, pEnd); if( pStart ){ Expr *pX; /* The expression that defines the start bound */ int r1, rTemp; /* Registers for holding the start boundary */ int op; /* Cursor seek operation */ | | | | 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 | } codeCursorHint(pTabItem, pWInfo, pLevel, pEnd); if( pStart ){ Expr *pX; /* The expression that defines the start bound */ int r1, rTemp; /* Registers for holding the start boundary */ int op; /* Cursor seek operation */ /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding ** seek opcodes. It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx */ const u8 aMoveOp[] = { /* TK_GT */ OP_SeekGT, /* TK_LE */ OP_SeekLE, /* TK_LT */ OP_SeekLT, /* TK_GE */ OP_SeekGE }; assert( TK_LE==TK_GT+1 ); /* Make sure the ordering.. */ assert( TK_LT==TK_GT+2 ); /* ... of the TK_xx values... */ assert( TK_GE==TK_GT+3 ); /* ... is correct. */ assert( (pStart->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 ); testcase( pStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); pX = pStart->pExpr; assert( pX!=0 ); testcase( pStart->leftCursor!=iCur ); /* transitive constraints */ if( sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 | pX = pEnd->pExpr; assert( pX!=0 ); assert( (pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 ); testcase( pEnd->leftCursor!=iCur ); /* Transitive constraints */ testcase( pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); memEndValue = ++pParse->nMem; codeExprOrVector(pParse, pX->pRight, memEndValue, 1); | | | | 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 | pX = pEnd->pExpr; assert( pX!=0 ); assert( (pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 ); testcase( pEnd->leftCursor!=iCur ); /* Transitive constraints */ testcase( pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); memEndValue = ++pParse->nMem; codeExprOrVector(pParse, pX->pRight, memEndValue, 1); if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight) && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT) ){ testOp = bRev ? OP_Le : OP_Ge; }else{ testOp = bRev ? OP_Lt : OP_Gt; } if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight) ){ disableTerm(pLevel, pEnd); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 | VdbeCoverageIf(v, testOp==OP_Ge); VdbeCoverageIf(v, testOp==OP_Gt); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC | SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); } }else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){ /* Case 4: A scan using an index. ** | | | | | | | 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 | VdbeCoverageIf(v, testOp==OP_Ge); VdbeCoverageIf(v, testOp==OP_Gt); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC | SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); } }else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){ /* Case 4: A scan using an index. ** ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality ** terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N ** left-most columns of the index. It may also contain ** inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only ** the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all ** optimized: ** ** x=5 ** x=5 AND y=10 ** x=5 AND y<10 ** x=5 AND y>5 AND y<10 ** x=5 AND y=5 AND z<=10 ** ** The z<10 term of the following cannot be used, only ** the x=5 term: ** ** x=5 AND z<10 ** ** N may be zero if there are inequality constraints. ** If there are no inequality constraints, then N is at ** least one. ** ** This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause ** constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order ** to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY. */ static const u8 aStartOp[] = { 0, 0, OP_Rewind, /* 2: (!start_constraints && startEq && !bRev) */ OP_Last, /* 3: (!start_constraints && startEq && bRev) */ OP_SeekGT, /* 4: (start_constraints && !startEq && !bRev) */ OP_SeekLT, /* 5: (start_constraints && !startEq && bRev) */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 | int regBignull = 0; /* big-null flag register */ int addrSeekScan = 0; /* Opcode of the OP_SeekScan, if any */ pIdx = pLoop->u.btree.pIndex; iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur; assert( nEq>=pLoop->nSkip ); | | | | | 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 | int regBignull = 0; /* big-null flag register */ int addrSeekScan = 0; /* Opcode of the OP_SeekScan, if any */ pIdx = pLoop->u.btree.pIndex; iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur; assert( nEq>=pLoop->nSkip ); /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end ** of the range. */ j = nEq; if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT ){ pRangeStart = pLoop->aLTerm[j++]; nExtraReg = MAX(nExtraReg, pLoop->u.btree.nBtm); /* Like optimization range constraints always occur in pairs */ assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 || (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT)!=0 ); } if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT ){ pRangeEnd = pLoop->aLTerm[j++]; nExtraReg = MAX(nExtraReg, pLoop->u.btree.nTop); #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS if( (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)!=0 ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 | bSeekPastNull = 1; } } } assert( pRangeEnd==0 || (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 ); /* If the WHERE_BIGNULL_SORT flag is set, then index column nEq uses | | | 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 | bSeekPastNull = 1; } } } assert( pRangeEnd==0 || (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 ); /* If the WHERE_BIGNULL_SORT flag is set, then index column nEq uses ** a non-default "big-null" sort (either ASC NULLS LAST or DESC NULLS ** FIRST). In both cases separate ordered scans are made of those ** index entries for which the column is null and for those for which ** it is not. For an ASC sort, the non-NULL entries are scanned first. ** For DESC, NULL entries are scanned first. */ if( (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_TOP_LIMIT|WHERE_BTM_LIMIT))==0 && (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BIGNULL_SORT)!=0 |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 | if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, regBignull); } pLevel->addrBignull = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); } /* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or | | | 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 | if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, regBignull); } pLevel->addrBignull = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); } /* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the ** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd). */ if( (nEq<pIdx->nColumn && bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC)) ){ SWAP(WhereTerm *, pRangeEnd, pRangeStart); SWAP(u8, bSeekPastNull, bStopAtNull); SWAP(u8, nBtm, nTop); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 | && sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pRight) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, regBase+nEq, addrNxt); VdbeCoverage(v); } if( zStartAff ){ updateRangeAffinityStr(pRight, nBtm, &zStartAff[nEq]); | | | 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 | && sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pRight) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, regBase+nEq, addrNxt); VdbeCoverage(v); } if( zStartAff ){ updateRangeAffinityStr(pRight, nBtm, &zStartAff[nEq]); } nConstraint += nBtm; testcase( pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); if( sqlite3ExprIsVector(pRight)==0 ){ disableTerm(pLevel, pRangeStart); }else{ startEq = 1; } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 | ** of expensive seek operations by replacing a single seek with ** 1 or more step operations. The question is, how many steps ** should we try before giving up and going with a seek. The cost ** of a seek is proportional to the logarithm of the of the number ** of entries in the tree, so basing the number of steps to try ** on the estimated number of rows in the btree seems like a good ** guess. */ | | | 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 | ** of expensive seek operations by replacing a single seek with ** 1 or more step operations. The question is, how many steps ** should we try before giving up and going with a seek. The cost ** of a seek is proportional to the logarithm of the of the number ** of entries in the tree, so basing the number of steps to try ** on the estimated number of rows in the btree seems like a good ** guess. */ addrSeekScan = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SeekScan, (pIdx->aiRowLogEst[0]+9)/10); if( pRangeStart || pRangeEnd ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1); sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, addrSeekScan, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1); addrSeekScan = 0; } VdbeCoverage(v); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 | assert( bSeekPastNull==0 || bStopAtNull==0 ); if( regBignull ){ assert( bSeekPastNull==1 || bStopAtNull==1 ); assert( bSeekPastNull==!bStopAtNull ); assert( bStopAtNull==startEq ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2); op = aStartOp[(nConstraint>1)*4 + 2 + bRev]; | | | 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 | assert( bSeekPastNull==0 || bStopAtNull==0 ); if( regBignull ){ assert( bSeekPastNull==1 || bStopAtNull==1 ); assert( bSeekPastNull==!bStopAtNull ); assert( bStopAtNull==startEq ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2); op = aStartOp[(nConstraint>1)*4 + 2 + bRev]; sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, op, iIdxCur, addrNxt, regBase, nConstraint-startEq); VdbeCoverage(v); VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_Rewind); testcase( op==OP_Rewind ); VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_Last); testcase( op==OP_Last ); VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_SeekGE); testcase( op==OP_SeekGE ); VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_SeekLE); testcase( op==OP_SeekLE ); assert( op==OP_Rewind || op==OP_Last || op==OP_SeekGE || op==OP_SeekLE); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 | } if( (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_EARLYOUT)!=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekHit, iIdxCur, nEq, nEq); } /* Seek the table cursor, if required */ | | | 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 | } if( (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_EARLYOUT)!=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekHit, iIdxCur, nEq, nEq); } /* Seek the table cursor, if required */ omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 && (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0; if( omitTable ){ /* pIdx is a covering index. No need to access the main table. */ }else if( HasRowid(pIdx->pTable) ){ codeDeferredSeek(pWInfo, pIdx, iCur, iIdxCur); }else if( iCur!=iIdxCur ){ Index *pPk = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx->pTable); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 | }else{ testcase( pIdx->pPartIdxWhere ); /* The following assert() is not a requirement, merely an observation: ** The OR-optimization doesn't work for the right hand table of ** a LEFT JOIN: */ assert( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0 ); } | | | 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 | }else{ testcase( pIdx->pPartIdxWhere ); /* The following assert() is not a requirement, merely an observation: ** The OR-optimization doesn't work for the right hand table of ** a LEFT JOIN: */ assert( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0 ); } /* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. */ if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW ){ pLevel->op = OP_Noop; }else if( bRev ){ pLevel->op = OP_Prev; }else{ pLevel->op = OP_Next; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 | for(k=1; k<=nNotReady; k++){ memcpy(&pOrTab->a[k], &origSrc[pLevel[k].iFrom], sizeof(pOrTab->a[k])); } }else{ pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList; } | | | | | | 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 | for(k=1; k<=nNotReady; k++){ memcpy(&pOrTab->a[k], &origSrc[pLevel[k].iFrom], sizeof(pOrTab->a[k])); } }else{ pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList; } /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is ** equivalent to an empty rowset. Or, create an ephemeral index ** capable of holding primary keys in the case of a WITHOUT ROWID. ** ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction ** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This ** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to ** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if ** called on an uninitialized cursor. */ if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_DUPLICATES_OK)==0 ){ if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ regRowset = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, regRowset); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 | /* If the original WHERE clause is z of the form: (x1 OR x2 OR ...) AND y ** Then for every term xN, evaluate as the subexpression: xN AND y ** That way, terms in y that are factored into the disjunction will ** be picked up by the recursive calls to sqlite3WhereBegin() below. ** ** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is ** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the | | | 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 | /* If the original WHERE clause is z of the form: (x1 OR x2 OR ...) AND y ** Then for every term xN, evaluate as the subexpression: xN AND y ** That way, terms in y that are factored into the disjunction will ** be picked up by the recursive calls to sqlite3WhereBegin() below. ** ** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is ** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as ** indices. ** ** This optimization also only applies if the (x1 OR x2 OR ...) term ** is not contained in the ON clause of a LEFT JOIN. ** See ticket http://www.sqlite.org/src/info/f2369304e4 ** ** 2022-02-04: Do not push down slices of a row-value comparison. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 | pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr, 0); pAndExpr = sqlite3ExprAnd(pParse, pAndExpr, pExpr); } if( pAndExpr ){ /* The extra 0x10000 bit on the opcode is masked off and does not ** become part of the new Expr.op. However, it does make the ** op==TK_AND comparison inside of sqlite3PExpr() false, and this | | | 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 | pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr, 0); pAndExpr = sqlite3ExprAnd(pParse, pAndExpr, pExpr); } if( pAndExpr ){ /* The extra 0x10000 bit on the opcode is masked off and does not ** become part of the new Expr.op. However, it does make the ** op==TK_AND comparison inside of sqlite3PExpr() false, and this ** prevents sqlite3PExpr() from applying the AND short-circuit ** optimization, which we do not want here. */ pAndExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_AND|0x10000, 0, pAndExpr); } } /* Run a separate WHERE clause for each term of the OR clause. After ** eliminating duplicates from other WHERE clauses, the action for each |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 | ** the row has already been included in the result set and ** can be ignored (by jumping past the Gosub below). Otherwise, ** insert the key into the temp table and proceed with processing ** the row. ** ** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet ** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in | | | | | 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 | ** the row has already been included in the result set and ** can be ignored (by jumping past the Gosub below). Otherwise, ** insert the key into the temp table and proceed with processing ** the row. ** ** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet ** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never ** be tested for. */ if( iSet ){ jmp1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, regRowset, 0, r, nPk); VdbeCoverage(v); } if( iSet>=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, r, nPk, regRowid); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, regRowset, regRowid, |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 | ** index, and the index is opened using the same cursor number ** by each call to sqlite3WhereBegin() made by this loop, it may ** be possible to use that index as a covering index. ** ** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that ** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term ** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous | | | | 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 | ** index, and the index is opened using the same cursor number ** by each call to sqlite3WhereBegin() made by this loop, it may ** be possible to use that index as a covering index. ** ** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that ** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term ** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will ** be available. */ pSubLoop = pSubWInfo->a[0].pWLoop; assert( (pSubLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_AUTO_INDEX)==0 ); if( (pSubLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)!=0 && (ii==0 || pSubLoop->u.btree.pIndex==pCov) && (HasRowid(pTab) || !IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pSubLoop->u.btree.pIndex)) |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 | ** ** This loop may run between one and three times, depending on the ** constraints to be generated. The value of stack variable iLoop ** determines the constraints coded by each iteration, as follows: ** ** iLoop==1: Code only expressions that are entirely covered by pIdx. ** iLoop==2: Code remaining expressions that do not contain correlated | | | 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 | ** ** This loop may run between one and three times, depending on the ** constraints to be generated. The value of stack variable iLoop ** determines the constraints coded by each iteration, as follows: ** ** iLoop==1: Code only expressions that are entirely covered by pIdx. ** iLoop==2: Code remaining expressions that do not contain correlated ** sub-queries. ** iLoop==3: Code all remaining expressions. ** ** An effort is made to skip unnecessary iterations of the loop. */ iLoop = (pIdx ? 1 : 2); do{ int iNext = 0; /* Next value for iLoop */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 | assert( !ExprHasProperty(pE, EP_OuterON) ); assert( (pTerm->prereqRight & pLevel->notReady)!=0 ); assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); pAlt = sqlite3WhereFindTerm(pWC, iCur, pTerm->u.x.leftColumn, notReady, WO_EQ|WO_IN|WO_IS, 0); if( pAlt==0 ) continue; if( pAlt->wtFlags & (TERM_CODED) ) continue; | | | 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 | assert( !ExprHasProperty(pE, EP_OuterON) ); assert( (pTerm->prereqRight & pLevel->notReady)!=0 ); assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); pAlt = sqlite3WhereFindTerm(pWC, iCur, pTerm->u.x.leftColumn, notReady, WO_EQ|WO_IN|WO_IS, 0); if( pAlt==0 ) continue; if( pAlt->wtFlags & (TERM_CODED) ) continue; if( (pAlt->eOperator & WO_IN) && ExprUseXSelect(pAlt->pExpr) && (pAlt->pExpr->x.pSelect->pEList->nExpr>1) ){ continue; } testcase( pAlt->eOperator & WO_EQ ); testcase( pAlt->eOperator & WO_IS ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_FilterAdd, pRJ->regBloom, 0, r+1, nPk); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp1); sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r, nPk+1); } /* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that | | | 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 | sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_FilterAdd, pRJ->regBloom, 0, r+1, nPk); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp1); sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r, nPk+1); } /* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table. */ if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){ pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, pLevel->iLeftJoin); VdbeComment((v, "record LEFT JOIN hit")); if( pLevel->pRJ==0 ){ goto code_outer_join_constraints; /* WHERE clause constraints */ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/whereexpr.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 | ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** This module contains C code that generates VDBE code used to process ** the WHERE clause of SQL statements. ** ** This file was originally part of where.c but was split out to improve | | | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 | ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* ** This module contains C code that generates VDBE code used to process ** the WHERE clause of SQL statements. ** ** This file was originally part of where.c but was split out to improve ** readability and editability. This file contains utility routines for ** analyzing Expr objects in the WHERE clause. */ #include "sqliteInt.h" #include "whereInt.h" /* Forward declarations */ static void exprAnalyze(SrcList*, WhereClause*, int); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 | ** LIKE optimization. See, for example: ** 2018-09-10 https://sqlite.org/src/info/c94369cae9b561b1 ** 2019-05-02 https://sqlite.org/src/info/b043a54c3de54b28 ** 2019-06-10 https://sqlite.org/src/info/fd76310a5e843e07 ** 2019-06-14 https://sqlite.org/src/info/ce8717f0885af975 ** 2019-09-03 https://sqlite.org/src/info/0f0428096f17252a */ | | | | 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 | ** LIKE optimization. See, for example: ** 2018-09-10 https://sqlite.org/src/info/c94369cae9b561b1 ** 2019-05-02 https://sqlite.org/src/info/b043a54c3de54b28 ** 2019-06-10 https://sqlite.org/src/info/fd76310a5e843e07 ** 2019-06-14 https://sqlite.org/src/info/ce8717f0885af975 ** 2019-09-03 https://sqlite.org/src/info/0f0428096f17252a */ if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT || (ALWAYS( ExprUseYTab(pLeft) ) && ALWAYS(pLeft->y.pTab) && IsVirtual(pLeft->y.pTab)) /* Might be numeric */ ){ int isNum; double rDummy; isNum = sqlite3AtoF(zNew, &rDummy, iTo, SQLITE_UTF8); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
298 299 300 301 302 303 304 | assert( !ExprHasProperty(pRight, EP_IntValue) ); if( *pisComplete && pRight->u.zToken[1] ){ /* If the rhs of the LIKE expression is a variable, and the current ** value of the variable means there is no need to invoke the LIKE ** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program. ** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name() ** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here. | | | 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 | assert( !ExprHasProperty(pRight, EP_IntValue) ); if( *pisComplete && pRight->u.zToken[1] ){ /* If the rhs of the LIKE expression is a variable, and the current ** value of the variable means there is no need to invoke the LIKE ** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program. ** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name() ** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here. */ int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1); sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r1); } } }else{ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
335 336 337 338 339 340 341 | ** 5. column != expr SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_NE ** 6. expr != column SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_NE ** 7. column IS NOT expr SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOT ** 8. expr IS NOT column SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOT ** 9. column IS NOT NULL SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOTNULL ** ** In every case, "column" must be a column of a virtual table. If there | | | 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 | ** 5. column != expr SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_NE ** 6. expr != column SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_NE ** 7. column IS NOT expr SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOT ** 8. expr IS NOT column SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOT ** 9. column IS NOT NULL SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOTNULL ** ** In every case, "column" must be a column of a virtual table. If there ** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the ** "expr" expression (even though in forms (6) and (8) the column is on the ** right and the expression is on the left). Also set *peOp2 to the ** appropriate virtual table operator. The return value is 1 or 2 if there ** is a match. The usual return is 1, but if the RHS is also a column ** of virtual table in forms (5) or (7) then return 2. ** ** If the expression matches none of the patterns above, return 0. |
︙ | ︙ | |||
503 504 505 506 507 508 509 | ** ** x<y OR x=y --> x<=y ** x=y OR x=y --> x=y ** x<=y OR x<y --> x<=y ** ** The following is NOT generated: ** | | | 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 | ** ** x<y OR x=y --> x<=y ** x=y OR x=y --> x=y ** x<=y OR x<y --> x<=y ** ** The following is NOT generated: ** ** x<y OR x>y --> x!=y */ static void whereCombineDisjuncts( SrcList *pSrc, /* the FROM clause */ WhereClause *pWC, /* The complete WHERE clause */ WhereTerm *pOne, /* First disjunct */ WhereTerm *pTwo /* Second disjunct */ ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
601 602 603 604 605 606 607 | ** ** If all subterms are indexable by a single table T, then set ** ** WhereTerm.eOperator = WO_OR ** WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable |= the cursor number for table T ** ** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form | | | | 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 | ** ** If all subterms are indexable by a single table T, then set ** ** WhereTerm.eOperator = WO_OR ** WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable |= the cursor number for table T ** ** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form ** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and ** <op> is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN". ** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more ** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND ** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have ** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object. ** ** From another point of view, "indexable" means that the subterm could ** potentially be used with an index if an appropriate index exists. ** This analysis does not consider whether or not the index exists; that ** is decided elsewhere. This analysis only looks at whether subterms |
︙ | ︙ | |||
696 697 698 699 700 701 702 | sqlite3WhereClauseInit(pAndWC, pWC->pWInfo); sqlite3WhereSplit(pAndWC, pOrTerm->pExpr, TK_AND); sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(pSrc, pAndWC); pAndWC->pOuter = pWC; if( !db->mallocFailed ){ for(j=0, pAndTerm=pAndWC->a; j<pAndWC->nTerm; j++, pAndTerm++){ assert( pAndTerm->pExpr ); | | | 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 | sqlite3WhereClauseInit(pAndWC, pWC->pWInfo); sqlite3WhereSplit(pAndWC, pOrTerm->pExpr, TK_AND); sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(pSrc, pAndWC); pAndWC->pOuter = pWC; if( !db->mallocFailed ){ for(j=0, pAndTerm=pAndWC->a; j<pAndWC->nTerm; j++, pAndTerm++){ assert( pAndTerm->pExpr ); if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op) || pAndTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX ){ b |= sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pAndTerm->leftCursor); } } } indexable &= b; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
798 799 800 801 802 803 804 | assert( j==1 ); continue; } if( (chngToIN & sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){ /* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the ** chngToIN set but t1 is not. This term will be either preceded | | | 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 | assert( j==1 ); continue; } if( (chngToIN & sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){ /* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the ** chngToIN set but t1 is not. This term will be either preceded ** or followed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term ** and use its inversion. */ testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED ); testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); assert( pOrTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_COPIED|TERM_VIRTUAL) ); continue; } assert( (pOrTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
829 830 831 832 833 834 835 | ** table and column is common to every term in the OR clause */ okToChngToIN = 1; for(; i>=0 && okToChngToIN; i--, pOrTerm++){ assert( pOrTerm->eOperator & WO_EQ ); assert( (pOrTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); if( pOrTerm->leftCursor!=iCursor ){ pOrTerm->wtFlags &= ~TERM_OK; | | | 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 | ** table and column is common to every term in the OR clause */ okToChngToIN = 1; for(; i>=0 && okToChngToIN; i--, pOrTerm++){ assert( pOrTerm->eOperator & WO_EQ ); assert( (pOrTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); if( pOrTerm->leftCursor!=iCursor ){ pOrTerm->wtFlags &= ~TERM_OK; }else if( pOrTerm->u.x.leftColumn!=iColumn || (iColumn==XN_EXPR && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pOrTerm->pExpr->pLeft, pLeft, -1) )){ okToChngToIN = 0; }else{ int affLeft, affRight; /* If the right-hand side is also a column, then the affinities ** of both right and left sides must be such that no type |
︙ | ︙ | |||
851 852 853 854 855 856 857 | pOrTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_OK; } } } } /* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies | | | 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 | pOrTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_OK; } } } } /* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is ** pTerm converted into an IN operator. */ if( okToChngToIN ){ Expr *pDup; /* A transient duplicate expression */ ExprList *pList = 0; /* The RHS of the IN operator */ Expr *pLeft = 0; /* The LHS of the IN operator */ Expr *pNew; /* The complete IN operator */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
984 985 986 987 988 989 990 | do{ iCur = pFrom->a[j].iCursor; for(pIdx=pFrom->a[j].pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ if( pIdx->aColExpr==0 ) continue; for(i=0; i<pIdx->nKeyCol; i++){ if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]!=XN_EXPR ) continue; assert( pIdx->bHasExpr ); | | | | | 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 | do{ iCur = pFrom->a[j].iCursor; for(pIdx=pFrom->a[j].pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ if( pIdx->aColExpr==0 ) continue; for(i=0; i<pIdx->nKeyCol; i++){ if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]!=XN_EXPR ) continue; assert( pIdx->bHasExpr ); if( sqlite3ExprCompareSkip(pExpr,pIdx->aColExpr->a[i].pExpr,iCur)==0 && pExpr->op!=TK_STRING ){ aiCurCol[0] = iCur; aiCurCol[1] = XN_EXPR; return 1; } } } }while( ++j < pFrom->nSrc ); return 0; } static int exprMightBeIndexed( SrcList *pFrom, /* The FROM clause */ int *aiCurCol, /* Write the referenced table cursor & column here */ Expr *pExpr, /* An operand of a comparison operator */ int op /* The specific comparison operator */ ){ int i; /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing ** on the first element of the vector. */ assert( TK_GT+1==TK_LE && TK_GT+2==TK_LT && TK_GT+3==TK_GE ); assert( TK_IS<TK_GE && TK_ISNULL<TK_GE && TK_IN<TK_GE ); assert( op<=TK_GE ); if( pExpr->op==TK_VECTOR && (op>=TK_GT && ALWAYS(op<=TK_GE)) ){ assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); pExpr = pExpr->x.pList->a[0].pExpr; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 | WhereClause *pWC, /* the WHERE clause */ int idxTerm /* Index of the term to be analyzed */ ){ WhereInfo *pWInfo = pWC->pWInfo; /* WHERE clause processing context */ WhereTerm *pTerm; /* The term to be analyzed */ WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet; /* Set of table index masks */ Expr *pExpr; /* The expression to be analyzed */ | | | | 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 | WhereClause *pWC, /* the WHERE clause */ int idxTerm /* Index of the term to be analyzed */ ){ WhereInfo *pWInfo = pWC->pWInfo; /* WHERE clause processing context */ WhereTerm *pTerm; /* The term to be analyzed */ WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet; /* Set of table index masks */ Expr *pExpr; /* The expression to be analyzed */ Bitmask prereqLeft; /* Prerequisites of the pExpr->pLeft */ Bitmask prereqAll; /* Prerequisites of pExpr */ Bitmask extraRight = 0; /* Extra dependencies on LEFT JOIN */ Expr *pStr1 = 0; /* RHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */ int isComplete = 0; /* RHS of LIKE/GLOB ends with wildcard */ int noCase = 0; /* uppercase equivalent to lowercase */ int op; /* Top-level operator. pExpr->op */ Parse *pParse = pWInfo->pParse; /* Parsing context */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 | if( exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, aiCurCol, pLeft, op) ){ pTerm->leftCursor = aiCurCol[0]; assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); pTerm->u.x.leftColumn = aiCurCol[1]; pTerm->eOperator = operatorMask(op) & opMask; } if( op==TK_IS ) pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_IS; | | | 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 | if( exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, aiCurCol, pLeft, op) ){ pTerm->leftCursor = aiCurCol[0]; assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); pTerm->u.x.leftColumn = aiCurCol[1]; pTerm->eOperator = operatorMask(op) & opMask; } if( op==TK_IS ) pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_IS; if( pRight && exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, aiCurCol, pRight, op) && !ExprHasProperty(pRight, EP_FixedCol) ){ WhereTerm *pNew; Expr *pDup; u16 eExtraOp = 0; /* Extra bits for pNew->eOperator */ assert( pTerm->u.x.iField==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 | pNew->leftCursor = aiCurCol[0]; assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); pNew->u.x.leftColumn = aiCurCol[1]; testcase( (prereqLeft | extraRight) != prereqLeft ); pNew->prereqRight = prereqLeft | extraRight; pNew->prereqAll = prereqAll; pNew->eOperator = (operatorMask(pDup->op) + eExtraOp) & opMask; | | | 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 | pNew->leftCursor = aiCurCol[0]; assert( (pTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 ); pNew->u.x.leftColumn = aiCurCol[1]; testcase( (prereqLeft | extraRight) != prereqLeft ); pNew->prereqRight = prereqLeft | extraRight; pNew->prereqAll = prereqAll; pNew->eOperator = (operatorMask(pDup->op) + eExtraOp) & opMask; }else if( op==TK_ISNULL && !ExprHasProperty(pExpr,EP_OuterON) && 0==sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pLeft) ){ assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_IntValue) ); pExpr->op = TK_TRUEFALSE; /* See tag-20230504-1 */ pExpr->u.zToken = "false"; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 | assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); pList = pExpr->x.pList; assert( pList!=0 ); assert( pList->nExpr==2 ); for(i=0; i<2; i++){ Expr *pNewExpr; int idxNew; | | | 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 | assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); pList = pExpr->x.pList; assert( pList!=0 ); assert( pList->nExpr==2 ); for(i=0; i<2; i++){ Expr *pNewExpr; int idxNew; pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i], sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0), sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0)); transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr, pExpr); idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC); testcase( idxNew==0 ); exprAnalyze(pSrc, pWC, idxNew); pTerm = &pWC->a[idxTerm]; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 | && pExpr->pLeft->iColumn>=0 && !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) ){ Expr *pNewExpr; Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; int idxNew; WhereTerm *pNewTerm; | | | | 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 | && pExpr->pLeft->iColumn>=0 && !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) ){ Expr *pNewExpr; Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; int idxNew; WhereTerm *pNewTerm; pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_GT, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pLeft, 0), sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_NULL, 0, 0)); idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC|TERM_VNULL); if( idxNew ){ pNewTerm = &pWC->a[idxNew]; pNewTerm->prereqRight = 0; pNewTerm->leftCursor = pLeft->iTable; pNewTerm->u.x.leftColumn = pLeft->iColumn; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 | const u16 wtFlags = TERM_LIKEOPT | TERM_VIRTUAL | TERM_DYNAMIC; assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); pLeft = pExpr->x.pList->a[1].pExpr; pStr2 = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStr1, 0); assert( pStr1==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr1, EP_IntValue) ); assert( pStr2==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr2, EP_IntValue) ); | | | 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 | const u16 wtFlags = TERM_LIKEOPT | TERM_VIRTUAL | TERM_DYNAMIC; assert( ExprUseXList(pExpr) ); pLeft = pExpr->x.pList->a[1].pExpr; pStr2 = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStr1, 0); assert( pStr1==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr1, EP_IntValue) ); assert( pStr2==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr2, EP_IntValue) ); /* Convert the lower bound to upper-case and the upper bound to ** lower-case (upper-case is less than lower-case in ASCII) so that ** the range constraints also work for BLOBs */ if( noCase && !pParse->db->mallocFailed ){ int i; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 | if( !db->mallocFailed ){ u8 c, *pC; /* Last character before the first wildcard */ pC = (u8*)&pStr2->u.zToken[sqlite3Strlen30(pStr2->u.zToken)-1]; c = *pC; if( noCase ){ /* The point is to increment the last character before the first ** wildcard. But if we increment '@', that will push it into the | | | 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 | if( !db->mallocFailed ){ u8 c, *pC; /* Last character before the first wildcard */ pC = (u8*)&pStr2->u.zToken[sqlite3Strlen30(pStr2->u.zToken)-1]; c = *pC; if( noCase ){ /* The point is to increment the last character before the first ** wildcard. But if we increment '@', that will push it into the ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the ** inequality. To avoid this, make sure to also run the full ** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag */ if( c=='A'-1 ) isComplete = 0; c = sqlite3UpperToLower[c]; } *pC = c + 1; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 | ** is not a sub-select. ** ** tag-20220128a */ if( (pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_IS) && (nLeft = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))>1 && sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pRight)==nLeft | | | 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 | ** is not a sub-select. ** ** tag-20220128a */ if( (pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_IS) && (nLeft = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))>1 && sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pRight)==nLeft && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0 || (pExpr->pRight->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0) && pWC->op==TK_AND ){ int i; for(i=0; i<nLeft; i++){ int idxNew; Expr *pNew; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 | pTerm = &pWC->a[idxTerm]; pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_CODED|TERM_VIRTUAL; /* Disable the original */ pTerm->eOperator = WO_ROWVAL; } /* If there is a vector IN term - e.g. "(a, b) IN (SELECT ...)" - create ** a virtual term for each vector component. The expression object | | | 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 | pTerm = &pWC->a[idxTerm]; pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_CODED|TERM_VIRTUAL; /* Disable the original */ pTerm->eOperator = WO_ROWVAL; } /* If there is a vector IN term - e.g. "(a, b) IN (SELECT ...)" - create ** a virtual term for each vector component. The expression object ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...) ** expression). The WhereTerm.u.x.iField variable identifies the index within ** the vector on the LHS that the virtual term represents. ** ** This only works if the RHS is a simple SELECT (not a compound) that does ** not use window functions. */ else if( pExpr->op==TK_IN |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 | WhereTerm *pNewTerm; Bitmask prereqColumn, prereqExpr; prereqExpr = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pRight); prereqColumn = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft); if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){ Expr *pNewExpr; | | | 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 | WhereTerm *pNewTerm; Bitmask prereqColumn, prereqExpr; prereqExpr = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pRight); prereqColumn = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft); if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){ Expr *pNewExpr; pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH, 0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0)); if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) && pNewExpr ){ ExprSetProperty(pNewExpr, EP_OuterON); pNewExpr->w.iJoin = pExpr->w.iJoin; } idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC); testcase( idxNew==0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 | }else{ sqlite3WhereSplit(pWC, pE2->pLeft, op); sqlite3WhereSplit(pWC, pE2->pRight, op); } } /* | | | | | 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 | }else{ sqlite3WhereSplit(pWC, pE2->pLeft, op); sqlite3WhereSplit(pWC, pE2->pRight, op); } } /* ** Add either a LIMIT (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT) or ** OFFSET (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET) term to the ** where-clause passed as the first argument. The value for the term ** is found in register iReg. ** ** In the common case where the value is a simple integer ** (example: "LIMIT 5 OFFSET 10") then the expression codes as a ** TK_INTEGER so that it will be available to sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(). ** If not, then it codes as a TK_REGISTER expression. */ static void whereAddLimitExpr( WhereClause *pWC, /* Add the constraint to this WHERE clause */ int iReg, /* Register that will hold value of the limit/offset */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 | assert( pWC->a[ii].wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); assert( pWC->a[ii].eOperator==WO_ROWVAL ); continue; } if( pWC->a[ii].nChild ){ /* If this term has child terms, then they are also part of the ** pWC->a[] array. So this term can be ignored, as a LIMIT clause | | | 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 | assert( pWC->a[ii].wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); assert( pWC->a[ii].eOperator==WO_ROWVAL ); continue; } if( pWC->a[ii].nChild ){ /* If this term has child terms, then they are also part of the ** pWC->a[] array. So this term can be ignored, as a LIMIT clause ** will only be added if each of the child terms passes the ** (leftCursor==iCsr) test below. */ continue; } if( pWC->a[ii].leftCursor!=iCsr ) return; } /* Check condition (5). Return early if it is not met. */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 | } } return mask; } /* | | | | 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 | } } return mask; } /* ** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause. ** ** Note that exprAnalyze() might add new virtual terms onto the ** end of the WHERE clause. We do not want to analyze these new ** virtual terms, so start analyzing at the end and work forward ** so that the added virtual terms are never processed. */ void sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze( SrcList *pTabList, /* the FROM clause */ WhereClause *pWC /* the WHERE clause to be analyzed */ ){ int i; for(i=pWC->nTerm-1; i>=0; i--){ exprAnalyze(pTabList, pWC, i); } } /* ** For table-valued-functions, transform the function arguments into ** new WHERE clause terms. ** ** Each function argument translates into an equality constraint against ** a HIDDEN column in the table. */ void sqlite3WhereTabFuncArgs( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ SrcItem *pItem, /* The FROM clause term to process */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 | pColRef = sqlite3ExprAlloc(pParse->db, TK_COLUMN, 0, 0); if( pColRef==0 ) return; pColRef->iTable = pItem->iCursor; pColRef->iColumn = k++; assert( ExprUseYTab(pColRef) ); pColRef->y.pTab = pTab; pItem->colUsed |= sqlite3ExprColUsed(pColRef); | | | 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 | pColRef = sqlite3ExprAlloc(pParse->db, TK_COLUMN, 0, 0); if( pColRef==0 ) return; pColRef->iTable = pItem->iCursor; pColRef->iColumn = k++; assert( ExprUseYTab(pColRef) ); pColRef->y.pTab = pTab; pItem->colUsed |= sqlite3ExprColUsed(pColRef); pRhs = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_UPLUS, sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, pArgs->a[j].pExpr, 0), 0); pTerm = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, pColRef, pRhs); if( pItem->fg.jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT) ){ testcase( pItem->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT ); /* testtag-20230227a */ testcase( pItem->fg.jointype & JT_RIGHT ); /* testtag-20230227b */ joinType = EP_OuterON; }else{ |
︙ | ︙ |
Changes to src/window.c.
︙ | ︙ | |||
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 | ** ) ORDER BY e; ** ** The flattening optimization is disabled when processing this transformed ** SELECT statement. This allows the implementation of the window function ** (in this case max()) to process rows sorted in order of (c, d), which ** makes things easier for obvious reasons. More generally: ** | | | | | | | | 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | ** ) ORDER BY e; ** ** The flattening optimization is disabled when processing this transformed ** SELECT statement. This allows the implementation of the window function ** (in this case max()) to process rows sorted in order of (c, d), which ** makes things easier for obvious reasons. More generally: ** ** * FROM, WHERE, GROUP BY and HAVING clauses are all moved to ** the sub-query. ** ** * ORDER BY, LIMIT and OFFSET remain part of the parent query. ** ** * Terminals from each of the expression trees that make up the ** select-list and ORDER BY expressions in the parent query are ** selected by the sub-query. For the purposes of the transformation, ** terminals are column references and aggregate functions. ** ** If there is more than one window function in the SELECT that uses ** the same window declaration (the OVER bit), then a single scan may ** be used to process more than one window function. For example: ** ** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d), ** min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d) ** FROM t1; ** ** is transformed in the same way as the example above. However: ** ** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d), ** min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY a ORDER BY b) ** FROM t1; ** ** Must be transformed to: ** ** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d) FROM ( ** SELECT e, min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY a ORDER BY b), c, d, b FROM ** SELECT a, e, c, d, b FROM t1 ORDER BY a, b |
︙ | ︙ | |||
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | ** cume_dist() ** ntile(N) ** lead(expr [, offset [, default]]) ** lag(expr [, offset [, default]]) ** first_value(expr) ** last_value(expr) ** nth_value(expr, N) | | | | | | | | | 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | ** cume_dist() ** ntile(N) ** lead(expr [, offset [, default]]) ** lag(expr [, offset [, default]]) ** first_value(expr) ** last_value(expr) ** nth_value(expr, N) ** ** These are the same built-in window functions supported by Postgres. ** Although the behaviour of aggregate window functions (functions that ** can be used as either aggregates or window functions) allows them to ** be implemented using an API, built-in window functions are much more ** esoteric. Additionally, some window functions (e.g. nth_value()) ** may only be implemented by caching the entire partition in memory. ** As such, some built-in window functions use the same API as aggregate ** window functions and some are implemented directly using VDBE ** instructions. Additionally, for those functions that use the API, the ** window frame is sometimes modified before the SELECT statement is ** rewritten. For example, regardless of the specified window frame, the ** row_number() function always uses: ** ** ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW ** ** See sqlite3WindowUpdate() for details. ** ** As well as some of the built-in window functions, aggregate window ** functions min() and max() are implemented using VDBE instructions if ** the start of the window frame is declared as anything other than ** UNBOUNDED PRECEDING. */ /* ** Implementation of built-in window function row_number(). Assumes that the ** window frame has been coerced to: ** ** ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW */ static void row_numberStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ i64 *p = (i64*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ) (*p)++; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
169 170 171 172 173 174 175 | i64 nTotal; }; /* ** Implementation of built-in window function dense_rank(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** | | | | 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | i64 nTotal; }; /* ** Implementation of built-in window function dense_rank(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** ** RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW */ static void dense_rankStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct CallCount *p; p = (struct CallCount*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ) p->nStep = 1; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
204 205 206 207 208 209 210 | ** is not set to the default value "NO OTHERS". */ struct NthValueCtx { i64 nStep; sqlite3_value *pValue; }; static void nth_valueStepFunc( | | | 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 | ** is not set to the default value "NO OTHERS". */ struct NthValueCtx { i64 nStep; sqlite3_value *pValue; }; static void nth_valueStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct NthValueCtx *p; p = (struct NthValueCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ){ i64 iVal; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
257 258 259 260 261 262 263 | p->pValue = 0; } } #define nth_valueInvFunc noopStepFunc #define nth_valueValueFunc noopValueFunc static void first_valueStepFunc( | | | 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 | p->pValue = 0; } } #define nth_valueInvFunc noopStepFunc #define nth_valueValueFunc noopValueFunc static void first_valueStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct NthValueCtx *p; p = (struct NthValueCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p && p->pValue==0 ){ p->pValue = sqlite3_value_dup(apArg[0]); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
288 289 290 291 292 293 294 | #define first_valueInvFunc noopStepFunc #define first_valueValueFunc noopValueFunc /* ** Implementation of built-in window function rank(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** | | | | 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 | #define first_valueInvFunc noopStepFunc #define first_valueValueFunc noopValueFunc /* ** Implementation of built-in window function rank(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** ** RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW */ static void rankStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct CallCount *p; p = (struct CallCount*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ){ p->nStep++; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
322 323 324 325 326 327 328 | /* ** Implementation of built-in window function percent_rank(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** ** GROUPS BETWEEN CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING */ static void percent_rankStepFunc( | | | | 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 | /* ** Implementation of built-in window function percent_rank(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** ** GROUPS BETWEEN CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING */ static void percent_rankStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct CallCount *p; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); assert( nArg==0 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); p = (struct CallCount*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ){ p->nTotal++; } } static void percent_rankInvFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct CallCount *p; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); assert( nArg==0 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); p = (struct CallCount*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
367 368 369 370 371 372 373 | /* ** Implementation of built-in window function cume_dist(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** ** GROUPS BETWEEN 1 FOLLOWING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING */ static void cume_distStepFunc( | | | | 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 | /* ** Implementation of built-in window function cume_dist(). Assumes that ** the window frame has been set to: ** ** GROUPS BETWEEN 1 FOLLOWING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING */ static void cume_distStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct CallCount *p; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); assert( nArg==0 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); p = (struct CallCount*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ){ p->nTotal++; } } static void cume_distInvFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct CallCount *p; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); assert( nArg==0 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); p = (struct CallCount*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
416 417 418 419 420 421 422 | /* ** Implementation of ntile(). This assumes that the window frame has ** been coerced to: ** ** ROWS CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING */ static void ntileStepFunc( | | | | 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 | /* ** Implementation of ntile(). This assumes that the window frame has ** been coerced to: ** ** ROWS CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING */ static void ntileStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct NtileCtx *p; assert( nArg==1 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); p = (struct NtileCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ){ if( p->nTotal==0 ){ p->nParam = sqlite3_value_int64(apArg[0]); if( p->nParam<=0 ){ sqlite3_result_error( pCtx, "argument of ntile must be a positive integer", -1 ); } } p->nTotal++; } } static void ntileInvFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct NtileCtx *p; assert( nArg==1 ); UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); p = (struct NtileCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
482 483 484 485 486 487 488 | int nVal; }; /* ** Implementation of last_value(). */ static void last_valueStepFunc( | | | | 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 | int nVal; }; /* ** Implementation of last_value(). */ static void last_valueStepFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct LastValueCtx *p; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); p = (struct LastValueCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); if( p ){ sqlite3_value_free(p->pVal); p->pVal = sqlite3_value_dup(apArg[0]); if( p->pVal==0 ){ sqlite3_result_error_nomem(pCtx); }else{ p->nVal++; } } } static void last_valueInvFunc( sqlite3_context *pCtx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ struct LastValueCtx *p; UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); UNUSED_PARAMETER(apArg); p = (struct LastValueCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(pCtx, sizeof(*p)); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
643 644 645 646 647 648 649 | ** This function is called immediately after resolving the function name ** for a window function within a SELECT statement. Argument pList is a ** linked list of WINDOW definitions for the current SELECT statement. ** Argument pFunc is the function definition just resolved and pWin ** is the Window object representing the associated OVER clause. This ** function updates the contents of pWin as follows: ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 | ** This function is called immediately after resolving the function name ** for a window function within a SELECT statement. Argument pList is a ** linked list of WINDOW definitions for the current SELECT statement. ** Argument pFunc is the function definition just resolved and pWin ** is the Window object representing the associated OVER clause. This ** function updates the contents of pWin as follows: ** ** * If the OVER clause referred to a named window (as in "max(x) OVER win"), ** search list pList for a matching WINDOW definition, and update pWin ** accordingly. If no such WINDOW clause can be found, leave an error ** in pParse. ** ** * If the function is a built-in window function that requires the ** window to be coerced (see "BUILT-IN WINDOW FUNCTIONS" at the top ** of this file), pWin is updated here. */ void sqlite3WindowUpdate( Parse *pParse, Window *pList, /* List of named windows for this SELECT */ Window *pWin, /* Window frame to update */ FuncDef *pFunc /* Window function definition */ ){ if( pWin->zName && pWin->eFrmType==0 ){ Window *p = windowFind(pParse, pList, pWin->zName); if( p==0 ) return; pWin->pPartition = sqlite3ExprListDup(pParse->db, p->pPartition, 0); pWin->pOrderBy = sqlite3ExprListDup(pParse->db, p->pOrderBy, 0); pWin->pStart = sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, p->pStart, 0); pWin->pEnd = sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, p->pEnd, 0); pWin->eStart = p->eStart; pWin->eEnd = p->eEnd; pWin->eFrmType = p->eFrmType; pWin->eExclude = p->eExclude; }else{ sqlite3WindowChain(pParse, pWin, pList); } if( (pWin->eFrmType==TK_RANGE) && (pWin->pStart || pWin->pEnd) && (pWin->pOrderBy==0 || pWin->pOrderBy->nExpr!=1) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "RANGE with offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING requires one ORDER BY expression" ); }else if( pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( pWin->pFilter ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "FILTER clause may only be used with aggregate window functions" ); }else{ struct WindowUpdate { const char *zFunc; int eFrmType; int eStart; int eEnd; } aUp[] = { { row_numberName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, { dense_rankName, TK_RANGE, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, { rankName, TK_RANGE, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, { percent_rankName, TK_GROUPS, TK_CURRENT, TK_UNBOUNDED }, { cume_distName, TK_GROUPS, TK_FOLLOWING, TK_UNBOUNDED }, { ntileName, TK_ROWS, TK_CURRENT, TK_UNBOUNDED }, { leadName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_UNBOUNDED }, { lagName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT }, }; int i; for(i=0; i<ArraySize(aUp); i++){ if( pFunc->zName==aUp[i].zFunc ){ sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWin->pStart); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWin->pEnd); pWin->pEnd = pWin->pStart = 0; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
738 739 740 741 742 743 744 | ExprList *pSub; Table *pTab; Select *pSubSelect; /* Current sub-select, if any */ }; /* ** Callback function used by selectWindowRewriteEList(). If necessary, | | | 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 | ExprList *pSub; Table *pTab; Select *pSubSelect; /* Current sub-select, if any */ }; /* ** Callback function used by selectWindowRewriteEList(). If necessary, ** this function appends to the output expression-list and updates ** expression (*ppExpr) in place. */ static int selectWindowRewriteExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ struct WindowRewrite *p = pWalker->u.pRewrite; Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse; assert( p!=0 ); assert( p->pWin!=0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
843 844 845 846 847 848 849 | /* ** Iterate through each expression in expression-list pEList. For each: ** ** * TK_COLUMN, ** * aggregate function, or | | | | | 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 | /* ** Iterate through each expression in expression-list pEList. For each: ** ** * TK_COLUMN, ** * aggregate function, or ** * window function with a Window object that is not a member of the ** Window list passed as the second argument (pWin). ** ** Append the node to output expression-list (*ppSub). And replace it ** with a TK_COLUMN that reads the (N-1)th element of table ** pWin->iEphCsr, where N is the number of elements in (*ppSub) after ** appending the new one. */ static void selectWindowRewriteEList( Parse *pParse, Window *pWin, SrcList *pSrc, ExprList *pEList, /* Rewrite expressions in this list */ Table *pTab, ExprList **ppSub /* IN/OUT: Sub-select expression-list */ ){ Walker sWalker; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
946 947 948 949 950 951 952 | "misuse of aggregate: %s()", pExpr->u.zToken); } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** If the SELECT statement passed as the second argument does not invoke | | | 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 | "misuse of aggregate: %s()", pExpr->u.zToken); } return WRC_Continue; } /* ** If the SELECT statement passed as the second argument does not invoke ** any SQL window functions, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it ** rewrites the SELECT statement so that window function xStep functions ** are invoked in the correct order as described under "SELECT REWRITING" ** at the top of this file. */ int sqlite3WindowRewrite(Parse *pParse, Select *p){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( p->pWin |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 | pMWin->iEphCsr = pParse->nTab++; pParse->nTab += 3; selectWindowRewriteEList(pParse, pMWin, pSrc, p->pEList, pTab, &pSublist); selectWindowRewriteEList(pParse, pMWin, pSrc, p->pOrderBy, pTab, &pSublist); pMWin->nBufferCol = (pSublist ? pSublist->nExpr : 0); | | | | 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 | pMWin->iEphCsr = pParse->nTab++; pParse->nTab += 3; selectWindowRewriteEList(pParse, pMWin, pSrc, p->pEList, pTab, &pSublist); selectWindowRewriteEList(pParse, pMWin, pSrc, p->pOrderBy, pTab, &pSublist); pMWin->nBufferCol = (pSublist ? pSublist->nExpr : 0); /* Append the PARTITION BY and ORDER BY expressions to the to the ** sub-select expression list. They are required to figure out where ** boundaries for partitions and sets of peer rows lie. */ pSublist = exprListAppendList(pParse, pSublist, pMWin->pPartition, 0); pSublist = exprListAppendList(pParse, pSublist, pMWin->pOrderBy, 0); /* Append the arguments passed to each window function to the ** sub-select expression list. Also allocate two registers for each ** window function - one for the accumulator, another for interim |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 | pWin->regResult = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regAccum); } /* If there is no ORDER BY or PARTITION BY clause, and the window ** function accepts zero arguments, and there are no other columns ** selected (e.g. "SELECT row_number() OVER () FROM t1"), it is possible | | | | | 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 | pWin->regResult = ++pParse->nMem; sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regAccum); } /* If there is no ORDER BY or PARTITION BY clause, and the window ** function accepts zero arguments, and there are no other columns ** selected (e.g. "SELECT row_number() OVER () FROM t1"), it is possible ** that pSublist is still NULL here. Add a constant expression here to ** keep everything legal in this case. */ if( pSublist==0 ){ pSublist = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, sqlite3Expr(db, TK_INTEGER, "0") ); } pSub = sqlite3SelectNew( pParse, pSublist, pSrc, pWhere, pGroupBy, pHaving, pSort, 0, 0 ); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 | /* ** Attach PARTITION and ORDER BY clauses pPartition and pOrderBy to window ** pWin. Also, if parameter pBase is not NULL, set pWin->zBase to the ** equivalent nul-terminated string. */ Window *sqlite3WindowAssemble( | | | | | | | | 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 | /* ** Attach PARTITION and ORDER BY clauses pPartition and pOrderBy to window ** pWin. Also, if parameter pBase is not NULL, set pWin->zBase to the ** equivalent nul-terminated string. */ Window *sqlite3WindowAssemble( Parse *pParse, Window *pWin, ExprList *pPartition, ExprList *pOrderBy, Token *pBase ){ if( pWin ){ pWin->pPartition = pPartition; pWin->pOrderBy = pOrderBy; if( pBase ){ pWin->zBase = sqlite3DbStrNDup(pParse->db, pBase->z, pBase->n); } }else{ sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pPartition); sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pOrderBy); } return pWin; } /* ** Window *pWin has just been created from a WINDOW clause. Token pBase ** is the base window. Earlier windows from the same WINDOW clause are ** stored in the linked list starting at pWin->pNextWin. This function ** either updates *pWin according to the base specification, or else ** leaves an error in pParse. */ void sqlite3WindowChain(Parse *pParse, Window *pWin, Window *pList){ if( pWin->zBase ){ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; Window *pExist = windowFind(pParse, pList, pWin->zBase); if( pExist ){ const char *zErr = 0; /* Check for errors */ if( pWin->pPartition ){ zErr = "PARTITION clause"; }else if( pExist->pOrderBy && pWin->pOrderBy ){ zErr = "ORDER BY clause"; }else if( pExist->bImplicitFrame==0 ){ zErr = "frame specification"; } if( zErr ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot override %s of window: %s", zErr, pWin->zBase ); }else{ pWin->pPartition = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pExist->pPartition, 0); if( pExist->pOrderBy ){ assert( pWin->pOrderBy==0 ); pWin->pOrderBy = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pExist->pOrderBy, 0); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 | */ struct WindowCsrAndReg { int csr; /* Cursor number */ int reg; /* First in array of peer values */ }; /* | | | 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 | */ struct WindowCsrAndReg { int csr; /* Cursor number */ int reg; /* First in array of peer values */ }; /* ** A single instance of this structure is allocated on the stack by ** sqlite3WindowCodeStep() and a pointer to it passed to the various helper ** routines. This is to reduce the number of arguments required by each ** helper function. ** ** regArg: ** Each window function requires an accumulator register (just as an ** ordinary aggregate function does). This variable is set to the first |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 | ** callbacks have been invoked in it. ** ** start,current,end ** Consider a window-frame similar to the following: ** ** (ORDER BY a, b GROUPS BETWEEN 2 PRECEDING AND 2 FOLLOWING) ** | | | | 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 | ** callbacks have been invoked in it. ** ** start,current,end ** Consider a window-frame similar to the following: ** ** (ORDER BY a, b GROUPS BETWEEN 2 PRECEDING AND 2 FOLLOWING) ** ** The windows functions implementation caches the input rows in a temp ** table, sorted by "a, b" (it actually populates the cache lazily, and ** aggressively removes rows once they are no longer required, but that's ** a mere detail). It keeps three cursors open on the temp table. One ** (current) that points to the next row to return to the query engine ** once its window function values have been calculated. Another (end) ** points to the next row to call the xStep() method of each window function ** on (so that it is 2 groups ahead of current). And a third (start) that ** points to the next row to call the xInverse() method of each window ** function on. ** ** Each cursor (start, current and end) consists of a VDBE cursor ** (WindowCsrAndReg.csr) and an array of registers (starting at ** WindowCodeArg.reg) that always contains a copy of the peer values ** read from the corresponding cursor. ** ** Depending on the window-frame in question, all three cursors may not ** be required. In this case both WindowCodeArg.csr and reg are set to ** 0. */ struct WindowCodeArg { |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 | for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, iColOff+i, reg+i); } } } /* | | | | 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 | for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, iColOff+i, reg+i); } } } /* ** Generate VM code to invoke either xStep() (if bInverse is 0) or ** xInverse (if bInverse is non-zero) for each window function in the ** linked list starting at pMWin. Or, for built-in window functions ** that do not use the standard function API, generate the required ** inline VM code. ** ** If argument csr is greater than or equal to 0, then argument reg is ** the first register in an array of registers guaranteed to be large ** enough to hold the array of arguments for each function. In this case |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 | }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, pMWin->iEphCsr, pWin->iArgCol+i, reg+i); } } regArg = reg; if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0 | | | 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 | }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, pMWin->iEphCsr, pWin->iArgCol+i, reg+i); } } regArg = reg; if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0 && (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX) && (pWin->eStart!=TK_UNBOUNDED) ){ int addrIsNull = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IsNull, regArg); VdbeCoverage(v); if( bInverse==0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, pWin->regApp+1, 1); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regArg, pWin->regApp); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 | assert( pWin->bExprArgs || nArg ||pWin->pOwner->x.pList==0 ); regTmp = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, pWin->iArgCol+nArg,regTmp); addrIf = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfNot, regTmp, 0, 1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTmp); } | | | 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 | assert( pWin->bExprArgs || nArg ||pWin->pOwner->x.pList==0 ); regTmp = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, pWin->iArgCol+nArg,regTmp); addrIf = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfNot, regTmp, 0, 1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTmp); } if( pWin->bExprArgs ){ int iOp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); int iEnd; assert( ExprUseXList(pWin->pOwner) ); nArg = pWin->pOwner->x.pList->nExpr; regArg = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nArg); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 | if( pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){ CollSeq *pColl; assert( nArg>0 ); assert( ExprUseXList(pWin->pOwner) ); pColl = sqlite3ExprNNCollSeq(pParse, pWin->pOwner->x.pList->a[0].pExpr); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0,0,0, (const char*)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ); } | | | 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 | if( pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){ CollSeq *pColl; assert( nArg>0 ); assert( ExprUseXList(pWin->pOwner) ); pColl = sqlite3ExprNNCollSeq(pParse, pWin->pOwner->x.pList->a[0].pExpr); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0,0,0, (const char*)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, bInverse? OP_AggInverse : OP_AggStep, bInverse, regArg, pWin->regAccum); sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, pFunc, P4_FUNCDEF); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, (u8)nArg); if( pWin->bExprArgs ){ sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regArg, nArg); } if( addrIf ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrIf); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 | Parse *pParse = p->pParse; Window *pMWin = p->pMWin; Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); Window *pWin; for(pWin=pMWin; pWin; pWin=pWin->pNextWin){ if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0 | | | 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 | Parse *pParse = p->pParse; Window *pMWin = p->pMWin; Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); Window *pWin; for(pWin=pMWin; pWin; pWin=pWin->pNextWin){ if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0 && (pWin->pWFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX) && (pWin->eStart!=TK_UNBOUNDED) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult); sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Last, pWin->csrApp); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, pWin->csrApp, 0, pWin->regResult); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-2); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 | if( pFunc->zName==nth_valueName || pFunc->zName==first_valueName ){ int csr = pWin->csrApp; int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult); | | | 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 | if( pFunc->zName==nth_valueName || pFunc->zName==first_valueName ){ int csr = pWin->csrApp; int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult); if( pFunc->zName==nth_valueName ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column,pMWin->iEphCsr,pWin->iArgCol+1,tmpReg); windowCheckValue(pParse, tmpReg, 2); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, tmpReg); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Add, tmpReg, pWin->regApp, tmpReg); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 | } else if( pFunc->zName==leadName || pFunc->zName==lagName ){ int nArg = pWin->pOwner->x.pList->nExpr; int csr = pWin->csrApp; int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); int iEph = pMWin->iEphCsr; | | | | 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 | } else if( pFunc->zName==leadName || pFunc->zName==lagName ){ int nArg = pWin->pOwner->x.pList->nExpr; int csr = pWin->csrApp; int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); int iEph = pMWin->iEphCsr; if( nArg<3 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iEph,pWin->iArgCol+2,pWin->regResult); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rowid, iEph, tmpReg); if( nArg<2 ){ int val = (pFunc->zName==leadName ? 1 : -1); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, tmpReg, val); }else{ int op = (pFunc->zName==leadName ? OP_Add : OP_Subtract); int tmpReg2 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iEph, pWin->iArgCol+1, tmpReg2); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, op, tmpReg2, tmpReg, tmpReg); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, tmpReg2); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, csr, lbl, tmpReg); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, pWin->iArgCol, pWin->regResult); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, lbl); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, tmpReg); } } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 | } } regArg = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nArg; return regArg; } | | | 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 | } } regArg = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nArg; return regArg; } /* ** Return true if the current frame should be cached in the ephemeral table, ** even if there are no xInverse() calls required. */ static int windowCacheFrame(Window *pMWin){ Window *pWin; if( pMWin->regStartRowid ) return 1; for(pWin=pMWin; pWin; pWin=pWin->pNextWin){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 | return 0; } /* ** regOld and regNew are each the first register in an array of size ** pOrderBy->nExpr. This function generates code to compare the two ** arrays of registers using the collation sequences and other comparison | | | | | 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 | return 0; } /* ** regOld and regNew are each the first register in an array of size ** pOrderBy->nExpr. This function generates code to compare the two ** arrays of registers using the collation sequences and other comparison ** parameters specified by pOrderBy. ** ** If the two arrays are not equal, the contents of regNew is copied to ** regOld and control falls through. Otherwise, if the contents of the arrays ** are equal, an OP_Goto is executed. The address of the OP_Goto is returned. */ static void windowIfNewPeer( Parse *pParse, ExprList *pOrderBy, int regNew, /* First in array of new values */ int regOld, /* First in array of old values */ int addr /* Jump here */ ){ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( pOrderBy ){ int nVal = pOrderBy->nExpr; KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pOrderBy, 0, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Compare, regOld, regNew, nVal); sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, (void*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1, addr, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1 ); VdbeCoverageEqNe(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Copy, regNew, regOld, nVal-1); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, addr); } |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 | ** if( csr1.peerVal - regVal <= csr2.peerVal ) goto lbl; ** ** A special type of arithmetic is used such that if csr1.peerVal is not ** a numeric type (real or integer), then the result of the addition ** or subtraction is a a copy of csr1.peerVal. */ static void windowCodeRangeTest( | | | 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 | ** if( csr1.peerVal - regVal <= csr2.peerVal ) goto lbl; ** ** A special type of arithmetic is used such that if csr1.peerVal is not ** a numeric type (real or integer), then the result of the addition ** or subtraction is a a copy of csr1.peerVal. */ static void windowCodeRangeTest( WindowCodeArg *p, int op, /* OP_Ge, OP_Gt, or OP_Le */ int csr1, /* Cursor number for cursor 1 */ int regVal, /* Register containing non-negative number */ int csr2, /* Cursor number for cursor 2 */ int lbl /* Jump destination if condition is true */ ){ Parse *pParse = p->pParse; |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 | } VdbeModuleComment((v, "CodeRangeTest: if( R%d %s R%d %s R%d ) goto lbl", reg1, (arith==OP_Add ? "+" : "-"), regVal, ((op==OP_Ge) ? ">=" : (op==OP_Le) ? "<=" : (op==OP_Gt) ? ">" : "<"), reg2 )); | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 | } VdbeModuleComment((v, "CodeRangeTest: if( R%d %s R%d %s R%d ) goto lbl", reg1, (arith==OP_Add ? "+" : "-"), regVal, ((op==OP_Ge) ? ">=" : (op==OP_Le) ? "<=" : (op==OP_Gt) ? ">" : "<"), reg2 )); /* If the BIGNULL flag is set for the ORDER BY, then it is required to ** consider NULL values to be larger than all other values, instead of ** the usual smaller. The VDBE opcodes OP_Ge and so on do not handle this ** (and adding that capability causes a performance regression), so ** instead if the BIGNULL flag is set then cases where either reg1 or ** reg2 are NULL are handled separately in the following block. The code ** generated is equivalent to: ** ** if( reg1 IS NULL ){ ** if( op==OP_Ge ) goto lbl; ** if( op==OP_Gt && reg2 IS NOT NULL ) goto lbl; ** if( op==OP_Le && reg2 IS NULL ) goto lbl; ** }else if( reg2 IS NULL ){ ** if( op==OP_Le ) goto lbl; ** } ** ** Additionally, if either reg1 or reg2 are NULL but the jump to lbl is ** not taken, control jumps over the comparison operator coded below this ** block. */ if( pOrderBy->a[0].fg.sortFlags & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL ){ /* This block runs if reg1 contains a NULL. */ int addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NotNull, reg1); VdbeCoverage(v); switch( op ){ case OP_Ge: sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, lbl); break; case OP_Gt: sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, reg2, lbl); VdbeCoverage(v); break; case OP_Le: sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, reg2, lbl); VdbeCoverage(v); break; default: assert( op==OP_Lt ); /* no-op */ break; } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, addrDone); /* This block runs if reg1 is not NULL, but reg2 is. */ sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 | sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, reg2); VdbeModuleComment((v, "CodeRangeTest: end")); } /* ** Helper function for sqlite3WindowCodeStep(). Each call to this function | | | 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 | sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, reg2); VdbeModuleComment((v, "CodeRangeTest: end")); } /* ** Helper function for sqlite3WindowCodeStep(). Each call to this function ** generates VM code for a single RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or AGGINVERSE ** operation. Refer to the header comment for sqlite3WindowCodeStep() for ** details. */ static int windowCodeOp( WindowCodeArg *p, /* Context object */ int op, /* WINDOW_RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or AGGINVERSE */ int regCountdown, /* Register for OP_IfPos countdown */ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 | if( op==WINDOW_RETURN_ROW && pMWin->regStartRowid==0 ){ windowAggFinal(p, 0); } addrContinue = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); /* If this is a (RANGE BETWEEN a FOLLOWING AND b FOLLOWING) or | | | | 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 | if( op==WINDOW_RETURN_ROW && pMWin->regStartRowid==0 ){ windowAggFinal(p, 0); } addrContinue = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); /* If this is a (RANGE BETWEEN a FOLLOWING AND b FOLLOWING) or ** (RANGE BETWEEN b PRECEDING AND a PRECEDING) frame, ensure the ** start cursor does not advance past the end cursor within the ** temporary table. It otherwise might, if (a>b). Also ensure that, ** if the input cursor is still finding new rows, that the end ** cursor does not go past it to EOF. */ if( pMWin->eStart==pMWin->eEnd && regCountdown && pMWin->eFrmType==TK_RANGE ){ int regRowid1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 | pp = &((*pp)->pNextWin); } return pRet; } /* | | | | | | | | | | | 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 | pp = &((*pp)->pNextWin); } return pRet; } /* ** Return true if it can be determined at compile time that expression ** pExpr evaluates to a value that, when cast to an integer, is greater ** than zero. False otherwise. ** ** If an OOM error occurs, this function sets the Parse.db.mallocFailed ** flag and returns zero. */ static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ int ret = 0; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; sqlite3_value *pVal = 0; sqlite3ValueFromExpr(db, pExpr, db->enc, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, &pVal); if( pVal && sqlite3_value_int(pVal)>0 ){ ret = 1; } sqlite3ValueFree(pVal); return ret; } /* ** sqlite3WhereBegin() has already been called for the SELECT statement ** passed as the second argument when this function is invoked. It generates ** code to populate the Window.regResult register for each window function ** and invoke the sub-routine at instruction addrGosub once for each row. ** sqlite3WhereEnd() is always called before returning. ** ** This function handles several different types of window frames, which ** require slightly different processing. The following pseudo code is ** used to implement window frames of the form: ** ** ROWS BETWEEN <expr1> PRECEDING AND <expr2> FOLLOWING ** ** Other window frame types use variants of the following: ** ** ... loop started by sqlite3WhereBegin() ... ** if( new partition ){ ** Gosub flush ** } ** Insert new row into eph table. ** ** if( first row of partition ){ ** // Rewind three cursors, all open on the eph table. ** Rewind(csrEnd); ** Rewind(csrStart); ** Rewind(csrCurrent); ** ** regEnd = <expr2> // FOLLOWING expression ** regStart = <expr1> // PRECEDING expression ** }else{ ** // First time this branch is taken, the eph table contains two ** // rows. The first row in the partition, which all three cursors ** // currently point to, and the following row. ** AGGSTEP ** if( (regEnd--)<=0 ){ ** RETURN_ROW ** if( (regStart--)<=0 ){ ** AGGINVERSE |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 | ** ** The pseudo-code above uses the following shorthand: ** ** AGGSTEP: invoke the aggregate xStep() function for each window function ** with arguments read from the current row of cursor csrEnd, then ** step cursor csrEnd forward one row (i.e. sqlite3BtreeNext()). ** | | | | | | 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 | ** ** The pseudo-code above uses the following shorthand: ** ** AGGSTEP: invoke the aggregate xStep() function for each window function ** with arguments read from the current row of cursor csrEnd, then ** step cursor csrEnd forward one row (i.e. sqlite3BtreeNext()). ** ** RETURN_ROW: return a row to the caller based on the contents of the ** current row of csrCurrent and the current state of all ** aggregates. Then step cursor csrCurrent forward one row. ** ** AGGINVERSE: invoke the aggregate xInverse() function for each window ** functions with arguments read from the current row of cursor ** csrStart. Then step csrStart forward one row. ** ** There are two other ROWS window frames that are handled significantly ** differently from the above - "BETWEEN <expr> PRECEDING AND <expr> PRECEDING" ** and "BETWEEN <expr> FOLLOWING AND <expr> FOLLOWING". These are special ** cases because they change the order in which the three cursors (csrStart, ** csrCurrent and csrEnd) iterate through the ephemeral table. Cases that ** use UNBOUNDED or CURRENT ROW are much simpler variations on one of these ** three. ** ** ROWS BETWEEN <expr1> PRECEDING AND <expr2> PRECEDING ** |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 | ** } ** while( !eof csrCurrent ){ ** RETURN_ROW ** } ** ** For the most part, the patterns above are adapted to support UNBOUNDED by ** assuming that it is equivalent to "infinity PRECEDING/FOLLOWING" and | | | 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 | ** } ** while( !eof csrCurrent ){ ** RETURN_ROW ** } ** ** For the most part, the patterns above are adapted to support UNBOUNDED by ** assuming that it is equivalent to "infinity PRECEDING/FOLLOWING" and ** CURRENT ROW by assuming that it is equivalent to "0 PRECEDING/FOLLOWING". ** This is optimized of course - branches that will never be taken and ** conditions that are always true are omitted from the VM code. The only ** exceptional case is: ** ** ROWS BETWEEN <expr1> FOLLOWING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING ** ** ... loop started by sqlite3WhereBegin() ... |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 | ** } ** Insert new row into eph table. ** if( first row of partition ){ ** Rewind(csrEnd) ; Rewind(csrStart) ; Rewind(csrCurrent) ** regEnd = <expr2> ** regStart = <expr1> ** }else if( new group ){ | | | | | 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 | ** } ** Insert new row into eph table. ** if( first row of partition ){ ** Rewind(csrEnd) ; Rewind(csrStart) ; Rewind(csrCurrent) ** regEnd = <expr2> ** regStart = <expr1> ** }else if( new group ){ ** ... ** } ** } ** ** 2. Instead of processing a single row, each RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or ** AGGINVERSE step processes the current row of the relevant cursor and ** all subsequent rows belonging to the same group. ** ** RANGE window frames are a little different again. As for GROUPS, the ** main loop runs once per group only. And RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP and AGGINVERSE ** deal in groups instead of rows. As for ROWS and GROUPS, there are three ** basic cases: ** ** RANGE BETWEEN <expr1> PRECEDING AND <expr2> FOLLOWING ** ** ... loop started by sqlite3WhereBegin() ... |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 | ** if( csrCurrent is EOF ) break; ** while( csrStart.key + regStart) < csrCurrent.key ){ ** AGGINVERSE ** } ** } ** } ** | | | 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 | ** if( csrCurrent is EOF ) break; ** while( csrStart.key + regStart) < csrCurrent.key ){ ** AGGINVERSE ** } ** } ** } ** ** In the above notation, "csr.key" means the current value of the ORDER BY ** expression (there is only ever 1 for a RANGE that uses an <expr> FOLLOWING ** or <expr PRECEDING) read from cursor csr. ** ** RANGE BETWEEN <expr1> PRECEDING AND <expr2> PRECEDING ** ** ... loop started by sqlite3WhereBegin() ... ** if( new partition ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 | int regPeer = 0; /* Peer values for current row */ int regFlushPart = 0; /* Register for "Gosub flush_partition" */ WindowCodeArg s; /* Context object for sub-routines */ int lblWhereEnd; /* Label just before sqlite3WhereEnd() code */ int regStart = 0; /* Value of <expr> PRECEDING */ int regEnd = 0; /* Value of <expr> FOLLOWING */ | | | | | | 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 | int regPeer = 0; /* Peer values for current row */ int regFlushPart = 0; /* Register for "Gosub flush_partition" */ WindowCodeArg s; /* Context object for sub-routines */ int lblWhereEnd; /* Label just before sqlite3WhereEnd() code */ int regStart = 0; /* Value of <expr> PRECEDING */ int regEnd = 0; /* Value of <expr> FOLLOWING */ assert( pMWin->eStart==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eStart==TK_CURRENT || pMWin->eStart==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eStart==TK_UNBOUNDED ); assert( pMWin->eEnd==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eEnd==TK_CURRENT || pMWin->eEnd==TK_UNBOUNDED || pMWin->eEnd==TK_PRECEDING ); assert( pMWin->eExclude==0 || pMWin->eExclude==TK_CURRENT || pMWin->eExclude==TK_GROUP || pMWin->eExclude==TK_TIES || pMWin->eExclude==TK_NO ); lblWhereEnd = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse); |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 | s.addrGosub = addrGosub; s.current.csr = pMWin->iEphCsr; csrWrite = s.current.csr+1; s.start.csr = s.current.csr+2; s.end.csr = s.current.csr+3; /* Figure out when rows may be deleted from the ephemeral table. There | | | | 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 | s.addrGosub = addrGosub; s.current.csr = pMWin->iEphCsr; csrWrite = s.current.csr+1; s.start.csr = s.current.csr+2; s.end.csr = s.current.csr+3; /* Figure out when rows may be deleted from the ephemeral table. There ** are four options - they may never be deleted (eDelete==0), they may ** be deleted as soon as they are no longer part of the window frame ** (eDelete==WINDOW_AGGINVERSE), they may be deleted as after the row ** has been returned to the caller (WINDOW_RETURN_ROW), or they may ** be deleted after they enter the frame (WINDOW_AGGSTEP). */ switch( pMWin->eStart ){ case TK_FOLLOWING: if( pMWin->eFrmType!=TK_RANGE && windowExprGtZero(pParse, pMWin->pStart) ){ |
︙ | ︙ | |||
2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 | break; default: s.eDelete = WINDOW_AGGINVERSE; break; } /* Allocate registers for the array of values from the sub-query, the | | | | | 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 | break; default: s.eDelete = WINDOW_AGGINVERSE; break; } /* Allocate registers for the array of values from the sub-query, the ** same values in record form, and the rowid used to insert said record ** into the ephemeral table. */ regNew = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nInput; regRecord = ++pParse->nMem; s.regRowid = ++pParse->nMem; /* If the window frame contains an "<expr> PRECEDING" or "<expr> FOLLOWING" ** clause, allocate registers to store the results of evaluating each ** <expr>. */ if( pMWin->eStart==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eStart==TK_FOLLOWING ){ regStart = ++pParse->nMem; } if( pMWin->eEnd==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eEnd==TK_FOLLOWING ){ regEnd = ++pParse->nMem; } /* If this is not a "ROWS BETWEEN ..." frame, then allocate arrays of ** registers to store copies of the ORDER BY expressions (peer values) ** for the main loop, and for each cursor (start, current and end). */ if( pMWin->eFrmType!=TK_ROWS ){ int nPeer = (pOrderBy ? pOrderBy->nExpr : 0); regNewPeer = regNew + pMWin->nBufferCol; if( pMWin->pPartition ) regNewPeer += pMWin->pPartition->nExpr; regPeer = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nPeer; s.start.reg = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nPeer; s.current.reg = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nPeer; s.end.reg = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += nPeer; } /* Load the column values for the row returned by the sub-select ** into an array of registers starting at regNew. Assemble them into ** a record in register regRecord. */ for(iInput=0; iInput<nInput; iInput++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csrInput, iInput, regNew+iInput); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, regNew, nInput, regRecord); /* An input row has just been read into an array of registers starting ** at regNew. If the window has a PARTITION clause, this block generates ** VM code to check if the input row is the start of a new partition. ** If so, it does an OP_Gosub to an address to be filled in later. The ** address of the OP_Gosub is stored in local variable addrGosubFlush. */ if( pMWin->pPartition ){ int addr; ExprList *pPart = pMWin->pPartition; int nPart = pPart->nExpr; |
︙ | ︙ |
Added tool/custom.txt.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 | aa aaa abc abcdefg abd abf Abortable acc accessor accum acd activecpu Adaptor Additionallly addop addoptrace addr adjustements af aff afp afterward Agg agg agginfo alikes Alloc alloc alloca allocator allocators alphabetics alphanumerics alternateform altertab altform amalgamator amongst analyse antipenultimate ap api appdef appendall appendchar appendf ar arg argc argcount arglist argn args argv arrayname ascii asm async atoi atomics auth authorizer autocheckpoint autocommit autoconf autoext autoextension autoinc autoincrement autoincremented autoindex autoinstall autovac autovacuum autovacuumed autovacuuming auxdata awk Ax backend backends backfill backfilled backfilling backtrace backtraces backtracing bb bba bcb bcc beginthreadex behavior behavioral behaviors benigncnt bg bigblob bitcount bitfield bitmask bitmasks bitset bitvec bitvecs bitwise blobwrite blockquote Bloomfilter bom boolean booleans Borland br breadthfirstsearch breakpoint bt btree btrees buf bufpt butoindex bytearray bytecode bytecodevtab byteorder cacheflush cachegrind Cachesize calc'ing callgrind cardinalities cardinality carray cb cd cdbaa ce ceil cellpadding cellspacing center chacha changecounter changeset characgter characterset checkpointed Checkpointer checkpointer checkpointers checkpointing checksummed checksums chmod chng chown chroot chsize chunksize cid cis ckalloc'd ckpt cksum cksumvfs clientdata closedir clownshoe cmd cmp cmpaff Cmpr cnt codec codepage collseq colname compileoption concat config confstr connetion consective considertion const coredump coroutine coroutines cov crashparams csr csv Cte ctime Ctrl ctrl ctx ctype cume Cx cx Cygwin cygwin dan darkstar databasename databse datasource datatypes datetime dbfuzz dbinfo dbname dbpage dbpagevfs dbs dbsize dbsqlfuzz dbstat dbtotxt De de deadman deallocate deallocated deallocates deallocating deallocation decltype decrementing defense defenses defn defragment defragmentation defragmented deinitialization Deinitialize deinitialize demovfs dependences dequote dequoted dequoting dereferenced dereferences desc deserialization deserialize deserialized deserializes deserializing dest destructor destructors deterministically dev devsim devsym df Dfdatasync dflt dir directonly dirent dirs disjunct disjunction disjuncts diskfull divy dl dll dlopen dlsym docid docids dont dontcache dotfile dotlock doublearray drh dryrun dstr dt Duint dup Durian dword Dx dylib Dyn Ec ec ecel editability ef efc eg Ei elif emcc emscripten encodings endeavor endfor endian endianness endif endthreadex enum eof eph Ephem eq eqp equaling equalities errcode errmsg errno errorcode erroroffset errstr esc esign et etfs etilqs eval exe expander explainer expmask expr exprlist extern fakeheap fallocate fanout faultsim favor favors fb fc fchmod fchown fclose fcntl fd fdatasync feb fef Feijoa ferror ffff ffffeff ffffffe fffffff ffffffff fffffffffffffff fflush fg fgets fi fibonacci fid Fifo filecount filectrl filemapping filesize filesystem filesystems finalised finalizer findfirst findnext fixup fk fkctr fkey flattener fmt fopen foreach formatter fprintf fputs fread fred fred's freeblock freeblocks freelist freepage freespace frombind fs fsanitize fsctl fsdir fseek fstat fstree fsync fsynced fsyncs ftell ftruncate fts fullfsync fullname fullschema fullshm fullsync fullsyncs func funcs fuzzer fuzzers fwrite Fx gcc gcov gdb getcwd getenv gethostuuid getpagesize getpid getrusage getsubtype getter getters gibabyte gid glibc globbing gmtime Gosub Goto goto groupbyparent Groupid growable grp hdl hdr hexdb hexdouble hexio highwater hijklmno honor honored honoring hostid href html htsize hw Hwtime icecube ideographical idx idxaff idxnum idxstr idx'th ieee ifdef iff ifndef imm impl incr incrblob incrementing indexable indexname infop ing init initfail initializer initializers initiallly inlined inlines inlining ino inode inodes inopertune installable intarray inteface interoperate interp interpretable intkey intptr intreal intrinsics invalidations invariants io ioerr iotrace ipk iplan isalnum isalpha isatty isdigit isempty isexplain ismemdb isnan isspace isxdigit i'th iversion jfd jj jointype jointypes journaled journaling journalled journalling journalmode jrnl jsl json jt julian julianday keyinfo keywordhash kibibytes kvstorage kvvfs lappend lasterrno lbl ldl le leafdata leftjustify len leveling lexeme lexemes lhs li libm libversion lifecycle lindex lineno Linenoise linux lised lld llvm lm ln lncurses loadext localhost localtime lockd lockdata lockingcontext lockless lockproxy locktype logmsg longvalue longwords lookahead Lookaside lookaside lookups losslessly lpthread lrc lreadline lru lseek lt lvalue lwr makefile makefiles malloc malloc'd malloced mallocs manditory manpage matchinfo materializations mathfuncs maxsize mbcs Mcafee md Meeus mem memcmp memcpy memdb memdebug memget memmove mempool memset memstatus memsys memvfs mergeable mergepatch middleware millisec mincore mingw mis miscoded mj mkctimec mkdir mkkeywordhash mkopcodec mkopcodeh mkpragmatab mmap mmapped mno modeof Movepage mprintf msd msdos msec msg msgs msize msvc mtime mult multibyte multiplex'ed multiplexor multithreaded multiwrite mutex mutexes mutexing mx mxpathname myprefix nal namecontext namespace natively nbr nbsp ncell ncol ncycle nd ndlt neighbors neq nestable newrowid nfs nlt nnn nocase nochange nochng nofollow nolock nomem nomutex nonblocking nonroot noop noshm notational notheld notnull nowrap nr ntile nul nullable nullif nullvalue Num objproc oc offsetof ofst ogham oid Ok ok ol onecolumn onepass onoff onwards oom opcodesnever openable opendir optimizers optimizible orconf orderby orderbylist os Oswrite overread overreads overrideable oversize overwriteable ovewrite ovfl pagecache pagecaches pagecount pagelist pageno pagesize pagetype Param params passwd patchset pathname pathnames pc pcache pclose pcx pgno pgoffset pgsize pgsz pid pluggable pmasz pn popen pos posix Postgres Powersafe powersafe pq pqr pqrstuvw pragma pragmaed pragma's pragmas pre pread preallocate preallocated precisions precompiled precomputed prefetch prefetched preformated preformatted prepend prepended prepending prepends prepopulate preprocess preprocessed preprocessing preprocessor prereq prereqs preupdate primarykey printf printfs prng proc procs profiler proleptic proxying proxys pseudocode pseudotable psow psz pthread pthreads ptr ptrmap ptrs purgeable putsnl pwrite pz qbox Qcircle quotaed quotefix radix randomblob randstr rarr rc rcauth Rcvr rds readdir readline readlock readonly Readr realloc reallocs realvalue rebalance rebalanced recoverability redefinable redux reenabled reentrant refcount refcounts regs reindexed reinitializer reinitializes rekey rekeyed relevancies relink relink relock renormalize reoptimize reparse reparse reparsed reparsing reportable reprepare reprepare reprepared reprepares representable repurpose Req'd requeries requote reregister reseek reservebytes resumable retarget retargeted retrys returntype rfc rhs Ri Rivest ro rootpage rowid rowids Rowkey rownumber rowset runtime rw rwc samplelib sampleno sandboxed sandboxing savepoint savepoints scanf scanstats scanstatus schemas sectorsize selecttrace selftest setrlimit setsubtype settitle sharable shm shmlock sibs sig signaling significand sizehint Sizeof sizeof snprintf Solaris sorterref soundex sourceid speedtest sprintf sql sqlar sqlite sqliteplocks sqliterc sqllog sqllogglobal sqlthread sqr sqrt src srcck statfs stderr stdin stdout stmt stmts str strace strcasecmp strcmp strdup strerror strftime strglob stricmp stringify strlen strlike strncmp strncpy strnicmp stronly strstr struct structs subbitmap subcases subclassed subclauses subcomponents subdirectory subelement subexpression subexpressions subfunction subfunctions subitem subjournals sublevels subnode suboptimal subpages subprocedures subprog subprogs subq subqueries subquery Subrtn subsec subsecond subsequence substr substring substrings subsubstructure subsubterms Subtask subtasks subterm subterms subtransaction subtransactions subtree subtrees subtype subtypes sumint superclass superlock superset superunlock symlinks synching sys syscall sz szosfile tablename tailval tailvar tbl tblname Tcl tcl Tclcmd tclcmd tclsh tclsqlite tclvar td tempfilename testcase testctrl testfixture testtag testvfs textarray th threadid threadsafe threadsafety throughs tht timediff tkt tm tmp tmpdir tmpfs tnum Todo tokenize tokenizer tokenizing tolower toobig toupper treetrace treeview trimleft trimright truesize trys Tsd Ts'o tunable tvfs txn txt Typecheck typedef typedefed typedefs typename typenames typeof tz uber uid uint ul umask Un un unallocated unanalyzed unary unbuffered unclosed uncompiled uncomputed undefining underfull unexpanded unfinalized unfreed unhex unicode unindexed uninit uninitialize unintuitive unioned unissued unix unixepoch unlink unlinked unlinking unlinks unmap unmapped unmapping unoptimized unparsed unreduced unref unreferenced unrefs unregister unregistering unregisters unresolvable unsynced unterminated untracked untrusted Upfrom uppercasing upr Upsert upsert upto uptr uri userauth userdata Userid usleep utc Utf utf util uuu uuuuu uuzzzz va valgrind vanishingly vappendf vararg varargs varint varints varname vcolumn vdbe vdbeapi vdbe's vdbes vdbesort ve verifications vfs vfslog vfsname vfs's vfstrace vm vmprintf vmstep vsnprintf vt vtab vtabs Vugt vvv vvvv vvvvv vvvvvv vwait vxworks wal wasm wherecode whereexpr wheretrace whitespace Willmann withoutrowid wr wrapup writeable writecrash writefile wsd ww wwww wwzzzzyy wxyz xa xac xb xbf xc xd xdg xe xf xfe xfer xff xfff xfffd xfffe xffffffff x'hhhhhh xinfo xlc xtype xxxx xxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xyz xyzzy yy yyxxxxxx yyy yyyyy yyyyyy zeroblob Zeroblobs zerodata zeropad zipfile zipvfs zplan zulu zzzz zzzzyyyy |
Added tool/spellsift.tcl.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | #!/usr/bin/tclsh set usage { Usage: spellsift.tcl <source_filenames> The named .c and .h source files comment blocks are spell-checked. } if {[llength $argv] == 0} { puts stderr $usage exit 0 } # Want a Tcl version with 3-argument close. package require Tcl 8.6 set ::spellchk "aspell --extra-dicts ./custom.rws list" # Run text through aspell with custom dictionary, return finds. proc misspelled {text} { set spellerr [open "|$::spellchk" r+] puts $spellerr $text flush $spellerr close $spellerr write set huhq [regsub {\s*$} [read $spellerr] {}] close $spellerr read return [split $huhq "\n"] } # Eliminate some common patterns that need not be well spelled. proc decruft {text} { set nopp [regsub -all "\n *#\[^\n\]*\n" $text "\n\n" ] set noticket [regsub -all {Ticket \[?[0-9a-f]+\]?} $nopp "" ] return $noticket } # Sift out common variable spellings not in normal dictionaries. proc varsift {words} { set rv [list] foreach w $words { set n [string length $w] set cr [string range $w 1 end] if {[string tolower $cr] ne $cr} continue lappend rv $w; } return $rv } foreach fname $argv { set ich [open $fname r] set dtext [decruft [read $ich]] close $ich set cbounds [regexp -indices -inline -all {(/\*)|(\*/)} $dtext] set ccb -1 set cblocks [list] foreach {ap cb ce} $cbounds { set cib [lindex $cb 1] set cie [lindex $ce 0] if {$cie != -1} { if {$ccb != -1} { set cce [expr $cie - 1] set destar [string map [list * " "] [string range $dtext $ccb $cce]] lappend cblocks $destar set ccb -1 } else continue } elseif {$cib != -1} { set ccb [expr $cib + 1] } } set oddspells [varsift [misspelled [join $cblocks "\n"]]] if {[llength $oddspells] > 0} { puts "!? Misspellings from $fname:" puts [join [lsort -nocase -unique $oddspells] "\n"] } } |